Reference Manual PDF

Chief Architect 10.
0 Reference Manual
Professional Design & Drafting Software
Chief Architect
6500 N. Mineral Dr.
Coeur dAlene, Idaho 83815
www.chiefarchitect.com
Copyright 2005 by Advanced Relational Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.

No part of this book or the accompanying software may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any
information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from Advanced
Relational Technology, Inc.
Chief Architect is a registered trademark of Advanced Relational Technology, Inc.
The Sentry Spelling-Checker Engine Copyright 1994-2003 Wintertree Software Inc.
The City Blueprint and Country Blueprint fonts are 1992-1999 Payne Loving Trust. All
rights reserved.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
Printed in the United States of America.
Chapter 1: Overview
Introduction .........................................................................................1
Chief Architect Full vs. Base ..............................................................1
The Chief Architect Environment .....................................................2
Chief Architect Terms.........................................................................4
Chief Architect Interface ....................................................................4
Selecting Objects..................................................................................8
Editing Selected Objects ...................................................................10
Drawing a Plan ..................................................................................11
Viewing Your Plan ............................................................................12
Program Updates...............................................................................15
Getting Help .......................................................................................16
Chapter 2: Menus and Toolbar Buttons

Chapter Overview .............................................................................17
Toolbar Customization Dialog .........................................................18
Toolbars and Menus..........................................................................21
Toolbar Configurations.....................................................................21
Restoring Toolbars ............................................................................23
Contents
Contents
Chief Architect Reference Manual
Chief Architects Tools ..................................................................... 23

Vector and Render View Toolbar Buttons...................................... 62
Toggle Buttons ................................................................................... 64
Edit Toolbar Buttons......................................................................... 65
Chapter 3: File Management

Chapter Overview ............................................................................. 71
Compatibility with Previous Versions............................................. 72
Creating a New Plan.......................................................................... 72
Creating a New Layout ..................................................................... 73
Saving a Plan or Layout File ............................................................ 73
Save and Save As ............................................................................... 74
Saving a Plan Thumbnail.................................................................. 74
Auto Archive ...................................................................................... 75
Undo Files........................................................................................... 77
Opening a Plan or Layout File ......................................................... 77
Project Browser ................................................................................. 78
Template Plans .................................................................................. 79
Searching for Plans ........................................................................... 80
Closing Plans and Views ................................................................... 83
Exiting Chief Architect ..................................................................... 83
Exporting a Plan................................................................................ 84
Exporting an Entire Plan.................................................................. 84
Chapter 4: Defaults & Preferences

Chapter Overview ............................................................................. 87
Default Settings.................................................................................. 88
Dynamic Defaults .............................................................................. 90
Plan Defaults ......................................................................................91
Reset to Defaults ................................................................................ 93
ii
Contents
Preferences Dialog .............................................................................94

Appearance Panel..............................................................................94
Colors Panel .......................................................................................96
Font Panel...........................................................................................97
Library Browser Panel......................................................................98
Text and Page Setup Panel ...............................................................99
General Panel...................................................................................100
Directories Panel..............................................................................102
New Plans Panel...............................................................................103
Layers Panel.....................................................................................104
Unit Conversions Panel...................................................................105
Architectural Panel .........................................................................107
CAD Panel........................................................................................108
Line Properties Panel ......................................................................108
Snap Properties Panel .....................................................................108
Special CAD Panel...........................................................................109
Time Tracker Panel.........................................................................109
Material List Panel ..........................................................................110
Report Style Panel ...........................................................................111
Master List Panel.............................................................................112
Categories Panel ..............................................................................113
Render Panel....................................................................................114
Texture Filter Panel ........................................................................117
Reset Options Panel.........................................................................118
Chapter 5: Layers
Chapter Overview ...........................................................................119
Layer Display Options Dialog ........................................................119
Layer Tab .........................................................................................123
Select CAD Layer Dialog ................................................................124
iii
Layer Painter ...................................................................................124

Displaying Objects........................................................................... 125
Current CAD Layer ........................................................................ 126
Layer Sets ......................................................................................... 127
Exporting/Importing Layer Sets .................................................... 127
Color Chooser Dialog...................................................................... 128
Chapter 6: Walls, Railings, & Fencing

Chapter Overview ........................................................................... 129
Default Settings................................................................................ 130
The Wall Tools................................................................................. 131
The Curved Wall Tools ................................................................... 133
Exterior and Interior Walls............................................................ 133
Foundation Walls ............................................................................ 133
Pony Walls........................................................................................ 134
Invisible Walls.................................................................................. 135
Railings ............................................................................................. 136
Deck Railings ................................................................................... 137
Fencing ............................................................................................. 138
Hatch Wall ....................................................................................... 138
Break Wall ....................................................................................... 139
Drawing Walls ................................................................................. 139
Drawing Curved Walls ................................................................... 141
Displaying Walls .............................................................................. 142
Selecting Walls................................................................................. 143
Deleting Walls .................................................................................. 143
Copying Walls.................................................................................. 143
Moving Walls ...................................................................................144
Moving Walls Using Dimensions.................................................... 146
Resizing Walls.................................................................................. 147
iv
Contents
Editing Walls....................................................................................147
Editing Curved Walls......................................................................148
Editing Walls in Elevation Views...................................................151
Connecting Walls.............................................................................152
Aligning Walls..................................................................................153
CAD to Walls ...................................................................................155
Wall Type Definitions......................................................................156
Wall Type Definitions Dialog .........................................................157
Exporting Wall Definitions.............................................................160
Importing Wall Definitions.............................................................161
Curved Walls and Roofs .................................................................161
Special Walls ....................................................................................163
The Wall Specification Dialog ........................................................166
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog ....................................................180
Wall/Railing/Fencing Defaults Setup.............................................181
Chapter 7: Rooms
Room Defaults..................................................................................186
Room Material Defaults..................................................................186
Floor and Ceiling Materials............................................................186
Wall Materials .................................................................................187
Floor & Ceiling Heights ..................................................................187
Room Definition...............................................................................189
Decks.................................................................................................189
Selecting a Room..............................................................................191
Room Specification..........................................................................191
Displaying Room Labels .................................................................193
Special Ceilings ................................................................................196
Room Polylines.................................................................................199
Select Same and Load Same for Rooms ........................................ 201

Room Specification Dialog.............................................................. 201
Floor Defaults Setup........................................................................ 207
Chapter 8: Doors
Door Defaults ...................................................................................209
The Door Tools ................................................................................ 210
Displaying Doors.............................................................................. 211
Selecting Doors ................................................................................ 212
Deleting Doors.................................................................................. 212
Copying Doors ................................................................................. 213
Moving Doors...................................................................................214
Changing Door Swings.................................................................... 215
Resizing Doors ................................................................................. 217
Special Doors....................................................................................218
Door Specification Dialog ............................................................... 219
Door Defaults ...................................................................................229
Chapter 9: Windows
Window Defaults ............................................................................. 231
Window Types ................................................................................ 232
Window Levels................................................................................. 237
Displaying Windows........................................................................ 238
Selecting Windows........................................................................... 238
Deleting Windows............................................................................ 239
Copying Windows............................................................................ 239
Moving Windows............................................................................. 240
Resizing Windows............................................................................ 241
vi
Contents
Centering Windows .........................................................................242

Windows in Curved Walls ..............................................................242
Custom Muntins ..............................................................................243
Editing Bay, Box, and Bow Windows ............................................244
Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs ..................................................247
Window Specification Dialog..........................................................249
Window Default Settings ................................................................265
Chapter 10: Floors

Floor Defaults...................................................................................267
Working With Multiple Floors.......................................................268
Floor Tools .......................................................................................268
Adding Floors...................................................................................269
Exchanging Floors ...........................................................................270
Deleting Floors .................................................................................270
Copying Floors.................................................................................270
The Current Floor ...........................................................................270
Reference Floor................................................................................271
Chapter 11: Foundations

Foundation Defaults ........................................................................273
Building a Foundation.....................................................................274
New Floor Dialog .............................................................................277
Displaying Foundations...................................................................278
Deleting Foundations.......................................................................278
Aligning Stem Walls and Footings.................................................279
Resizing Stem Walls ........................................................................279
The Slab Tools..................................................................................279
vii
Rebuilding Monolithic Slab Foundations...................................... 280

Editing Piers and Grade Beam Foundations ................................ 281
Editing Piers & Pads ....................................................................... 281
Foundations and Room Specification ............................................282
Slab Specification Dialog ................................................................ 283
Chapter 12: Roofs

Roof Defaults....................................................................................286
Automatic Roofs vs. Manual Roofs................................................ 286
The Roof Tools................................................................................. 287
Automatically Generated Roof Styles............................................ 288
Some Common Roof Types ............................................................ 292
Roof Baseline Polylines ................................................................... 293
Manual Roofs ...................................................................................295
Roof Planes....................................................................................... 295
Curved Roof Planes......................................................................... 296
Dormers ............................................................................................ 300
Roof Returns ....................................................................................302
Displaying Roof Planes ................................................................... 302
Deleting Roof Planes ....................................................................... 303
Editing Roof Planes ......................................................................... 304
Editing Curved Roof Planes ........................................................... 308
Editing Auto Dormers..................................................................... 310
Locating Roof Plane Intersections ................................................. 311
Ceiling Planes................................................................................... 312
Gable/Roof Line............................................................................... 313
Skylights ........................................................................................... 317
Gutters .............................................................................................. 318
Gable Over Door/Window.............................................................. 318
viii
Contents
Automatic Rebuild of Floors & Ceilings .......................................319

Build Roof Dialog ............................................................................319
Roof Baseline Specification Dialog.................................................325
Roof Plane Specification Dialog .....................................................326
Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog .................................................330
Dormer Specification Dialog ..........................................................331
Dormer Defaults ..............................................................................334
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog .......................................334
Roof Pitches in Degrees...................................................................336
Chapter 13: Stairs

Stair Tools ........................................................................................338
Stair Direction..................................................................................338
Anatomy of a Staircase ...................................................................339
Displaying Stairs..............................................................................340
Selecting Stairs.................................................................................340
Deleting Stairs..................................................................................342
Resizing Stairs..................................................................................342
Moving Stairs ...................................................................................343
Rotating Stairs .................................................................................344
Copying Stairs..................................................................................344
Stair Landings..................................................................................345
Merging Stair Sections ....................................................................348
Curved Stairs ...................................................................................349
Changing the Radius of Curved Stairs..........................................353
Maintaining Tread Width...............................................................354
Creating Winders ............................................................................356
Flared Stairs.....................................................................................359
Starter Treads.................................................................................362
ix
Other Special Railings & Stairs ..................................................... 364

Creating a Stairwell......................................................................... 365
Creating Rooms Beneath Staircases .............................................. 366
Staircase Specification Dialog ........................................................ 367
Stair Landing Specification Dialog ................................................ 375
Chapter 14: Framing

Framing Defaults ............................................................................. 377
Manual Framing vs. Automatic Framing ..................................... 378
The Framing Tools .......................................................................... 378
Blocking and Bridging .................................................................... 380
Automatic Framing ......................................................................... 381
Framing Defaults/Build Framing Dialog ...................................... 382
Framing Reference Markers .......................................................... 394
Bearing Lines ...................................................................................396
Joist Direction Lines........................................................................ 397
Wall Framing Details ...................................................................... 400
Drawing Wall Framing Members.................................................. 401
Displaying Framing......................................................................... 401
Editing Framing .............................................................................. 402
Regenerating Framing .................................................................... 402
Framing and the Material List....................................................... 403
Framing Specification Dialog ......................................................... 403
Beam Specification Dialog .............................................................. 405
Post Specification Dialog................................................................. 406
Chapter 15: Trusses

Floor and Ceiling Trusses ............................................................... 408
Contents
Roof Trusses.....................................................................................408
Deleting Trusses...............................................................................410
Copying Trusses...............................................................................410
Moving Trusses................................................................................410
Editing Truss Shape in Cross Section View ..................................411
Truss Details.....................................................................................412
Truss Labels .....................................................................................412
Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing...............................................413
Truss Base ........................................................................................413
Hip Trusses.......................................................................................417
Girder Trusses .................................................................................421
Scissors Trusses ...............................................................................422
Truss Base Specification Dialog .....................................................422
Roof Truss Specification Dialog .....................................................424
Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog.......................................427
Chapter 16: Electrical

The Electrical Tools.........................................................................430
Outlets...............................................................................................430
Lights ................................................................................................431
Switches ............................................................................................431
Creating Wiring Schematics...........................................................432
Auto Place Outlets ...........................................................................433
Electrical Library ............................................................................433
Selecting Electrical Objects ............................................................434
Deleting Electrical Objects .............................................................434
Copying Electrical Objects .............................................................434
Moving Electrical Objects ..............................................................435
Rotating Electrical Objects.............................................................435
xi
Adjusting the Height ....................................................................... 436

Other Edit Tools .............................................................................. 436
Displaying Electrical Objects ......................................................... 437
Electrical Service Specification Dialog .......................................... 437
Electrical Defaults ........................................................................... 441
Chapter 17: Trim & Moldings

Corner Boards ................................................................................. 443
Corner Board Specification Dialog................................................ 444
Quoins............................................................................................... 445
Quoin Specification Dialog ............................................................. 446
Molding Polylines ............................................................................ 447
Frieze Moldings ............................................................................... 449
Displaying Molding Polylines ......................................................... 450
Changing Profiles on Existing Moldings ....................................... 451
Molding Polyline Specification Dialog........................................... 451
3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog..................................... 453
Chapter 18: Cabinets

Cabinet Defaults .............................................................................. 458
The Cabinet Tools ........................................................................... 458
Selecting Cabinets............................................................................ 461
Displaying Cabinets......................................................................... 462
Cabinet Labels ................................................................................. 463
Deleting Cabinets............................................................................. 464
Copying Cabinets ............................................................................ 464
Moving Cabinets.............................................................................. 465
Rotating Cabinets ............................................................................ 466
xii
Contents
Resizing Cabinets.............................................................................466
Editing Cabinets ..............................................................................467
Editing the Cabinet Door/Drawer Style ........................................469
Editing Custom Countertops..........................................................469
Attaching Cabinets ..........................................................................471
Special Cabinets...............................................................................472
Cabinet Specification Dialog ..........................................................475
Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog...............................................485
Custom Countertop Specification Dialog......................................486
Cabinet Defaults Setup....................................................................487
Chapter 19: Terrain

Terrain Configuration Button........................................................490
Terrain Tools ...................................................................................490
Terrain Elevation Tools ..................................................................491
Terrain Modifier Tools ...................................................................495
Terrain Feature Tools .....................................................................496
Plant Tools........................................................................................498
Sprinkler Tools ................................................................................498
Hardiness Zones...............................................................................499
The Terrain Library........................................................................499
Displaying Terrain in Floor Plan View .........................................499
Displaying Terrain In 3D Views.....................................................500
Selecting Terrain Data ....................................................................501
Deleting Terrain Data .....................................................................501
Copying Terrain ..............................................................................501
Clearing the Terrain........................................................................501
Editing the Terrain Perimeter........................................................502
Editing Elevation Data ....................................................................502
xiii
Editing Terrain Features ................................................................ 503

Plant Image Specification Dialog ................................................... 503
Plant Chooser Dialog....................................................................... 507
Terrain Specification Dialog........................................................... 511
Elevation Point Specification Dialog.............................................. 515
Elevation Line Specification Dialog............................................... 518
Flat Region Specification Dialog .................................................... 518
Hill / Valley Specification Dialog ................................................... 519
Raised / Lowered Region Specification Dialog ............................. 519
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog ............................................519
Terrain Break Specification Dialog ............................................... 520
Sprinkler Specification Dialog ....................................................... 521
Importing Terrain Data.................................................................. 523
Import Terrain Wizard................................................................... 523
Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data........................................... 527
Converting CAD Lines to Terrain Data........................................ 528
Chapter 20: Roads & Sidewalks

Road and Sidewalk Defaults........................................................... 529
The Different Types of Road Objects ............................................530
Displaying Road Objects................................................................. 533
Selecting Road Objects ................................................................... 533
Deleting Road Objects..................................................................... 533
Editing Road Objects ...................................................................... 533
The Road Specification Dialog ....................................................... 536
Driveway Specification Dialog ....................................................... 538
Road Marking Specification Dialog............................................... 539
Sidewalk Specification Dialog ........................................................ 539
Adding Road Objects to the Library .............................................540
xiv
Contents
Chapter 21: Other Objects

Soffits ................................................................................................541
Special Applications for Soffits ......................................................542
Rules for Calculating Materials on Soffits ....................................543
Soffit Specification Dialog...............................................................544
Polyline Solids ..................................................................................547
Displaying Polyline Solids...............................................................547
The Polyline Solid Specification Dialog.........................................548
Fireplaces..........................................................................................549
The Fireplace Specification Dialog ................................................550
Library Fireplaces ...........................................................................552
Chimneys ..........................................................................................554
Chapter 22: Architectural Blocks

Creating Architectural Blocks........................................................556
Displaying Architectural Blocks ....................................................556
Selecting Architectural Blocks .......................................................557
Exploding Architectural Blocks .....................................................558
Deleting Architectural Blocks ........................................................558
Copying Architectural Blocks ........................................................558
Moving Architectural Blocks..........................................................559
Rotating Architectural Blocks........................................................559
Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and Components..................560
Adding Architectural Blocks to the Library.................................560
Architectural Block Specification Dialog ......................................561
xv
Chapter 23: Libraries

Third Party Libraries ..................................................................... 564
The Library Browser ...................................................................... 564
Adding to the Library ..................................................................... 568
Adding Materials to the Library.................................................... 569
Adding Backdrops to the Library.................................................. 569
Adding a Molding Profile ............................................................... 569
Editing Libraries ............................................................................. 570
The Select Library Object Dialog .................................................. 572
Replace From Library .................................................................... 573
Library Categories .......................................................................... 573
My Libraries ....................................................................................574
Architectural Blocks........................................................................ 574
Backdrops......................................................................................... 575
Cabinet Doors and Drawers ........................................................... 575
Cabinet Modules.............................................................................. 575
CAD Blocks ...................................................................................... 576
Doors................................................................................................. 576
Doorways .......................................................................................... 576
Electrical........................................................................................... 577
Fixtures (Exterior)........................................................................... 577
Interior Fixtures .............................................................................. 578
Exterior Furnishings ....................................................................... 578
Interior Furnishings ........................................................................ 578
Geometric Shapes ............................................................................ 579
Hardware ......................................................................................... 579
Images............................................................................................... 579
Materials........................................................................................... 580
Millwork ........................................................................................... 580
xvi
Contents
Moldings and Profiles......................................................................581

Plants ................................................................................................581
Sprinklers .........................................................................................582
Terrain..............................................................................................583
Windows ...........................................................................................583
Library Search Dialog.....................................................................583
Placing Library Objects..................................................................586
Place Library Object Button ..........................................................588
Displaying Library Objects ............................................................588
Selecting Library Objects ...............................................................589
Deleting Library Objects ................................................................589
Copying Library Objects ................................................................590
Moving Library Objects .................................................................590
Resizing Library Objects ................................................................590
Editing Library Objects..................................................................591
Library Objects and the Material List ..........................................593
Library Object Specification Dialog..............................................594
Chapter 24: Materials

Creating Materials...........................................................................598
Mapping Patterns and Textures.....................................................599
Managing Plan Materials...............................................................600
Applying Materials..........................................................................602
Viewing Materials............................................................................603
Materials Tab...................................................................................603
Editing Materials .............................................................................604
Define Material Dialog ....................................................................605
Material Defaults Dialog.................................................................614
xvii
Chapter 25: Zoom & View Tools

Zoom Tools....................................................................................... 615
Undo Zoom....................................................................................... 616
Fill Window...................................................................................... 616
Panning the Display......................................................................... 616
Window Menu Tools ....................................................................... 617
Cascade............................................................................................. 618
Tiling Views...................................................................................... 619
Arrange Icons .................................................................................. 620
Swapping Views............................................................................... 620
Aerial View....................................................................................... 621
Closing Views ................................................................................... 622
Chapter 26: Vector Views

Vector View Tools ........................................................................... 624
3D Tools............................................................................................ 625
Creating Camera Views .................................................................. 626
Editing a Camera in 3D Views ....................................................... 627
Editing a Camera in Floor Plan View ........................................... 629
Creating Overviews ......................................................................... 629
Displaying Overviews...................................................................... 631
Displaying 3D Views........................................................................ 632
Zooming in Vector Views................................................................ 633
Speeding up 3D View Generation .................................................. 633
Editing Objects in 3D Views........................................................... 634
Delete 3D Surface ............................................................................ 635
Saving 3D Views .............................................................................. 635
xviii
Contents
Walkthroughs ..................................................................................636
Creating Cross Section/Elevation Views .......................................637
Editing Cross Section/Elevation Views..........................................638
Saving Cross Section/Elevation Cameras......................................639
Displaying Cross Section/Elevation Views ....................................640
Camera Specification Dialog ..........................................................641
Cross Section/Elevation Camera Specification.............................642
Camera Defaults ..............................................................................643
3D Settings........................................................................................645
Chapter 27: Render Views

OpenGL and Hardware ..................................................................650
Rendering Tools...............................................................................650
Render View Tools ..........................................................................652
Glass House View ............................................................................653
Low Detail ........................................................................................653
Preview vs. Final Render View.......................................................654
Using the Contextual Menu ............................................................654
Camera Movement ..........................................................................655
Field of View ....................................................................................656
Materials In Render Views .............................................................656
Images & Backdrops .......................................................................657
Plan Export ......................................................................................658
Editing Objects in Render Views ...................................................658
Saving a Render View Picture........................................................658
Printing a Render View...................................................................658
Rendering Tips and Tricks .............................................................659
Light Sources ...................................................................................660
Light Types.......................................................................................661
xix
Defining Light Types....................................................................... 665

Adjusting Lights .............................................................................. 666
Sun Angle Specification Dialog ...................................................... 666
Light Specification Dialog............................................................... 669
Cross Section Slider Dialog ............................................................ 672
Chapter 28: Raytracing

Creating a Raytrace View............................................................... 673
The Raytrace Window .................................................................... 676
Creating Materials for Raytracing ................................................ 676
Tips and Tricks................................................................................ 678
POV-Ray .......................................................................................... 679
Chapter 29: Dimensions

Compatibility With Previous Versions.......................................... 681
Dimension Defaults.......................................................................... 682
The Dimension Tools....................................................................... 682
Displaying Dimension Lines ........................................................... 686
Selecting Dimension Lines .............................................................. 686
Deleting Dimension Lines ............................................................... 686
Editing Dimension Lines................................................................. 687
Editing Extension Lines .................................................................. 688
Moving Objects Using Dimensions ................................................ 690
The Dimension Line Specification Dialog ..................................... 692
The Dimension Defaults Dialog...................................................... 695
xx
Contents
Chapter 30: Text

Text Defaults ....................................................................................703
The Text Tools .................................................................................704
Fonts..................................................................................................704
Adding Text......................................................................................704
Text Arrows .....................................................................................705
Displaying Text ................................................................................706
Selecting Text ...................................................................................706
Editing Text......................................................................................707
Text Macros .....................................................................................709
Special Text Characters ..................................................................711
Text Specification Dialog ................................................................711
Text Defaults ....................................................................................714
Arrow Defaults.................................................................................715
Chapter 31: Callouts & Markers

Callout/Marker Defaults.................................................................717
Callouts.............................................................................................718
Selecting Callouts.............................................................................718
Editing Callouts ...............................................................................718
Callout Specification Dialog ...........................................................719
Markers ............................................................................................722
Selecting Markers............................................................................722
Editing Markers...............................................................................722
Marker Specification Dialog...........................................................723
xxi
Chapter 32: CAD Objects

The CAD Drawing Tools ................................................................ 726
Line Tools ......................................................................................... 727
Line Specification Dialog ................................................................ 731
Arc Tools .......................................................................................... 736
Arc Specification Dialog ................................................................. 738
Polylines............................................................................................ 741
Polyline Specification Dialog .......................................................... 741
Splines............................................................................................... 744
Box Tools .......................................................................................... 745
CAD Box Specification Dialog........................................................ 747
Circle Tools ...................................................................................... 748
CAD Circle/Oval Specification Dialog .......................................... 748
Point Tools........................................................................................ 749
Displaying CAD Objects ................................................................. 752
CAD Blocks ...................................................................................... 753
CAD Block Specification Dialog .................................................... 755
Creating a Library of CAD Blocks ................................................ 757
Dimensions ....................................................................................... 758
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog................................................... 759
CAD Details...................................................................................... 759
Plot Plans and Plan Footprints....................................................... 760
Chapter 33: CAD Editing Tools

The CAD Editing Tools................................................................... 764
Selecting CAD Objects .................................................................... 765
Editing Lines ....................................................................................766
xxii
Contents
Editing Arcs .....................................................................................766

Editing Splines .................................................................................768
Editing Polylines ..............................................................................771
Editing Boxes ...................................................................................773
Editing Circles and Ovals ...............................................................774
Preferences - CAD Panel.................................................................776
Preferences - Line Properties Panel...............................................778
Preferences - Snap Properties Panel..............................................780
Object Snapping ..............................................................................783
Angle Snapping................................................................................784
Grid Snapping..................................................................................785
Edit Polyline Parts...........................................................................786
Edit Types.........................................................................................786
Blocking CAD Objects ....................................................................789
Moving CAD Objects ......................................................................789
Case Study: Aligning Text ..............................................................791
Copying CAD Objects.....................................................................792
Transform/Replicate Object...........................................................793
Reflect About Line...........................................................................795
Delete ................................................................................................795
Reverse Direction.............................................................................796
Change Line/Arc..............................................................................796
Make Parallel/Perpendicular .........................................................796
Break Line........................................................................................798
Trim and Extend..............................................................................799
Fillet and Chamfer ..........................................................................800
Polyline Union, Intersection, and Subtract ...................................802
Converting CAD Objects ................................................................804
xxiii
Chapter 34: Advanced Design & Editing

Time Tracker ...................................................................................808
Time Log Dialog .............................................................................. 808
House Wizard .................................................................................. 810
Spell Check....................................................................................... 811
Plan Check ....................................................................................... 813
IRC Checklist................................................................................... 814
Select Same / Load Same ................................................................ 815
Edit Area Tools................................................................................ 816
Point-to-Point Move with Edit Area .............................................. 819
Reflect About Line with Edit Area ................................................ 820
Copy/Paste with Edit Area ............................................................. 820
Delete Objects .................................................................................. 821
Rotate View ...................................................................................... 822
Reverse Plan..................................................................................... 823
Chapter 35: Pictures, Images, & Movies

Picture Files vs. Image Objects ...................................................... 826
Importing Picture Files ................................................................... 826
Editing Picture Files ........................................................................ 827
Exporting Picture Files ................................................................... 828
Picture File Box Specification Dialog ............................................ 829
Creating Images............................................................................... 831
Placing Images ................................................................................. 832
Viewing Images................................................................................ 832
Copying Images ............................................................................... 833
Moving Images................................................................................. 833
xxiv
Contents
Resizing an Image............................................................................833
Adding Images to the Library ........................................................834
Image Specification Dialog .............................................................834
Windows Metafiles ..........................................................................837
Walkthroughs ..................................................................................838
VRML...............................................................................................840
Chapter 36: DXF/DWG

Compatibility ...................................................................................843
DXF vs. DWG ..................................................................................844
CAD to Walls ...................................................................................844
Importing 2D DXF/DWG Files ......................................................844
Additional 2D Import Information................................................851
Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files.......................................................852
Additional 2D Export Information ................................................855
Exporting a 3D DXF/DWG Model.................................................856
Chapter 37: Create Symbol Wizard

Overview...........................................................................................859
Importing 3D Data ..........................................................................860
Opening the Create Symbol Wizard..............................................861
Selecting the Symbol Category.......................................................861
Loading the 3D File .........................................................................862
2D Block ...........................................................................................866
Symbol Options................................................................................868
Sizing.................................................................................................871
Plant Information ............................................................................874
Plant Attributes ...............................................................................875
Plant Description .............................................................................876
xxv
Materials........................................................................................... 877
Openings........................................................................................... 878
Floor Plan View ............................................................................... 879
Closing the Create Symbol Wizard ............................................... 880
Symbol Specification Dialog ........................................................... 880
Chapter 38: Printing & Plotting

Introduction to Printing.................................................................. 884
Printers and Plotters ....................................................................... 885
The Printing Tools........................................................................... 886
Display Options and Printing......................................................... 887
Line Weights .................................................................................... 888
Printing Text and Dimensions........................................................ 891
Printing to Scale............................................................................... 892
Printing Directly from a View ........................................................ 893
Printing from Layout ...................................................................... 894
Printing Across Multiple Pages...................................................... 894
Alternate Printing Methods............................................................ 894
Creating Custom Sheet Sizes.......................................................... 896
Troubleshooting Printing Problems .............................................. 897
Page Setup Dialog............................................................................ 898
Print Dialog ...................................................................................... 899
Print Image Dialog .......................................................................... 902
Chapter 39: Layout Files

The Layout Tools............................................................................. 904
Preparing for Layout ...................................................................... 904
Creating a Layout File .................................................................... 905
xxvi
Contents
The Current Page ............................................................................905

Layout Page Zero ............................................................................906
CAD and Text in Layout.................................................................908
Images in Layout .............................................................................908
Sending Views to Layout.................................................................908
Keeping Layout Views Current .....................................................912
Editing Layout Views ......................................................................914
Rescaling Views ...............................................................................915
Displaying Layout Views ................................................................915
Editing Layout Lines.......................................................................916
Edit Layout Lines Dialog ................................................................917
Managing Layout Links..................................................................919
Printing Layout Files.......................................................................921
Exporting Layout Files....................................................................921
Layout Box Specification Dialog ....................................................922
Layout Defaults................................................................................922
Chapter 40: Model Maker

Printing the Model...........................................................................923
Assembling the Model .....................................................................925
Chapter 41: Schedules

Schedule Defaults.............................................................................927
Creating Schedules ..........................................................................928
Schedule Specification Dialog.........................................................928
Converting Schedules to Text.........................................................935
A Window Schedule Example ........................................................935
xxvii
Chapter 42: Materials Lists

Creating an Accurate Materials List .............................................938
Working With the Materials List................................................... 939
Calculate From All Floors .............................................................. 939
Calculate From Room ..................................................................... 940
Calculate From Area....................................................................... 940
Materials Polyline............................................................................ 941
The Master List ............................................................................... 941
Editing Columns .............................................................................. 944
Editing Materials Lists.................................................................... 946
Displaying Objects in the Materials List....................................... 946
The Components Dialog.................................................................. 948
Managing Materials Lists ............................................................... 950
Manufacturers ................................................................................. 950
Exporting the Material List............................................................ 950
Appendix A: Technical Support Services ................. 953

Reference and Training Resources ................................................ 953
Before Contacting Technical Support ........................................... 954
If You Need to Contact Technical Support................................... 956
Appendix B: Whats New in Version 10.0.................. 959

Upgrading Customers - What You Need To Know...................... 959
New and Improved Features, by Chapter..................................... 964
xxviii
Chapter 1:
Overview
Overview
Introduction
Note: This chapter is similar to the Overview
chapter in the Getting Started Guide. If you
have already read the Getting Started Guide,
you may want to proceed to the next chapter.
Chief Architect is designed to allow builders,

architects and other professionals in the
building and interior design trades to design
effectively and produce plans rapidly. With
Chief Architect, the input and correction of
design information is fast and simple.
Chief Architect lets you design and lay out
buildings in floor plan view while the
program simultaneously creates the 3D
model. You can tile a floor plan view next to

a 3D view and watch one update
automatically as you draw in the other.
Chapter Contents
The Chief Architect Environment

Chief Architect Terms
Chief Architect Interface
Selecting Objects
Editing Selected Objects
Drawing a Plan
Viewing Your Plan
Program Updates
Getting Help
Chief Architect Full vs. Base

Not all features documented in this manual
are available.in the Base version of Chief
Architect. For a list of features that are not
available in the Base Version see
www.chiefarchitect.com.

Flexible and easy to use, Chief Architect
adapts to your needs. The simple interface
and extensive custom options allow you to
tailor the tools to suit your workflow. You
can add as much or as little detail as you like.
Chief Architect comes with all of the tools
required to produce complete working
drawings.
Object-Based Design
Working drawings can be created efficiently
with Chief Architects object-based design
technology. Instead of working with the
many lines that define objects such as walls,
doors, windows appliances and furniture,
simply select the object itself. Specification
dialogs allow you to define an objects
dimensions, placement, style, materials, and
other design elements. You can even select
and edit an object in 3D views for instant
results.
Walls are usually the first things drawn in
Chief Architect. Walls can be simple two line
graphical representations; or they can be
drawn to show an entire assembly. Position
and thickness of walls can both be defined.
Rooms are defined by walls. Each room
must have one and only one complete,
unbroken boundary that defines it. Rooms
can be created from a combination of walls,
invisible walls, railings, and invisible
railings. By defining the room type, common
characteristics associated with that type of
room will be applied. For example, a room
defined as a "deck" will not produce a roof
when roofs are automatically generated.
New Floors can be created automatically

based on the layout of others. Chief Architect
creates a file for each floor of the model. The
first floor is the most important because it
contains information that will help define the
rest of the model. The program will
automatically build the floors and ceilings
based on the layout of walls.
Roof Planes can be easily edited in floor
plan view and assigned 3D information such
as pitch, thickness, and height.
Chief Architect has the capability to
automatically model a roof based on userdefined guidelines. Roof planes can also be
created manually and edited individually.
The Foundation is the only floor that can be
placed under the first floor. The program will
automatically create a Foundation Plan based
on the footprint of the first floor and the
specified construction methods.
Doors, windows, fireplaces and bay windows
are considered to be Openings. When an
opening is placed in a wall, a space for it is
created automatically; when the opening is
removed, this space is automatically filled in.
Cabinets, Soffits, Partitions, and Shelves
are basic building blocks used to design
kitchens, bathrooms, and closets. These
objects are versatile and can be used to create
an unlimited number of design details
throughout your model.
Many other Objects required to model a
complete house are available as 3D objects
or symbols. Some must be placed in a wall,
while others may be placed anywhere in the
Framing and other structural objects can be

created automatically or manually. Once
built, framing can be viewed or modified to
show the construction details of a model.
Images are pictures of real world objects that
can be used to enhance the model in 3D
views. They are stored in the Images library.
Many are shipped with the program, but you
can also create your own.
will not appear in 3D views as part of the

model. Some 3D objects can be created from
CAD objects.
Easy Access to Tools

Chief Architect has many features that are
accessible in a variety of ways.
Menus provide access to most tools.
Toolbar buttons offer convenience, familiarity, and the ability to customize the
interface.
Materials can be defined and assigned to

objects to graphically represent real world
materials in 3D views. Material quantities
can be calculated in the Material List.
Many tools are also available as keyboard

shortcuts.
Contextual menus are available with a

right-click of the mouse.
Materials are assigned a Type, such as Stone,

which is often associated with a pattern. The
Type defines how the material will be
calculated in the Material List. Both material
pattern and color display in 3D views.
The Status Bar at the bottom of the screen

offers tool descriptions and other information relevant to the current task.
Materials can be assigned a Texture which

defines how the material will appear in a
render view. The texture is represented by a
2D bitmap image, which can make a flat
surface appear to have 3D qualities.
Site Plans and Terrain Modeling - In
addition to creating accurate 3D models of
buildings, Chief Architect has the ability to
create a 3D model of the building site.
Elevation data can be entered and used to
model the changes in elevation of the
finished grade. The Terrain Perimeter can be
used as the terrain boundary and to represent
property lines in 2D.
CAD objects such as lines, arcs, polylines,
text, and dimensions can be used to add
details or annotation to a plan or working
drawing. CAD objects are 2D objects and
Customizable Toolbars
Customizable toolbars are among the most
popular features of Chief Architect. Since the
work being done determines the tools
needed, Chief Architect allows you to tailor
toolbars to suit your own needs; preserve
your customizations between sessions; and
even store different toolbar button
configurations for future use.
Default and
Preference Settings
Chief Architects Defaults allow you to
tailor the objects used in the program to
match the objects they represent in real life.
You can change your default windows or
doors to match those available from your
supplier before placing them in your plan.
Overview
model. All 3D objects may be copied, moved

and resized to represent real world objects.
The default settings also allow you to make

changes to existing objects in your plan.
Make changes to the default settings and
retrofit your new specifications to all default
windows in your plan. Manual overrides
accomodate exceptions to the rule.
Preference settings let you change the
program behavior to suit your workflow.
Turn on or off certain display elements.
Choose your own background and floor

plan view colors.
Change the default appearance of text.
Set autosave frequency, maximum number of undos, and file protection.
Set default directories for various files.
Complete CAD settings control the

behavior of CAD tools.
Setup the material list categories, subcategories, and report style, as well as
manufacturer and supplier information.
Set rendering specifications to maximize

efficiency and presentation quality.
Chief Architect Terms

Mode refers to the two main interfaces of
Chief Architect: Architectural and CAD
modes.
In Architectural mode you can create, place
and edit 3D objects that are used to create the
3D model.
CAD mode is similar to many other 2D
drafting programs. In CAD mode, you can
draw 2D objects that add detail to views of
the model. Some CAD objects can be
converted to 3D objects.
Layers - All objects are assigned to layers
which can be included or excluded in floor
plan view, 3D views, and Materials Lists.
Layers are controlled in the Layer Display

Options dialog.
Views - Chief Architect is a 3D modeling
program that can generate views from all
angles and at varying degrees of reality.
Typically the drawing and editing of the
model is done in floor plan view; but objects
can be placed and edited in 3D views as well.
Textures are bitmap images which are
applied to surfaces. In a render view they
look like real materials. Some texture
bitmaps are included in the program to help
you become familiar with rendering
materials.

Most design and editing is done in floor plan
view. As work is being done in floor plan
view the program is creating a 3D model that
can be viewed from any angle.
Interior and exterior elevations, cross

sections, vector views and render views can
be automatically generated. Most views
allow full editing. Changes made in one view
are automatically updated in all others.
Using the Mouse

Most objects, such as doors and cabinets, are
created by clicking the left mouse button. A
few objects, such as walls, stairs and
dimension lines, are created by dragging the
pointer from one end of the object to the
other.
Left button refers to the left mouse
button, which is the primary mouse
button used in Chief Architect. If
unspecified, the manual refers to the left
mouse button.
Note: This assumes that the mouse is programmed for a right-handed person. If you
are left-handed, and have re-programmed
your mouse, you will need to reverse the
instructions for left and right buttons in this
manual.
Right button refers to the right

mouse button. In Chief Architect it
is used as a single-click select.
Right-clicking allows you to select any
object from within any drawing mode. For
example, if the Exterior Wall
tool is
active, the left mouse button allows you to
select only walls. The right mouse button
allows you to select another object type such
as a cabinet or stairs.
The right mouse button can also be used to
open a context sensitive menu which
contains additional editing commands. See
Edit Toolbar Buttons on page 65.
Middle button: Chief Architect
does not utilize the middle mouse
button on a three-button mouse. It
can be programmed to work as a doubleclick if you desire.
Wheel Mouse: The scroll feature of

a wheel mouse enables you to zoom
in and out in most views, centered
on the location of your pointer. Depending
on the configuration of your mouse, it may
be necessary to press the Shift key, or the Ctrl
while turning the mouse wheel.
Drag - means to hold down the left mouse
button, move the mouse and then release the
mouse button when the move is complete.
Move to - means to move the pointer with
the mouse to a certain place on the plan.
Click - means to press and release the
specified mouse button.
Click on - means to move the pointer to an
object and then click while the pointer is over
the object.
Double-click - means to quickly click the
left mouse button twice. The double-click
speed is programmed in Windows.
Toolbars
Toolbars and toolbar buttons provide the
fastest, easiest way to access most program
features. You can move the toolbars or
customize them by adding or removing
buttons or by creating your own toolbars
from scratch.
Most buttons in the toolbars display
regardless of the active mode or view. CAD
mode and architectural mode each have
mode-specific toolbars and toolbar buttons.
When you pass the pointer over a toolbar
button or above a pull down menu item, a
brief help message appears in the status bar.
Whenever you see one of these messages,
Overview
you can press the F1 key to get more

information about that item.
Parent and Child Tools

Parent toolbar buttons can be identified by
the blue triangle in their bottom right hand
corner. When selected, parent toolbar buttons
display child tools. For example, click the
Wall Tools
parent button to display its
child buttons to the right.
The Edit Toolbar

When an object is selected, edit toolbar
buttons related to the selected object display
on the edit toolbar. These buttons are the
same as the optoins on the contextual menu.
The current floor.
The current layout page
The current CAD layer.
The current CAD coordinates of the

pointer.
Menus
Chief Architect utilizes a standard Windows
menu format. The menus appear below the
title bar in the program window. In this
reference manual, menu paths will be written
as Build> Window> Box Window.
The Window submenu of the Build menu is
shown below.
Status Bar
The status bar at the bottom of the main
window displays information relative to the
current state of the program.
The information that displays depends on a

variety of current conditions including what
type of view is active, what tool is active,
what kind of object is currently selected, and
where the pointer is currently positioned.
The information that displays may include:
If a menu item has a check

to its left, it is active.
displayed
Menu items with ellipsis ... after their

name open a dialog when selected.
A brief description of the toolbar button

or menu item which is currently highlighted by the mouse.
Menu items with an arrowhead after

their name have sub-menu that will open
when selected.
A description of the selected object.
The layer containing the selected object.
Some menu items have shortcut keys

listed next to them. These can be typed
on the keyboard to activate the specified

command, often saving valuable time.
For example, Ctrl S = Save.
To enter feet you must include the ( ' )

marker otherwise the program assumes
inches.
Contextual menus can be displayed by rightclicking on a selected object. The options

that appear will vary depending on object
selected.
In most cases, the program allows precision to 1/16th of an inch. Fractional

inches with denominators 2, 4, 8 and 16
are allowed.
The program will usually convert decimals to fractions.
Angles may be entered as bearings, decimal degrees, or degrees, minutes, and

seconds.
Dialogs
Dialogs are used to enter sizes and other
information to move and edit objects within
the program. Many dialogs have a preview to
show you how the changes made affect the
selected object. To see the picture of the
object update in the dialog as numbers are
changed, click in a different box or press
the Tab key on the keyboard.
Every Chief Architect object has its own
unique specification dialog which allows for
data related to the object to be detailed. This
dialog is referred to as the objects
Specification dialog and can be accessed by
selecting the object and clicking the Open
Object
edit button. Some objects will
open their Specification dialog if you doubleclick on them in Select Objects
mode
Pressing the Enter key when a dialog is

opened is the same as clicking OK. The
dialog will close and the object will be
updated with the new information.
Entering Dimensions
When using Imperial units, lengths and
distances are entered as inches or feet and
inches, in either decimal or fractional form.
When using Metric units, millimeters are
used for all metric distances.
Dynamic Defaults
Dynamic defaults are values that can be set
or changed globally throughout a model. In a
dialog, dynamic default values are followed
by a "(D)", indicating that the value can be
changed in the default setup for that type of
object and all objects in the model of the
same type will be updated automatically.
Any object for which one of these values has
been previously edited it will not be updated
when the default value is changed.
To edit a dynamic default, the "(D)" must be
deleted or the default value will be reapplied
automatically. To reset a value to the
dynamic default, or to see if a value is
dynamic, type a "d" in an entry box. If a new
value appears with the "(D)" following it,
then the value is dynamic. If the box will not
accept a "d" as an entry, the value does not
have a dynamic default.
For values that do not have dynamic defaults,
you can group select related objects and
change the settings for all selected objects in
the specification dialog.
Overview
Shortcut Keys
Many commands can be initiated directly
from the keyboard. A standard way of
opening menus and menu items is using the
Alt + access key. Press Alt on your keyboard
and press one of the access keys that become
underlined letter in the menu names.
Some of the function keys located across the
top of the keyboard can be used to access
Chief Architect commands. For more
information about the available menu items,
toolbar buttons, and shortcut keys, see
Menus and Toolbar Buttons on page 17.
Windows
Window has two meanings in Chief
Architect. The first is a window object that is
placed into a wall. The second type of
windows are the views within a software
program. Chief Architect can create many
kinds of views, all of which are displayed

within their own window.
Up to ten windows showing different views
of the same or different models can be in the
main window at any given time. When
multiple windows are open, the active
window is the one with the blue title bar.
Click anywhere within a window to activate
it. You can also click the Window menu and
select a window from the bottom of the
submenu to make it active.
Any combination of windows can display at
one time. Multiple windows can display
different parts of the same plan or unrelated
plans. Only one floor plan for a particular
model can be open, however.
Windows can be placed on top of one another
or tiled so that all are visible. When a plan is
changed in any window, all windows related
to that plan are updated to reflect the change.
Selecting Objects
"Select" refers to selecting an object for
editing. Selecting an object is the first step in
most edit operations in Chief Architect.
CAD Objects vs.

Architectural Objects
There are essentially two types of objects in
Chief Architect. CAD objects such as lines,
arcs, splines, circles, etc. are 2D objects that
do not display in 3D views. These 2D CAD
objects can only be selected when CAD
mode
is on. See The CAD Drawing
Tools on page 726.
Architectural objects such as walls, cabinets,

doors, windows, and stairs display in 2D and
3D and can only be selected when CAD
mode
is off.
There are a few CAD-based objects that

display in 2D and 3D such as roof planes,
slabs, and custom countertops that can be
selected in CAD mode.
Select Objects
Any architectural object can be
selected in floor plan view using the
Select Objects
tool when CAD mode
Selecting Objects
Any CAD object can be selected in a floor

plan view, layout, cross section/elevation, or
CAD detail, using the Select Objects
tool when CAD mode
is on.
You can also select objects using the right

mouse button in any mode to select an object
or open a context sensitive menu.
Marquee Select
Multiple objects can be selected by holding
down the Shift key when the Select Objects
tool is active and dragging a marquee
around the objects to be selected. Once an
object has been selected, the marquee-select
method can no longer be used.
Depending on the object, the marquee must
cross at least one half of the object for it to be
selected; some objects will be selected if they
are touched by the marquee at all. This
method will work for free-standing objects
only: it cannot be used to select walls,
windows or doors.
Selecting Similar Objects

If an object toolbar button is active, you can
only select objects of that type using the left
mouse button. For example, if the Exterior
Wall
tool is active, you can only select
walls using the left mouse button. This can
be useful for selecting an object when many
objects of a different type occupy the same
space in floor plan view.
In most cases the marquee-select method can
also be used to group-select similar object
types. For example, select the Base Cabinet

child button, hold down the Shift key,
drag a marquee, release the mouse button,
and only cabinet objects within the marquee
will be selected.
You can always select any object using the
right mouse button, regardless of which tool
is active.
When using the marquee-select method
while the Select Objects
tool is active,
CAD objects and architectural objects
included in the marquee will be selected. To
remove items from the selection set, click on
the items one at a time while the Shift key is
pressed.
Group Select
You can select a group of objects by adding
them to the selection set one-by-one. This
method is required to select multiple walls or
openings but can be used for free-standing
objects as well.
Select an object, hold down the Shift key, and
click on additional objects to select them.
Only fixed objects of a similar type, such as
walls, doors or windows, can be selected
using this method. With free standing
objects, more than one type can be selected
using this method, but the ability to edit the
group-selected items will be limited to
characteristics they all have in common.
Select Next Object

If there is more than one object in a
particular space, it may be difficult to
select the desired object. When a
neighboring object is selected, click the
Overview
is off. Most objects can be selected in 3D

views as well.
Select Next Object

edit button until the
desired object is selected. Pressing the Tab
key on the keyboard functions similarly. This
function cannot be applied to groups of
selected objects.
Note: A selected object will remain selected

until another object is selected or the current
mode is changed.
Editing Selected Objects

When an object is selected, many edit
options are available. Edit handles allow the
object to be resized, relocated, or rotated
using the mouse. Most objects have a
specification dialog which allows you to edit
it in ways that are specific to that type of
object. Edit buttons display on the Edit
toolbar based on the type of object that is
currently selected.
Most moving constraints can be overridden by holding down the

grabbing the move handle.
Using the Mouse

When an object is selected, the pointer will
change as you place it over the various edit
handles to indicate what how that handle can
be used.
Place the pointer over a side handle to

reveal a two-headed arrow which allows
you to resize the object.
Place the pointer over the triangular handle to reveal a circular arrow which
allows you to rotate the object.
Ctrl
key while
Using the Specification Dialog

The Open Object edit button will
appear on the Edit toolbar when an
object is selected. Click this button to open
the objects specification dialog. You can
also double-click on an object using the
Select Objects
tool to open its
specification dialog.
10
Place the pointer over the center handle

to reveal a four-headed arrow which
allows you to relocate the object.
Movement is restricted to horizontal or
vertical unless the Ctrl key is held.
If multiple objects of a single type are

selected, clicking the Open Object
edit button will normally access the specification dialog for that type of object.
If different types of objects are selected,

the Open Object
does not appear.
edit button usually
Drawing a Plan
If the group-selected objects have data in

common, the Open Object
edit button may appear, allowing you to open the
group of objects for specification. Only
some of the data may be editable.
location of objects in 3D views, as well as

the materials applied to their surfaces. All
changes made in 3D will be reflected in the
objects specification dialogs, which are also
accessible from 3D views.
Overview
Using Edit Buttons

When an object has been selected, certain
edit buttons will appear on the Edit toolbar.
The Edit toolbar buttons that appear depend
on the type of object selected; the current
view; and how the object was selected. Edit
toolbars are defined by the program and are
not customizable by the user. See Edit
Toolbar Buttons on page 65.
In 3D Views
Most objects can be selected and edited in
vector views and render views as well.
Changes can be made to the size, shape, and
Drawing a Plan
iWhen you draw a plan in Chief Architect,
you are not just drawing lines: you are
placing 3D objects that represent building
components.
The program comes with default settings so
that you can immediately start drawing
plans. It is recommended that you review
these default settings and customize them to
match your drawing and building methods.
See Defaults & Preferences on page 87.
The following is a brief overview of the
recommended order for creating plans:
1.
Go through each of the Edit> Default

Settings menu items and define the parts
that will make up your building.
2.
Double-click the Roof Tools

parent
button tool to open the Build Roof dialog and define the roof parameters. See
Build Roof Dialog on page 319.
3.
Select Build> Wall> Define Wall

Types...
to define the various wall
types that will be used in your building.
See Wall Type Definitions on page
156.
Once the defaults have been defined, begin

placing objects in floor plan view.
11
4.
Draw exterior walls first in a clockwise

direction. This keeps exterior surfaces to
the outside of the building. See Drawing Walls on page 139.
5.
Generate automatic exterior dimensions

and adjust the walls. See Moving Walls
Using Dimensions on page 146.
6.
Draw interior walls next. Use the dimension tools to adjust the walls and correctly size your rooms.
7.
Place doorways and windows in walls.
8.
Define rooms and platform heights

before building new floors. See Room
Specification Dialog on page 201.
9.
Build upper floors based on a blank plan

or the footprint of the floor below. See
Adding Floors on page 269.
10. Use the Foundation Defaults dialog

to build a foundation for your model.
See Building a Foundation on page
274.
11. Create a roof by generating one automatically or by using the manual roof
drawing tools. When the roof plan is

correct, protect it from being accidentally rebuilt by checking Lock Roof
Planes in the Build Roof dialog, and
by locking the Roof Planes layer in the
Layer Display Options dialog. See
Layer Display Options Dialog on page
119.
12. Place cabinet modules; fixtures; appliances; and electrical objects.
When your design has been fine-tuned, you
can use the Framing tools to design the
structure of the building and create the
details needed for working drawings.
13. Open the Build Framing dialog and
check the appropriate boxes to build
framing. See Framing Defaults/Build
Framing Dialog on page 382.
14. Create details and views of your model,
send them to a layout file.
15. Organize the views and details in the
layout file and print it. See Printing &
Plotting on page 883.
Viewing Your Plan

Chief Architect allows you to see your model
in a variety of views.
Floor plan view is a 2D birds-eye view of
the model. It is the view most commonly
used for drawing and editing. Only one floor
can be edited at a time, but other floors can
be displayed for reference.
Floor Plan View
12
Viewing Your Plan
Vector views are 3D views of the

model. Surfaces in vector views
display patterns and colors instead of
materials. This allows for quick view
generation. For more information about all of
the vector view tools, see Vector View
Tools on page 624.
A Vector Full Camera view is a
view of either the interior or exterior of the model. The cameras position and
angle must be defined using the mouse. A
Vector Floor Camera view is similar to a
vector full camera view but displays only the
current floor.
A Vector Floor Overview is similar to

the full overview, but only includes the
current floor. Ceilings are omitted so you can
see the interior from above.
Overview
Vector Views
Vector Floor Overview
A Vector Framing Overview creates

an overview of the 3D model that displays framing. Framing must be built to display.
Vector Full Camera View
A Vector Full Overview creates a

view of the entire 3D model when the
button is clicked. The initial position and
angle of the view are predefined.
Vector Framing Overview
A Cross Section/Elevation view is an

accurate 2D view of a section cut
through the entire model, from foundation to
ridge. This tool can create exterior and interior elevation views.
Vector Full Overview
13
than vector views. Surfaces in render views

display materials and textures. Backdrops,
light sources, and shadows can also be
included.
The render camera and render overview tools
function like the corresponding vector tools.
Cross Section/Elevation
A Backclipped Cross Section view

includes only the objects between the
starting point and stopping point of the cross
section line. It displays the entire model,
from foundation to ridge.
Render Full Camera View
Backclipped Cross Section
A Wall Elevation view displays an

elevation of the current floor. This tool
can be used to create exterior and interior
wall elevations.
Render Full Overview
Wall Elevation
Render Views
Render views are 3D views of the
model that are more photo realistic
14
Render Floor Overview
Program Updates
Overview
A Raytrace view can be created from

any render view. Raytrace technology
calculates light sources and how they effect
the appearance of surfaces in a model.
Raytrace views are the most photo-realistic.
They also take longer to generate. See
Raytracing on page 673.
Render Framing Overview
A Final View can be created from any

render view. A final view smoothes the
surfaces where edges meet.
Raytrace View
Final View
A Glass House Render Camera view

makes all surfaces semi-transparent, so
that the entire model can be seen.
Views of all types can be sent to a layout file

and organized into professional working
drawings that can be printed, plotted, or
saved to a file that can be printed elsewhere.
See Layout Files on page 903.
Glass House View
Program Updates
From time to time, Chief Architect releases
program updates that are made available for
download, free of charge, from the Chief
Architect web site.
Select Help> Download Program

Updates... to launch your default Web
browser to the Program Updates section of
the Chief Architect Web site.
15
Getting Help
and newer you can view the documentation right on your computer. All Cross
References and page numbers can be
clicked to jump directly to that page.
Select Help> View Reference Manual,
or Help> View Getting Started Guide
to view the electronic documentation.
There are many forms of help available in

Chief Architect, including: Tool Tips; the
Status Bar; online Help; product
documentation in both printed and electronic
format; and Chief Architects official Web
site, www.chiefarchitect.com.
Any time you see a Tool Tip in the Status

Bar, you can press the F1 function key to
open the online help for more information about that topic.
Press the Help button in any of the dialogs to open the online help for more
information about that dialog.
When an object is selected, edit handles

display. Place the pointer over these edit
handles and press the F1 function key to
open the online help for more information about editing that object.
Online Help is also available through the

Help menu. Select Help> Index to open
Online Help and explore the Table of
Contents or search for key words.
16
When you move the pointer above any

toolbar button or menu item, a Tool Tip
will appear in the Status Bar at the bottom of Chief Architects main window.
This offers a brief description of the tool
and how to use it.
The Reference Manual and the Getting

Started Guide are accessible through the
program in .pdf format. With Acrobat 4.0
Our Web site, www.chiefarchitect.com,

has answers to many frequently asked
Technical Support questions (FAQs).
Another great way to expand your skills

and productivity is to tap into the wealth
of experience and knowledge of fellow
Chief Architect users. Chief Architect
has a community of customers who are
happy to share tips and tricks theyve
learned from years of experience. Two
Web sites are available. ChiefTalk is
maintained and monitored by the makers
of Chief Architect and is easily accessible
through Chief Architects Web site.
Yahoo! Groups also hosts a Chief Architect users group independently supported by active Chief Architect users.
Both Web sites are an excellent resource
for beginners and experienced users
alike.
Chief Architect strives to make our documentation as helpful as possible for all
of our customers. Please send any
questions, comments, or feedback to
documentation@chiefarchitect.com.
Chapter 2:
Menus &
Tools
Menus and
Toolbar Buttons
Chapter Overview
Using Chief Architects menus is a good way
to familiarize yourself with the program.
They provide a convenient way to access
almost 100% of the programs functionality.
Chief Architect simplifies access to much of
the programs functionality through the use
of toolbars and toolbar buttons. Toolbars
contain toolbar buttons which are basically
short cuts to specific functions, or "tools",
within the program. Toolbars are often more
convenient to work with than menus.
Chief Architect has many preset toolbars that
display at different times, depending on your
current mode or view. You can customize all
but the Edit toolbar, a toolbar that appears
whenever an object is selected. New toolbars
can also be created for each mode or view.
The default toolbar configuration is for a

screen resolution of 1024 x 768. If you
change your screen resolution, you may also
want to change your toolbar configuration.
Some tool buttons have child buttons. Parent

buttons can be identified by a blue triangle in
their bottom right corner. Click the parent
button to display its child buttons.
Chapter Contents
Toolbar Customization Dialog

Toolbars and Menus
Toolbar Configurations
Restoring Toolbars
Chief Architects Tools
Vector and Render View Toolbar Buttons
Toggle Buttons
Edit Toolbar Buttons
17

To customize a toolbar, choose Tools>
Customize Toolbars... and the Toolbar
Customization dialog will display.
Tools Tab
4
5
2
3
Adding Toolbar Buttons

1 Drag a button from the "Main Toolbar
Buttons Available For Current Mode"

area and drop it into an existing toolbar
outside of the dialog to add the button.
Drag a button from the "Main Toolbar

Buttons Available For Current Mode" area
and drop it away from an existing toolbar to
create a new toolbar. The selected button will
be first in the new toolbar. The new toolbar
will be named with the current mode
followed by a number.
18
You can use the blank button in the

upper left hand corner of the Main Toolbar Buttons Available For Current Mode
area in your toolbars as a spacer.
23 Click a button in the "Main Toolbar
Buttons Available For Current Mode"

area to display it in the "Child Buttons" area.
If it has child buttons associated with it, they
will all display to its right.
In the above example, the Cabinet Tools
parent button is selected in the "Main
Toolbar Buttons Available For Current
By default, child buttons are only displayed

when their parent buttons are clicked. This
can be changed, however. You can add any
child button such as Soffit
or Wall
appropriately, as well as the background

window.
Select All Views from the drop-down
list to add buttons to a toolbar that
appears in all views and windows.
5 Position the cursor over a button and
Cabinets
to other toolbars by dragging it
from the Toolbar Customization dialog
to the desired location.
the buttons name and any associated

hot keys display in this area.
A parent button will always display its child
Deleting Tools from Toolbars
buttons. If you add the Cabinet Tools

parent button to a toolbar, it will display all
child buttons whenever the Cabinet Tools
You can delete a button from a toolbar only

when the Toolbar Customization dialog
is displayed.
parent button is clicked.
4 Views - Select the view or window for
which you want to add or customize an

existing toolbar. As you choose different
views, the available tools will change
To delete a tool button, drag it out of the

toolbar while holding down the left mouse
button. Release the mouse button and that
tool button is removed from the toolbar.
Toolbar Tab
2
3
4
5
7
19
Menus &
Tools
Mode" area. All cabinet child buttons display

with it in the "Child Buttons" area.
1 A list of all existing toolbars for the
given view is displayed in this area.

Select a toolbar by clicking on its name.
2 The view type being affected displays
here, and may be changed by selecting

another from the drop down list.
3 If a selected toolbar is currently
deactivated, the Activate button will

become available. Click Activate to have the
selected toolbar become activated again.
4 Click Delete to remove a selected
toolbar from the list. Once deleted, that

toolbar will no longer be available.
5 Click Reset Toolbars to restore all the
toolbars to their original configuration.
This button is only available if a backup

toolbar configuration file has been created
with the same name as the toolbar
configuration file.
Note: Clicking on the Reset Toolbars button
will delete any toolbar customization you
have done.
6 Display Tool Tips - Select the check
box to have Tool Tips display when the

cursor is moved over buttons and menu
items.
7 Lock Toobars - Select the check box to
lock toolbars in their current position

on screen.
Configurations Tab
2
3
4
5
1 A list of currently available toolbar
configurations displays here. Select a

configuration before clicking the Remove,
Copy, or Switch To buttons.
20
2 Add - Click this button to browse for a

toolbar configuration file.
3 Remove - Click this button to remove
the selected toolbar configuration. This
Toolbars and Menus
removes the configuration but doesnt delete

the configuration file.
4 Copy - Use this button to create a copy

of the selected toolbar configuration.
5 Switch To - Click this button to switch

to the selected toolbar configuration.
You can also accomplish this by right-
clicking on any toolbar and selecting a

configuration from the menu; or by clicking
a Toolbar Configuration button.
Note: You should backup the toolbar configuration files (*.toolbar) you are using. You can
access these and back them up using Windows Explorer.
Menu items display their corresponding

buttons to the left. This may help you
become familiar with the location of both the
menu items and toolbar buttons. Depending
on your workflow and most common tasks,
you may find it easier to access some of these
features using the toolbar buttons, while

leaving others off of the toolbars completely
and accessing them through the menus.
Note: Menu icons will not appear if you are
using Windows 95, 98, or ME.
Toolbar Configurations
Chief Architect has many different toolbar
buttons and only a limited amount of space to
contain them, which depends on your
monitors size and screen resolution settings.
Toolbar configurations organize tools based

on the type of work being done as well as on
monitor screen resolution, which affects the
number of tools that can display.
21
Menus &
Tools
Toolbars and Menus
The Default Configuration

configuration displays the architectural tools
used for house design, including walls,
windows, doors, stairs, cabinets, etc.
The Terrain Configuration
configuration displays the buttons associated
with the terrain and road tools, including
the plant tools and sprinkler tools. See
Terrain Tools on page 490.
The SpacePlanner Configuration
displays the buttons associated with the
House Wizard. See House Wizard on
page 810.
Chief Architect comes with toolbars configured for 1024 x 768 (default) and 800
x 600
monitors.
The Chief Architect Version 9.0 compatibility toolbar configuration

makes
your toolbar appear much like it did in
Version 9.0.
The CAD Mode On/Off

button is
situated by the configuration toolbar buttons by default. Although it doesnt
change the configurations of the toolbars,
it does affect the tools displayed. With
CAD mode on, the CAD tools will be
available whether you are in Space Planner, Terrain, or Default configuration.
Click the CAD Mode On/Off
button
again to return the toolbars to their previous display.
Custom toolbar configurations allow you to

create and save toolbar button combinations.
If you are working in a particular stage of
22
design, you can create a custom

configuration that shows only the needed
buttons.
To switch between toolbar configurations
Choose a configuration from the Configurations tab of the Toolbar

Customization dialog.
Right click on a toolbar and choose a

toolbar configuration from the contextual
menu that displays.
Click a Toolbar Configuration button.
By default, new toolbar configurations

display with the
button. You can create
your own button icon by creating a .bmp file
with the same name as the configuration and
saving it in the Toolbars directory. Look at
the Default.bmp file in the Chief Architect
10.0 program folder that corresponds to the
"Default Toolbar" configuration for an
example of this.
Toolbar button bitmaps must be 24 x 24

pixels in size. The color (R:192, G:192,
B:192) maps to the system 3D face color.
The color (R:128, G:128, B:128) maps to

the system 3D Shadow color.
The color (R:223, G:223, B:223) maps to

the system 3D light color.
Placing your custom configurations in
an "All Views" toolbar makes them
available in all views.
The current toolbar configurations are stored

in the custtbset.dat file in Chief Architects
Toolbars folder.
Restoring Toolbars
Restoring Toolbars
*.toolbarbak is written by the program any

time the program is closed. When another
toolbar configuration is selected, or when the
Toolbar Customization dialog is closed,
it saves changes made to the toolbar layout.
*.toolbar files are used to remember original

toolbar settings. When you click the Reset
Toolbars button in the Toolbar
Customization dialog, the program copies
this file and saves it as *.toolbar. If you have
made changes, and you prefer them over the
original toolbar, create a copy of your
*.toolbar file and save it as *.toolbarbak.
The next time you click Reset Toolbars, you
will return to your original settings.

Chief Architects main menu appears under
the main title bar. Menu items followed by a
triangle ( ) open submenus. Menu items
followed by an ellipsis (...) open dialogs.
Move the cursor over a menu name to
display a brief description in the status bar at
the bottom of the screen. Press the F1 key to
get online Help for that menu item.
Menus can be activated using the keyboard at

any time by pressing the Alt key and the
underlined letter in the menu name.
Many menu items have toolbar buttons that
act as shortcuts. Images of those toolbar
buttons have been included next to the menu
item that they access in this manual.
File Menu
The File menu contains options related to
opening, closing, saving, exporting, and
printing files.
Menu
Command
File> New Plan
File> New Layout
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Ctrl + N
Effect
Create a new plan file. See Creating a New Plan
on page 72.
Create a new layout file. See Creating a Layout
File on page 905.
23
Menus &
Tools
There are two files installed by Chief

Architect that affect the way toolbars appear:
*.toolbar and *.toolbarbak.
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
File> Open Plan...
Ctrl + O
Open an existing plan file. See Opening a Plan

or Layout File on page 77.
File> Open
Layout...
Open an existing layout file. See Opening a Plan

or Layout File on page 77.
File> Open
Template...
Create a new plan file using a template plan. See

Template Plans on page 79.
File> Search For

Plans...
Search for plans in an existing plan database file

using the Find Plan Wizard. See Searching for
Plans on page 80.
File> Manage
Auto Archives...
Opens windows explorer to the archives folder

for the current plan. See Auto Archive on page
75.
File> Close
N/A
Ctrl + W
or F4
File> Close All
File> Save
N/A
Close the current view window. If you close a

plan or layout, you will be prompted to save any
changes you have made. See Closing Plans and
Views on page 83.
Close all windows. If you have made any changes
to the file, you will be prompted to save them. See
Closing Plans and Views on page 83.
Ctrl + S
Save the current plan or layout file. See Saving a

Plan or Layout File on page 73.
File> Save As...
Save the current plan or layout file, and assign file

and path names. See Save and Save As on page
74.
File> Save Plan

Thumbnail
Save the current view as a thumbnail for the plan,

which will appear in the Open Plan File dialog.
See Saving a Plan Thumbnail on page 74.
File> Export>
Entire Plan...
Export all plan files and external referenced files

to an empty folder. See Exporting an Entire
Plan on page 84.
File> Export>
Current View
(DWG,DXF)...
24
Effect
Shift + F4
Exports a 2D DXF/DWG file of the current floor

plan view. See Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files
on page 852.
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
File> Export> All

Floors (DWG,
DXF)...
Exports a 2D DXF/DWG file which includes all

floors in floor plan view. Items of different types
or on different floors are placed on distinct layers.
See Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files on page
852.
File> Export> 3D
Model (DWG,
DXF)...
Only available from a 3D view. Exports the entire

model as a 3D DWG/DXF. See Exporting a 3D
DXF/DWG Model on page 856.
File> Export>
VRML (WRL)...
Only available from a vector or render view.

Export the entire model in a .wrl file format
which allows you to create real time
walkthroughs using a VRML plug-in or import
into other graphics programs. See VRML on
page 840.
File> Export>
POV-Ray
(POV)...
Exports the entire model as a POV-Ray

compatible file which can then be imported into
POV Ray. See Raytracing on page 673.
File> Export>
Metafile(WMF,
EMF)...
Export a Windows Metafile of the current view.

See Windows Metafiles on page 837.
File> Export>
Picture (BMP,
JPG, PNG)...
Export any view as a picture file. See Exporting

Picture Files on page 828.
File> Export>
N/A
Wall Definitions...
Export the set of multi-layer wall definitions from

a plan so that they can be imported into another.
See Exporting Wall Definitions on page 160.
File> Export>
Layer Sets...
Export a defined layer set from one plan file to

another. See Exporting/Importing Layer Sets on
page 127.
File> Import>
Drawing (DWG,
DXF)...
File> Import>
Picture (BMP,
JPG, PNG)...
Shift + F3
Import a 2D DWG/DXF file as CAD data. See

Importing 2D DXF/DWG Files on page 844.
Import a picture file (.bmp, .jpg, .png,*.gif, *.tif,
or *.pcx) into a floor plan view; layout; or cross
section/elevation view. See Importing Picture
Files on page 826.
25
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
File> Import>
Backdrop
Import a graphics file into the My Backdrops

folder of the Library Browser. See Adding
Backdrops to the Library on page 569.
File> Import>
N/A
Wall Definitions...
Import a file containing wall type definitions

from a different plan and merge them with the
current plans wall type definitions. See
Importing Wall Definitions on page 161.
File> Import>
Layer Sets...
Import a defined layer set from another plan file.

See Exporting/Importing Layer Sets on page
127.
File> Import>
Terrain...
Import terrain data from a text file in a variety of

formats. See Importing Terrain Data on page
523.
File> Print> Page

Setup...
Open the Page Setup dialog to assign

properties to the printed page. See Page Setup
Dialog on page 898.
File> Print> Scale

to Fit
Adjust the drawing scale to fit the drawing sheet.

See Printing to Scale on page 892.
File> Print>
Center Sheet
Center the drawing sheet relative to the model.

See Center Sheet on page 888.
File> Print> Show

Sheet
Alt + F3
File> Print> Show

Line Weights
Turn the display of the print sheet on or off. See

Show Sheet on page 887.
Turn on the display of line weights for an accurate
on-screen representation of line weights and line
styles. See Show Line Weights on page 887.
File> Print> Print

Preview
Alt + F2
Turn the display of the print preview on or off.

See Print Preview on page 887.
File> Print>
Print...
Ctrl + P
Open the Print dialog to print your plan file or

layout sheet. See The Printing Tools on page
886.
File> Print> Print

Image...
26
Effect
Print the current view as an image. Used to print a

render view or a 3D view showing images, such
as trees. See Print Image Dialog on page 902.
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Opens the Print Model dialog allowing you to

print plan templates for making a model of your
plan. See Model Maker on page 923.
File> Print> Print

Model...
File> Print>
Customize Sheet
Sizes...
Effect
Open the Customize Sheet Sizes dialog to

select a sheet size. See Creating Custom Sheet
Sizes on page 896.
N/A
File> Print> Clear N/A

Printer Info
Clear the printer information associated with the

current page setup. See Clearing Printer
Information on page 899.
File> Send to
Layout...
Send the current view to an open Layout file. See

Sending Views to Layout on page 908.
File> Exit
N/A
Exit from Chief Architect. See Exiting Chief

Architect on page 83.
Names of Plans
Most Recently
Opened
N/A
Only available after opening a plan. The number

of plans that appear in the list can be set. See
General Panel on page 100.
Edit Menu
The Edit menu contains the options for
manipulating items. Many of these editing
options also have a toolbar button and/or a
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
keyboard option (noted next to the menu

item) which do the same thing.
Effect
Edit> Undo
Ctrl + Z
Allows multiple undos of plan changes

depending on your settings in the
Preferences dialog. See General Panel on
page 100.
Edit> Redo
Ctrl + Y
Redo the last Undo performed. See General

Panel on page 100.
Ctrl + X
Delete the selected item and copy it to the

clipboard so it may be pasted elsewhere.
Edit> Cut
N/A
27
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Edit> Copy
Ctrl + C
Copy the selected item to the clipboard so it

may be pasted elsewhere. The original item is
left unchanged. See Copying on page 790.
Ctrl + V
Paste the last item cut or copied. See

Copying on page 790.
Edit> Delete
Delete
Delete the selected object.
Edit> Delete
Objects...
Ctrl +
Spacebar
Opens a dialog which allows you to delete

items of a particular type in a single room, all
rooms, or throughout a whole plan. See
Delete Objects on page 821.
Edit> Select Objects
Spacebar
Activate the tool for selecting objects. See

Selecting Objects on page 8.
Edit> Open Object...
Ctrl + E
Display the specification dialog for the

selected object. See Editing Selected
Objects on page 10.
Edit> Paste
N/A
Displays the Symbol Specification dialog.

See Symbol Specification Dialog on page
880.
Edit> Open Symbol...
Edit> Edit Area> Edit

Area
28
Effect
Ctrl + H
Select all objects within an area and Move or

Copy the entire area by dragging it to a new
location. See Edit Area on page 816.

Area Visible
Select all visible objects within an area and

Move or Copy the entire area by dragging it to
a new location. See Edit Area on page 816.
Edit> Edit Area>

Edit Area (All Floors)
Group selection tool that allows you to Move

or Copy an entire area from all floors. See
Edit Area (All Floors) on page 817.

Area (All Floors)
Visible
Group selection tool that allows you to Move

or Copy visible objects from an entire area
from all floors. See Edit Area (All Floors)
on page 817.
Edit> Default
Settings...
Set general parameters for objects and tools

used in a plan. See Plan Defaults on page
91.
Edit> Default
Settings> Reset to
Defaults...
Edit> Preferences...
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
N/A
Effect
Reset a part or all of the plan to the defaults for
roof information, floor and ceiling heights, and
wall heights. See Reset to Defaults on page
93.
Shift + ~
Define the global preferences for Chief

Architect. Some of these settings are unique to
individual plans. See Preferences Dialog on
page 94.
Build Menu
The Build menu accesses the tools used to
build the 3D model in Chief Architect. Each
arrowhead indicates a submenu which
Menu
Command
Build> Wall>
Exterior Wall
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Shift + Q
offers more choices. Most Build menu items

have corresponding buttons on the toolbar.
Effect
Draw walls using the Exterior wall type as
defined in the Wall Defaults dialog. See
Exterior and Interior Walls on page 131.
Build> Wall> Interior

Wall
Draw walls using the Interior wall type as

defined in the Wall Defaults dialog. See
Build> Wall>
Foundation Wall
Draw foundation walls using the settings from

the Foundation Defaults dialog. See
Foundation Walls on page 131.
Build> Wall> Pony

Wall
Draw pony walls using the settings from the

Pony Wall Defaults dialog. See Pony
Walls on page 131.
Build> Wall>
Invisible Wall
Draw an Invisible wall used to define room

areas. See Invisible Walls on page 131.
Build> Wall> Railing
Ctrl + Q
Draw railings as defined in the Default

Railing dialog. See Railings on page 132.
29
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Build> Wall> Deck

Railing
Effect
Draw a deck bound by a railings as defined in
the Deck Railing Defaults dialog. See
Deck Railings on page 132.
Build> Wall> Fencing
Draw fencing using the settings from the
Fencing Defaults dialog. See Fencing on
page 132.
Build> Wall>
Retaining Wall
Draw a retaining wall. See Retaining Wall

on page 132.
Build> Wall> Hatch

Wall
Fill a wall with a hatch pattern. See Hatch

Wall on page 132.
Build> Wall> Break

Wall
30
Ctrl + B
Break a wall into two sections. See Break

Wall on page 132.
Build> Wall> Fix

Wall Connections
Connect walls whose ends are within a few

inches of each other but are not connected.
See Fix Connections on page 153.
Build> Wall> Define

Wall Types
Open the Wall Type Definitions dialog to

create or modify available wall types. See
Wall Type Definitions on page 156.
Build> Wall> 2 - 12
Inch Walls
Select the nominally sized walls if you are

using a system Default Wall type. See Alter
Default Wall on page 132.
Build> Curved Wall>

Curved Exterior Wall
Draw exterior curved walls. See The Curved

Wall Tools on page 133.
Build> Curved Wall>

Curved Interior Wall
Draw interior curved walls. See The Curved

Build> Curved Wall>

Curved Foundation
Wall
Draw curved foundation walls. See The

Curved Wall Tools on page 133.
Build> Curved Wall>

Curved Pony Wall
Draw curved pony walls. See The Curved

Build> Curved Wall>

Curved Railing
Draw curved railings. See The Curved Wall

Tools on page 133.
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Build> Curved Wall>

Curved Deck Rail
Draw curved deck railing. See The Curved

Build> Curved Wall>

Curved Fencing
Draw curved fencing. See The Curved Wall

Tools on page 133.
Build> Curved Wall>

Curved Retaining
Wall
Draw curved retaining walls. See The

Curved Wall Tools on page 133.
Build> Curved Wall>

Hatch Wall
Fill a wall with a hatch pattern. See Hatch

Wall on page 132.
Build> Curved Wall>

Break Wall
Break a wall into two. See Break Wall on

page 132.
Build> Door> Hinged

Door
Shift + E
Place a hinged door into a wall. See Hinged

Doors on page 210.
Build> Door>
Doorway
Place a doorway into a wall. See Doorways

on page 210.
Build> Door> Sliding

Door
Place a sliding door into a wall. See Sliding

Doors on page 210.
Build> Door> Pocket

Door
Place a pocket door into a wall. See Pocket

Doors on page 210.
Build> Door> Bifold

Door
Place a bifold door into a wall. See Bifold

Doors on page 210.
Build> Door> Garage

Door
Place a garage door into a wall. See Garage

Doors on page 211.
Build> Door> Door

Library...
N/A
Display a selection of special doors. See The

Doorways Library on page 211.
Build> Door>
Doorway Library...
Build> Window>
Window
Display a selection of special doorway

systems. See The Doorways Library on
page 211.
Shift + W
Place a window as defined in the Window

Defaults dialog. See Standard Windows
on page 232.
31
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Effect
Build> Window> Bay

Window
Place a bay window into a wall. See Bay

Windows on page 232.
Build> Window> Box

Window
Place a box window into a wall. See Box

Build> Window> Bow

Window
Place a bow window into a wall. See Bow

Build> Window>
Window Library...
Display a selection of special windows. See

Windows Library on page 233.
Build> Floor> Build

New Floor...
Shift + X
Create a new floor in your plan. See Adding

Floors on page 269.
Build> Floor> Insert

New Floor...
Insert a new floor at the current floor and

move all other floors up one level. See
Build> Floor> Delete

Current Floor
Delete the current floor. The floor above

moves down to take the place of the current
floor. See Deleting Floors on page 270.
Build> Floor>
Exchange with Floor
Above
Exchange the current floor with the one above

it. See Adding Floors on page 269.
Build> Floor>
Exchange with Floor
Below
Exchange the current floor with the one below

it. See Adding Floors on page 269.
Build> Floor> Build

Foundation...
32
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Shift + F
Create a foundation level. See Building a

Foundation on page 274.
Build> Floor> Delete

Foundation
Delete the current foundation. See Deleting

Foundations on page 278.
Build> Floor>
Rebuild Slabs
Rebuild a monolithic slab foundation based

on the current first floor footprint. See
Rebuilding Monolithic Slab Foundations on
page 280.
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Build> Roof> Build

Roof...
Ctrl + R
Specify settings for automatic roof generation

in the Build Roof dialog. See Build Roof
Dialog on page 319.
Build> Roof> Roof

Plane
Manually place roof planes in floor plan view.

See Roof Plane on page 288.
Build> Roof> Ceiling

Plane
Manually place ceiling planes in floor plan

view. See Ceiling Plane on page 288.
Build> Roof> Truss

Base
Define a truss base on a roof plane. See Truss

Base on page 413.
Build> Roof> Gable/

Roof Line
Draw a gable roof in floor plan view. See

Gable/Roof Line on page 288.
Build> Roof>
Skylight
Create a closed polyline within a roof plane

that will be defined as a skylight. See
Skylights on page 288.
Build> Roof> Auto

Floating Dormer
Place a floating dormer onto a roof plane. See

Auto Floating Dormer on page 300.
Build> Roof> Auto

Dormer
Place an auto dormer onto a roof plane. See

Auto Dormer on page 301.
Build> Roof> Delete

Roof Planes
Delete all roof planes. See Delete Roof

Planes on page 288.
Build> Roof> Delete

Ceiling Planes
N/A
Delete all ceiling planes. See Ceiling

Planes on page 312.
Build> Roof> Fix

Roofs
Build> Structure>
Rebuild Walls/Floors/
Ceilings
Build> Structure>
Round Pier
Mend all broken roof edges. See Fix Roofs

on page 288.
F12
Update the 3D model to include recent

changes. See Automatic Rebuild of Floors &
Ceilings on page 319.
Place round piers under foundation walls. See
Piers & Pads on page 280.
33
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
34
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Build> Structure>
Square Pad
Place a square pad under foundation walls.

See Piers & Pads on page 280.
Build> Structure>
Slab
Draw a slab at grade in floor plan view. See

Slabs on page 280.
Build> Structure>
Slab with Footing
Draw a slab with thickened footings in floor

plan view. See Slabs on page 280.
Build> Structure>
Slab Hole
Draw a rectangular polyline within a slab to

create a hole. See Slab Holes on page 280.
Build> Structure>
Slab Hole with
Footing
Draw a rectangular polyline within a slab with

footings to create a hole with footings. See
Slab Holes on page 280.
Build> Structure>
Platform Hole
Draw a rectangular polyline to place a hole in

the above ceiling/floor platform. See
Platform Holes on page 280.
Build> Framing>
Build Framing...
Ctrl + Shift Display Build Framing dialog to define

+S
framing specifications. See Framing
Defaults/Build Framing Dialog on page 382.
Build> Framing>
Rafter
Manually draw a rafter. See Rafter on page

379.
Build> Framing>
Roof Blocking
Manually draw roof blocking. See Joist and

Roof Blocking on page 380.
Build> Framing>
Roof Truss
Manually draw a truss. See Roof Truss on

page 379.
Build> Framing>
Roof Beam
Draw a beam in floor plan view. See Roof

Beam on page 379.
Build> Framing>
Joist
Manually draw a ceiling or floor joist,

depending on the platform over which it is
drawn. See Joist on page 379.
Build> Framing>
Joist Blocking
Draw joist blocking. See Joist and Roof

Blocking on page 380.
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Build> Framing>
Floor/Ceiling Truss
Manually draw a floor truss. See Floor/

Ceiling Truss on page 379.
Build> Framing>
Floor/Ceiling Beam
Manually draw a floor or ceiling beam. See

Floor/Ceiling Beam on page 379.
Build> Framing>
Post
Manually draw a post. See Post on page

380.
Build> Framing>
Framing Reference
Marker
Place a framing reference marker in a plan.

See Framing Reference Markers on page
394.
Build> Framing>
Bearing Line
Draw a line defining bearing areas for

automatic framing to break joists. See
Bearing Lines on page 396.
Build> Framing>
Joist Direction
Draw a line defining joist direction for

automatic floor or ceiling framing generation.
See Joist Direction Lines on page 397.
Build> Trim> Corner

Boards
Click in floor plan view to place corner

boards. See Corner Boards on page 443.
Build> Trim> Quoins
Click in floor plan view to place quoins. See

Quoins on page 445.
Build> Trim>
Molding Polyline
Draw a molding polyline. See Layer Tab on

page 447.
Build> Trim>
Molding Line
Draw a molding line. See Layer Tab on

page 447.
Build> Trim> 3D
Molding Polyline
Draw a 3D modling polyline. See Layer Tab

on page 447.
Build> Trim> 3D
Molding Line
Draw a 3D modling line. See Layer Tab on

page 447.
Build> Trim>
Millwork Library...
Open the Millwork library. See Millwork on

page 580.
35
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Build> Stairs>
Straight Stairs
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Shift + Y
Drag to create an UP stair. Hold the Shift key

and drag to create a DOWN stair. See Stair
Tools on page 338.
Build> Stairs> Curve

to Left
Place stairs that curve to the left. See Stair

Tools on page 338.
Build> Stairs> Curve

to Right
Place stairs that curve to the right. See Stair

Tools on page 338.
Build> Cabinet> Base

Cabinet
Shift + T
Place a base cabinet as defined in the Base

Cabinet Defaults dialog. See Base
Cabinets on page 458.
Build> Cabinet> Wall

Cabinet
Ctrl + T
Place a wall cabinet as defined in the Wall

Cabinet Defaults dialog. See Wall
Cabinets on page 458.
Build> Cabinet> Full

Height
Build> Cabinet>
Soffit
36
Effect
Place a full height or pantry cabinet as defined

in the Full Height Cabinet Defaults dialog. See Full Height Cabinets on page 458.
T
Place a soffit. See Soffits on page 458.
Build> Cabinet>
Shelf
Place a shelf used in a closet. See Shelves

on page 459.
Build> Cabinet>
Partition
Place a vertical partition. See Partitions on

page 459.
Build> Cabinet>
Custom Countertop
Draw a polyline to create a custom counter

top. See Custom Countertops on page 459.
Build> Cabinet>
Custom Counter Hole
Draw a polyline to create a hole in a custom

counter top. See Custom Counter Holes on
page 460.
Build> Cabinet>
Cabinet Library...
Insert a cabinet from the Cabinet Modules

library. See Cabinet Library on page 460.
Build> Cabinet>
Cabinet Door
Library...
Insert a cabinet door style into an existing

cabinet. See Cabinet Door and Drawer
Library on page 460.
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Build> Fireplace
Create a free-standing or built-in masonry

fireplace. See Fireplaces on page 549.
Build> Electrical>
110V Outlet
Place 110V outlets. See Outlets on page

430.
Build> Electrical>
220V Outlet
Place 220V outlets. See Auto Place Outlets

on page 433.
Build> Electrical>
Light
Place default lights on walls or ceiling as

defined in the Electrical Defaults dialog.
See Lights on page 431.
Build> Electrical>
Switch
Place switches in walls or cabinets as defined

in the Electrical Defaults dialog. See
Switches on page 431.
Build> Electrical>
Electrical Library...
Display a selection of special electrical

objects. See Electrical Library on page 433.
Build> Electrical>
Auto Place Outlets
Automatically place outlets in room. See

Outlets on page 430.
Build> Electrical>
Connect Electrical
Connect electrical items into circuits. See

Connect Electrical on page 432.
Terrain Menu
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Terrain> Create
Terrain Perimeter
Create a rectangular polyline terrain

perimeter. See Terrain Tools on page 490.
Terrain> Terrain
Specification...
Specify how the program approximates the

terrain and draws contour lines in the Terrain
Specification dialog. See Terrain
37
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
38
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Terrain> Build
Terrain
Model terrain based on elevation data you

provide using points, lines and splines.
Calculate terrain data such as contour lines
and the 3D mesh. See Building the Terrain
on page 500.
Terrain> Clear
Terrain
Clear the plan of 3D terrain data and contour

lines. To restore information you must rebuild
the terrain. See Clearing the Terrain on page
501.
Terrain> Elevation
Data> Elevation Point
Place elevation points containing data in floor

plan view. See Elevation Points on page
502.
Terrain> Elevation
Data> Elevation Line
Draw a line containing elevation data. See

Elevation Lines and Splines on page 502.
Terrain> Elevation
Data> Elevation
Spline
Draw a spline containing elevation data. See

Elevation Lines and Splines on page 502.
Terrain> Elevation
Data> Elevation
Region
Draw a polyline to create a region of constant

elevation. See Terrain Elevation Tools on
page 491.
Terrain> Elevation
Data> Terrain Break
Draw a terrain break. See Terrain Breaks on

page 503.
Terrain> Modifier>
Raised Region
Draw a polyline to create a raised region. See

Terrain Modifier Tools on page 495.
Terrain> Modifier>
Lowered Region
Draw a polyline to create a lowered region.

See Terrain Modifier Tools on page 495.
Terrain> Modifier>
Hill
Draw a polyline to create a hill. See Terrain

Modifier Tools on page 495.
Terrain> Modifier>
Valley
Draw a polyline to create a valley. See

Terrain> Modifier>
Flat Region
Draw a polyline to create a flat region. See

Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Draw a line or series of lines to create a terrain
feature. See Terrain Feature Tools on page
496.
Terrain> Feature>
Feature Polyline
Draw a polyline to create a terrain feature. See

Terrain Feature Tools on page 496.
Terrain> Feature>
Feature Spline
Draw a spline to create a terrain feature. See

Terrain> Feature>
Feature Closed Spline
Draw a closed feature spline. See Terrain

Feature Tools on page 496.
Terrain> Feature>
Kidney Shaped
Feature
Draw a kidney-shaped terrain feature. See

Terrain> Feature>
Terrain Hole
Draw a terrain hole polyline. See Terrain

Feature Tools on page 496.
Terrain> Road> Road
Draw a road. See Roads on page 530.
Terrain> Road> Road

Polyline
Draw a road polyline. See Road Polyline on

page 530.
Terrain> Road>
Median
Draw a road median. See Median on page

531.
Terrain> Road>
Driveway
Draw a driveway. See Driveway on page

531.
Terrain> Road> Culde-sac
Draw a cul-de-sac. See Cul-de-sac on page

531.
Terrain> Road> Road

Marking
Draw road markings. See Road Marking on

page 532.
Terrain> Road> Road

Stripe
Draw a road stripe. See Road Stripe on page

531.
Menus &
Tools
Terrain> Feature>
Feature Line
39
Menu
Command
40
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Terrain> Road>
Sidewalk
Draw a sidewalk. See Sidewalk on page 532
Terrain> Road>
Sidewalk Polyline
Draw a sidewalk polyline. See Sidewalk

Polyline on page 532.
Terrain> Plant> Plant

Chooser...
Search for plants using the Plant Chooser

dialog. See Plant Chooser Dialog on page
507.
Terrain> Plant> Plant

Library
Insert a plant from the Plants library. See

Plant Tools on page 498.
Terrain> Plant>
Create Plant Image...
Opens the Plant Image Specification

dialog where you can create a plant image.
See Plant Image Specification Dialog on
page 503.
Terrain> Plant>
Grow all Plants...
Opens the Grow Plants dialog. See Plant

Tools on page 498.
Terrain> Plant>
Show Hardiness
Zones
Display a collection of plant hardiness zone

maps. See Hardiness Zones on page 499.
Terrain> Sprinkler>
Sprinkler Head
Insert a sprinkler head from the Sprinklers

library. See Sprinkler Tools on page 498.
Terrain> Sprinkler>
Sprinkler Line
Draw a sprinkler line. See Sprinkler Tools

on page 498.
Terrain> Sprinkler>
Sprinkler Spline
Draw a sprinkler spline. See Sprinkler Tools

on page 498.
Terrain> Terrain
Library...
Insert a terrain object from the Terrain

library. See Adding Road Objects to the
Library Menu
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Library> Library
Browser...
Ctrl + L
Effect
Open the Library Browser. See The Library
Browser on page 564.
Library> Library
Search...
Open the Library Search dialog. See

Library Search Dialog on page 583.
Library> Refresh
Library Browser
Refresh the Library Browser to display newly

added library items. See Refresh Library
Library>
Architectural Block
Library...
Open the Architectural Block library. See

Library Categories on page 573.
Library> Fixture
(Exterior) Library...
Open the Fixtures (Exterior) library. See

Library> Fixture
(Interior) Library...
Open the Fixtures (Interior) library. See

Library> Furniture
(Exterior) Library...
Open the Furniture (Exterior) library. See

Library> Furniture
(Interior) Library...
Open the Furniture (Interior) library. See

Library> Geometric
Shapes Library...
Open the Geometric Shapes library. See

Library> Hardware
Library
Open the Hardware library. See Library

Categories on page 573.
Library> New>
Library
N/A
Create a new library. See The Library

Library> New>
Folder
N/A
Available when a library or folder is selected

in the Library Browser. Creates a new library
folder. See The Library Browser on page
564.
41
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Library> New>
Material
N/A
Opens the Define Material dialog, allowing

you to define a new material. See Define
Material Dialog on page 605.
Library> New>
Image
N/A
Opens the Image Specification dialog,

allowing you to create a new image that can
be added to the library. See Creating Images
on page 831.
Library> New> Plant N/A

Image
Opens the Plant Image Specification

dialog, allowing you to create a new plant
image that can be added to the library. See
Plant Image Specification Dialog on page
503.
Library> Copy
Library List
N/A
Copy the names of library objects to be pasted

into a text editor. See Copy Library List on
page 570.
Library> Delete
Object
N/A
Delete a library, folder or file that you have

created. See Deleting Libraries on page 570.
Library> Rename
Object
N/A
Rename a library, folder or file that you have

created. See Renaming Libraries on page
571.
Library> Expand All N/A
Expand all folders located in a selected library

subcategory. See Expand/Collapse All on
page 571.
Library> Collapse All N/A
Collapse all folders located in a selected

library subcategory. See Expand/Collapse
All on page 571.
Library>
Components
Open the Components dialog for a selected

object. See Components on page 571
Library> Open...
42
N/A
Available when an unlocked material, image,

or symbol is selected in the library. Opens the
specification dialog for that library item. See
Open Object on page 591.
Library> Search
Attributes...
N/A
Available when a locked or unlocked library

item is selected in the Library Browser. If the
library item is locked, the Search
Attributes dialog will be disabled. Select
this to open the Search Attributes dialog
for that item. See Search Attributes on page
586.
3D Menu
Menu
Command
3D> Create Vector
View> Vector Full
Camera
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
G
3D> Create Vector

View> Vector Floor
Camera
Menus &
Tools
The 3D menu controls most information

related to the 3D views.
Effect
Create a camera view of all floors. See
Vector View Tools on page 624.
Create a camera view of the current floor only.
See Camera Views on page 624.
3D> Create Vector

View> Vector Full
Overview
Create an overview of an entire model,

including ceilings and roofs. See Creating
Overviews on page 629.
3D> Create Vector

View> Vector Floor
Overview
Shift + G
Create an overview of the current floor,

without ceilings or roofs. See Creating
3D> Create Vector

View> Vector
Framing Overview
3D> Create Vector
View> Cross Section/
Elevation
Create an overview of an entire model

displaying only framing. Should only be used
after framing has been built. See Creating
Shift + H
Create a cross section view of an entire model

when used inside the model, or an exterior
elevation view of the entire model when used
outside the model. See Creating Cross
Section/Elevation Views on page 637.
43
3D> Create Vector

View> Backclipped
Cross Section
Shift + F12 Create a cross section view of objects between

the start and end points of the cross section
line only. See Cross Section/Elevation
Views on page 624.
3D> Create Vector

View> Wall Elevation
3D> Create Render
View> Render Full
Camera
Create a single floor elevation view of an

interior wall. See Cross Section/Elevation
Views on page 624.
Shift + J
3D> Create Render

View> Render Floor
Camera
3D> Create View>
Render Full
Overview
44
Create a render view from the floor plan view.

See Render View Tools on page 652.
Create a render view of the current floor only.
Shift + K
Create a rendering of an entire model,

including ceilings and roofs. See Render
View Tools on page 652.
3D> Create View>

Render Floor
Overview
Create a rendering of the curent floor, without

ceilings or roofs. See Render View Tools on
page 652.
3D> Create View>

Render Framing
Overview
Create a rendering of an entire model

displaying only framing. Build framing before
using this view. See Render View Tools on
page 652.
3D> Create View>

Glass House Camera
Create a glass house render view. See Glass

House View on page 653.
3D> View Angle...
Adjust the view direction in an overview. See

Creating Overviews on page 629.
3D> Remove 3D
Remove all 3D views associated with the

current plan. See Remove 3D on page 636.
3D> Render
Create a render view based on the current

vector view using the same camera settings.
3D> Final View
Redraw a render view with the Final View settings in the Preferences dialog. See
Rendering Tools on page 650.
Create a raytrace view of the current render

view. See Raytracing on page 673.
3D> Add Lights
Click in floor plan view to place point light

source. Click and drag to create a parallel
light. See Added Lights on page 663.
3D> Adjust Lights...
Adjust the render properties of the lights

within the plan. See Adjusting Lights on
page 666.
3D> Materials> Plan

Materials...
Shift + C
Open the Plan Materials dialog. See

Managing Plan Materials on page 600.
3D> Materials>
Create Material...
Open the Define Material dialog to create a

custom material. See Define Material
Dialog on page 605.
3D> Materials>
N/A
Convert Material
Definition (.dat) Files
Convert material.dat files created in previoous

versions of Chief Architect to library
materials. See Converting Material.dat files
on page 598.
3D> Materials>
Convert Textures to
Materials
Convert texturesto materials. See Converting

Textures to Materials on page 598.
3D> Materials>
Create Plan Materials
Library
Create a library of materials in the Library

Browser based on the materials being used in
the current plan. See Converting Material
3D> Materials>
Adjust Material
Definition
Change a material definition by clicking on a

surface. See Adjust Material Definition on
page 604.
3D> Materials>
Material Painter...
Allows you to paint a material onto an object.

See Material Painter on page 602.
3D> Materials>
Material
Eyedropper...
Load the materials applied to the surfaces of

other objects. See Material Eyedropper on
page 602.
3D> Walkthroughs>
Play Walkthrough...
Play back a previously recorded walkthrough

movie. See Walkthroughs on page 838.
3D> Walkthroughs>
Record Walkthrough
Record a walkthrough movie. See

Walkthroughs on page 838.
45
Menus &
Tools
3D> Raytrace...
3D> Walkthroughs>
Stop Recording
Stop recording a walkthrough movie. See

3D> Walkthroughs>
Convert WLK File to
AVI...
Convert .wlk files created in previous versions

of Chief Architect to .avi files. See
Converting a .WLK File to an .AVI File on
page 839.
3D> Low Detail Mode
Toggle between low and high detail display of

a 3D view. See Low Detail on page 653.
3D> Glass House
Turn the Glass House feature on or off. See

Glass House View on page 653.
3D> Glass House

Options...
Adjust the Glass House options. See Glass

3D> Cross Section

Slider
Open the Cross Section Slider dialog. See

Cross Section Slider Dialog on page 672.
3D> 3D Settings...
Ctrl + 1
Change how 3D views are displayed. Select

which items to suppress when generating a 3D
view. Control the display of saved, inactive
cameras. See 3D Settings on page 645.
CAD Menu
The CAD menu is used to access the CAD
tools. Most of these menu items are
accessible from the CAD toolbar.
Menu
Command
CAD> CAD Mode
On/Off
46
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
F2
Description
Toggle between CAD and Architectural
modes. See The CAD Drawing Tools on
page 726.
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Description
CAD> Select CAD

Objects
Click on a CAD object to select, or hold

down Shift key and drag a rectangle around
multiple CAD objects to select as a group.
Hold Shift key and click individual CAD
objects to add or subtract from the selection
set. Double-click to display the CAD panel
of the Plan Defaults dialog when in CAD
mode. See The CAD Drawing Tools on
page 726.
CAD> Current CAD

Layer...
Opens the Select CAD Layer dialog and

allows you to change the current CAD layer.
See Current CAD Layer on page 126.
CAD> Points> Place

Point
Click to place a temporary CAD Point. See

Point Tools on page 749.
CAD> Points> Input

Point...
Click to place a new point in an absolute

location or relative to the current point. See
Input Point on page 749.
CAD> Points> Point

Marker
Click to place a point marker. Unlike

temporary CAD points which are not saved
with the plan, point markers are permanent
and are saved. Point markers can be placed
automatically with the Point to Point
Dimension
page 750.
CAD> Points> Delete

Temporary Points
CAD> Lines> Draw

Line
CAD> Lines> Input
Line...
tool. See Point Markers on
Delete all temporary CAD points at the

same time. You can also press the Del key
when nothing is selected to delete the points
one by one. See Temporary Points on
page 750.
W
Click and drag to create lines. See Line

Tools on page 727.
Draw a line in an absolute location from the
origin or relative to the current point. See
Input Line on page 728.
47
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
CAD> Lines> Text

Line With Arrow
CAD> Arcs> Draw
Arc
Draw a CAD line with an arrowhead. See

Line With Arrow on page 730.
E
Draw an arc by dragging along the desired

curve. See Arc Tools on page 736.
CAD> Arcs> Center/

Radius/End Arc
Draw an arc by dragging from center to start

then clicking on the end point. See Arc
Tools on page 736.
CAD> Arcs> Start/

End/On Arc
Draw an arc by dragging from start to end,

then clicking on a point in between. See
Arc Tools on page 736.
CAD> Arcs> Start/

Tangent/End Arc
Draw an arc by dragging from start point

along tangent then clicking on end point.
See Arc Tools on page 736.
CAD> Arcs> Input

Arc...
Draw an arc in an absolute location from a

point of origin or relative to the current
point. See Input Arc on page 736.
CAD> Arcs> Arc

About Center
Draw an arc around the current CAD point.

See Arc About Center on page 738.
CAD> Arcs> Arc

With Arrow
Draw an arc with an arrowhead. See Arc

with Arrow on page 738.
CAD> Circles> Circle
Click and drag to draw a circle. See Circle

Tools on page 748.
CAD> Circles> Circle

About Center
Click and drag from a center point to draw a

circle. See Draw Circle About Center on
page 748.
CAD> Circles> Oval
Draw a circle which can be selected and

resized to an oval. See Ovals on page 748.
CAD> Boxes &

Framing>
Rectangular Polyline
CAD> Boxes &
Framing> Box
48
Description
Shift + P
Draw a closed rectangular polyline. See

Rectangular Polylines on page 745.
Draw a resizable box. See Boxes on page
745.

Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Description
CAD> Boxes &

Framing> Framing
Draw a framing member. This CAD item

will display in 3D views and in the Material
List. See Framing on page 745.
CAD> Boxes &

Framing> Wall
Bridging
Draw wall bridging or blocking in wall

details only. See Wall Bridging on page
746.
CAD> Boxes &

Framing> Cross Box
Draw resizable box containing a cross to

show a cross section of a framing member.
See Cross Boxes on page 746.
CAD> Boxes &

Framing> Insulation
Draw resizable insulation for detailing cross

section views. See Insulation on page 746.
CAD> Spline
Click this button and drag from end to end

to draw a smooth curve passing through the
points. See Splines on page 744.
CAD> Polyline Solid
Draw a regular polyline solid that displays

in 3D views. See Polyline Solids on page
547.
CAD> Dimension>
Manual Dimension
Single click to draw a dimension line. Double-click to open the Dimension

Defaults dialog. See Manual
Dimensions on page 683.
CAD> Dimension>
End to End
Dimension
Draw a dimension marking only the

beginning and end points. See End-to-End
CAD> Dimension>
Angular Dimension
Use this tool to find the angular dimension

between any two straight, non-parallel lines.
See Angular Dimensions on page 683.
CAD> Dimension>
Interior Dimension
Click to draw inside room dimensions. See

Interior Dimensions on page 684.
CAD> Dimension>
Point to Point
Dimension
Draw a dimension between any two points.

See Point to Point Dimensions on page
684.
CAD> Dimension>
Baseline Dimension
Draw baseline dimensions for each object

located along the line. See Baseline
49
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
CAD> Dimension>
Auto Exterior
Dimensions
Shift + A
CAD> Dimension>
Display Temporary
Dimensions
50
Description
Automatically generate exterior dimensions as
defined in Dimension Defaults dialog.
See Auto Exterior Dimensions on page
685.
Enable the display of temporary dimensions
when CAD objects are selected. See
Display Temporary Dimensions on page
685.
CAD> Text> Text
Click on screen to add text. See Adding

Text on page 704.
CAD> Text> Text

with Arrow
Ctrl + A
Click on screen to add text with an arrow.

See Text Arrows on page 705.
CAD> Text> Text

Line with Arrow
Click on screen to add text with an arrow.

See Text Arrows on page 705.
CAD> Text> Callout
Click on screen to add a callout. See

Callouts on page 718.
CAD> Text> Marker
Place a marker in floor plan view. See

Markers on page 722.
CAD> Special:> Sun

Angle
Draw a Sun Angle to show shadow

information at specific places and times, and
to create a light source in render views. See
Sun Angles on page 663.
CAD> Special:>
North Pointer
Draw a North Pointer to define true North.

See North Pointer on page 730.
CAD> Special:> Plan N/A

Footprint
Create a basic footprint of the current plan

from within a CAD Detail window. See
Plan Footprint on page 760.
CAD> Autodetail
Click to automatically generate CAD

Details. See Auto-Detailing on page 638.
CAD> CAD Block

Management...
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
V
CAD> CAD Block

Library...
CAD> CAD Detail...
Description
Insert a CAD block from the list of available
blocks in CAD Block Management dialog. See CAD Block Management on
page 754.
Click to open the CAD Block library. See
CAD Blocks on page 576.
Shift + V
CAD> CAD Detail

From View
Open the CAD Detail dialog to create new

detail or open an existing detail. See CAD
Details on page 759.
Click to convert the current view to a CAD
detail. See CAD Detail From View on
page 639.
CAD> CAD to Walls...
Ctrl + F3
Convert CAD lines into walls. See CAD to

Walls on page 155.
CAD> Edit Settings>

Edit Polyline Parts
Shift + F8
Toggle the ability to edit individual

components of polylines. See Edit Polyline
Parts on page 786.
CAD> Edit Settings>

Object Snaps
Shift + F11 Toggle Object Snaps for moving and editing

CAD objects. See The CAD Editing Tools
on page 764.
CAD> Edit Settings>

Angle Snaps
F10
CAD> Edit Settings>

Display Arc Centers
Toggle between drawing CAD lines at

allowed angles and unrestricted angles. See
Angle Snapping on page 784.
Toggle the display of arc centers. See The
CAD Editing Tools on page 764.
CAD> Edit Settings>

Grid Snaps
Ctrl + F9
Toggle grid snaps for moving and editing

CAD objects. See Grid Snapping on page
785.
CAD> Edit Settings>

Display Reference
Grid
Shift + F9
Turns on the display of the reference grid.

See Plan Defaults on page 91.
CAD> Edit Settings>

Rotate/Resize About
Current Point
Enables the Edit Type function Rotate/

Resize About Current Point. See Edit
Types on page 786.
51
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
52
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Description
CAD> Edit Settings>

Move Corners
Enables the Edit Type function Move

Corners. See Edit Types on page 786.
CAD> Edit Settings>

Concentric
Enables the Edit Type function Concentric.

See Edit Types on page 786.
CAD> Edit Settings>

Resize
Enables the Edit Type function Resize. See

Edit Types on page 786.
CAD> Edit Settings>

Fillet
Enables the Edit Type function Fillet. See

Edit Types on page 786.
CAD> Snap To>

Endpoint
Enables object snapping to endpoints. See

Preferences - Snap Properties Panel on
page 780.
CAD> Snap To>

Midpoint
Enables object snapping to midpoints. See

page 780.
CAD> Snap To>

Center
Enables object snapping to object centers.

See Preferences - Snap Properties Panel
on page 780.
CAD> Snap To>

Quadrant
Enables object snapping to the quadrants of

arcs and circles. See Preferences - Snap
Properties Panel on page 780.
CAD> Snap To> On

Object
Enables on object snapping. See

page 780.
CAD> Snap To>

Tangent extensions
Enables object snapping to tangent

extensions. See Extension Line Snapping
on page 783.
CAD> Snap To>

Perpendicular
extensions
Enables object snapping to perpendicular

on page 783.
CAD> Snap To>

Orthogonal extensions
Enables object snapping to orthogonal

on page 783.
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Description
CAD> Snap To>

Points/Markers
Enables object snapping to points and

markers. See Extension Line Snapping on
page 783.
CAD> Snap To>

Intersections
Snap point to nearest intersection of two

lines. See Preferences - Snap Properties
Panel on page 780.
Tools Menu
Menu
Command
Tools> Display
Options...
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Tools> Layer
Painter...
Menus &
Tools
The Tools menu offers various tools for

dimensions; text; manipulating reference
floors; and modifying toolbars.
Effect
Open the Layer Display Options dialog to
control the display of items in 2D and 3D
views as well as the materials list. See Layer
Display Options Dialog on page 119.
Allows you to mmove objects to a layer by
clicking on them in any view. See Layer
Painter on page 124.
Tools> Color Off
F8
Toggle the color on or off. When turned off,

3D views appear as line drawings. Best
turned off for cross sections and elevations.
See Color Off/On on page 632.
Tools> Reference
Floors> Reference
Display
F9
Superimpose the plan of another floor over

the current floor. See Reference Display on
page 271.
Tools> Reference
Floors> Swap Floor/
Reference
Switch so that the reference plan becomes the

working plan, and the working plan becomes
the reference plan. See Swap Floor/
Reference on page 272.
53
Menu
Command
Effect
Tools> Reference
Floors> Change
Floor/Reference...
Ctrl + Shift Define which is the working plan and which

+G
is the reference plan. See Reference Floor
on page 271.
Tools> Reference
Floors> Up One Floor
Shift + N
Moves the floor plan view one floor up. See

Floor Up/ Floor Down on page 271.
Tools> Reference
Floors> Down One
Floor
Shift + M
Moves the floor plan view one floor down.

See Floor Up/ Floor Down on page 271.
Tools> Plan Check
Plan Check checks for some very basic code

compliance issues in the floor plan and is best
used when your floor plan is near completion.
See Plan Check on page 813.
Tools> Spell Check
Opens the Spell Checker, allowing you to

check the spelling of the selected text. See
Spell Check on page 811.
Tools> View IRC

Checklist
Display the IRC Checklist using Acrobat

Reader. See IRC Checklist on page 814.
Tools> Customize
Toolbars...
N/A
Create new toolbars or modify existing ones.

See Toolbar Customization Dialog on page
18.
Tools> Hide Toolbars N/A
Toggle the display of the toolbars on or off.

See Toolbar Customization Dialog on page
18.
Tools> Rotate View...
Open the Rotate Plan View dialog to

rotate the current floor plan view. See Rotate
View on page 822.
Tools> Reverse Plan
Reverse your entire plan. The plan is

reflected about a vertical line. Reversing a
plan closes any open 3D views. See Reverse
Plan on page 823.
Tools> Layout>
Change Layout
Page...
54
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
N/A
Open the Go To Layout Page dialog. See

Displaying Layout Views on page 915.
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Tools> Layout> Page

Up
Move the current page in the layout file up

one page.
Tools> Layout> Page

Down
Move the current page in the layout file down

one page.
Tools> Layout> Edit

Layout
Select and modify any line in any 3D view

which has been sent to layout other than CAD
objects. See Editing Layout Lines on page
916.
Tools> Layout>
Layout Files...
N/A
View files present and files not found in the

current layout file. See Layout Files Dialog
on page 920.
Tools> Layout>
Rescale Layout
View...
Rescale a selected floor plan view, CAD

detail, wall elevation, or cross section/
elevation view in layout. See Displaying
Layout Views on page 915.
Tools> Layout>
Relink File...
Reestablish or change the file that a layout

view is linked to. See Relinking Layout
Views on page 920.
Tools> Symbol>
Create Symbol...
Opens the Create Symbol Wizard. See

Opening the Create Symbol Wizard on
page 861.
Tools> Symbol> Get

Last Symbol...
Place the most recently created symbol back

into the plan. See Closing the Create Symbol
Wizard on page 880.
Tools> Symbol> Add

to Library...
Add objects and materials to the Library. See

Adding to the Library on page 568.
Tools> Image> Image N/A

Library
Insert an image from the Image library. See

Images on page 579.
Tools> Image> Create

Image
Create an image using the Image

Specification dialog. See Image
Tools> Image> Create

Image Library
Create a new image library using the
Browse for Folder dialog. See Creating
Images on page 831.
55
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
56
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Tools> House
Wizard> Start House
Wizard...
Open the House Wizard which leads you

through the steps to quickly lay out a floor
plan. See House Wizard on page 810.
Tools> House
N/A
Wizard> Build House
Build a 3D model of a house based on the

organization of Room Boxes that you
defined. Must be done for each floor of the
building. See House Wizard on page 810.
Tools> House
N/A
Wizard> Hide Room
Boxes
Turn on and off the display of Room Boxes.

Room Boxes normally display after they have
been created and are hidden after using the
Build House tool. See House Wizard on
page 810.
Tools> House
Wizard> Bathroom
Place a bathroom. See House Wizard on

page 810.
Tools> House
Wizard> Bedroom
Place a bedroom. See House Wizard on

page 810.
Tools> House
Wizard> Closet
Place a closet. See House Wizard on page

810.
Tools> House
Wizard> Deck
Place a deck. See House Wizard on page

810.
Tools> House
Wizard> Dining
Room
Place a dining room. See House Wizard on

page 810.
Tools> House
Wizard> Entry
Place an entry. See House Wizard on page

810.
Tools> House
Wizard> Family
Room
Place a family room. See House Wizard on

page 810.
Tools> House
Wizard> Garage
Place a garage. See House Wizard on page

810.
Tools> House
Wizard> Hallway
Place a hallway. See House Wizard on page

810.
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Tools> House
Wizard> Kitchen
Place a kitchen. See House Wizard on page

810.
Tools> House
Wizard> Laundry
Room
Place a laundry room. See House Wizard

on page 810.
Tools> House
Wizard> Living
Room
Place a living room. See House Wizard on

page 810.
Tools> House
Wizard> Master
Bedroom
Place a master bedroom. See House Wizard

on page 810.
Tools> House
Wizard> Office
Place an office. See House Wizard on page

810.
Tools> House
Wizard> Porch
Place a porch. See House Wizard on page

810.
Tools> House
Wizard> Stair
Place a stairway. See House Wizard on

page 810.
Tools> House
Wizard> Stairwell
Place a stairwell. See House Wizard on

page 810.
Tools> Plans
Database> Create
Plan Database...
Create a plan database for plans on your

system. See Plan Find Wizard on page 80.
Tools> Plans
Database> Edit Plan
Database...
Edit an existing plan database file. See Plan

Find Wizard on page 80.
Tools> Time
Tracker> Start Time
Logging
Begin logging time for the current plan. See

Time Tracker on page 808.
Tools> Time
Tracker> Stop Time
Logging
Stop logging time for the current plan. See

57
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Effect
Tools> Time
Tracker> View Time
Log...
Opens the Time Log dialog. See Time Log

Dialog on page 808.
Tools> Schedules>
Door...
Create a door schedule for one or all floors.

See Creating Schedules on page 928.
Tools> Schedules>
Window...
Create a window schedule for one or all of the

floors. See Creating Schedules on page
928.
Tools> Schedules>
Cabinet...
Create a cabinet schedule for one or all of the

floor. See Creating Schedules on page 928.
Tools> Schedules>
Fixture...
Create a fixture schedule for one or all of the

floors. See Creating Schedules on page
928.
Tools> Schedules>
Furniture...
Create a furniture schedule for one or all of

the floors. See Creating Schedules on page
928.
Tools> Schedules>
Electrical...
Create an electrical schedule for one or all of

the floors. See Creating Schedules on page
928.
Tools> Materials
List> Calculate From
All Floors
Generate a materials list for all floors. See

Calculate From All Floors on page 939.
Tools> Materials
Area
Draw a rectangle around an area to generate a

materials list for that area. See Calculate
From Area on page 940.
Tools> Materials
Room
Select a room, then this menu option to

generate a materials list for the selected room.
See Calculate From Room on page 940.
Tools> Materials
List> Materials
Polyline
Draw a rectangular polyline defining an area

for which a materials list is produced. See
Materials Polyline on page 941.
Tools> Materials
List> Master List
58
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Ctrl + M
View the master material list. Modify the

master list by making changes to a material
list. See The Master List on page 941.
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Tools> Materials
List>
Manufacturers...
Display contact information of manufacturers

whose products are represented in Chief
Architect. See Manufacturers on page 950.
Tools> Materials
List> Materials List
Management...
Open the Materials Lists dialog to edit,

delete, or rename saved materials lists. See
Managing Materials Lists on page 950.
Tools> Project
Browser
Opens the Project Browser. See Project

Browser on page 78.
Window Menu
The Window menu determines which
window is active and defines how it displays.
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Some of these menu items are common to

other Windows programs.
Effect
Window> Refresh
Display
F5
Redraw the current window to clean up extra

lines; display missing items; and correct
random effects sometimes caused when a
model is changed. If something appears to be
drawn incorrectly or incompletely, refreshing
the display will often correct the problem.
Window> Fill
Window
F6
Show the entire plan in the current window.

See Fill Window on page 616.
Window> Swap
Views
F7
Toggle between the current view and the view

which was current before it. See Swapping
Views on page 620.
Window> Zoom
Shift + Z
Zoom in on a defined area. See Zoom Tools

on page 615.
Window> Zoom Out
Move back to display twice as much of your

plan or view. See Zoom Tools on page 615.
Window> Zoom In
Zoom in to center of screen by 2x. See Zoom

Tools on page 615.
59
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Window> Undo
Zoom
Undo the previous zoom. See Undo Zoom

on page 616.
Window> Aerial View
Create an Aerial View of the entire plan in the

upper left corner. Zooming within this
window will adjust the view of the main plan
for editing. See Aerial View on page 621.
Window> Pan
Window
Ctrl + drag Pan the current window without changing the

zoom factor. See Panning the Display on
page 616.
Window> Cascade
Shift + F5
Window> Tile
Horizontally
Window> Tile
Vertically
60
Effect
A standard Windows option which displays

all open views in a row, each slightly offset
from the others. See Cascade on page 618.
Display views tiled one above the other. See
Tiling Views on page 619.
Shift + F6
Display views tiled left to right. See Tiling

Views on page 619.
Window> Arrange
Icons
A standard Windows option which lines up

the icons of minimized views in a row. See
Arrange Icons on page 620.
Window> Next
Window
Cycles through the open views in the order

that they appear on the bottom of the
Windows menu. See Window Menu Tools
on page 617.
Window> Previous
Window
Cycles backwards through the open views in

the order that they appear on the bottom of the
Windows menu. See Window Menu Tools
on page 617.
Window> Show
Layout
Select this to switch to a layout file which is

currently open. See The Layout Tools on
page 904.
Names of Open Views N/A
Select from this list a view active. The view

with a check next to it is the active view.

Help Menu
The Help menu is an extremely useful but
often underused resource. Online Help can
easily be obtained for most topics without
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Help> Index
Effect
Open the Online Help index and display an
outline of all the help information. See
Getting Help on page 16.
Help> Current Mode N/A
F1
Display information specific to the current

mode or tool. The F1 function key accesses
this same information, but is more flexible
since it can access information specific to any
toolbar button or menu item above which the
pointer is held. Most dialogs also have a Help
button which accesses information related to
their function. See Getting Help on page 16.
Help> Launch Quick N/A

Start at Startup
If enabled, this launches the Quick Start Guide

whenever Chief Architect is opened.
Help> View Getting

Started Guide...
Open the Getting Started Guide PDF using

Acrobat Reader. See Getting Help on page
16.
N/A
Help> View
Reference Manual...
Help> View Quick
Start Guide...
Open the Reference Manual PDF directly with

Acrobat Reader. See Getting Help on page
16.
N/A
Launches the Quick Start Guide if it isn't

already open.
Help>Hardware Lock N/A

Troubleshooter...
Opens the hardware lock troubleshooter.
Help> Visit Chief

Architect Web Site...
Open the Chief Architect Web page using

your default Web browser. See Getting Help
on page 16.
Help> Download
Program Updates...
N/A
Open to the Program Updates section of the

Chief Architect Web page. See Program
Updates on page 15.
61
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
resorting to other aids. The Help menu also

provides important customer information.
Menu
Command
Help> About Chief
Architect...
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
N/A
Effect
Open the About dialog to view the registered
owners name, and the programs version
number and release date. Contact information
is displayed on the More Info tab.

Depending on the type of camera used to
generate the 3D view, different toolbar
options will be available.
Many of the buttons available in 3D views
are also available in other views. See 3D
Tools on page 625.
Save Camera - Save the current 3D
or render camera so that it can be
opened later. See Saving 3D
Views on page 635.
Delete View Surfaces - Click on
surfaces in a 3D view to delete them.
Click the button again to restore
deleted surfaces. See Delete 3D
Surface on page 635.
Edit Camera - Open the Camera
Specification dialog to edit the
position of the camera. See
Camera Specification Dialog on
page 641.
Sun Toggle On/Off - Toggle the
sunlight on or off. See Sun Angles
on page 663.
Camera Movement Tools

See Editing a Camera in 3D Views on
page 627.
62
Move Camera Forward - Takes the

camera one step forward while
maintaining the same line of sight.
Move Camera Backward - Takes
the camera one step backward while
Move Camera Left - Takes the
camera one step to the left while
Move Camera Right - Takes the
camera one step to the right while
Move Camera Up - Raises the
camera vertically in space while
Move Camera Down - Lowers the
camera vertically in space while
Turn Camera Left - Turns the
camera toward the left while staying
in the same location.
Turn Camera Right - Turns the
camera toward the right while
staying in the same location.
Tilt Camera Upward - Tilts the
camera upward while keeping it in
the same location.
Orbit Camera Downward Rotates camera down around its

focal point.
Orbit Camera Upward - Rotates
the camera up around its focal point.
Orbit Camera Right - Rotates the
camera to the right around its focal
point.
Orbit Camera Left - Rotates the
camera to the left around its focal
point.
Move Camera In - Moves the
position of the camera closer to the
focal point along the line of sight.
Move Camera Out - Moves the
position of the camera away from
the focal point along the line of
sight.
Mouse-Orbit Camera - Allows you
to rotate the camera around the
current camera center. See Camera
Movement on page 655.
View Direction Tools

View Direction tools are only available in
overviews. See View Direction Tools on
page 631.
View Angle - Click to open the
View Angle dialog.
Front View - Click for front view.
Back View - Click for back view.
Top View - Click for top view.
Bottom View - Click for bottom
view.
Left Side View - Click for left side
view.
Right Side View - Click for right
side view.
Restore Original View - Click to
restore the original view position.
Mouse-Pan Camera - Allows you

to move the camera up, down, left
and right. See Camera Movement
on page 655.
Mouse Dolly Camera - Allows you
to move the camera forward,
backward, left and right. See
Camera Movement on page 655.
3D Center Camera On Point Allows you to focus the camera at a
particular point in the scene. See
Camera Movement on page 655.
63
Menus &
Tools
Tilt Camera Downward - Tilts the

camera downward while keeping it
in the same location.
Toggle Buttons
Toggle buttons access a variety of functions.
Some control how your plan displays on
screen; while others are shortcuts to
preference settings that control how different
objects behave when edited.
Display Temporary Dimensions Enable the display of temporary

dimensions when objects are
selected. See Display Temporary
By default, the toggle toolbars appear on the

right vertical frame of Chief Architects main
window.
Edit Polyline Parts - Toggle the

ability to edit individual components
of polylines. See Edit Polyline
Parts on page 786.
Display Toggle Buttons

Color On/Off - Turn on the display
of color. See Color Off/On on
page 632.
Show Line Weights - Turn on the
display of true line weights as they
will appear when printed. See
Show Line Weights on page 887.
Show Sheet - Turn on the display of
the print sheet, as specified in the
Page Setup dialog. See Show
Sheet on page 887.
Print Preview - Display the print
preview. All line weights and text
objects will appear on screen as they
will when printed. See Print
Preview on page 887.
64
Display Arc Centers - Toggle the

display of arc centers. See Line
Display Reference Grid - Turn on
the display of the reference grid, as
specified in the Plan Defaults/
Layout Defaults dialog. See Plan
Defaults on page 91.
If Contextual Menus are enabled on the

Appearance tab of the Preferences dialog,
right-clicking on an object will open a
contextual menu which contains the same
options as the edit toolbar.
Architectural Edit Buttons

Select Next Object - When many
objects are located in a small area,
select one of them and click this edit
button until the desired object is
selected. See Select Next Object
on page 9.
Open Object - When one or more
objects are selected, click this edit
button to display the specification
dialog for that object or group of
objects. See Using the
Copy/Paste - Click to make a single
copy of the selected object(s);
double-click to make multiple
copies. See Copy/Paste on page
792.
Components - Opens an objects

Components dialog. See The
Components Dialog on page 948.
Accurate Move - Select an object
then click this button to move it with
more accuracy. See Accurate
Move on page 790.
Replace From Library - Replace
From Library on page 573.
Add to Library - Add a symbol,
CAD block, or molding profile to
the Library. See Adding to the
Same Type Wall - Click this button
when a wall is selected to change
how walls are edited. See
Architectural Panel on page 107.
Adjust Wall Angle - Click this
button when a wall is selected to
change how walls are edited. See
Architectural Panel on page 107.
Join Roof Planes - Join two roof
planes. See Joining Roof Planes
on page 306.
Move to be Coplanar - Move the
selected roof plane to be coplanar
with the next selected roof plane.
See Move to be Coplanar on page
307.
Load Muntins - Turn a CAD block
drawn over window or door glass
into a custom muntin design. See
Custom Muntins on page 243.
Delete - Click to delete the selected

object(s).
65
Menus &
Tools
Edit toolbars display only when an object or

group of objects is selected. Different edit
buttons are available depending on the object
or group of object selected. Some CAD tools
have a compliment tool in Architectural
mode; others are implemented similarly to
Architectural tools. The CAD tools are
discussed in detail in the CAD chapter,
Unload Muntins - Explodes

muntins into CAD lines and objects
for editing. See Custom Muntins
on page 243.
Center Object - Center an object in
a wall. See Centering Windows on
page 242.
Gable Over Door/Window - Place
a gable over a door or window. See
Place Gable Over Window(s) on
page 237.
Delete Gable Over Opening Select a window or door with a
gable above it and click this button
to delete the gable when roofs are
built. See Gable Over Door/
Window on page 318.
Flare/Curve Stair - Flare the sides
of the selected staircase. See Flared
Stairs on page 359.
Starter Tread - Round one of the
bottom two treads of a staircase.
Must select the staircase at one of
the two bottom treads. See Starter
Treads on page 362.
Allowed Angles - This button
appears when walls which are not at
allowed angles are selected with the
Edit Area or Edit Area All Floors
marquee. Click to open the Place at
Allowed Angles dialog. See Place
at Allowed Angles Dialog on page
818.
Edit Camera - Allows you to edit
the position of the camera. Opens
the Camera Specification
dialog. See Camera Specification
Dialog on page 641.
66
Convert to Polyline Road/

Sidewalk - Converts a selected road
or sidewalk into a road polyline or a
sidewalk polyline. See Convert to
Polyline Road/Sidewalk on page
535.
Automatically Generate
Sidewalks - Allows you to
automatically generate sidewalks
along a selected road object. See
Sidewalks on page 535.
Make Room Polyline - Create a
standard polyline which matches the
shape of the selected room See
Room Molding Polylines on page
200
Make Room Molding Polyline Opens the Make Room Molding
Polyline dialog. See Make Room
Molding Polyline Dialog on page
200
Expand Room Polyline - Select a
room and click this button to enlarge
the current room selection to include
all rooms that are continuous and
only separated by invisible walls or
railings. See Room Polylines on
page 199.
Build Advanced Deck Framing Click this button to frame the
selected deck. See Decks on page
189.
Remove Advanced Deck Framing
Click this button to turn a framed
deck into a solid deck. See Decks
on page 189.
Resize Picture - Resize a selected

bitmap. See Resizing an Image on
page 833.
Move to Framing Reference Position selected framing members
in relation to the framing reference.
See Framing Reference Markers
on page 394.
Open Wall Detail - Open a framing
detail when you select a wall.
Framing must be built. See Wall
Framing Details on page 400.
CAD Edit Buttons

Multiple Copy - Select CAD
object(s), click this button, and drag
to create copies at specified
intervals. Double-click to set the
intervals. See Multiple Copy on
page 792.
Transform/Replicate Object Click to display the Transform/
Replicate Object dialog. See
Transform/Replicate Object on
page 793.
Reflect About Line - Reflect
selected objects about a line. See
Reflect About Line on page 795.
Move To Front - Click to move the
selected item in front of other CAD
objects. See Move to Front on
page 790.
Make Parallel - Align a selected

line or polyline edge with another
object, such as a wall or line. See
Make Parallel/Perpendicular on
page 796.
Break Line - Single-click, then
click on a selected item to add a
joint-type break. Double-click and
then click on selected item to
completely sever the line. See
Break Line on page 798.
.Make Block - Appears when more
than one CAD object is selected.
Click to link selected items into a
single unit, or block. See CAD
Blocks on page 753.
Explode Block - Click to explode a
selected block into its individual
parts. See CAD Blocks on page
753.
Point-to-Point Move - Move
selected items from start point to the
end point of the move. You may also
drag from the start point to the end
point of the move. See Point-toPoint Move on page 790.
Fillet Two Lines - Select an edge;
click this button; and select a
different edge to create a rounded
fillet of specified size between them.
Double-click to set the fillet radius.
See Fillet and Chamfer on page
800.
Chamfer Two Lines - Select an
edge; click this button; and select a
different edge to create a straight
bevel of specified size between
them. Double-click to set the
chamfer size. See Fillet and
Chamfer on page 800.
67
Menus &
Tools
Auto Stairwell - Select a staircase

and click this button to create a
stairwell. See Creating a Stairwell
Automatically on page 365.
Reverse Direction - Select a line,

arrow, or polyline; then click this
button to reverse the direction. See
Reverse Direction on page 796.
Lock Control Handle Angle Locks or unlocks the control handles

for editing advanced splines. See
Editing Splines on page 768.
Select/Make Fence - Select a line or

polyline then click this button to
select everything touched by the
original line; or click this button and
draw a fence line when the button
becomes available. See Selecting
CAD Objects Using a Fence on
page 765.
Straighten Spline Segment Straighten a segment of an advanced

spline between two points. See
Editing Splines on page 768.
Extend Objects - Select boundary

edge(s), click this button, then select
CAD objects on end to extend. This
may be used with the Select/Make
Fence
tool as well. See Trim
and Extend on page 799.
Trim Objects - Select cutting
edge(s), click this button, then select
CAD objects on end to eliminate.
This may be used with the Select/
Make Fence
tool as well. See
Trim and Extend on page 799.
Make Arc Tangent - Make an arc
tangent to the attached lines/arcs.
See Editing Arcs on page 766.
Change Line/Arc - Turns the line
into an arc or the arc into a line. See
Change Line/Arc on page 796.
Lock Centers - Locks the centers of
arcs. See Lock Center Arc on page
767.
Hold Position - Copies the selected
items directly above or below when
they are copied to another floor.
Click first then copy. See Hold
Position on page 821.
68
Convert Spline to Polyline Change the spline into a polyline

made up of straight lines. See
Converting Splines into Polylines
on page 771.
Convert to Spline - Convert a
polyline into a spline. See
Converting Polylines into Splines
on page 771.
Advanced Splines - Turns on
advanced splines. See Advanced
Splines on page 769.
Polyline Subtract - Subtract one
polyline from another to create a
new polyline. See Polyline Union,
Intersection, and Subtract on page
802.
Polyline Intersection - Create a
new polyline around the area in
common between two polylines. See
Polyline Union, Intersection, and
Subtract on page 802.
Polyline Union - Create a new
polyline using the entire area of
overlapping polylines. See Polyline
Union, Intersection, and Subtract
on page 802.
Add to Library - Adds a symbol,
CAD block, or molding profile to
the Library. See Adding to the
Convert Polyline - Convert a

selected polyline to a polyline solid.
See Converting CAD Objects on
page 804.
Convert to Plain Polyline - Convert
a selected polyline solid to a
polyline. See Converting Special
Polylines into Polylines on page
805.
Select Same Type - Open the Select
Similar Objects dialog. See Select
Same / Load Same on page 815.
Load Values To Make Same Apply values assigned to a group of
objects to new objects. See Select
Same / Load Same on page 815.
69
70
Chapter 3:
File Management
Chapter Overview
All commands related to opening, saving and

closing plans are located in the File menu.
You should back up your plan and layout
files externally on a regular basis to avoid
accidental loss of work.
Chapter Contents
File
Management
Chief Architect uses two main document

types, Plan files and Layout files. The
complete 3D model of a structure and
surrounding terrain, as well as any CAD data
associated with it are stored in the Plan files.
All data used to create working drawings
such as CAD data and the links to various
views or details are stored in the Layout files.
Compatibility with Previous Versions

Creating a New Plan
Creating a New Layout
Saving a Plan or Layout File
Save and Save As
Saving a Plan Thumbnail
Auto Archive
Undo Files
Opening a Plan or Layout File
Project Browser
Template Plans
Searching for Plans
Closing Plans and Views
Exiting Chief Architect
Exporting a Plan
Exporting an Entire Plan
71
Compatibility with Previous Versions

Plans produced in the following programs
can all be read by Chief Architect 10.0.
Chief Architect 5.0 through 9.5,
3D Home Architect 3.0 and 4.0
Chief Architect Home Edition 5.0
Home Designer 6.0
Home Designer 6.0 Suite
Home Designer 6.0 Pro
Trading Spaces Design Companion

Note: 3D Home Architect 5.0 was not developed by Advanced Relational Technology.
Plans written using 3D Home Architect 5.0 or
later cannot be read by Chief Architect 10.0.
If you want to continue to read plans that

were produced in an earlier version of Chief
Architect or 3D Home Architect in that
original program, be sure to save duplicate
copies of your files before opening them in
Chief Architect 10.0. The copies which have
never been saved by Chief Architect 10.0
may still be read by the version in which they
were created.
Several steps are required to successfully

convert plans to the Chief Architect 10.0
format.
Before opening a legacy plan, click on

Edit> Preferences...
Preferences dialog.
to open the
On the Font panel, select the Legacy Text

Conversion and Legacy Dimension Conversion fonts needed for your plan.
On the Text & Page Setup panel, click

on the Legacy Plan Page Setup and
Legacy Layout Page Setup buttons to
select the settings needed for your plan.
On the Layers panel, choose whether to

purge unused layers in the plan and
whether to retain layer numbers along
with the names.
Only the .PL1 and .LA1 files from prior

versions can be opened in version 10.0.
If you notice any problems with symbols
placed using earlier versions, delete the
symbol and replace it with a new symbol
from a Chief Architect 10.0 library.
After performing these steps select File>

Save As...
to save the plan.
Creating a New Plan

When Chief Architect is opened, a new,
blank plan is automatically created. This file
is called Untitled. Unless this plan is named
and saved, it will be lost when it is closed. A
new blank plan can be created by choosing
File> New Plan
72
New plan files are created as a copy of the

current Template Plan specified in the
Preferences dialog. See Template Plans
on page 79. Commonly used settings and
defaults are included in the template plan
file. You should open this file and customize
the settings to fit your work style. See To

create your own template plan on page 80.
If no plan template has been specified in your
preferences, a new plan will be created using
the system defaults. System defaults cannot
be modified in the template plan.
New plan files will be created in either
Imperial or Metric units of measurement,
depending on the current units setting in the
New Plans panel of the Preferences
dialog. When the program is first installed,

the Windows OS setting for units determines
which system is used.
The units of measurement must be specified
before a plan is created and cannot be
changed later. If you normally work in one
set of units but need to create a new plan in
the other, use the File> Open Template
feature to open up an appropriate template
plan without changing your Preferences.
A new blank layout may be created at any

time by choosing File> New Layout
.
The layout file is called Untitled.layout.
The new layout is created as a copy of the
current Layout Template specified in the
Preferences dialog. See New Plans
Panel on page 103. Commonly used

settings, title blocks, and any other data you
want to use for your layouts are included in
the template layout file. You should open this
file and change the settings to fit your work
style. See To create your own template
plan on page 80.
Saving a Plan or Layout File

When a new plan file is first saved, it must be
named. By default, a new layout file will use
the same name of the first plan file which is
sent to it, associating the layout files with the
plan files used. Once you understand the file
management of Chief Architect, you should
decide upon a naming convention that suits
your needs. Select File> Save
the Save Plan File dialog.
to bring up
In the File name text box, enter a name for
the plan. Chief Architect will automatically
attach the extension .plan to plan files and
attach the extension .layout when a layout
file is saved.
73
File
Management
Initially, all Open or Save As operations go

to the "My Documents" folder of your
computer. After that, the path last visited is
remembered and subsequent File> Open or
File> Save As
commands default to that
directory. This path is saved when the
program exits. The next time Chief Architect
is launched, these defaults are used.
This behavior can be changed to use a

specific directory every time you perform an
Open or Save As operation. To do this,
modify the settings in the Preferences
dialog. See New Plans Panel on page 103.
Its a good idea to keep plans separate from
the support files needed to run Chief
Architect. To keep files organized, it is
helpful to create a new folder for each
project.
Save and Save As

There are two options for saving plans and
layouts: File> Save
and File> Save As
.
File> Save
should normally be used for
saving your work.
Any saved cross section/elevation views and
CAD Details associated with the 3D model
are also saved with this command.
When saving a layout, the program saves all
pages of the layout, all of the links to the
various views saved in the layout, and all of
the CAD added to the .layout file.
File> Save As
is used whenever an
identical copy of a plan or layout needs to be
created. This command can also be used to
transfer a file to a new location or store it.
File> Save As
will save any other files
needed for that specific model in the correct
directory with the new name. This is the best
way to create backups of your models.
Although the program will warn you if
you try to exit without saving, it is a
good idea to get in the habit of saving plan
files before exiting the program.
Saving a Plan Thumbnail

A thumbnail is a miniature image that can be
created to help identify a file. Any view of a
plan such as a floor plan view or render
overview can be saved as the plan thumbnail.
The thumbnail will appear in the preview
window of the Open Plan File dialog and
in the Find Plan Wizard when using the
Search for Plans feature.
74
Thumbnails must be enabled on the General

panel of the Preferences dialog before
they can be created. You can choose to
generate small or large thumbnails on this
panel. See General Panel on page 100. To
save a thumbnail for the current plan, select
File> Save Plan Thumbnail
Auto Archive
You cannot save a plan thumbnail for a new

plan until after you have saved it and given
the plan a name. Thumbnails are saved using
the same filename as the current plan with
the _p.jpg file extension for plans and _l.jpg
for layouts. If a plan thumbnail already

exists, you will get a warning message
asking if you want to overwrite the existing
thumbnail.
Auto Archive
In the event that your computer shuts down
accidentally, you can recover your work by
opening the most recent auto save files.
Auto save files created as a result of an
improper shutdown are appended
_auto_save.plan or _auto_save.layout.
File
Management
When a plan is first saved, Chief Architect

creates an archive folder at the same location
as the .plan file. The archive folder contains
autosave files and archive files.
Automatically generated archive folder
Auto Save Files

Chief Architect automatically creates auto
save files at regular intervals. A plan will be
auto saved if changes have been made but
not yet manually saved by clicking the Save
button, selecting File> Save
from the
menu, or pressing Ctrl + S on the keyboard.
The enabling and frequency of auto save is
set on the General panel of the
Preferences dialog. See General Panel
on page 100.
.PL, .LA and related files from previous
versions of the program are automatically
moved to the archive folder when the legacy
plan is opened and saved in Chief Archtect
10.0.
Auto save file generated

from abnormal shut down
When you reopen a file after a computer shut

down or system crash, the following dialog
will display if an auto save file newer than
the original file is found.
Auto save files created as a result of a proper

shutdown are appended
_auto_save_bak.plan or
_auto_save_bak.layout.
75
renaming convention is determined on the

General panel of the Preferences dialog.
See General Panel on page 100. Any
existing archive files will be overwritten by
the most recently saved plan.
To open an archive file, select File> Open,
browse to the archive folder where your plan
files are saved, and select an archive file.
Auto save file generated
from normal shut down
Note: If you recover an archive file and do not

save it to a new location, you will create a
new archive folder as a sub-folder of the original archive folder. Pathnames exceeding 260
characters cannot be opened by Chief Architect.
Even with auto save active, you should save

your work manually on a regular basis. You
can save your work using any of the
following methods.
Click the Save
Select File> Save
Press
Ctrl
Manage Archives
button.
from the menu.
+ S on the keyboard.
Archive Files
Every time a model is saved, internal archive
files are automatically created that keep a
historical archive of your plan.
Previous
Save
Chief Architect offers a convenient means of

displaying the archived files for the current
plan. You can access the Manage Archives
feature in two ways:
Select File> Manage Auto Archives

from the menu to open the archive folder
for the current plan.
Exceed the Auto Archive Files value for

number of archived files and click Yes in
the Archived Files dialog. The Auto
Archive Files value can be set on the
General panel of the Preferences dialog. See General Panel on page 100.
Daily
Hourly
Archive folder illustrating
all three archive options
Files may be archived by hour, day or most

recent save and are renamed according to
which archive option is chosen. This
76
Once in the archives folder, you can move or

delete archived files.
Undo Files
Undo Files
Chief Architect stores a set number of copies
of all open plan file changes, known as undo
files. Undo files are stored in the Undo
Directory, which can be specified on the
Directories panel of the Preferences
dialog. See Directories Panel on page 102.
By default, the undo directory is the
Windows Temporary Directory. When you
use Windows system cleanup features, these
files can be deleted. You should, therefore,
only do this when Chief Architect is not

running.
The maximum number of Undo files is
specified in the Maximum Undos value in
the Preference settings. If you have Undo
enabled, be sure to define a directory on a
hard drive with enough space for these files.
When Chief Architect is closed normally,
any current Undo files are deleted.
Select File> Open Plan

to open an
existing .plan file; or choose File> Open
Layout
to open an existing .layout file.
Chief Architect will automatically browse to
either the directory last used or to a specific
directory, depending on your current
Preference settings.
In the main window, all available plans of the

chosen type located in the current directory
display. When a file is selected, a thumbnail
preview of the plan will be displayed.
To open files of a different type, select one
from the Files of type list.
The Open Plan File and Open Layout
File dialogs can be resized to display more
files.
77
File
Management
Opening a Plan or Layout File
The available files of the type specified will

display on the left. Click on any available file
and it will display in the File name box.
Click OK to open it.
Once the .plan file is opened, any floor of the
model can be accessed by clicking the
Change Floor
buttons on the toolbar.
The names of the last four plan files you have

opened or saved appear at the bottom of the
File menu. Clicking on a recent file will open
the file without having to use the Open
Plan File dialog. To display more or less
files in this list, you can change the
maximum number of recent files in the
Preferences dialog on the General panel.
See General Panel on page 100.
Project Browser
The Project Browser is a convenient
interface that allows quick access to all
of the floors, cameras, elevations, CAD
Details, Wall Details, and Materials Lists
saved with the current plan. The Project
Browser is shared with the Library Browser
in the Plan Browser window. It can be
docked to the top, bottom, or sides of the
Chief Architect window or float freely.
1
2
3
To open the Plan Browser directly, select

Tools> Project Browser...
. You can also
use one of the many methods to open the
Library Browser, then simply click on the
Project Browser tab. See The Library
Files displayed in the Plan Browser can be
opened by double-clicking on them. In
addition, some files can be re-named by
right-clicking on them.
4
5
6
Plan Browser in a floating state (not docked)
1 Any CAD details you have saved with
the plan display here. Right-click on a

CAD detail name to rename it.
2 Any vector views or render views you
have saved with your plan display here
78
Template Plans
by floor. Cameras can be saved or renamed

from within the plan view by selecting and
opening the camera object. See Saving 3D
Views on page 635.
3 Any saved cross sections/elevations

display here. These views can be saved
or renamed by opening the camera object.
See Saving 3D Views on page 635.
4 All of the Floors in the current plan
display here. Double-click on a floor to

go to the floor plan view for that floor.
5 Whenever wall framing is generated,
wall details are automatically created as

well and will display here by floor. See Wall
6 All materials lists that have been saved
with the current plan display here. See

Materials Lists on page 937.
When Chief Architect opens, a new, blank

plan file is opened. This new plan is actually
a template with set defaults and preferences.
You can create your own template files for
both plans and layouts and can specify which
templates the program will refer to. Template
files for metric as well as imperial plans can
be created and customized to include the
defaults and preferences that you regularly
use.
To designate which template to use as

default, select Edit> Preferences>
General> New Plans. See New Plans
Panel on page 103.
The programs default template files are

called profile.plan and profileM.plan for
metric plans. When any template file is
opened, its name is automatically changed to
untitled.plan to make sure that you do not
overwrite it.
If you have more than one configuration that

you like to use, you can create additional
template plans and open whichever template
is needed for a project.
Once you are familiar with the Default

Setups for Chief Architect, you can create
template plan files to fit your needs; store
them in the plan templates directory; and set
the files of your choice as the defaults for
new files.
You can designate the template directory that
you would like to use by selecting Edit>
Preferences> General> Directories.
Any changes made to your default template

will cause all subsequently drawn plans to be
created with the new default settings.
Opening Template Plans
Choose File> Open Template

to create a
new plan or layout file using a different
template than the current default specified in
your preferences.
When opening a template plan, the program
will browse to the Templates directory which
has been specified in the Directories tab of
the Preferences dialog.
When a template plan is opened, the program
behaves almost the same as when File> New
79
File
Management
Template Plans
Plan
or File> New Layout
is
selected. The only difference is that you will
be using the specified template plan for all of
the settings and default values instead of
your default template plan.
Note: Make sure that when you create a template plan, you use the appropriate units. The
units used in the new plan will be the same as
when the file was saved.
To create your own template plan

1.
Select File> New Plan
2.
Go to the Edit> Defaults Settings...

menu and go through each menu item,
opening up the dialogs and modifying
the settings as needed. See Default Settings on page 88.
3.
If you draw anything in the template

plan, it will appear in all new plans created with that template.
4.
After modifying all of your default settings, select File> Save As...
to save
your changes under a new name.
5.
Navigate to the templates directory and

name the file.
6.
You can then select File> Close. The

template plan is now available by selecting File> Open Template
To set a template plan as your default

1.
Go to the Edit> Preferences> General> New Plans panel and click the
Browse button.
2.
Navigate to the Templates directory and

select a template plan.
Note: You should back up any template files

you are using. You can access these and
back them up using Windows Explorer.
Updating Templates
When you make a change to the settings
within a plan file, the template plan is not
affected. To change the default settings in
your template, you must open the template
file, make the change and choose File> Save
. Another option is to select File> Save
As...
in the current plan file and save it in
the Templates directory as a new template.
You may want to delete any drawings to
prevent them from becoming part of the
template.
Searching for Plans

Choose File> Search for Plans...
to
locate an existing plan. This command opens
the Plan Find Wizard which allows you to
search specific plan database files and define
specific search parameters.
80
Plan Find Wizard

The Plan Find Wizard can be used to
search for plans using stored information
about each plan such as the style of
construction or the number of a specified
type of rooms.
Searching for Plans
Click the Next button to select the style of

house desired, the number of floors in the
house, and the number of bedrooms. This
page will display the number of plans which
match your current search parameters. As
you modify the parameters, you will see this
number increase or decrease as matching
plans are found.
Click the Next button to select the number of
bathrooms, size and desired price range. As
you modify these parameters, the number of
matching plans will increase and decrease.
Click the Next button to see each of the plans
which match your current search parameters.
Selecting any of the available plans will
display a preview picture of the plan, if one
exists. See Saving a Plan Thumbnail on
page 74.
Select the Back button to modify any
previous selected parameters, which will
then show you a new list of plans.
the Plan Find Wizard. The Create Plan

Database dialog opens.
1
2
3
1 The Database File field allows you to
name the plan database file to be

created. Click the Browse button to save this
file at the location of your choice. If you
choose a plan database file that already
exists, the program will ask you if you want
to overwrite the existing file.
2 The Plan Search Path allows you to
specify the folder which will hold the

plans included in the plan database. The
program will search for any plan files that
exist in this folder and add entries in the plan
database for them. You can navigate to a
particular folder on your machine using the
Browse button.
3 The Include Subfolders checkbox
allows you to specify whether or not the

search will only look in the Plan Search Path
or if it will also search any subfolders found.
Select Tools> Plans Database> Create Plan
When the OK button is selected the program

will search for plan files and add them to the
plan database file. The program must read
each plan and analyze it so this process may
take a while. While the program is searching,
it will display a temporary dialog indicating
which plans are being processed.
Database
to create a new plan database
file that can be used to search for plans using
You can Cancel the search process at any

time. If you do, your plan database will have
Select Next and then the Finish button to

open the desired plan.
Creating a Plan Database File
81
File
Management
When you open the Plan Find Wizard,

choose a Plan Find Database file to search.
When you first run Chief Architect, you will
find only one Plan Find Database containing
the sample plans that come with the program.
Click on the Browse button to select a
different plan find database file. Additional
plan file databases must be created before
you can use the Plan Find Wizard to
locate files you have created.
incomplete information and will not contain

entries for all plans in your search folder.
When all plans have been found and added to
the plan database, the program will
automatically open the new plan database
file for modification.
Modifying a Plan Database File

Once a plan database file has been created, it
it can be modified. You can edit any of the
information in the plan database as well as
add and remove plans from the database.
Select Tools> Plans Database> Edit Plan
Database
to modify an existing plan
database file.
First, select the plan database file you want

to modify. Click OK to open the Edit Plan
Database dialog.
Edit Plan Database Dialog
1
7
9
11
6
8
13
10
12
14
2
3
5
1 Plans in the Database - All plans that
remove the currently selected plan file

from the plan database.
2 Add Plan - Click this button to select a
4 Select File - Click this button to relink
plan file to add to the plan database.
82
3 Remove Plan - Click this button to
currently have information stored in the

plan database display here.
the entry in the plan database to a plan
5 Open Plan - Click this button to open

any of the plans referenced in the plan
database. Opening a plan will close the Plan
Database dialog. If you have not saved any
changes you have made before clicking the
Open Plan button, you will be prompted to
do so before you can continue.
6 Style - Select a plan style from the drop
down list for the selected plan. You can

also create a new plan style by typing in the
name of the new style in the blank area.
Price - Enter the price range for this

plan.
8 Area - The area is automatically
calculated by the program based on the

living area of the plan when a plan is added
to the database. You can modify this data and
enter your own area if desired.
9 Bedrooms - The number of bedrooms
is automatically calculated by the

program when a plan is added to the
database. You can modify this data and enter
your own number of bedrooms.
10 Baths - The number of bathrooms is
automatically calculated by the

your own number of bathrooms.
11 Floors - The number of floors is
automatically calculated by the

your own number of floors.
12 Description - You can enter a
description for the plan if desired. This

description will display when a plan is found
and selected using the Search for Plans tool.
13 Plan Thumbnail - A thumbnail
preview can be created for any plan.

See Saving a Plan Thumbnail on page 74.
14 File Path - The file path of the selected

plan displays here.

Choose File> Close to close the active
window. If this is the last open view for a
plan and you did not save first, the program
will remind you to save before it is closed.
cross section/elevation views will also
prompt you to save changes before closing.
Select Yes to save it, or No to close the

window without saving. Select Cancel to
close the dialog and return to the window.
Choose File> Close All from the menu to
close all currently open windows.
Exiting Chief Architect

Select File> Exit from the menu to exit the
program. If you have not saved any open
83
File
Management
file on your system. If a plan file is been

removed, renamed, or moved on your system
the plan find database will not know how to
locate the file. You must then relink the plan
database to the file or remove it to keep the
plan database information accurate.
plans, you will be prompted to do so. It is

better to actively save your work before
exiting the program than to save on exit.
When you exit from the program using File>

Exit, all Autosave files and Undo files are
automatically deleted.
Exporting a Plan
One of the simplest ways to transfer a model
to another directory or another machine is to
use the Save As
feature. Open the plan in
Chief Architect; choose File> Save As

;
and save to the desired drive location and
directory. The program will make sure that
all plan files are saved along with the new
copy. This is a good way to create backups of
your work.
It is important to know that plan files can
have references to other external data files
such as imported bitmaps, textures, images,
backdrops, and pattern files. These external
files will not be automatically saved with the
plan files with the Save As
command. If
you transfer a set of plan files from one
machine to another, you may see warning
messages when the files are opened on a new
machine that these referenced files are not
present. When transferring plans to another
machine that does not include the external
files, it is usually better to use File> Export
Entire Plan
instead of File> Save As
. See Exporting an Entire Plan on page

84.
When transferring layout files, be aware that
the plan files are also external file references
and are not actually contained in the layout
file. Using Save As
on a layout file will
only copy the layout file and will not copy
any of the referenced plan files. You should
always use the File> Export Entire Plan
to copy all of the associated files instead
of Save As
for layout files.
Individual files can also be copied or

transferred manually with Windows
Explorer. After transferring files manually,
be sure to open the copy and look for any
error messages about missing files.
It is recommended that you store all files for
a single job in the same folder so that you can
keep all of the associated files in a single
place. If you use this strategy, it will be much
easier to transfer files because you can use
Windows Explorer to copy the entire folder.

Because Chief Architect plans and layouts
often contain many references to other
external files, it is sometimes necessary to
save or copy all of the associated files to a
new location. This can be useful when trying
84
to transfer plan files to another machine or

when sending them to another user. It is also
useful for archiving plan or layout files
because all externally referenced or linked
files are included.
Note: Always use File> Export> Entire Plan

when sending files to a user of the Chief
Architect Client Viewer to make sure that they
have all associated data.
Choosing Export All Files will copy all plan

or layout files as well as all externally
referenced files such as linked plan files,
inserted picture files, custom pattern files,
and any graphics files such as textures,
images, and backdrops.
Choosing Export Plan Files Only will copy
all associated plan files as well as any
externally linked files and inserted picture
files but it will not copy any graphics or
pattern files. This is best used when
transferring a plan or layout file to a machine
which already has the graphics files installed.
The Browse for Folder dialog allows you

to select the destination folder for the
associated plan files. You can navigate to any
folder on your system, to an external storage
device, or you can create a new folder.
You must select a folder which is currently empty for the Export Entire Plan
feature to work properly. If you select an
existing folder which is not empty, you will get
a warning message and the export will be
cancelled.
While the files are being copied you will see

a temporary dialog that displays the files
being copied. When the export is complete
this dialog will disappear.
Once you have clicked the OK button on the
Export Entire Plan dialog, the program

will display the Browse for Folder dialog.
85
File
Management
Choose File> Export> Entire Plan...

to
copy all associated plan or layout files to a
new directory. The Export Entire Plan
dialog will open, allowing you to choose
what files will be copied.
86
Chapter 4:
Defaults &
Preferences
Chapter Overview
If you use special settings regularly, it is

a good idea to save your settings in a
template plan. See To create your own template plan on page 80.
Chapter Contents
Default Settings
Dynamic Defaults
Plan Defaults
Reset to Defaults
Preferences Dialog
Appearance Panel
Colors Panel
Font Panel
Library Browser Panel
Text and Page Setup Panel
General Panel
Directories Panel
New Plans Panel
Layers Panel
Unit Conversions Panel
Architectural Panel
CAD Panel
Line Properties Panel
Snap Properties Panel
Special CAD Panel
Time Tracker Panel
Material List Panel
Report Style Panel
Master List Panel
Categories Panel
Render Panel
Texture Filter Panel
Reset Options Panel
Defaults &
Preferences
Becoming familiar with the program defaults

and preferences is vital to understanding how
Chief Architect works.
87
Default Settings
Defaults play an important role in Chief
Architects design process. When prepared
and used properly, defaults can save a lot of
time. It is a good idea to become familiar
with the default settings for the many objects
that can be used in a plan.
Default Settings can be accessed by
selecting Edit> Default Settings....
Dimension Defaults
Select Dimension and click the Edit button;
or double-click the Dimension Tools
parent button to display the Dimension
Defaults dialog. See Dimension Fonts on
page 682.
Door Defaults
Select Interior Door or Exterior Door or
double-click the Door Tools
parent button to open the Door Defaults dialog. See
Door Defaults on page 229.
Dormer Defaults
Select Dormer and click the Edit button; or
double-click the Auto Floating Dormer
or the Auto Dormer
child button to open
the Dormer Defaults dialog. See Dormer
Electrical Defaults
Cabinet Defaults
Select Cabinets and click the Edit button; or
double-click the Cabinet Tools
parent
button to access the defaults dialogs for the
different cabinet types. See Cabinet
Camera Defaults
88
Select Electrical and click the Edit button;

or double-click the Electrical Tools
parent button to display the Electrical
Defaults dialog. See Electrical Defaults
on page 441.
Floor Defaults
Select Floor and click the Edit button;
Select Camera and click the Edit button; or
double-click the Floor Tools
double-click the Render Tools

parent
button to display the Camera Defaults
dialog. See Camera Defaults on page 643.
ton; or click the Floor Defaults

child
button to open the Floor Defaults dialog
parent but-
Default Settings
for the current floor. See Floor Defaults on

page 267.
Foundation Defaults
Select Foundation and click the Edit button
or click the Build Foundation
child
button to open the Build Foundation
dialog. See Foundation Defaults on page
273.
Framing Defaults
Select Framing and click the Edit button; or
double-click the Framing Tools
parent
button to open the Framing Defaults
dialog. See Framing Defaults on page 377.
Road, Sidewalk, &

Driveway Defaults
Select Road and click the Edit button; or
double-click the Road Tools
parent button to open the Road Defaults dialog.
Select Driveway and click the Edit button;
or double-click the Driveway
child
button to open the Driveway Defaults
dialog.
Select Road Marking and click the Edit
button; or double-click the Road Stripe
or Road Marking
the Road Marking Defaults dialog.
Select Sidewalk and click the Edit button; or
Select General Materials and click the Edit

button to open the Material Defaults
dialog. See Material Defaults Dialog on
page 614.
Select Room Materials and click the Edit
button to open the Room Material
Defaults dialog for the current floor. See
Room Material Defaults on page 186.
Plan Defaults
Select Plan and click the Edit button; or
double-click the Select Objects
button
to open the Plan Defaults dialog. See
Plan Defaults on page 91.
double-click the Sidewalk

child button
to open the Sidewalk Defaults dialog.
See Road and Sidewalk Defaults on page
529.
Schedule Defaults
Select Schedules to choose from the
schedule default dialogs for various objects.
See Schedule Defaults on page 927.
Text, Callout, &

Marker Defaults
Select Text and click the Edit button; or
double-click the Text Tools
parent button
to display the Text Defaults dialog. See
Text Defaults on page 714.
Select Callouts and click the Edit button; or
double-click the Callout
child button to
display the Callout Defaults dialog. See
Callout/Marker Defaults on page 717.
89
Defaults &
Preferences
Material Defaults
Select Markers and click the Edit... button;
Select Deck Railing and click the Edit but-
or double-click the Marker

child button
to display the Marker Defaults dialog. See
ton; or double-click the Deck Railing

child button to open the Railing Defaults
dialog. See Railing Defaults Dialog on
page 183.
Select Arrow and click the Edit... button; or

double-click the Text Line With Arrow
child button or CAD Line with Arrow
button to open the Arrow Defaults dialog.
See Arrow Defaults on page 715.
Wall, Railing, and

Fencing Defaults
Select Walls> Wall and click the Edit...
Select Fencing and click the Edit button; or

double-click the Fencing
child button to
open the Fencing Defaults dialog. See
Fencing Defaults Dialog on page 183.
Window Defaults
Select Window and click the Edit... button;
button; or double-click the Wall Tools

parent button to set defaults for interior and
exterior walls. See Wall Defaults on page
130.
or double-click the Window Tools

parent button to open the Window
Defaults dialog. See Window Defaults on
page 231.
Select Pony Wall and click the Edit button;
Reset Defaults
or double-click the Pony Wall

child
button to open the Pony Wall Defaults
dialog. See Pony Wall Defaults Dialog on
page 182.
Select Edit> Reset to Defaults... to open the

Reset to Defaults dialog and clear special
settings made in various parts of your plan.
See Reset to Defaults on page 93.
Select Railing and click the Edit button; or

double-click the Railing
child button to
open the Railing Defaults dialog. See
Railing Defaults Dialog on page 183.
Edit> Preferences
Select Edit> Preferences... or click the
Preferences
button to open the
Preferences dialog. See Preferences
Dialog on page 94.
Dynamic Defaults
Dynamic defaults are values that can be set
or changed globally throughout a model and
are found in the default specification dialogs
of most objects, including walls, doors,
cabinets and rooms.
90
Dynamic default values are followed by a

"(D)", indicating that the value can be
changed in the default setup for that type of
object and all objects in the model of the
same type will be updated automatically.
Plan Defaults
Any object for which one of these values has

been previously edited it will not be updated
when the default value is changed.
To edit a dynamic default, the "(D)" must be
deleted or the default value will be reapplied
automatically. To reset a value to the
dynamic default, or to see if a value is
dynamic, type a "d" in an entry box. If a new
value appears with the "(D)" following it, the
value is dynamic. If the box will not accept a
"d" as an entry, the value does not have a
dynamic default.
Any object that uses a material is really using

a dynamic default as well. Materials are
almost always set to "Use Default". If you
change a default material, many objects in
the plan will also change. See Material
Defaults Dialog on page 614.
CAD objects use layers in much the same
way that other objects use dynamic defaults.
If you change the layer information in the
Layer Display Options dialog, any object
which is currently using the settings "By
Layer" for an attribute, such as line style or
color, will be updated whenever those
settings are changed. See Current CAD
Layer on page 126.
Defaults &
Preferences
Plan Defaults
Plan defaults control basic features of the
Chief Architect environment. To open the
Plan Defaults dialog, select Edit> Default
Settings...
; select Plan Defaults; and
click the Edit... button; or, double-click the
Select Objects
button.
91
Plan Defaults Dialog

1
1 Warn Before Delete Selected Item -
Check this box if you want the program

to require confirmation before an item is
deleted.
Ignore Casing for Opening Resize - Check
this box to allow openings such as doors to
be moved right up to an intersecting wall. If
this is cleared, the program openings to be
placed within the specified trim width of an
intersecting wall.
Fixture/Furniture Resize Enable - Check
this box to allow the resizing of library
symbols in floor plan or any 3D view
Show Pitch as Degrees - Check this box to
display the roof pitch in degrees.
Show Living Area - Select the check box
to display the total Living Area label in floor
plan view.
92
Enter the number of Inches Scrolled by

Arrow Key in floor plan view.
2 Select allowed angles of 15 Degrees to
enable angle snapping in 15 degree

increments.
Select 7 1/2 Degrees and additional angles

to enable angle snapping in 7 degree
increments. You can enter Additional
Angles in the fields provided.
3 The Snapping Grid allows you to snap
to specific points on screen. To enable

grid snapping, check Use Snap Grid/Units
and choose the Snap Unit at which you want
snapping to occur.
You can snap to an invisible grid, or you can
choose to Show Snap Grid which will give
you a visual indicator of where the snap
points are. You can also choose the Snap
Grid Color, and whether the snap grid
should Display as Dots.
Reset to Defaults
4 Choose whether to Show Reference
Grid, choose the Reference Grid Size,

and choose the Grid Color. You can also
choose whether the reference grid should
Display as Dots, or as lines.
You can click the Display Reference Grid

toggle button to turn on/off the grid
display. For more information, see Grid
Snapping on page 785.
Reset to Defaults
the roof to be built over this room, and others
in its same roof group, independently from
the roof built over other parts of the plan.
Check to reset to the default roof group, zero.
4 Roof Directives - Directives describing
2
3
5
how a roof surface will rise from a wall

can be set into a wall using the Roof tab of
the Wall Specification dialog. All Roof
tab items are unchecked and any value, such
as the roof pitch, is reset to the default pitch.
5 Wall Top Heights and Wall Bottom
Select Edit> Reset to Defaults to open the

Reset to Defaults dialog.
This dialog allows special settings you have
made in various parts of your plan to be
cleared.
1 The settings can be cleared for the

current floor or for all floors.
2 Floor and Ceiling Heights - Floor and
ceiling heights for any room can be

changed in the Room Specification
dialog. Check to reset the default values as
specified in the Floor Defaults dialog. See
Floor Defaults on page 267.
If your plan behaves strangely, the current settings may have been inherited
and no longer appropriate. An easy way to
check for this is to open your plan and reset
these items to their defaults. Rebuild floors
and ceilings to see if the plan looks better. If
so, you know what the problem is. Rather
than save your plan at this point and lose all
these settings, you may want to investigate
and find the specific settings causing the
problem and fix only those.
3 Roof Groups - You can designate a
different roof group for a room in the
Room Specification dialog. This causes
93
Defaults &
Preferences
Heights - Wall shape and height can be

edited in cross section/elevation views.
Check to reset wall shapes and heights.
Preferences Dialog
In the Preferences dialog, you can
define global setting which apply
across the Chief Architect application rather
than to one specific plan. Select Edit>
Preferences
to access this dialog.
The category tree structure is similar to other

Windows programs. A + next to a category
indicates that it has subcategories to choose
from. Click the + to make the
subcategories visible.
The Preferences dialog consists of panels.

Each panel is accessed by clicking on its
name in the category tree along the left side.
The + then becomes a -; to hide the

subcategories, press the -.
Appearance Panel
4
1 Contextual Menus allow you to access
a pop-up menu when you right-click in
94
the program. If you right-click on an object, a

contextual pop-up menu displays options
Appearance Panel
Enabled - Select the check box to activate

contextual menus. Clear the check box to
disable contextual menus.
Click Twice to Ddisplay is used in order to
require two right-clicks on an object before
the contextual menu displays. This allows
the first right-click to be a general select
without having to use the contextual menu. A
double right-click is required to display the
contextual menus.
All the options available in the Edit toolbar
are usually available in the contextual menu.
The following example shows a selected
cabinet with the the contextual menu
displayed. Note that the options correspond
with the edit toolbar buttons.
3 Show Status Bar - Specify where and

when the status bar displays:
Always - Displays the status bar at the

bottom of the program, below the scroll bar.
A description appears there when you move
above a toolbar button or menu item. Always
is the default and is used by most people.
Only As Needed causes the information to
pop-up below the scroll bar whenever you
move above a toolbar button or menu item,
but otherwise will not display.
In Title Bar displays the online help in the
title bar whenever you move the pointer over
a tool or menu item.
4 Enter a value for the Handle Size. The
selection handles will appear twice this

size plus one, in pixels. For example, the
default value is 3, which results in a handle
that is 7 x 7 pixels (3 x 2=6 + 1=7). A value
of 1 will result in a handle that is 3 x 3 pixels.
The allowed range is from 1 to 10.
If you find that it is difficult to select a
handle for an object, you may want to
increase this number. If you find that the
handles get in the way of your work, you
may want to decrease it.
5 Check Show Line Weight to have the
2 Status Bar Objects - Check this box to
line weight display on screen. Because

of monitor resolution, lines may appear to be
much wider on screen than when they are
printed. Zooming closer reflects a more
accurate idea of the actual line width.
display the coordinates of your cursor

at all times in the status bar.
95
Defaults &
Preferences
appropriate to the object. If you right-click in

the window away from any object, a different
menu selection displays. Since Chief
Architect can use the right-click as a general
select, you have the option to disable or limit
the contextual menus.
The line weight for CAD objects may be

defined individually through each
objects specification dialog or globally in the
Layer Display Options dialog.
Check Show Screen Redraw Time to

display the number of seconds it takes to
redraw the screen. This is particularly useful
for determining the effectiveness of the 3D
acceleration of your graphics card.
6 Show Icons - Check this box to display

tool icons next to items in the menus.
7 Double Buffer Drawing - Double
buffering means that all drawing is

done to an offscreen bitmap and then copied
to the screen. The result is that the screen
will not flicker; however, it will not display
individual objects as they are drawn. Some
people like to see things as they draw,

especially when there is a lot to draw. This
option does not affect render and raytrace
views.
Check Plans and Layouts to to double
buffer in floor plan view and layouts.
Check Elevations and Vector Views to
double buffer in elevations and vector views.
Check Auto Cache to save a bitmap of the
last screen draw. This bitmap will be used for
refreshing the screen if no changes have been
made to the model. If a window is in front of
the current view this will not work. If the
draw time is less than twice the time it takes
to do the cache it will not do a cache. This is
particularly useful for long renders or in
complicated 3D views where redraw times
are significant. This is on by default.
Colors Panel
2
3
4
5
1 Click Colors to define background and

reference colors in Chief Architect.
2 Background Color - Click the
rectangle to open the standard Windows

Color Chooser dialog. Select the
background color for all views except render
views. The background color for render
96
views is set in the 3D Settings dialog. See

Backdrop Tab on page 648.
3 Reference Plan Color - Click the
rectangle to open the Color Chooser

dialog. Select the color you would like the
lines of the reference floor to be. See
Reference Floor on page 271.
Font Panel
4 Move Color - Click the rectangle to
open the Color Chooser dialog.

Select the color of the lines that represent
object(s) as they are being moved.
5 Handle Fill Color - Click the rectangle
to open the Color Chooser dialog.

Select the color that you would like the edit
handles for selected objects to be.
If the move color and the handle fill

color are similar it may be difficult to distinguish between active and inactive points.
The colors should be sufficiently dissimilar to
avoid confusion between active and inactive
points.
Font Panel
2
3
Defaults &
Preferences
1 Click Font to define font settings in
Chief Architect. See Sizing Text on page

708.
2 Choose Legacy Text Conversion;
Legacy Dimension Conversion sets the

fonts for dimensions created in previous
versions of Chief Architect. See Sizing
Text on page 708.
Chief Architect.
Legacy Dimension Conversion; or

Materials to define the font for that usage.
Legacy Text Conversion sets the default
font for text created in previous versions of
97
Legacy Text and Dimension Conversion settings only affect plans from
previous versions when they are
opened in Version 10. You should set these
values to your default font that you used in
previous versions before you open your legacy plans.
Materials sets the default font for the

Material List and Master Material List
created in previous versions of Chief
Architect.
3 Click the arrow to select a font for the
specified usage. The program finds the

fonts currently installed on the computer and
makes them available for use.
4 Select one or more font styles to apply

to the specified usage.
5 Sample text displays the selected font

and font style.
The reference font size is 16. Set the size of

text objects individually in the Text
Specification dialog or globally on the
Text Objects panel of the Preferences
dialog.
Library Browser Panel
1
2
3
4
98
The Library Browser panel controls the

display of the Library Browser window.
1 View items determine the display of the

main sections of the Library Browser.
Hide Selection Pane - Check to hide the

pane that displays objects in a selected
library or library folder.
Hide Preview Pane - Check to hide the pane
that shows a preview of a selected object.
2 Selection Pane View items control the
display style of objects in the Selection

Pane.
Tiled to Fit Window - Select to display all
objects in a library or library folder. If there
are many objects, this option will cause them
to appear very small.
Scrollable List - Select to display all library
objects at the highlighted level on a
scrollable list.
Show Names in Selection Pane - Check to

display the names of the objects in the
Selection Pane.
3 Preview Pane - Selection Pane
Layout - Select a radio button to

change the appearance of the Library
Browser. See Docking the Library
Vertical - Displayed sections of the Library
Browser are divided vertically.
Horizontal - Displayed sections are divided
horizontally.
Stacked - Displayed sections are divided
both horizontally and vertically.
4 Disable Docking - Check to prevent
the Library Browser from docking to

the sides of the Chief Architect window.
Defaults &
Preferences
1
2
3
4
1 Room Label Initial Size - Specify the
initial size for room labels. Changing
this value has no effect on existing room

labels.
99
2 Check Text Specification Enter Key if
you would like to insert a new line in

the Text Specification dialog when the
Enter key is pressed. If this is not checked,
pressing Enter will close the Text
Specification dialog. See Text Specification Dialog on page 711.
3 Click the Legacy Plan Page Setup

button to open the Page Setup
dialog. These settings will be applied
whenever a plan, elevation, or CAD detail
created in an earlier version of Chief
Architect is opened. See Page Setup
Dialog on page 898.
4 Click the Legacy Layout Page Setup
button to open the Page Setup

dialog. These settings will be applied
whenever a layout file created in an earlier
version of Chief Architect is opened. See
Page Setup Dialog on page 898.
Legacy Plan and Layout Page Setup

settings only affect plans from previous
versions when they are opened in Version 10. You should set these values to the
default font that was used in previous versions of Chief Architect before opening legacy plans. See Upgrading Customers - What
You Need To Know on page 959.
General Panel
4
5
1 To use Auto Save, select the Enable
check box and enter a value greater

than zero to specify the frequency in minutes
100
that auto save files are created. Auto save

files are stored in the archive folder.
General Panel
selecting File> Save
In the event that your computer shuts down

unexpectedly, you can recover your most
recent work by opening the auto save file
created by the program. See Auto Save
Files on page 75.
2 File Locking - Choose whether or not
to lock files when they are open. Only

.plan and .layout files will be locked.
Locking a file prevents another program
from opening and modifying the same file at
the same time, which is important when
more than one computer has access to the
same set of files at the same time.
Select Use File Locking to lock files by
default.
Select Disable File Locking to disable the
feature. You should only disable the feature
if you have conflicts with file locking.
3 Recent File List - Specify the
maximum number of files to display at

the bottom of the File menu. Additional files
will display if the value has increased.
4 Undo - Click in the Enable check box

to enable Undos and Redos.
Maximum Undos - Specify how many

levels of Undo and Redo you want available,
from 1 to 100. Undo files are saved in the
Undo Directory.
Record undo state only if idle longer than Use this setting to control how often undo
states are recorded. If set to 0 milliseconds,
an undo state will be recorded every time a
change is made to a plan.
If set to a number larger than 0, an undo state

will be recorded if the specified amount of
time has elapsed since the last change was
made. Depending on the time specified and
the speed work is being done, multiple
changes might be reversed with one undo.
When set at 0, undo states are only recorded
when an edit is completely finished. When a
number larger than zero is set, undo states are
recorded after every action (move, rotate).
This setting can have a significant effect on
the performance of the undo feature when
working with large plans.
5 Check the Enable Cross Hair box to
utilize a cross hair cursor in floor plan,

elevation, cross section, and overview views.
Cross hair size is specified as a percentage of
window width. Choose 100% to extend the
cross hairs across the entire screen.
Click the color bar to open the Color
Chooser dialog and specify the color of the
cross hairs.
Set the Aperture Size, measured in pixels.
The aperture is the space at the location
where the cross hairs meet. A value of 0 will
cause the cross hairs to meet at a point.
Larger values set the cross hairs back from
the point.
6 Check the box to Enable Thumbnail
Images. Select a radio button for

Small or Large thumbnails. Large
thumbnails provide a higher quality image.
7 Auto Archive Files - Select an archive

option. Every time a model is saved by
clicking the Save

button, selecting File>
Save from the menu, or pressing Ctrl + S on
the keyboard the current archive file is
overwritten. See Archive Files on page 76.
101
Defaults &
Preferences
Note: Even with auto save active, you should

frequently save your work to the hard drive by
Select Hourly to save and append archive

files based on an hourly format.
Select Daily to save and append archive files
based on a daily format.
8 Auto Archive Warning - Enter the
number of files that must be in the

Archive directory for the Manage Archives
warning to appear. See Manage Archives
on page 76.
Select Previous Save to archive only the

most recently saved file, unappended.
Directories Panel
Chief Architect stores many support files in
directories. The default locations of these
directories are listed and, if necessary, can be
redefined in the Directories panel.
Default locations need not be changed under
normal circumstances. It is, however,
sometimes preferable to locate certain files in
another location. To define a new default
Temporary File Directories
102
directory, type a new directory pathname in

the text box; or click the Browse button to
specify a folder on your computer.
Individual files can be saved to a desired
location using the File> Save As
function.
By default, undo files are stored in the same

directory as temporary files. If you have the
New Plans Panel
ability to create a RAM drive, you may want

to specify a different directory for your undo
files to improve performance; however, you
must define a directory on a hard drive with
sufficient space to hold these files.
While it is possible to redefine any directory,
is advised that you neither relocate the
Temporary Directory nor use it for anything
other than temporary files.
Graphics Directories
Graphics are stored in three locations: the
Images, Textures, and Backdrops
directories.
Although it is not recommended, different default directories for your graphics

can be specified. You should never rename
these directories. If you do, the Chief Architect Library Browser will be unable to access
them.
You can rename or add a folder to any of

these directories as well as add your own
graphics to the library. If you add, rename, or
move any files or folders while Chief
Architect is running, you must refresh the
Library Browser to see your changes. See
Refresh Library Browser on page 568.
New Plans Panel
Defaults &
Preferences
1 New Plans - Select the Imperial Units
or Metric Units radio button to

determine the units used in your new plans.
Once a new plan has been created, the units

of that plan cannot be changed. You can
103
specify a different sest of templates for

imperial plans and metric plans.
When Chief Architect is first opened on a
computer, it will refer to the Windows
system settings to determine whether to use
Imperial or metric units.
If a template file is not specified or cannot be
found, the program will start a new plan in
the selected units but will use the system
defined defaults for new plans instead of the
settings from the template plan.
Note: Be sure that you use an imperial plan
for your imperial template file and a metric
plan for your metric template file. When a
new plan is created, the plan will be created
in the units of the template file regardless of
the units setting.
Plan Template - Displays the current plan

template file used when a new plan is started.
Select a new default template file by typing

in a new file pathname; or click the Browse
button to select the new template.
Layout Template - Displays the current
layout plan template used when a new layout
file is started. Select a new default layout
template by typing in a new file pathname; or
click the Browse button to select a new file.
For information about creating templates,
see Template Plans on page 79.
2 Open/Save As Directory - Control
how the program behaves when a new

plan is opened or an existing plan is saved.
Use Last Directory refers the program to the
directory last used to save or open a plan file.
Use This Directory refers the program to a
particular location specified by you. Click
the Browse button to define a particular
directory when using this option.
Layers Panel
Layers were managed differently in earlier

versions of Chief Architect. The options on
the Layers panel determine how layers will
be treated when opening plans created in
earlier versions of Chief Architect.
104
Check Purge Unused Layers to delete any

layers that do not have a name and contained
no objects.
Check Keep All Layer Numbers to keep all

layers that were on the System and User tabs,
and use their layer numbers as names.
Check Reset Default Layer Names to reset
the names of layers that were on the
Architectural and System tabs to the default
names used in Chief Architect Version 10.0.
If you would like your legacy plans to look

like they did in previous versions of Chief
Architect, uncheck Purge Unused Layers;
check Keep All Layer Numbers; and
uncheck Reset Default Layer Names.
Note: When loading legacy plans, there can

be a noticeable delay while converting these
layers.
1
2
In many places throughout Chief Architect,

you can choose what type of units are
displayed with different objects. Unit
conversions are locked and cannot be
changed; however, custom conversions can
be added to the list.
List of unit conversions that are

available is displayed.
Defaults &
Preferences
2 Sample - This area shows how the
selected unit converts to a sampling of

similar units. Use this to verify that any unit
conversion you have added is correct.
3 Add, Edit, Delete, or Copy the unit
conversions. Certain unit conversions

are locked and cannot be edited or deleted.
105
When you Add, Edit or Copy a unit you will

be presented with the corresponding Unit
Conversion dialog that specifies the action
being performed. All three dialogs function

similarly.
1
3
Example
1 Unit Name - Type the name of the unit.

Names must be unique.
2 Default Unit - Check this box to

display this unit in places that present
lists of available units. For example, if you
have in, and inches as units and make inches
a default unit, that will be the unit displayed
when you are given a choice of units.
In some cases, such as in the Import Drawing
Wizard this is used to present a smaller set of
units. In other places, such as the Material
List all units are displayed.
3 Measurement Type specifies what the

unit measures. Select the appropriate
radio button.
4 Multiply by gives you a number to
multiply by to convert to the unit that

you select from the menu. A measurement
type must be selected before the menu is
populated.
106
Create a unit conversion for furlongs, a unit

of measurement equal to 660 feet which
originated in England.
1.
Click Add on the Unit Conversions

page of the Preferences dialog to
open the Add Unit Conversion dialog.
2.
Type Furlong into the unit name dialog.
3.
Select Length in the measurement type.
4.
Type 660 in the Multiply by field.
5.
Select ft in the combo box.
6.
Hit OK.
You now have the furlong as a unit

conversion.
Architectural Panel
Architectural Panel
1
2
3
1 Wall End Drawing Mode - Define
how the edit handles at the ends of a

selected wall function.
If a wall is selected in this mode, the Adjust

Wall Angle
edit button displays,
allowing you to temporarily override this
behavior.
Wall Angle Mode - Select this option to

allow the end handles of a selected wall to
move that wall at allowed angles.
If a wall is selected in this mode, the Same
Type Wall
edit button displays, allowing
you to temporarily override this behavior.
Same Wall Type Mode - Select this option
to allow the end handles of a selected wall to
create a new wall of the same type.
107
Defaults &
Preferences
The options on the Architectural panel of

the Preferences dialog control how certain
types of objects are built.
Wall Angle Mode
2 Select Skylights Automatically
Generate Ceiling Holes and the

program will automatically generate a ceiling
hole for a new skylight.
Same Wall Type Mode
3 Check Reverse Opening Indicators to
change the direction that opening

indicators point for doors, windows, and
cabinets.
Select Manually Edit Ceiling Hole

Polylines to create your own ceiling holes.
CAD Panel
The CAD panel contains settings which lay
the foundation for everything done in CAD
mode. These are not global settings: they are
unique to each drawing file.
are quickly toggled on and off from the toolbar

itself while others can only be changed here.
For information about the CAD panel, see
Preferences - CAD Panel on page 776.
The CAD panel defines how many tools on the

CAD toolbar operate. Many of these settings
Line Properties Panel

The Line Properties panel controls the
display of lengths and angles of CAD lines
and polyline edges as well as the Line Style
Pattern Scaling. For information about the

Line Properties panel, see Preferences Line Properties Panel on page 778.
Snap Properties Panel

All snapping behavior except wall snapping
is controlled on the Snap Properties panel of
the Preferences dialog.
108
For information about the Snap Properties

panel, see Preferences - Snap Properties
Panel on page 780.
Special CAD Panel
Wall snapping is controlled on the Wall

Defaults dialog. See Wall/Railing/Fencing
Defaults Setup on page 181.
Special CAD Panel
Define a default Latitude, Longitude and

Time Zone used when creating Sun Angles.
See Shadows on page 664.
Defaults &
Preferences
Time Tracker Panel
109
Check Automatically Start Timer on File

Open to begin logging time whenever a file
is opened. If this is not checked you must
click the Start Time Logging
begin logging.
button to
Check Stop timer if idle for __ minutes,

and enter the number of minutes to stop
logging time when a plan has been idle.
Check Display Idle Timeout Dialog to warn

when a plan will soon be considered idle.
You can enter or change the Default User
Name.
For more information, see Time Tracker on
page 808.
Material List Panel
The Material List panel displays the names

of all categories and their ID prefixes that
appear in the Material List. Categories are
defined by the program and cannot be
changed.
When a material is entered in the Material
List, the program decides what category it
goes in and assigns it an ID, which is the
prefix followed by a number. EX1 would be
110
the first exterior trim piece entered in the

Material List for a particular plan.
Include These Categories - Check the
categories to display in every new Material
List generated. Before you decide to hide a
category, be sure of which items are listed
within it.
It is usually better to remove categories from
individual plan lists rather than globally.
Report Style Panel
Categories can be removed from a Material

List by choosing Tools> Display Options
from within that individual Material List.
Report Style Panel
2
3
The Report Style panel specifies how the

Material List displays. This information can
also be specified individually per Material
List by choosing Tools> Display Options
from within that Material List.
1 Include These Columns - Check the
appear in the list is the order that they will be

displayed when a material list is generated.
For a more detailed description of Material
Lists, see Materials Lists on page 937.
2 When Querying Suppliers &
columns to display in the Material List.

These can be set on a per material list basis.
Manufacturers - Select an option to

narrow or broaden your query when
searching the Master List.
Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons

to change the order that columns are
displayed. To change the order, select one or
more items in the list and click the button.
The selected columns will be moved up or
down by one in the list. The order that they
Grid - Choose whether or not grid

lines display in the materials list. If
lines are desired, choose to have horizontal,
vertical, or both. If the lines are turned off,
they do not show on-screen or in print. Solid
111
Defaults &
Preferences
Lines for the grids can be selected instead of

dotted lines.
4 Background Colors can be set for

even and odd numbered lines.
Master List Panel
2
3
4
The Master List panel specifies how the

Master List(s) for materials displays. Master
Lists contain price and manufacturer
information for materials. Multiple Master
Lists may be maintained; but only one may
be used at any given time.
1 Include These Columns - Check each
column to be displayed in the Master

material list.
Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons

to change the order that columns are
displayed. To change the order, select one or
more items in the list and click the button.
The selected columns will be moved up or
down by one in the list. The order that they
appear in the list is the order that they will be
112
displayed when a material list is generated.

See Materials Lists on page 937.
2 Master List File - The name and
pathname of the Master List currently

referenced is displayed. It is referenced for
all subsequently opened plans when a
material list is generated from any model.
3 Press Browse to select a different
Master List. Navigate the directory

structure until you find the new Master List
to be used; select it; and click OK.
4 Press New to create a new Master List.
You need to name and save it in the

location of your choice. If a new Master List
is created, it is blank until you build a
Categories Panel
material list and enter prices, supplier or

manufacturer information. The Master List is
saved automatically when you close.
Categories Panel
The Categories panel allows you to expand
the scope of the Materials List by specifying
additional information under each of the
main Materials List headings.
Subcategories contain more detailed

information needed by each category.
Subcategories are global, and do not belong
to a particular plan. The subcategories you
define will be available in all plan files.
2
4
Defaults &
Preferences
To create or modify a subcategory
1 Select the Category from the list.

2 Existing subcategories display here.
3 To Add, Edit or Delete a subcategory,
select it and click the appropriate

button. Clicking Add or Edit opens the SubCategory dialog.
4 In the Subcategory dialog, give the
subcategory a code name which will

appear in the SubCat column of the Material
List. This is the name used to select the
material when applying it to an item, so use
something logical to you.
5 Doors, Windows, Cabinets, Fixtures,

Furniture, and Electrical objects can
113
generate schedules. Any subcategory for

these objects can appear as a column in that
schedule. Name the schedule heading.
Additional material information can be added

to a selected object in its Components
dialog, which is accessed by clicking the
In the example above, two subcategories are

added to the Windows category: GLZ
(Glazing) and EXT (Exterior Trim). See A
Window Schedule Example on page 935
and Editing Materials Lists on page 946 .
Components
edit button. Only objects
with a related Components dialog can use
this material subcategory capability. Any
object that can be used in a schedule can also
use this formula in the schedule.
Render Panel
2
4
6
3
5
The Render panel controls settings used in

render views, with separate settings for
previews and final views. Since these
settings have a significant impact on
rendering speed it is a good idea to optimize
them for your system.
Note: If you have used previous versions of

Chief Architect and find that render performance in Version 10.0 is slower than in earlier versions, compare the setting in the
Render panel with those in the older version
and make sure they are equivalent.
1 The choices in both the Preview and

the Final View boxes are the same.
114
Render Panel
The Smooth Edges option removes the

jagged edges that sometimes result where
two surfaces meet, producing cleaner lines.
This feature slows rendering considerably
and is typically used only for final render
views. This option can also be accessed from
the contextual menu in a render view.
The Smooth Faces option generates smooth
curved surfaces in render views. It uses new
surface normals to alter the lighting effects
on surfaces and make them appear curved. It
does not alter the shape of the surfaces and
should only have a minimal impact on
rendering speed. This option can also be
accessed from the contextual menu.
The Use Multipass option improves lighting
and transparency effects. Textures highlights
do not display properly unless the this feature
is used. The program redraws certain
surfaces multiple times when this is selected,
so rendering is slowed somewhat.
The Show Images option controls the
display of Chief Architect images, such as
plants, cars and people, in render views.
The Show Shadows option controls whether
or not shadows display. Shadows are
extremely complicated to calculate and slow
down rendering speed significantly. They are
typically used only for final render views.
accordingly: two lights double the rendering

time and three lights triple it. Experiment
with this feature before using it as a default.
This option can also be accessed from the
contextual menu in render view. It is
recommended that you only set this from the
contextual menu rather than as a preference.
The Use Triangles option divides large
surfaces, such as walls, floors, and ceilings,
into small triangles. This feature is necessary
to get good lighting effects when point or
spot light sources are used because OpenGL
calculates lighting at the corners of surfaces.
Max Triangle Size sets the size of the
triangles modeled by the program. The
smaller the maximum triangle size, the more
triangles are drawn. Lighting looks better
with smaller triangles; but it takes longer to
render. The minimum value is 6".
Other Render Settings

These following settings affect both the
Preview and Final View functions.
2 The Soft Shadows option displays
shadows with soft edges instead of hard

edges. This feature is only used when Show
Shadows and Smooth Edges are also used.
3 Always Rebuild recalculates the 3D
model and render data every time the

view is redrawn. If this is not checked, the
program redraws the screen without
recalculating the model.
When Always Rebuild is turned off, you may
notice lighting and surfaces that appear
incorrect after a number of camera
movements.
Multiple lights can cast shadows at the same

time; however, rendering time increases
115
Defaults &
Preferences
The Use Textures option controls whether or

not surfaces are rendered with textures. This
only affects surfaces defined with a material
that has a texture assigned to it. When
textures are turned off, surfaces are rendered
using the color assigned to the material but
not the texture. Pattern lines shown in other
3D views are not drawn in render views.
A model can be rebuilt in any view by

pressing F5 on the keyboard or clicking
Refresh Display
4 The Keep All Surfaces option causes
the renderer to calculate all surfaces of

a model. Turning off this feature speeds up
rendering because surfaces that cannot be
seen in the view are ignored; however, if the
camera is moved and a surface that was not
originally visible comes into view, there will
be a gap in the view. This feature is not
needed when Always Rebuild is selected.
For fastest performance in render view, select
the Keep All Surfaces check box and clear
the Always Rebuild check box. Lighting
will be wrong when the camera moves
between rooms, so use F5 to refresh the
screen and update the lighting.
5 The Use Optimizations option directs
your computer to save rendering data to

memory. On some OpenGL graphics cards,
this may cause problems if the rendering data
for your model is greater than the amount of
memory on the card. If your computer stops
responding when rendering, try clearing this
116
check box. This slows down the rendering

time considerably, however: if the problem is
not solved, leave the check box selected.
6 The H/W Backdrop option generates
the backdrop image using hardware

acceleration. For some graphics cards, this
option improves drawing speed considerably.
7 Information regarding your OpenGL
graphics card displays here. This

information may be important if you are
having problems generating render views.
Notice the information following the

Acceleration label. If your video card
supports hardware acceleration for OpenGL,
this will say "Installed Client Driver"; if it
does not, it will say "No Hardware
Acceleration". There is a significant
difference in speed between rendering with
acceleration and without.
The Max Lights value indicates how many
lights you can have turned on at any given
time when generating a render view. This
value should be 8 or higher, depending on
your video card.
When a texture is applied to a surface in a

render view, its size must be adjusted to
accomodate the size of the surface. This
process is referred to as magnification and
minification.
2 Minification - These options apply to
textures that must be reduced to fit the

surface to which they are applied.
The options on the Texture Filter panel

affect the appearance of textures in render
views. How the appearance is affected also
depends on your video card as different cards
produce different results; however, if you are
not pleased with the appearance of your
textures, changing these settings will help.
1 Magnification - Control how textures

are mapped when magnified.
117
Defaults &
Preferences
Reset Options Panel
Click the Reset Preferences button to restore

all preferences to those that originally came
with the program.
118
Chapter 5:
Layers
Chapter Overview
The concept of layers is similar to a stack of

transparencies, with groups of objects stored
on each sheet.
Chapter Contents
Layer Display Options Dialog

Layer Tab
Select CAD Layer Dialog
Layer Painter
Displaying Objects
Current CAD Layer
Layer Sets
Exporting/Importing Layer Sets
Color Chooser Dialog

From any view, select Tools> Display
Options...
to display the Layer
Display Options dialog.
The columns that are present are determined

by the type of view which is active when the
dialog is opened. The Layer Display
Options dialog in the following image was

accessed from floor plan view.
The Layer Display Options dialog can be

resized by placing the cursor over any edge.
When it becomes a two-headed arrow, hold
down the mouse button and drag the edge to
the desired size.
119
Layers
Layers are used to organize and manage the

display of objects in all views. The Layer
Display Options dialog allows you to
determine how objects appear in 2D and to
turn on/off the display of objects in both 2D
and 3D. Layers can be locked to protect
objects from accidental editing. In addition,
layers can be used to include or exclude the
objects on that layer from the materials list.
4
1
3
5
6
7
Every object exists on a layer. You can
determine which layer an object is currently
located on by opening it for specification.
The Layer Display Options dialog
controls the display of objects by layer. It
consists of a table that displays all available
layers and the attributes for each. Layers can
be added and deleted; there is no limit to the
number of layers that can exist in a plan.
1 The layers in the Layer Display
Options dialog can be sorted by any
of the columns. Click on the column header

to sort all layers by that column.
120
Layers
2 Layers are grouped alphabetically with
similar items. Double-click a layer to

rename it. Click the Reset Names button to
restore all default layer names. For ease of
use, it is recommended that you use the same
layer names on all plans.
Click the Add... button to open the New
Layer Name dialog and create a new layer
with the name of your choice. Duplicate
layer names are not allowed.
In the Used column a cross displays for every
layer which contains at least one item. A "D"
displays for layers containing default objects.
Layers are selected by clicking on them in

the table. Hold down the Shift key or the Ctrl
key to select multiple layers at once. Press
Select All to select all layers in the table.
When selected, a layers attributes will
display at the bottom of the Layer Display
Options dialog.
Layer Properties
3 When a layer or layers is selected,
single or shared layer attributes can be

edited in the section titled Properties for
"Selected Layer".
To turn off the display of a layer in floor

plan view, select a layer or layers and
uncheck Display. The 2D column also
controls the display of manually drawn
CAD items in cross section/elevation
views and wall elevation
views. See
Floor Plan View on page 125.
To change the color of a layer in floor

plan view, select the layer and click the
Color bar to open the standard Windows
Color dialog and select a new color. See
Color Chooser Dialog on page 128.
To change the Linestyle of a layer in floor

plan view, select the layer and click the
Style drop-down box. See Floor Plan
View on page 125.
To change the line width of a layer in

floor plan view, select it and enter a new
Size in pixels. See Floor Plan View on
page 125.
To turn off the display of a layer in a 3D

view, select it and uncheck Display in
3D. The 3D view will update automatically. See 3D Views on page 125.
To suppress the inclusion of all objects on

a layer from the materials list, select a
layer or layers and uncheck Include in
Materials List. See Materials Lists on
page 125.
To turn on a layer for reference, select a

layer or layers and place a check in the
Reference box. See Reference Floor
on page 126.
To protect a layer from accidental

changes, select it and check Lock. Items
on locked layers display, but they cannot
be selected, deleted, moved, or modified.
See Locking Layers on page 126.
Quickly toggle the attributes of any
layer by clicking under the corresponding attributes column in the layer table.
Layer Sets
4 Layer Sets are used to define and save
commonly used layer settings. Layer

sets may be selected, added or deleted.
Click Copy Set to create a duplicate of the

currently selected layer set.
Click Delete Set to delete the currently
selected layer set.
121
Layers
Note: The assigned layer names of plans

created in previous versions of Chief Architect will be converted using the same names.
If a layer was not named but numbered, that
number will be used in lieu of a name.
Check Modify All Layer Sets to apply

changes made in one layer set to all other
layer sets in the current view.
See Layer Sets on page 127.
Current CAD Layer

5 Specify the Current CAD layer. Select
the layer that you would like to become

the current CAD layer and check the
Current CAD Layer box. When you click
OK, this layer becomes the current CAD
layer. The name of the current CAD layer
displays in the status bar of the Chief
Architect window in CAD mode. See
Current CAD Layer on page 126.
Dialog Buttons
6 Click Select All to select all layers.
This allows attributes to be changed for

all layers at once.
Click Add to open the New Layer Name

dialog and add a new layer. The new layer
will be organized alphabetically when you
click OK.
Click Copy to copy the selected layer. The
new layer will be added directly below the
copied layer.
Click Delete to delete the selected layer. You
cannot delete layers with objects or default
layers.
Click Reset Names to revert layer names for
default layers back to the original names that
shipped with Chief Architect. This does not
affect user layers.
Click OK to close the dialog and apply your
edits.
Click Cancel to close the dialog, ignoring
any edits.
7 Click the size grip and drag to resize the

122
Layer Tab
Layer Tab
1
3
The Layer tab can be found on the

specification dialogs for many different
objects. Here you can specify on which layer
the selected object will be placed.
1 Check Default to place the selected
object on the default layer for that

object type.
2 Click the drop down list to select from
all layers. Any object can be placed on

any layer.
Layers
3 Click Define to open the Layer
Display Options dialog and select or

add a layer. See Layer Display Options
Dialog on page 119.
123
Select CAD Layer Dialog
This dialog can only be accessed by clicking

the Current CAD Layer
button. It is
similar in appearance to the Layer Display
Options dialog but only allows a layer to be
selected.
Layer Painter
The Layer Painter tool allows you to
move an object to any layer from any
view.
124
Select Tools> Layer Painter

to open
the Layer Display Options dialog.
Choose a layer; click OK; and then click on
objects in any view to move them to that
layer.
Displaying Objects
Displaying Objects
The display of layers in 2D views, 3D views,
and materials lists is centrally controlled in
the Layer Display Options dialog. See
119.
Note: Not all layers contain objects that display in all views. For instance, door sizes
need not display in 3D views and room labels
need not display in materials lists. However,
because any object can be put on any layer,
the display controls for these layers remain
functional.
3D Views
All layers with a "3D" indicator in the 3D
column will display in 3D views. The
surfaces of objects residing on layers that are
not turned on for 3D display will not be
calculated. 3D views will automatically
update to reflect changes made to layers.
Floor Plan View

All layers with a check in the 2D column will
display in floor plan view. Objects which are
not displayed cannot be selected.
Materials Lists
Layers
Layers that do not display an "M" in the Mat

column will not be included in subsequently
generated materials lists. This allows you to
control the display of objects in the Materials
List on a layer-by-layer basis. Some default
layers, such as Patterns, do not generate
materials and are not included by default.
See Controlling Object Display by Layer
on page 946.
How a layer of objects is displayed in floor
plan view is determined by the Color, Style,
and Size attributes given to that layer.
The overall appearance of materials lists (i.e.

inclusion of categories, columns) can be
125
controlled in the Preferences dialog. See

Material List Panel on page 110.
To control the components that display in a
Materials List for a unique object, select the
object and click the Components
edit
button. See The Components Dialog on
page 948.
Reference Floor
An "R" in the Ref. column indicates that the
layer displays with the Reference Floor.
When the Reference Floor is turned on, the

Attic Walls; Foundation Walls; Normal
Walls; Railings; Stairs & Landings; Walls;
Default Fill Color; and Windows layers are
displayed for reference by default. Layer
settings affect all floors related to the current
floor.
When a layer is defined to display for

reference, it displays with the Color defined
for the Reference Floor in the Preferences
dialog. See Colors Panel on page 96.
Locking Layers
Objects in layers with a lock symbol in the
Lock column will display but cannot be
selected. This prevents them from being
accidentally changed.
Layers with objects that have been

extensively edited and will not require
further editing are good candidates for being
locked. Layers with objects that may be
rebuilt by the program, such as roof planes or
framing, are also good candidates.
Current CAD Layer
126
When in CAD
mode, CAD objects
drawn are placed on the Current CAD
Layer, unless a default layer has already
been assigned by the program to that type of
object.
can also click the Current CAD Layer

button, select a layer in the Select CAD
Layer dialog and click OK to make the
selected layer the current CAD layer. The
current CAD layer displays on the status bar.
You can change the Current CAD Layer

from the Layer Display Options dialog
by selecting a layer and then placing a check
in the Current CAD Layer check box. You
The attributes assigned to the Current CAD

Layer only affect CAD objects which have
not had their color, line weight or line style
modified individually.
Layer Sets
Layer Sets
Layer Sets can be used to define specific
layer settings for different views. Each plan
file can have an unlimited number of layer
sets. Each plan always has one layer set
called Default Set. The Default Set cannot
be deleted.
You can add, delete and choose the active
layer set from the Layer Display Options
dialog. To make a different layer set active,
choose the desired layer set from the drop
down list.
Creating a New Layer Set

A new layer set can be made by copying an
existing layer set. The duplicate layer set can
then be renamed and redefined. See Layer
Deleting a Layer Set

To delete a layer set, select the layer set and
click the Delete Set button. The current layer
set will be deleted.
Modify All Layer Sets

If you would like changes made in one layer
set to be applied to all other layer sets in the
current plan, check Modify All Layer Sets
before making changes. The layer name and
display attributes will be applied to all other
layer sets.
For example, if you check Modify All Layer
Sets and then change the color and linestyle
for the Text Layer of the "Electrical Set", the
same changes are applied to the Text Layer
of the "Framing Set" of the same plan.
This property is preserved between Chief
Architect sessions.
Exporting/Importing Layer Sets
Layers
Layer sets created in one plan can be

exported as a *.layers file and then imported
into other plans. This is a convenient
alternative to re-creating a layer set that may
already exist in another plan.
Exporting Layer Sets

To export the layer sets from the current plan,
select File> Export> Layer Sets
the Save Layer Set dialog.
to open
Select a name and location and click Save.

The exported layer sets can be found in the
specified location as a *.layers file.
127
Importing Layer Sets

To import layer sets (*.layers file) into the
current plan, select File> Import> Layer
Sets
Browse to and select the *.layers file you

would like to import and click Open. The
Import Layer Sets dialog opens.
to display the Open Layer Set
File dialog.
Select a layer set or hold down the Shift key

to select multiple sets and click OK.
Color Chooser Dialog

3
4
5
1 Click in any one of the Base colors
4 Adjust the lightness or darkness of the
2 Click in one of the Custom colors
5 Select the Color Chooser eyedropper,
boxes to select it as the new color.
boxes to define which box will contain

the new custom color to be defined.
3 Click and drag in the color palette area

to dynamically choose a color.
128
selected color.
then click anywhere on screen and

release the mouse button to select that color.
6 The current color selection displays
here. Click Add to Custom Colors to

add the color to the Custom Colors palette.
Chapter 6:
Walls, Railings,
& Fencing
Chapter Overview
There are several ways that walls can be

created in Chief Architect. The most
common is to simply draw them with the
wall tools. Most of this chapter covers the
creation and modification of walls using
these manual wall tools.
Walls can also be generated automatically
when a new floor is built by using another
floor (above or below) as a model. For more,
see Adding Floors on page 269.
Walls can also be generated automatically by
importing 2D CAD and converting the lines
into actual walls using the CAD to Walls
tool. See CAD to Walls on page 155.
Another tool that can be used to generate

walls automatically is the House Wizard.
This tool will allow you to define and
arrange room spaces which the program will
use to generate walls which separate them.
See House Wizard on page 810.
Chapter Contents
Default Settings
The Wall Tools
The Curved Wall Tools
Exterior and Interior Walls
Foundation Walls
Pony Walls
Invisible Walls
Railings
Deck Railings
Fencing
Hatch Wall
Break Wall
Walls
Walls are the single most important building

component in Chief Architect. By creating
walls and defining the rooms between the
walls, you are telling the program how you
want the 3D model built.
129
Drawing Walls
Drawing Curved Walls
Displaying Walls
Selecting Walls
Deleting Walls
Copying Walls
Moving Walls
Moving Walls Using Dimensions
Resizing Walls
Editing Walls
Editing Curved Walls
Editing Walls in Elevation Views
Connecting Walls
Aligning Walls
CAD to Walls
Wall Type Definitions
Wall Type Definitions Dialog
Exporting Wall Definitions
Importing Wall Definitions
Curved Walls and Roofs
Special Walls
The Wall Specification Dialog
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog
Wall/Railing/Fencing Defaults Setup
Default Settings
selecting Edit> Default Settings.
when the Foundation Wall
Wall Defaults
The settings in the various wall defaults
dialogs determine what kind of a wall is
drawn when the different wall tools are used.
It is a good idea to be familiar with these
settings and how they relate to your style of
building.
Double-click the Wall Tools
button; the Exterior Wall
parent
button; or the
Interior Wall
button to open the Wall
Defaults dialog and specify which wall
type will be drawn when using the Interior
and Exterior Wall tools. See Wall/Railing/
Fencing Defaults Setup on page 181.
Double-click the Foundation Wall
130
button to open the
or Retaining
Wall
tool is used; the size of the
footings; and other information used when
building foundations. See Foundation
Pony Wall Defaults

Double-click the Pony Wall
button to
open the Pony Wall Defaults dialog and
set the wall type used for both the upper and
lower portion of pony walls as well as other
data used when drawing pony walls. See
Pony Wall Defaults Dialog on page 182.
Railing and Fencing Defaults

The settings in the Railing, Deck Railing,
and Fencing Defaults dialogs determine
what kind of railing or fence is created when
the rail or fence tools are used.
Foundation and
Retaining Wall Defaults
Retaining Wall
Foundation Defaults dialog, allowing

you to specify which wall type is drawn
or
The Wall Tools
Double-click the Railing

tool or to open
the Railing Defaults dialog which allows
you to specify what type of railing is drawn
when using the Railing
tool.
Double-click the Deck Railing

tool or to
open the Deck Railing Defaults dialog
which allows you to specify what type of
railing is drawn when using the Deck
Railing
tool. See Wall/Railing/Fencing
Double-click the Fencing
tool to open
the Fencing Defaults dialog which allows
you to specify what type of fencing is drawn
when using the Fencing
tool. See
Fencing Defaults Dialog on page 183.
The Wall Tools
default, the Exterior Wall

tool is
activated. Click anywhere on the screen in
floor plan view and drag to create a wall
using the wall type specified for your
exterior walls.
All wall tools are also available by selecting
Build> Wall...
Exterior and
Interior Walls
The Exterior Wall tool draws walls
using the wall type specified for
exterior walls. The exterior wall type is
defined in the Wall Defaults dialog.
The Interior Wall tool draws walls
using the wall type specified for
interior walls. The interior wall type is
defined in the Wall Defaults dialog.
Whether the wall is an actual exterior or
interior wall will be determined by the
program based on the model and not by
which tool is used to draw the wall. See
Foundation Walls
The Foundation Wall tool draws
foundation walls according to the
information specified in the
Foundation Defaults dialog. Foundation
walls normally have a footing and can be
drawn on any floor of the model, not just the
foundation floor. See Foundation Walls on
page 133.
Pony Walls
A Pony Wall, or sometimes called a
split wall, is defined as a wall with two
separate wall types, one for the upper
portion and another for the lower portion.
The Pony Wall tool draws pony walls using
the information specified in the Pony Wall
Defaults dialog. You can also convert a
normal wall into a pony wall and vice versa
from within the Wall Specification
dialog. See Pony Walls on page 134.
Invisible Walls
Invisible walls are walls used to define
separate areas within a plan. They can
display in floor plan view, but they will not
131
Walls
Click the Wall Tools parent button to

display its child buttons to the right. By
display in 3D views. Floors, ceilings and

roofs will generate above and below the
areas defined by these walls. See Invisible
Walls on page 135.
Railings
Hatch Wall
The Railing tool creates railings. The

type and height of railings drawn with
this tool are defined in Railing Defaults
dialog. See Railing Defaults Dialog on
page 183 and Railings on page 136.
The Hatch Wall tool applies a hatch

pattern to a wall that will display in
floor plan views. You must click on the wall
that you want to apply the hatch pattern to.
You can then select the hatch and resize it if
you want to only hatch a portion of a wall.
See Hatch Wall on page 138.
Deck Railings
The Deck Railing tool draws decks,
complete with framing and bounded by
a railing. If a foundation level exists,
supports for the deck are also created. See
Deck Railings on page 137.
Fencing
The Fencing tool draws fences.
Fencing is similar to railings but it is
normally used outside of a building and will
follow the shape of the terrain. By default
fencing will not define room areas. See
Fencing on page 138.
Retaining Wall
The Retaining Wall tool functions
similarly to terrain breaks, but includes
a retaining wall. See Terrain Breaks on
page 494.
Editing the walls elevation in a Cross
Section/Elevation
132
Default Top Height unchecked in the Wall

Height Specification dialog will maintain the edited height. See Creating a Pony
Wall on page 134.
view and leaving
Break Wall
The Break Wall tool applies a break in
a wall. Once a wall is broken, the two
wall segments are separate walls that can be
modifed independent of each other. See
Break Wall on page 139.
Alter Default Wall

The Alter Default Wall tool is used to
change the wall thickness used when
drawing default walls. Each time this button
is clicked the thickness will change to the
next thickness until it gets to the highest one
and then it will start over. Wall thicknesses
available for default walls are 2", 4", 6", 8",
and 12" or 50mm, 100mm, 150mm, 200mm,
and 300mm. The wall thickness can be set to
any other value in the Wall Specification
dialog.

Click the Curved Wall Tools parent
button to display its child buttons to the
right. The Curved Exterior Wall
tool,
the Curved Interior Wall
tool, the
Curved Foundation Wall
tool, the
Curved Pony Wall

Railing
tool, the Curved
tool, the Curved Deck Rail
tool, the Curved Fencing
tool, the
Curved Retaining Wall
tool, the Break
Wall
tool, and the Hatch Wall
tool
are all similar to their corresponding Wall
Tools
child buttons. See The Wall
Tools on page 131.
For information about drawing curved walls,
see Drawing Curved Walls on page 141.
For information about editing curved walls,
see Editing Curved Walls on page 148.
Exterior and Interior Walls

Most walls are drawn using either the
Exterior Wall
or Interior Wall
tool.
The only difference between these two tools
is the wall type used. You can specify the
default wall type for each tool in the Wall
Defaults dialog.
To draw a wall using a different wall type,
you can change the default wall type for
either tool in the Wall Defaults dialog. You
can also draw a wall using the default type
and then change the wall type in the Wall
Specification dialog.
Whether the wall is an actual exterior or

interior wall will be determined by the
program based on the model and not by
which tool is used to draw the wall. Any wall
which is entirely surrounded by interior room
areas will be considered an interior wall. Any
wall which is exposed to the outside of the
building will be considered an exterior wall.
Foundation Walls
using the Foundation Wall
tool.
You can draw a foundation wall on any floor

of a plan and not just on the foundation floor.
Any wall can be converted into a foundation

wall or vice versa by selecting it, opening it
for specification, and checking the Specify
Foundation option.
The initial wall type and footing size used for
foundation walls are specified in the
Foundation Defaults dialog. These
values can be changed at any time by
opening up the Wall Specification dialog
133
Walls
Foundation walls are similar to the

interior and exterior walls but also have
a footing. Foundation walls can either be
created automatically when a foundation
floor is created or manually by drawing them
and modifying the settings. Normally the

footing is centered around the wall but you
can also choose to center the footing about
the main wall layer.
Pony Walls
A Pony Wall, sometimes called a split
wall, is defined as a wall with two
separate wall types for the upper and lower
portions.
Types are the only types of wall that cannot

be specified as pony walls.
The height at which the upper portion meets
the lower can be specified in cross section/
elevation view. Because the upper and lower
sections of a pony wall are linked, if either
portion is modified along the division
between the two, such as raking or the
stepping of a footing, the other portion of the
pony wall will adjust to match.
Creating a Pony Wall

Pony walls are drawn using the Pony Wall
tool in the same way that other walls
types are drawn.
Pony walls are created using the wall types

and other information specified in the Pony
Wall Defaults dialog. System Default Wall
134
Convert a normal wall into a pony wall and

vice versa on the Wall Types tab of the Wall
Specification dialog. You can also convert
a normal wall into a pony wall in cross
section/elevation view by clicking on and
opening the wall to display the Wall Height
Invisible Walls
sections of wall, one below the other. Both

parts will match the wall type from which
they were originally created.
Changing Wall Types

for Pony Walls
1
The upper and lower parts of a pony wall can

be redefined as different wall types in the
Wall Specification dialog.
1.
In floor plan view, select and open the

pony wall to display the Wall
2.
Click the Wall Type tab.
3.
The tab has two lists which allow you to

specify a wall type for either part of the
pony wall.
1 Check the Pony Wall check box and
click OK. If the box does not have an

option for pony wall, change the wall type
from floor plan view, then try again.
When a pony wall is created, selecting the
wall in cross section will show two separate
Invisible Walls
Invisible walls are used to create or
modify room definitions. See Room
Definition on page 189.
They can display in floor plan view, but they

will not display in 3D views. Floors, ceilings
and roofs will generate above and below the
areas defined by these walls.
Invisible walls are also used to define smaller

areas within larger rooms. These smaller
areas or rooms can have different floor or
ceiling heights, allowing stepped areas to be
created.
An Invisible wall can be turned into a normal

wall by selecting it, clicking the Open
Invisible walls are also used to divide the

space in one large room into separate room
areas.
Object
edit button, and clearing the
Invisible check box on the General tab of the
Wall Specification dialog. See General
Tab on page 166.
Walls
Common uses would be dividing the living

and dining areas of a single room, or
separating a kitchen from an adjoining nook.
These examples are shown in the pictures
below.
135
Invisible walls are ignored by the Auto

Place Outlets
tool: it functions as
though they were not present.
Important Notes on
Invisible Walls
Cabinets, fixtures and furniture will

freely move through an Invisible wall.
Invisible walls can be drawn through a

cabinet to attach to the wall behind.
Invisible walls do not produce a short

wall section to cover the gap where the
level of the floor or ceiling changes. Use
an invisible railing for this. See Floor &
Ceiling Heights on page 187.
Floor, wall and ceiling areas are calculated separately for rooms divided by
invisible as well as normal walls.
Railings
Railings are created and edited just like
walls in floor plan view. By default,
they display like walls; however, the display
of newels and balusters can be turned on. See
Newels/Balusters Tab on page 177.
The default type for new railings is defined
in the Railing Defaults dialog. See
Railing Defaults Dialog on page 183.
If Panels is selected on the Railing tab, you
can choose a Panel Type on the Newels/
Balusters tab. See Newels/Balusters Tab
on page 177.
136
When first drawn, a railing has the No

Locate attribute set. You may want to set the
No Room Def attribute for some railings if
you do not want them to divide a room.
Use a doorway to produce a break in a railing
for a stairway or other access. This keeps the
railing continuous to maintain room
definition.
A doorway in a railing appears in a 3D view
as an opening, with newels or posts placed
on each side. Posts are evenly spaced
between railing ends and breaks and can be
specified at defined intervals.
Deck Railings
Deck Railings
Deck Railing is used on the exterior of
a house to create decks. Click and drag
Curved Deck Railing
tool or the
tool to draw deck
Walls
using the Deck Railing
railing. When room definition is established,

a deck is created within the area defined by
the perimeter railing and its Room Type is
set to Deck. See Decks on page 189.
137
Fencing
Fencing in Chief Architect works much
like railings. Create and modify a fence
just as you would a railing or a wall. Railing
are normally used to define decks or to
divide rooms within a structure when there is
a difference in floor height. Fences, on the
other hand, do not create room definition and
are normally used outside of a structure to
divide the terrain or detail an exterior.
Fences and rails have separate default
settings so that you can use a style of fencing
other than the style you would normally use
for railings.
Fencing automatically follows the shape of

the terrain. You can choose to have the
fencing follow the terrain smoothly or to
have each segment step as it follows the
terrain.
Define the default fence style in the the
Fencing Defaults dialog. See Fencing
Hatch Wall
The Hatch Wall tool will fill any wall
segment, except invisible walls, with a
single hatch pattern. The Hatch Wall
tool superimposes a hatch pattern across all
layers of the selected wall. It will cover up
any hatch pattern previously specified for the
given wall type.
The wall hatch pattern can be specified in the
Wall Specification dialog. See Wall
Hatch Specification Dialog on page 180.
In general, it is preferable to use the wall
type definition to control the display of a
wall rather then to use the Hatch Wall
tool. Wall hatching can be assigned to a
particular layer of the wall type within the
Wall Type Definitions dialog. This
allows greater control of the pattern and you
can use multiple hatch patterns in a single
138
wall type if desired. See Wall Type

Definitions Dialog on page 157.
To apply a wall hatch, click the Hatch Wall
child button, and click on the wall to be
hatched. The default hatch pattern will cover
the entire length of the selected wall.
Select wall hatching by clicking on the wall
using the Hatch Wall
tool. No other
selection method will work with wall
hatching.
Delete a hatch pattern by selecting it using
the Hatch Wall
tool and clicking the
Delete
edit button or pressing the Del
key. Make sure you have selected the hatch
pattern and not the wall by noting that "Wall
Hatching" is displayed in the status bar. This
Break Wall
will delete the hatch pattern only and not the

wall.
Another way of only applying a hatch pattern

to a portion of a wall is to first use the Wall
Resize the hatch area by selecting it and then

dragging from an end handle. The hatch
normally resizes about the center. To move
only one end of a hatch pattern, hold down
the control key before dragging the handle.
When a hatch covers only part of a wall, you
can move it by dragging the center handle.
Break
tool to separate the wall into two
or more segments. When the Hatch Wall
tool is applied to a broken wall, the
pattern will only be applied to the selected
segment.
Break Wall
A wall can be broken into two
segments by selecting the Break Wall
tool and clicking on the wall. This will
place a break in the wall, creating two wall
the
Esc
key or clicking the right mouse
button terminates the Break Wall

tool
and returns you to the previous mode.
sections. The Break Wall

tool can be
used to create aligned walls across rooms.
If a break is placed near the intersection of

two walls, the break will move to the exact
intersection. Once a break is placed, get out
When the Break Wall

tool is active, you
can continue to place breaks into the same or
other walls creating more sections. Pressing
of Break Wall
mode and check the
break by selecting the original wall. If the
handles stop near the break, the wall was
correctly broken.
To draw a wall, click on one of the available

wall child tools; click in floor plan view;
hold down the left mouse button; and drag to
draw a wall. Release the mouse button and a
wall of the specified type is built. Continue
drawing walls until another tool is selected.
Wall openings can be placed later. Walls

should be drawn to create rooms, and
then doors and windows should be
placed. Do not draw short walls to represent wing walls on the sides of doors and
doorways.
Creating a floor plan is simple if you keep a

few things in mind:
Draw exterior walls in a clockwise direction. Walls have an exterior side and an
interior side. Drawing in a clockwise
direction will assure that the exterior side
faces out.
Draw exterior walls first to define the

buildings footprint, then draw the interior walls to finalize the layout.
139
Walls
Drawing Walls
When drawing walls, think of it as a

rough sketch. You can accurately position
walls once they are all in place.
Do not break walls and delete center
sections to create openings. Do not
draw short stub walls from each side and try
to line them up. It is better to draw a wall and
insert doorways and windows.
the length and angle last displayed in the

information window.
Angle Snaps
allow angles at any
multiple of 7 1/2 degrees. If 7 1/2 degree
allowed angles is selected, an additional
eight angles can be specified.
As you draw a wall, notice the Status
Bar at the bottom of the window. The
length and angle of the wall as it is
being drawn display. Drag the end of the wall
in a circular motion and note that the wall
jumps at defined length and angle increments. Release the mouse button to draw the
wall at the length and angle last displayed in
the information window.
House Wizard
The House Wizard allows you to place and
arrange room "objects" that can then be
converted into a fully editable house plan.
See House Wizard on page 810.
Wall Positioning
If Use Snap Grid/Units is checked in the
Plan Defaults dialog, a new wall will snap
to grid lines and line intersections as it is
drawn. Wall ends snap according to the wall
layer specified on the General tab of the
Use Angle Snaps
to draw walls at
specific angles. Modify the angle of an
existing wall by specifying a new angle in
the Wall Specification dialog or by
dragging an end to a new angle.
Select a wall tools. Click and drag the pointer
to draw a wall. Note the temporary wall
showing the position and length of the wall.
The length and the angle of the temporary
wall display in the status bar at the bottom of
the window.
Drag the end of the temporary wall in a
circular motion. In the status bar, note that
the wall jumps at defined angle increments.
Release the mouse button to draw the wall at
140
Wall Edit Preferences

Depending on the current settings on the
Architectural panel of the Preferences
dialog, one of two edit buttons will appear
when a wall is selected:
These edit buttons allow you to control how
the edit handle at the end of a selected wall
will behave by temporarily overriding the
preference settings. See Architectural
Panel on page 107.
Click the Same Wall Type

edit button to use the edit handle at either end of
a selected wall to draw a new connected
wall of the same type.
Click the Adjust Wall Angle

edit
button to use the edit handle at either end
of a selected wall to adjust the angle of
that wall.
These edit buttons allow you to control how

the edit handle at the end of a selected wall
will behave by temporarily overriding the
preference settings. See Architectural

Panel on page 107.
Plan Defaults
Grid/Units is selected in the Plan

Defaults dialog, wall lengths will snap
according to the specified Snap unit. See
Some settings in the Plan Defaults dialog

affect the way that walls draw. If Use Snap

A curved wall is drawn in an arc, or section
of a circle. It is defined by a chord, a center,
and a radius.
To draw a curved wall, select Build>
Curved Wall
and click on one of the
curved wall tools. Drag the curved wall from
one end to the other along the desired curve.
Do not worry about getting the correct
curvature as this can be easily changed later.
The amount of wall curvature is also limited

by these angles. If you want a horizontal wall
to smoothly curve into a vertical wall, begin
by drawing a curved wall with a chord at a
45, or maybe 135, degree angle between the
horizontal and vertical lines. Do not worry
about the curvature of the wall at this time.
Chord
If Angle Snaps
is enabled, the angle of
the chord of a curved wall is limited to the
allowed angles as set in the Plan Defaults
dialog. Choose 7 1/2 degree allowed angles
for the most control and least jumpiness of
curved walls.
CAD line drawn at 45

degrees to show that the
chord angle is the same.
When the three walls are in place, adjust the

curvature of the curved wall using the Make
Arc Tangent
edit tool to make it tangent
to the two straight walls.
Center
A curved wall always has a center point. The
center displays as a small cross when you
select the Show Arc Centers check box on
the Line Properties panel of the
141
Walls
A chord is the imaginary straight line

between the two ends of an arc. When
drawing a curved wall, it is important to start
and stop at the correct locations because the
angle of a curved wall's chord is difficult to
change later. If the chord angle is horizontal
or vertical, it is easy to drag the curved wall
by eye. Otherwise, use a CAD line as a
reference to position the chord and observe
the angle in the status bar at the bottom of the
screen. See Editing Arcs on page 766.
Preferences dialog or click the Display
Arc Centers
toggle button.
Radius
The radius of a curved wall is measured from
the center to one surface or layer of the wall.
The radius can be defined on the General tab
of the Wall Specification dialog. You
may elect to define the radius to the exterior
or interior wall layers. Temporarily change
the color of the exterior wall edge to make
this distinction easier to see. See General
Tab on page 166.
Show Arc Center
Displaying Walls
In Floor Plan View
In 3D Views
There are several options for controlling how

walls are displayed in floor plan view. In the
Layer Display Options dialog, specify
whether or not the walls will display. By
default, walls are placed on layers with
"Walls" at the beginning of the layer name,
such as Walls, Attic. You can place walls on
any layer you like, however.
Control the display of walls in 3D views

using the Layer Display Options dialog.
See Displaying Objects on page 125.
In addition, the display of the wall layers

specified in the Wall Type Definitions
dialog can be controlled. If you turn off the
display of the Walls, Layers layer, all wall
types will only display the two lines
representing the inside and outside surfaces.
It is often desirable to display the walls from
a floor other than the current floor. To do
this, select and display a reference floor. See
Reference Display on page 271.
142
Displaying Pony Walls

in Floor Plan View
Normally, the upper portion of a pony wall
displays in floor plan view. To show the
lower pony wall in floor plan view instead,
select Edit> Default Settings...
;expand
the Walls category; select Pony Wall; and
click the Edit... button to open the Plan
Defaults dialog.
Select the Show Lower Ponywall check box
to display the lower section of the pony wall
in floor plan view.
Note: A window or door that is completely
contained by one part of a pony wall will not
appear in floor plan view if the other part of
the pony wall is displayed.
Selecting Walls
Selecting Walls
Click on a wall , railing, or fencing to select
it using the Select Objects
tool; any of
the wall tools; or by right-clicking on it
using any other tool in Architectural mode.
The selected wall will have five edit handles,
one at each end, one where selected, and one
slightly away from each end. Drag from any
of these handles to dynamically edit the wall.
Multiple Select In
Floor Plan View
Select the first wall using any method, then
hold down the Shift key and click on
additional walsl to add them to the selection
set. To unselect a wall, click on it while

holding down the Shift key.
Multiple selected walls cannot be moved; but
they can be edited by opening the Wall
In Section/Elevation Views
Click on a wall in a cross section/elevation
view using the Select Objects
tool when
the Architectural mode is active. Edit
handles allowing you to modify the wall will
display. Use the tools on the edit toolbar to
create a raked wall; pony wall; or stepped
wall. See Raked Walls on page 165.
Deleting Walls
Select a wall, railing, or fence, then click the
Delete
edit button or the
key on the
keyboard. Another way to delete a wall or
railing is to draw a different wall type across
Del
an existing wall or railing, from one end to

another. A wall can also be deleted by using
one of its end edit handles to shorten the wall
length to zero.
Copying Walls
The standard cut, copy, and paste functions
cannot be used on wall objects. The best way
to make a copy of any walls is to use the Edit
Walls
Area
tools. See Edit Area Tools on
page 816.
143
Moving Walls
Extend
Extend
Wall offset
Move
Wall offset
Select a wall to display its five edit handles.

It is best to select the walls between the two
Wall Offset handles: if you click too near an
end of the wall, it will be not be selected.
Straight Walls
The Move handle displays between the two
offset handles, close to where you clicked to
select the wall. Drag the Move handle
perpendicular to the wall and release it when
the wall is near its proper location. As you
move the wall, temporary dimensions
display that update with the move.
Drag this edit handle to expand or contract

the chord while maintaining its connection to
adjacent walls.
If a walls movement is obstructed by an

object, holding down the Ctrl key while
dragging will allow the wall to pass through
the it.
Curved Walls
When a curved wall is selected, one of the
edit handles that displays is centered on the
chord. This is equivalent to the move handle
for a straight wall.
Moving the chord also moves the arcs center.

To create a room in the shape of a circle, you must draw two walls, each
curving 180 degrees to complete the circle. It
is easiest to do this when Angle Snaps
enabled.
144
is
Moving Walls
Straight/Curved
Wall Combinations
If you move a straight wall connected to a
normal curved wall, the normal curved wall
would extend or contract along its chord. For
a normal curved wall, moving the straight
wall to the right simply expands the curved
wall, which remains a half circle.
the chord of the curved wall, both normal

curved walls and locked-center curved walls
behave the same.
Move either straight wall, and the curved

wall will extend along its curve.
Locked Center
Combination
Locked
Center
Arc

curved wall and the straight wall is parallel to
This movement is not consistent with the

rules for normal curved walls; however, in
this case the wall's chord is parallel to the
moved wall so there is no choice but for the
moved wall to break away. In a situation like
this, where a curved wall is connected to the
moved wall, and the moved wall's only
choice is to break away, the normal curved
wall will temporarily act as if it is locked
center. This occurs if the angle between the
straight wall and the curved wall's chord is
less than 22.5 degrees.
145
Walls

curved wall with a locked center and the
curved wall cannot maintain its connection
without changing the center of the arc, the
walls will lose their connection.
Moving Walls Using Dimensions

Moving a wall by editing dimensions is the
recommended way to precisely locate walls.
Dimension lines perpendicular to a wall can
be used to redefine its position.
3.
dimension. The program will assume

inches unless you include the feet ()
mark.
To change the length of a wall, relocate a

wall adjacent to it. When using dimensions
this way, the floor plan is easily resized to
exact dimensions. SeeMoving Objects
As you move a wall, dimension lines
locating the wall change to give its current
position. If there are no existing dimension
lines, temporary dimensions appear when the
wall is selected and remain there for the
duration of the move. The dimensions which
change when the wall is moved can be used
to move the wall accurately.
To move a wall using dimensions
146
1.
Select the wall you want to move.
2.
Click on an associated dimension.
The Move Object Using

Dimension dialog opens. Enter a new
4.
When you click OK, the selected wall

moves to its new location unless an
existing object interferes with the move.
Resizing Walls
Resizing Walls
The two end handles of a selected wall are
called extend handles and can be used to
extend the wall in the same direction; rotate
the wall at allowed angles; or create a new
wall of the same type.
Select a wall and drag an extend handle in
line with the wall to shorten or lengthen it. If
the wall is shortened to less than the
Unconnected Wall Min. Length set in the
Wall Defaults dialog, it will be deleted. A
walls length can also be defined in the walls
You can also use the extend edit handle to
rotate the selected wall or to create a new
wall of the same type. See Wall Edit
Preferences on page 140.
The wall angle be defined in the Wall

Specification dialog, as well. If you turn
off Angle Snaps
, it can be rotated to any
angle. See CAD Panel on page 108.
To merge two colinear walls with the same
wall layer definition, extend one of the walls
to the other using an extend handle. If the
walls do not merge automatically when their
ends connect, move one wall very slightly
and release it. The program will snap it into
alignment and the walls will become one.
If the two walls still do not merge, open the
Wall Specification dialog for each wall
and determine how they differ.
Editing Walls
Wall Heights
the Open Object

edit button to open a
selected wall for specification. See The
Wall Specification Dialog on page 166.
The top or bottom edge of any wall can be

adjusted independently of floor or ceiling
heights in cross section/elevation views. See
Editing Walls in Elevation Views on page
151.
Railings can be opened for specification in

vector views and render views by doubleclicking on them.
if the ceiling or floor height of a room is

changed, the heights of the walls that define
it are automatically changed, as well.
Walls can be placed on any layer. To prevent

walls from being modified, lock the layer
they are stored on. See Locking Layers on
page 126.
To change the ceiling height of a room, select

the room and click the Open Object
edit
button to open he Room Specification
dialog. Floor and ceiling height of the
selected room are defined on the General tab.
To change the ceiling height for all rooms on
the current floor, select Edit> Default
147
Walls
When selected in floor plan view, walls

display edit handles that allow them to be
resized and repositioned. You can also click
Settings
; select Floor and click the
Edit... button to open the Floor Defaults
dialog for the current floor and make the
change. All rooms on the floor will be

updated unless their ceiling heights have
been set individually.

Curved walls can have either locked or
unlocked centers.
Unlocked Centers
An unlocked center is the default for curved
walls and is what is meant by a normal
curved wall. When a normal curved wall or
the walls adjacent to it are moved, its chord
expands or contracts the way a straight wall
would. The angle of its chord and the
subtended angle remain constant, while the
radius and center change. Exceptions to this
rule occur when a wall is dragged from its
end handle; curvature handle; or center point
handle as described below.
If you want the angle of the curved wall to
remain tangent to or consistent with the walls
it meets, leave the center unlocked. Most
often, you will use curved walls with
unlocked centers and wait until the floor plan
is complete to lock the centers.
Locked Centers
A locked-center wall expands and contracts
along its arc but maintains the same location
for its center. When this is not possible, its
radius changes while its center remains
locked in the same place. An exception to
this occurs when a selected wall is dragged
148
from its center handle, which is done

specifically to move the walls center point.
.To lock the center of a curved wall, select
the wall and click the Lock Center
edit
button. The curved wall remains selected, but
its edit handles change. The locked status
may also be changed in the General tab of the
Locked vs. Unlocked Centers

The Lock Center edit button displays
depressed for a locked-center wall and
up for a normal wall. Click it to
change the lock center status.
In general, curved walls without a locked
center are easier to work with. They are
easier to draw and edit while working on the
floor plan.
Once the floor plan is complete and the
curved walls are properly aligned with other
walls, it is a good idea to select curved walls
and lock their centers.
Edit Handles on Curved Walls

Select a normal curved wall to display seven
edit handles, each with a specific purpose.
Center
Move
Extend
Wall
Offset
At the end of a center move, the wall's center

will snap to a point, CAD object, or other
center cross point if one is nearby. The other
center cross could be that of a curved
stairway, a CAD arc or circle, another curved
wall, or even a curved wall on another floor
if that floor is turned on for reference,
allowing precise alignment of the curved
wall.
Drag the Move edit handle located on the
wall to move the chord perpendicular to
itself.
Curvature
Drag the Center edit handle to reposition the

center of the arc. The radius and length of the
arc will not change, but the location of the
center and the angle of the chord will.
If the arc is connected to only one wall, the
chord angle can only be adjusted to the point
that the arc is tangent to the attached wall. If
the curved wall is attached to two walls, one
end will become disconnected and the other
will only move until it is tangent.
Move edit handle
This works just as if you were moving a

straight wall spanning between the curved
wall's ends. The adjacent walls move to keep
the walls connected. Except for location, the
properties of the curved wall do not change.
Drag the Curvature edit handle to change
radius and the length of the arc. The chord
will retain its position, length, and direction.
Center edit handle
Walls
If you press the Ctrl key during the move,

you can move the center without restrictions,
even causing the moved wall to break away.
149
the radius of the arc. Neither the location of

the wall's center nor its radius will change.
If the Ctrl key is held while dragging the
extend handle, the curved wall can be moved
anywhere. You can then snap it to any wall;
wall end; or corner. The center and radius
will change, but these can be adjusted later.
Curvature edit handle
Dragging either of the wall offset edit

handles increases the radius and length of the
arc while keeping the center in place.
The included angle is the angle created

between the center point of the arc and its
two endpoints. If using Angle Snaps
, the
included angle of the arc, as measured in
degrees, will jump at increments set in the
Plan Defaults dialog. If you select 7 1/2
degree allowed angles in the Plan
Defaults dialog, the length of the wall
jumps at intervals of 15 degrees, since the
angle between the center point and each end
adjusts by 7 1/2 degrees.
Drag from one of the Extend edit handles to
expand or contract the curved wall along its
curve.
Wall offset edit handle
The radius will increase in 1/32 inch

increments allowing you to align the curved
wall with walls of differing assemblies. It
will not snap back to its former position
when the move is complete.
An offset curved wall or straight wall offset
because of a connection to a curved wall will
snap back to being not offset if you edit it by
dragging from any handle other than its offset handles. Offsetting should be the last
thing you do when editing a wall.
Extend edit handle
The Extend edit handles reposition the ends

of the chord, but restrict the movement along
150
Resize Edit Handle

When a curved wall has a locked center, the
curvature edit handle becomes a Resize edit
handle.
Drag the Resize edit handle to move the

curved wall in or out about its center. The
center location remains fixed while the wall's
radius changes. If an end of the wall connects
to another wall, that end expands or contracts
and slides along the other wall to stay
connected. Unless you press the Ctrl key, you
cannot move the wall beyond where it
becomes tangent to a connected wall. This
makes it easy for a curved wall to become
tangent to a straight wall, while its center is
not moved. Press the Ctrl key and you can
move it further, causing the moved wall to
break away.
Resize edit handle
Cross Section
view tool. This tool can
isolate the wall that you want to edit;
whereas a cross section which is not back
clipped will generate everything from the
camera position through the building,
making it difficult to select the proper wall
for editing.
Selecting the Wall

In a cross section/elevation view, click the
Select Objects
button and select the wall
near one of the edges. The resulting handles
and dimensions that display vary depending
on which edge was selected.
If the top or bottom edge was selected, a
handle displays at the midpoint of the
selected edge in addition to handles at all

corners. If a side is selected, only the handles
at the corners display.
The handles are similar to those of a CAD
polyline except that vertical edges have no
midpoint handle and there are no movement
or rotation handles.
Adjusting the Top and Bottom

To adjust the top of a wall, select near the top
of the wall in cross section/elevation view.
Grab the center handle along the top of the
wall, and drag up or down.
To adjust the bottom of a wall, select the wall
near the bottom. Grab the center bottom
handle, and drag up or down.
Dimension lines can also be used to move the
top or bottom of a wall. Select either the top
or bottom of the wall and click on the
dimension value to open the Move Object
Using Dimension dialog. Type in a new
151
Walls
When stepping the bottoms of foundation

walls; changing or raking the tops of upper
walls (these may be attic walls); or managing
the boundary between the top and bottom
portions of a pony wall, use the Backclipped
value and click OK. The edge wall will

adjust.
Note: Before using a dimension, be sure that

it locates the proper objects.
Wall Height Specification

Use the Wall Height Specification
dialog to restore the default height of the top
edge or bottom edge of a wall that has been
edited in a cross section/elevation view. To
open this dialog in cross section/elevation
view, select the wall and click the Open
Object
edit button.
1 Default Top Height - Select the check
box to restore wall top to default height

and shape.
2 Default Bottom Height - Select the
check box to restore wall bottom to

default height and shape.
Connecting Walls
Draw a wall sufficiently close to an existing
wall and the program will join them together.
The new wall will move, extend, or contract
slightly to meet the existing wall. Walls join
at the intersection of their main layers. Walls
will automatically join when their centers are
152
within 5 1/2 inches of each other. This Wall

Snap Distance can be specified in the Wall
Defaults dialog. If one wall must move
sideways to align with another, the most
recently drawn wall will move. Existing
walls do not move.
Aligning Walls
Fix Connections
Occasionally, one or more walls do not
properly connect. To clean up most
connections throughout the plan, select
Build> Walls> Fix Connections
. If you
have only one connection to fix, the Connect
Walls
edit button is faster to use.
Connect Walls
Use the Connect Walls button to
complete an intersection of two walls.
Select either wall and click the
Connect Walls
edit button. If the
unconnected wall ends are sufficiently close
to one another, the program will connect
them. If the separation is too great, extend
one towards the other and try again if
needed.
The Connect Walls
edit button works
for curved walls just as it does for straight
walls. It extends the ends of the selected wall
and a nearby adjacent wall so that they meet.
A normal curved wall will extend to the
meeting point along its chord; while a locked
center wall will extend along its arc.

If the lock center status prevents a curved
wall from extending to a meeting point, a
warning message will suggest changing the
locked center status. Then try using the
Connect Walls
edit button again.
Repairing Broken Walls

When the end of a wall is placed near the end
of another wall of the same type and in the
same direction, the two walls appear to
combine into a single wall. When selected,
however, the wall may consist of more than
one section, divided by breaks.
Repair a broken wall by selecting one of its
sections and using an end handle to move it
away from the others and then back again.
As long as the two sections are identical in
width and type, when the wall is released, the
broken pieces will snap together and the
break will mend. If the walls do not mend,
check the Wall Specification dialog for
each and determine how they differ.
Aligning Walls
The Wall Offset handles are used for fine
adjustment of walls. See Moving Walls on
page 144. When you move a wall with these
handles, the program does not snap the wall
to adjacent walls or objects as it will using
other edit handles.
When two walls of different thicknesses are

drawn, the program aligns the walls to their
centers. There will be a step on both sides
where they meet.
Walls
Wall Offset handles can be used to adjust

walls which are in-line, but are different wall
types of different thickness.
153
To override this feature, use the Accurate

Move
edit button or the Wall Offset
handles to specify which sides or layers of
the walls are aligned.
Drag from either of the two Wall Offset
handles to offset the wall in 1/32 or 0.5 mm
increments. When you move the wall with
these handles, the program does not snap the
walls to a different location.
In the picture below, one of the walls has
been offset so that the step is only on one
side, and a third wall meets the other two on
this side and hides this step.
If a wall is moved using the center handle,

the offset is lost and will need to be reestablished.
Aligning Curved Walls

Between Floors
Curved walls are aligned between floors
using the same technique to align straight
walls. If the centers and radii of the walls are
within a few inches of each other, the Align
with Floor Above/Below check boxes are
enabled on the General tab of the Wall
Specification dialog for the selected wall.
Check this box and the selected curved wall
will take on the radius and center of the
referenced wall as it moves into alignment
with it.
Aligning Curved Walls

With Straight Walls
In the following illustration, a siding wall

and a brick wall are aligned by their interior
surfaces. Normally, the centers of both walls
would line up. To line up the studs, select one
of the walls and drag from the offset handle.
You may have to select and drag several
times in order to move the wall sufficiently.
154
The Make Arc Tangent

edit
button displays if both ends of the
selected curved wall are connected to other
walls, and if the angle each end makes with
its connected wall is less than about 45
degrees. Click this to move and resize the
wall so that both ends are tangent to the
connected walls.
The radius is usually changed by this action.
If the wall was locked-center, its status
automatically changes to normal. Once it is
tangent, select it and drag its move handle
until it is in the appropriate position.
CAD to Walls
CAD to Walls
CAD to Walls
allows CAD lines to be
converted to Chief Architect objects. This is
helpful when importing drawings into floor
plan view. Two or more parallel CAD lines
can be converted to both straight or curved
walls or rails. CAD lines representing
windows and doors can also be converted.
All lines that you want to convert to walls
must be located on one layer. The same is
true for windows, doors, and rails. It is
helpful to place like items on a single layer
with unique layer attributes. See Layer

The Import Drawing Wizard is the best
place to arrange the layers of the incoming
lines for easiest CAD to Wall conversion. If
you are importing the CAD lines from
another system, do not check "Boxes" or
"Polylines" in the Import Drawing
Wizard. See Select File on page 845.
When CAD objects are located properly,
select CAD> CAD to Walls...
the CAD to Walls dialog.
to display
Convert CAD to Walls Dialog
to walls, windows, doors, or rails.
2 Click Define to view the Layer
Display Options dialog and select a
different source layer if needed.
3 Specify wall types for the new walls.
One, two, or neither can be specified.
To convert to a specific wall type, the lines

must be within one inch or 25mm of that wall
types width. If two wall types are specified,
new walls are converted to the one having
the closest width. The new wall expands or
155
Walls
1 Specify the source layer to be converted
contracts about its centerline to reach the

width of the wall type. Typically only two
wall types are used in a plan and an interior
and exterior wall type are specified.
are on the same layer. In either case, the arc

indicating door swing helps to identify a door
and should be placed on the same layer as
doors.
Conversion works better if lines representing

windows and doors are on different layers,
although it should still be satisfactory if they
Click OK to complete the conversion.

Converted items are found in the Layer
Wall Type Definitions

Once you are familiar with drawing and
moving walls, you can begin to use the other
information contained within the wall. When
you draw a wall, the 2D representation is
defined by the Wall Type Definition.
Default (wood frame 16" OC) can be used

for interior or exterior walls and railings.
Default (wood frame 16" OC) walls are
placed on the Walls, Normal layer of the
View, create, and modify wall types by

selecting Build> Wall> Define Wall Types
Default (Concrete) can only be used on the

foundation plan. When you draw a Default
(Concrete) wall in the floor plan view it is
placed on the Walls, Normal layer.
to open the Wall Type Definitions

dialog.
Wall Type Definition also specifies material
information that can be calculated for takeoffs in the Material List or displayed in 3D
views. Wall height is specified in the Floor
Defaults dialog and individual Room
Specification dialogs. Before discussing
the 3D aspects of walls, it is important to
understand the Wall Type Definition.
Walls fall into two categories: System
Default Walls and User Specified Walls.
System Default Walls

There are only two wall type definitions in
the System Default wall set: Default (wood
frame 16" OC) and Default (Concrete).
These two wall types behave differently from
all other wall types.
156
The 2D display of System Default walls is

controlled by the settings in the Layer
Display Options dialog. If you want these
walls to appear differently in floor plan view,
or print differently, you must make changes
to the Normal Walls layer on the Architectural tab.
The program will assign materials and
assume certain characteristics of these walls
when the Material List is generated.
User Specified Walls

All other wall type definitions in the program
are considered User Specified Walls. Some
User Specified wall definitions are shipped
with the program and can be customized.
The 2D display qualities of user specified
walls are defined by the properties in the
Wall Type Defintions dialog
If the display of Walls, Normal is turned off

in the Layer Display Options dialog, all
walls will be turned off in floor plan view. If
the display Walls, Normal is on, and Wall
Layers is turned off, User Specified walls
appear just like system default walls, and
will be represented by two lines at their
exterior surfaces.
User Specified walls can have up to ten

layers defined, each representing a different
material. All of these layers can be calculated
by the Material List. Materials that are
applied to the outer layers of the wall layer
definition will also define how the wall
displays in 3D views.

The Wall Type Definitions dialog
controls wall type definitions in a plan file.
Use it to define new wall types and redefine
existing ones.
Changing any of the information for a given

wall definition will affect all walls within
that plan using that wall type.
1
2
8
9
10
4
11
12
6
1 Click this drop-down list to display all
currently available wall type

definitions. Select a wall type from the list to
display its definition. The list always has at

least one wall type, "Default" which cannot
157
Walls
be modified. You can rename a wall type by

typing in a new name.
To create a new wall type, click New to
define a new wall type from scratch or click
Copy to copy the current wall type. The
copied wall type can then be renamed and
redefined.
To remove a wall type, select it and click
Delete. Wall types currently being used in
your plan or set as plan defaults cannot be
deleted.
2 Main Layer - If multiple wall layers
are defined, select a radio button to

specify the main layer. It is usually the
structural layer. The main layer displays
wider than other layers in the wall preview.
Note: The Framing dialog uses the thickness of the Main Layer to size the studs if a
framing material such as Fir Stud 16" OC, Fir
Stud 24" OC, Metal Stud 16" OC, or Metal
Stud 24" OC is assigned.
3 Define the Thickness for each wall
layer. The wall layers will be listed in

order from top to bottom. The exterior layer
(or reference layer for interior walls) is
always layer 1.
4 Build platform to this layer - When a

floor or ceiling platform is built it will
go to this layer. Only one layer can be
specified as the layer that is used for
platforms. By default, the main layer is
normally checked. When you select this box
for any other layer, it will be turned off for
the previous layer it was turned on for.
5 By default, dimensions are based on a
walls main layer. Select Dimension to

this Layer to have dimensions locate to a
different wall layer.
158
6 Total - Displays the total thickness of
the wall type definition. If you change

the total thickness, the program will
automatically change the thickness of the
Main Layer to account for the difference.
7 Click the Insert button to create a new
layer directly above the active layer in

the wall type definition. The arrow to the
right of the wall assembly diagram points to
the active layer.
To insert a layer at the bottom, click near the

outside edge of the last layer until the arrow
to the left of the diagram points to the last
line.
Click Delete to remove the layer which is
currently active. The arrow to the right of the
wall assembly diagram points to the active
layer.
8 Wall Line - Define the Color, Style,
and Weight for each line in the wall

type definition. Click on the line to edit in the
diagram. The arrow to the left of the diagram
points to the active line. Any changes made
in the dialog will immediately display in the
diagram, illustrating how the wall will
appear in floor plan view.
Check By Layer if you would like the line to
assume the attributes of the walls layer as
defined in the Layer Display Options dialog.
9 Layer Material - Specify the materials
calculated in the Material List, as well

as any fill patterns that display in 2D.
Click either of the two material display boxes

and the Select Library Object dialog
opens to the Materials library category.
Specify a material for the active layer in the
wall layer definition. If a material is applied
10 Fill Style - Select a hatch pattern for the
active layer. Select a Fill Color for the

pattern. This Fill pattern is overridden if you
use the Hatch button to fill your walls in
floor plan view.
11 Show as insulation in elevation -
Check this box to have insulation

details generated in cross section views when
the Autodetail
tool is used. See AutoDetailing on page 638.
12 The arrow to the right of the wall
assembly diagram points to the active

layer. To activate a layer, click on the layer in
the diagram or click in the Thickness field
assigned to it.
The arrow to the left of the wall assembly
diagram points to the active line.
The Main Layer

The Main Layer is the structural layer of the
wall, usually the framing layer. Use the radio
button to designate the main layer. The Main
Layer is used for many things:
Floor and ceiling platforms, as well as

automatically built foundation walls, are
normally built to the outer edge of the
main layer. This behavior can be modified by specifying a different layer to
build your platforms to.
Exterior walls on different floors are

aligned by the outer edges of their main
layers.
Roof baselines are placed at the outer

edge of the main layer when roofs are
automatically generated.
Roof base lines and gable/roof lines

which are manually drawn will snap to
the edge of this layer.
Dimension lines can locate the outer wall

surfaces, main layer surfaces, or wall
centers (for interior walls).
All of this information is reliant on the
main layer, so creating your wall type
definitions accurately beforehand and
specifying the main layer is very important.
iwalllay.dat and mwalllay.dat

Two files in the Chief Architect directory
have the .dat extension and contain the
default Chief Architect wall type definitions:
iwalllay.dat (Imperial units) and
mwalllay.dat (metric units). These files are
referred to as .dat files.
If you open a .plan file containing fewer than
six wall types, information from iwalllay.dat
or mwalllay.dat is automatically imported,
adding new wall types to your plan file.
If you do not want this information added to
your plan files, rename or delete these files
from your computer. They can always be
restored from your installation CD.
Walls
to a surface layer, that material will display

in 3D views.
159
Exporting Wall Definitions

1
2
3
4
5
Wall type definitions can be exported from
one plan file into another Chief Architect
plan file. This is a convenient alternative to
re-creating a wall types that may already
exist in another plan.
The wall type definitions that will export
from your current plan are listed in the Wall
Type Definitions dialog. See Wall/
Railing/Fencing Defaults Setup on page
181.
The File> Export> Wall Definitions...
option exports all wall type definitions in one
.dat file. This .dat file can then be read into
another Chief Architect plan file.
To export a wall type definition, select File>

Export> Wall Defintions... to open the
Export Wall Defintions File dialog.
1 The current directory displays here.

2 Specify where you would like the file to
be saved to using the navigational tools.
3 All data files with a .dat extension
located in this directory are displayed.

You may see other .dat files in this directory
that are not wall definitions.
4 Give the file a name.

5 Save as type should be *.dat. The file
name should be described as a wall type
list.
160

1
2
3
To import a .dat file (wall type definitions)
into the current plan, choose File> Import>
Wall Definitions.... The Import Wall
Definitions File dialog will open.
1 Navigate to the folder containing the

wall definitions files.
2 The selected file name displays.

3 Select the .dat file type.
When wall type definitions are imported, the
names of the wall type definitions in the
Import file are compared with those already
in your plan. Files of the same name will not

be imported.
Wall definitions can be made available
for future use by following the same
instructions and importing them into your
default template plan. SeeTo create your
own template plan on page 80.
The imported wall type definition is now

available in your current plan and is visible
in any list of wall types which appear
throughout the program. See Wall Type
Definitions Dialog on page 157.
Curved Walls and Roofs

The following illustrations show a roof
created at two different curved increments,
30 degrees and 15 degrees.
Walls
When roofs are automatically generated, roof

planes will be placed over curved walls at
specified increments. The Build Roof
dialog allows you to specify the degree
increments for the roof over the curved wall.
Any whole number from 7 degrees up to 90
degrees may be specified. The lower the
number, the more roof sections will be
created over the curved wall.
161
Concave Curved Walls & Roofs

Concave curved walls can produce roof
planes that follow them. If the concave area
is too small, however, simpler roof planes are
produced. To follow the curved wall, the section baselines must be longer than the Min.
Alcove value on the Build tab of the Build
Roof dialog. If baselines are shorter, the
automatically generated roofs will be simplified by either:
1.
162
Ignoring the curved wall, as if the walls

on either side extended to their meeting
point and the roof was produced.
2.
Spanning the concave curved wall with

a straight baseline and produce a roof
plane for it from that.
Special Walls
Special Walls
Stepped Walls & Footings
One application for pony walls is a stepped
foundation. The lower part of the pony wall
is the concrete wall with footing, and the
upper part of the pony wall is a framed wall
built to the first floor platform.
In the illustration below, the lower pony wall
is a single layer concrete wall and the upper
part of the pony wall is faced with brick.
the wall. You cannot break the vertical

outside edges.
By default, any stepped foundation wall will
have an "S" symbol displayed in floor plan
view where the step is located. You can
control the display of the "S". See Wall
Decks
An exterior deck is produced by enclosing an
exterior area using Railings
or Deck
Railings
just as you would draw a room.
"Rooms" created using Deck Railing are
automatically assigned the room type of
Deck. Select and open a "room" created
using regular Railings to access its Room
Specification dialog and select the Deck
room type. See Decks on page 189.
The Break Wall
tool makes it easy to
create stepped walls and stepped footings.
To add a step to a wall, select the wall in
cross section/elevation view.
2.
Double-click the Break Wall

tool,
then click on the top or bottom edge of
the wall to place the break.
3.
In addition to the corner handles, two

handles appear along the broken edge.
4.
Select one of these two handles, and

drag up or down.
5.
A square step will be created.
If you single-click the Break Wall

tool,
it only adds one break which adds an edge to
Stairwells can be created automatically by

first selecting the staircase, then clicking the
Form Stairwell
edit button. See
Creating a Stairwell on page 365.
To manually produce an interior stairwell
that contains a staircase, you must create a
room on the upper floor.
1.
Draw railings to enclose a room on the

upper floor. Toggle on the Reference
Floor
to make sure the railings do
not interfere with the area for the staircase below. The walls can be any combi-
163
Walls
1.
Interior Stairwells
stop when it reaches the upper floors

stairwell railing or wall.
nation of invisible walls, railings and

regular walls.
2.
Select the room and click the Open
3.
In the Room Specification dialog,

select Open Below as the room name.
4.
In the lower floor plan, drag a stairway

upward until it stops. The staircase will
Object
edit button.
5.
Make a doorway in the wall or railing

where the staircase meets the floor
above.
Resize the doorway to match the stair width,

then move it toward the wall until its edge is
at the wall. This will prevent any railing or
post from displaying on the wall side of the
doorway.
Nooks
The illustration below shows how a kitchen
nook can be extended out from the rest of the
house using the Break Wall
tool.
To perform this exercise:
164
Special Walls
1.
2.
3.
4.
Draw a kitchen; select a wall to build the
2.
nook into; and click the Break Wall

tool from the toolbar.
Grab one of the corner handles, and drag

that handle either up or down.
3.
To rake a wall at a specific angle, draw a

line at that angle using the CAD tools.
Align the edges of the raked wall to the
line by selecting the raked edge, clicking
Click on the wall that will separate the

Kitchen and Nook areas. You will see a
short line across the wall indicating a
break.
Do the same where the Nook and Family
room meet. You do not need to be exact:
adjustments can be made later when you
dimension the walls.
Select the middle section of the wall
with the right mouse button. This both
deactivates the Break Wall
selects the wall for moving.
on the Make Parallel

button and
then clicking on the CAD line.
Compound Angled Walls

The illustration below shows two walls
meeting in a V. Both walls have three
angles across the top of the wall.
tool and
5.
Move the pointer to the middle handle

and drag the wall outward.
6.
Draw side walls to connect the wall back

to the rest of the house.
7.
Move these short walls using dimensions to accurately size the nook.
Raked Walls
Raked walls can be created from any wall
selected in a cross section/elevation view.
To create a compound raked wall, breaks

must be added to either the top or the bottom
edges. Then each section of the wall can be
adjusted separately. You cannot add a break
to the vertical edges of a wall in cross
section/elevation view.
To add a single break, select the wall in cross
section/elevation view, click the Break Wall
tool, then click on either the top edge or
the bottom edge.
To create a simple raked wall:

1.
Select the wall in cross section/elevation

view.
To move a break freely without any

restrictions, select the wall away from the
break point to be adjusted. If you select too
close to the break, you may be restricted in
one direction or the other.
165
Walls
The new break point will now have a handle.

Grab the new handle at the break, and drag it
to angle the wall.

The Wall Specification dialog controls
the characteristics of selected walls. To open
the Wall Specification dialog, select a
wall or group of walls and click the Open

Object
edit button.
General Tab
1
3
4
5
9
Options on this tab appear only when they
apply to the selected wall or walls. The
dialog will not display all of the options at
once.
1 Thickness can be specified when the

selected wall is one of the System
Default wall types. This option is not
available for layered wall types.
2 Select the Foundation check box to
specify the selected walls as a
foundation walls. More settings for
166
foundation walls are available on the

Foundation tab.
3 Select the Railing check box to specify
the selected walls as railings. More

settings for railings are found on the Railing
tab.
4 Wall Angle - The current absolute
angle of the wall in a floor plan view is

displayed. You can type in a new angle
which will modify the wall by rotating about
its center. Any angle which would cause a
connected wall to become disconnected will

usually not be allowed.
It does not create a beam when framing is

built or in 3D views.
Enter a value to set the Wall Length. How it

lengthens or contracts is determined by
where it is locked.
Select Attic Wall to extend the wall up to the

roof after it is moved or lengthened. Attic
walls are normally built using the Build
Roof dialog. All existing attic walls are
deleted when you Rebuild Walls/Floors/
selected wall at its Start, End or Center.

When the Wall Angle or Wall Length of the
selected wall is changed, this part of the wall
will be locked.
6 Select any of the Options check boxes
to modify the selected wall accordingly.

In most cases, multiple options can be
selected.
Select Invisible to specify the wall as
invisible. Invisible walls can be displayed in
floor plan view but not 3D views. Invisible
walls are used to divide rooms areas that are
not separated by a wall or railing, such as a
nook from a kitchen.
Select Railing and Invisible to place
walls where there is a vertical break in
the floor or ceiling level at the invisible
walls location. If railing is not selected, there
will be a gap where the levels change.
Select No Room Definition to display the

wall in floor plan view but not define or
divide a room.
Select No Locate to prevent automatic
dimension lines from locating a wall. No
Locate walls can be used for any wall that
you do not want dimensioned. Railings
default to having the No Locate attribute set.
Select Invisible Beam to have the wall
display as two lines in floor plan view. This
option is included for compatibility with
earlier versions and its use is not encouraged.
Ceilings
The Align with Lower floor or Align with

Upper floor check boxes appear when the
selected wall is very close, but not quite
directly above or below a wall on the other
floor. Check the option to precisely align the
walls.
If both options are available, you may choose
one or the other, but not both.
The wall you selected is moved until it lines
up properly with the wall above or below.
Sometimes the wall cannot be moved
because of attachment to another wall. In this
case the system then attempts to offset the
wall, as if it were selected and you dragged
from the offset handle near, but not at its end.
Curved walls are aligned in a similar way. To
align two curved walls, the center of the
selected wall is moved to coincide with the
center of the other wall. The wall is then
moved radially until the main layer surfaces
and centers match as previously described.
Walls align to the outer surfaces of the main
layer of exterior walls, and to the centers of
interior walls.
Select Flip layers to reverse wall layers.
Select Lock Center to lock the center of a
curved wall.
Select Retain attic wall to prevent an
existing attic wall from being deleted when
167
Walls
5 Select a radio button to Lock the
you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings

.
This should be selected for walls that you
have drawn.
Select to Retain Wall Framing for this wall,
as seen in the wall detail view or in 3D
framing, when the wall framing is globally
rebuilt.
Select Stop at Platform to prevent a wall
from going through a floor platform. Select
Go Through Platform to prevent a floor
platform from going through a wall. The
main layer of a wall normally determines
whether the wall will stop or go through a
floor platform. For example, floor platforms
typically go through framed walls but stop at
masonry walls. This checkbox allows you to
override this on a wall-by-wall basis.
Default Wall Top Height and Default Wall
Bottom Height are enabled if the selected
wall top and/or bottom height has been
edited. Check these boxes to restore the
default heights.
Select Terrain Retaining Wall to treat the
wall as a terrain retaining wall. See Terrain
Breaks on page 494.
7 Resize About - These radio buttons
determine what part of a wall retains its

position when the wall type is changed and
the width of the wall layer definition is
altered. This is a global preference which is
valid for all walls in all plans.
168
Check Wall Center to resize a wall layer

definition from the center.
Check Main Layer Inside to resize a wall
layer definition from the interior side of the
main layer out.
Check Inside Surface to resize a wall layer
definition from the interior surface out.
8 Radius To - This section only displays
for curved walls and controls the

definition of the curved wall radius.
Outer - Select this radio button to display or

modify the radius from the center of the
curved wall to the outer surface of the wall.
Inner - Select this radio button to display or
modify the radius from the center of the
curved wall to the inner surface of the wall.
Outer Main - Select this radio button to
display or modify the radius from the center
of the curved wall to the outside of the main
layer of the wall.
Inner Main - Select this radio button to
display or modify the radius from the center
of the curved wall to the inside of the main
layer of the wall.
Check Outer Surface to resize a wall layer

definition from the exterior surface in. The
exterior surface does not move.
Radius - Displays the radius length as

defined by the above radio buttons. Modify
this value to change the curvature of the wall.
Check Main Layer Surface to resize a wall

layer definition from the exterior side of the
main layer in. The outer main layer surface
does not move
Lock Center - Select this button so that

when the radius is changed the wall center
remains locked and the wall ends will
change.
Lock Ends - Select this button so that when

the radius is changed the wall ends remain
locked and the wall center will change.
9 Click the Num Style button to open the
Number Style/Angle Style dialog

and change the way the Wall Angle and
Wall Length values display.
Default Wall Heights
The Wall Height Specification dialog is

available in cross section/elevation views.
Check Default Top Height to reset the top of
a wall to match the ceiling height in the
room.
Check Default Bottom Height to reset the
bottom of the wall to the floor height for the
room.
Walls
Check Pony Wall to make the selected wall

into a pony wall.
169
Roof Tab
4
3
Any automatically generated roof style other

than a hip requires roof information to be
defined in the exterior walls. Select the Roof
tab to define the portion of the roof plan that
rests on the wall. See Automatic Roofs vs.
Manual Roofs on page 286.
Extend Slope Downward - Select the

check box to continue a roof down over a
bumpout in an exterior wall.
Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom - Place a

check in this box and the selected wall
will be divided by any roof section that
overlaps it. The wall section below the
overlapping roof plane will be removed.
Combine with Above Wall - This check

box displays for a selected wall with an
attic wall above it. Check this box to
frame the upper and lower portions of the
wall together as one when automatic
framing is built.
1 Options - Specify the shape of the wall

relative to the roof planes.
170
Full Gable Wall - Select the check box

to create a gable end over the wall.
High Shed/Gable- Select the check box

to model the high end of a shed roof.
Knee Wall - Select the check box to

define a wall as a knee wall. Only an interior wall can be defined as a knee wall. A
knee walls height is defined by the roof
plane, not the ceiling height.
2 Pitch - Enter a value to define the pitch

of the roof plane over this wall.
Check Upper pitch to create a roof plane

with two pitches. Enter the upper pitch value.
Specify the horizontal Length of the roof

return in inches.
Specify the elevation that the upper pitch

Starts at, or define the inches in from
baseline that the second pitch begins. The
two values are dynamic. Press Tab to update
the relative numbers.
Enter a value in inches to Extend the roof

returns from the overhang.
Specify a Gable, Hip, or Full roof return.
Specify a Sloping or Flat roof return. See
Some Common Roof Types on page 292.
3 Check Auto Roof Return to generate
Check the box to Include Frieze molding.
roof returns on the selected wall. In

most cases, roof returns only work for Full
Gable Walls. See Roof Returns on page
302.
4 Lower wall type if split by butting
roof - Designate a wall to be split into a

pony wall. The upper portion will be defined
in the Layer Specification tab, and the lower
portion specified here.
Foundation Tab
1
2
3
1 Specify Foundation - Select the check

box to turn the selected wall into a
foundation wall. This produces a footing

below the wall in the Foundation plan.
171
Walls
2 Thickness - Define wall thickness for

System Default Wall types.
3 Footing Width and Height - Define
the size of the footing below the

selected foundation walls.
4 Center Footing on Main Layer -
Select the check box to center the

footing on the main layer instead of the entire
stem wall layer definition.
Warning messages may appear if the
foundation wall layer definition does not
appear to be a foundation wall type.
Wall Types Tab
1
2
1 Check Pony Wall to enable the options
for pony walls. See Wall Types Tab

For Pony Walls on page 173.
2 Wall Type - The drop-down list
contains all currently available wall

types. Select the desired type from the list
and a preview will display below.
172
Use the Define button to open the Wall

Type Definitions dialog to create or
modify any existing wall types. See Wall
Type Definitions Dialog on page 157.
3 A preview of the wall type displays
here. The exterior side of the wall is at

the top of the drawing and the interior side is
at the bottom.
Wall Types Tab

For Pony Walls
1
2
3
4
1 Pony Wall - Check this box to make

the wall a pony wall using a separate
wall type for the upper and lower portions of
the wall.
2 Wall Type for Upper Wall - The drop-
down menu contains all available wall

types. Select the desired type from the list for
the upper portion of the pony wall
Wall Type for Lower Wall - The drop-down

menu contains all currently available wall
types. Select the desired type from the list for
the lower portion of the pony wall.
3 Select a radio button to specify which
part of the pony wall is being defined in

the diagram below.
4 Align pony wall - Select the option to
define where the Upper and Lower wall

layer definitions will align.
Note: Pony Walls can specify how the two
wall type definitions align. If the thickness of
the main layers of the two wall type definitions are the same, the program may align
the exterior side when the interior side is
specified. This is okay since both sides are
aligned.
No change - Select this radio button to leave

the alignment as it was when dialog was
opened. This should be used when multiple
173
Walls
When you select a pony wall or when you

turn a normal wall into a pony wall, the Wall
Specification dialog has some additional
options.
walls with different wall layer definitions are

selected.
Outer surface - Select this radio button to
align wall types at their outer surfaces.
Outer main - Select this radio button to
align wall types at the exterior edge of their
main layers.
Central main - Select this radio button to

align the centers of the main layers of both
wall types.
Inner main - Select this radio button to align
the wall types at the interior side of their
main layers.
Inner surface - Select this radio button to
align wall types at their interior surfaces.
Railing Tab
1
2
6
7
3
8
4
5
1 Specify Railing - Select the check box
Balusters - Create balusters.
Solid - Create a solid, wall style railing.

The wall will be of the type defined by
the current wall layer definition.
to specify the selected wall as a railing

and enable the other options on this tab.
Railings can be also drawn directly using the
Railing
or Deck Railing
tools.
2 Railing Type - Select the radio button
for the desired railing type. A preview

of the selected type displayes to the left.
174
Post to Beam - Create newel posts from

floor to an overhead beam placed just
under the ceiling height. This option is
used when placing a cross beam along the
top of the railing.
Post to Ceiling - Select the check box to

change the square newel posts to round
pillars, and to make them extend to the
ceiling.
Open - Create a railing with only a top

rail.
Middle Rail - Create a railing with a top

and a middle rail.
No Rail - Eliminate rails, leaving only

pillars or posts (and overhead beam, if
selected).
Post to Rail - Create newel posts from

floor to rail height. This option is selected
by default.
Panels - Create a solid panel.
Walls
3 Post Type - Select the check box for

the desired post type.
175
6 A preview of the railing displays here
4 Exterior Materials - Select the check
and updates as options are changed.
box to make the balusters the same

material as the rails, instead of having them
be defined separately. You have more
flexibility if you define materials for each
part on the Material tab.
5 Shoe Options - Select the check box
7 Check this box to display the preview

in color.
8 Halfpost Options - Select the check
box for the desired halfpost placement.
for the desired placement of the bottom

rail, or shoe. If neither box is checked, the
shoe is placed at floor platform level.
No Halfpost - Select the check box to

prevent a half-width post from being
placed when a railing intersects a wall.
Square Halfpost - Select the check box

to use a square halfpost where a railing
intersect with a wall.
Raise Shoe - Raise the shoe 3-1/2 or 87

mm off the platform.
9 Terrain Options - Select the check box
176
No Shoe - Eliminate the shoe altogether.

Balusters go right to the floor.
for the desired fencing or railing

behavior on terrain. These options only apply
when railing or fencing is drawn outside of a
building on top of a defined terrain.
Step Terrain - Select the check box to

have the railing or fencing follow the terrain in horizontal steps between each
newel.
Follow Terrain - Select the check box to

have the railing or fencing follow the terrain smoothly.
Newels/Balusters Tab
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
height.
2 Baluster Width - Specify the width of
each baluster. For a library baluster,

this is its width or diameter at its widest
point. For a panel type railing, this specifies
the thickness and can be set no larger than
the thickness displayed on the General tab.
3 Newel Width - Specify the width of

each newel. For a library newel, this is
its width or diameter at its widest point.
4 Newel Height - This is the height from
the ground to the top of the newel.
5 Newel Offset - Specify the amount
each newel should be offset from the

center of the railing. Use this when creating
a fence with the newels to one side of the

fence boards.
6 Panel Type - Only available when the
railing type has been specified as

"Panels". Select Solid, Framed, or Library to
select a symbol to be used as a rail panel.
7 Baluster Type - Only available when
the railing type is not specified as

"Panels". Select Square, Round, or Library
Balusters. Selecting Library from this drop
down list is the same as clicking the Library
button to the imediate right and will allow
you to select a symbol from the library to be
used as a baluster.
8 Newel Type - Select Square, Round, or
Library Newels. Selecting Library

from this drop down list is the same as
177
Walls
1 Railing Height - Specify the railing
clicking the Library button to the imediate

right and will allow you to select a symbol
from the library to be used as a newel.
9 Check Default to use the Draw Newels/
Balusters setting in the Railing

Defaults dialog. Check Draw Newels/
Balusters to draw newels and balusters in

floor plan view.
Wall Covering Tab
1
2
3
When a wall covering is assigned using the

Wall Specification dialog, it will be
applied to the selected wall only.
All wall coverings applied to the

selected wall are listed here.
2 Click Add New to open the Library
Browser and apply a new wall

covering.
Click Select to open the Library Browser and

change the current wall covering.
178
Click Delete to remove the current wall

covering.
3 A preview of the current wall covering
displays here. Click on a preview pane

to open the Library Browser.
Enter a height from wall covering Top To
Ceiling and Floor To Bottom. The wall
coverings Width can also be specified.
Check Interior and/or Exterior to apply the

wall covering to the inside and/or outside of
the selected wall.
Hand Rail Tab

The Hand Rail tab is used to specify the style
and size of the handrailing on a selected
railing, deck railing, or fence.
3
4
1 Molding - Displays the current handrail
profile being used. This typically says

"Default Handrail" unless a custom handrail
profile has been selected.
2 Select - Click this button to open the
Select Library Object dialog and

specify a profile from the library to be used
as a handrail.
3 Default - Click this button to remove a

custom handrail that has been specified
and use the default handrail.
display for the "Default Handrail" option,

which is rectangular.
Note: Handrails are displayed on their side,
rotated counter-clockwise by 90 degrees.
5 Width - Specify the width of the

railing.
6 Height - Specify the height of the
handrail molding. Defaults to 2 inches

or 5 cm.
Walls
4 Preview Pane - Displays the selected

molding profile. No preview will
179
Layer Tab
Materials Tab
For information about the Layers tab, see

Layer Tab on page 123.
For information about the Materials tab, see

Materials Tab on page 603.
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog

The Wall Hatch Specification dialog
controls the display of the selected wall
hatch. To open the dialog, select the hatch
using the Hatch Wall
Open Object
tool and click the
Layer Tab
For information about the Layer tab, see
edit button.
Fill Style Tab
1 Define the appearance of the wall hatch

.Fill Pattern - Select a pattern from
the drop-down menu.
180
Spacing - Specify the spacing between

hatch pattern lines.
Angle - Specify the angle of the hatch

pattern.
Line Weight - Specify the line weight of

the hatch pattern.
Transparent Pattern Fill - Select the

check box to make the background transparent.
Fill/Pattern Color - Select the radio button and click the button to open the Windows Color Chooser dialog. Specify a
color for the hatch pattern lines and click
OK.
Use Background Color - Select the

radio button to make the hatch pattern
line color the same as the fill.
Use Layer Color - Select the radio button to make the hatch pattern line color
that of the Walls, Hatching layer.
2 Custom Pattern File and Name - This
section is enabled if Custom is selected

in the Fill Pattern field. Browse to select a
custom pattern file; a style of the selected
pattern from the pull-down menu; and a
pattern scale.
3 A picture of the hatch pattern displays

changes as they are made.
Note: Hatching and fills in walls are not written to DXF/DWG files. They are one of the
few items displayed in a floor plan view that
cannot be exported in a DXF file.

The Default Settings dialog can be
accessed by selecting Edit> Default
Settings...
page 88.
. See Default Settings on
Wall Defaults Dialog
4
2
3
181
Walls
1 Exterior Wall Tool - Select the wall

type drawn by the Exterior Wall
tool. All currently available Wall Types are
displayed in the list. To create or modify
wall types, click the Define button to open
the Wall Type Definitions dialog.
2 Interior Wall Tool - Select the wall

type drawn by the Interior Wall
tool. All currently available Wall Types are
displayed in the list. To create or modify
wall types, click the Define button to open
the Wall Type Definitions dialog.
3 Show Default Exterior Wall/Interior
Wall - Select a radio button to change

the currently displayed wall type in the
preview area.
4 Editing/Display Settings - Select
options to control the display of walls.
Check Show Wall Length When Editing to display a temporary dimension

when a wall is drawn or edited.
Check Show Lower Ponywall to display

the lower part of the ponywall in floor
plan views. Wall layers and windows in
the upper part of the pony wall will not
display in floor plan view when Show
Lower Ponywall is selected.
Check Show "S" Markers on Step

Foundation to display an "S" symbol in
floor plan view anywhere a step in a
foundation is located.
5 Enter the wall thicknesses to be used
for default walls. See Alter Default

Wall on page 132.
6 Enter a thickness in plan inches for

Wall Hatch Spacing.
Enter a Wall Snap Distance in plan inches.

Walls of the same type within this distance
will snap together.
Enter an Unconnected Minimum Wall
Length in plan inches. Walls that are drawn
shorter than this length are automatically
deleted unless connected to two other walls.
Pony Wall Defaults Dialog

1
2
3
5
4
182
Pony Wall Defaults Dialog

1 Wall Type for Upper Wall - Specify
the default wall type for the upper

portion of pony walls. You must specify a
wall type that is not "Default".
2 Wall Type for Lower Wall - Specify
the default wall type for the lower

portion of pony walls. You must specify a
wall type that is not "Defualt".
3 Height of Lower Wall - Specify the

default height of the lower portion of
pony walls.
4 Align Pony Wall - Specify the default
option for aligning the top and bottom

portions of pony walls. See Wall Types Tab
For Pony Walls on page 173.
click Edit... to open the Default Deck

Railing dialog; or double-click the Deck
Railing
button. The tabs in this dialog
are the same as their respective tabs in the
Wall Specification dialog. See The Wall
Fencing Defaults Dialog

Select Edit> Default Settings...
; expand
the Walls category; select Fencing; and click
Edit... to open the Default Fencing
dialog; or double-click the Fencing
button. The tabs in this dialog are the same as
their respective tabs in the Wall
Specification dialog. See The Wall
5 Select a radio button to specify which
part of the pony wall is displayed in the

wall layers diagram below.
Railing Defaults Dialog

; expand
the Walls category; select Railing; and click
Edit... to open the Default Railing dialog;
or double-click the Railing
button.
Specify the layer definition of the railing

system that is modeled when you select the
Railing
button. The tabs in this dialog
are the same as their respective tabs in the
Wall Specification dialog. See The Wall
Walls
Deck Railing Defaults Dialog

; expand
the Walls category; select Deck Railing; and
183
184
Rooms
Chapter Overview
When walls or railings create an enclosed
area, "room definition" has been established.
Rooms defined in this manner can be
selected just like other objects in Chief
Architect and opened for specification.
Every room should be assigned a Room
Type. With a specified Room Type comes
predefined characteristics. A room defined as
Porch, for example, assumes certain
attributes which are different than if it were a
Kitchen.
When a room is opened for specification:
The Room Type can be specified, controlling the default behavior for the room
as well as the room label which can
appear in floor plan views.
Ceiling and floor heights can be defined

room-by-room or for the entire floor.
Baseboard, chair-rail or crown molding

can be applied room-by-room or for the
entire floor.
Materials for walls, ceilings, floors and

moldings can be defined room-by-room
or for the entire model based on Room
Type.
Chapter Contents
Room Defaults
Room Material Defaults
Floor and Ceiling Materials
Wall Materials
Floor & Ceiling Heights
Room Definition
Decks
Selecting a Room
Room Specification
Displaying Room Labels
Special Ceilings
Room Polylines
Select Same and Load Same for Rooms
Room Specification Dialog
Floor Defaults Setup
185
Rooms
Chapter 7:
Room Defaults
selecting Edit> Default Settings from
the menu.
Room default values can be specified in the
Floor Defaults dialog. The Floor

Defaults dialog contains important
information that the program uses to create

3D models. Only the defaults for the first
floor of a building can be set ahead of time.
The program uses the setting from the first

floor to create subsequent floors. Once a
subsequent floor is built its floor defaults can
be changed by selecting Floor from the
Default Settings dialog. Other
information such as molding and finishes can
also be set in the Floor Defaults dialog.
See Floor Defaults Setup on page 207.
Room Material Defaults

The default materials used for rooms are
specified based on the type of room. There
are four separate room types which can have
their default materials specified:
General Rooms
Kitchens, Baths, and Utility Rooms
Decks
Garages and Other Concrete Rooms.
The Room Material Defaults dialog can

be accessed by selecting Edit> Default
Settings...
. Expand the Materials
category; select Room Materials; and click
Edit.. Click the room type you would like to
edit to open the Room Material Defaults

dialog for that room type. This dialog is
similar to the Materials tab found in many
object specification dialogs. See Materials
Tab on page 603.
If a room type has not been assigned, the
room will get its default materials from the
General Rooms defaults.
Once a room area has been defined and its
room type has been assigned, the room will
use one of the four defaults for its materials.
The materials in a room can be changed at
any time by opening the room for
specification.
Floor and Ceiling Materials

Specify floor materials and subfloor material
for the entire floor in the Room Material
Defaults dialog or in the Room
You can specify three separate ceiling
materials for a rooms ceiling.
186
Normally, only the Floor Covering and the

Ceiling Covering will display in 3D views. If
the covering is specified as No Material, the
material below it will be displayed. If no
floor or ceiling material has been assigned
then the program will display the default
material for the floor or ceiling.
All floor and ceiling materials will be used

for the calculation of the materials list.
Individual rooms can be assigned unique
ceiling materials only when the checkbox
Use Above Floors Platform for Ceiling is

unchecked in the Floor Defaults dialog,
see Floor Defaults on page 267.
Wall Materials
There are several ways that walls can have
their materials assigned to them, depending
on how the rooms and walls have been
defined:
has been assigned any material other than the

default, that material will display. Use this
method to assign a certain material to all
walls in a particular room.
If the interior or exterior surface of a

particular wall has been assigned a material
other than the default, this material will
display in all 3D views. Use this method to
assign a particular material to a particular
wall surface.
When the default material is assigned to a

room, the program refers to the Wall Type
Definition dialog. If the wall type has a
material assigned to it, this material will
display.
When the default material is assigned to a

wall surface, the program refers to the
Room Specification dialog. If the room
When neither the wall nor the room has a

material assigned to it, the program will refer
to the general material for walls in the
Material Defaults dialog.
Floor & Ceiling Heights

The Floor Defaults dialog defines the
default floor and ceiling heights for each
floor, including the foundation. Use the
Floor Defaults dialog to change these
values on a floor-by-floor basis.
Use the Room Specification dialog to set
these values on a room-by-room basis. This
accomodates split levels, sunken living
rooms, bi-levels, and dropped garages.
These two dialogs allow ceilings to be raised
or lowered by floor or by room, allowing one
room to have a higher ceiling than the rest of
the floor. Adjacent rooms can have a
cathedral ceiling, a coffered ceiling, or no
ceiling at all.
The default subfloor height for the first floor

is set at zero, and all other floor heights are
measured from that height. Individual rooms
may have their own floor height, however.
To raise or lower a rooms floor height, it
must have room definition. Railings, visible
or invisible, work well to create room
definition for this purpose as they put a
railing where the two rooms meet and fill in
the vertical space between the two levels
with a short wall. An invisible wall will not
fill in the vertical space between the two
levels. See Room Definition on page 189.
187
Rooms
Wall Materials
The following is a cross section of a twostory building. Important observations can be

made from this diagram.
The above diagram shows callouts A through

H.
(Foundation floor ht = first floor ht - platform thickness - stem wall height + slab
thickness).
A = Floor Height, first floor

B = Ceiling Height, first floor
C = Platform Thickness upper floor
D = Floor Height, second floor
E = Floor Thickness, first floor
F = Stem Wall Height
G = Foundation Floor Height, (Always a
negative number.)
H = Ceiling Height, foundation
The following formulas apply:
D = (A) + (B) + (C) (Upper floor ht. =
lower floor ht + lower ceiling ht + platform thickness).
188
G = (A) - (E) - (F) + slab thickness
The Ceiling Height specifies the distance

from the finished floor to the top plate. It is
defined relative to the subfloor height. Once
the Ceiling Height has been set, the floor
height will adjust the ceiling height to
compensate. In this case, the top plate height
does not change.
Example: The default ceiling height for the
second floor is 96" which is 204" above the
first floor.
1.
If you lower the second floor by 8", in

the Room Specification dialog, the
Ceiling Height increases to 104" which

is still 204" above the first floor.
2.
If you go back to the dialog and specify

a 96" Ceiling Height, the floor height
remains the same and the ceiling height
is 96", which makes it 196" above the
first floor.
If you have a situation like this, you can

make a false lowered ceiling to cover any
steps made by different floor platforms
above. Do this by entering its height in the
Lowered Ceiling box in the Room
Ceiling heights are linked to the floor above.

If the floor above is stepped, the ceiling
below is also stepped.
The illustration above shows a vector view of
a first floor room. The floor above contains
several rooms with different floor heights.
Those stepped floor platforms affect the
ceiling below.
1.
If you lower the floor, the ceiling below

that room drops.
2.
If you raise the floor, the ceiling below

that area is raised.
3.
If you adjust a ceiling, the floor above is

adjusted as well.
Room Definition
A room is a totally enclosed area defined by
any combination of joined walls or railings,
both visible or invisible. A room must have
an unbroken perimeter to be recognized as a
room by Chief Architect.
Unless otherwise specified, rooms
automatically generate floor and ceiling
platforms. Rooms are also automatically
covered by the roof when one is built. There

are exceptions to this, such as rooms defined
as decks.
Room definition disappears if one of the
surrounding walls is deleted. It is a good idea
to get your walls in place before you define
rooms with names and attributes such as
floor height, ceiling height, and finishes.
Decks
A room can be specified as a Deck on the
General Tab of the Room Specification
dialog.
189
Rooms
Room Definition
To create a deck, click the Deck Railing

child button and click and drag in floor plan
view. Once room definition is established,
the area defined by the railing is assigned the
room type of Deck automatically.
To create a deck manually, select a room
created using the Railing
tool; manually
set its room type to Deck. See Room
Specification on page 191.
By default, decks do not have roofs. If you
want to have a roof over your deck, select the
Roof over this room check box on the
Structure tab of the Room Specification
dialog. Select the Post to Overhead Beam
option on the Railing tab to give the roof a
visible means of support. See Railing Type Select the radio button for the desired railing
type. A preview of the selected type
displayes to the left. on page 174.
Decks can have stairways going down into
the yard. To create a stairway leading down
from the deck, select Build> Stairs from the
menu or click the Stairs
floor plan view toolbar.
button on the
Place the pointer at the edge of the deck, hold

the Shift key down, and drag in the direction
of the stairs. Holding the Shift key produces a
stairway that goes down from the current
floor instead of up. Place a doorway in the
railing at the top of the steps, and your deck
and stairs are complete.
The only time you should ever draw
stairs from an upper level down is when
you are going from a floor platform such as a
deck to the ground or finished grade. Whenever stairs are drawn between two floor platforms, they should always be drawn from the
lower platform to the upper platform.
190
Deck Framing
There are two ways deck rooms can be
framed in Chief Architect, Standard deck
framing or Advanced Deck Framing. When a
deck room is selected, one of two edit
buttons will appear, either the Build
Advanced Deck Framing
edit button or
the Remove Advanced Deck Framing

edit button. If your deck has not had
Advanced Deck Framing built, click the
Build Advanced Deck Framing
edit
button to generate the advanced deck
framing details. If your deck has had
Advanced Deck Framing built, click the
edit
button to remove the advanced deck framing
details.
Standard deck framing is created at the same
time floor framing is generated by using the
Build Framing dialog. If you have a deck
on your second floor, you must go to the 1st
floor tab and generate framing for the
platform above to generate standard deck
framing. See Floor Tabs on page 383.
Normally, standard decks will display as
solid platforms in all 3D views. Standard
deck framing will only display in 3D views if
you create a framing overview or if you have
turned on the display of joists on the Include
tab of the 3D Settings dialog. You can
change the materials that the deck displays in
3D views on the Materials Tab of the Room
Specification dialog. See Materials Tab
on page 603.
You can create Advanced Deck Framing
details which will also include posts, support
beams, and deck planking using the Build
Advanced Deck Framing

edit button. If
a foundation level exists, supports for the
deck will be created also. You do not need to
build any other framing using the Build
Framing dialog to create and display the
Advanced Deck Framing details. If you want
to remove the Advanced Deck Framing
Details, select the deck room and click the
edit
button. Normally, the advanced framing deck
details will appear in all 3D views. You can
control the display of the advanced deck

framing details in the Layer Display
Options dialog.
You can also control the display of the deck
planking in floor plan view by modifying the
Deck Planking layer in the Layer Display
Options dialog. Each of the individual
framing objects created by the Advanced
Deck Framing tool can be selected and edited
like CAD objects to create custom decks. See
Selecting a Room
Room definition is established when a room
is completely enclosed by walls. You can
confirm that room definition has been
established by using Select Objects
to
select it in floor plan view. When a fullyenclosed room is selected, the room will
highlight.
The exterior of a house can also be selected,
allowing the buildings exterior to be
controlled using the Room Specification
dialog. Click near an exterior wall using the
Select Objects
room.
The room at left is selected
tool to select the exterior
Room Specification
A room can be opened for specification by
selecting it in floor plan view or floor
overview and clicking the Open Object
edit button. You can also double-click a room
using Select Objects
to open the Room
Specification dialog for that room.
Once a floor plan has been determined, each

room should be opened for specification and
assigned a Room Type
The Room Type tells Chief Architect what
each room will be used for and as a result,
each room will inherit appropriate properties.
191
Rooms
Selecting a Room
Once a room type is assigned, a label with

the room name appears in floor plan view.
The text of a room label can be edited in
floor plan view; however the type of room
originally assigned will remain until it is
changed in the Room Specification
dialog.
Room Types
Interior - Living, Dining, Family, Kitchen,
Nook, Bath, Master Bath, Master Bedrm,
Bedroom, Study, Office, Entry, Hall, Closet,
Dressing, Storage, Laundry, and Utility
Exterior - Court, Deck, Balcony
Hybrid - Open Below, Garage, Slab, Porch,
Attic
All Interior rooms are used in Living

Area calculations; exterior rooms are not.
The Auto Place Outlets

tool adds
outlets automatically to all interior rooms
except bathrooms. Only one outlet over
each sink is added for a bathroom.
Interior doors do not show a threshold.
Interior rooms have a ceiling and roof

above them unless specified otherwise.
Exterior rooms are assumed to be open

to the outside and do not generate a roof
above them.
192
Windows placed between interior rooms

will generate a warning message. If this
message displays when you place a window on what you think is an exterior
wall, check to see if your walls are properly connected.

tool does
not place outlets in an exterior type room.
Any outlet manually placed in an exterior

room automatically becomes a waterproof outlet designed for exterior use.
Moldings are not automatically drawn in

exterior rooms.
A window placed in a wall between an

exterior room and an interior room
always faces out toward the exterior.
Open Below is a unique type of interior

room. It can be used for defining stairwell openings or other areas which have
no floor.
The Open Below Room Type prevents a

floor from being created.

tool does
not place outlets in an Open Below
Room Type.
The enclosed area of an Open Below

Room Type is not included in the Living
Area calculations.
Baseboards and chair rails in an Open

Below Room Type do not display, but
crown moldings do.
An Open Below Room Type is treated as

an interior room for window and door
placement.
Garage, Slabs, and Porches are hybrid

rooms. They are treated like exterior
rooms in all cases except that they generate a ceiling and a roof above them.

tool places
fewer outlets in hybrid rooms.
A garage is specified with a different type

of foundation than other rooms.
Plan Check
uses the room type and
its characteristics for basic plan checking.
For example, a closet does not need a

smoke detector, but a bedroom does. See
Plan Check on page 813.
Threshold Lines
A wall between exterior rooms and interior
rooms can contain windows. Doors in
exterior walls and doors that open to exterior
type rooms (such as a garage, porch, deck,
etc.) have a threshold line across the opening
in floor plan view. If there is a problem with
the threshold line, make sure the rooms are
labeled properly and that all walls are
correctly joined. Once the problem is solved,
force the doors to recalculate for thresholds
by selecting the door and simply clicking
once on the middle handle.
Threshold
Line
Foundations and
Room Specification
Once a room is defined, the program makes
assumptions about the foundation below.
Exterior walls of rooms default to create

the foundation type specified in the
Foundation Defaults dialog.
Walls that define the garage have a foundation under them defined by the
Foundation Defaults dialog with a
concrete slab at the top of stem wall or
grade beam.
The garage floor displays in 3D with the

foundation floor, not the first floor.
Defining a room as Slab causes the floor

platform thickness to equal the Slab
thickness value in the Foundation
Defaults dialog.
Courts, decks and balconies do not generate foundations.

Room labels are created based on the Room
Type assigned in the Room Specification
dialog. Room labels can move about or even
disappear when room entries are revalidated.
You can move a room label in floor plan
view without affecting the room
specification.
Editing Room Labels

The room label is a standard text entry and
can be changed, moved and resized like any
other text object. Its display can be switched
off and its color changed independently of
other text entries using the Layer Display

Options dialog. If you change the text in the
label, you can still see the room's original
definition by displaying its Room
The room label can be edited as a text object
and changed to say anything you like, but the
program remembers the originally specified
room type until you delete and select another
from the Room Specification dialog. The
program determines the type of the room
from this selection, not from the text that the
label contains.
193
Rooms
Although it is possible to change a rooms

label, the assigned room type plays an
important role in plan development. You
should assign a room type most similar to the
rooms actual use, and then change the label.
For example, it is reasonable to change the
Bedroom label to Guest Room, since
they are basically the same type of room.
Defining a closet as a Living Room and
then editing its label to say Closet may
cause problems. The program will still
consider it a living room because this was the
original room type.
If you delete the room label, the room type
remains within the Room Specification
dialog. To retrieve the label, select and open
the room, and check the Show Room Label
check box in the Room Specification
dialog.
Room Sizes
Any defined room can have its size displayed
with the Room Label in one of three ways.
Room standard area - Measured from the
outside surface of exterior walls and the
center of interior walls. It does not include
area within bay, box and bow windows. This
is rounded to the nearest square foot or mm.
Room interior area - Measured from the
inner surfaces of all the room's walls. This is
rounded to the nearest square foot or mm.
Room interior dimensions - Measured
again from the inner surfaces of the room's
walls. This does include the area within Bay,
Box, or Bow windows if these windows
reach the floor. This is rounded to the nearest
inch or mm.
Floor areas can be measured to the exterior
main layer surface or to the surface of the
194
wall. Specify which method you prefer on

the General tab of the Floor Defaults
dialog.
Room area and dimensions are not standard
text entries. They cannot be edited or
changed, but their display can be controlled
from the Layer Display Options dialog.
Their color and line weight is determined by
the layer properties. They move, resize, and
rotate with the Room Label.
Room area and dimensions can also be
inserted into text objects as Text Macros.
See Text Macros on page 709.
Living Area
The Living Area label appears near the
center at the bottom of the plan the first time
you Build Walls/Floors/Ceilings with at
least one room. This value is recalculated
every time you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
You can choose not to display this label by

clearing the Show Living Area check box
in the Plan Defaults dialog.
The Living Area label can be moved or
deleted. To restore a deleted Living Area
label, select Tools> Plan Check
or press
F9 . You can click the Done button
immediately, without actually completing
Plan Check.
Living Area vs. Footprint

Only true livable areas are included in the
Living Area calculation. Exterior rooms
labeled as garage, court, deck, and porch are
not included. Neither is any room labeled
Rooms
Open Below. The Living Area should not be

mistaken for the footprint of the house.
Living Area is measured from the outside
surface or main layer surface of exterior
walls, and to the center of walls or railings
separating the living area from a garage, slab
or Open Below area.
The living area is displayed for an individual
building if half or more of that building's area
is living area. For example, a living area
label would not appear for a detached garage
that contains a bathroom or small shop.
To find the footprint of any given floor:
1.
Click outside a plan, near an exterior

wall. This should select the exterior
"room" surrounding the plan.
2.
Click the Make Room Polyline

edit
button. This creates a polyline surrounding the plan from the walls exterior surface.
3.
You can edit the polylines shape if you

want to measure portions of a home.
4.
Select the Polyline and click the Open

Object
edit button, a Polyline Area
is shown in the Polyline
Specification dialog. If no area is
shown, the polyline is not closed.
195
Special Ceilings
Lowered Ceiling Height
You can define a lowered ceiling height to

model a dropped ceiling without affecting
the structural ceiling height. The above
illustration shows a room defined within a
room, using an invisible wall. The default
ceiling height for the entire floor is 120". The
smaller room has the lowered ceiling height
196
set at 96". The dashed line in the dialog

preview represents the lowered ceiling.
Once the room was modeled a new material
with a 24x24 tile pattern was created to
represent the ceiling tiles. The material was
applied to the ceiling for that individual
room. The camera shows the dropped ceiling
24" below the structural ceiling.
Special Ceilings
A cathedral ceiling can be created based on

the underside of the roof above or by creating
ceiling planes in floor plan view.
3.
Ceiling Plane
; create ceiling planes;
then select and open them to assign a
pitch
To create a cathedral ceiling:

4.
1.
Draw the roof planes.
2.
When the roof is in place, individually

select every room which is affected, and
open the Room Specification dialog.
On the Structure tab, clear the check box
for Ceiling over this room.
To assign a ceiling pitch different from

the roof pitch, select Build> Roof>
If the roof and ceilings do not rebuild

automatically, click the Rebuild Walls/
Floors/Ceilings
click F12 .
child button or
Coffered Ceilings
Hip roof, w/ cathedral

ceiling over.
Hip roof, ceiling over, ceiling

height raised and ceilings
rebuilt.
A coffered ceiling is usually based on a hipstyle roof. If a hip roof is used and the Ceiling over this room is unselected, the new
ceiling follows the entire hip roof line. Click
the Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
child
button or F12 if the ceiling does not rebuild
automatically.
Coffered ceiling from floor

plan view. Note dashed lines
for changed ceiling
Sometimes only the lower part of a coffered

ceiling is supposed to follow the roof line,
with the rest remaining flat. In this case, the
ceiling needs to remain checked for that
room and the ceiling height adjusted instead.
The roof must be built correctly before
adjusting the ceiling height for a coffered
ceiling. Any attempt to rebuild the roof after
adjusting the ceiling height results in the roof
197
Rooms
Cathedral Ceilings
itself being raised to match the new ceiling

height.
Assuming a hip roof based on 8 ceilings. If,
after the roof is built, the ceiling is raised to
10, the new ceiling follows the roof for 2,
then becomes a flat ceiling. Floors and
ceilings must be rebuilt after raising the
ceiling height, but the roof should not be
rebuilt.
Split Levels
Split Levels are created by adjusting the
floors and ceiling heights of various areas of
the plan. Rooms can be either raised or
lowered. In the example below, the lowest
floor height is 0; the next is 24; and the next
is 48 inches. The ceiling height in each room
is set to 96 inches. The overview and cross
section/elevation view are shown.
The floor plan view shows where the ceiling

changes from sloped to flat with a dashed
line. This line is located on the Walls/Beams
layer in the Layer Display Options
dialog.
More complex and varied ceilings are made
using ceiling planes. These behave like roof
planes except that where the top of a roof
plane is viewed from outside the house, the
bottom of a ceiling plane is viewed from
inside the house.
Other Special Ceilings

Soffits
can be used in various ways to
enhance the 3D model. The ability to have
soffits automatically angle to fit the slope of
the roof, combined with the ability to
replicate groups of soffits at specified
intervals offers unlimited possibilities. The
illustration shows only one of the many
possibilities.
Polyline solids; framing members and locked
roof trusses may also be used for this.
198
Example
A close look at the front entry of this splitentry home shows that part of the upper floor
was lowered to provide the entry platform.
Note that the siding on the second floor
follows the dropped floor height.
A vector camera view of the entry is also

shown. The floor plan for the Entry has room
The stairwell is a room
named Open Below. This
causes no floor to generate
in the area. The stairs drawn
on the floor below display
from above, after floors and
ceilings are rebuilt.
definition information showing the floor and

ceiling heights for each of the different
levels.
The surrounding rooms are
standard rooms, with the
floor height and ceiling
height set to the floor
defaults. Note that all the
values are followed by a
(D), indicating that they
match the floor default.
As you walk into the house, the floor level of the Entry is
halfway between the two floors. The floor height is set to
54" (which is 54 1/4 lower than the rest of the rooms on
this floor). The ceiling height has also been raised so that it
is higher than the rest of this floor. If the ceiling remained
defaulted it would stay at the same height, which would be
at 96" (the floor default) plus 54 1/4 (the amount the floor
was dropped) for a total of 150 1/4.
Room Polylines
Select any interior or exterior room in
floor plan view and the Make Room
Polyline
edit button will display. Click
this button to create a standard polyline

which matches the shape of the room. This
polyline works like any other CAD polyline
199
Rooms
Room Polylines
Make Room Molding

Polyline Dialog
and can be used for a variety of things such

as creating floor areas using the slab tool.
The Expand Room Polyline
edit
button displays when a room separated
from other rooms by invisible walls or
railings is selected. Clicking this button will
enlarge the room polyline to include all
rooms that are continuous and only separated
by invisible walls or railings.
An Expanded Room Polyline can not be used
to open the larger room for specification but
it can be used to generate a larger room
polyline or to create a room molding
polyline.
Room Molding Polylines

Room moldings, using either a default
or custom molding profile, can be
converted into a molding polyline which can
then be edited. When a room molding is
converted into a molding polyline, it is
removed from the Room Specification
dialog and is no longer part of the room.
Room polylines will not be altered when the
room is altered.
Room molding polylines can be edited just
like other manually created molding
polylines. Their shape or height can be
altered and the molding profile can be
changed. Additional molding profiles can
also be assigned.See Layer Tab on page
447.
Use a room molding polyline to remove
a portion of an existing room molding or
to wrap a molding around an object which the
molding would not normally wrap around.
200
1
3
5
2
4
1 Base Molding - Select to convert the
rooms base molding into a molding

polyline. This option is only enabled if the
room has a base molding. When the rooms
base molding is converted to a molding
polyline, the rooms base molding will be
turned off.
2 Chair Rail Molding - Select to convert
the rooms chair rail molding into a

molding polyline. This option is only
enabled if the room has a chair rail molding.
Once you convert the rooms chair rail
molding to a molding polyline, the rooms
chair rail molding will be turned off.
3 Crown Molding - Select to convert the
rooms crown molding into a molding

polyline. This option is only enabled if the
room has a crown molding. Once you
convert the rooms crown molding to a
molding polyline, the rooms crown molding
will be turned off.
4 Blank Molding - Select to generate a
blank molding polyline at the specified

height. The polyline will follow the room
perimeter and will have blank sections where
5 Height - Specify the height of the blank

molding.
Rooms
the polyline crosses windows and doors if

these objects are at the polylines height.

You can use the Select Same Type
tool to select all rooms that have
attributes set the same as the original room.
This can be useful to quickly see which
rooms in a plan all have the same floor and/
or ceiling heights.
Click the Select Same Type
edit button to
open the Select Similar Objects dialog.
Select all attributes which you want to match
by putting a checkbox in the appropriate box.
Click OK to select all rooms in the current
plan which have those attributes the same as
the original room.
All rooms that match the orignal will be
displayed as highlighted. The only edit
button available will be Load Values to

Make Same
The Load Values to Make Same

edit
button can be used to load the selected
attributes into any rooms that do not
currently have the same values. Since
multiple select is not available for rooms, the
Load Values to Make Same
tool can be
used to quickly modify multiple rooms.
Simply click on the rooms that are not
highlighted and they will have their attributes
changed so that they will match.
See Select Same / Load Same on page 815.

To open the Room Specification dialog
for a room:
Select a room in floor plan view and click

the Open Object
edit button.
Double-click a room in Select Objects

mode.
Double-click on the floor, ceiling, wall

covering, or molding in vector views or
render views.
The Room Specification dialog covers

general information about individual rooms.
The most important values are the Room
Type, Floor Height and Ceiling Height.
Rooms can be modified individually or

globally. Individual settings are defined in
the Room Specification dialog, global
settings are defined in the Floor Defaults
dialog for each floor.
A value followed by (D) is a default value
taken from the Floor Defaults dialog. If
one of these settings is changed for a given
room, it remains individually set for that one
room. To return a value to the default value,
type a "d" in its place in the text box and
press the Tab key. For more information
about floor defaults, see Floor Defaults
Setup on page 207.
201
General Tab
1
11
2
3
5
7
4
6
8
9
10
The General tab shows a cross section of the

room, displaying the various heights and
platform thicknesses, including foundations,
for the floors below the room you selected.
The room in the above example has a
foundation below.
What is displayed in the cross section
depends on the current floor and the location
of the pointer when you selected the room.
Only two floors at a time display in the
Room Specification dialog. If one large
room on the current floor is positioned over a
couple of smaller rooms, the position of the
pointer relative to the smaller lower rooms
determines which of the these rooms display
as the floor below.
1 Select the Room Type. This will affect

some of the rooms characteristics.
2 Show Room Label - Select the check
box to display the room label in floor

plan view.
3 Floor Height - Specify the relative
elevation above or below the default

first floor height of zero.
4 Ceiling Height - Specify the ceiling
height. This value is the top plate height

for the walls. The ceiling height is relative to
the selected rooms floor height.
5 Lowered ceiling - Specify the height

for a lowered ceiling.
6 Stem Wall Height - If the room below
is a foundation, specify the distance

from the bottom of the floor framing to the
top of the footing.
7 Floor Above Height - Specify the
finish floor height for the floor above.
202
the floor below is shown. It may be

defined here, or in the specification for that
room. The values are linked.
9 Platform Thickness - An information
line displays the Platform thickness for

the floor framing assembly, including the
thickness of the subfloor and joists. The
platform thickness can be changed in the
Structure tab.
If the material for the current rooms floor is
Concrete, and floors and ceilings have been
rebuilt since it was set to this, the Platform
thickness defaults to the Slab thickness in the
Foundation Defaults dialog, if it was not
explicitly set in the Structure tab.
10 Roof Group - Specify a roof group for
the room. For each set of rooms with

the same Roof Group number, a complete
roof plan is built. This roof plan is not
influenced by any other parts of the structure
where the rooms are in different roof groups.
This number is nearly always left zero.
Change this number to break off a structure
so that the program does not automatically
combine its roof system with the main
building.
11 A diagram of the room is displayed.
The arrows indicate what part of the

structure will move if changes are made in
the corresponding box.
Moldings Tab
Crown, chair rail and base moldings can be

assigned to the selected room. Moldings are
placed around the wall surfaces of a room.
They continue around the surface of any

soffit or object that is attached to the wall at
the molding height. This allows a crown
203
Rooms
8 Ceiling below - The ceiling height for
molding at the top of wall and full height

cabinets.
2 Chair Rail - Define a Height for Chair
If you only define a height for the molding

the program places a default molding profile
that displays in 3D views. To define a custom
molding, click the Select button to open the
Moldings and Profiles category in the
Library Browser.
3 Base Molding - Specify a Height and
Select a molding in the Broswer and click

OK to assign the molding to the trim that you
selected.
1 Crown Molding - Define a Height for

Crown Molding, and the Distance
Above Floor to the top of the molding.
Rail Molding and the Distance Above
Floor to the top of the molding.
the Distance Above Floor to the bottom

of the molding.
You can set the Height of any of these to zero
to specify no molding at all. Any molding
height can be specified in sixteenth inch or 1
mm increments.
A (D) following any value signifies that it is
a default value set in the Floor Defaults
dialog. If a value is not followed by a (D),
replace it with "d" to reset it to the default.
204
Specifying Custom Moldings
Click Clear to remove a selected molding

profile from the room.
Wall Covering Tab

The Wall Covering tab of the Room
Specification dialog contains the same
elements as the Wall Covering tab of the
Wall Specification dialog. When a wall
covering is assigned using the Room
Specification dialog, that wall covering
will be applied to all walls in the selected
room. See Wall Covering Tab on page 178.
Rooms
Structure Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 If Ceiling Over This Room is checked,
the room will have a flat ceiling. If

unchecked, the ceiling follows the underside
of the roof or ceiling planes.
2 If Roof Over This Room is checked, a
roof automatically generates over the

room. If unchecked, no roof generates.
3 Slab Foundation for This Room -
Check this box to change this rooms

floor platform into a concrete slab. This slab
will get its thickness from the Foundation
Defaults dialog.
This option is only available if there is no
room or foundation room under the selected
room.
4 Floor for This Room is Supplied by
the Foundation Room from the

Floor Below - Check this box to make the
current room similar to an Open Below
room, deleting its own floor platform. The

floor of the room below, which is often a
room on the foundation floor, then supplies
the floor of the current room. While the same
thing could be accomplished by naming the
current room Open Below, this method
allows the current room to retain its normal
designation as Living, Garage, etc. This is
often used in situations where framed walls
are built above concrete curb walls, such as
in garages.
5 Subfloor Thickness - Set the thickness
of the subfloor under this room. The

default value for this is set in the Build
Framing dialog on the Floor tab for the
current floor ("subfloor for floor "x"). This,
along with the Floor Structure Thickness
determines the depth of the platform under
this room.
205
When viewing framing, this Subfloor

Thickness may be represented by a gap. To
remove this gap, change the value to zero
and rebuild the appropriate framing.
6 Floor Structure Thickness - Set the

thickness (or depth) of the selected
structure under this room. This together with
Subfloor Thickness, determines the depth of
the platform under the room.
7 Floor Structure Type - Select the type
of floor structure. Check Default to use

the structure type specified on the
appropriate floors tab of the Build Framing
dialog.
8 Insulation (cross sections only) -
Check these boxes to generate

insulation details in cross section views when
the Autodetail
tool is used. See AutoDetailing on page 638.
206
Insulation Above Ceiling - Check this box

to generate insulation details above the
ceiling in cross section views when the
Autodetail
tool is used.
Insulation Under Floor -Check this box to

generate insulation details under the floor in
cross section views when the Autodetail
tool is used.
Fill Style Tab

For more information about the Fill Style tab,
see Fill Style Tab on page 743.
Materials Tab
For more information about the Materials
tab, see Materials Tab on page 603.
Rooms

General Tab
3
4
5
7

; choose
Floor; and click on Edit... to open the Floor
Defaults dialog for the current floor. The
settings in this dialog are dynamic: they
immediately affect every room on the floor
except those modified individually.
1 Define the Floor Height for the
selected floor. If you are on the first

floor, you cannot change this setting. The
default height for the first floor is always 0.
Zero is the first floor datum reference for the
rest of the building.
On upper floors, changing the floor height
changes the ceiling heights on the current
floor as well as the floor below.
2 Define Ceiling Height relative to the
floor height. Once you set the ceiling

height, the relation is not locked. If you
change an intermediate floor height the

ceiling heights above and below change.
3 Stem Wall Height - Define the height
of the stem wall for the foundation.

This is the height from the top of the footing
to the bottom of the floor framing, including
any mudsill.
4 The Platform Thickness displays. This
is set in the Framing dialog, see

Framing Defaults/Build Framing Dialog
on page 382.
5 Use Above Floors Platform for
Ceiling - Check this box to set the

ceiling height at the bottom of the floor joists
of the next floor. Leaving this box unchecked
is one way to allow the ceilings to be
assigned unique materials in individual
rooms. This box is normally left unchecked.
207
6 Default to no Ceiling - Check this box
to use open ceilings on all newly

defined rooms.
8 A cross section diagram displays. The
arrows show how the model is adjusted

when the various settings are changed.
7 Living Area To - Defines what wall
layer the floor area is calculated to.

This option is only set on the first floor.
Molding Tab
3
4
5
1 Crown Molding, Chair Rail and Base
Molding defaults can be defined for the

entire floor. They can be overridden in
individual rooms in the Room
If you do not define a custom profile but do
define the Height of the molding, the
program places a flat molding profile that
appears in 3D views.
2 Use the Select button to open the
Library Browser to the Molding

Library. Select a molding profile from the
208
Library and click OK. A view of the molding

profile displays in the dialog.
3 Select Clear to delete the selection for

the custom molding profile.
4 Height - Define the height of the
molding. The width does not resize. To

reset the moldings to the floor defaults, type
a "d" in the box. A zero width defines no
molding.
5 Distance Above Floor - Define the
measurement to the top of molding.

(Baseboard measurement is to the bottom of
the molding.)
Chapter 8:
Doors
Doors
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect comes with a wide variety of
interior and exterior doors. In addition, the
library offers a full line of specialty doors
and doorways including manufacturerspecific products.
Once doors have been placed in the model, a
door schedule can be automatically
generated. See Creating Schedules on page
928.
Chapter Contents
Door Defaults
The Door Tools
Displaying Doors
Selecting Doors
Deleting Doors
Copying Doors
Moving Doors
Changing Door Swings
Resizing Doors
Special Doors
Door Specification Dialog
Door Defaults
Door Defaults
the menu.
There are door defaults for both interior and
exterior doors. It is most efficient to go over
these settings before doors are placed to
make sure they agree with your building

style. The settings for both types of doors are
similar. The program will automatically
place exterior doors in exterior walls, and
interior doors in interior walls. See Door
209
The Door Tools

To place a door, select the desired door
type from the Build> Door menu or by
clicking the Door Tools
parent button
and clicking one of its child tools. Some
shortcut keys are also available, see Menus
and Toolbar Buttons on page 17.
Once a door tool has been activated click on
a wall to place the door. If the wall is an
exterior wall or a wall that separates an
interior room and a garage, porch, balcony,
court, or deck, the program will place an
exterior door based on the default settings for
exterior doors. If the wall is an interior wall,
the program will place an interior door based
on the default settings for interior doors. See
Door Defaults on page 229.
Doors can also be placed in curved walls.
See Curved Options on page 222.
Once placed, any door may be changed into
any other type of door using the Door
Specification dialog. See Door
Hinged Doors
Click the Hinged Door child button
and click on a wall in floor plan view
where you would like to place a hinged door.
Hinged doors can be placed on interior or
exterior walls. A hinged door will become a
double door when its width is four feet or
greater.
Doorways
Click the Doorway child button and
click on a wall in floor plan view to
place a doorway (without a door) into which
210
library doors can be placed. Doorways can

be placed on interior or exterior walls.
Sliding Doors
Click the Sliding Door child button
where you would like to place a sliding door.
Sliding doors can be placed on interior or
exterior walls. If placed on an exterior wall,
the dimensions will be 5-0 x 6-8 with a
12" bottom frame and a 6" frame on the sides
and top. If placed on an interior wall, the
dimensions will be a solid 5-0 x 6-8 with
two movable panels. A sliding door must be
at least four feet wide.
Pocket Doors
Click the Pocket Door child button
where you would like to place a pocket door.
The default pocket door dimensions are 2-6
x 6-8 high. A pocket door will become a
double pocket door if its width is four feet or
greater.
Bifold Doors
Click the Bifold Door child button and
click on a wall in floor plan view where
you would like to place a bifold door.
The default interior single bifold door is 26 x 6-8. A bifold door will become a
double bifold door if its width is greater than
three feet.
Bifold doors always display closed in any 3D
view.
Displaying Doors
Click the Garage Door child button

and click on a wall in floor plan view to
place a garage door.
The default garage door is 8-0 x 7-0 high.
A garage door must be at least two feet wide
Garage doors can only be placed in exterior
walls. A dashed line in floor plan view shows
the space occupied by the garage door when
open.
The Doorways Library

Click the Doorway
Library child button
to access a library of special
entryways and doorways.
Select a doorway in the
Library Browser and click
on a wall to place it.
To add a door to the doorway, select it and
click the Open Object
edit button. The
Door Specification dialog displays and
will allow you to add a door to the doorway.

You can also select a custom door from the
library and drop it into a doorway in floor
plan view or any 3D view.
To place a library door in a doorway:

1.
Go to floor plan view or any 3D view.
2.
Open the Library Browser.
3.
Navigate through the Doors library category until you find the custom door style
desired.
4.
Select the door in the Library Browser,

then click on the doorway in your view.
The selected door will replace the original if one has already been placed.
5.
Continue clicking on other doorways

until all changes have been made.
The Doors Library

The door library can be accessed by clicking
the Library Browser
button and going
to the Doors library category. The door
library contains a variety of customized
interior and exterior doors, as well as some
doors offered by specific manufacturers. The
door library also contains some garage doors
and gates that can be used with fencing.
Creating Your Own Doors

Use the Create Symbol Wizard to create
custom doors and doorways and save them in
your own library for use in future plans. See
Displaying Doors
Once placed, doors are visible in all views.
In Floor Plan View
clicking the Display Options button

to
open the Layer Display Options dialog.
The display of doors, door sizes, and headers

in floor plan view can each be controlled by
If the door sizes layer is set to display, they

will be centered on the door that they
211
Doors
Garage Doors
represent. The labels are sized according to

the Font settings in the Preferences dialog
and the options selected in the Schedule
dialog. See Creating Schedules on page
928.
Doors in exterior walls and doors that open
to exterior type rooms have a threshold line
across the opening in floor plan view. If the
threshold line is not functioning correctly, the
rooms may not be properly specified. See
Threshold Lines on page 195.
A 3068 door is three feet, zero inches wide

and six feet, eight inches high. Metric door
dimensions format is 900x2100 where the
first number is the width in mm.
In 3D Views
Click the Display Options
button within
any 3D view to open the Layer Display
Options dialog. This dialog allows objects
to be turned on and off by layer. See Layer
The size displays in the format 3068,

which is width by height in feet and inches.
Selecting Doors
Before a door can be edited, it must first be
selected. Once selected, three edit handles
will display which can be used to move,
resize, delete, or change the swing of the
door. In addition, the Edit toolbar will
display, making additional tools available for
modifying the selected door.
nearby object is selected first, click the

Select Next Object
edit button or
press the Tab key until the door is
selected.
3.
There are four ways to select doors:

1.
Click on the door while any door or window tool is active. Walls or other objects
which might interfere with selection will
be ignored.
2.
Click on a door using the Select Objects

tool. If your plan is crowded, this
method may not select the door. If a
Right-click on the door while using any

drawing tool. This method is similar to
using the Select Objects
mode. If a
neighboring object is selected instead,
click the Select Next Object
edit
button or the Tab key until the desired
door is selected.
4.
Once a door is selected, you can select

multiple doors by holding down the Shift
key and clicking on doors.
Deleting Doors
Select a door or group of doors to be deleted.
Once selected, press the Del key on the
212
keyboard or click the Delete

on the edit toolbar.
edit button
Copying Doors
Single/Multiple Doors
One or more doors can be copied from one
location to another, either within the same
plan or across plans. If multiple doors are to
be copied simultaneously, they must be
copied from the same, unbroken wall to
another unbroken wall.
To copy a door(s), first select one or more
doors. Once selected, click the Copy/Paste
edit button. If you are copying the door(s)
to the same floor of the same plan, click on
the wall to place a copy.
If you are copying the door(s) to a different
floor of the same plan or to a different plan,
go to the new floor or new plan and select
Edit> Paste from the menu which will make
the pointer resemble the picture on the Copy/
Paste edit button. Click on a wall to place
a copy of the selected door(s).
Stacked/Blocked Doors
Stacked door combinations, such as those
created with a door, a transom window, and a
couple of side lights, may be copied as a
group. Since there is a window above the
door, both occupy the same location in floor
plan view, making it impossible to group
select them in that view.
Stacked windows and doors can also be
copied by blocking them first, which is best
done in a cross section/elevation view, see
Blocked Units on page 235. The blocked
unit can then be copied in floor plan view.
1.
Create a cross section/elevation view in

which doors and windows are visible.
2.
Select the first door, then hold down

the Shift key and click on each additional
door or window.
3.
When all have been selected, click the

Copy/Paste edit button. If you want
to block the units, see Blocked Units
on page 235.
4.
Change to the floor plan view where the

copy is to be placed, and select Edit>
Paste from the menu.
5.
When the pointer resembles the copy

pointer, click on a wall to place a copy of
the entire group.
Multiple Copies
To make multiple copies of the same
object(s), select the object(s) and doubleclick the Copy/Paste
pasting.
edit button before
The multiple copy requires that the receiving

plan be open and visible so that you can
toggle to that plan simply by clicking on
screen. If using multiple copy across plans,
open both plans first and select Window>
Tile Horizontally
or Tile Vertically
to place them side-by-side on screen.
To select and copy stacked windows and

doors:
213
Doors
Copying Doors
Moving Doors
A single opening, a single door, or a group of
doors and openings can be moved by either
dragging from the center handle or by editing
the dimension value.
Dragging
The easiest way to move doors in plan and
3D views is with the mouse.
1.
Select the door(s) you want to move.
2.
Place the pointer over the center edit

handle.
3.
Hold down the mouse button and drag

the door along the wall. Notice that the
dimensions change as the door is moved.
4.
Release the left mouse button when the

desired location is reached.
When the door you are dragging gets

close to its destination, you can temporarily change the moving speed of the pointer
for more control. To do this press a number
key along the top of the keyboard while the
left mouse button is depressed. The mouse
will move n times more than the pointer,
where n is the number pressed.
Using Dimensions
Any object located by either a temporary
dimension or a regular dimension can be
moved using the dimension value itself. This
is the best method to precisely position an
object. See Moving Objects Using
214
Move Restrictions
A door or window moved against an
intersecting wall will automatically stop
when it is the casing distance from the
intersecting wall. This is appropriate and
desirable in most situations. Sometimes this
restriction must be removed. The restriction
can be removed by placing a check in the
Ignore Casing for Opening Resize check
box in the Plan Defaults dialog. See Plan
Sometimes breaks in walls restrict the
relocation of an opening along an apparently
empty wall. Breaks in walls are not always
obvious, especially when the walls are the
same type and in perfect alignment. To check
for this situation, select the wall: two handles
will appear at each end. See Repairing
Broken Walls on page 153.
Centering Doors
If an opening such as a door is selected,
the Center Object edit button displays
in the Edit toolbar. To center an opening:
1.
Select the opening.
2.
Click the Center Object
3.
Click in the plan on the side of the wall

where the opening is to be centered.
4.
If you want to center it to the room, click

inside the room. If you want to center it
to the exterior of the house, click outside
the house.
edit button.
You can center a group of openings in the

same way. You can also center openings
along straight or curved walls.

Doors
The process for changing door swings

depends on the type of door.
Hinged Doors
To change the swing using edit buttons:
3.
1.
Select the door.
2.
To change the side that the hinges are

on, click the Change Opening/Hinge
Side
3.
edit button.
To change a doorway into a hinged door:

1.
In floor plan view, select the doorway

and grab the edit handle on the side
where the doorknob should be.
2.
Drag perpendicular to the doorway in

the direction of the desired door swing.
3.
When the mouse button is released, the

door swing indicator displays.
To change the hinge swing direction,

click the Change Swing Side
button.
edit
Release the mouse.
To change the swing using edit handles:

1.
2.
In floor plan view, select the door and

grab the triangular handle.
Drag the pointer along the path of the

new arc to change the hinge side and/or
swing direction.
Hinged doors are created with a 90 degree
swing in floor plan view. After the hinged
215
door is created, the angle of swing can be

adjusted in floor plan view.
2.
Grab the end handle near the fixed side

of the door and drag it perpendicular to
the wall.
3.
Release the mouse.
To adjust the angle of swing:

1.

grab the triangular handle.
2.
Drag to change the amount of swing.
3.
Release the mouse.
If you drag near the closed position, the door

will snap to a closed position.
Note: If the door is set to draw closed, the
swing as it appears in floor plan view will
have no affect on the 3D view. See Options
Tab on page 221.
Pocket Doors
To change the direction using edit buttons:
1.
Select the door.
2.
Click the Change Opening/Hinge Side
Sliding Doors
To edit a sliding door using edit buttons:
To change the direction using edit handles:
1.
Select the door.
1.
In floor plan view, select the door.
2.
To change the side of the door that is

fixed, click the Change Opening/Hinge
2.
Grab the end handle where the door

slides inside the wall and drag it perpendicular to the door.
Side
3.
edit button.
To flip the fixed and moving sides of the

door, click the Change Swing Side
edit button.
To edit a sliding door using edit handles:

1.
216
edit button.
In floor plan view, select the door.
Resizing Doors
3.
Release the mouse and the pocket is on

the opposite side of the door.
3.
To change the hinged side of the door,

click the Change Swing Side
button.
edit
Note: There must be enough room for the

entire door to fit in the opposite wall or the
door will not change.
1.

grab any edit handle.
2.
Drag in the direction that you would like

the bifold door to open.
3.
Release the mouse.
Bifold Doors
To change the hinged side using edit
buttons:
1.
Select the door.
2.
To change the side of the door that is

fixed, click the Change Opening/Hinge
Side
edit button.
Resizing Doors
Doors can be resized in floor plan view, 3D
views, cross section/elevation views, and in
the Door Specification dialog.
In Floor Plan View

There are two methods for resizing a door.
The easiest method is to resize the door in
floor plan view using the edit handles.
pointer
To change a doors width using edit handles,

select it; then grab either of the two outside
handles and drag along the wall to resize it.
To move one side only, hold down the Ctrl
key and drag. Release the door at the desired
width. If resized too small, the door will be
deleted.
A doors width can be adjusted using this
method in both floor plan view and 3D
views. A doors height can be adjusted in the
same way in 3D views. See Editing Objects
in 3D Views on page 634.
217
Doors
To change the hinged side using edit

handles:
pointer
Doors can also be resized with the Door

Specification dialog. See Door
Special Doors
Wrapped Openings
Wrapped
openings of
various shapes
are available in
the Doorway
Library
.
You can also
create a wrapped
opening by
placing a
doorway in the
wall and
checking
Suppress Casing in the Frame and Trim tab
of the Door Specification dialog. Note
that the base molding wraps around the
opening.
Openings in Railings
Use a doorway to open up a railing for a
stairway or other access. To open up a railing
218
across an entire section, redefine the opening

size of the doorway in the Door
Specification dialog to a width greater
than the length of the railing. The opening
will resize to the maximum width possible
for that space. The illustration has two
doorway openings placed into the rail. These
openings are noted by arrows.
Adding Transoms Above Doors

Transom windows above doors are created
the same as other stacked windows. See
Stacked Windows on page 234.
Adding a Gable Over Doors
Custom Muntins
When an exterior door is selected, the

Gable Over Door/Window edit button
displays. Click this to produce a gable roof
over the door. When automatic roofs are
subsequently built, a small gable roof will
appear over the door.
Like windows, doors with glass can have

custom muntins. Custom muntins are created
from CAD lines. See Custom Muntins on
page 243.
You can manually edit or delete this gable

line at any time. Your changes take effect
when the automatic roofs are rebuilt. This
can also be used with group selected doors.
Combinations of doors and windows can be

blocked. Blocked units are mulled together
and can be copied together as a unit. Blocked
units containing doors can be treated as
either windows or doors for material list and
schedule generation. See Blocked Units on
page 235.

The second, more precise method for editing
an individual door or group of doors is to use
the Door Specification dialog. Door type,
size, casing, materials, shape, and more can
all be specified within this dialog.
If a group of doors is selected and the Door
Specification dialog is opened, the
changes specified will be applied to all of the

selected doors. If interior doors need to be
different from the exterior doors, they must
be selected and edited as a separate group.
Select a door or group of doors and click the
Open Object
edit button to open the
Door Specification dialog for the selected
door(s).
219
Doors
Blocked Doors and Windows
General Tab
1
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
1 Door Style - Define the door as slab,
glass, panel, louvered; or select a door

style from the library. Specify use default if
you would like to use the default door style
set in the Door Defaults dialog. See Door
Select Library from the list and the Door
Library opens. Once a library door has been
selected, that door is added to the Door Style
list.
2 Door Type - Define the door as a
doorway, hinged, slider, pocket, bifold,

or garage door.
Slider, pocket, bifold and garage are not
allowed as exterior door defaults.
3 Specify the Width, Height, and

Thickness of the door.
4 Vert Panels - Specify the number of

panels to be placed on garage doors.
220
The default is four. This option is only

available for garage doors.
5 R.O. - Specify the amount added to the
width and height for the doors rough

opening. The default value is set in the Build
Framing dialog. See Framing Defaults on
page 377.
6 Enter a value to adjust the Swing Angle
of the selected door in floor plan view.

This is an absolute value. A swing angle of
90 will point to the top of the screen and a
swing angle of 0 points to the right. If Draw
Closed is unchecked on the Options tab, the
swing angle will display in 3D views.
7 Check Show Color to show the door in

color in the dialog preview.
8 Specify which side of the door to

display in the preview.
Options Tab
Doors
1 Single Door - Check this box to force
the selected door to be a single door,

regardless of its width.
Double Door - Check this box to force the

door to be a double door, regardless of its
width.
Hinged, pocket and bifold doors default to
Single Door when less than four feet (1200
mm) wide. If the width is greater than four
feet, Double Door is the default. These
options are not editable as default settings,
but can be set individually in the model.
Check Left Swing Only or Right Swing
Only to allow only the left or right side of a
double door to swing.
Check Double Swing to allow a door or both
sides of a double door to swing both
directions.
Draw Closed - Check this box to display the

door closed in 3D views. If unchecked, the
Swing Angle set on the General tab will
display in 3D views.
You may choose to add an Interior Plinth
Block and/or an Exterior Plinth Block to
the default door style. Plinth blocks do not
display in 3D views, but are counted in the
Material List.
Recessed - Check this box to recess the door
to the main wall layer.
A door placed in a brick, concrete block, or
stone wall may be recessed into the exterior
of the wall. If the wall is a single layer and is
thicker than a typical stud wall, this box is
normally checked. It cannot be set in the
defaults, only for individual doors.
To Sheathing Layer - Check this box to
recess the door to the sheathing layer.
221
Doors cannot be recessed in a single layer

wall. If it can be recessed it will be apparent
in both Plan and 3D views.
By default the exterior of a door frame is
flush with the exterior main layer wall
surface, or with the sheathing over that
surface. The door, along with its casing, is
considered to be recessed into any additional
exterior wall layers. For a framed wall, the
door is then recessed through any brick or
stone veneer to the framing layer or the
sheathing that covers it.
Curved Options
If a door is placed in a curved wall, some
additional options display on the Options tab
of the Door Specification dialog.
2 Casing - Door and window casing and
jamb can be constructed three ways in

curved walls:
222
Straight - Both the door

and casing are straight.
This can be used where
the walls curvature is
not too sharp and the
opening is not too wide.
Straight
Radial - A vertical surface that would be perpendicular to a straight

wall has its plane pass
through the wall's center
of curvature.
Parallel - A vertical surface that would be perpendicular to a straight
wall remains parallel to
the line from the wall's
center through the opening's center.
Door - Doors in curved

walls can be specified as
Curved or Straight for any
of the Casing options.
Radial
Parallel
Radial with
Curved
Door
Frame & Trim Tab
Doors
1
2
3
4
6
1 Frame - If you have specified a Door
Style of glass or panel on the General

tab, you may specify the dimensions of the
rail and stiles here.
Frame Width includes the stiles and top or
middle rails.
Frame Bottom specifies the bottom rail.
2 Specify Interior or Exterior. These
radio buttons switch all the values

below as well as the view of the door. They
do not appear for the interior door
specification, which uses the same values for
both sides of the door.
3 Casing - You can specify the size and
configuration of the casings with these

values. The active side (interior or exterior)
is indicated by the active radio button. The
view of the door updates with the current
side. The width defines any custom molding
as well as flat casings if no custom profile is
defined. You can specify default by entering

"d" for the value, which uses the value in the
Door Defaults dialog.
Width defines the width of the side or
vertical casings.
Top Width defines the width of the top
casing (only available when using lintels).
Reveal is the starting point of the casings
from the edge of the operable door.
4 Lintel defines a butt joint between the
sides and the top casing instead of a

mitre joint.
Extends defines the amount the top casing

extends past the side casings.
Wrap returns the top casing to the wall.
5 Sill - Check this box to create a sill.
223
6 Suppress Casing eliminates all
casings. Its effect is noticeable only if a

custom casing is defined for the lintel.
Lites Tab
The options on this tab are only available for
glass doors. See General Tab on page 220.
1
3
5
2
4
6
1 Lites Across defines the number of
horizontal divisions for the glazed area.

In a normal style of divided lites, Lites
Across specifies the horizontal number of
evenly sized panes of glass. This value must
be between one and eight.
4 Special Type - Choose the style of
divided lites from the list. Normal,

Diamond, Prairie and Craftsman styles are
available.
2 Lites Vertical defines the number of
vertical divisions for the glazed area. In

a normal style of divided lites, Lites Vertical
specifies the number of evenly sized panes of
glass vertically. This value must also be
between one and eight.
3 Muntin Width - Specify the width of

the muntins used to divide the lites.
224
Normal Diamond
Prairie
Craftsman
Normal style is the most common, with the

muntin bars going horizontally and
vertically.
Diamond style uses angled muntin bars to
divide the lites.
point of the arch and fan out. If concentric is

checked, the rays start from the innermost
concentric muntin bar. You must have at least
three lites across for this to be used.
Doors
Prairie style is based on the normal style,

but with all the central muntin bars removed,
leaving only the two outside muntin bars
both horizontally and vertically. To be
effective, both the Lites across and the Lites
vertical should be set between 6 and 8.
Craftsman style is based on the normal
style, but only the topmost horizontal muntin
bar is kept with all the portions of the vertical
muntin bars above it. To be effective, both
the Lites across and the Lites vertical should
be set between 4 and 8.
5 Round Top - Ray Count If the door is
defined as round top or one of the arch

tops on the Arch tab, you may specify up to
10 rays. The rays specify the number of
radial muntin bars; there is one more pane of
glass than the number of rays specified.
If rays are added, any Lites Across and Lites
Vertical are confined to the part of the
window below the circle top or arch top.
6 Concentric In round top doors only,
rays may be defined as concentric. If it

is not checked, the rays start at the center
225
Arch Tab
1
3
5
2
4
1 Specify the Type of arch desired.
2 Height - For most arches, a height must
be defined. This is the dimension of the

top of the arch defined by the height of the
door down to the base of the arch.
3 Radius - Some arches may also need

their radius to be defined.
4 Reflect - Checking this box reflects the
arch top to bottom. This is rarely used

for doors, but can be specified for windows
to create unique configurations.
5 A half-arch door is specified by
checking either Arch on Right or Arch

on Left.
226
Hardware Tab
5
7
9
Doors
4
6
8
1 Handle - Specify a handle to be used
4 Up From Floor - Specify the distance
on the door. If use default is chosen,

the default handle specified in the Door
Defaults dialog will be used.
from the bottom of the door where the

handle are to be located.
Library - Click this button to open the

Select Library Object dialog and specify
a handle from the Library.
the interior of the door. If use default is

chosen, the default lock specified in the
Door Defaults dialog will be used.
2 Ext Handle - Check this box to specify
a different handle for the exterior of the

door. If unchecked, the handle specified at
(1) will be used.
a handle from the Library.
3 In From Door Edge - Specify the
distance from the edge of the door

where the handles are to be located.
5 Int Lock - Specify a lock to be used on
a lock from the Library. This is the same as

selecting Library from the drop down list.
6 Ext Lock - Specify a lock to be used on
the exterior of the door. If use default

is chosen (in the Door Specification
dialog), the lock specified as the default in
the Door Defaults dialog will be used.
227
a lock from the Library. This is the same as

7 Up From Floor - Specify the distance
a hinge from the Library. This is the same as

from the bottom of the door where you

would like the lock(s) to be located. Locks
are usually located above the handles. The
locks will assume the same distance from the
doors edge from the handle at (3).
8 Hinges - Specify a hinge to be used on
the door. If use default is chosen, the

default lock specified in the Door Defaults
dialog will be used. Two hinges are placed
for interior doors, and three for exterior
doors.
9 In From Top/Bottom - Specify the
distance from the top and bottom of the

door to the hinge center.
Note: For hinges to look right, it is best to
have at least a 1/4" (6 mm) reveal for the interior, or hinge side, door casing. If this is not
provided the hinge is still placed and will
carve out a portion of the casing.
Moldings Tab
1
2
This tab allows you to apply custom

moldings to doors for casings and lintels.
Once a custom molding is applied, it is sized
from the values on the Frame & Trim tab.
228
Note: When a custom molding profile is

specified, the lower left corner of the molding
is placed towards the door panel or window
sash. Keep this in mind when creating new
molding profiles.
Door Defaults
Library Objects dialog. Choose a

molding to view your selection in the Door
2 Clear returns the casing specifications

to flat.
New moldings can be added to the library.

See Adding a Molding Profile on page
569.
Layer Tab
For information about the Layers tab, see
Materials Tab
Label Tab
For information about the Label tab, see
Label Tab on page 485.
Door Defaults
To open the Door Defaults dialog, doubleclick the Door Tools
parent button.
drop-down lists as it is in the Door

The values in the Door Defaults dialog are
initial values for interior or exterior doors.
Individual doors can be edited by selecting
and opening them for specification. Changes
made to individual doors after they have
been placed will not alter the default settings.
Choose Interior Door or Exterior Door to

open the Door Defaults dialog for interior
or exterior doors.
The Interior Door Defaults and
Exterior Door Defaults dialogs look
almost exactly the same as the Door
Specification dialog. There are only a
couple of differences:
The rough opening increase size is not

specified in the Door Defaults dialog.
Rough opening defaults are set on the
Openings tab of the Framing dialog. See
Openings Tab on page 387.
Since default settings are specified here,

"Use Default" is not an option on some
It is a good idea to go over the settings in the
Door Defaults dialog before doors are
placed. Settings for interior and exterior

doors are similar and should both be defined.
The program automatically places exterior
doors in exterior walls and interior doors in
interior walls.
Some default settings, like the casing width
on the Frame & Trim tab, are dynamic
specifications and will update globally when
a new value is entered. When you change a
dynamic default, existing doors in the model
will update. See Door Specification Dialog
on page 219.
229
Doors
1 Click Library to open the Select
230
Chapter 9:
Windows
Windows
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect comes with a wide variety of
windows. Fixed glass, hung, casement,
sliding, awning, hopper, and louver window
styles can all be created with the standard
window tool, and even set as the default. The
shape of a window can be angled or made
into a round top or other arch styles. Chief
Architect can create bay, box, and bow
windows at the click of a button. In addition,
the library contains many mulled window
combinations and manufacturer-specific
products.
Once windows have been placed in the
model, the program can automatically
generate a window schedule. Select Tools>
Schedules> Window... to create a window
schedule. See Creating Schedules on page
928.
Chapter Contents
Window Defaults
Window Types
Window Levels
Displaying Windows
Selecting Windows
Deleting Windows
Copying Windows
Moving Windows
Resizing Windows
Centering Windows
Windows in Curved Walls
Custom Muntins
Editing Bay, Box, and Bow Windows
Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs
Window Specification Dialog
Window Default Settings
Window Defaults
231
Default window settings can be adjusted

before the window tool is used, allowing for
the universal application of a particular type
of window throughout the plan.
To access the Window Defaults dialog,

double-click the Window Tools
parent
button or select Edit> Default Settings>
Window from the menu. See Window
Default Settings on page 265.
Window Types
Use the Build> Window menu or click the
Window Tools
parent button to activate
the window child buttons.
Standard Windows
Standard window refers to a window
that is not one of the special types such
as bay, box, bow, corner or blocked as
described below. All these special types are
made up of multiple standard windows.
Click on a wall using the Window
tool
to place a window. The type of window
placed is set in the Window Defaults
dialog; but it can be edited after it is placed.
When a standard window is part of a special
window, it is called a component window.
Bay Windows
The roof will be affected whenever a
Bay Window, Box Window, or Bow
Window is created. Therefore, these windows should be placed before the roof is
built.
A Bay Window is composed of three

wall sections, each with a single
component window. The two side walls are
at an angle to the main wall.
232
Click on a wall using the Bay Window

child tool to produce a bay window. The
component windows are specified in the
Window Defaults dialog. Their sizes
adjust to fit the available space. When
initially placed, bay windows measure 2-2
across at the front; 4-2 across at the back;
and are 1-0 deep.
Box Windows
A Box window is a bay window with
side angles set to 90 degrees.
Click in a wall using the Box Window
child tool to produce a box window. The
component windows are specified in the
Window Defaults dialog. Their sizes
adjust to fit the available space. Box
windows initially measure 4-2 wide with a
depth of 1-6.
Window Types
Bow Windows
A Bow Window is a group of wall
segments that create a segmented
curve. Bow windows can be composed of
two to twenty identical sections.
Click in a wall using the Bow Window
child tool to produce a 5-section bow
window. The component windows are
specified in the Window Defaults dialog.
Their sizes adjust to fit the available space.
The 5-section bow below has a 4-10 radius
centered 3-9 inside the wall, giving an
opening 5-10 across and a depth of 11.
The number of bow window components can

be changed from two to twenty in the
individual Bow Window Specification
dialog. To open the dialog, select the bow
window to be changed and click the Open
Object
edit button.
Creating Bay, Box and Bow

Windows Manually
Sometimes it is easier to draw bay, box and
bow windows manually than to use the child
tools. Bays created using walls can have
more than one window per section, which is
not possible using a bay window unit.
Moving a manually created bay is more
difficult since it is formed from individual
walls; although the Edit Area option can
sometimes help with this. The same holds
true for box and bow windows.
Windows Library
Note that for a bow with an odd number of

sections, the radial dimension is from the
center of the arc to an outside corner where
two window sections join. The depth (11 )
is measured to the flat area of the center
section, not to a corner. That is why the
radius is a bit greater than the sum of the
depth and the distance from the center of the
bows curve to the exterior of the wall.
Note: Bay, box, and bow window areas are
not included in the living area or in room standard area calculations. They are, however,
included in room interior area calculations.
Click the Window Library

tool to
access a library of special windows. Select
the desired window, then click on a wall to
place the window.
233
Windows
A box window can be used to create dormer

by removing the windows on either side,
leaving only the central one.
Creating Your Own Doors

custom windows and save them in your own
library for use in future plans. See Adding
to the Library on page 568.
Once the corner window is formed, its

components and corner post size can be
adjusted using dimension lines. Blocked
units can also meet at a corner this way.
Stacked Windows
Corner Windows
2
1
0
Corner windows are produced when each

window has one edge at or past the interior
side of the adjacent wall.
To create a corner window, first create the
desired window on each side of the corner.
The header height and the sill height of both
windows must be the same.
In floor plan view, select the window, hold
down the Ctrl key, and drag the window into
the corner until it stops. Repeat with the
second window. A corner window will result.
Slant top, or shaped windows can be
components of corner windows as long as
their heights are equal at the corners.
Windows with single or two segment tops
can be used, but windows with three cannot.
If a two segment window is used, the
segment nearest the corner must be flat.
Note: Windows will correctly stop in the corner if dragged in floor plan view using the
key.
234
Ctrl
Stacked Windows are easy to create with

Window Levels. Window levels are used to
specify the relative height of each new
window placed in floor plan view.
The door and windows in the illustration
above were organized in the Window
Specification dialog by setting the
Default level for each window. See General
Tab on page 250.
To create this entry set the two windows on
either side of the door to level zero. A door
will always be on level zero. The three
windows above the door and the level zero
windows are placed on level one, and the
round top window is placed on level two.
If you select a window in floor plan view by
clicking on the stacked windows using the
Window tool, you will select the window
which is on the same level as your current
Default Level setting. For example, if the
Default Level is set to 2, you will select the
round top window shown in the illustration.
Window Types
Notice how the windows and door in this

example are separate, with a thin wall
showing between them. The next section
explains how the same door and six windows
can be organized into a mulled unit. The
casing will connect the windows and door so
that no wall surface shows between them.
Automatically Mulled Units

To form a mulled group of windows and/or
doors, move them close enough together so
that their casings touch. Once the casings
touch, the windows will be mulled together
with one casing between the two of them.
The sill of each window in the group must be
at the same level for them to share the middle
casing. The casing tops do not have to be at
the same level. The casings will be modeled
as if they are one unit but the windows will
remain separate objects for dimensioning and
the Material List.
The Min. Separation value in the Window
Defaults dialog will specify how close the
windows can be to each other. Define a value
that specifies the desired width for the shared
casing.
Windows can be automatically mulled to
doors if the bottom of the window is at the
elevation of the floor, equal to the bottom of
the door.
The picture shows two triple hopper

windows grouped with a door.
Windows
Windows whose level matches the Default

Level will display in floor plan view
according to the color specified on the
windows layer in the Layer Display
Options dialog. Windows on other levels
will display light gray. These colors will
affect printouts. Always set the Default
Level to 0 before printing so that windows
and doors will print as desired.
Blocked Units
Blocking windows and doors together gives
you added flexibility when mulling units
together. It creates a combination of units
which move and copy as a single unit. It
allows you to list the doors and windows in
the Material List either as a single unit or as
the components, and it enables you to define
a single opening or separate openings in the
wall framing for the blocked unit.
To create a Blocked Unit, group select
several openings, doors and windows that are
on the same wall and within 24 inches (sideto-side or top to bottom) of each other. Click
the Make Block
edit button to create a
block. Once doors and windows are
combined in a block they can be moved and
copied as a single unit.
The group selection can be done in floor plan
view or in any 3D view. floor plan views
work fine for blocking windows that are
positioned side-by-side, but you will want to
use an elevation view for blocking objects
235
which are stacked vertically. Once the unit is

formed the components may not be moved
relative to each other without first
unblocking and repositioning them before
blocking them again.
Windows, doors and other blocked units may
be components of a new blocked unit.
In one blocking operation you can block
windows and doors that are either side-byside or over-and-under each other. You may
not simultaneously block both horizontally
and vertically. Complex units are formed by
mulling several blocks together.
To create a blocked unit from windows and
doors on various levels you must use a 3D
view to select the many different
components.
2.
Repeat step 1 with the sidelight on the

right and the window above it.
3.
Repeat step 1 with the sidelight on the

left and the window above it.
4.
Group select the three vertically joined

units and click the Make Block
button to join them side to side.
edit
If you form a blocked unit by first blocking

objects vertically, the vertical mullions will
extend continously from the bottom to the
top of the entire unit. The horizontal
mullions will be interupted by the vertical
mullions.
A second method would be to first block the
door and its two sidelights as one unit, and
then block the three rectangular windows
above the door as another unit. These
blocked units, along with the top half-round
window, can be mulled together, top to
bottom, to complete the final unit. Since this
unit was blocked together horizontally first,
the horizontal mullions extend continuously
to the outside edges of the entire unit, while
the vertical mullions are interrupted by the
horizontal mullions.
In order to block doors and windows, the
component edges that are to be in contact
must be straight and parallel to each other.
Unlike automatic mulling, they do not need
to be the same length. Openings with
adjacent sides that are curved cannot be
blocked.
1.
In a cross section/elevation view (like

the one above), select the door and the
windows on level 1 and 2 above it, then
click the Make Block
236
button.
The blocked unit will move as a single

standard window in both Plan and 3D views.
While blocked the unit cannot be resized. It
can however be unblocked, resized and
blocked again. The components on the
lowest level will appear in floor plan view.
Window Levels
Place Gable Over Window(s)

If a window or group of windows on
the same wall is selected, the Gable
Over Window edit button will appear. Click
this if you want a gable roof over the

window.
When automatic roofs are subsequently built,
a small gable roof, or dormer, will appear
over the window. See Gable Over Door/
Window on page 318.
Levels are used to create and organize

stacked windows within the same floor. On a
wall within one floor level, you can place
and define windows at varying levels.
Window levels can be used to organize these
windows for simplified editing. Window
levels do not define the height of a window,
just the appearance and editing of a window
in floor plan view.
When a new plan file is opened, the window
level is set to zero. Window Level 0 contains
all doors, all bay, box and bow windows, and
the first level of standard windows. Unless
the Default Level setting in the Window
Defaults dialog is changed, the windows
you place in floor plan view will be on Level
0. The first row above on the same floor is
represented by Window Level 1 and contains
any windows stacked above a single window
or door. The second row is represented by
Window Level 2 and contains all windows
stacked above two stacked windows, etc.
When you place a window in floor plan view
on a level greater than zero, the program
attempts to locate it over windows on lower
levels. Once it is placed, you can move it to
the desired height in the cross section/
elevation view or within the Window
When you specify the default level to a value

other than zero, the initial window type
changes to be fixed glass. The Width of the
window will match your default Window
Type and the Height to the window will be
12". Once the window is placed in the plan,
and opened for specifications, its parameters
can be changed.
In addition to defining the Level on which
windows will be placed, the default level
number affects how windows display in floor
plan view. All objects on the default level
display normal color in floor plan view.
Windows and doors on other levels will
display in gray.
If window and door sizes are set to display,
the sizes show only for windows and doors
on the default level.
The default level also defines which of the
stacked windows are selected first when you
click on the windows in floor plan view. The
windows on the current default level are
selected first.
Always reset the Default Level to zero
before printing. Otherwise, the doors and
some windows may print in a light gray color
and window and door sizes will not be those
for level zero.
237
Windows
Window Levels
Instead of using levels to manage stacked

windows, you may want to combine them
into blocked units.
Displaying Windows
In Floor Plan View
The display of windows, window sizes, and
headers in floor plan view can be controlled
in the Layer Display Options dialog. See
Displaying Objects on page 125.
If the window sizes layer is set to display,
size labels display centered on the windows
that they represent. Label format and size is
specified in the Window Schedule
Specification dialog. For more, see
Creating Schedules on page 928.
The size displays in the format 3040,
which is width by height in feet and inches.
A 3040 window is three feet, zero inches

wide and four feet, zero inches high. The
metric window dimensions format is
900x1200, where the first number is the
width in mm and the second, height in mm.
In 3D Views
button in any
3D view to open the Layer Display
Options dialog. This dialog allows objects
to be turned on and off by layer. See Layer
Selecting Windows
The simplest way to select a window is to
click on it using the Window
or Select
Object
tool. Click the Open Object
edit button to open the window and access
the Window Specification dialog. In this
dialog you can resize the window; change its
type; or modify its trim and other features. If
you just want to resize the window, you can
do so using the edit handles.
Multiple Windows
Multiple windows can be selected and edited
as a group. Select one window, then hold
down the Shift key while clicking on other
238
windows to add to or subtract them from the

selection set.
If multiple windows are selected along the
same wall, they may be moved or copied as a
unit to another wall. If multiple windows are
selected from different walls, they may still
be edited together using the dialog, but not
moved or copied.
Selecting Blocked Units

Select a blocked unit by clicking on it in
floor plan or 3D view. A selected blocked
unit can be copied or moved just like an
individual window. To separate the block
Deleting Windows
Explode Block
edit button.
Selecting Components
of Blocked Units
Blocked units are made up of individual
doors and windows. To select an individual
component of a blocked unit, first select the
blocked unit. Press the Tab key on your
keyboard and the component whose center is
closest to where you clicked will be selected.
This selection technique can be used in floor
plan or 3D views.
The selected component may be on any level
in the blocked unit. If you have multiple
levels, it is easiest to select the components
in a 3D view. When you have selected an

individual component of a blocked unit, you
can change its parameters in the Window
If the component is not itself a blocked unit
and has no components above it, its Height
and Arch parameters can be changed.
Changing the Height will cause the
components top to move. Its bottom will
remain stationary.
Select objects within the blocked unit by
using the Shift + Click method to group
select . Select the first component and then
hold the shift key and click near the center of
each of the others.
Deleting Windows
Select any window and press the
Del
key or
click the Delete

edit button to delete the
window from the plan.
A group of standard windows and/or bay,
box and bow windows may be deleted
simultaneously by group selecting them.
Select the first window; hold the Shift key

down while clicking additional windows and
adding them to the selection set; then press
the Del key or click the Delete
button.
edit
Copying Windows
Any window or group of windows can be
copied except bay, box or bow window units.
dow; double-click Copy/Paste

; and
click on walls to place as many copies as
needed.
Select a window or several windows along

the same unbroken wall.
For a single copy, click the Copy/Paste

edit button; then click on a wall to
place a copy of the window.
To place multiple copies, select the win-
A window or group of windows can also be

copied to another plan.
If the two plans are side-by-side on

screen, select a window and click the
239
Windows
back into its individual components, click the
Copy/Paste
edit button. Click anywhere in the second plan to activate it,
and click on a wall to paste the copy.
Paste
tool. To copy along the same wall
in the 3D view, grab the center handle and
drag the copy away from the original.
If the plans are not tiled, move to the new
Windows selected in 3D views can be copied

into other walls; or between plan files in
floor plan or 3D views. Select and copy the
windows; then go to the floor plan view for
that or another plan and choose Edit> Paste.
Click on a wall to paste a copy of the entire
set of windows.
plan after clicking the Copy/Paste

tool. Select Edit> Paste and then click on
a wall to place the window.
Multiple windows can be selected in 3D
views for copying. This makes it easy to
copy stacked windows. Hold the Shift key
down while clicking on each window using
Select Objects
; then click the Copy/
Creating blocked window units simplifies the

process of copying multiple windows. See
Blocked Units on page 235.
Moving Windows
A window or group of windows can be
moved by selecting it and then dragging from
the center handle. It can also be moved by
changing a value in a dimension line.
Note that when a window is selected, the
window size displays. If the window is not
already located by regular dimension lines,
temporary dimensions can be displayed by
clicking the Display Temporary
Dimensions
toggle button. Dimensions
are critical when positioning a window or
any other object.
Using the Mouse

To quickly move a selected window or group
of windows, use the middle handle. When
the pointer becomes a , use the left mouse
button to drag the window along the wall.
Notice that the dimensions update as the
window moves. Release the mouse when the
dimensions display the desired value.
240
Using Dimensions
Any object located by either a temporary
dimension or a regular dimension can be
moved by editing the dimension itself. This
method is recommended to precisely locate
windows and other objects.
Select the window to be moved; drag it along
the wall; and observe which dimensions
update. These are the dimensions which can
be used to move the window. See Moving
Objects Using Dimensions on page 690.
Move Restrictions
A window moved against an intersecting
wall automatically stops when the distance
from the intersecting wall equals the width of
the window casing. Disable this restriction
by checking Ignore Casing For Opening
Resize within the Plan Defaults dialog.
A window moved against a break in a wall
automatically stops. To verify that a wall is
Resizing Windows
broken, select the wall. The selected wall has

two edit handles near each end. In the
illustration below, the window will not move
further to the right. Selecting the wall reveals
edit handles which indicate that the wall is
broken.
To fix a break in a wall, select one of the

colinear walls; grab the move handle; and
move it slightly (an inch or so). When the
wall is released, it will snap back and the
break will heal if the two wall sections have
the same thickness and type.
A window moved vertically in a 3D view is
stopped by the ceiling above and the floor
below. To override this restriction, hold
Windows
down the Ctrl key; grab the Move handle;

and drag the window past the restriction.
Resizing Windows
When you select a window, the window size
label displays the width followed by the
height. For example, a 3040 window is 3-0
wide by 4-0 high.
There are two methods of resizing windows.
Using the Mouse

The quickest method is to drag the selection
handles in floor plan or a 3D view. This is the
only method available for resizing bay, box
or bow window systems.
When a window is selected, grab either of
the two outside handles and drag along the
wall to change the width. Drag the center
handle perpendicular to the wall to change
the height. Drag away from the center to
widen the window. Drag toward the center to
narrow the window. To resize the window on
one side only, hold down the Ctrl key and
drag.
The label displaying the size updates as the

handles are dragged. Release when the
desired size is displayed.
The width always resizes around the center
of the window if the Ctrl key is not down
when the size is changed. The height resizes
from the sill height.
In floor plan view, raise the bottom height of
a window by dragging the center handle
toward the interior of the plan, or toward the
outside of the plan to lower it. The top of the
window stays fixed.
In the Specification Dialog

The second method of resizing a window is
to type in the size on the General tab of the
Window Specification dialog. This
method only works for standard windows
and individual component windows within a
bay, box or bow window system.
241
Select a window and click the Open Object

edit button to open the Window
Specification dialog. Select the General
tab to change the height and width for the
selected window.
You cannot type in values to change the size

of a bay, box or bow window unit. To do that,
drag from the appropriate handle in floor
plan view.
Centering Windows
When a window or door is selected, the
Center Object edit button displays.
A selected group of openings on the same

wall may be centered in the same way.
Centering To Fixtures
Along a Wall
To center a window along a wall, click the
Center Object
edit button; then click in
floor plan view on the side of the wall where
the window is to be centered. If you want to
center it in a room, click inside the room. If
you want to center it to the exterior of the
building, click outside the building.
Windows can also be centered to sinks and

appliances. Select a window and click the
Center Object
tool; then click on a
cabinet positioned against the wall that
contains a sink or cooktop. The window will
become centered above the sink or cooktop.
Windows in Curved Walls

If a window is placed in a curved wall,
additional options can be specified for the
casings and sash on the Options tab of the
Window Specification dialog:
Casing: Window casings display three ways

in curved walls:
Straight: Both window and casing are

straight.
Straight
Because the casing is
straight, it will not
properly fit in the wall
opening if the window is
too wide or the curve of the wall is too
extreme. In these cases use one of the other
two window types described below.
242
Custom Muntins
Radial: The sides of

the casing or jambs are
inserted in the wall at
an angle that passes
through the center of
the curve.
Parallel: The sides of
the casing are inserted
in the wall at a right
angle to the line tangent to the curved wall
at the center of the
window.
Radial
The window sash can be

curved or straight for the
Radial
radial and parallel casing
options. Normally a par& Curved
allel casing will have a
straight sash. A radial
casing is more like traditional curved windows,
and may have a curved sash.
Parallel
Custom Muntins
Design your own muntins for the glazing of a
window or door. Muntins are formed from a
CAD block composed of lines and arcs
drawn over window or door glass in a cross
section/elevation view. The CAD block
should cover at least half the glass
horizontally and one quarter of the area
vertically, but should not overlap it in either
direction by more than five percent.
Creating Muntins
To create custom muntins, take a Cross
Section/Elevation
view of the wall
that contains the window or door and zoom
in on the window or door to receive the
custom muntins. Toggle to CAD mode and
draw lines and arcs to represent the desired
muntins. Try to make them start and end as
close to the edge of the glass as possible. If
the lines are slightly over, the program will
clip these ends so that they fit exactly.
When the muntin design is complete, group
select all lines and arcs and define them as a
CAD block. To group select lines and arcs,

drag a marquee around them while holding
down the Shift key.
If your window has more than one glazed
sash, (i.e. a double-hung has two), you must
create one block for each pane.
Toggle out of CAD mode and select the door
or window in cross section/elevation view.
The Load Muntins
edit button will
display. Click this button and the CAD block
will disappear. Muntins will appear in place
of the CAD block.
If you want to cover several glass areas in a
window or double door, produce a separate
CAD block for each. They will all load
together.
Custom muntins move with the opening and
will copy with their opening. They will also
stretch or compress when the glass area is
resized. This stretching may not be perfect
for non-rectangular glass areas that are
resized by a large amount.
243
Windows
Muntins in Special Windows

You can place custom muntins into
component windows for bay and bow
windows and blocked openings. Start by
making an elevation view of the component
to be changed. The view should look directly
at the component window. Make a CAD
block in each pane of the component
window, and toggle out of CAD mode. Click
in the center of the component window. This
selects the entire containing window. Next
press the Tab key until the desired
component is selected. The Load Muntins
button should appear in the edit toolbar.
If it does not, the camera may not be directly
pointed at the component window (must be
within 6 degrees), or the component may not
be selected. Click on the Load Muntins

button. You must do this to receive muntins
into each component. In a bow window
however, place muntins into one component
and they will show in all.
Removing Muntins
Remove custom muntins from a door
or window by selecting the opening in
cross section/elevation view and clicking on
the Unload Muntins
button on the Edit
toolbar. The muntins will disappear and the
original CAD block will take their place. You
may explode and edit these blocks and reload
them.

Components
Click on a bay, box, or bow window to select
it. Drag the side handles to change the width.
In floor plan view, drag the center handle
outward to increase the depth, or inward to
decrease the depth of the unit.
A component window selected within a bay,
box or bow window is resized like any other
standard window. To select it, click on it
using the Window
tool; or click on the
appropriate component, selecting the bay
unit, and click the Select Next Object
edit button; or press the Tab key and the
component is selected.
Windows and bay, box ,and bow windows
may also be selected in 3D views. The entire
244
unit is selected first. To select an individual

component within the unit, click the Select
Next Object
edit button until that
window is selected.
In a bow window, all components are
identical, so only one component can ever be
selected. Changing this component will
change them all.
If the desired window is not offered as a
selection in a 3D view, you may be at
too much of an angle to the window. Change
your angle so you are facing it more squarely,
then try again.
Resizing Components
If you select the bay and then use the Tab key
to select the individual component windows
on which you clicked, you can resize that

component either by selecting it and
dragging from a side handle, or by selecting
13
1
Once a component is resized in this way, it

will retain its size while the bay is resized. If
the bay is decreased in size to the extent that
the component becomes too large to fit, the
component will return to its default size
based on the bay size, and will resume
automatically resizing as the bay or bow
window is resized.
Bay Window
Specification Dialog
The Bay Window Specification dialog
is opened when you select a Bay Window in
floor plan view and click the Open Object
edit button. There are many options in
this dialog that can be set for the individual
item. They cannot be set as defaults. Many of
these same options are available for Box and
Bow windows.
3
7
9
11
2
4
6
8
10
12
1 Bay angle - Enter the angle of the side
components of the bay window. This

value is in degrees. Enter 90 degrees to
create a box window.
2 Use existing roof - Check this box if
the existing roof needs no changes to

accomodate the bay window.
3 Extend existing roof over - Check this
box to extend the existing roof plane to

cover the bay window below.
4 Rectangular roof over - Check this
box to create a roof over the bay

window which is square across the end
instead of following the profile of the roof.
See Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs on
page 247.
5 Suppress dimension - Check this box
to suppress the dimensions that are

automatically placed to the Bay window.
6 No Labels - Check this box to suppress
the label in floor plan view and to

prevent the Bay window from being included
in the Material List or Window Schedule.
245
Windows
it and clicking the Open Object

edit
button in order to modify it using the
Window Specification dialog.
7 Single label for entire bay - Check this
box to create one label to list the Bay

window in the Material List and schedules.
8 No trimmers for components - A
13 For information about using the Layer

tab, see Layer Tab on page 123.
Bow Window Specification
normal window has two framing studs

on either side. The trimmer stud is against
the window and ends where it butts to the
bottom of the header. Check this box to
eliminate the trimmer stud for bay
components, which allows the component
width to increase.
9 No framing between components -
Check this box to remove both studs

between the bay components.
10 Components recessed - Check this box
if the window is placed in a brick wall

and you want to recess the exterior casing to
produce a brick molding.
Bay window components default to a size

that allows one standard trimmer when a bay
is first created. When the bay as a whole is
moved and resized, its components
automatically resize to fit a standard trimmer.
11 To Sheathing Layer - Check this box
to recess the components to the

sheathing layer instead of the outside layer
(typically brick) as in step 10.
12 Connect outer casing - Check this box
to have the exterior casing surround all

three bay component windows together, not
separately, on the exterior. Mullions are
provided between components. This is how
casing is always done for the interior.
246
1 Define the Number of sections to
increase or decrease the number of

components in the window.
2 Suppress standard dimension - Select
the check box to suppress the

dimensions showing width and depth of the
bow.
3 Suppress dimension to center - Select
the check box to suppress the radial

dimension.
For information about the other options, see

Bay Window Specification Dialog on page
245.
When originally
created, the ceiling
within a bay, box, or
bow windows is the
same height as the
default ceiling for that
floor.
Both the top and
bottom heights of these
window units may be
adjusted from a 3D
view.
Use the following
techniques for
modifying any bay, box, or bow window.
Lowering the Ceiling

To lower the ceiling and the wall heights,
select the window in a 3D view. When the
window is selected, grab the top handle and
drag toward the floor. The ceiling will be
lowered, which will lower the height of the

walls. Any roofs which are subsequently
built will be affected.
Creating a Bench Seat

To create a bench seat or garden window,
follow the same step for lowering the ceiling
except this time drag the lower handle
toward the ceiling.
When you raise the bottom of the window to
create a bench seat, the exterior walls that
create the window will not reach the ground.
When you build a foundation, the foundation
will not be produced under a window unit
that has bench seats.
Displaying Bay
and Bow Windows
The color and display of bay and bow
windows in floor plan view is controlled by
the manual dimension layer. See Displaying
Objects on page 125.

Several different roof styles are available for
bay, box and bow window units.
Hip Roofs
Unless a different option is selected, a hip
roof will be built above the unit when roofs
are automatically generated.
If a different style of roof is desired, the Bay

or Bow Window Specification dialog
247
Windows
Ceilings
can be used to change the style of roof which

will be generated over a bay, box or bow
window.
Select the bay, box or bow window, then
edit button. The
Bay or Bow Window Specification
dialog will display.
Use Existing Roof

To generate a standard roof with no
allowances made for bay, box, or bow
windows below, check Use Existing Roof.
With this option the bay, box, or bow
windows will be tucked under the roof eave.
Place Under Roof Slope

To have the main roof plane extend down
over the window unit while following the
shape of the unit, select Extend Existing
Roof Over. Rebuild the roofs to see the
changes.
Place Under Roof - Rectangular
For this roof style to work successfully, the

ceiling heights of the window unit and the
room containing it must be the same. This
will not work if you have lowered the ceiling
for the window unit.
If a header is desired over the bay, box or
bow window, first build the roof correctly,
then lower the ceiling of the bay, box or bow
window in 3D. Once the ceiling is lowered,
select Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
.
This will fill in the area between the header
and the roof. Do not rebuild roof planes, if
you do, a lower hip roof over the window
unit will be created.
248
To extend the roof plane down over a bay,

box or bow window with a rectangular roof,
ignoring the shape of the unit, select both
Extend existing roof over and Rectangular
roof over in the specification dialog. The
Rectangular roof over option will not work
in combination with Use existing roof since
the existing roof does not cover the window
unit.
See the previous section for directions on
extending the roof down over bay, box or
bow windows.
Rectangular Hip Roof

2.
Delete the front hip section.
3.
Select each side roof plane at the gable

end and drag it out to set the overhang.
4.
Once the roof planes are shaped properly, open the Build Roof dialog and
select the Build Fascia, Gutters option
to complete the roof. Do not select Build
Roof Planes.
Windows
To create a rectangular hip roof, select only

Rectangular roof over. Then rebuild the
roof.
handle and drag the roof section forward

until the fascia is straight and let it snap
to the edge of the front hip section.
Gable Roof
A gable roof is not one of the automatic
options for the roof above a bay, box or bow
window. A gable can be created by manually
editing the rectangular hip roofs that are
automatically created. See Manual Roofs
on page 295.
1.
Select each side hip sections on the front

angled edge. Grab the front ridge corner

When you place a window in floor plan view,
the program models a window based on the
settings in the Window Defaults dialog.
See Window Default Settings on page 265.
Once a window is placed it can be edited
with the Window Specification dialog.
You can use this dialog to define unique
features for a group of windows or an
individual window. You can access it by
double-clicking on the window using the
Window
window and clicking the Open Object

edit button.
The tabs in the Window Specification
dialog are the same as the tabs on the
Window Defaults dialog. Anything that
can be set as a default can also be specified
individually in the specification dialog.
tool, or by selecting the
249
General Tab
1
2
4
5
1 Window Type -Select the type of
window from the list. The first entry in

the list is the Window Type set in the
Window Defaults dialog. The various
window types are shown above.
250
Sliding and casement windows can be

distinguished in floor plan view, as shown
below.
Double Hung
windows over already existing windows,

leave the Default Level set to 0.
Left Sliding
Windows on the default level display black,

windows on other levels are grey.
2 Width and Height - Enter values that

represent the overall dimension of the
window unit, including frame. You can also
specify a rough opening dimension for the
window.
Note: The window that is on the default level

will be the one selected when you select a
window from a set in floor plan view.
5 Show Color - Select the check box to
display the window in color in the

dialog preview.
Check Interior or Exterior to change which

side is displayed in the dialog preview.
These R.O. values for an individual window

override the default values set in the
Framing dialog. The value for the rough
opening height is split so that one third of it
is at the bottom, and the other two thirds is at
the window top.
Floor to Top - Specify the height to the top
of the window as measured from the
subfloor. This falls under the bottom of the
header by two thirds of the rough opening
amount.
Movable Size - If applicable, define the
dimension (in inches or mm) of the movable
portion of the window. A value of 0 will
default the movable size to whatever is
normal for that type of window.
3 Level - The Level value is used to
define which row the window appears

on if there is more than one row of windows
in a stacked set. Enter a number to change
which level the window is on.
4 Default Level - Specify the current
window level onto which new windows

should be placed. Unless you are placing
251
Windows
Triple Casement
Options Tab
1
3
1 Interior Corner Block - Select the
check box to count interior corner

blocks in the Material List. These will not
2 Exterior Corner Block - Select the
check box to count exterior corner

blocks in the Material List. These will not
3 Egress -Select the check box to label
the window as an egress window in the

Window Schedule. The letters eg will be
appended to the value in the Size column.
The Egress check box can designate that the
entire area of the window is used for egress,
not just the movable section. To use this
specification on an undersized window, most
or all of the window's total area should be
able to open for escape in case of fire.
252
The Plan Check calculations for egress

are only an approximate guide. Consult
your local building and fire code authorities
for your regional egress window requirements.
4 Recessed - Select
the check box to

recess the casing inward
to the main, or framing
layer of the wall. This
check box will only
appear if the window is
in a multi-layered wall.
A window or mulled
unit placed in a brick,
concrete block, or stone
wall is often recessed
into the walls exterior.
In the illustration above,
Typical
Recessed
5 To Sheathing Layer - Select the check
box to recess the window to the

sheathing layer. The wall layers in the
following illustration have been exaggerated
to show how the different options display in
floor plan view.
Not Recessed
Recessed (to Main Layer)
Recessed to Sheathing Layer
Options Tab for Blocked Units

You can select a blocked unit and open it to
display its Window Specification dialog.
A number of options appear grayed out and
cannot be changed.
1
3
Boxes that move the entire opening can be

changed in the General tab.
Three new check boxes appear in the
Options tab:
1 Treat as door - This displays when the
selected mulled window unit contains a

door. Check the box to have the mulled unit
appear in the door schedules and door
category of the Materials List rather than in
the window schedules and Materials List
category.
2 Single label - Select the check box to
treat the blocked unit as a single object

for labeling in floor plan view. It will
produce a single entry in the Material List
and window schedule. Clear the check box to
produce labels and entries for each
component of the mulled unit.
253
Windows
which is a 3D view, the window to the right

is recessed, so the brick wraps the opening.
The window on the left is not recessed, so the
casing is outside the brick.
To display a Single label for a component,

click in the middle of the component in an
elevation view, press the Tab key until the
component is selected, and then open the
Window Specification dialog.
3 Single wall hole - Select the check box

to produce a single opening with a
single header for the entire blocked unit.
Clear the check box to model studs between,
and individual headers for, the components
of the blocked unit.
For rendering purposes, Single wall
hole should be checked for any mulled
unit with a rectangular shape. This will
decrease drawing time by decreasing the
number of surfaces.
The Sash & Frame tab only defines the

casing surrounding the blocked unit. It does
not specify the casing appearing between the
components.
The Arch tab defines the overall shape of the
blocked units top. If you intend to arch the
top of a blocked unit, the top components
should be constructed with rectangular top
openings whose tops are at the same height.
The Molding tab specifies the surrounding
casing, sill and lintels. It does not currently
allow you to specify a custom molding for
the casing appearing between components.
Settings made on the Material tab for a
blocked unit apply to all components of the
blocked unit. The settings will override any
settings made for individual components of
the blocked unit.
Sash & Frame Tab
1
3
2
4
254
1 Sash Width - Enter the width for all
four sides of the window sash.

Increasing the size of the sash decreases the
size of the glass.
The Side value sets the width of all vertical
sash members, those at the window sides as
well as central members for casement and
sliding windows. It also sets the width for the
top portion of the window when any arch is
specified.
The Top and Bottom values set the width for
the top and bottom sash of all windows,
except that the Top value is not used if the
window has an arch.
The Mid value sets the width for horizontal
components between the top and bottom sash
in double hung, double and triple awning and
double and triple hopper windows. It does
not affect casement and sliding windows.
If any sash width is set to zero, no sash is
produced. The window will have no glass
and will not support divided lites. Since there
is no glass, the window will be transparent
even when the rest of the windows are set to
be opaque from the exterior.
3 Inset - Enter the distance between the
frame and the outermost sash. If there is

no frame, then the inset is measured from the
outer surface of the walls main layer.
4 Component Opens - Select from the
available hinge options. The preview in

the dialog updates as options are changed.
Must have Double Casement or Triple
Casement selected on the General tab.
5 Frame Width - Enter
the Side, Top and

Bottom widths of the
window frame. When these
are set to the default, zero,
the frame will not display.
These values are usually left
at zero unless you are
replacing older windows
with new windows, and you
intend to simply drop a new, framed window
into the original windows jamb.
6 Enter the Frame Depth. If this value is
set to zero, the walls main layer

thickness is used as the frame depth.
7 Inset - Enter the distance that the
window frame is inset from the exterior

of the main wall layer. Normally, the outer
surface of the frame is at the outer surface of
the main wall layer. A non-zero Frame Inset
value moves the frame into the wall.
2 Sash Depth - Enter the thickness of the
sash stock measured from the exterior

to the interior.
255
Windows
The (D) notation that follows some values

indicates that they are default values taken
from the Window Defaults dialog. These
values can be changed individually by typing
in a new number or globally by changing the
settings in the default Window Defaults
dialog. To reset any value to its default
setting, type a "d" in the field. If an error
results then that setting has no default value
assigned to it.
Sash & Frame Tab for Blocked Units
1
2
1 Inside - Specify the depth of the
mullion on the interior of the house.
256
2 Outside - Specify the depth of the
mullion on the exterior of the house.
Casing Tab
1
2
5
7
Windows
4
6
Changes made on the Casing tab display

only in 3D views.
1 Mfr. Offset - This section refers to the
construction of the window itself, not

the casing. This will most often be left at
zero. A positive value in these fields
decreases the size of the window, but does
not change either the nominal size or the
rough opening size specified on the General
tab. The Side value is used for both sides,
and also for the top if an arch type window.
2 Interior/Exterior - Select a radio
button to choose whether you are

defining the values for the inside or for the
outside of the window. The picture to the
right will also switch to show the window
from the selected side.
setting will affect both sides and top. This

also affects the bottom if no sill is used and
the width of the apron if one is being used.
Top Width - If Lintel is also checked, enter
the width of the Lintel casing.
Reveal - Enter the dimension from the
outside edge of the frame, or sash if no frame
is present, to the inside edge of the casing.
Note: Unless the selected window(s) have a
different size casing or reveal than the rest of
the windows in the model, the three values in
the Casing section should be changed in the
Window Defaults dialog.
3 Width - Enter the width of the casing.
Unless a separate Lintel is defined, this
257
4 Lintel - Select the check
box to place a separate

casing across the window top.
Its width is set in Top Width.
This creates a butt joint
between the side casings and
the lintel.
Extends - Enter the amount
the top casing extends on
either side. The default value
of 1 inch (25mm) usually
extends it to the edge of the
vertical casing.
Wrap - Check this box to
model the head casing with
returns at the ends. Thus
the ends of the top casing
can be cut square, or
mitered to return to the
wall. The affects of Wrap
are seen only if a custom
molding is specified for the
top casing, as shown in this
illustration.
5 Sill - Check this box to
specify a sill. Clear the

check box to remove the sill,
causing the specified Side
casing to be used for the bottom of the window.
Extends controls the amount
the sill extends to either side.
One inch (25 mm) will
usually make the ends of a
non-wrapped sill even with
the outer edge of the casing.
Wrap - Select the check box to miter the sill
ends and return them to the wall. Clear the
check box to cut the ends of the sill square.
6 Apron - Clear this
check box to
remove the apron. Select
this box to add an apron
below the sill. The
Extends value will
extend the sill and apron
together.
7 Suppress Casing- Check this box to
create a window with no trim details.

The sill remains if you have specified one. If
casing and sill are both suppressed, only the
frame and sash remain.
258
Lites Tab
3
4
Windows
The Lites tab allows you to add muntins to

various window styles. It also allows you to
add shutters to windows. There are four
possible styles of muntin bars for regular
windows, plus two additional options for
arch top or round top windows. A window
which has been modified using the Shape tab
cannot have divided lites or shutters added.
A maximum of 8 lites may be specified in
either direction for any of the Special Types.
either one or both of the sashes to have

divided lites.
Lites in fixed
Lites in moveable
1 Lites Across - Enter the number of

horizontal lites in each sash.
Lites Vertical - Enter the number of vertical

lites in each portion of the sash.
Muntin Width - Specify the width of the
bars that divide the panes of glass.
Lites in Fixed and Lites in Moveable Select or clear these check boxes to specify
Note: All the window types default to 1 lite

across and 1 lite vertical, in both movable and
the fixed. Because the fixed window in a Triple Sliding window is twice the size of the
movable windows, the fixed section has a
vertical muntin bar. To eliminate this, clear the
Lites in fixed check box.
259
Shutters - Check this box to place

working shutters on the exterior of the
window. These will each be half of the
windows width, excluding the casing. If one
side of the window does not have enough
room for the shutter (such as when a window
is close to another window or corner), that
side will have no shutter. Default shutters
resize with the window.
Set Width by Window - Check this box to

make the shutters half as wide as the window
so they meet in the middle when shut.
Normal style is the most

common, with muntins
going horizontally and vertically. Colonial windows are
an example of the normal
style.
Diamond style uses angled

muntin bars to divide up the
lites. French windows are an
example of the diamond
style.
Prairie style is based on the

normal style, but with all the
central muntin bars
removed, leaving only the
two outside muntin bars both
horizontally and vertically.
To be effective, both the Lites across and
the Lites vertical should be set between 6
and 8. Federal or Federation windows are
an example of the Prairie style.
Craftsman style is based on

the normal style, but only the
topmost horizontal muntin bar
is kept with all the portions of
the vertical muntin bars above
it. To be effective, both the
Lites across and the Lites vertical should be set between 4 and 8.
Specify Width - Enter the width for

decorative shutters. A minimum of 4 inches
(100 mm) applies.
Outside Casing - Select the check box to
place the shutters at the outside edge of the
side casing. Normal operating shutters
overlap the casing except for the innermost
one inch. Decorative shutters usually attach
to the house outside the casing.
Rectangular Shutters - Select the check box
to match the geometry of the shutters to an
arched window.
Louver - Select the check box to place
louvers in the central portion of each shutter.
Clear the check box to model shutters with
solid panels. If Outside Casing is checked,
the louvers are positioned to shield the sun
when the shutters are closed. When the
shutters display open, the louvers will appear
backwards.
3 Special type - Select a configuration of

lites from the list. When selected, a
preview of each displays in the dialog.
260
4 Round top - This section becomes
active only when the window is defined

with a round top on the Arch tab.
Ray Count - Enter the number of radial
muntin bars. A round or arch top window
may have up to 10 rays. If rays are added,
any Lites across and Lites vertical which are
specified will be confined to the part of the
window below the arc of the window.
Concentric - In round top windows only,

rays may also be defined as being concentric.
Select the check box to start the rays from the
innermost concentric muntin bar.
possible to stack windows above other

windows or doors. All these transoms have
had the sill removed.
Windows
Following is an example of a 3040 fixed

glass window. In all cases, Lites across = 3,
and Lites vertical = 3. The round top window
is shown first with no rays, then with regular
and concentric rays. There is also a 3040
fixed glass arch top window (arch height 12)
with regular rays. The arch top window
cannot have concentric rays. If the window
height is changed to half the width for round
top windows, or changed to match the arch
height for arch top windows, many styles of
transom windows may be created. It is
Shape Tab
1
3
2
4
7
Any type of non-symbol window may be

shaped. All shaped windows are defined as
fixed glass on the General tab.
1 Window Width is displayed. It may be

changed in the General tab.
261
2 Left Height - Enter the height of the
left upper corner. Unless changed, this

will match the window height.
Select At Left or At Right to specify which

corner to raise.
3 Right Height - Enter the height of the

upper right corner.
4 Top Left Corner -Select the check box
to add an inside left corner or single

center peak to the window.
Height - Enter the height of the inside left

corner, and its distance From the left side.
5 Top Right Corner - Select the check
box to add an inside right corner to the

window.
The above illustration shows the window

with and without Raise bottom specified.
Examples of Shaped Windows
Height - Enter the height of the right inside

corner, and its distance From the left side not from the right side.
6 Match Roof -
Click to have the

program match the
angle of the top of the
window to the pitch of
the roof on a gable
end. The window will maintain the angle
even when resized and repositioned. Top Left
Corner and Top Right Corner must be
unchecked for this to work. This option will
not work for curved roofs.
Revert - Select the check box to restore the
window to its original window type and
special arch type settings. Both the left and
right heights will be reset to the same value,
which will be the higher of the two sides
before it was restored.
7 Raise Bottom - Enter a value to raise
one bottom corner of the window by

that amount.
262
On a shaped window, there

must be two vertical sides.
They may be as short as 1/4.
The diagram shows solid
black circles where the left
and right heights are, and
open circles where additional
corners have been placed.
A has different left and right
heights with no corner added.
B has matching left and right
heights with an added corner.
C is the same as B, except

that the left and right heights
have been shortened to 1/4.
D is the same as B except it

has two added corners.
E is the same as A except
that Raise Bottom at right has
been defined.
Arch Tab
1
3
2
4
Windows
1 Type -Select a type of arch. Samples of

each type are shown above.
2 Height - Enter the arch height. All
types except Round Top and Octagonal

Arch require a height value.
3 Radius - Enter the radius for the Tudor

Arch or the Double Arch.
Reflect - Select the check box to

reflect the arch from top to bottom.
Reflect can be used to create circular and
octagonal windows from square windows. It
can also be used for decorative fixed glass.
5 Check Arch on Left to restrict the
shape of the arch to the left side of the

window. The right leg will be straight.
Arch on Right - Select the check box to
restrict the shape of the arch to the right side
of the window. The left leg will be straight.
Treatments Tab
The Treatments tab of the Window
Specification dialog is similar to the
Hardware tab of the Door Specification
dialog. See Hardware Tab on page 227.
263
Moldings Tab
1
1 Interior/Exterior - Select a radio
button to specify which side of the

window will receive the molding. The
window detail in the dialog box changes to
reflect your selections.
2 Casing - Click Select to select a custom
casing molding from the Library. Click

Clear to clear any previous choices and
restore the default molding. The width of the
molding is defined on the Casing tab. The
casing depth is always one inch (25 mm) and
cannot be changed.
3 Lintel - This is used only when Lintel

is checked in the Casing tab. Click
Select to select a custom molding for the
head casing. Click Clear to clear any
previously specified moldings and restore the
default molding. The width of this molding is
defined by the Top Width on the Casing tab.
264
Sill - Click Select to select a custom

molding for the sill. Click Clear to
delete any previously specified moldings.
New moldings may be added to the library.

See Adding a Molding Profile on page
569.
Layer Tab
For information about using the Layers tab,
see Layer Tab on page 123.
Materials Tab
For information about using the Materials
Label Tab
For information about using the Label tab,
see Label Tab on page 485.

The Window Defaults dialog specifies
what type of window is placed in the model
when a window is added in floor plan view.
majority of windows in your model. As with

doors, any window or group of windows can
be customized in the floor plan or 3D view.
Select Edit> Default Settings
For information about settings in the

Window Defaults dialog, refer to the
corresponding tabs in the Window
and go to
Window; or, double-click the Window

child button to open the Window Defaults
dialog.
1.
Dynamic Defaults: These values affect

all existing and new windows which are
still set to the default specification. The
default setting is signified by a (D) following a value in the Window
Specification dialog (see Dynamic
Defaults on page 90). These settings
are:
Window Type
Sash Width
Sash Depth
Casing Width.
2.
Initial Values: These only affect new

windows, and changing the value has no
affect on existing windows. These are:
Width, Height
Floor to Top
Default Level
3.
Editing Limits: This affects both the

creation of new and the modification of
existing windows/doors. There is one
only:
Min. Separation
Windows
There are three types of values set in the

Window Defaults dialog:
Set the Window Defaults dialog to define

the type of window that represents the
265
266
Chapter 10:
Floors
Chapter Overview
Only one floor, referred to as the current

floor, can be active at a time; but one
additional floor can be displayed for
reference at the same time.
Chapter Contents
Floor Defaults
Working With Multiple Floors
Adding Floors
Deleting Floors
Copying Floors
The Current Floor
Reference Floor
Floors
Chief Architect allows for multiple floors in

a plan. Floors which are based on the first
floor footprint can be easily added at any
time. Floors can also be deleted and moved
at any time. Only one foundation level can
exist in a plan.
Floor Defaults
Floor Defaults for the current floor are
accessed by selecting Edit> Default
Settings...
from the menu; then choosing
Floor from the category tree. The Floor
Defaults
tool button can also be added to
a toolbar for quicker access to the Floor
Defaults dialog.
Settings in the Floor Defaults dialog are

similar to those found in the Room
Specification dialog, and will influence
the default room settings for all future floors.
See Room Defaults on page 186.
267
Working With Multiple Floors

When Chief Architect starts, it opens a blank
plan. The plan name is Untitled.plan:Plan.
If you draw walls and save the plan, the
current floor will become the first floor.
Once the plan file is saved, the title bar
displays filename:Floor Plan, indicating:
The active drawing file is filename.
The .plan file (and not the .layout file) is

open.
The active view is the floor plan view.
Any model can have up to 30 floors, plus a

foundation and attic. Floors can be added,
deleted, copied, and swapped. All floors and
the foundation are visible in 3D views.
The Current Floor is the active floor, the

only one that can be edited. There can be
only one active floor at a time.
The Reference Floor is a single floor, other
than the current floor, which can be
displayed for reference, similar to an overlay.
The reference floor is visible but not
editable. All other floors are saved in
memory and are shown in 3D views but not
floor plan view.
To view more than one floor of your plan
on-screen, open the file again. This creates a new editable window of the same file
which can display any floor. Changes made
in this new window are reflected in the original window.
Floor Tools
Click the Floor Tools parent button to
display its child buttons to the right.
Click the Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
child button to force Chief Architect to
recalculate the relationship between the
walls, floors, and ceilings in your model. See
Automatic Rebuild of Floors & Ceilings
on page 319.
Click the Build New Floor
child button
to build a new floor. A new floor can be
generated that is based upon the perimeter of
the floor below or a blank floor plan can be
created and drawn from scratch. See
268
Click the Build Foundation

child button
to open the Foundation Defaults dialog and
build a foundation floor. See Building a
Foundation on page 274.
Click the Insert New Floor
child button
to insert a new floor below the current floor.
See Adding Floors on page 269.
Click the Exchange With Floor Above
child button to move the current floor up one
floor and the floor above it, down. See
Exchanging Floors on page 270.
Click the Exchange With Floor Below
child button to move the current floor down
one floor and the floor below it, up. See
Exchanging Floors on page 270.
Adding Floors
Click the Delete Current Floor

child
button to remove the current floor from the
plan. For more informaiton, see Deleting
Floors on page 270.
plan. For more informaiton, see Deleting

Foundations on page 278.
Click the Floor Defaults
button to open
the Floor Defaults dialog.
Click the Delete Foundation

child
button to remove the foundation from the
New floors can be easily added to a plan.
2.
Once you have made a selection, click

OK. A new floor will be added based on
the settings in the Floor Defaults dialog. See Floor Defaults on page 267.
3.
The new floor will become the current

floor.
4.
Repeat this process to create additional

floors.
To create a new floor

1.
Click the Floor Tools
parent button
then click the Build New Floor

child button. The New Floor dialog
opens, which allows you to build an
additional floor, two options are
available.
Note: Chief Architect allows only one floor,

the foundation/basement, below the first floor.
Keep this in mind when you begin an as-built
or plan for a multi-story building.
Adding Floors Between

Existing Floors
Most often, Derive new 2nd floor
plan from the 1st floor plan is used.
This option creates an upper floor with
exterior walls (of the same type) generated over the exterior walls of the floor
below. These walls can be edited. Interior walls are not duplicated.
Make new (blank) plan for the 2nd
floor - This option is typically selected
if none of the exterior walls are directly
above the existing walls on the floor
below. This creates a blank floor above
the current floor.
Floors can be inserted between two existing

floors. To insert a floor, select Build>
Floor> Insert New Floor
Floor dialog opens.
. The Insert
Select one of the two options available and

click OK. The existing floor is moved up,
269
Floors
Adding Floors
(with all floors above it) and a new floor is

created below.
Derive new 2nd floor plan from the 1st
floor plan - Select this option to insert a new
floor, based on the exterior walls of the
current floor. Click OK to create a new floor.
Any existing floors above are moved up and
the new floor is inserted.
Make new (blank) plan - Select this option

to insert a blank floor. The current floor and
all floors above are moved up.
Adding a Foundation
To add a foundation, select Build> Floor>
Build Foundation
or click the child
button. See Building a Foundation on page
274.
Exchanging Floors
Clicking the Exchange With Floor Above
or Exchange With Floor Below
child button will swap the current floor with
the floor above or below. The floor that was
moved will become the current floor at its

new location. You can easily move a floor up
or down several floors by using either one of
these buttons repeatedly.
Deleting Floors
Click the Delete Current Floor
child
button to remove the current floor from the
plan. If there is a floor above, it will become
the current floor; if there is no floor below,

the floor beneath will become the current
floor.
Copying Floors
If you would like to make a copy of an
existing floor to be used on a new floor, the
Edit Area
tools can be helpful. See Edit
Area Tools on page 816.
The Current Floor

Only one floor can be active at any given
time. The active floor is referred to as the
Current Floor, and is the only floor which
can be edited in floor plan view.
270
If you want to work on two different floors at

the same time, you can open the plan again.
This opens a second window on the current
open plan which has the same editing
abilities as the first. Only one of these
Reference Floor
windows can be active at any given time,

however.
Floor Up/ Floor Down

If you are working with more
than two floors, use the toolbar
display to change between them. The current
floor displays on the Change Floor/
Reference
button, which can be found
between the Down One Floor

Up One Floor
and the
buttons.
From the menu you can also select Tools>

Reference Floors> Up One Floor
or
Down One Floor

floor to another.
to switch from one
Floors become available once they have been

built. The Attic plan and the foundation are
also accessible using these tools.
Change Floor
If there are multiple floors, click the Change
Floor/Reference
button to open the
Change Floor/Reference dialog.
Click on a floor name from the Current

Floor list to make that floor the current floor.
Similarly you can select a floor from the
Reference Floor list to be the reference
floor. Click OK to return to floor plan view.
Floors
Reference Floor
Only one floor can be active at any given
time. Once there is more than one floor in a
model, it is helpful to see how different
floors relate to each other. Any floor can be
displayed as a Reference Floor along with
the current floor. The reference floor is
visible but cannot be edited.
By default, the floor below the current floor
is the reference floor, but any floor can be
referenced using the Change Floor/
Reference dialog. To open the dialog,
click the Change Floor/Reference
button. If the Reference Display
or off, it will remain so.
Reference Display
To display the reference floor, select
Tools> Reference Floors> Reference
Display
was on
The display of the reference floor in floor

plan view can be toggled on or off. Click the
Reference Display
button on the utility
toolbar to turn on the display; click it again to
turn it off.
271
When the reference floor is displayed, it

displays in a single color. This color is
defined in the Preferences dialog.
Selecting a contrasting color will help to
quickly identify the reference floor. See
Colors Panel on page 96.
Note: When the current floor and the reference floor have edges that line up, the reference floor may be difficult to see on your
monitor. There is a discoloration that is
caused when lines of two different colors are
superimposed upon each other.
When the reference floor is visible, some

layers are automatically set to display in the
Layer Display Options dialog. To display
other layers with the reference floor, click the
Layer Display Options
button.
An R in the Ref column indicates that all

objects on that layer will be turned on for
reference when the reference floor is
displayed. See Displaying Objects on page
125.
Swap Floor/Reference
If one floor is defined as the current
floor, and another floor is defined as
the reference floor, use the Swap Floor/
Reference
button to quickly switch the
status of the two plans.
272
Chapter 11:
Foundations
Chapter Overview
There can be only one foundation level in

your plan: Level 0. Foundation walls can,
however, be drawn on upper floors using the
Foundation Wall
tool.
Always consult registered geotechnical

and civil engineers for information
regarding the proper foundation for your site.
Chapter Contents
Foundation Defaults
Building a Foundation
New Floor Dialog
Displaying Foundations
Deleting Foundations
Aligning Stem Walls and Footings
Resizing Stem Walls
The Slab Tools
Rebuilding Monolithic Slab Foundations
Editing Piers and Grade Beam Foundations
Editing Piers & Pads
Foundations and Room Specification
Slab Specification Dialog
Foundation Defaults
Default Settings are accessed by
selecting Edit> Default Settings... .
There can be only one foundation floor per
plan. Because the settings in the Foundation Defaults dialog determine foundation
type, this dialog is opened automatically

whenever the Build Foundation
button is clicked.
child
273
Foundations
There are three foundation types in Chief

Architect: footing, slab, and piers. All three
can be generated automatically or manually.
The foundation type can be specified when
the foundation is built in the Foundation
Defaults dialog.
The Foundation Defaults dialog allows

you to specify stem wall height; footing size;
slab thickness; presence of mudsills; and
other characteristics of the foundation. These
values determine how a new foundation is

built as well as sizes for foundation walls,
slabs and footings added to an existing
foundation.
Foundations built automatically are based on
the placement of walls on the first floor. At
least one room must be defined on the first
floor for a foundation to be automatically
generated.
Three foundation types are available: piers,
footings and monolithic slab. The first two
options are composed of walls; the latter
creates a Slab with Footing polyline.
While only one foundation type can be built
automatically, you can add additional walls,
piers and slabs to any foundation after it is
generated.
To build a foundation, select Build> Floor>

Build Foundation
to open the
Foundation Defaults dialog.
The Foundation Defaults dialog defines

the general parameters of the foundation
system before it is built.
The Foundation Defaults dialog
cannot be used to edit the foundation
after it has been built. The foundation must
be deleted and rebuilt. See Deleting Foundations on page 278.
Foundation Tab
1
3
5
10
11
12
7
13
274
1 Wall Thickness - If the Foundation

Wall Type is set to Default (wood
frame 16"OC), this field is enabled and
defines the thickness of the stem wall. When
the foundation wall is built, the wall type will
be Default (concrete) with the thickness that
you assigned.
The thickness of other wall types is defined
on the Foundation tab of the Wall Type
Definitions dialog. See Foundation Tab
on page 171.
2 Min. Wall Height - Defines the stem

wall height. If the min. wall height is at
least 6 (1800 mm), a slab floor is generated
above the footing and a Basement ceiling
height notation appears, displaying the
distance from the top of the slab floor to the
basement ceiling. It is the same as the Min.
Wall Height minus the Slab Thickness.
Adjust these values to get the desired
Basement Ceiling Height. The ceiling
height can be changed later. See Room
To delete the slab, specify the rooms in the
basement as Open Below in the Room
3 Slab Thickness - Defines the thickness
of the slab produced above the footing

or at the top of the stem wall.
The Basement Ceiling Height is the Min.
Wall Height minus the Slab Thickness.
Adjust theses values to get the desired
Basement Ceiling Height. The Ceiling
Height can be changed later. See Room

Footings
Spread footings are used in conjunction with
stem walls. The footing is typically wider
than the stem wall and runs continuously
under the base of the wall.
4 Footings - Select the radio button to
generate a foundation system with a

stem wall centered on a spread footing.
Footings automatically center beneath the
stem wall; but individual footings can be
centered differently. See Foundation Tab
on page 171.
5 Slab at top of Stem Wall - Check this
box to raise the slab floor so its top is

flush with the top of the stem wall.
If Slab at top of Stem Wall is selected, all

rooms on the first floor are automatically set
to Floor for this room is supplied by the
foundation room from the floor below, as
noted in the Structure tab in the Room
Specification dialog. See Structure Tab
on page 205.
6 Footing Size - Specify the Width and
Height of the footing. To generate a

foundation with a stem wall and no visible
footing, set the footing width to the same
dimension as the stem wall.
Initially, the bottom of the slab rests on the

top of the footing. The footing can be
subsequently lowered by increasing Stem
Wall Height for the first floor room above the
foundation.
275
Foundations
Three types of foundations can be created in

Chief Architect: footing, monolithic slab,
and piers. Select the radio button next to the
name of the desired type. Each type has
different settings, options, and behaviors.
Mudsills
7 Mudsill Size - Enter a Width and
Height for the mudsill. If either value is

set to zero, no mudsill is produced. A mudsill
is only produced if the main layer of the wall
above is a framing type.
8 Foundation Wall Type - Click the
Define... button to open the Wall Type

Definitions dialog. The definition of the
wall type selected from the drop-down list
can be changed. See Foundation Tab on
page 274.
9 All wall layer definitions listed in the
Wall Defaults dialog are in this drop
down list.
If the Default (wood frame 16"OC) wall
type is selected, the thickness can be defined
by the Wall Thickness field to the left. The
thickness of any other wall type is defined by
the wall layer definition.
Note: If you plan to turn the foundation wall
into a pony wall, a wall type other than
Default (concrete) must be selected.
Monolithic Slab
10 Monolithic Slab - Select this option to
build a slab foundation with a perimeter
footing. This foundation is the floor platform
276
for the first floor. It is visible in the

foundation plan and can be selected and
edited with the Slab Specification dialog.
Note: Monolithic slabs are rebuilt whenever
you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
Piers
11 Piers - Select this option to generate a
pier and grade beam foundation. The

floor framing rests directly on top of the
grade beam.
The height of the grade beam is defined by

the Min. Wall Height. The thickness of the
grade beam is defined by the Wall Thickness.
The size and spacing of the piers are
specified in the Piers section of this tab.
If a wall type is selected, only the Min. Wall
Height is used to size the grade beam, and
the thickness comes from the wall layer
definition. If you select Default (concrete),
the grade beam is sized according to the Wall
Thickness and the Min. Wall Height.
12 Specify the Diameter, Depth and
Maximum Separation of the piers.
13 Basement Ceiling Height - The ceiling
height for the basement displays here if

the Min. Wall Height is defined at 72" or
greater.
New Floor Dialog
Materials Tab
1
The Materials tab applies to any foundation

type; however, some options may be
unavailable depending on the type selected.
for the rebar in the stem wall. If using rebar

in a slab instead of mesh, the spacing applies
to both directions.
1 #bars/course - Specify the number of
3 Bar size - Define the rebar size in 1/8th
rebar in the Footing; the number of

Horizontal and Vertical rebar courses in the
stem walls; and the number of rebar layers in
the slab. If piers are used, specify how many
rebar are used per pier. Rebar does not
display in cross section/elevation views, but
will be added to the Material List.
2 Course Spacing - Define the Wall
Horizontal and Wall Vertical spacing
inches. 4 represents 4/8, or 1/2, of an
inch.
Use Mesh - Select the check box to
reinforce the slab floor with mesh
instead of rebar; or uncheck it to use rebar.
5 Select either or both of the Options.
These are added to the Material List,

but do not display in the model.
New Floor Dialog

When the settings in the Foundation
Defaults dialog are correct, click OK to
open the New Floor dialog.
277
Foundations
and click OK to build a foundation floor

based on the 1st floor plan.
2 Make new (blank) plan for the
2
1 Derive new Foundation plan from
Foundation - Select this option and

click OK to create an empty foundation level
in which you can manually draw foundation
walls or slabs.
the 1st floor plan - Select this option
Displaying Foundations
In floor plan view, footings are drawn with
dashed lines and walls, with solid lines.
Automatically generated piers are drawn
using a dashed line style and are centered on
the grade beam.
The grade beam is represented by two solid
lines. It aligns with the wall above unless
specified otherwise.
The display of foundation walls, footings and

piers is controlled in the Layer Display
Options dialog on the Walls, Foundation
and Footings layers, respectively. The
Footings layer controls both the display of
footings and foundation piers.
The Foundation layer controls the display of
the foundation in 3D views.
Deleting Foundations
Once built, the foundation plan is
separate from the first floor plan. If you
change the position of exterior walls on the
first floor plan, the foundation is not updated.
Use the Rebuild Slab
tool to rebuild
foundation slabs automatically. To update
walls, however, you must either edit them in
the foundation plan; or delete the foundation
and rebuild them.
Note: You must delete and rebuild the
foundation if you decide to change the

foundation type.
Select Build> Floor> Delete Foundation
to delete the current foundation. Rebuild
the foundation to match the new first floor
plan by selecting Build> Floor> Build
Foundation
. The Foundation
Defaults dialog opens, allowing you to set
general parameters for the new foundation
plan.
278

By default, the exterior surface of the main
layer of the stem wall aligns with the exterior
surface of the main layer of the wall above. If
there is only one layer for both the stem wall
and the first floor wall above it, the outsides
of the walls will line up.
The footing is centered on the stem wall

unless specified otherwise on the Foundation tab of the Wall Specification dialog.
See Foundation Tab on page 171.
Resizing Stem Walls

When a foundation plan is created, the
foundation is built with a specified stem wall
height measured from the bottom of floor
framing to top of the footing. Once built, this
height can be set individually by room and
can also be set independent of the basement
floor height.
In 3D Views
Individual stem walls can be selected and
edited in cross section/elevation view to
move the footing up or down.
Foundations
If adjacent rooms have stem wall

heights that differ by at least 1/16 of an
inch, the stem wall separating them will use
the larger of these two values.
To set stem wall height individually, select a

room and click the Open Object
edit
button to open the Room Specification
dialog will open. On the General tab, enter a
value in the Stem Wall Height field to
redefine the height of the foundation stem
wall the next time you Rebuild Walls/
Floors/Ceilings
This method should only be used for detailed

changes or for stepping the bottom of the
foundation wall. See Stepped Walls &
Footings on page 163.
The Slab Tools

The Slab tools are meant for more
generic purposes than foundations and
should not be substituted for a foundation
plan. The settings in the Foundation

Defaults dialog will not affect slabs created
with the Slab tools.
279
Slabs can be selected and opened for

specification. See Slab Specification
Dialog on page 283.
Select Build> Structure or click the Slab
Tools
tools.
parent button to access the slab
Slabs
Click the Slab
or Slab With
Footing
child button and click
and drag in floor plan view to create a slab.
The slab appears and can be edited as a
polyline in floor plan view. See Editing
Polylines on page 771.
To edit its height and thickness, select the
slab and click the Open Object
edit
button to open the Slab Specification
dialog. See Slab Specification Dialog on
page 283.
Slab Holes
A hole can be placed in a slab or in
the floor of a foundation slab with
footings. Click the Slab Hole
Piers & Pads

Piers and pads can be manually
placed under walls, railings, or
beams on any floor. Click the Round Pier
child button or Square Pad
child
button and click in floor plan view to place a
pier or pad.
The pier or pad that is placed uses the sizes
from the Foundation Defaults dialog.
For information about editing Piers and Pads,
see Editing Piers & Pads on page 281.
Platform Holes
Click the Platform Hole
button
and draw a polyline to place a hole in a
ceiling or floor platform above the current
floor. If the foundation level is currently
displayed in floor plan view, a hole will be
placed in the floor platform for the first floor.
You may need to add this button to your
toolbar. See Adding Toolbar Buttons on
page 18.
Slabs and the

Materials List
or Slab
Hole With Footing

child button and
click and drag within an existing slab in floor
plan view to create a hole within it.
If a slabs material type is specified as

Concrete or Volume, the Materials List will
calculate the total volume of the slab and all
footings.
Rebuilding Monolithic Slab Foundations

If you built a monolithic slab foundation or
define a room to have a slab foundation and
then modify the footprint of the walls
defining the slab, you can update the slabs by
280
selecting Build> Floor> Rebuild Slabs

to open the Rebuild Monolithic Slabs
dialog. Click Rebuild Slabs to delete all
existing slabs and rebuild them to match the
current footprint of the walls that originally

defined them.
If you have manually edited the slab and

changed it, these changes will be lost when
the slab is rebuilt.

Piers and pads can be selected and moved by
selecting Build> Structure> Round Pier
or Square Pad
pier or pad. Piers and pads can be positioned

along the grade beam and their size adjusted.
and clicking on a
Editing Piers & Pads

either the Round Pier
or Square Pad
child tool.
Click on an existing pier or pad at the wall to
select it. Three edit handles display,
allowing the pier or pad to be moved and
resized.
Resize the selected pier or pad by dragging in or out from either of the two side
handles. To resize a pier or pad if one side
is all the way against an outside wall
intersection, select the pier or pad, hold
down the Ctrl key and drag using the
inside handle.
Move the selected pier or pad by grabbing the center handle and dragging it
along the wall. It stops automatically
underneath an exterior corner.
Move any pier or pad using a dimension

which locates an edge. If no such dimension
exists, click Manual Dimension
child
button and drag a dimension parallel to the
wall containing the pier, within a couple feet
of the wall. Select the pier or pad first and
then click on the dimension to open the Set
Dimension dialog. Change the value in the
box to move the pier or pad. See Moving
Objects Using Dimensions on page 690.
If you move a foundation wall or beam,

any piers or pads it contains will move
with it.
If you select the Round Pier

Pad
or Square
tool and click in the grade beam but
281
Foundations
Piers and pads can only be selected using
away from any existing pier or pad, a new

pier or pad is creatd.
Delete the selected pier or pad by selecting it
and clicking the Delete
pressing the Del key. You can also drag a

side handle past the center and release the
mouse.
edit button or
Foundations and Room Specification

When a foundation plan is created, rooms
included in the Living Area calculation
generate a spread footing, grade beam, or
slab foundation below it. Garages generate
foundations, as well; but exterior rooms do
not.
Note: To remove the concrete slab or part of
the slab in the basement area, select a basement room and define it as Open Below in
the Room Specification dialog.
Two options on the Structure tab of the

Room Specification dialog affect the
foundation: Slab foundation for this room
if the foundation is a monolithic slab; and
Floor for this room is supplied by the
foundation room from the floor below if
the foundation is composed of footings or
piers. See Structure Tab on page 205.
Garages
A room labeled Garage on the first floor
produces a room in an automatically
produced footings or pier foundation plan.
The Structure tab in the Room
Specification dialog for the Garage
foundation "room" displays the following
settings:
282
Ceiling over this room is not checked.
This foundation room supplies the

floor for the room above is checked.
On the first floor, the Garage is designated

"Floor for This Room is Supplied by the
Foundation Room from the Floor
Below" on the Structure tab of the Room
These settings create a 4" slab to sit on top
of the footings, with a short stem wall around
the garage. Stud walls are built on top of the
stem wall.
If Floor for This Room is Supplied by the
Foundation Room from the Floor Below
is selected, a Floor Overview
of the
foundation plan will include the slab. A
Floor Overview
no garage floor.
on the 1st floor shows
The floor height of the garage and the Top of

Stem Wall must be properly defined relative
to the zero level of the first floor. Typically,
the garage area in the foundation will need to
be selected and the floor height or slab to
stem wall top raised if it is to be less than 24"
below the zero level of the main floor.
Structure Tab
Two of the options on the Structure tab of
the Room Specification dialog affect the
foundation. Slab foundation for this room
and Floor for this room is supplied by the
foundation room from the floor below.
See Structure Tab on page 205.

Select a slab and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Slab Specification
dialog.
General Tab
1
2
3
1 Hole in Slab - Check this box to
convert the selected slab into a slab

hole. A slab hole must be contained within a
larger slab.
Foundations
Polyline Tab
2 Top Height - Set the top height of the

selected slab.
3 Thickness - Set the thickness of the

selected slab.
4 Has Footing - Check this box if you

would like the slab to have footings of
the set height and width for the selected slab.
The total area of the selected slab displays

here.
Selected Line Tab

For information about using the Selected
Line tab, see Polyline Specification Dialog
on page 741.
283
Line Style Tab
Materials Tab
For information about the Line Style tab, see

Line Specification Dialog on page 731.
Use this tab to select a material to apply to

the terrain surface in 3D views. This material
is not calculated in the Material List.
Fill Style Tab

For information about the Fill Style tab, see
Fill Style Tab on page 743.
284

Chapter 12:
Roofs
Chief Architects roof tools allow you to

draw almost any roof style manually. Many
roof styles can also be generated
automatically.
A proficiency with the roof tools can be
attained only through practice. Mastering
these tools will save you time and effort in
plan development.
Verify that all roof planes join as
intended. The program will not confirm
correct geometry between manually designed
or edited roof planes. It is possible to design
and edit roof planes whose hips and valleys
do not meet properly.
Chapter Contents
Roof Defaults
Automatic Roofs vs. Manual Roofs
The Roof Tools
Automatically Generated Roof Styles
Some Common Roof Types
Roof Baseline Polylines
Manual Roofs
Roof Planes
Curved Roof Planes
Dormers
Roof Returns
Displaying Roof Planes
Deleting Roof Planes
Editing Roof Planes
Editing Curved Roof Planes
Editing Auto Dormers
Locating Roof Plane Intersections
Ceiling Planes
Gable/Roof Line
Skylights
Gutters
Gable Over Door/Window
Build Roof Dialog
Roof Baseline Specification Dialog
Roof Plane Specification Dialog
Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog
Dormer Specification Dialog
Dormer Defaults
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog
Roof Pitches in Degrees
285
Roofs
Chapter Overview
Roof Defaults
Most objects in Chief Architect derive their
intial values from their respective default
dialog. For example, a newly placed
Window
will get its initial values from
the Window Defaults dialog and a newly
placed Hinged Door
will get its initial
values from the Door Defaults dialog.
Once placed in a plan, the initial values for
these objects can be overridden by opening
them for specification and editing them. This
concept of default settings applies similarly
to roofs, with a few variations.
For the most part, the Build Roof dialog
functions as the "Roof Defaults" dialog.
Many, but not all, initial default values for
both manually drawn and automatically
generated roofs are derived from this dialog.
See Build Roof Dialog on page 319.
Automatically
Generated Roofs
When roofs are automatically generated,
initial Pitch and Overhang values are
derived from the Build Roof dialog. The
bulk of the information that determines
where and how roof planes will be
automatically generated is contained in the
walls themselves (on the Roof tab of the
Wall Specification dialog).
To return an automatically generated roof to

the default condition, remove all checks from
the Roof tab of the Wall Specification
dialog for all exterior walls, and restore the
original Pitch and Overhang values in the
Build Roof dialog. You can also select
Edit> Default Settings> Reset to Defaults
from the menu and restore default values
using the Reset to Defaults dialog. See
Reset to Defaults on page 93. Once default
values have been restored, Build Roof
Planes again to return the roof to the default
condition.
Manually Drawn Roofs

When a roof system is created manually,
each individual roof plane is drawn. As with
automatically generated roofs, initial Pitch
and Overhang values are derived from the
Build Roof dialog. Individual roof planes
can then be selected and edited in a variety of
ways using the Roof Plane
Specification dialog. See Roof Plane
To return manually drawn roof planes to their
default condition, it is easiest to simply
delete and redraw them.
Automatic Roofs vs. Manual Roofs

Chief Architect can create just about any roof
style. Most common roof styles such as hips
and gables can be automatically generated
quite easily. More complex roof styles can be
286
created manually. The manual roof tools

allow you to create any roof system which
can be represented using roof planes.
The Roof Tools
There are several ways to produce a roof for

your plan. The quickest and easiest is to
automatically generate a roof. In the Build
Roof dialog, specify the Pitch and Roof
Overhang, then simply check Build Roof
Planes and click OK to automatically
generate a roof. By default, a roof plane will
be generated over every exterior wall,
creating a hip roof. The program will
automatically join the roof planes at ridges
and valleys.
With a little more work you can select
exterior walls; open them for specification;
and on the Roof tab of the Wall
Specification dialog, customize the type
of roof plane that will be generated over each
wall. Specify a Full Gable Wall; High/Shed
Gable Wall; Extend Slope Downward; or
Knee Wall, etc. You can also set a Pitch, an
Upper Pitch, and the elevation at which the
Upper Pitch Starts At. See Wall
Roofs can also be automatically generated
using roof plane baselines. When roof plane
baselines are used, information that
determines where and how roof planes will
be generated is contained on the the Roof
Baseline tab of the Roof Baseline
Specification dialog, which is very similar
in appearance to the Roof tab of the Wall
Specification dialog. For more about roof

plane baselines, see Roof Baseline
Bay, bow, and box windows will produce

additional roof surfaces automatically. For
information about these windows and the
roof styles that can be used with them, see
Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs on page
247.
Manually Drawn
Roof Systems
Any roof system that can be created
automatically can be created manually. The
advantage to drawing roof systems manually
is that each roof plane is drawn and edited
individually, offering full control over the
process and limiting the possibilities only to
your imagination. The disadvantage to
drawing roofs manually is that it takes longer
to create them and when walls below them
have moved, they must be edited or redrawn.
Using Both Automatic and

Manual Techniques
Another option is to start with an
automatically generated roof and use manual
design techniques to finish it. Using both
automatic roof generation and the manual
roof drawing techniques, it is possible to
quickly design highly customized roof
systems.
The Roof Tools

Click the Roof Tools parent button to
display the Roof Tools child buttons.
parent button to display the Build Roof

dialog and specify the settings for
automatically generated and manually drawn
roofs.
287
Roofs
Automatically
Generated Roofs
Roof Plane
Click the Roof Plane child button to
draw a roof plane manually. Doubleclick the Roof Plane
child button to
display the Build Roof dialog and specify
the settings for automatically generated
roofs.
Skylights
Click the Skylight child button and
drag over an existing roof plane to
create a skylight. The skylight, skylight
shaft, and ceiling hole (if a ceiling exists) are
drawn at the same time. See Skylights on
page 317.
Auto Floating Dormer
Ceiling Plane
Click the Ceiling Plane child button to
draw a ceiling plane manually.
Manually drawn ceiling planes behave very
similarly to manually drawn roof planes. See
Ceiling Planes on page 312.
Gable/Roof Line
Use the Gable/Roof Line child button
to draw a gable line that will generate a
gable condition when roofs are automatically
generated.
The Gable/Roof Line
child button is
most commonly used to define the location
of a gable along a longer wall. A gable/roof
line can also be used to place a gable within a
roof plane or to extend a continuous roof
when there is no wall below.
Click the Auto Floating Dormer child

button and click within an existing roof
plane to place an auto floating dormer. See
Dormers on page 300.
Auto Dormer
Click the Auto Dormer child button
and click within a roof plane to place a
dormer. See Dormers on page 300.
Fix Roofs
Clicking the Fix Roofs child button
will remove breaks where a single edge
of one roof plane meets with the broken edge
of another in a ridge or valley. See Aligning
Roof Edges on page 306.
Delete Roof Planes

Use the Delete Roof Planes child
button to delete all roof planes in the
plan.

Many common roof styles can be generated
automatically using the Roof tab of the Wall
288
Note: Pitch settings on the Roof tab of the

Wall Specification dialog will override
the Pitch setting in the Build Roof dialog.
Wall Specification Dialog
1
2
3
4
Select the wall(s) and click the Open Object

edit button to open the Wall
Specification dialog. The Roof tab
contains information that determines how
roofs will be automatically generated.
Group select and change multiple walls

simultaneously. Select the first wall,
then hold down the Shift key and click on
additional walls. Then click the Open Object
edit button.
1 Full Gable Wall - Check this to create
a gable roof over the entire wall. This

places a ridge over the middle of the selected
wall(s). See Gable Roof on page 292.
High Shed/Gable Wall - Check this for the
wall under the high side of a shed roof. It can
produce ridges, but it may also be used for
gable ends that have a raked wall. See High
Shed/Gable Wall on page 292.
289
Roofs
When roofs are automatically generated, a

roof plane will be created over each exterior
wall by default. This creates a hip roof. If
you want an exterior wall to generate a roof
plane using values other than the default
values specified in the Build Roof dialog,
or if you would like a particular wall to not
generate a roof plane at all (gable roofs, shed
roofs, etc.), you can specify that information
here. Any automatically generated roof style
other than a hip requires one of the Options
to be checked.
Knee Wall - Check this to define an interior

wall whose height is defined by the roof
plane above it, not the ceiling height.
A knee wall should be toward the interior of
a structure. Knee walls are usually found in
top floor attic areas.
Extend Slope Downward - Check this to
extend the roof plane downward over a
bumpout, instead of creating additional roof
planes. The two connecting walls that create
the bumpout must be Full Gable walls.
In the bottom image below, the outer
bumpout wall has the Extend Slope Downward check box selected. The two short
connecting walls have the Full Gable Wall
check box selected.
Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom - Check this and

the selected wall will have both its top and
bottom clipped by two roof planes that
overlap each other. An example would be the
wall at the side of a dormer.
Pitch
2 Any exterior wall can define the pitch
of the roof plane built above it.
If the Pitch value is followed by a (D) the

value is the default pitch for the entire
building. The default pitch is set in the Build
Roof dialog. The minimum pitch is in
12" or 20 mm in 1000 mm.
Pitch - Enter a value here to specify a pitch
for the roof plane above this wall that does
not match the default roof pitch set in the
Build Roof dialog.
If a roof plane is specified with two pitches,
this type-in box controls the pitch of the
lower roof plane.
Before
Full Gable
Wall
Mansard, gambrel, gull wing and half-hip are

examples of roof styles that use two pitches.
Extend Slope
Downward
After
290
Upper Pitch - Check this to define the pitch

for a second roof plane above this wall. You
must specify the distance in from the
baseline or the height at which the second
roof plane Starts at..
To determine either of these values from an

elevation view:
1.
Create the model to the desired dimensions.
2.
Generate the roof using only the first

pitch. Be sure to define all the roof information for each wall (gable, hip, first
pitch, etc.).
3.
Using the Cross Section/Elevation

tool, generate a cross section of the
house that includes the roof plane that
will have the second pitch.
4.
Toggle into CAD

mode. Place a
temporary point near the location where
you want the second pitch to start.
6.
Open the Build Roof dialog, check

Build Roof Planes and click OK to
rebuild the roof.
Using the End-to-End Dimension

tool, drag a dimension line from the
first floor 0'-0" to the temporary point.
Using the End-to-End Dimension
tool, drag a dimension line from the
baseline to the vertical plane of the
temporary point.
Note: Normally hip roof planes are built over

bay, bow, and box windows. You cannot edit
the wall segments making up these windows
as described above. Instead, select one of
the windows, open it for specification, and
select one of the roof generation options.
3 Lower Wall Type If Split By Butting
Enter either of these values in the Wall

Specification dialog. You can press
the Tab key to update the other value.
Click OK to close the dialog.
Auto Roof Returns

4 Check Auto Roof Return to generate
roof returns on the selected wall. In

most cases, roof returns only work for Full
Gable Walls.
Specify the horizontal Length of the roof
return in inches.
Enter a value in inches to Extend the roof
returns from the overhang.
Specify a Gable, Hip, or Full roof return.
See Roof Returns on page 302.
291
Roofs
5.
Roof - Designate a wall to be split into

a pony wall. It will be split by roof planes
that abutt its outside surface. The upper
portion will be defined in the Layer tab of the
Wall Specification dialog, and the lower
portion specified here. See Build Roof
Dialog on page 319.
Some Common Roof Types

Most common roof types can be created
easily using the Options on the Roof tab of
the Wall Specification dialog.
Hip Roof
4.
On the Roof tab check Full Gable Wall.

Be sure both walls are specified the
same.
5.

parent
button to open the Build Roof dialog,
check Build Roof Planes, and click OK
to regenerate the roof.
Defining the pitch for a Full Gable wall has

no effect unless an Upper Pitch is defined.
Full Gable
Wall
By default a roof plane will be generated

over each exterior wall, creating a hip roof.
Hip roofs can be applied equally to all walls
without causing conflict. To define a wall
with a hip roof, make sure all Options are
unchecked.
Gable Roof
A gable roof is produced if the two opposite
walls, or roof plane baseline segments, are
defined as Full Gable Wall in the Roof tab
of the Wall Specification dialog.
292
1.
Draw four walls to create a one room

house.
2.
Group select two end walls.
3.
Click the Open Object

edit button
to open the Wall Specification dialog.
High Shed/Gable Wall

The High Shed/Gable Wall is often
interchangeable with Full Gable Wall, but
should be used when raked walls are desired.
If three adjacent walls are defined as High
Shed/Gable wall, the building is modeled
with a shed roof. The High Shed/Gable wall
will be the tall side.
High Shed/
Gable Wall
You can generate roof plane baselines in the

Build Roof dialog. Check Make Roof
Baseline Polylines (this will also check
Build Roof Planes) and click OK. The
automatic roof generation process stops short
of building the roof planes. A continuous set
of roof baselines is created along the outside
edge of the main layer of the exterior walls.
Once created, roof plane baselines can be
edited like a CAD polyline (see Editing
Polylines on page 771).When reshaped,
new roofs built from these roof plane
baselines will follow the new shape even if
that shape no longer follows the exterior
walls.
Just as roof information can be defined in

individual walls, roof information can also
be defined in each roof baseline edge. When
roofs are built using roof plane baselines, the
settings in the roof plane baselines will
override the settings in the corresponding
walls.
To create the new roof using the modified
roof baselines, check Use Existing Roof
Baselines in the Build Roof dialog and
click OK.
Editing Roof
Baseline Polylines
Roof baselines can be edited and used as the
basis for the generation of a new roof plan.
They can be reshaped in 2D like CAD
polylines. Like walls, edges can have roof
information defined in them. When edited,
attached roof plane baselines will stay at the
same baseline height. If roof planes exist at
more than one baseline height, each height
will generate its own set of Roof Baselines.
293
Roofs
Typically the program models the roof plan

based on the default settings in the Build
Roof dialog and the settings on the Roof tab
of the Wall Specification dialog. The
program takes this information and the
layout of the exterior walls and generates a
roof. If you want a roof plan that diverges
from the footprint of your building, you can
use roof baselines to lay out the roof plan
instead.
Roof baselines will always form a closed

area. They cannot be severed, but can have
additional joints or corners added.
In addition to length and direction, each
segment of a roof plane baseline has
embedded roof information that the program
uses when modeling roof planes. This is the
same information that can be set for walls on
the Roof tab of the Wall Specification
dialog.
An Example
For a simple example of roof plane baseline
editing, consider an L-shaped house, with a
rectangular roof. The inner part of the L is a
patio that is covered under the same roof.
To set roof information for roof plane

baselines
1.
Select the roof plane baseline at one

edge.
2.

edit button
to open the Roof Baseline
3.
The settings in the dialog apply only to

the selected baseline edge. Specify one
of the following options:
Full Gable Wall
High Shed/Gable Wall
Knee Wall
Extend Slope Downward
You can specify that a particular baseline ends Against Wall, which means
that the high edge of a roof plane will
butt into a wall which continues
upward.
4.
294
Click OK to close the dialog. Roof information is displayed along the roof plane
baselines. Abbreviations used are: V vertical (against wall), G -gable/shed, K
- kneewall, and L - lower (extend slope
downward).
On the left is the roof plane baseline as it was

originally produced and the roof plan it
creates.
To model the roof plan shown on the right
1.
Select the roof plane baseline by the bottom segment.
2.
Click the Fillet Two Lines

edit button. See Fillet and Chamfer on page
800.
3.
Click on the leftmost segment to fillet

the two lines.
4.
A message box appears informing you

that The system must delete intervening lines (those on the inside of the L) to
join the two selected lines. Click OK.
5.
You should see the roof line shown in

the right side.
6.
Open the Build Roof dialog and select

the Build Roof Planes and Use Existing
Roof Baseline check boxes to model the
roof plan shown at right.
Manual Roofs
Manual Roofs
Before automatically generating roofs it is
important to understand how the manual roof
editing tools can be used to create and edit
roof planes. The manual roof editing tools
take advantage of the parameters of
neighboring roof planes and walls to partially
automate the process of drawing a roof plan.
Creating a roof plane is a simple task. Once
created it can be edited in two ways.
The shape of the roof plane can be

changed. The shape of a roof plane is
edited in 2D just like a CAD polyline.
The orientation of the roof plane can be

edited in 3D. As a roof plane is stretched
and reshaped in 2D, the program maintains the 3D orientation of the plane
being edited. The location of this plane
can be redefined using the Roof Plane
Specification Dialog on page 326. This
dialog allows the roof planes location
and direction to be adjusted.
An understanding of these two concepts will

allow you to design almost any kind of roof.
Roof Planes
Roof planes are essentially 3D CAD
polylines. They are created and edited
in 2D (floor plan view) like polylines, given
pitch and elevation information, and then
modeled in 3D.
1.
Click the Roof Tools

parent button
then the Roof Plane child tool.
2.
As in the example below, click and drag

a baseline from point 1 to point 2.
3.
Click at point 3 to build the roof plane.

Point 3 defines the upslope direction of
the roof plane.
Line 1 - 2 is the baseline
The Baseline
The baseline displays an upslope tick in the
middle of the line. The upslope tick indicates
the direction that the roof plane slopes up to.
You cannot redefine the direction of the
slope. If the upslope tick is pointing the
wrong direction, delete the roof plane and
draw another.
The baseline can be used by the program as
the pivot point for the roof plane. In a cross
section, the baseline is the point where the
outside main layer surface of the wall would
295
Roofs
To draw a roof plane
extend upward to intersect the top of the roof

framing member.
When drawing the baseline of a roof plane,

here are some things to consider:
A baseline does not have to be drawn

over a wall, although it often is.
The roof plane overhangs in the downslope direction from the baseline.
A baseline drawn along a wall should be

drawn over the outer edge of the walls
main layer. It will try to snap to that.
The height of a baseline is determined by

the following formula:
Height of baseline = elevation top plate +
the vertical depth of the rafter - the vertical depth of the rafters birdsmouth cut.
The elevation of the top plate is defined

by the ceiling height in the room.
If a baseline is drawn over the top of any

other roof plane, the baseline height
equals the height of the existing roof
plane at the point where you started
drawing.
Curved Roof Planes

view and a cross section/elevation view
may be helpful.
Any roof plane can be turned into a curved

roof plane in the Roof Plane
One way to produce a barrel roof is using a
single roof plane that starts out flat (zero
pitch) and covers the entire building.
Curving a Single Roof Plane

To curve a roof plane
1.
296
Draw a simple four wall structure 18' x

24', set three of the walls as High/Shed
Gable walls on the Roof tab of the Wall
Specification dialog and automatically generate a roof. The initial pitch
does not matter. Tiling the floor plan
4 in 12 pitch Shed roof
2.
Select the roof plane in floor plan view

and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Roof Plane
Specification dialog for that roof
plane.
3.
Change the Pitch from 4 in 12 to 0 in 12

to flatten the roof.
Curved Roof Planes
Open the Roof Plane Specification

dialog and check Curved Roof. Notice
that the angle values are currently at
zero.
5.
Change the Angle at eave from zero to

15 and press the Tab key. Notice that the
other values update. All three values are
interrelated and dynamic. Changing one
will change the others. In order to maintain the underlying 0 in 12 pitch (the
chord of the curved roof), the other end
of the roof plane must compensate.
6.
Change the Angle at Ridge from -15

degrees to -45 degrees.
7.
Change the Radius to roof surface to a

smaller number, try 50.
A radius of 50 could not have been achieved

unless the walls were closer together. The
curved roof plane accepts the minimum
radius, which is 116.5.
Curving Two Roof Planes

You can also create a barrell roof is using
two roof planes instead fo one. Well use the
same basic 24' x 18' plan we used before,
designate the two opposite walls as gable
walls, and generate a gable with a 12 in 12
(45 degree) pitch. The 12 in 12 pitch often
297
Roofs
4.
underlies curved roofs because it allows the

curved roof to be nearly vertical at the eave
and nearly flat at its peak.
To curve two roof planes
1.

24', set the two end walls as Gable
Walls, and automatically generate a roof
at a 12 in 12 pitch.
4.
In floor plan view, select both roof

planes and click the Open Object
2.
Select one of the roof planes in floor

plan view and click the Open Object
5.
Set the Angle at ridge to 0 and click

OK.

Specification dialog for that roof
plane.
3.
298
Check Curved Roof and notice that the

values are the same. Change the Angle
at ridge from 45 to 0. This will make the
roof plane nearly flat at the ridge. The
eave edge will have to compensate to
maintain the 12 in 12 pitch.
Similar results can be achieved using two

roof planes instead of one. Because the
curvature can be set independently for each
roof plane, using two roof planes allows for
more variation.
Curved Roof Planes
Compound Curved
Roof Planes
Compound roof planes consisting of two or
more roof planes that merge together can be
defined using curved roofs. To illustrate this,
well produce a flared "Thai" style roof eave
that is almost flat at the eave edge and
merges into an 8 in 12 pitch roof.
To create a compound curved roof
2.

24', set the two end walls as Gable
Walls, and automatically generate a roof
at a 4 in 12 pitch.
Select both roof planes in floor plan

view and check Curved Roof in the
Roof Plane Specification dialog.
Set the Angle at Ridge to 33.6901,
which is the same as 8 in 12. Notice that
the Angle at Eave is almost flat.
To create the high roof plane, use the

Roof Plane
tool and draw the baseline of the roof plane along the top, or
ridge edge of the curved roof plane in
floor plan view. The bottom edge of the
new roof plane will snap to the top of the
curved plane.
Turn on Display Temporary Dimensions

, select one of the roof planes
in floor plan view at its ridge edge and
pull it back so that it is 4 feet from the
wall. Do the same to the other roof
plane.
3.
4.
5.
Select the two new roof planes, open

them for specification and change their
pitch to 33.6901. Viewed in 3D the
planes appear to join together into one.
Roofs
1.
Upper roof planes with pitch set (using

degrees) to match the ridge edge pitch
of the lower curved roof planes
299
Dormers
Dormers can be drawn manually or placed
automatically using the Auto Dormer tools.
Manually Drawn Dormers

Once you are familiar with Chief Architects
roof tools, drawing dormers manually can be
quite simple. There are several different
ways to draw dormers: some methods work
better in certain applications. There are a
variety of resources available at www.chiefarchitect.com with information about
drawing dormers manually. There are a few
things to keep in mind.
Walls extend upward until they meet an

overlying roof plane.
A wall can also be cut by underlying roof

planes if Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom is
checked on the Roof tab of the Wall
Specification dialog. For this to work
properly, the edge of the roof plane must
extend completely through width of the
wall.
Polylines can be converted into a Hole in

Roof/Ceiling which allows walls to
extend above or below the roof line.
Auto Floating Dormer

Click the Auto Floating Dormer child
button then click on the roof plane
where you want the center of the dormer's
front wall to appear.
All the walls of a floating dormer are cut off
at their bottom by the underlying roof plane.
To produce such a dormer manually you
would check Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom for
the dormer walls on the Roof tab of the Wall
300
Specification dialog. A floating dormer is
really a complex skylight, since it sits atop a

hole in the roof just as a skylight does.
Usually no room is defined by the walls of
this type of dormer. The pictures below show
both the outside and inside of a typical
floating dormer.
A floating dormer can be placed in floor plan

view on the same floor on which it sits, or it
can be placed on the floor above. Which
floor it should be on does not depend on
which floor the underlying roof plane is on,
but you must always click within this roof
plane in floor plan view to create the dormer.
Normally it does not matter which floor the
dormer is on, but it may need to be on a
certain floor so that the dormer walls do not
interfere with walls or railings in the room
below it. To do this it may help to display the
underlying roof plane on the appropriate
floor using the Roof Plane Specification
Dormers
If the dormer is defined on the floor above

and the room below has a flat ceiling, then
defining a room, which will automatically be
Open Below, causes a hole to be produced in
the ceiling under the dormer.
If you are creating a (non-floating) auto

dormer, a kneewall must already exist.
The dormer side walls will run back to
the kneewall and the kneewall will be
broken where the dormer walls meet it.
The kneewall does not have to be designated as such on the Roof tab of the Wall
Specification dialog unless an automatic roof is being generated.
A non-floating dormer must always be

created on the same floor as the kneewalls. It may help to display the underlying roof plane on another floor to do this.
Auto Dormer
Click the Auto Dormer child button
then click on the roof plane where you
want the center of the dormer's front wall to
be.
The walls of an auto dormer go to the floor
and meet with a kneewall on either side on
the back of the dormer. This kneewall must
run parallel to the underlying roof plane.
Dormer Defaults
The width, height and other parameters for
new dormers can be set in the Dormer
Defaults dialog, accessed by double
clicking either of the Auto Dormer buttons or
via the Default Settings dialog. See
Dormer Defaults on page 334.
Editing Dormers
Auto dormers are like other objects in Chief
Architect. They can be selected and edited in
a variety of ways. See Editing Auto
Dormers on page 310.
Roofs
The roof over an auto dormer can be a Hip,
Gable, Shed, Gambrel, Mansard or Barrel.
See Dormer Specification Dialog on page
331.
301
Roofs
dialog. See Roof Plane Specification

Dialog on page 326.
Roof Returns
A roof return is a small decorative roof plane
that connects to the low side of a gable roof
overhang and extends below the upper
triangular portion of the gable wall. The
pictures below show examples of the three
styles of roof returns that can be produced
automatically.
Gable
Hip
The first two are called Gable and Hip

returns, since the return itself ends in a gable
or a hip. The third is called a Full return
because it extends under the entire gable,
connecting both sides.
It is not difficult to manually draw roof
returns using small roof planes; but it is
much quicker to produce them automatically.
The Roof tab of the Wall Specification
dialog contains the settings that generate auto
roof returns. The wall type for which auto
return information is entered is the gable
wall, which is specified on the Roof tab of
the Wall Specification dialog only if roofs
are automatically generated. See Roof Tab
on page 170.
These roof return settings are also found in
the Dormer Specification dialog for
gable roof dormers and function similarly.
See General Tab on page 332.
Full
Displaying Roof Planes

Following is a portion of a hip roof shown in
floor plan view:
302
the overhang. It is defined in the Build

Roof dialog.
3 The baseline of the roof plane is located
over the outer main layer of the wall.

Typically the line is displayed as green.
When you automatically generate roofs, the

program constructs the baselines.
2
3
4
The baseline is defined as the line across the

top of the rafters, directly above a walls
outside main layer. It can be used as pivot for
the roof plane as you alter the pitch.
4 This is the upslope mark. It marks the
1 The eave is represented by a dashed

line.
The distance from the walls outer main

layer to the end of the roof framing is
up direction for this roof plane. The

angle of the slope is controlled by the pitch
defined in the Build Roof dialog.
5 Roof planes are drawn on their own
layer in the Layer Display Options

dialog. Each roof plane is a closed polyline.

Select any roof plane or group of roof planes.
Press the Del key or click the Delete
button to delete it from the plan.
edit
press the
button.
Del
key or click the Delete
Roofs
A group of roof planes may be deleted

simultaneously by group selecting them
(select the first roof plane, then hold the Shift
key down while clicking additional planes
and adding them to the selection set) then
edit
The Delete Objects dialog allows

you to delete all roof planes at once.
See Delete Objects on page 821.
303
Editing Roof Planes

Using the Edit Handles
When the roof plan is correct, roof

planes can be locked to prevent accidental changes. The Build Roof dialog has a
Lock Roof Planes check box to prevent accidental rebuilding. You can also protect roof
planes from accidental changes in floor plan
view by locking the Roof Planes layer (CAD
layer 10).
The shape of a roof plane can be edited in

floor plan view with the mouse in the same
way that a CAD polyline is edited. See
Polyline Specification Dialog on page 741.
Roof planes are drawn and edited in 2D. The
Roof Plane Specification dialog defines
the 3D orientation of a roof plane.
There are three height values and one pitch
value that define the 3D orientation of the
roof plane. Ridge/Top, Baseline, and Fascia
Top can have their height specified or can be
used as a pivot point. Pitch determines the
slope of the roof plane.
Draw a roof plane like the one below and

select it by clicking on edge BD.
304
D
E
A single selected roof plane displays six edit

handles.These can be used to reshape it.
When you select an edge, certain capabilities
and restrictions are applied to each edit
handle.
The midpoint of the selected edge has an

edit handle. Click this handle and drag to
move the edge parallel to itself, adjacent
edges will extend or contract.
At the center of the roof plane is a square

edit handle. This can be used to move the
entire roof section to a new location.
Move the section with caution, it can be
difficult to return to its original location.
Only the center edit handle and the rotate

edit handle (E) can cause the roof plane
to be moved out of its original plane.
Each of the corners has an edit handle.

Dragging from a corner handle has different results depending on which edge was
selected.
When an edge of a roof plane is selected,

handles appear at each of the roof planes
corners. You may drag from any of these
handles to move the roof planes corner
with some restrictions.
To access the Roof Plane Specification

dialog, select a roof plane or planes and click
the Open Object
edit button. See Roof
Plane Specification Dialog on page 326.
Editing Roof Planes
These corners only

move in line
B Midpoint
edit
handle
These
corners
move
freely
Edge BD is the selected edge
2.
Click the Break Line

edit button,
then click on one edge of the roof plane.
A new diamond handle appears in the
location of the new break.
3.
Drag any handle to change the shape.
4.
Release the mouse button. The roof

plane has five sides.
The selected edge, in this case BD, is the

only edge with a handle at its midpoint.
Drag the midpoint edit handle and the

selected edge will move parallel to itself.
The two adjacent edges do not move

except to extend or contract. They may
diverge or converge if they are not parallel.
Adding an Edge
To add an edge to a roof plane use the Break
Line
edit button, which appears when
you have selected a roof edge. You can use
this tool to divide the edge of a rectangular
roof plane into two edges.
1.
Roofs
To add an edge to a roof plane

Select the roof plane.
305
To remove a roof edge on one of its

ends, grab the edit handle that appears
at that end and drag it to the edit handle at
the other end. Release the mouse button to
delete the edge.
Adding a Step to an Edge

You can make a step, or jog, in the edge of a
roof plane by selecting it, double-clicking the
Break Line
edit button and then clicking
on the roof edge. The edge will be broken
into two, and edit handles will appear in the
center of these edges, on either side of the
break. Drag from one of the edit handles and
the edge will move perpendicular to itself
while remaining parallel to its original
position. Another edge will form, connecting
the moved edge with the one on the other
side that does not move.
join roof planes that are parallel to each

other, even if they are in the same plane.
Select the first roof plane on the desired
edge, click the Join Roof Planes
edit
button, then select the second roof plane on
its desired edge. The two planes stretch to
meet at a ridge, hip or valley.
If the roof planes are not close enough, or
their shape is not correct, they may need to
be edited so each has an edge which is
expected to join to the other.
When roof planes adjust, the program joins
the planes at the proper location and the
adjacent edges will extend or contract to
remain connected. If the joining of the two
will completely eliminate or reverse an
adjacent edge, the connection cannot be
made. A message displays, informing you of
the problem.
Aligning Roof Edges

If opposite sides of a roof section are
parallel, selecting one edge automatically gives you a dimension line. If you do not
see that dimension line, the sides are not parallel.
After moving a corner handle, it can be

difficult to make an edge parallel to an eave
or a wall.
Joining Roof Planes

Two roof planes can be joined at
adjacent edges using the Join Roof
Planes edit button. To use this tool you must
first be able to identify which edges of the
roof planes can be extended to meet at a
ridge, hip, or valley. The program does not
306
To make the roof plane parallel

1.
Select the edge that is out of alignment.

Where you click to select an edge
determines which end of the roof edge is
fixed and which one moves.
2.
Click the Make Parallel
edit button.
Editing Roof Planes
Click on a line or wall edge to which the

selected edge should be parallel or perpendicular.
Note: The roof plane edge or CAD line that is

being adjusted must be within twenty degrees
parallel or perpendicular to the second line or
wall edge specified for the Make Parallel
edit button to function properly. The roof
plane edge can be moved close by eye and
then made exact with this tool.
Sometimes breaks in roof edges occur, which

can create problems when trying to align
them with other planes. What appears to be a
single straight edge may actually be broken
into two or more edges, a condition which
can be verified by the number of edit handles
that display when a roof plane is selected.
These breaks can be removed manually by
dragging an unneeded edit handle into an
adjacent edit handle, or the Fix Roofs
child button can be used. See Fix Roofs on
page 288.
Move to be Coplanar
The Move to be Coplanar edit button
allows you to move the selected roof
plane to be coplanar (in the same plane) with
the next selected roof plane. The results can
be easily seen in a cross section view.
Raising/Lowering
Roof Planes
Select a roof plane or group of roof planes
and click the Transform/Replicate Object
edit button to open the Transform/
Replicate Object dialog. In this dialog
you can raise or lower the selected roof
plane(s) and perform a variety of other
functions. See Transform/Replicate Object

on page 793.
Change Roof Pitch

or Height Dialog
1
2
4
5
3
This warning dialog appears when you

attempt to snap the corner or an edge of a
roof plane near the edge of another roof
plane which does not match vertically. The
Change Roof Pitch or Height dialog
gives you the option to move the roof plane
vertically, pivot it about a point and change
the pitch, or do nothing at all.
In this case, the current roof plane would
have to raise its pitch or height in order to
meet the second roof plane at the corner that
you moved.
1 The amount of vertical displacement
between the two roof planes displays.
2 Pivot Roof Plane About - Select which
part of the roof plane to use as pivot

point when pitch is adjusted to meet the other
roof plane.
3 Raise/lower (no pivot) - Select this
option to maintain the current pitch and

raise or lower the entire plane to connect the
307
Roofs
3.
roofs. This may affect plate heights of the

walls below.
4 Click Yes to make the selected change
so the roofs meet. The roof plane either

changes the pitch or is raised or lowered.
5 Click NO to leave the roof plane
unchanged. The roof planes will not

meet vertically. You should usually choose
no unless you have a specific reason to adjust
the roof plane this way.
To prevent this dialog from displaying, check
Dont show again during this session. The
dialog will not appear again until you have
terminated and restarted the program.
Changing the
Baseline Angle
A roof plane baseline can be selected like
any line and edited. If the baseline coincides
with a roof edge then select that roof edge
and hit the Tab key to select the baseline. The
status bar will tell you when the roof plane
baseline is selected.
If the roof plane baseline is moved in floor
plan view, its height will not change. Moving
a roof plane baseline up its roof plane toward
the ridge will lower the roof plane.
The baseline angle can be set in the Roof
Plane Specification dialog. See Roof
Plane Specification Dialog on page 326.

Curved roof planes can be joined with
flat roof planes and other curved roof
planes using the Join Roof Planes edit
button.
Often it is not necessary to join curved roof
planes if the underlying normal planes were
already joined. A simple four wall
rectangular house is a good example. On a
default hip roof, all flat roof planes are
correctly joined at hip ridges. Group select
all four planes and curve them by the same
amount. Since the distance from the eave to
the ridge and the pitch is the same for all
planes, the newly curved planes still join to
each other in 3D.
If one of the planes, say a triangular end

plane, is curved differently from the others or
308
To join curved and flat roof planes

1.
Select one of the roof plane edges to be

joined.
edges join into a curve, showing where

the curved and flat roof planes must
meet.
This is called the curved join edge for each

roof plane. Notice that a flat roof plane can
have a curved join edge if it is joined to a
curved roof plane.
Curved Join Edges

A roof plane with one or more curved join
edges is less editable than is one without.
The curved edges and corners adjacent to
them can be selected, but not moved. If an
edge adjacent to a curved join edge is moved,
the curved join edge should extend or
contract appropriately to maintain the corner.
2.
Click the Join Roof Planes

edit button and click on the joining edge of an
adjacent roof plane. The roof plane
309
Roofs
is flat, it will no longer join with the other

planes in 3D, although it may appear to in
floor plan view. This can be easily seen if
one of the four roof planes remains flat.
To remove a curved join edge

1.
Select the curved join edge.
2.
Click Join Roof Planes
3.
Click anywhere in the plan, away from

any roof plane. The curved edge will
return to being straight, and will be
selectable and editable.
If you need to extensively edit or reshape the

roof plane, it is best to remove the curved
join edges and edit the roof plane. After that
the curved join edges can be reestablished.
The Join Roof Planes
tool can be used
to update curved join edges that have been
changed in some way.
Editing Auto Dormers

Auto dormers are a collection of objects that
behave as one. When a dormer is selected it
displays edit handles that allow it to be
resized and relocated. The dormer also
displays a unique edit button that allows the
dormers components to be edited.
310
Using the Mouse

When selected an auto dormer displays three
edit handles. The move handle displays a
four-headed arrow and allows you to relocate
the dormer. Two resize handles display on
the dormer walls that allow you to change the
width of the dormer.
Move
Resize
There are some things to keep in mind when

editing auto dormers and auto floating
dormers using the mouse.
Dormers move at 90 degree angles unless

the Ctrl key is pressed before moving
them.
The dormer must be contained within one

underlying roof plane.
Auto dormers cannot be moved beyond

the required knee wall.
Editing the Window

Unless the dormer's window has been edited
or changed in the Window Specification
dialog, when the dormer width is changed, its

width changes automatically to fill the
dormer front wall. If the window has been
edited, its width stays fixed. If a change to
the dormer makes its front wall too short to
hold the window, the window reverts to auto
width.
Using the Dormer

Auto dormers can be selected, opened for
specification, and edited. See Dormer
Exploding Dormers
When an auto dormer is selected, the
Explode Auto Dormer edit button
displays. Click this button to explode the
auto dormer into its component parts. The
dormer walls, roof planes, window, and hole
in the roof/ceiling can all be edited
separately.
the Join Roof Planes

edit button is
normally used to move edges to make the
planes meet, these edges can also be moved
by an alternate process that places snap
points where the ridge, hip or valley is to be.
Once you know where the planes will meet,
you can drag edges or corners to those
points, joining the roof planes.
To find a roof plane intersection

1.
Select the roof plane upon which you

would like to place meeting points.
2.
Click on the edge of another roof plane

to project its edge forward in space and
place an X where it would meet the
selected roof plane.
3.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the ridge edge

and both fascia edges. When done, you
should have three points located on the
larger roof plane, the tie-in points.
311
Roofs
When roof planes of differing slopes

meet,they create a ridge, hip, or valley. While
roof plane
intersections
marked with
an X
Ceiling Planes
Ceiling planes are a lot like roof planes. They
are drawn the same way and can be edited
using the same tools. They are useful for
creating custom sloped ceilings.
To draw a ceiling plane
1.
Open the Build Roof dialog and reset

the Pitch using a shallower angle. A
newly drawn ceiling plane will take its
initial pitch from this number, just as a
roof plane does.
2.
Click the Ceiling Plane

ton.
3.
Click and drag along the baseline.
4.
Click upslope to place the ceiling plane.
Ceiling planes
child but-
Cross Section showing ceiling planes.
There are a few things to remember when

drawing ceiling planes.
312
The baseline of a ceiling plane should be

drawn along and directly on top of the
Gable/Roof Line
outer surface of the walls main layer.

This allows the ceiling plane to extend
over and be supported by the wall.
Ceiling planes can be curved, just like

roof planes. See Curved Roof Planes
on page 296.
The sloping edge at the side of a ceiling

plane should butt to the inside of the wall.
Select a ceiling plane and click the Open
Ceiling planes act independent of the roof

planes above.
Normally a ceiling planes pitch should

be less than that of the corresponding
roof plane.
Ceiling planes can be joined together

using the Join Roof Planes
ton.
edit but-
Ceiling planes should be created over

rooms that have Ceiling Over this Room
unchecked in the Room Specification
dialog. if this is unchecked, ceiling planes
must be present in order to build roof
trusses in this area.
Object
edit button to access the
Ceiling Plane Specification dialog.
See Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog

on page 330.
Displaying Ceiling Planes

Ceiling planes have their own layer in the
Layer Display Options dialog. The
display settings for ceiling planes can be set
here by layer. The ceiling planes layer can
also be locked to prevent editing. See
Deleting Ceiling Planes

Select Build> Roof> Delete Ceiling Planes
to delete all ceiling planes in the current plan.
Gable/Roof Line
Creating Gable Walls

and Gable Dormers
If an entire wall supports a gable end, the
wall should be defined as a Full Gable wall
on the Roof tab of the Wall Specification
dialog. If only a portion of the wall is a gable,
then the Gable/Roof Line
tool should be
used to draw a line that defines the width of

the gable.
Note: You can break a wall and define only
part of it as gable. This will produce similar
results as using the Gable/Roof Line tool. If
this method is used, once the roof is correct
and locked, the wall should be restored as
one continuous wall. Chief Architect functions
better if long walls are single units instead of
broken into multiple components.
The Gable/Roof Line

tool can also be
used to place a small gable within a roof
plane, as in the case of a dormer. This
process is automated using the Gable Over
313
Roofs
The Gable/Roof Line tool has a

variety of uses. Its primary purpose is
to mark the location of a partial gable
condition along a wall. It can also be used to
ignore alcoves when automatically
generating roofs.
Door/Window
edit button. See Gable
Over Door/Window on page 318.
Gable lines should be outside the wall,
within the first 18" (450 mm). If the gable
line is placed on the wall it will not work.
Position a gable line of the correct length to
represent the portion of wall above which
supports a gable roof. The gable lines length
determines the gables width at the walls
main layer, not at the overhang. A gable roof
will be wider than the gable line by twice the
overhang distance.
Since the gable line is a CAD line, it can be
selected and modified using the Line
Specification dialog. Length and position
can be specified with dimensions typed in
this dialog.
Gable line should be drawn over

existing exterior walls, snapping its
ends to the walls main layer. It can
then be moved so that the roofs on
each side match.
partial gable wall

gable dormers
Before, with default roof generation
314
Gable/roof lines drawn to create

gable wall and gable dormers
Gable/Roof Line
Result, after automatic roof generation
A gable line can also be used to maintain a

roof plane baseline where there is no wall
below. For example, a house may have a
large alcove and you want the roof plane to
extend across the alcove, rather than wrap
into it. A gable line drawn across the alcove
causes roof planes to span across the alcove
when roofs are automatically generated. The
program models a hip in that area. When
extending roof planes across alcoves, the
gable/roof line must be drawn inline with the
walls main layer.
Roofs
Covering Alcoves
Gable/roof lines drawn to extend roof planes
315
Multiple Copy
The Multiple Copy
wall at the main layer for them to produce

roof planes.
and Transform/
Replicate Object
edit buttons allow you
to make multiple copies of a selected gable
line at defined increments, as shown in the
following illustration. The leftmost gable
line was created, then 3 copies were made at
8 foot increments.
original
copies
Creating Roof Lines

The Gable/Roof Line
tool can also be
used to create roof lines where there are not
walls or railings. A roof line is created the
same as a gable line, but has a different name
because of its usage. A roof line drawn
across space generates a hip roof. If several
roof lines are combined, they must be
attached to each other forming a non closed
polyline in order to automatically produce
one set of roof plane baselines. Both free
ends of the roof line or polyline must meet a
316
With roof lines added
Skylights
Skylights
A skylight can be created by clicking
the Skylight child button and drawing
a rectangular polyline within a single roof
plane. Placing a skylight does three things. A
flat panel skylight is placed into a roof hole,
a hole is produced in the flat ceiling platform
below, and the skylight shaft between these
two holes is automatically produced.
Note: If Ceiling Over This Room is
unchecked in the Room Specification
dialog and a sloping ceiling plane is present
under the roof plane, then a second hole in
this ceiling plane is automatically produced.
This hole is visible, and may be located
directly under the roof hole. It can be moved
and edited separately.
Hole/Skylight Specification dialog. See

on page 334.
The polyline that defines the shape of the

skylight can be moved and reshaped like a
standard polyline, but it must remain
contained by one roof plane. If you clear the
Skylight check box in the Roof Hole/
Skylight Specification dialog, the curb
and glass for the skylight will be removed
and the opening will remain.
By default the flat ceiling hole does not
display separately, it can however be
displayed and edited separately, and even
deleted from the roof plane entirely. See
on page 334. If the roof plane is deleted, any
holes it contains will also be deleted.
The system maintains the opening as a closed
Roofs
polyline. The Break Line

edit button
will form a joint in an edge of the roof
opening just as it would in a roof plane edge,
but will not sever the edges at the joint.
Editing Skylights
Select the skylight and click the Open
Object
edit button to open the Roof
317
Gutters
Gutters can be added to roof planes. They are
generated whenever Build Fascia, Gutters,
Frieze is checked in the Build Roof dialog
and roofs are automatically regenerated.
Gutters go on the "Roofs, Gutters" layer

which is locked and not visible by default.
See Layer Display Options Dialog on page
119.
You can select the profile to be used for

gutters on the Gutter tab of the Build Roof
dialog. See Gutter Tab on page 324. Open
polylines should be used for gutter profiles.
The start of the profile should be where the
gutter connects to the roof.
The material used for gutters can be set on
the Material tab of the Build Roof dialog.
See Materials Tab on page 325.

If a window or an exterior door is
selected, the Gable Over Door/
Window edit button displays. Click this to
add a gable line over the selected window or
door. The Gable/Roof line will appear in
floor plan view, about 12 inches (300 mm)
from the wall and extending a foot to either
side of the opening. This gable line produces
a gable when roofs are automatically
generated.
When automatic roofs are built, a small gable
dormer will appear over the window or door.
Once produced, the gable line can be moved,
stretched, and edited.
The Gable Over Door/Window
edit
button will also place a gable over a group of
selected windows and doors, provided they
are all in the same wall and contain no bay or
bow windows. For more information on
318
building roofs over Bay, Bow, and Box

windows, see Bay, Box, Bow Windows &
Roofs on page 247.
To remove the gable line, select the window

or door and click the Delete Gable Over
A gable line will produce a gable only in an

area where an eave would otherwise appear.
Do not add this gable line to a wall already
designated as a Gable Wall on the Roof tab
of the Wall Specification dialog. If a
gable is already present then the error
message Cannot produce a roof section
may appear when you try to automatically
generate roofs and some roof planes may fail
to produce properly. If this is the case, select
the gable line and delete it.
line and click the Delete
Opening
edit button or select the gable

edit button.
If you move or resize the window, the gable

line will not update automatically. A new
gable line can be produced by using the
edit button.
This will automatically delete the old gable
line if it is still near the window. If the
window has been relocated significantly, the
old gable line must be selected and deleted
manually.

Floor and ceiling platforms do not move or
resize immediately when walls are moved or
room floor and ceiling heights are changed.
When you make a change to your plan that
would require the floors and ceilings to be
rebuilt, the system will detect it. The next
time you display a 3D or section/elevation
view, floors and ceilings will be rebuilt.
If you do not want the program to rebuild

floors and ceilings automatically, clear the
Auto Rebuild Floors & Ceilings check box
on the Include tab of the 3D Settings
dialog. When you want to rebuild floor and
ceiling platforms, you can click the Rebuild
Walls/Floors/Ceilings
the F12 key.
button or press
Build Roof Dialog

Roofs
To open the Build Roof dialog double-click

the Roof Tools
parent button, or select
Build> Roof> Build Roof from the menu.
The Build Roof dialog is used to
automatically produce roof planes and roof
plane baselines. It also contains some initial
settings for manually drawn roof planes.
319
Build Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
11
13
7
8
1 Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings -
Check this to construct the floor and

ceiling platforms of your model. It is
independent of Build Roof Planes.
2 Build Roof Planes - Check this to

model a new roof structure over the
entire model. Unless you specify otherwise,
the existing roof planes are discarded and
new roof planes are produced.
3 Make Roof Baseline Polylines - Check
this to delete any existing roof and to

create roof plane baselines (based on the
exterior wall layout and roof information
defined in those walls). Roof baselines can
then be edited to customize the roof plan in
the same way that CAD polylines are. See
Roof Baseline Polylines on page 293.
4 Use Existing Roof Baselines - Check
this to produce a roof plan based on

your edited roof plane baselines instead of
320
15
10
12
14
16
the exterior wall layout. See Roof Baseline

5 Build Fascia, Gutters, Frieze - Check
this to regenerate fascia, gutters, and

frieze boards. This option also controls the
generation of automatic roof returns. Often
you need to select only this option to clean
up roof planes that have been edited. This
function is automatically invoked after you
manually edit roof planes or draw new roof
planes if Auto Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings is checked on the Options tab of the 3D
Settings dialog.
Gutters, fascia, and frieze boards display in
3D views and also appear in the material list.
If you do not want gutters built, open the
Build Roof dialog, select Build Fascia,
Gutters, Frieze and then uncheck Gutters
on the Options tab. The fascia and frieze will
be rebuilt, but not the gutters. Any existing
gutters are deleted.
Build Roof Dialog
To delete a gutter for a specific roof plane,

select the roof plane. Click the Open Object
have changed, or other changes are made

which affect the generation of roofs.
edit button to display the Roof Plane

Specification dialog. Clear Gutters and
10 Lock Roof Planes to lock the existing
The next time Build Fascia, Gutters, Frieze

is selected, the gutter does not appear. If you
delete a roof plane, the gutter remains in 3D
views until you rebuild fascia planes.
6 Allow Low Roof Planes - In rare cases
a roofs exterior underside surface will

appear inside the building instead of the
appropriate interior sloped ceiling.. Check
this box to fix this.
7 Pitch - Enter a value to describe the
pitch in a ratio over 12. This affects all

newly built roof planes. It does not update
existing roof planes. For a conversion to
degrees, see Roof Pitches in Degrees on
page 336.
8 Roof Overhang - The overhang is
measured from the exterior main layer

surface horizontally to the end of the top of
the rafter. It does not include fascia
thickness, gutters, sheathing or siding.
Normal is the overhang at the eaves. This
will always be the overhang for a roof plane
having the default Pitch specified above. If
the pitch for a particular roof plane is set
differently in an exterior wall, its overhang
may try to maintain its fascia at the same
height. Overhang can become greater for a
shallower pitch, lesser for a greater pitch.
Gable is the overhang dimension at gable
ends or rake walls.
9 Auto Rebuild Roofs - Check this and
the roof will automatically rebuild if an

exterior wall is moved, room ceiling heights
roof plan. This prevents accidentally

selecting Build Roof Planes and having the
roof rebuilt, resulting in the loss of manual
editing.
When Lock Roof Planes is selected,
selecting Build Roof Planes results in an
error message warning that roofs are locked.
You must clear Lock Roof Planes before
you can select Build Roof Planes.
To prevent the accidental deletion or moving
of roof planes in a floor plan view or 3D
view, checking Lock Roof Planes
automatically locks the roof planes layer in
11 Check Retain Manually Drawn Roof
Planes and/or Retain Edited Roof

Planes to retain manually drawn and/or
edited roof planes when the roof planes are
automatically generated. They will not be
deleted, but automatic roof planes can be
superimposed in the same area. You must
select the redundant roof planes and delete
them.
Once a roof is correct, do not build roof

planes again. From that point forward,
only Build Walls/Floors/Ceilings, and perhaps Fascia, Gutters, Frieze to keep the
plan updated.
12 Ignore Top Floor - Check this to
ignore the top floor when roofs are

automatically generated. Roofs will be
generated as if the floor is not there, and is
instead an attic having no permanent walls.
This is most useful in producing a roof for a
321
Roofs
click OK.
house which has only dormers for its top

floor windows, such as a cape style house.
13 Check Trusses to have the roof raised
so that the bottom edge of the truss top

chord (rafter) will be flush with the top of the
wall. You must Build Roof Planes after
checking Trusses for this change to take
effect.
Incorrect--Trusses
is not checked.
Correct--Trusses
is checked.
When Trusses is checked, the size of the roof

rafter framing is the Top Chord size from
the Trusses tab in the Framing dialog.
When Trusses is cleared, the size of the roof
framing is the Rafter size from the Roof tab
the Framing dialog. If trusses are laid out
without selecting the Trusses box, the roof
will use the rafter size instead. The
Incorrect diagram displays this problem.
14 Raise Off Plate -Enter a positive value
in this field to produce the trusses with

an energy heel to allow for more insulation.
The dimension is measured from the top
322
plate, up the outside main layer of the wall,

to the bottom side of the top chord.
.
Note: If trusses is not checked, and Raise Off

Plate is set to zero, the program generates a
birdsmouth cut. To eliminate the birdsmouth
cut, you must set Raise Off Plate to at least 1/
16 (1 mm).
15 Segment Angle at Curved Wall -
Enter the maximum angle for a roof

segment which covers a curved wall. This is
used only when roofs are automatically
generated.
16 Min. Alcove - Specify the minimum
width of an alcove (depression into an

otherwise straight exterior wall). Any alcove
less than the specified width is treated as
though the exterior wall continues straight
across. Alcoves that measure wider than this
value are not roofed over. They cause a
change in roof planes.
Following is an example showing this
difference. If Min Alcove is 36", a 36" deep
alcove requires a change in the roof line.
Each wall of the alcove has an eave. On the
right, the alcove is less than the 36"
minimum, so the roof passes right over it.
Build Roof Dialog
Options Tab
3
4
to display a line along all ridges and

valleys in elevations and 3D views. This
includes the hip ridges between roof planes
forming the conical roof above a curved
wall.
2 Boxed eaves - Select the check box if
you want the program to produce

horizontal soffits at the eaves. This change
appears only after you have rebuilt roofs.
You can instead change this for an individual
roof plane in the Roof Plane
define the width of the material that appears

in 3D views. This value does not go to the
Material List.
5 This section defines whether or not
these items are calculated for the

material list. Selecting the check box does
not control the display in 3D except for Gutters.
Roofs
1 Show all ridges - Select the check box
3 Square Cut or Plumb Cut - Select
either option to determine how the

rafter tails are cut. This change appears only
after you have rebuilt roofs. Individual roof
planes can have this defined in their own
Roof Plane Specification dialog.
4 Fascia Width (at gable or rake walls),

Eave Fascia Width - Enter values to
323
Gutter Tab
1
2
1 Click the Select button to open the
Library Browser to the Moldings and

Profiles library and select a gutter profile.
Click Default to use the default gutter
profile.
324
2 Set the Height, Width, and Offset for

the gutter.
Select From Top or From Bottom to specify

whether the Offset is measured from the top
or bottom of the gutter profile. See
Moldings Tab on page 452.
Frieze Tab
1
2
3
the moldings being used in the current
plan.
2 Click the Add New button to select a
new molding profile from the Library

Browser.
Click the Select button to replace the current
molding with another molding from the
Library Browser.
Click the Delete button to remove the curent
molding.
3 The current molding profile displays
here. Set the Height, Width, and

Offset for the frieze molding.
Select From Top or From Bottom to specify

whether the Offset is measured from the top
or bottom of the frieze profile. See
Moldings Tab on page 452
Materials Tab

Like walls, each line of a roof plane baseline
polyline contains roof generation information. You can select any of these lines and
open the Roof Baseline Specification
dialog.
325
Roofs
1 Click the drop-down list to select from
Roof Baseline Tab
3
1
2
1 The first four checkboxes, Full Gable
Wall, High Shed/Gable Wall, Knee

Wall, and Extend Slope Downward are the
same as the first four items in the Roof tab of
the Wall Specification dialog.
2 Against Wall - Check this if the roof
plane rising from this baseline will butt

against an exterior wall. This will act similar
to checking High Shed/Gable Wall.
Again, the Pitch, Upper pitch and Starts at
entries are the same as for he Roof tab of the
3 Pitch - Change the pitch for the
selected roof plane baseline. This

overrides the default pitch set in the Build
Roof dialog. For a conversion to degrees,
see Roof Pitches in Degrees on page 336.
4 Baseline height holds the height of the
baseline. This will be the top of rafter

height where it crosses the baseline.
Changing the previous items affects the line
that was selected in the baseline. Changing
the height affects all lines in the baseline
polyline.
The Polyline, Selected Line, Line Style and

Fill Style tabs are the same as for the
Polyline Specification dialog. They
affect how the roof plane baseline polyline
appears and edits in floor plan view.

While default values for all roof planes are
specified in the Build Roof dialog, values
can be specified for each individual roof
326
plane by selecting it and opening the Roof

Plane Specification dialog. Roof planes
can be group selected and edited as well.
This dialog consists of several tabs, but only

the General tab is unique from tabs in other
dialogs. The Polyline, Selected Line, Line
Style and Fill Style tabs affect how the roof

plane baseline polyline appears and edits in
floor plan view.
General Tab
5
6
7
8
9
10
1 Locking any one of the first three
values defines that value as the pivot

point for the plane. Each of these dimensions
Roofs
is measured from the first floor default

elevation of 0' - 0".
327
If you lock the pitch and change one of the

other values, the roof plane moves vertically
keeping the same slope. It will not pivot. For
a conversion to degrees, see Roof Pitches in
Degrees on page 336.
2 There are four values that define the

height, or 3D orientation of a roof
plane: Ridge/Top, Baseline, Fascia Top and
Pitch. These values are related. If one is
changed, the others will change as well,
unless locked.
Changing these values does not affect the 2D
representation of the roof plane. Lock one of
these three values, and change any other and
the roof plane rotates about that point as
shown in the diagram. Lock the Pitch and
change any of the other values to alter the
roof planes height.
Define a new value for the Ridge/Topof the
selected roof plane.
Define a new Baseline height.
Define a new height for the Fascia Top.
Change the Pitch for the selected roof plane.
This overrides the default pitch set in the
Build Roof dialog.
Check Pitch in Degrees to display the pitch
value in this dialog in degrees.
3 Set the baseline angle. A positive value
causes the baseline to tilt upward from

its start point. A negative value causes it to
tilt downward. The wall top under this
baseline will then tilt with it.
328
The baseline height is specified at the start or

end of the baseline using the Start and End
radio buttons. In floor plan view, the baseline
direction is clockwise around the house.
4 Check Curved Roof to curve the

selected roof plane(s).
A flat roof plane oriented horizontally has an

angle of zero at both the ridge and the eave.
It also has a radius of zero when it is flat. You
can enter the Angle at eave, the Angle at
ridge, or the Radius to roof surface and
press the Tab key to update the other values.
All three values are interrelated and
dynamic. Changing one will change the
others. In order to maintain the underlying
pitch (the chord of the curved roof), the other
values must compensate.
5 Specify the rafter tails to be Square
Cut or Plumb Cut here. This overrides

the setting on the Options tab of the Build
Roof dialog.
6 Boxed Eave - Specify boxed or sloping
eaves. This overrides the setting on the

Options tab of the Build Roof dialog.
Higher Eaves Boxed - If the selected roof

plane contains more than one eave, check
this box to box the higher eaves as well. You
can specify the Length of the boxed eaves or
check Default to Overhang to extend the
boxed eave from the edge of the roof to the
exterior main layer of the wall, covering the
overhang area.
Framing dialog. To set the rafter depth to
the default, type a "d" in this field.
With Boxed Eave checked
Birdsmouth Depth - The plumb or vertical

depth of the birdsmouth cut is shown for
reference: it cannot be edited directly. To
change it, move the roof plane some other
way. For example, if you lock the pitch and
raise the roof plane by one inch, you will
decrease the birdsmouth depth by one inch.
Birdsmouth is zero if the Trusses check box
has been selected in the Build Roof dialog.
The Vertical Rafter Depth is defined by
measuring a plumb line across the rafter. The
degree of pitch affects the Vertical rafter
width. The greater the pitch, the greater the
vertical rafter depth.
7 Display this Plane One Floor Up/
Down - Check one of these to change

the floor in which this roof plane displays in
floor plan view.
8 Gutter - Check this to remove gutters

from the selected roof plane.
9 Mark as Edited - When you select a
roof plane and move or reshape it, the

system will mark it as "edited". When you
rebuild roofs from the Build Roof dialog,
check Retain Edited Roof Planes to prevent
these marked planes from being deleted.
Checking Mark as Edited also marks a roof
plane, even if it has not been edited. Edited
planes can also be unmarked.
10 Rafter Depth - Specify the rafter depth
for the selected roof plane. The default

rafter depth for the roof is set in the
Top of Plate is shown for reference. It is

defined by the ceiling height for the room.
Overhang from Baseline is shown for
reference and cannot be edited here.
Polyline Tab
For information about the Polyline tab, see
Polyline Tab on page 741.
Selected Line Tab

For information about the Selected Line tab,
see Selected Line Tab on page 742.
Line Style Tab

Line Style Tab on page 732.
Fill Style Tab

329
Roofs
With Higher Eaves Boxed checked
Materials Tab
Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog

Select a ceiling plane and click the Open
Object
edit button to open the Ceiling
Plane Specification dialog.
General Tab
The Ceiling Plane Specification dialog

is similar to the Roof Plane
1 There are four values that define the
height, or 3D orientation of a ceiling

plane: Bottom at Ridge, Inside Bottom,
Outside Bottom and Pitch. These values are
interrelated. Changing one will chnage the
others. Select one radio button to the right to
330
lock that value. Each of these dimensions is

measured from the first floor elevation of 0' 0". Changing these values does not affect the
2D representation of the ceiling plane.
Bottom at ridge - Set the highest point on
the underside of the ceiling plane.
Inside Bottom - Set the height of the ceiling
plane underside at the inside surface of the
walls main layer. If the bottom of the plane
Outside Bottom - This appears only if the

ceiling plane was drawn over a wall (Its
baseline should be over the outside main
layer surface and floors and ceilings should
have been built at least once). It is the height
the ceiling rafters underside would have at
the walls outer main layer if it were not
clipped. This value plus Clip End should be
the same (within 1/16") as the Top of Plate
value.
Pitch - Change the pitch for the selected
ceiling plane. For a conversion to degrees,
see Roof Pitches in Degrees on page 336.
Pitch in degrees - Select the check box to
display the pitch value in degrees.
2 Check Curved Roof to curve the

selected ceiling plane(s).
A flat ceiling plane oriented horizontally has

an angle of zero at both the ridge and the
eave. It also has a radius of zero when it is
flat. You can enter the Angle at eave, the
Angle at ridge, or the Radius to roof
surface and press the Tab key to update the
other values. All three values are interrelated
and dynamic. Changing one will change the

others.
3 Rafter Depth - Specify the rafter depth

for the selected ceiling plane.
Vertical Rafter Depth - This is defined by

measuring a plumb line across the rafter. The
degree of pitch affects the vertical rafter
width. The greater the pitch, the greater the
vertical rafter depth.
Top of Plate - This is shown for reference. It
is defined by the ceiling height for the room.
Overhang from in. bottom - This appears
only when the ceiling plane was created over
a wall. It is the horizontal distance from the
baseline to the inside main layer surface.
Typically this is the walls main layer
thickness.
Clip End - This displays the amount the
ceiling rafter underside at its lower end must
be clipped to rest on the wall top plate. It
appears only for ceiling planes drawn over a
wall. This is normally equal to the amount of
rise in the slope of the ceiling plane over the
Overhang from in. bottom (wall main layer
thickness), distance, which means that the
bottom edge of the ceiling plane rafter just
reaches the top surface of the walls top plate
at the walls inside main layer surface.
Roofs
does not rest on a wall, this is the underside

height at the lowest point on the ceiling
plane.

Select a dormer and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Dormer
331
General Tab
1
2
3
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 Specify the Roof Type above this
dormer. You can choose from Hip,

Gable, Shed, Gambrel, Mansard, or Barrel.
2 Specify the Pitch of the dormer roof
planes. For Gambrel and Mansard types

it specifies the pitch of the lowest, or eave,
roof planes. Check Pitch in Degrees to
display the pitch in degrees.
3 The Second Pitch specifies the upper
roof of a Gambrel or Mansard type.

Specify the Distance In from the lower roof
plane's eave to its high boundary, where the
upper roof plane starts.
Hip, Gable, Shed, Gambrel, Mansard,
and Barrell dormer roof types
332
4 Plumb or Square cut eaves can be
specified for dormer roof planes, as

well as Gutters and Boxed Eaves.
Check Include Frieze to include frieze

boards on this dormer.
fascia, Eave Fascia Depth and Rafter
Depth can also be set.
6 The Wall Type for the dormer walls is

set here.
7 The Height is measured from where the
underlying roof plane meets the dormer

front walls exterior to where the underside
of the dormer rafter meets the dormer side
walls interior. The shed dormer is the
exception. A shed dormers height is
measured from the same bottom point to
where the underside of the dormer rafter
meets the dormer front walls interior.
Dormer
height
Dashed line indicates
interior dormer side wall.
This top height is called the dormer ceiling

height, even if a flat ceiling is not present in
the dormer. The top dormer window casing is
usually close to this height.
8 Check Set to Existing Ceiling to match
the dormer height to the ceiling of the

room behind the knee wall. This displays for
non-floating auto dormers only. Whether this
is checked or not, Height to Reach Existing
displays the difference between the dormer
height (where the inside of the wall meets the
underside of the roof) and the ceiling of the
room behind it.
Dormer
ceiling
height is
equal to
the ceiling
height of
the room
behind it
9 Width is measured between the outside

surfaces of the dormer side walls.
Form Room Inside Dormer is used only for

floating dormers and normally should be left
unchecked. Checking it allows a flat ceiling
to be defined in the dormer. If checked, the
dormer should be defined on the floor above
the room over which it is positioned.
10 If Set Inside Window Trim Width is
checked, the inside casing width for

dormer windows will default to the Inside
Window value entered below. Dormer
windows can appear too narrow on the
outside due to the space required for the
inside casing to clear the inside surfaces of
its side walls. This value sets the width for
the inside casing of the dormer's window.
Dormer windows can be deleted and

replaced in the normal way. Several windows
can be placed in the front wall if desired.
11 Roof returns can be specified only for a
gable dormer. See Roof Returns on

page 302.
333
Roofs
5 Overhang, Fascia Depth for gable
Dormer Defaults
from
the menu to open the Default Settings
dialog. Select Dormer and click the Edit...
button to open the Dormer Defaults
dialog. You can also double-click either of
the Auto Dormer
The settings in the Dormer Defaults

dialog are the same as those in the Dormer
Specification dialog. They determine the
initial settings for dormers. See Dormer
tools to open the
Dormer Defaults dialog.

General Tab
2 Frame Width and Frame Height -
Define the width and height of the

frame, or curb, of the skylight.
3 Angle for Inside Hole Rim - Defines
1
2
the shape of the skylight well where it

passes through through the roof plane.
Square Sides - The framing for the skylight
is square to the pitch of the roof.
Plumb Sides - The framing for the skylight
is plumb.
Plumb/Square - The bottom edge is plumb,

the top edge is square.
1 Skylight - Check this box to specify
this polyline as a skylight. If you

uncheck this box, the curb and glass for the
skylight will be removed and the opening
will remain.
334
4 Skylight Automatically Generates
Ceiling Hole- Select this option to

automatically generate and maintain the hole
in a flat ceiling for skylights.
Note: Holes automatically produced in a
sloping custom ceiling plane by a new skylight must be manually maintained.
5 Manually Edit Ceiling Hole Polyline -
Select this option if you would like to

edit the flat ceiling hole polyline manually.
Click OK to return to floor plan view and
edit the ceiling hole polyline. When this

option is selected, the ceiling hole polyline
and the skylight can be selected separately in
floor plan view.
Polyline Tab
Selected Line Tab

Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab

Materials Tab
Roofs

335
Roof Pitches in Degrees
336
Chapter 13:
Stairs
Chapter Overview
Landings can be created automatically or

manually and their shape customized. You
can edit an existing landing, or create a
landing from a closed CAD polyline.
Landing heights can be defined or you can let
them automatically adjust as needed.
Stairwells can be created automatically or
manually and can be seen in all 3D views.
Local building and fire authorities must
be consulted for specific stair construction codes and access requirements.
Chapter Contents
Stair Tools
Stair Direction
Displaying Stairs
Selecting Stairs
Deleting Stairs
Resizing Stairs
Moving Stairs
Rotating Stairs
Copying Stairs
Stair Landings
Merging Stair Sections
Curved Stairs
Changing the Radius of Curved Stairs
Maintaining Tread Width
Creating Winders
Flared Stairs
Starter Treads
Other Special Railings & Stairs
Creating a Stairwell
Creating Rooms Beneath Staircases
Staircase Specification Dialog
Stair Landing Specification Dialog
337
Stairs
Staircases can be composed of one or more

stair sections, straight or curved, as well as
landings, in any combination. Stair sections
can be edited individually or as a group.
Starter treads can be defined; stair sections
can be flared; and curved sections can be
turned into winders.
Stair Tools
Click the Stair Tools
parent button
to display its child tools to the right
Straight Stairs
Curved Stairs
Click on the Curve to Left
child tool or the Curve to Right
child tool to place a curved staircase.
Click the Straight Stairs

child tool
to draw straight stairs. Click in the
center of the first riser and, while holding
down the mouse button, drag upstairs in the
direction of the run.
Alternatively, drag near a curved wall using

the Straight Stairs
child tool and curved
stairs will be created against the wall.
If you drag the stairs parallel to a nearby

straight wall, straight stairs will be created
against the wall.
Straight stairs will also be created if you drag
the stairs out in the open, away from any
walls.
Stair Direction
When you drag to create a set of stairs, the
stairs are created going UP, so stairs are
should be created on the lower of the two
floors they connect. Stairs drawn in the UP
direction respond to floor heights and will
338
adjust to connect between two defined floor

heights.
This is most easily illustrated by showing the
cross sections of the straight and curved
stairs just created. Floor framing is also
displayed to make the floors stand out more.
Anatomy of a Staircase
want, but the stairs will reach the next level if

enough risers are created. After the stairs are
created, stair specifications can be adjusted.
Stairs will read UP in floor plan view when
seen on the lower floor. They will be visible
from the upper floor after the stairwell has
been created in an Open Below type room.
Stairs will read DN in floor plan view when
seen from the upper floor.
Before stairs are created, make sure that both
the lower and upper floors are correctly
defined for height.
Stairs may be created from an upper level
and drawn down, but these stairs are only
aware of their current (upper level) floor
height. To create a down staircase, you must
hold down the Shift key and drag in the
direction of the run. Since these stairs do not
sense the lower level, they are used only
when creating stairs from a specific platform
(such as a deck or porch) down toward an
unknown ground level or undefined grade.
If the finished grade is known, you can create
a "room" outside the structure using invisible
walls and establish the floor height for that
area to match the finished grade. Click
Anatomy of a Staircase
Stairs are often described in terms of rise and
run. Rise is typically between 6" and 8"; and
run, between 10" and 12". In metric plans,
rise is 177 to 190 mm; and run, about 250

mm.
339
Stairs
Notice that in both cases, the staircase starts

at the lower floor and automatically stops at
the correct height on the upper floor. The rise
and run may not automatically be what you
Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
calculate the floor platform at the lower
elevation; then draw a normal stair from the
lower platform up to the upper platform. It
will correctly link the two heights.
A good rule of thumb is: rise plus run should

equal 18" for a comfortable stair step. Any
rise over 7 1/2 is considered to be steep,
however, regardless of the run.
Balusters - The vertical members that run
between the handrail and the treads.
Bracket - Decorative L-shaped supports on
the exposed side of the stairs below each
tread.
Landing - The platform connecting two stair
sections.
Newels - The end post of a stair railing
located at landings and the beginnings of
new stair sections.
Riser - The vertical member of stairs

between the treads.
Run - The width of a stair tread.
Runner - The carpet that runs down the
center of the staircase.
Shoe - The bottom beam that anchors the
balusters at landings.
Stringer - The inclined support member of a
staircase that supports the treads and risers.
Tread - The horizontal member of a stair on
which the foot is placed.
Winder - A wedge-shaped stair tread used
where curved or angled stairways change
direction.
Rise - The height of a riser.
Displaying Stairs
The display of stairs in all views is controlled
in the Layer Display Options dialog. See
Since stairs are not on the same floor as the
stairwell opening, only multi-floor views
will simultaneously show both the upper
floor with the opening and the lower floor
with the stairs. Use the Full Camera
Overview
; or Full
tool to generate a view
displaying stairs. If Full Overview

is
used, turn off the display of the roof and the
ceiling in the 3D view in the Layer Display
Options dialog or use Delete View Surface
tool to reveal the interior of the model.
Selecting Stairs
In floor plan view, click on a stair section in
Straight Stairs
mode or Select Objects
mode to select the stairs. When selected,

the stair section is marked with several edit
handles. If a nearby object is selected instead
of the staircase, click the Select Next Object
340
edit button until the stair section is

selected.
When stairs are selected, the edit handles can
be used to modify them in many ways. A
stair section can be resized, moved, deleted,
rotated, or merged with another stair section.
Its shape can be modified. A stair section can
Selecting Stairs
be turned into a winder or have its first two

treads made into starter treads. A straight
stair section can also be turned into a curved
section and vice versa.
Handles for Straight Stairs

A single straight stair section, when selected,
displays six handles. Each is defined in the
following diagram. End handles are used to
stretch the stairs; connect them to a landing;
or merge them with another stair section. A
straight stair section can also be turned into a
curved section by dragging the end handle
while holding down the Ctrl key.
Move Side Radially

Extend End
Move Radially
Move Side
Change Curve
Center point
Move Stairs
Extend End
Rotate Stairs
Move Side
Handles for Merged Stairs

Move Stairs
Move Side
Rotate Stairs
Handles for Curved Stairs

A single curved stair section, when selected,
displays eight handles. Each is defined in the
following diagram. The end handles can be
used to merge stairs or change a curved
section into a straight one by holding down
the Ctrl key and dragging the end handle.
Note: All handles will not be available for

staircases composed of a single stair section.
Handles on single stair sections may have
different functions than the handles on a staircase composed of multiple sections.
When stair sections are merged, the handles

change. The handles available will depend
on which subsection is selected. To the right
is an illustration of a staircase composed of a
straight stair section and a curved stair
section. The staircase on the left was selected
at its curved subsection.
To the right is the same staircase selected at
its straight section. Note that the edit handles
have changed. The Move Side handles
appear only on the selected section.
Stairs
Extend End
Extend End
341
Selected on
Curved Subsection
Selected on
Straight Subsection
Deleting Stairs
Select a stair section or landing. Click the
Delete
edit button or press the Del key.
To delete a subsection on one end of a

staircase composed of multiple stair sections,
select that stair subsection and drag the end
handle back until the subsection length is
zero or less. Release the handle and that stair

section will be deleted.
When dragging back a curved subsection, be
careful not to drag too far back or the curve
may change into a subsection going a
different direction.
Resizing Stairs
342
To resize by dragging, select a stair section. You will be able to stretch the end
which was selected, and the unselected
end will remain locked in place. Drag the
Extend edit handle to lengthen or shorten
the section. If the move is slight, the
width of the treads will be adjusted and
no new treads will be added.
Drag from either side handle to change
the width of the stair section. When
changing the width, the status bar displays its dimensions.
When dragging the top of the stair section

to resize, movement can be stopped by a
wall or railing on the same floor or the
next floor. The top of a stair section can
be stopped when it meets a wall on the
next floor if the stairway reaches above
54" high. If the stairwell area has already
been defined on the next floor, the top of
Moving Stairs
the stairs can be dragged until it stops at

the railing or wall defining the stairwell.
If the stair section end is connected to a

landing, and you resize the section from
this end, it will move the landing and all
connected sections.
The most accurate method of resizing

stairs is to use the Staircase
Specification dialog, see Staircase
Moving Stairs
The second, more precise, method is to move

the stairs by changing the dimension value in
a dimension line which locates the stairs.
Move By Dragging
Select the stair section to display the edit
handles. Use the center handle that displays
the Move pointer when the mouse is
placed above it, and drag the stairs to a new
location. The stairs will move perpendicular
to the sides and ends of the selected stair
section, and will stop when they bump into a
wall or rail. Continue until the stairs are
positioned properly. Other stair sections
merged to the selected section or attached by
landings will typically move with the
selected section.
A stair section will stop when it or any stair
section moving with it is moved into a wall.
If it is moving along its length it will also
stop upon one of its ends hitting a landing or
the end of another stair section.
If you move a stair section within a couple

inches of a parallel wall, the stairs will
automatically snap against it.
Although stairs will stop when moved into
walls, walls will not stop when moved into
stairs. Walls can be accidentally moved
through stairs. If a wall is moved into a
staircase, reposition the staircase so it is
properly aligned with the wall again.
By default, stairs move in 1" increments.
This movement increment is defined in the
Plan Defaults dialog under Snapping
Grid/Snap Units.
Note: Snapping Grid/Snap Units affects

creation and moving of stairs. If this is
changed, reset it to 1" when you are done,
since it also affects the creation and the
moving of many other objects in the plan.
Unrestricted Movement
As with most objects, restrictions on moving
stairs can be overridden if necessary. This is
343
Stairs
Stairs can be used using one of two methods.

The first is to drag the stairs using the center
move handle. This movement is typically
restricted to directions perpendicular to any
side or end, but can be overridden whenever
necessary. This method is fast and reasonably
accurate.
helpful when trying to move one stair section

next to another before creating a landing.
To move a stair section freely, select the
stairs, hold down the Ctrl key; grab the
middle handle, which changes to a Move
pointer; and drag the stairs to the new
location.
Select the Manual Dimension

tool and
drag a dimension line between the staircase
and the wall or other reference item.
Reposition the dimension line if necessary so
that it properly locates the objects being used
for locating the stairs.
Select the staircase and click in the middle of
the dimension line segment to open the Set
Dimension dialog. Type in the desired
distance. Unless the feet mark (i.e. 36) is
used, inches will be assumed. Click OK or
press Enter . The stair will move accordingly.
Move Using Dimensions

Stairs can be positioned precisely using
dimensions.
Rotating Stairs
Stairs can be rotated by dragging the
triangular handle located outside the stair
section. Dragging this handle in a circular
motion will rotate the stairs around their
center point, unless Rotate/Resize About
Current Point is defined on the CAD page
of the Preferences dialog, see CAD

Panel on page 108.
The stairs will rotate according to the
Allowed Angles in the Plan Defaults
dialog, see Plan Defaults on page 91.
Copying Stairs
Stairs do not copy in the traditional sense.
Stairs may only be copied using the Edit
Area tool. For information regarding Edit>
Edit Area, see Edit Area Tools on page
816.
To copy stairs, select Edit> Edit Area
Draw a marquee around the stairs to be
copied and click the Copy/Paste
edit
button. Go to the plan or floor where the
stairs are to be placed, and choose Edit>
Paste. Click on the plan to place the copy.
344
It is helpful to paste the copy of the stairs in

an area outside the building. This allows you
to move the stairs into position using the
normal move tools, and leave behind
anything else that copied along with the
stairs. Edit Area copies everything inside the
marquee.
After moving the newly pasted stairs into
position, Edit Area can be used to delete
objects in the area into which the stairs were
brought.
Stair Landings
Stair Landings
To create a landing between stair sections:
1.
Move the stair sections so that they are

in the correct relationship to each other.
Notice that both are going the same
direction: UP.
2.
Click between the two sections using the

Straight Stairs
tool to create a landing. Notice that there is now only one
direction arrow.
A landing formed between two stair sections

having less than a 90 degree angle between
them will be created with a short edge not
less than 6 inches (150 mm). This is because
it might be considered a tread, and most
codes require the shortest tread to be at least
6 inches. This short edge may be manually
edited to less than 6 (150 mm).
Custom Shaped Landings

Turn a closed polyline into a custom shaped
landing with the Convert Polyline
button.
1.
Draw a closed polyline.
2.
Select the polyline and click the
edit
Up to five stair sections may be connected to

one landing. For example, you could have
two or three stair sections meet at the same
landing, with a single stair section continuing
to the next level from there.
3.
Select the Landing radio button and

click OK to display the Stair Landing
4.
Define a Height and Thickness for the

landing. If the Height is defined, the end
of the connecting stairs will change
height to meet the landing. If a "d" is
typed in the Height value, the height will
be determined by connected stairs.
5.
To connect a stair section to the landing,

drag the end handle of a stair section and
drop it on the edge of the landing. You
can also move the edge of a landing and
drop it on the end of a stair section.
Either method will connect the section
and set the landing or stair section end
height accordingly.
To be linked by a landing, all sections must

be drawn in the same direction UP or
DOWN, and the top of one section must be
near the bottom of the next.
A curved landing will create curved railings.
To delete a landing, select it by one of its
edges and click the Delete
edit button or
Del
the
key on the keyboard.
Landings can be edited like CAD polylines.
You can add or remove edges, convert an
edge from straight to curved, or vice versa.
345
Stairs
Convert Polyline
edit button to
open the Convert Polyline dialog.
Landing Height
Landing heights can be user-defined or
controlled by the program. A landing whose
height is a program-controlled default is said
to be "unlocked". An unlocked landings
height adjusts as the stairs attached to it are
modified.
If, however, you specify a height for a
landing, that landing is said to be "locked". A
locked landing will maintain that height no
matter how you adjust the stairs connected to
that landing.
Unlocked Landings
Normally, the stair sections attached to a
landing determine the height of the landing.
In this example, two stair sections are

connected by a landing. Both stair sections
have seven treads. Because the landing
height is set automatically according to the
number of treads, all treads have the same
tread width and riser height.
Since both stair sections are the same length,
the landing height is a half of the total height
between the two connected floors.
If the entire staircase forms a single path

from the lower to the upper floor, with each
landing connecting only two stair sections,
the program can set landing heights without
any difficulty.
Since the stairs and landings are basically a
single unit, a change in any stair section will
affect the height of connected landings as
well as the other stair sections. The stairs are
defined, and the landing adjusts in height so
that the entire stair system has the same riser
height, regardless of how many stairs are
placed on each side of the landing.
If more than two stair sections meet at a
landing, however, the relationship between
them becomes more complex. In this
situation, you may want to define the exact
height of the landing instead of letting the
program define it for you.
Locked Landings
A locked landing has a specifically defined
height which does not adjust automatically
346
Stair Landings
when there are changes in the attached stairs.

Instead, the stairs adjust to the landing.
For example, start with the same staircase

used to illustrate unlocked landings, with one
change: the landing height is now defined at
75". Notice that instead of seven treads per
section, a tread has been subtracted from the
top and added to the bottom. The program
makes this adjustment to keep the riser
heights within a reasonable range.
To "lock" a landing by defining a fixed
height:
Select the landing in floor plan view and
edit button to
open the Stair Landing
2.
The Height value displays with a (D),

indicating that the landing height is
defined by the stair sections.
3.
Remove the (D) and enter the desired

height.
4.
The landing will move to that height.

Once you have defined a height for the
landing, all stairs that meet that landing
will be redefined.
The stair sections no longer relate to each

other since they are attached to a locked
landing. Changes to one stair section will not
affect the other.
In this example, each set of stairs is adjusted

so it bridges the height from the floor to the
landing. Since the landing is specifically
positioned above the halfway mark, the
upper stair section has very shallow (5") riser
height, and the lower section has a steeper
(7-1/2") riser height.
When you move a stair section, you move all
other connected non-locked landings as well
as the stair sections connected to those
landings. A locked landing, however, will
not move when you move attached stairs.
The Staircase Specification dialog
displays only the selected stair section and
those connected to it by non-locked landings,
rather than the entire stair system.
347
Stairs
1.
A locked landing serves to break up what

may be a complex network of stairs and
landings into smaller pieces whose starting
and ending heights are known.
To unlock a landing and allow the landing
height to be determined by the stair sections,
follow the procedure for locking and enter a

"d" in the height value box instead. The
current height will reappear with "(D)" once
entered. It will change to the appropriate
height when the dialog is closed. See
Dynamic Defaults on page 90.
Merging Stair Sections

Any combination of straight or curved stair
sections can be merged to create a single stair
section. The resulting stair section is made
up of subsections and functions as a single
unit if there are no landings.
Stair subsections must be created in the same
direction if they are to be merged. Multiple
stairs drawn in the UP direction may be
merged, and multiple stairs drawn DOWN
may be merged, but combinations of UP and
DOWN stairs will not merge.
To merge stairs together, position them so
they are in the desired relationship to each
other. Stair subsections will merge at the
center points of the upper or lower risers.
To merge two subsections, select either stair
section; grab the handle on the end to be
merged; and drop that end on the point where
the two stairs are to meet. You may need to
repeat this step with both subsections if they
were not originally positioned correctly.
348
Once merged, you have a stair section with

two subsections. A stair consisting of merged
subsections resembles a single stair section
in floor plan view. The UP (or DN) arrows
join, becoming a single direction arrow.
Selecting any subsection will result in the
entire merged section being selected. Most of
the edit handles will display within the
boundaries of the selected subsection.
Curved Stairs
If the misalignment is greater, the sections

still connect, but the stairs will not be correct
unless edited.
Subsections can be joined into a single stair

section without being aligned. If the
misalignment is slight, the first tread of the
higher section is reshaped to fit and the
subsections connect nicely.
Be sure to position the stairs before

merging, since stair editing capability
changes when stairs are merged. For example, once merged, straight sections may not
be individually rotated.
Locked Tread Width

When dragging the end handle to lengthen or
contract a section with Lock Tread Width
selected, the length will change in jumps, one
tread at a time. This makes it very difficult to
merge the section to another section or
landing. Instead, set the section length as you
want and approximately align it with the
other section. Now move the section into the
other section or landing until it hits and
stops. This will align and connect the two
sections. You can then select the merged
section and use the dialog to reset and lock
the tread width.
Stairs
Curved Stairs
Curved Stairs can be created using the
Curve to Left
or Curve to Right
349
child buttons. Select either chiild tool and

then click in your plan to place a 90 degree
curved stair section that can then be edited.
Curved stairs can be also created by dragging
along a curved wall using the Straight Stair
tool; or, they can be created from a
straight stair section. Once a stair section is
curved, it can be manipulated and edited to
the correct size and position.
To create curved stairs from straight stairs:
1.
Click the Straight Stairs

child button and drag to create a straight stair section of any length. The length or width
of the section is not yet important: it can
be adjusted later.
2.
Select the section near the end you want

to curve.
3.
Hold down the Ctrl key, grab the end

handle, and drag the section into a curve.
4.
350
Release the mouse when the stair section

is approximately the shape desired.
Aligning Ends of Curved Stairs

The top and bottom edges of curved stair
sections may be aligned to walls, CAD
objects, or other stair sections using the
Make Parallel
edit button. This is useful
for making a curved staircase begin or end
perpendicular to a wall or aligning the top of
one section with the bottom of another. This
tool only works if the end of the stairs is not
attached to a landing or another stair section;
and if the end of the stair is within 20 degrees
of parallel or perpendicular to the reference
object.
1.
Select the stair section near the end that

you want to realign.
2.
Click the Make Parallel

edit button;
then click the wall, rail, stair section or
CAD object to reference.
3.
The stair section will extend or contract

from this end and along its curve to
achieve the alignment.
Curved Stairs
The Make Parallel edit button can be

used to align straight sections which
may have shifted during a merge.
Curving Enclosed Sections

Stair subsections bound on both ends by
other subsections do not have a free end
which can be dragged into a curve using the
Ctrl key. Other editing tools are available in
this situation.
1.
Draw three straight stair sections and

connect them end to end.
2.
Select the middle subsection and click

on the Change Line/Arc
edit button
to change it into a curved subsection.
3.
The center section is turned into a

curved stair section.
The Change Line/Arc

edit button
becomes available when any totally enclosed
stair section is selected. The stair must be
bound on both ends by stair sections, not
landings. If the selected stair section is
straight, this tool will make it curved. If the
selected stair section is curved, this tool will
make it straight.
Notice that although the center stair section
is curved, it does not flow smoothly into the
straight sections. The technique for making
351
Stairs
The following pictures show how to create a

curved stair section from three straight
subsections.
any curved stair tangent to its neighboring

stair is described in the following section.
4.
The enclosed curved stair section is

made tangent to the stair sections on
both ends.
Curved Stairs Made Tangent

Curved subsections can be made tangent
with the subsections to which they connect
using the Make Arc Tangent
edit
button. Use this tool to smooth the
connections between curved stair subsections
and neighboring sections.
1.
Select the middle subsection.
Editing curved stairs is similar to editing

arcs with the CAD tools.
Aligning Curved Stairs

Between Floors
You can align curved stairs between two
floors if one floor is displayed as the
Reference Floor and Show Arc Centers,
Ends is selected on the CAD Line Properties
panel of the Preferences dialog.
2.
3.
352
Click on the Make Arc Tangent

edit button to display the Radius of
Tangent Arc dialog.
A default radius from the center of curvature to the middle of the stairs displays. Change it if you wish, and click
OK.
1.
Display arc centers by selecting Show

Arc Centers, Ends on the CAD Line
Properties panel of the Preferences
dialog.
2.
Select the stairs to be moved.
3.
Click the Point-to-Point Move

button to move the center point.
4.
Click on the center mark of the stairs,

then click on the center mark of the
stairs shown on the Reference Floor.
edit

For a curved staircase made up of a single
section, select the stairs and grab the handle
which lies along the center curve of the stairs
and drag the handle perpendicular to the
stair.
If you drag towards the center, the radius will

decrease. If you drag the handle away from
the center, the radius will increase.
As the radius is adjusted, the length of the
stair and the number of treads or the tread
width will change, depending on your
selection in the Stair Specification
dialog.
You can drag any of the four handles along
the edge of the stairs to stretch the stair sides
just as you would a straight stair. Do not
move the triangular handles or the center
point handle or else the center of the stair
will be moved.
Multiple Subsections
If a curved subsection is merged end-to-end
to a straight subsection, moving the handle
which lies along the center of the up arrow
will adjust the radius opposite the way it

adjusts a single section curved stair.
Dragging the handle away from the center will make the curved portion tighter
and lengthen the straight subsection.
Dragging the handle towards the center

will move the center even faster in the
same direction, increasing the radius and
size of the curved portion, while decreasing the length of the straight portion of
the stairs.
The best way to adjust the radius of a curved

section is to drag from the handles on its
sides. This works consistently, whether or
not the section is connected to other sections.
When this is done, the center point will not
move. Drag one side of the stairs to the
correct radius. Once that side is positioned,
drag the oppposite edge to define the desired
width.
If one side of the stairs is attached to a wall,
you can specify the width of the stairs in the
Stair Specification dialog and only the
353
Stairs
Single Section Stairs
unattached stair edge will adjust. If neither

stair edge is attached to a wall, both will
adjust if you use the dialog to specify the
width, in which case it is better to drag the
edge to define the stair width.
One more way of setting the radius is
available if both ends of a curved section
connect to straight sections:
If there is no curved wall, you can align the

radius of the stair to a CAD arc or circle. To
do this, you must first align the centers of the
CAD object and the staircase.
Existing curved stairs can be aligned with an
existing curved wall by aligning their
centers.
1.
Display the arc centers by selecting

Show Arc Centers, Ends on the Line
dialog, see Line Properties Panel on
page 108.
Specify the radius and click OK. This

will move the curved sections center;
but its ends will expand along the
straight sections. The straight sections
will expand or contract their connected
ends, but otherwise will not move.
2.
Select the stairs to be moved, then click
3.
Click on the center mark of the stairs,

then click on the center mark of the
curved wall, curved railing, arc or circle.
Matching the Center & Radius
4.
The staircase will move so that the center of the radius is aligned with the center of the other curved object.
1.
Select the curved section and click on

the Make Arc Tangent edit button to
display the Radius of Tangent Arc
dialog.
2.
The easiest way to match the radius of the

stair to the radius of a curved wall is to create
the stair by dragging near one side of the
curved wall. The stair will snap to the wall,
and the radius of the new staircase will be
defined.
the Point-to-Point Move

button.
edit
Once centers are aligned, select the curved

stairs and move the appropriate side to the
wall surface by dragging from one of the side
handles. Finally, fix the width by dragging
from the other side handle or using the stair
dialog.

Most national and international building
codes require staircases to maintain
consistent tread width.
Walk Line
By default, Chief Architect measures the
length and tread width of a stair section along
354
a walk line. The walk line is typically located

12", or 30 cm, from the edge of the stair
section. On curved stairs, it is measured from
the edge nearest the center of the curve. You
can specify the distance a walk line is
measured from the stair edge or choose to
turn off the walk line feature altogether,
basing stair measurements from the treads

center. See Staircase Specification Dialog
on page 367.
When the Walk Line is used, the number and/
or width of treads in a section or subsection
changes when the inner edge of a curved stair
is moved because the walk line is measured
from this inner edge. It is recommended that
you set the stair section width as early as
possible to its final value.
11"
11"
Measured at
Center of Tread
Ignore Subsection
Boundaries
Uniform tread width can also be maintained
without locking by selecting Ignore
Subsection Boundaries in the General Tab
of the Staircase Specification dialog.
This will maintain a consistent tread width
throughout a stair section, without regard to
subsection boundaries. The tread width value
may change when the stair section is edited,
but will be consistent throughout all
subsections.
Because the program is ignoring the
boundaries where one stair section merges
with another, the treads where a straight
section joins a curved section may become
slightly angled to accomodate the
adjustment.
Measured at
Walk Line
There are two ways to keep tread width even

throughout a stair section made of multiple
subsections.
Lock Tread Width
Stairs
The first is to Lock Tread Width to a

specified value in the general tab of the
Staircase Specification dialog. A stair
section consisting of multiple subsections
must have the tread width locked for each.
Once locked, any lengthening or contracting
of the stair section will be made one tread at
a time, maintaining the specified tread width.
355
Check "Ignore Subsection

Boundaries" to have the
program adjust all the treads
of a stair system so that they
maintain consistent width along
the walkline. Note that it had to
adjust the boundary lines to
accomodate the walk line along
the center stairs.
These are the subsection boundaries.

Note that they are straight, exactly as
created. The walk line around the
center treads, however, is too narrow.
Creating Winders
Both curved and straight stairs may be turned
into winders. When defined as a winder, the
stairs will extend to fill in any gap between
the side of the stairs and nearby walls.
1.
In this example, the staircase is composed of two straight sections with a

curved section in the middle.
2.
Select the stairs on any section, and click

the Open Object
3.
356
edit button.
Select the Winder check box in the

Staircase Specification dialog and
click OK.
4.
Note how the curved section extends to

the corner after the stair has been
changed to a winder.
Winders MUST be in a room with valid

room definition before they will work.
You cannot create winders in an area composed of only 2 corner walls. If this configuration is needed, close the area in with Invisible
walls so that a room is established.
Rooms Below Winders

Winders may exhibit unexpected behavior
when walls are used to create a "room"
below the stairs.
Creating Winders
corner gap. The inside edge of the stairs

extends well beyond the walls below. (The
walls are also shown.)
.
Turning the stairs into winders may cause the

interior edge to snap to the inside edge of the
walls underneath the stairs, as shown below.
The shaded area shows what happens when
these stairs are turned into winders. The
winder treads expand to fill the corner gap.
The edge of the stairs which originally
overlapped the wall contracts until it lies
against the inside edge of the walls which
define the room below the stairs.
A problem may occur when one side of the

staircase overlaps the walls used to create a
room underneath the stairs. In this case, you
do not want that stair edge to contract until it
is against the inside edge of the wall below.
In the following illustration, the dark stair
lines represent the stairs before they are
turned into winders. They do not fill the
The Max Tread Contraction defines the

largest distance that any section of the stair
system is allowed to move inward when the
stairs are turned into winders. If any point on
the edge of the stairs would have to move
inward more than this defined amount
(between its current position and its new
position against the inside wall), the stairs
357
Stairs
When a stair is defined as a winder, the

curved stair section will always expand to fill
in the gaps between the stair and the wall.
This problem is easily corrected by limiting

the distance the stair edge is allowed to move
inward when the stairs are turned into
winders. This limitation is called the Max
Tread Contraction (for Winder) and is
defined in the Style tab of the Staircase
will not contract and snap to the inside edge

of the underlying walls.
Following is a closeup view of a staircase
which has a "room" beneath it. The linetype
for the stairs layer was changed to a dashed
line so the walls beneath the stairs would
display in floor plan view.
If the distance (E) from the inside corner of

the stair (C) to the inside corner of the walls
under the staircase (D) is less than or equal to
the Max Tread Contraction, then the stair
will snap to the inside edge of the wall.
If the distance (E) is greater than the Max
Tread Contraction, the staircase will remain
unaltered.
358
the Style tab, change the Max Tread

Contraction to a non-zero value less than
any known distance that any stair edge would
have to contract if it were to move to the
inside edge of the wall beneath the stairs.
Since the stair extends slightly beyond the
wall, you could safely use a value up to the
thickness of the wall. In this case, the wall is
3-1/2" wide, so the Max Tread Contraction
was set to 2.
To prevent this type of situation from

occurring, always set the Max Tread
Contraction to a small, non-zero value. A
value of zero is the same as setting a high
value. It will not limit the snap distance the
stair edge will contract.
To correct the problem with the staircase,

select the stairs in floor plan view. Then click
Tight Winders
the Open Object

edit button to display
the Staircase Specification dialog. On
Winders cannot be created in a staircase that

is too tight. The tread edge must be greater
than zero. To fix this, select the winder, click
Flared Stairs
the Make Arc Tangent

edit button, and
increase the radius so that it is greater than
half of the width of the staircase. See

Editing Arcs on page 766.
Flared Stairs
Any stair section can be flared using
the Flare/Curve Stairs
edit button.
When this button is selected, a number of
new handles display for editing the stairs.
Creating a Flared Stair
These are the edit handles used for flaring or

curving stair treads. Below each picture is an
example of how the handles may be used to
adjust the stairs. One additional set of
handles is provided. See Selecting Stairs
on page 340.
1.
Create the stairs and connect them to

landings; floor platform edges; or other
stair sections as needed. Specify stair
section widths, tread width, and other
information.
2.
Select the stairs, then click the Flare/

Curve Stairs
edit button. New
handles will display on the stairs. Notice
that all four corners of the stairs now
have a flare handle.
3.
Drag one of the corner handles to flare

that corner. Observe the toolbar window
359
Stairs
Flaring; tread curving; and special treads

should be the last changes that you make to
any stairs.
or the Status Bar as you drag the flare.

These will show the amount the side
handle moves outward. This information
is important if you plan to move the
opposite handle the same amount.
2.
Drag the flare handle on the opposite

side until it has been moved outward the
same amount as the first handle.
Curving the Treads
Symmetrically Flared Stairs

Use the dimension information that displays
in the Status Bar to help you create
symmetric flares.
1.
Select the stair which already has one

side flared and click the Flare/Curve
Stairs
360
edit button.
The handles at the center of the top and

bottom riser will curve the treads when
dragged up or down. The illustration above
shows curved treads added to a curved
staircase. Other stair editing has been done as
well, but the focus of this section is the
curving of the treads.
Flared Stairs
1.
Select the stairs. Click the Flare/Curve

Stairs
2.
edit button.
Drag the handle positioned in the center

of the bottom edge. Drag a small
amount. The treads will curve accordingly.
The section does not need to be flared to

have this type of curvature and the curvature
affects all treads in the section, each one less
as it gets further from the curved end until no
curvature is given to the tread at the other
end of the section. You can, if you want,
impose a curve on the other end as well.
Softening the Flare Radius

The four handles at the sides, and the four
handles at the corners flare the stair section
when dragged outward from it. The two
handles in the center of the section move the
starting point for flaring along the stair
section.
1.
Select the flared stair and click the

Flare/Curve Stairs
edit button to
display the flare handles again.
2.
Select the handle along the side of the

stair, on the edge having the flare. Drag
this handle outward very slightly. This
forms a more gradual flare.
Then adjust the starting point of the flare:
After the flare has been created, you may

want to soften the radius of the flare.
Select the flared stair and click the

Flare/Curve Stairs
edit button to
display the flare handles again.
2.
First, adjust the flared sections curvature:
This time, drag the lower of the two central handles upward. The handle above it
will move with it. This moves the start
361
Stairs
1.
point for the bottom flare from the middle of the section toward its top, making
the flare even more gradual.
Treads Perpendicular to Flare

A stair section often looks better if the treads
curve to meet the flared side perpendicular to
the radius.
To create this effect,

drag the lower left
handle upward a tread
width or less.
This type of tread
curving works only for
a flared edge and
concentrates the
curvature at that edge.
You could also choose
to curve the tread more
uniformly by dragging
downward from the
center bottom handle.
Drag just a few inches to create the curve

shown in the picture.
Starter Treads
The first and second tread of a
staircase can be modeled with rounded
ends known as starter treads. This is common
with traditional staircases. Starter treads can
be specified on one or both sides of the stair
with the Starter Tread
362
edit button.
A starter tread can be added to one or both

sides of a stair section. If the stair section is
against a wall, only the tread away from the
wall is changed.
Starter Treads
against a wall, only one handle will

appear on the side opposite the wall.
To radius the starter treads:

Select a stair section by clicking in the
lowest tread. The Starter Tread
edit
button will display
Note: You must select either the first or the

second tread, or the Starter Tread edit
button will not display. The tread selected will
be the tread modified.
2.
Click the Starter Tread
3.
An edit handle will appear on each end

of the first tread.
4.
Drag either of the handles outward from

the stair section. If the stair section is
The ends of the

tread will become
rounded and the
width of the tread
will increase as you drag.
6.
Once the first tread is edited in this way,

two handles will display on each side.
7.
Drag either of the outer handles away

from the stair to extend the tread further
out, or push it back in to change the
starter tread back to normal.
8.
Drag either of the two inner handles

upward to increase the width of the
rounded ends of the tread.
9.
Repeat the steps to modify the second

tread. Handles for the second tread are
displayed by selecting the stair on the
second tread before clicking on the
Starter Tread
edit button.
10. Both the first and second treads have

been modified.
edit button.
Stairs
1.
5.
363
Other Special Railings & Stairs

Solid Railings
Concrete Stairs
To create a solid rail along a staircase, create

the solid rail and drag it up against, but not
underneath, the stairs. The solid rail will
sense the adjacent stairs and will climb
alongside them.
To make a simple solid concrete staircase:

1.
Set the Tread overhang to zero.
2.
Set the Tread thickness to zero.
3.
On the Material tab, set the Tread and

the Riser/Trim materials to Concrete.
Steel Stringer
If any balusters show beyond the railing,

eliminate them by clearing the checkbox for
Left railing or Right railing. These settings
are found in the Style tab of the Staircase
364
To make a steel central support with pre-cast

concrete treads:
1.
Setting Tread Thickness to 2-inches or

more.
2.
Select the Single Stringer check box.
3.
On the Material tab, set the Tread material to Concrete and the Riser/Trim
material to steel.
Masonry Stairs
To make a set of masonry stairs:

1.
Set the Tread Overhang to zero.
2.
Set the Tread Thickness to the thickness of the masonry.
3.
On the Material tab, set the Tread material to the masonry material and the
Riser/Trim material to concrete.
A staircase needs to be located in a stairwell.

This opening is actually created on the floor
above by defining an area as Open Below in
the Room Specification dialog. See
Room Types on page 192.
1.
Draw a two-story building. Create the

staircase on the first floor.
2.
Make the second floor the Current

Floor and the first floor the Reference
Floor.
Automatically
3.
Click the Reference Display On

to
show the Reference Floor, including the
stairs. If the stairs do not display with
the reference, make sure the Ref column
for the Stairs and Landings layer is
selected in the Layer Display
Options dialog. See Displaying
4.
On the upper floor,

use the Railing
To create a simple stairwell that

matches the perimeter of the staircase,
select the staircase and click the Form
Stairwell
edit button. This will
automatically create a room on the floor
above and set it to Open Below in the Room
Specification dialog. The room can then
be selected and edited like any other room.
Creating a Stairwell Manually

Stairwells can also be created manually,
allowing you to create an opening that does
not match the shape of the staircase. Following are step-by-step instructions for creating
a stairwell manually.
tool to lay out

a room around the
stairs. It is easiest
to draw the room
larger than the
stairs and then move the railing into
position.
365
Stairs
5.
6.
10. Place a Doorway in the railing at the top

step for an opening.
11. Select the doorway and define a large
width in the Door Specification dialog. If the doorway is specified larger
than the railing, the door will maximize
to fit the available space.
Select the room by clicking inside it

clicking Open Object
8.
Click the Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings

button to generate the hole in
the upper floor. The stairs will now show
through and will be labeled DN.
When the railings

are positioned
properly, turn off
the visibility of
the reference floor
by pressing the
Reference
Display On
7.
9.
Select the railings

one at a time and
drag them into
position.
tool; then
edit button.
In the Room
The results in 3D.
Specification
dialog, change the

room name to Open
Below.
Creating Rooms Beneath Staircases

To define a room beneath a staircase with
walls:
Walls are drawn

below the stairs.
1.
Draw a staircase.
2.
Select the staircase and click the Open

Object
Staircase Specification dialog.
Change linetype to see

items below stairs.
366
3.
If Winders were specified, set Max

Tread Contraction to 2" to allow for
walls defining a room under a winder.
4.
Draw the walls on the same floor as the

stairs, following the shape of the stairs.
halfway through the second step. If it is

placed too close to the bottom step,
pieces of wall will shoot up through the
stairs rather than being chopped off.
It is easiest to draw the walls outside the

stairs. Draw all walls needed to create a
room under the stairs.
5.
6.
Select each wall in turn and drag it just

underneath the stairway, making sure
that it does not stick out beyond the
stairs. When you release the wall, it will
disappear in floor plan view because it is
blocked by the staircase. Stairs are
opaque in floor plan view and so block
the visibility of the walls or other objects
placed below the stairs.
The wall at the foot of the stairs should
be placed no closer to the bottom than
7.
When the room under the staircase is

properly defined, base molding will follow the walls. Doors can be added.
To see the walls and other objects under the

stairs, open the Layer Display Options
dialog and change the linetype of the stairs to
anything other than solid line. Both the stairs
and the walls below will display.

The highest accuracy in defining a staircase
is available through the Staircase
Specification dialog. If more than one
stair section attaches to an unlocked landing,
information about all the linked stair sections
is displayed in the specification dialog. If a
stair section is composed of multiple
subsections, the complete section may be
adjusted as a unit, or by defining each of its
individual subsections. Any section or
subsection can be used to open the
Staircase Specification dialog for the
entire stair system.
Changes made on any tab are applied when

you click OK.
To display the Staircase Specification
dialog, select a stair section and click the
Open Object
edit button; or, doubleclick on a stair section using the Straight
Stairs
or Select Objects
tool. You
can also double-click the stairs in a 3D view
while using Select Objects
It is important that all floor heights, ceiling heights, floor thickness and ceiling
thickness be established correctly before
using the Staircase Specification dialog.
Stairs
There are six divisions in this dialog, each

represented by a tab at the top. The tabs are
labeled General, Style, Newels/Balusters,
Handrail, Line Style and Material.
367
General Tab
4
5
1 The comment line tells whether or not
the staircase reaches the next floor. If it

does not, the Make Reach button displays.
Click this button to add risers to the stairs.
The stair jack extends, raising the bottom
edge of the stair section until the staircase
reaches the next floor.
2 This section lists information about the
staircase. This information cannot be

edited directly, but will update with changes
made in the dialog.
If you modify a value, press the Tab key to
update the information to the new settings.
3 The specifications for each stair section

are displayed and can be edited here.
This section expands if the number stair
sections and subsections increases.
368
Stair sections can be modified as a complete

unit or by subsection. Five values can be
changed. A change in one usually affects
other values in the same row. You may need
to reposition the staircase after the changes.
Section # - Identifies the stair sections.
Length - Defines the run, or length, of each
section. This is equal to the number of treads
multiplied by the tread width and can be
defined with a specific value.
For curved sections this length is measured
along the walkline.
Before you change the length, you may want
to first select Retain # Treads.
When the length of a section changes, the
selected end of that section (a handle
displays at that end) will move. All other

stairs and landings connected to that end
must also move.
The maximum angle is 42 degrees. To

exceed the 42 degree limit, decrease Length,
Tread Width and/or # Treads.
Tread Width - the run of each individual

tread. To lock this value, select the Lock
Tread Width check box.
Winders - Select the checkbox to turn the

selected section into winders. This affects the
section as a whole, even if it is defined by
subsections. If there are multiple sections
separated by landings, each section can be
individually defined as having winders.
If a landing is created by clicking between

two stair sections, one of which has locked
tread width, the staircase formed from them
will have locked tread width. Any landings
and sections connected to this new staircase
will move to line up with the new landing. If
the portion above the new landing is not
connected to an existing landing, it will
move. Otherwise, the sections and landings
below the new landing will move.
Note: You cannot lock both the Tread Width
and Retain the Tread Count in a stair section.
If a landing is created between two stair sections, one of which has locked tread width,
the entire staircase formed will have locked
tread width.
# Treads - defines the number of treads in a

stair section or subsection. If you enter a
value and want to prevent it from changing,
check Retain # treads in either Sections or
Subsections to lock the value.
Sec. Width - Define the width of a section.
Only one width can be defined for a section:
all subsections in the same section will have
the same width.
Rise Angle - Define the steepness of the stair
section.
4 Click the Revert button to restore all
values as they were when the dialog

was first opened. Revert only works within
the same editing session.
If you select and then clear one of the Retain
# treads in check boxes, the settings will
also revert.
5 Best riser height of ___ inches (mm)
requires ___ risers to reach ___

inches to next floor. This area explains the
extent of the stair. Always check the number
of inches (mm) to the next floor. This
number is usually comprised of the ceiling
height of the room plus the platform
thickness of the floor above.
If a locked landing is used, its height will be
used to calculate this information. See
Locked Landings on page 346.
6 These options control the behavior of

the stair sections.
Stair Sections Move Separately - Check the

box to separate a staircase at the landings
when it is moved. This will not break
sections into individual subsections, and is
not available if the staircase has no landings.
Lock Tread Width - Select the check box to
lock the tread width value. If subsections are
not displayed, the tread width for each
section is the average of all subsections.
369
Stairs
If you do not specify the tread width of each

subsection, you will be specifying the tread
width for the whole section.
Check Lock Tread Width or Ignore

Subsection Boundaries to ensure that the
tread width shown is the true tread width
throughout the entire section.
Ignore Subsection Boundaries - Select the
check box to maintain tread width
throughout a stair section composed of
merged subsections, without regard to
subsecton boundaries. See Ignore
Subsection Boundaries on page 355.
Retain #treads in: Sections - Select the
check box to lock the number of treads in
stair sections as a whole. This does not
define the distribution of treads throughout
the different subsections, and does not

include landings.
Retain # Treads in: Subsection - Select the
check box to specify the number of treads in
each subsection.
If either checkbox is selected, any change in
a stair sections length will be evenly
distributed among the treads in that section
or subsection. No new treads will be added.
All stair sections linked by unlocked
landings to a selected stair section will
display in the lower part of the dialog. If you
select Retain # Treads in: Subsection, all
subsections will display.
Style Tab
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
6
8
14
16
18
10
The Style tab controls the style of the

staircase, affecting all sections and
subsections equally. These options can be
used in any combination.
1 Closed Sides - Select the check box to

raise each exposed stringer to cover the
sides of the treads. If this is checked, no
central stringer is applied to open riser stairs.
370
17
12
This setting only affects those stringers

which are not against a wall.
2 Stringer at Wall - Select the check box
to produce a raised stringer top

baseboard trim at the sides of the stair
sections against walls. This baseboard
follows the slope of the stair.
to form a single 5-inch or 125-mm thick

stringer in the center of the staircase.
Selecting this checkbox automatically checks
the checkbox for Open Risers and clears the
checkbox for Closed Sides. You may want to
increase the tread thickness to about 2 inches
(50 mm) or greater when this is checked.
4 Open Underneath - Clear the check
box to add a skirt below the staircase

along the two sides. It looks like a wall in
3D, but it has only a single face. Baseboard
will not generate along the bottom of the
skirt, and doors cannot be placed in the skirt.
The preferred way to enclose the area
beneath stairs is by using walls. See
Creating Rooms Beneath Staircases on
page 366.
5 Open Risers - Select the check box to
eliminate the riser beneath the front of

each tread. The stringers will be exposed
unless Closed Sides is also selected. In that
case, the stair section sides are considered to
be the stringers and no central stringer is
supplied.
6 Large Stringer Base - Select the check
box to widen the stringer at the foot of

the staircase. Check this if using walls to
create a room below the stairs so the walls
baseboard will better meet the stringer.
7 Use Exterior Materials - Select the
check box to have the entire staircase

use the same material as the railing.
Materials can be defined for the individual
parts of a staircase if this is not checked.
8 Use Walk Line - Select the check box
to use the walk line for tread width

calculations. See Walk Line on page 354.
9 Show Walk Line - Select the check
box to make the Walk Line visible in

floor plan view.
10 Show Arrow - Select the check box to
make the up arrow or down arrow

visible in floor plan view.
11 Runner not Tucked - Normally, carpet
runners are tucked under the tread

overhang. Check this box to have the runner
span directly from the tread front to the
bottom of the riser below.
12 Tread Overhang - Specify the amount
that the tread overhangs the riser. See

the following illustration.
13 Tread Thickness - Specify the
thickness of the material for each tread.

This does not affect the Material List. See the
following illustration.
14 Stringer Top - Specify the height of the
top stringer where stairs run along a

wall, or where "Closed Sides" is specified.
This is measured from the top of the tread
along the riser face to the top of the stringer.
It must not be less than 2 inches or 5 cm. See
the following illustration.
Stairs
3 Single Stringer - Select the check box
371
the bottom edge of the stringer. It must be

equal to or greater than the riser height.
14
13
16 Runner Width - Specify the width of
the carpet runner for all sections

connected by non-locked landings. The
default value of 0 will not create a runner.
12
17 Walk Line from Edge - Specify how
far from the edge of the stairs the Walk

Line is measured. This is normally 12 inches.
15 Stringer Bottom - Specify the height
of the bottom stringer. This is measured

from the top back corner of the tread down to
18 Max Tread Contraction (for Winder)
- Define the amount a tread will

contract to create a winder. See Tight
Winders on page 358.
Newels/Balusters Tab
2
3
4
5
1 Rail Height - Specify stair and landing
rail height.
372
Stair Rail Height defines the height from

tread surface directly over the riser to
railing top.
Landing Rail Height defines the height

of the landing rail top from the landing
surface.
2 Check Draw Newels/Balusters to
display newels and balusters in floor

plan view.
3 Baluster specifications.
Baluster Type - Select Square,

Round, or Library balusters. Selecting
Library from the drop down list is the
same as clicking the Library button to
the right and allows selection of a baluster from the library.
Baluster Width - Specify the width of

each baluster. For Library balusters, this
is the width, or diameter, at its widest
point.
No Shoe for Rail - This option applies

only to landing rails. Uncheck this to
place a low rail on the landing surface
which receives the baluster bottoms.
Cut Baluster Top - Each tread normally

has two to three balusters, growing
longer toward its back. The default is to
use the same baluster and cut it off at the
bottom to shorten it toward the tread
front. Check this to instead cut the balusters at the top.
of the stairs. A newel is placed only on a side

of the stairs not against a wall.
Rail Passes Over Newel - Adjust the newel
height to reach the bottom of the rail which
passes over it. Checking this causes the
Newel Height to be ignored.
5 Bracket - Click the Library button to
apply a 1/4 inch thick bracket to the

side of the stringer under each riser. Brackets
are applied only where the side of the stairs is
not against a wall. The stringer on that side is
moved in 1/4 inch to accomodate the bracket.
6 Railing specifications.
Railing - Select either or both check

boxes to specify placement of railings on
stair sections and landings where they are
not against a wall.
Railing at Wall - Check to specify the

placement of wall railings.
Railing Transitions - Check to specify

the placement of "gooseneck" connections between stair and landing railings.
4 Newel specifications.
Newel Width - Specify the width of each

newel. For Library newels, this is the width,
or diameter, at its widest point.
Newel Height - Specify the height from the
landing surface to the top of the newel. This
is used only when Rail passes over Newel is
unchecked.
Stairs
Newel Type - Select Square, Round,

or Library newels. Selecting Library from
the drop down list is the same as clicking the
Library button to the right and allows
selection of a newel from the library.
Newels at First Tread - Check this box to

place a newel where the rail starts at the base
373
Smooth Transitions - Check to specify

the placement of smooth connections
between stair and landing railings.
Checking both Railing Transitions and

Smooth Transitions will produce a handrail
like this:
Handrail Tab
The Handrail tab is used to specify the style
and size of handrailing on a staircase.
374
3
4
1 Molding - Displays the current handrail
profile being used. This will say

"Default Handrail" unless a custom handrail
profile is selected.
Note: Handrails are displayed on their side,

rotated counter-clockwise by 90 degrees.
5 Width and Height - Specify the width
2 Select - Click this button to open the
and height of the railing.
choose a profile from the library.
Default - Click this button to remove a

specified handrail use the default.
Line Style Tab

For information about using the Line Style
tab, see Line Style Tab on page 732.
4 Preview Pane - Displays the selected
molding profile. No preview displays

for the "Default Handrail" option, which is
rectangular.
Materials Tab

Select a landing and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Stair Landing
Stairs
375
General Tab
Polyline Tab
1
2
3
Selected Line Tab

Selected Line Tab on page 742.
Line Style Tab

landing. Enter a "D" to unlock the

landing height and use the default height.
The default height is determined by corrected
stair sections when you exit the dialog. See
Unlocked Landings on page 346
2 Thickness - Enter a thickness for the
landing. Enter a "D" to use the default.
3 No Rail on Selected Edge - Suppress
railing on the edge nearest to where you

clicked when selecting this landing.
376

Fill Style Tab

Materials Tab
Framing
Chapter Overview
Manual Framing members are produced by
clicking and dragging, like drawing a wall.
Automatic Framing is produced by
selecting the various Build Framing check
boxes on the appropriate tabs of the Build
Framing dialog.
Trusses are covered in their own chapter,
Trusses on page 407.
Chapter Contents
Framing Defaults
Manual Framing vs. Automatic Framing
The Framing Tools
Automatic Framing
Framing Reference Markers
Bearing Lines
Joist Direction Lines
Wall Framing Details
Drawing Wall Framing Members
Displaying Framing
Editing Framing
Regenerating Framing
Framing and the Material List
Framing Specification Dialog
Beam Specification Dialog
Post Specification Dialog
Framing Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings... to
access the Default Settings dialog.
Framing is automatically generated
according to the settings in the Framing
Defaults dialog. To edit automatic framing,
change the settings in the Build Framing

dialog and regenerate framing. For this
reason, the Build Framing dialog and the
Framing Defaults dialog are identical.
See Framing Defaults/Build Framing
Dialog on page 382.
377
Framing
Chapter 14:
Manual Framing vs. Automatic Framing

Platform, roof, and wall framing can be
produced manually or automatically. In most
cases, automatically-generated framing is
preferable. If you want a framing member
that is not affected by automatically
generated framing, then a manually drawn
framing member is desirable. See The
Framing Tools on page 378.
In most plans, both types of framing are
used. The framing for roof planes and floor
platforms is automatically generated, and
additional framing is manually added or
moved.
Wall/Floor/Ceiling
Framing
The Wall, Openings, and Headers tabs of the
Build Framing dialog determine how wall
framing is automatically generated. It is a
good idea to set up framing specifications in
the Build Framing dialog before drawing.
Although these settings can be changed,
finalizing them as early as possible will save
time.
Framing is not built until the Build
Framing dialog is opened and the check
box on each tab that says Build next to it is
selected. For example, Build Wall
Framing is found on the Wall tab; Build
Ceiling Framing, on the different floor tabs
(1st, 2nd, etc). Once framing is built, changes

can be made to individual components.
Framing members can be added, deleted,
resized and repositioned within the model.
When changes are made to the model that
affect framing, the Build Framing dialog
must be opened and any framing areas that
are affected must be rebuilt. For example, if a
window is moved or resized, the wall
framing must be rebuilt. If the footprint is
enlarged, the wall framing and any roof or
platform framing that is affected must be
rebuilt.
Roof Framing
Rafters, trusses, or a mixture of the two are
supported for roof framing. Trusses are
manually drawn and are covered in the
following chapter, Trusses on page 407.
Rafters can be manually drawn or produced
automatically on the Roof tab in the
Framing dialog.
If you are going to have both truss and
automatically produced stick framing,
draw the trusses first and then use the
Frmaing dialog to produce stick framing.
The stick framing will be placed only in areas
not supported by trusses, and will be cut and
butted to the trusses where appropriate.
The Framing Tools

Framing members can be generated
automatically or drawn manually. In
either case, the default settings for
378
framing members are derived from their

respective tabs in the Build Framing
dialog.
The Framing Tools
Joists can be automatically generated

for multiple floors at once in the Build
Framing dialog. See Floor Tabs on page
383.
Rafter
Joists can only be manually drawn on the

current floor. See Floor Up/ Floor Down
on page 271. Whether a floor or ceiling joist
Rafters differ from joists in that they

are placed at a pitch and elevation to fit
under the roof plane in which they are drawn.
To draw a rafter, select Build> Framing>
Rafter
. The rafter height, depth and
pitch is set so that it fits under the roof plane
that contains it. Rafters are edited just like
framing members, except that you cannot set
the height. If a rafter is moved, its height and
slope are automatically reset to fit under the
roof plane at its new position.
Roof Truss
Select Build> Framing> Roof Truss
is drawn when the Joist

tool is used is
determined by the presence of a floor above.
If there is no floor above, a ceiling joist is
drawn. If there is a floor above, a floor joist
will be drawn. To draw a joist on the first
floor subfloor, the current floor must be the
foundation.
To manually draw a ceiling joist, select
Build> Framing> Joist
and click and
drag to draw a joist of the desired length.
Joists can be edited just like manually drawn
framing members. See Editing Framing on
page 402.
and click and drag across two walls

in floor plan view to manually draw a roof
truss. Roof planes must be present before a
roof truss can be drawn. See Roof Trusses
on page 408.
Ceiling joists, floor joists and rafters

have their own layers. Proper layer
assignment maximizes display and materials
flexibility.
Roof Beam
Click the Floor/Ceiling Truss child

button and click and drag in floor plan
view to draw a floor/ceiling truss. See Floor
and Ceiling Trusses on page 408.
Select Build> Framing> Roof Beam

and click and drag in floor plan
view to manually draw a roof beam. This
will normally be drawn across and placed
directly under the rafters. Beams can be
selected and opened for specification. See
Beam Specification Dialog on page 405.
Floor/Ceiling Truss
Floor/Ceiling Beam
Select Build> Framing> Floor/
Ceiling Beam
and click and drag
379
Framing
Joist
As a general rule, horizontal framing

members are referred to as "joists"
(floor/ceiling platform framing); vertical framing members are referred to as "studs" (wall
framing); and sloped framing members are
referred to as rafters (roof framing).
in floor plan view to draw a floor/ceiling

beam. Beams can be selected and opened for
specification. See Beam Specification
Dialog on page 405.
On the Posts/Beam tab of the Build
Framing dialog you can set two ways a
beam can be drawn:
Under Joists places the beam underneath

the joists so the joists can bear on it.
With Joists places the top of the beam
even with the tops of the joists it supports. The joist will then butt against it.
See Posts/Beams Tab on page 390.
specification. See Post Specification

Dialog on page 406.
Framing Reference Marker

Click the Framing Reference Marker
child button and click in floor plan
view to place a framing reference marker.
The Framing Reference Marker
is a
shortcut tool that saves the step of opening a
marker to specify its type. See Markers on
page 722 and Framing Reference Markers
on page 394.
Bearing Line
Beams should be placed before joists

are produced by automatic framing. If
With Joists is specified, the joists will be cut
by and butted against the beam. If Under
Joists is specified, the joists will be automatically butted or lapped over the beam.
Line
and click and drag on floor
plan view. See Bearing Lines on page 396.
Post
Joist Direction
Select Build> Framing> Post

and
click in floor plan view to manually
place a post. Placing a post on a foundation
level will also place a foundation footing.
Posts can be selected and opened for
Select Build> Framing> Bearing
Select Build> Framing> Joist

Direction
and click and drag in
floor plan view. See Joist Direction Lines
on page 397.
Blocking and Bridging

Blocking can be drawn manually for floor
and ceiling platforms. Wall bridging can be
created manually or automatically. Both
blocking and bridging can be selected and
edited an a variety of ways.
The Joist Blocking
and Roof Blocking
buttons are not on the default toolbar but
380
can be added. See Toolbar Customization

Dialog on page 18.
Joist and Roof Blocking

Blocking for floor and ceiling
joists and rafters can be manually
drawn in floor plan view.
To add Joist Blocking
or Roof Blocking
to your plan, first generate the framing

for that platform. See Framing Defaults/
Build Framing Dialog on page 382.
Once framing is displayed, select Build>
Framing> Joist Blocking from the menu or
click the Joist Blocking
button and click
and drag to draw blocking.
Blocking must be drawn perpendicular to
and across joists or rafters.
One run of blocking behaves as a single
object in floor plan view. Choose between In
Line; Stagger blocking; and Cross bridging
on each numbered Floor tab of the Build
Framing dialog.
When Rafter
child button is doubleclicked to open the Build Framing
dialog, the Rafter tool will be active. Be sure
that the Joist Blocking
ing
or Roof Block-
tool is active before drawing blocking.
Create a framing overview to view your

blocking in 3D. Rafter blocking will be tilted
in 3D to be perpendicular to the roof plane.
The floor plan view position corresponds to
the top of the rafter blocking.
Wall Bridging
Bridging for walls can be created after walls
are framed. Select Exterior or Interior; and
In Line or Stagger bridging on the Wall tab
of the Build Framing dialog to define both
automatically and manually drawn bridging.
See Framing Defaults/Build Framing
Dialog on page 382.
Automatically-created wall bridging can be
viewed in a wall detail and edited just as joist
blocking is edited in floor plan view.
Bridging can also be drawn in CAD mode by
selecting CAD> Boxes & Framing> Wall
Bridging
. Wall bridging must be drawn
perpendicular to the studs; therefore it is
always horizontal in a wall detail. Bridging
should start and end at a stud surface.
See Wall Framing Details on page 400.
Automatic Framing
Joists and Rafters
Joists and rafters can be automatically
produced in ceiling and floor platforms and
roof planes. Select the Build Framing check
box on the appropriate tabs in the Build
Framing dialog. See Framing Defaults/
Build Framing Dialog on page 382.
of floor joists are set below the floor height

by a distance equal to the subfloor sheathing
thickness. The subfloor thickness is detailed
on each numbered Floor tab of the Build
Framing dialog. It can, however, be
overridden for individual rooms in the
Room Specification dialog. See
Structure Tab on page 205.
The height and depth of automatically

produced joists are defined on these same
tabs of the Build Framing dialog. The top
381
Framing
Automatic Framing
Joist Orientation
If a Joist Direction
line exists somewhere in the platform, it dictates the
direction of the floor or ceiling joists
when automatic framing is generated.
If there is no Joist Direction
line,
automatically generated joists will run
perpendicular to and across any Floor/
Some other important things to remember:
Rafters and joists that are parallel to a

roof truss will not be generated closer
than 14 inches (350mm) to the truss.
Automatically produced rafters and joists

will not cross an existing truss, but will
generate from the eave inward until they
butt into a truss.
Rafters and hip ridges can pass over a

drop hip truss. See Drop Hip on page
420.
Lookouts can pass over a reduced gable

truss. See the graphic in Truss Base on
page 413.
When rafters are parallel to trusses, the

tops of the rafters are placed in line with
the tops of the trusses. Since the depth of
a rafter is normally greater than that of a
truss's top chord, the lower rafter edge
will be below the top plate of the supporting wall, requiring a birdsmouth cut into
the rafter. If the truss is raised to provide
space for insulation, the rafter may not
need to be cut at all. If the truss is raised
too much, however, the rafter may not
rest on the top plate at all.
Ceiling Beam
or Bearing Line
you have drawn.
If there are no Floor/Ceiling Beam

or Joist Direction
lines, automatically generated joists will run across the
shortest distance on a platform.
Rafters and Trusses

If you plan to mix roof trusses with rafters
and/or ceiling joists, you can save time
laying out framing by:
Check the Trusses box in the Build

Roof dialog before checking Build Roof
Planes in the Build Roof dialog to automatically build a roof. This also affects
positioning of manually drawn roof
planes if their baseline is drawn over a
wall.
Draw and position all roof trusses before

using the automatic framing generator to
produce rafters and ceiling joists. See
Floor and Ceiling Trusses on page 408.

The type of framing; its size and spacing; and
other details are specified for the major
382
components of the 3D model in the Build

Framing or Framing Defaults dialog.
Note: The Build
Framing dialog is
identical to the Framing Defaults
dialog with one exception: the Build
Framing dialog has Build check boxes
on its various tabs which, when selected,

build the framing components of the plan.
The major components of framing are: floor
platforms; ceiling platforms; walls; and roof
assemblies. When automatic framing is
generated, information from this dialog is
used to model framing correctly.
Automatic framing is built by selecting the
Build check box on the appropriate tabs of
the Build Framing dialog, then clicking
OK. When automatic framing is built, any

previously existing automatically produced
framing of the same type for the same floor is
deleted and replaced with new. Floor or
ceiling framing that you manually drew will
remain with the newly produced automatic
framing.
Select Build> Framing> Build Framing
or double-click the Framing Tools
parent button to open the Build Framing
dialog. The number of tabs in the dialog will
vary depending on how many floors are in
your model. There will be a tab called "1st"
for the first floor; "2nd" for the second floor;
and so on.
Floor Tabs
The Build Framing dialog opens at the
current floors framing tab, for example,
Foundation, 1st or 2nd. Each tab specifies
framing for specific floors or assemblies.
You can switch between tabs to define all
settings.
3
5
7
A floor below must exist before a platform

can be framed for it. For example, if you
have a first floor plan but have not yet
created a foundation, the Build Floor
Framing check box on the Foundation tab
will not be available until a foundation level
is created.
9
10
11
12
6
8
383
Framing
Framing for platforms is defined on tabs that

correspond to floors in the model. There are
two sections for each floor, Ceiling above
and Subfloor for floor above.
1 Build Ceiling Framing - Check this
box and ceiling framing will be

regenerated when the OK button is clicked.
2 Spacing - Enter a value for the spacing

of joists. If the platform is a floor
assembly, you can specify a rim joist with
the check box.
3 Specify if the framing members lap or
butt over a bearing wall. The lap is

eight inches (200 mm) and centered over the
support.
When the Framing Reference Marker is used
and butt over support is checked, the joists
are placed at reference spacing. If lap over
support is checked, the surface where the
joists lap is placed at the reference spacing
locations, so that joists will appear to either
side of the framing reference locations.
4 Use Framing Reference - This applies

to ceiling framing only. The Framing
Reference Marker is the starting point for
framing layout. If a reference is placed, the
center of the first joist is placed at this point
and spacing goes from there. If joists are
lapped, the surface is placed at this point.
If the check box is cleared, the program will
attempt to position ceiling joists so that they
overlap rafters. Be sure to build the roof
framing first if you are doing this.
A Framing Reference Marker is not usually
used for both ceiling joists and nearby rafters
that run the same way because one is placed
on top of the other.
384
For floor joists, the starting point for a joist

layout is always the Framing Reference
Marker. See Framing Reference Markers
on page 394.
5 The Joist width field specifies the

joist's actual thickness.
6 The Joist depth field specifies the
joist's vertical depth, which affects the

thickness of the floor or ceiling platform.
This is a default depth that can be overridden
per room by specifying Floor Structure
Thickness on the Structure tab of the Room
on page 205.
7 Type - Select the type of joist from the
menu. The list includes lumber, I-joist,

glulam, engineered lumber, lvl, steel-I and
steel box. Changing the type does not affect
how framing is placed. It does, however,
change how its appearance in cross section
and 3D views and in the Material List.
This is a default type that can be overridden

per room by specifying Floor Structure
Type on the Structure tab of the Room
on page 205.
8 Blocking / Bridging specifies how
blocking is manually drawn after joists

have been placed. A run of blocking displays
as separate pieces cut by the joists; it is,
however, produced, moved and edited as a
single object.
In Line produces blocking pieces that align
with each other.
Stagger produces blocking that alternates on
either side of the line you draw.
Cross produces cross bridging that looks like

in line blocking in floor plan view, but shows
as cross bridging in 3D views and the
materials list.
Specify the Spacing.
9
10 Rim Joist - This applies to floor
framing only. Check this to automatically produce a rim joist across the ends of
the floor joists. If this is not checked, line
blocking across the ends of the floor joists is
usually drawn in later.
locations, so that joists will appear to either

side of the framing reference locations.
12 Subfloor thickness - This is the
thickness of the floor sheathing and

applies to floor framing only.
The program adds the joist depth to the
subfloor thickness to determine the default
platform thickness in the Floor Defaults
dialog. This is a default thickness that can be
overridden by specifying it in the Structure
tab of the Room Specification dialog.
11 Specify if the framing members lap or
When viewing framing, Subfloor Thickness

may be represented by a gap. To remove this
gap, change the value to zero and rebuild the
framing. See Structure Tab on page 205.
When the Framing Reference Marker is used

and butt over support is checked, the joists
are placed at reference spacing. If lap over
support is checked, the surface where the
joists lap is placed at the reference spacing
If the material Concrete is applied to the

floor, platform thickness is specified in the
Foundation Defaults dialog. See
Building a Foundation on page 274.
butt over a bearing wall. The lap is

eight inches (200 mm) and centered over the
support.
Wall Tab
1
3
11
10
385
Framing
The Wall, Openings, and Headers tabs are all

referenced by the program to determine how
walls are framed. The settings on these three
tabs define how automatic framing generates
and how wall framing is calculated for the
Material List.
You can still make changes to your plan
once you have framed your model. If
your changes affect framing, if a wall or ceiling were moved for instance, rebuild framing
to update the model.
Wall
1 Build Wall Framing - Check this box
to build wall framing for the entire

model. Framing will be built only in walls
whose main layer materials type is framing.
See Wall Type Definitions on page 156.
2 Specify the Stud Thickness. If its
material is set to one of the Framing

materials, the depth of the stud is set by the
wall's main layer thickness.
3 Specify the Stud Spacing. This spacing
starts from the framing reference mark,

if one is present.
4 Build Wall Framing Details from
Exterior - Select the check box to

display wall framing details from the
exterior.
5 Bridging - specifies how and where

bridging is produced. Bridging appears
as separate pieces divided by the studs, but is
actually produced as a single object for each
wall and can be moved and edited in a Wall
Detail view as if it were a single object. See
Wall Framing Details on page 400.
386
Exterior - Check this to automatically

produce bridging on external walls when
wall framing is build.
Interior - Check this to automatically
produce bridging on internal walls when wall
framing is built.
6 In Line produces bridging pieces that
align with each other. This applies to

automatically produced or manually drawn
bridging in the wall detail.
Stagger produces bridging that alternates on

either side of a center line along the wall.
This applies to automatically produced or
manually drawn bridging in the wall detail.
Plates
7 Specify the Number of Top Plates. A
single bottom plate is always provided.
8 Specify the Thickness of top and

bottom plates.
Mitre Ends of Angle Walls

9 Mitre Plate Ends - Select the check
box to mitre the ends of the top and

bottom plates and corners that are not right
angles. If cleared, the top and bottom plates
will be butted together.
10 Rotate End Studs - Select the check
box to have the studs closest to the

mitre end be rotated to the angle of the mitre
cut. If it is cleared, the studs will remain
perpendicular to the angle of the walls.
11 Horizontal Frame Thru - Select the
check box to specify the horizontal

walls in floor plan view to frame through,
butting vertical walls against them.
Framing
Otherwise, walls that are vertical in floor

plan view will frame through.
Openings Tab
1
3
5
7
2
4
8
9
Add for Rough Opening

Sets the default amount to add to nominal
opening sizes to produce the rough opening
sizes.
Entering a value here defines the default
value for rough openings displayed on the
General tab of the Window and Door
Specification dialogs.
The rough opening of an individual window
or door can be overridden on the General tab
of the Window or Door Specification
dialog. The specification dialogs show these
values differently in that they show the total
amount added to the opening for both height
and width. For the width, if defaulted, this
would be twice the Each Side value in the
Build Framing dialog, and for the height it
would be the sum of the Top and Bottom
values.
1 Top - Specify the space to allow from
the top of the opening to the bottom of

the header.
2 Bottom - Specify the space to allow
from the bottom of the opening to the

top of the sill plate.
3 Each Side - Specify the space to allow
from each side of an opening to the side

of the trimmer or stud nearest it.
Trimmer
Normally one trimmer, or stud supporting a
header, is placed on each side of an opening.
This number can be increased based on the
width of an opening.
4 Double Trimmer At - Openings as
wide as this value have two trimmers

on each side.
5 Triple Trimmer At - Openings as wide

as this value have three trimmers.
387
6 Max Bay Trimmers - Trimmers for the
overall bay or bow window may be

suppressed by entering zero into Max Bay
Trimmers. Enter 1 to have one trimmer on
each side, and a greater number to have the
number of trimmers determined by the
Double Trimmer At and Triple Trimmer
At values used above.
A bay window whose top is lower than the

top of the wall in which it is placed will
usually contain a header spanning the entire
bay. Trimmers are usually not needed for this
header since the studs in the wall will support
it. The same is true for most bow windows.
7 Bay Component Thickness - Enter the
dimensions for a thinner trimmer which

is used if a standard trimmer does not fit. The
default for this value is 3/4 inch or 20mm.
Space can be tight in a bay or bow window,
and a desired component window size may
not fit into the bay or bow if standard size
trimmers are used. If this is the case, the
trimmers are omitted and a metal bracket or
other means of supporting the header is
needed.
Bay window components default to a size
that allows one standard trimmer when a bay
is first created. When the bay as a whole is
388
moved and resized, its components

automatically resize to fit a standard trimmer.
If you select the bay and use the Tab key to
select the individual component window on
which you clicked, you can resize that
component either by selecting it and
dragging from a side handle, or by selecting
it and clicking the Open Object
edit
button in order to modify it using the
Window Specification dialog. You can
resize it larger until there is only room for the
thinner trimmer or for no trimmer at all.
Once a component is resized in this way, it
will retain its size if at all possible while the
overall bay is moved or resized. If the bay is
resized in such a way that the component
becomes too large to fit, the component
resumes its default behavior, resizing as its
containing bay window is resized.
Sills
8 Thickness - Specify the thickness for
the sill. This is the size of the framing

below the window: not the window sill itself.
9 Double Sill - Check this box to specify
a Double Sill for all windows. The sill

settings are for the framing members below
the window: not the window sill itself.
Framing
Headers Tab
3
5
4
6
Chief Architect does not calculate loads

or bearings. It is dependent upon user
input and does not attempt any structural
analysis. Always consult your local building
authorities and contact a licensed engineer
for structural calculations.
1 Specify the header depth dependent on

the opening width. These values should
be set so that the wider the opening, the
deeper the header.
2 Precut - Select the check box to show
precut headers in the Material List.

Precut headers are shown only if the walls
have been framed.
If this is unchecked, the Material List

produces a total footage for all headers.
When checked, each different length of
precut header is listed separately. Note that
the total number of headers will be twice the
number of openings if Count is set to 2.
3 Thickness - Specify header thickness.

4 Count - Enter the Count of boards
required to make the header. Using this

number, the program generates a count of
header stock for you in the Material List.
When using stock as thin as 1-1/2 inches,
headers are usually doubled or laminated, so
the default number of boards making up a
header in Count is 2.
5 Max Depth - If the top of the rough
opening is closer to the top plate than

the value in Max Depth, a solid header is
produced to fill the entire area. This disables
the building of short cripple studs between
the top of the header top and bottom of the
plate. The default of 12 1/16 inch works well
for 68 headers in 80 walls.
6 Type - Specify the type of material

used for headers.
389
Posts/Beams Tab
3
2
6
7
8
11
All beams are drawn manually. They are not

produced with the automatic framing.
1 Depth - Enter the vertical depth of the

beam.
2 Thickness - Enter the beam thickness,

which displays as width in floor plan
view.
3 Type -Select the type of beam from the

steel box. Changing the type can affect how
the beam appears in cross section and 3D
views and in the Material List.
4 Under Joists/With Joists - A beam can

be drawn under the joists or up in the
floor platform with the joists. If the joist
depths and subfloor thickness have been set
in the Build Framing dialog, the beam
height will be properly positioned even if the
joists have not yet been produced. If With
390
10
Joists is specified the beams should be

drawn before framing is automatically
produced. Then the joists will be broken and
butted to the beam.
5 Outer Layer/Main Layer - When a
beam is drawn along and over an

exterior wall, its outer surface will snap to
either the walls outer layer or outer main
layer, as specified here.
Posts are produced manually by clicking in
floor plan view where a post is desired using
the Post
tool.
6 Dimension - A post is created initially
square with each side having this

dimension. It can be subsequently edited to
have a rectangular shape with any
dimensions.
7 Type - Select the type of post from the

steel box. Changing the type can affect how

the post appears in cross section and 3D
views and in the Material List.
8 Top (from floor) - A footing is

automatically produced when a post is
created on the lowest floor. The top of this
footing will be this distance below the floor
surface.
9 Width - Width of the automatically

produced footing under a new post.
10 Height - Height of the automatically

produced footing under a new post.
11 Square/Round - The new footing is
created either square or round in floor

plan view.
Roof Tab
1
3
2
4
5
6
1 Build Roof Framing - Check this box
once roof planes have been built to

build roof framing for the entire model.
2 Spacing - Specify the rafter spacing.
This spacing is used when

automatically producing rafters. It also sets
the initial offset value for laying out rafters
using the Multiple Copy
edit button.
Use Framing Reference - Select the

check box if you want to use a defined
starting point for rafter layout.
Note: Use Framing Reference is useful

when framing a gable roof, but not necessarily for a hip roof. When the Framing Reference is used, common rafters on either side
of a hip rafter will not meet in the same place.
If the Framing Reference is not used, the
automatic framing utility starts common rafter
spacing from each end of the horizontal
ridges, which results in common rafters on
either side of hip jacks meeting each other.
391
Framing
4 If Angled
Dormer Hole is
checked, a gable roof
dormer creates a five
sided hole in a roof
plane, with the two top
edges formed by the
valleys of the dormer.
An angled doubleheader runs between
the doubled rafters on
one side to the ridge.
On the opposite side, a shorter angled
doubled header frames the other valley.
If the Angled Dormer
Hole check box is
cleared, a rectangular
hole is framed to
contain the dormer
area, with its double
headers placed where
the peak of the dormer
roof meets the main
roof plane. Rafters are
placed within this hole at the top along the
valleys formed by the dormer roof sections.
If the top cross headers do not fit within the
roof plane, angled headers are produced
regardless of the state of the check box.
Rafter Type - Select the type of rafter
from the menu. The list includes
lumber, I-joist, glulam, engineered lumber,
lvl, steel-I and steel box. This changes the
type for rafters, but not for ridges or fascia.
392
These can be changed manually after the roof

framing is produced if desired.
Changing the type does not affect how the
rafters are placed. It does, however, change
how they appear in cross section and 3D
views and the Material List entries for this
framing.
6 Blocking/Bridging - specifies how
blocking will be manually drawn after

the rafters have been placed. Blocking is
produced as a single object, but appears as
separate pieces chopped up by the rafters. It
is moved and edited as if it were a single
framing object, however.
Blocking is produced perpendicular to the
roof plane, so blocking as seen in floor plan
view represents the position of the top of the
blocking.
In Line produces blocking pieces that align
with each other.
Stagger produces blocking that alternates on
either side of the line you draw.
Cross produces cross bridging that looks like
in line blocking in floor plan view, but shows
as cross bridging in 3D views and the
materials list. Cross bridging is seldom used
with rafters.
7 The Width and Depth for Rafter,
Ridge, Fascia, Eave Fascia and

Lookouts may all be set in the Roof tab.
Framing
Trusses Tab
5
6
The parameters set in this tab apply to any

subsequently drawn trusses. They can be
overridden for any selected group of trusses
using the Truss Specification dialog. The
program uses these values to model trusses
for graphic representation only.
Chief Architect does not engineer
trusses. Always consult an engineer or
truss company to have your trusses
designed.
1 Top Chord - Specify the depth of the

Top Chord.
2 Bottom Chord - Specify the depth of

the Bottom Chord.
3 Webbing - Specify the depth of the

Webbing.
4 For triangular trusses, check Require
Kingpost to require a vertical member

from the roof peak to the bottom chord.
If this is not checked, a vertical member may
still be supplied, depending on what is
needed to support the chords at or closer than
the specified maximum spans.
5 Under Maximum Span, set the
maximum length between junctions of

the supporting webbing to the Top Chord
and Bottom Chord. Changing these values
may cause different truss configurations such
as kingpost, queenpost, fink, howe, fan,
double fink, or double howe to be
represented. Experiment to see what type of
trusses are possible.
These distances are measured horizontally
for both rafters and joists. In some
circumstances, especially with more
complex trusses, making these spans equal
393
may result in the webbing appearing more

normal or standard. See Trusses on page
407.
6 Roof and Floor/Ceiling - Specifies
whether the settings apply to Roof

trusses or Floor/Ceiling trusses.
Truss Spacing
To set the truss spacing, select any truss,
framing object, or CAD object in floor plan
view, then click the Multiple Copy
edit
button. The Multiple Copy dialog opens if
the Multiple Copy
edit button is clicked
again. This dialog sets the truss spacing as
well as spacing for CAD objects. The
spacing for joists, rafters and wall studs
displays but cannot be set in this dialog.
These spacings are set in the Build
Framing dialog.
Materials Tab
The Material tab sets the default materials
used for framing objects appearing in 3D and
render views. These material specifications
are not used for material take-offs. Materials
List information, is derived from the
structure type of each framing object.
Changes made on the Materials tab of the
Build Framing dialog only effect
subsequently created framing, whether it is
automatically generated or manually drawn.
The Materials tab of the Build Framing
dialog is the same as the Materials tab on
many other specification dialogs. See

Framing Reference Markers are
reference points that specify how to lay
out automatically-produced framing. Layout
for wall, ceiling and floor framing will start
at the closest framing reference marker
measured from the center of the area to be
framed.
394
If no framing reference marker is found on

the floor being framed, the closest framing
reference marker on the first floor is used.
Normally, a single framing reference marker
on the first floor plan is used for the entire
house.
Wall framing and automatically-produced
floor joists are always positioned by the
program using the framing reference marker.

you can elect not to use the framing reference
marker for positioning rafters and ceiling
joists in the Framing dialog.
Note: If no framing reference markers exist in
your plan, the point at 0, 0 is used as the
framing reference marker location.
If no framing reference markers exist in your

plan, the point at 0, 0 is used as the framing
reference marker location. To find this point:
1.
Toggle to CAD mode in floor plan

view.
2.
Click the Point

child button, and
double-click in floor plan view to produce a new point. The Move Point dialog will open.
3.
Select the Absolute Location check box

and enter 0 in each of the X Distance
and Y Distance boxes.
4.
Click OK and the point will be moved to

the (0, 0) location.
Typically, this point is not near the floor plan.

It is a good idea to place at least one framing
reference marker on the first floor.
Placing Framing
Reference Markers
To place a Framing Reference Marker, select
Build> Framing> Framing Reference
Marker
. Click in floor plan view to
place the framing reference marker, where it
will display A corner of the first framing
member will snap to this point and all other
framing members will be laid out from there.
Framing reference markers snap to CAD

objects first, and then to a wall main layer
surface or corner if possible. To accurately
position a marker, first position a CAD point
then create the marker on top of it.
A framing reference marker can be moved by
selecting it and dragging from the handle that
appears. When moved, the marker will snap
to a CAD point; a wall main layer; or a
corner. A Framing Reference Marker
can be modified just like other markers. For
more information on markers, see Markers
on page 722.
Using Framing References

Manually drawn joists, rafters, trusses
and studs can be moved a proper
distance from a framing reference marker.
Any selected group of framing objects that
are all parallel to each other can be moved
using the Move to Framing Ref
button.
These should have proper spacing relative to
each other before the move. Only one of the
objects is compared to the framing reference
and moved: the remaining objects are simply
moved the same amount as the first object.
To move a group of framing objects to a
framing reference marker, you must:
1.
Group select the framing objects.
2.
Click the Move to Framing Ref

button that appears in the Edit toolbar.
3.
The framing members will be moved to

the nearest Framing Reference Marker.
The Move to Framing Ref

button
references the on center spacing distance set
395
Framing
in the Build Framing dialog, when it

positions a joist relative to the framing
reference marker. The first joist will be this
distance from the reference marker.
The spacing that will be used for moving any
framing object can be viewed by selecting
the object and double-clicking on the
edit button. The Copy
Layout Distances dialog that displays
Multiple Copy
will show the spacing for each framing

object type. The initial spacing for floor and
ceiling joists depends on the platform
containing them. The default spacing for a
platform is set in the Build Framing dialog.
A spacing specific to a particular floor or
ceiling platform is set in a joist direction Line
contained within the platform. See Joist
Direction Lines on page 397.
Bearing Lines
Bearing lines are drawn just like lines
or walls: they can be single, straight
lines or drawn in segments that jog. Select
Build> Framing> Bearing Line
Bearing lines can be modified just like CAD

lines and polylines. See CAD Objects on
page 725.
If a bearing line exists, the program will lap

or butt the joist and/or rafters over the line,
depending on the option selected in the
Build Framing dialog. See Floor Tabs on
page 383.
396
Bearing lines will snap to the center of

nearby walls when framing is built.
The following illustrations of a single
bearing line and of a polyline bearing line
demonstrate their effects on automatic
framing.
A bearing line should start outside the floor

or ceiling platform and end outside of it,
passing completely through the building.
A platform can be split into two with a
bearing line. Then the joist direction and/or
depth can be specified on each side of the
bearing line. Each new platform takes on
properties given by the joist direction line it

contains, as described below.
Note: Always rebuild framing after drawing

the Bearing Line in order to update the model
using the new information.

A joist direction line defines the
direction in which joists will be laid
out. Every floor platform can have its own
joist direction. If a direction line is not
specified, the joists are run the way that
makes them shortest.
Joist Direction
The Joist Direction Line contains the joist
depth and spacing information for the floor
or ceiling platform containing it.
Select Build> Framing> Joist Direction

and draw a joist direction line as you
would draw a CAD line or a wall.
The text along the joist direction line gives
the joist size and spacing for the platform.
Unless redefined in the individual joist
direction line, these values reflect the
settings specified on the appropriate floor tab
of the Build Framing dialog.
To change this information:

1.
Click on the Joist Direction Line and

edit button.
The Joist Direction Specification
dialog will open.
397
Framing
2.
Define the Spacing of the joists in the

platform.
3.
Define the Depth for these joists, but

that is no longer recommended for floor
platforms since version 9.0. You should
instead use the Floor Structure Thickness and Subfloor Thickness boxes in
the Structure tab of the Room
Specification dialog for the rooms
over these platforms.
platforms in order to define a single framing

specification for both platforms. This is
illustrated by the following example:
A 1 1/2 story house with an upstairs room
partially under the eave is shown in cross
section in the diagram.
Ceiling platform
The Joist Direction Line changes the joist

specification for the entire platform, but does
not affect the settings in the Build Framing
dialog. Settings in the Joist Direction
Specification dialog affect subsequently
produced framing only in the platform that
contains the selected joist direction.
.
Note: For the Depth value to take effect,

Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings to regenerate the platform with the proper thickness.
Using Joist Direction Lines

Two Joist Direction Lines, one on either
side of a Bearing Line, can split a platform
into two for the purpose of defining different
framing specifications for each area.
A less common application would be to use a
single joist direction line across two separate
398
Floor Platform
Normally, the program produces a floor

platform under the second floor living area
and ceiling platforms under the eave area,
which is designated an Attic room type.
This is fine if the first floor has supporting
walls or a large beam under the second floor
kneewalls. If it does not, the floor platform
should extend to the first floor outside
supporting walls, replacing the ceiling joists.
Use joist direction lines to define separate
floor platforms under the second floor living
area and ceiling platforms under the attic
eave area or one continuous framed platform
across both spaces.
To connect a floor and ceiling platform into a
single platform, draw a Joist Direction Line
that crosses the boundary between them.
Following is a diagram of the original
framing with the new Joist Direction Line
spanning the knee wall area.
Framing
New Joist
Direction Line
Original
Framing
(Note: Several framing members have been

deleted to make the new Joist Direction Line
more visible.)
Although the second floor framing is being
edited, the joist direction is drawn on the first
floor. The affected floor and ceiling framing
displays with the first floor because the first
floor walls are supporting the framing, so its
joist direction information must appear there
as well.
Knee Wall on 2nd

Floor shown in
reference.
The 3D view of the framing also reflects the

change.
Floor and
Ceiling Joists
are combined.
You must click the Rebuild Walls/ Floors/

Ceilings
button after placing a Joist
Direction Line before the changes will take
effect.
Then rebuild the floor framing for the second
floor and the ceiling framing for the first
floor. The floor framing now spans into the
area which was previously framed using
ceiling joists.
399
Wall Framing Details

Wall framing is produced when the Build
Wall Framing check box on the Wall tab of
the Build Framing dialog is selected. Wall
framing displays in floor plan; 3D; and cross
section/elevation views. A Wall Detail for
each wall in the model is also created when
framing is built.
Wall Details are special elevation views of
the wall framing. Unlike CAD details, a wall
framing detail cannot be opened from the
CAD Details dialog.
To open a wall framing detail from floor plan
view, select a wall and click the Open Wall
Detail
edit button. If no framing has been
produced for a particular wall, the Open
Wall Detail
edit button will not display
when the wall is selected.
A wall framing detail is comprised of a
polyline that forms the boundary of the wall
and the framing members within the wall.
The framing members of a wall are the studs,
plates and headers. These are standard
framing objects and are placed the Framing,
Wall layer in the Layer Display Options
dialog.
When you open a detail, inspect it and
carefully compare the framing layout to your
model.
A wall framing detail shows the wall as it
would appear if viewed from the inside.
Change this interior view to an exterior view
by selecting the Build Wall Framing
Details from the Exterior check box on the
Wall tab of the Build Framing dialog. See
Wall Tab on page 385.
400
Wall framing details for interior walls are

displayed from the inside as well, but it can
sometimes be difficult to tell which is the
inside edge. Temporarily change the line
color of the bottom line for the interior wall
type in the Wall Type Definitions dialog,
and the inside edge will become obvious in
floor plan view. To display the wall detail
from the opposite side for any interior wall,
select the wall, open it and select Flip
Layers on the General tab of the Wall
Specification dialog. Rebuild wall
framing and the wall framing detail will now
display from the opposite side.
Most framing objects occupy the entire
thickness of the wall main layer. Some, such
as a component of a doubled header or a
corner sheetrock nailer, may be turned flat
and oriented to one side of the wall.
Doubled headers appear one behind the other
in the wall framing detail. Access doubled
objects by clicking on one, then pressing the
key or Next
other.
Tab
edit button to select the
The boundary of a wall detail is a polyline

that marks the boundary of the wall framing.
The polyline is placed on the Wall Polyline
layer in the Layer Display Options dialog
and is not typically displayed. You may find
it helpful, however, to display it for reference
if you are extensively editing the wall. The
layer should remain locked.
If any wall framing has been produced, the
framing objects in each wall are included in
the Material List, displaying an accurate
accounting of each type, amount, and length
of the required framing objects.
Note: When a wall or an opening is modified,

the framing detail is not be automatically
updated. Rebuild wall framing to show the
changes. If wall framing has not been built, it
is only estimated for the Material List.
Any edits made to wall framing in the wall

detail will be lost if you rebuild the wall
framing from the Build Framing dialog. To
prevent this for a particular wall or group of
walls, select them; open the Wall
Specification dialog; and check Retain
Wall Framing on the General tab.

Before building any framing, review the
settings on all tabs of the Build
Framing dialog.
Select CAD> Boxes and Framing>

Framing
to draw studs and plates in wall
details. You can also use it to draw a general
framing object in floor plan view, although
these framing objects are seldom used.
Draw a framing member by dragging as you

would a line or a wall. By default, a framing
object will measure 1 1/2 inches or 38mm
thick. The depth is determined by the width
of the walls main layer.
When drawing in a wall detail, the framing
member is placed in the wall.
If you draw a general framing member in
floor plan view, the top of the framing
member is placed at height 0.
Displaying Framing
In Floor Plan View
Joists and rafters are represented in floor plan
view by CAD objects that are essentially
long, thin rectangles. Framing and trusses
can instead be represented by a single line by
checking Use line for framing on the Line
dialog. See Line Properties Panel on page
108.
In Cross Section/
Elevation Views
cross section plane appear as boxes

containing an X.
You must have the desired framing types set
to display in 3D views in order to see the
cross boxes. These are set in the Layer
Framing objects can be moved and edited in
cross section/elevation and 3D views. Most
editing of platform and roof framing objects
is best done in floor plan view; however, wall
framing can be edited only in a wall detail.
Framing objects can appear in cross section/

elevations and 3D views. In a cross section/
elevation, framing objects that are cut by the
401
Framing
Editing Framing
If changes are made to a plan that affect
framing, select Build> Structure> Rebuild
four-headed arrow when over the Move

handle.
Walls/Floors/Ceilings
, and then open
the Build Framing dialog to rebuild
affected areas of framing. For example, if a
window is moved or resized, wall framing
must be rebuilt. If the footprint is enlarged,
the wall framing and any roof or platform
framing that is affected must also be rebuilt.
In floor plan view, drag using the Move

handle and the framing member will move
either along or perpendicular to its direction.
It will stop when it hits another framing
object or slab. To continue moving through
such an object, hit the Ctrl key during the
move and continue.
Once these things are done, you can edit

individual or groups of framing members.
In floor plan view, to change the length by

dragging:
Moving and Resizing Framing

The length or thickness of any framing
member can be changed in floor plan view
by selecting and dragging it from the
appropriate handle, just as CAD boxes are
edited.
There are three handles very close together at
the center of the object: a Resize handle in
the middle of each edge, and a Move handle
at the center of the framing member. Sometimes, the program will locate the Move
handle off to one side for easier access.
Due to the narrowness of framing members,
all three handles are in approximately the
same location unless you zoom in very close
to the center of the framing member.
The pointer changes to a two-headed arrow
when over a Resize handle. It changes to a
Regenerating Framing
If you modify your plan, move walls, raise or
lower platforms or redesign the roof, you
402
1.
Select the framing member by clicking

on the end you want to drag. A handle
will appear at that end.
2.
Drag the handle to resize the length. The

length can be changed more precisely in
the Framing Specification dialog.
Because it is sometimes difficult to select a

handle, it may be preferable to change the
width of a framing member in the Framing
Specification dialog, or Zoom In
for
more detail.
Moving and Resizing

Framing in 3D Views
Framing members can be selected, moved
and resized in vector views similar to the
way a cabinet or soffit is edited. See Editing
Objects in 3D Views on page 634.
must Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings

and also regenerate automatically produced
framing.
When floor, ceiling or roof framing is
regenerated, all automatically produced
framing objects and any copies of them are
deleted and new framing will be calculated.
Any manually drawn framing objects and
copies of them will be retained.
When wall framing is regenerated, all objects

in each wall Detail are deleted and
regenerated unless Retain Wall Framing is
checked in the General tab of the Wall
Specification dialog for that wall.
If the floor plans are not final, do not spend a
lot of time altering or copying automatically
produced framing objects. It is best to wait
until your design is final before doing any
detailed framing work.

Each framing member created in the plan is
counted in the Material List. This list is as
accurate as the framing in the plan that
produces it.
Depending on the type of framing member, it
may show as R (Roofing), SF (Sub Floor), or
F (Framing general):
R (Roofing) contains trusses, rafters and
sheathing .
1.
If no framing has been produced in the

model, then the amount of framing that
would be produced is estimated as accurately as possible. Total lineal footage
for various depths of rafter and joist
material is given, rather than a quantity
of specific lumber lengths and sizes.
2.
If framing objects exist, then the framing

members are counted instead of estimated for the Material List.
SF (Sub Floor) contains all floor and ceiling

framing joists including sheathing.
Roof framing is treated the same way.
F (Framing general) contains all wall

framing and the framing members created by
a CAD framing box.
1.
It is important to note that the Material List

can be produced two ways.
If no roof framing objects are found, an

estimation is done.
If even one rafter is created, the program

assumes roof framing has been produced and
the Material List produces a count of the
rafters found in the model.
See Materials Lists on page 937.
Framing Specification Dialog

Select a floor joist; ceiling joist; or rafter and
edit button to
open the Framing Specification dialog

for the framing member type selected.
403
Framing
General Tab
5
6
1
7
2
3
1 Changing one of the following three
objects can cause changes in the other

two. Checking the radio button in front of
one of the following three objects will
prevent that objects value from changing.
Top Height is the height of the top of the
framing object. This is an absolute height,
where 0 is the first floor. For a rafter this is
the top height at its low end.
Bottom Height is the height of the bottom of
the framing object. This is an absolute
height, where 0 is the first floor. For a rafter
this is the bottom height its low end.
Depth is the depth of the framing object. For
a rafter this is the depth measured
perpendicular to the roof plane.
Raise/Lower - Enter a value to raise or lower
the framing object from its current position.
Once a value is entered, the other controls
are disabled. The amount is added to both the
top height and the bottom height when you
click OK, and will not affect the depth.
404
2 Length of the framing object. For a
rafter this length is measured along the

top of the rafter, and so is greater than the
length measured in floor plan view.
Changing this expands or contracts the
framing object about the location specified
by the radio buttons described below.
3 Angle of the framing object in floor
plan view. Changing this rotates the

object about the location specified by the
radio buttons descirved below.
4 Set the location about which the
framing object will expand or rotate.

Start refers to the location from which you
started drawing the framing object.
5 Set the framing objects Thickness,
which appears as its width in floor plan
view.
6 Type - Select the type of joist from the

steel box. Changing the type does not affect
7 Manual Rafter Height - This
checkbox only displays for rafters.

Normally, the height of each end of a rafter is
reset after any move or edit so that it is
located just under the roof surface. Check
this box to allow the height of the rafter to be
changed.
Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab

Materials Tab

Select a beam and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Beam
Fill Style Tab

General Tab
Materials Tab
The General Tab of the Beam

Specification dialog is the same as the
General Tab of the Framing
Specification dialog for joists. See
Framing Specification Dialog on page 403.

Note: If a beam structure type is specified as

concrete, the beam will not appear as such in
the materials list. Instead, the amount of concrete required for all such beams and for all
such posts will be listed. In addition, the
square footage required for beam forms, and
for post forms is also listed.
Line Style Tab

405
Framing
how the framing is placed. It does, however,

change how it appears in cross section and
3D views and the Material List entries for
this framing.
Post Specification Dialog

General Tab
4
1
2
3
1 Lock - These four values are
interrelated. Selecting the radio button

for one of these values will prevent that value
from changing.
2 Top Height is the height of the top of

the post. This is an absolute height,
where 0 is the first floor.
Bottom Height is the height of the bottom of
the post. This is an absolute height, where 0
is the first floor.
Total Height - The height of the post, or the
difference between the top height and the
bottom height.
Raise/Lower - Enter a value to raise or lower
the post from its current position. Once a
value is entered, the other controls are
disabled. The amount is added to both the top
406
height and the bottom height when you click

OK, and will not affect the total height.
3 Post Width 1 & 2- Specify the post

width in each dimension.
Specify the Angle of the posts rotation.
4 Type - Select a type from the drop
down list. Choices include lumber, Ijoist, glulam, engineered lumber, lvl, steel-I
and steel box. Changing the type does not
affect how the post is placed. It does however
change how it appears in cross section, 3D
views, and Material List entries.
Note: If a concrete Type is specified, the post
will not appear as such in the materials list.
Instead, the amount of concrete required for
all concrete beams and posts will be listed.
The square footage required for beam forms,
and for post forms is also listed.
Chapter 15:
Trusses
Trusses
Chapter Overview
There are two basic ways to frame a roof.
The first is commonly called "stickframing",
or sometimes "handstacking" or "cut-andstack". This type of roof incorporates
framing such as rafters, ridges, and ceiling
joists. See Framing on page 377.
The other method is to use prefabricated,
engineered roof trusses. Chief Architect
allows you to design and display a wide
variety of trusses.
Disclaimer
Chief Architect does not engineer trusses.
The trusses displayed by Chief Architect are
for illustrative purposes only. They can show
how trusses will be used in your plan, and
help you communicate to the licensed
engineer who produces your final truss
design where you want your trusses and how
you would like them to work.
Chapter Contents
Floor and Ceiling Trusses

Roof Trusses
Deleting Trusses
Copying Trusses
Moving Trusses
Editing Truss Shape in Cross Section View
Truss Details
Truss Labels
Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing
Truss Base
Hip Trusses
Girder Trusses
Scissors Trusses
Truss Base Specification Dialog
Roof Truss Specification Dialog
Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog
Always have your truss designs

approved by a licensed engineer.
407
Floor and Ceiling Trusses

Floor and ceiling trusses can be used
instead of joists to frame platforms. As
with manually-drawn floor and ceiling
framing, the room type above determines
whether a floor or ceiling truss is drawn. For
example, a truss drawn on the first floor of a
single story home will be a ceiling truss,
while a truss drawn on the first floor of a
two-story building will be a floor truss.
To place floor or ceiling trusses, select
Build> Framing> Floor/Ceiling Truss
or click the Framing Tools
parent button
Roof trusses seek an exterior wall and adjust

their length automatically. Floor trusses, on
the other hand, do not; however, if you start
or end your truss close to a wall surface or
CAD object, the truss will snap to the surface
or object.
The Trusses tab of the Build Framing
dialog contains default settings for floor and
ceiling trusses. See Trusses Tab on page
393. These default settings can be overridden
by the settings in the Floor/Ceiling Truss
Specification dialog. See Floor/Ceiling
Truss Specification Dialog on page 427.
and select the Floor Truss

child tool.
Click and drag to create a truss in your plan.
Roof Trusses
After roof and ceiling planes are
modeled, roof trusses can be built.
Select Build> Framing> Roof Truss
.
Roof trusses can be selected and opened for
specification. See Roof Truss Specification
Dialog on page 424.
Draw a truss as you would a CAD line,
dragging from the start of the truss to the
end. The first truss can be drawn over a gable
end wall or at the ridges end of a hipped
roof. The program will shape the truss so that
it fits properly between the roof and ceiling
planes. One or both ends of the truss may be
truncated if they come against existing roof
trusses. If a truss is drawn across another
truss, it will terminate exactly on the surface
of the existing truss, producing a girder truss.
408
If the roof or ceiling planes vary, so will the

trusses. The ends of a truss may expand or
contract based on the roof and ceiling planes
that define it.
Trusses can end on interior walls. You can
draw a truss that partially crosses the
building by starting and/or ending it at an
interior wall. The end must be within two
feet or 600mm of the interior wall. The truss
will extend over the wall's main layer. Its end
will line up with the main layer surface on
the far side of the wall.
A roof truss can exist only between roof and
ceiling planes. You cannot draw a roof truss
above an area where you have cleared the
Ceiling over this room on the Structure tab
of the Room Specification dialog, If you
have cleared this check box, you must
Roof Trusses
The placement of webbing inside a newly

drawn truss is controlled by the Top Chord
and Bottom Chord settings under Maximum Span on the Trusses tab of the
Framing dialog. See Trusses Tab on page
393.
If you intend to use roof trusses, select the
Trusses (no birdsmouth) check box in the
Build Roof dialog. When this is selected,
the rafter depth that determines the roof
plane thickness is taken from the Top Chord
depth on the Trusses tab of the Framing
dialog. If it is not checked, the roof plane
thickness is determined by the rafter Depth
setting on the Roof tab.
When Trusses (no birdsmouth) is selected
and Raise Off Plate is zero, the bottom edge
of the top chord will bear on the top of the
exterior supporting wall at the outside edge
of the main layer. No birdsmouth is provided.
Attic Trusses
Attic trusses, a useful variation of roof
trusses, can be drawn if a plan contains an
attic area to either side and above an upstairs
room, such as in a cape cod style home. The
following is a typical cross section view of a
building with attic trusses:
Certain conditions should be met before an

attic truss can be built.
Building should be of sufficient width to

allow for attic space.
The pitch, designated in the Build Roof

dialog, should provide appropriate ceiling
height for storage or living space. The
goal is to create a continuous plane from
the roofs ridge to the first story baseline.
Typical pitches for such a condition range
from 8 in 12 to 12 in 12, or greater.
The truss top chord can be raised by entering

the distance from the top plate to the bottom
of the chord in Raise Off Plate in the Build
Roof dialog.
If the program does not have enough
information to model the trusses, an error
message will display. For example, a truss
that is under the roof overhang but not over a
ceiling will produce this message:
Roof and ceiling surfaces too close
together or cannot be found, so cannot
make truss.
The incorrect truss may still appear in floor
plan view with a label of the form TR-*. If
so, it should be deleted or moved. See
Deleting Trusses on page 410.
Once these conditions are met, a roof truss is

ready to be designated as an attic truss.
1.
Select the roof truss in floor plan view,

edit
button to display the Roof Truss
2.
Select the Attic Truss check box and

click OK. See Roof Truss Specification
Dialog on page 424.
409
Trusses
manually draw a ceiling plane before a roof

truss can be drawn over that area.
The final product can be scrutinized in a

framing overview or as a CAD detail, see
Truss Details on page 412.
Deleting Trusses
Trusses of any kind can be individually or
multiply selected and deleted with the Delete
edit button, or by pressing the Delete
key on your keyboard.
Del
Trusses can also be deleted entirely through

the Delete Objects dialog box. See
Delete Objects on page 821.
Copying Trusses
When a truss has been created and edited to
5.
suit your needs, use the Multiple Copy

tool to create duplicates at specified
intervals.
1.
Select the truss to be copied in floor plan

view.
2.
Click the Multiple Copy

button.
3.

edit button
again to open the Multiple Copy dialog. See Copying CAD Objects on
page 792.
4.
Enter the correct spacing in the All

Trusses box. Once set, click OK.
edit
Select the truss and use the Move handle to drag it perpendicularly. The
pointer becomes a four-headed arrow
when it is over the move handle.
6.
New trusses will appear as you drag.

Drag as far as necessary to produce all
desired trusses. Each truss is created
according to the particular Roof/Ceiling/
Truss Base planes above and below it.
If copied trusses become different from the

original as a result of the roof/ceiling planes
around them, their label will be different
from that of the original. See Truss Labels
on page 412.
Moving Trusses
In Floor Plan View
Trusses can be moved just like rafters, joists,
or any other framing objects. When a truss or
framing object is selected, one of the handles
410
displayed is the Move handle. It is unique

because the pointer changes to a four-headed
arrow
when over it. Often, the Move
handle displays off to the side of the truss
rather than exactly in its center to distinguish

it from other handles.
maintain its original settings. See Roof

Truss Specification Dialog on page 424.
Trusses can be dragged perpendicular to their

direction. Edges and corners of roof planes,
as well as other trusses and framing objects,
can block this movement. Press the Ctrl key
when this occurs and continue moving the
truss past the obstruction.
Trusses can be moved to the proper distance

from the Framing Reference Marker spacing
by selecting them and clicking on the Move
If drawn along an exterior wall, it will

snap so that its outer surface is flush with
the outer surface of the wall's main layer.
The center line can snap to the edge or

corner of a nearby roof plane. To prevent
a truss from snapping to a roof plane edge
or other object, zoom in closer while
moving it; or, toggle Object Snaps
off.
When the move is finished, the truss is

updated and will conform to the roof or
ceiling dimensions in its new location. You
may see it lengthen or shorten in floor plan
view. The truss is created as if you had drawn
it in the new location.
If a truss or trusses has been locked, the size
will not update if the truss is moved, but will
edit button that appears
A selected group of trusses that are all

parallel to each other can be moved by the
Move to Framing Ref
edit button.
These should have the proper spacing
relative to each other before the move,
because only one of the trusses is compared
to the framing reference and moved. The
remaining trusses are simply moved the same
amount as the first one. See Framing
Reference Markers on page 394.
In 3D and Render Views

You can select and move a truss in a 3D view
the same as you would a floor or ceilng joist.
The only difference is that the Lock Truss
and Webbing attribute, found in the Roof
Truss Specification dialog, is set so that the
truss will not move back to between the roof
and ceilng planes the next time it is edited or
otherwise changed.

When a truss is viewed at a 90 degree angle
in a cross section/elevation view, its shape
can be edited. Click on the truss to select it
and a surrounding polyline will display with
handles. Move and alter this polyline and the
truss will regenerate inside it. Us this
function to change overhang or truss end
details rather than the overall truss shape.
The Lock Truss and Webbing attribute is set

after editing so that the truss will not reshape
itself back between the roof and ceilng
planes the next time it is edited or otherwise
changed. See Roof Truss Specification
Dialog on page 424.
411
Trusses
When a roof truss is moved or drawn, it will

snap to two things.
to Framing Ref
in the Edit toolbar.
Truss Details
When you draw the first truss, the program
automatically creates a CAD detail named
Truss Detail. Open the Truss Detail by
selecting CAD> CAD Detail
selecting it from the list.
and
identical, only one diagram is given. The

label to the lower left of the diagram gives a
number that designates this truss type in the
floor plan view and in the Material List. The
quantity of each type is also listed.
Note: The Truss Detail is for display of
trusses only. Editing the members that
make up the trusses in the Truss Detail is
not recommended.
To restore Truss Detail that has been edited:
1.
Delete any new members you have

drawn in the detail view.
2.
In floor plan view, select the truss and

edit button to
open the Roof Truss Specification
dialog.
All the trusses used in your plan will be

displayed in this detail. If several trusses are
3.
Click OK and the truss will regenerate

along with its Truss Detail diagram.
Truss Labels
Roof and attic trusses are labeled in floor
plan view in the format TR-xx. Floor and
ceiling trusses are labeled FTR-xx. The xx
follows the consecutive order in which each
distinct truss type or configuration was
created. For example, the first truss type
created will be labeled TR-1; the second will
be labeled TR-2; and so on. Truss labels also
appear in the Truss Detail and the Material
List.
A copied truss will have the same label as the
original if the conditions of the new location
412
are the same as the original. If conditions are

different, the copied truss will be built
differently and will display a different label.
Truss labels are centered on the truss that
they represent. Click on the label to select it
and move it. If the truss is moved, the label
will move with it. Deleting the truss will
delete its label.
You can move a group of truss labels
together. Select the first label, hold the Shift
key and click on other labels to select them.
Click on an already selected label to deselect
it. Once all the labels to be moved are

selected, return to the originally selected
label and drag from its handle.
After you have laid out all the trusses for

your roof, the Build Framing dialog can be
used to create roof framing that will fill in
areas not framed by the trusses.
Open the Framing dialog and select the
Build Roof Framing check box on the Roof
tab. Check that the on-center spacing of the
rafters is correct.
The framing produced will be extended or

truncated where it runs into a truss. The
exception to this truncation is that hip ridges
and common rafters at the end of a hip roof
can pass over a drop hip truss.
Lookouts at a gable end are modeled to pass
over a truss at the gable and end at the next
truss in. Both standard and hip ridges are
chopped into blocking between the trusses.
Truss Base
A Truss Base defines the boundary
separating the tops of normal roof
trusses and valley fill roof trusses that lie
across and above them.
with normal trusses. Starting at its outside

end, the narrow wing is trussed with normal
trusses until the wider wing is reached.
To define a truss base, select Build> Roof>

Truss Base . . Create the truss base as you
would a roof plane or ceiling plane. No
overhang is produced.
The truss base is similar to a roof plane in its
creation and definition. If you select it and
edit button, the
Truss Base Specification dialog will
open. See Truss Base Specification Dialog

on page 422.
Truss bases are used to create valley fill
trusses. The best way to understand valley
fill trusses is the example of an L shaped
house with a gable roof. The wider wing of
this house is trussed through from end to end
413
Trusses
Where the valley begins, valley fill trusses

are placed over the top of the main roof until
the peak of the narrow wing's roof is reached.
Only three valley fill trusses, TR-2, TR-3,

and TR-4, are used in the following example.
Truss Base (triangular - shown hatched)

Valley Fill Trusses (shown darker)
Normal Trusses
Valley Fill trusses climb up roof made using normal trusses

The truss base defines the footprint of the
valley fill trusses on the main roof. In order
to model the trusses correctly, you must draw
the truss base.
If drawn correctly, a truss base should be in
the same plane with, and its baseline should
be collinear with its surrounding roof plane.
414
The purpose of a truss base is to form a

boundary separating normal trusses below
from the valley fill trusses above. You
already know that trusses are built between
roof planes and ceiling planes. A truss
passing through a truss base will be placed
below the plane of the base if it is more
Truss Base
perpendicular to the baseline of the truss

base. It will be built above the plane of the
base if it is more parallel to the baseline.
2. Click here
To create a truss base:

Create an L-shaped house with the roof
plan shown below.
Trusses
1.
1. Draw Truss Base baseline
3.
Move the pointer and click on the point

where the gable intersects the main roof.
4.
The program will create a triangular

truss base.
The truss base is shown hatched in the

diagram below.
The triangular area of overlap between the

main roof and the gable must be defined as a
Truss Base.
2.
Choose Build> Roof> Truss Base

,
then draw a baseline along the outside
edge of the wall from valley to valley.
The baseline is darkened in this diagram.
415
Once the truss base is created, lay out the

trusses.
5.
Draw the first truss.
6.
Select the truss and click the Multiple

Copy
7.
tool.
Drag from the Move handle to create

copies at the defined intervals.
The trusses placed for the main roof will

generate right through the truss base,
stopping on top of the wall, eliminating the
overhang in that area.
Select the truss
10. Drag the normal truss up into the truss

base. Copies of the truss will appear as
you drag the pointer.
Note: No overhang in this area.
416
8.
When the main trusses are in place, draw

the first truss on the gable in a position
where it will be full length.
9.
Select the truss and click the Multiple

Copy
edit button on the Edit toolbar.
Note: Trusses which run perpendicular to the

baseline of a Truss Base will go under the
Truss Base. Trusses which run parallel to the
baseline of the Truss Base will climb the
Truss Base.
As you drag the truss copies will appear to all

be full length.
Hip Trusses
Trusses
the three valley trusses which are darker

in the diagram below.
Drag the truss
11. Release the mouse button, the copies

will be clipped by the truss base. Note
Hip Trusses
Hip roofs with various truss applications can
be modeled, including step down hip trusses;
sub-girder hip trusses; and drop hip or
California trusses. Decide which method you

will use and manually place your trusses
accordingly.
Step Down Hip

The first illustration shows a Step Down hip.
The flat-topped trusses are called hip trusses.
Alternating hip trusses have been colored
differently in the diagram below.
417
Jack Trusses
Hip Trusses (4)
Step Down Hip
Step Down hips are the quickest hip truss

framing to produce. First, draw a truss
crossing the apex of the triangular hip roof
plane. It should snap exactly into position.
1.
Select the truss, click the Multiple Copy

button and drag copies down into the
hip.
2.
Stop when the height of the hip truss

reaches a reasonable minimum.
3.
Draw hip jacks along the hip ridge from

the last truss out into the overhang.
4.
Finally, draw a jack truss from the intersection to make sure it is properly positioned.
5.
Select the jack truss, click the Multiple

Copy
button, and lay out jack
trusses up to the other hip jack.
Subgirder Hip
This illustration shows a Subgirder hip
system. Subgirders are the partial trusses that
butt into the doubled truss at the end of the
main run. In the following illustration, the
418
double truss has had one face colored dark

gray, and several subgirders have been
colored light gray.
Trusses
Hip Trusses
Double Truss
Subgirder Trusses (11)
Subgirder Hip
To produce a Subgirder truss system:

1.
Draw a truss where the hip apex meets

the ridge.
2.
Double it by drawing a second truss on

the far side from the hip section.
3.
Draw the first subgirder from the hip

apex out to the eaves.
4.
Select it and using the Multiple Copy

button, make copies in both directions. Stop when the height of the subgirder reaches a reasonable minimum.
5.
Finish off with hip jacks and jack trusses

as before.
419
Drop Hip
This illustration shows the Drop Hip, or
California Hip, system which uses the drop
hip trusses to support stick frame hip ridges
and common rafters. A couple of the drop
hip trusses have been colored gray to help

distinguish them. Notice that the common
rafters are all supported by the drop hip
trusses.
Common Rafters
Drop Hip Trusses (4)

(deepen the joist
for this truss)
1.
Drop Hip (or California Hip)
Start this system as you would a step down

hip system.
2.
420
Specification dialog and select the

Drop hip truss check box.
To produce a Drop hip truss system:
When the hip trusses are drawn, group

select them, display the Truss
3.
Do not produce any hip jack or jack

trusses. Instead, use the Build
Framing dialog to produce the common rafters, and the short joists at the
hip end.
Girder Trusses
Each of hip roof method has its advantages.

With both the Step Down hip and the
Subgirder hip systems, you can get almost
everything you need from the truss company.
You will need to get small corner jack and
end jack trusses in addition to the larger
trusses.
With the Step Down hip, if the hip trusses
are placed according to your standard on
center spacing, the space measured down the
hip between the trusses will be larger than
the standard.
Spacing is larger down the hip

Step Down Hip
With the subgirder system, spacing
measuring down the roof sections on either
side of the hip, near the hip will be too large.
Spacing is larger down the roof

sections on either side of the hip.
Subgirder Hip
The Drop Hip system eliminates the spacing
problems because the roof sheathing is nailed
to common rafters that pass over the drop hip
trusses. The disadvantage to this system is
that it requires the rafters in addition to the
trusses, and with a shallow pitch roof the
drop hip truss may not be deep enough to
give sufficient strength.
The first two methods normally require
blocking along the hip ridges. The third uses
a continuous hip ridge rafter as well as
common rafters that run over the drop hip
trusses. Blocking and rafters can be drawn in
manually, but are often supplied by the
automatic framing generator. See Mixing
Trusses with Stick Framing on page 413.
Girder Trusses
Trusses may not cross each other. If a newly
drawn truss ends near a truss crossing its
path, the system automatically extends it
until it butts into the existing truss.
421
Trusses
Advantages and
Disadvantages of
the Different Hip Systems
trusses, forming a girder. This may be

necessary for a large opening, such as a
skylight.
Trusses supporting girder ends are normally
doubled.
Draw a new truss from an existing truss to

the roof edge, as you would to draw a hip or
end jack truss; or, draw a truss between two
Scissors Trusses
Trusses drawn over sloping ceiling planes are
called Scissor trusses. Draw ceiling planes
as you would manual roof planes by
selecting Build> Roof> Ceiling Plane
Below is an example of a room with a 6 in 12

pitch gable roof and 3 in 12 pitch ceiling
planes.

The Truss Base Specification dialog is
almost identical to the Roof Plane
Specification dialog. Although truss bases
422
are not the same as roof planes, Chief

Architect handles the positioning of the two
in a similar manner.
General Tab
6
3
5
7
8
Four values define 3D orientation of a truss

base: Ridge/Top Height; Baseline Height;
Fascia Top Height; and Pitch. These values
are related: if one is changed, the others will
change, as well.
These values are measured from the first
floor elevation of 0 0". Baseline Height and
Pitch should be set identical to those for the
roof plane that surrounds the truss base.
Click the radio button to the right of a value
to define it as the pivot point for the truss
base and prevent it from being changed.
Changing these values does not affect the 2D
representation of the truss base.
Trusses
1 Ridge/Top - Define a new value for the

highest point of the selected truss base.
2 Baseline - Define a new base line

height.
3 Fascia top - Define a new height for
the lowest point of the truss base.

Usually, this is the same as the Baseline.
4 Pitch - Change the pitch for the

selected truss base.
If you lock the pitch and change one of the

other values, the truss base moves vertically
keeping the same slope. It will not pivot.
423
Polyline Tab
5 Select the Pitch in degrees check box
to display pitch in degrees rather than

run-and-rise units.
6 Select the Up or Down check boxes to
display the truss base one floor up or

down from the floor it is currently on.
7 Rafter Depth - The truss base is a
plane used by the program to place

trusses, so it will have no rafters. This value
should be the same as that for the
surrounding roof plane in order to align the
truss base with it.

Selected Line Tab

Line Style Tab

8 Vertical Rafter Depth, Top of Plate
and Overhang from Baseline are

displayed for reference.
Fill Style Tab


Select a roof truss and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Roof Truss
General Tab
10
1
2
3
5
7
9
424
4
6
8
11
13
12
14
The shape, or volume, of a roof truss is

controlled by the roof planes above it and the
ceiling planes below it. It cannot be changed
from this dialog.
Display this dialog for one or a group of
selected trusses in floor plan view. You can
also display this dialog for a single truss by
double clicking on it in any elevation or 3D
view.
1
2
3
4
Top Chord - Specify the depth.

Bottom Chord - Specify the depth.
Webbing - Specify the depth.
Check Require Kingpost to require a

vertical webbing member from the roof
peak to the bottom chord.
6 Drop Hip Truss - Select the check box
to lower the flat top of a truss in the hip

area of a roof.
If this is not checked, a vertical member may

still be supplied, depending on what is
needed to support the chords at or closer than
the specified maximum spans.
Following is a truss detail. The lower truss
was a copy of the upper truss, with Require
Kingpost checked.
Kingpost
5 End Truss - Select the check box to
replace the webbing with vertical

members positioned and spaced on center the
same as the wall studs below. The framing
reference is used for this exactly as it is for
wall studs. If an end truss is in the same
position as a gable attic wall, it will replace
the framing that would otherwise be
produced for that wall.
The flat top is lowered so that common

rafters and hip ridges can pass over and be
supported by it. The amount that the top
chord is lowered is derived from the rafter
425
Trusses
The Roof Truss Specification dialog

allows you to redefine parts of an existing
truss or group of trusses. Some of these
settings affect individual trusses only, like a
gable truss, while others affect the whole
group.
Depth on the Roof tab of the Framing

dialog. Because both common rafters and hip
ridges must pass over this truss, the ridge
depth should be set equal to that of the rafter
depth. For an illustration of a Drop Hip truss,
see Drop Hip on page 420.
7 Energy Heel - Select the check box to
model a truss with an energy heel,

which removes the bottom chord from the
overhang area. For this to be modeled, the
Raise Off Plate value in the Build Roof

dialog must be greater or equal to eight.
To provide more space for ceiling insulation
at the exterior walls, roofs are sometimes
raised off of the top plate with an energy
heel. When a truss is built for such a roof, a
vertical member is added over the supporting
wall to prevent the bottom chord from extend
ing into the overhang area as far as the end
of the rafter, or until it intersects the rafter.
Without Energy Heel
With Energy Heel
8 Reduce Gable - Select the check box to
lower the top chord of the gable truss so

that lookouts may pass over the truss. Any
overhang is removed from a reduced truss.
You can supply this overhang with short
rafters drawn at the ends of the truss.
Reduce Gable
End Truss
Lookouts
9 Attic Truss - Check this box to specify

an attic truss
426
maximum horizontal distance between

supports along the Top Chord and along the
Bottom Chord. If these are equal, the truss
webbing often appears more regular.
The placement of webbing inside a newly
drawn truss is controlled by the Top Chord
and Bottom Chord settings under Maximum
Span in the Trusses tab of the Framing
dialog. The webbing is for representational
purposes only, not for engineering.
14 Lock Truss & Webbing - Check this
box to lock size and configuration of

truss. A locked truss which has been
relocated will maintain its original settings,
and may no longer fit properly if the new
roof and ceiling conditions are different from
the original.
Line Style Tab

For more information about the Line Style
11 Thickness - Select the thickness, or
truss width in floor plan view. This

setting overrides default settings.
12 Maximum Height - Specify the
Fill Style Tab

For more information about the Fill Style tab,
maximum height of selected truss.
13 Force truss rebuild - Select the check
box to update trusses with the new

settings in this dialog when you click OK.
Materials Tab
For more information about the Materials
1
2
3
7
9
4
Floor trusses can be created whenever walls
define one or more rooms.
6
8
To open the Floor Truss Specification

dialog, select a floor truss in floor plan view
edit button.
427
Trusses
10 Maximum Span - Specify the
1 Top Chord - Specify the depth of the

member.
2 Bottom Chord - Specify the depth of

the member.
3 Webbing - Specify the depth of the

member.
4 Vertical Supports - Select the check

box to use vertical supports.
5 Maximum Span - Define the
maximum horizontal distance between

supports along the Top Chord and Bottom
Chord.
6 Overall Thickness - Specify the

overall floor truss thickness.
7 Webbing Thickness - Specify

thickness for the webbing.
8 Force Truss Rebuild - Select the check
box to update existing trusses with the

new settings in this dialog.
9 Lock Truss & Webbing - Check this
box to lock the size and configuration

of the truss. A locked truss which has been
relocated will maintain its original settings.
Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab

Materials Tab
428
Chapter 16:
Electrical
Electrical
Chapter Overview
The electrical plan shows the location of all
electrical objects such as lights, switches,
outlets, smoke detectors and vents. Basic
wiring diagrams show which objects share
circuits and the locations of the controlling
switches.
The display of electrical objects can be
controlled in 2D and 3D. Some electrical
symbols such as lights also affect rendering.
See Electrical on page 577.
Usually, the electrical plan is one of the last
additions to a plan since the positioning of
most electrical objects is determined by the
location of walls, cabinets and other objects.
Building requirements vary throughout
the country and around the world. It is
your responsibility to comply with your local
codes.
Chapter Contents
The Electrical Tools

Outlets
Lights
Switches
Creating Wiring Schematics
Auto Place Outlets
Electrical Library
Selecting Electrical Objects
Deleting Electrical Objects
Copying Electrical Objects
Moving Electrical Objects
Rotating Electrical Objects
Adjusting the Height
Other Edit Tools
Displaying Electrical Objects
Electrical Service Specification Dialog
Electrical Defaults
429
The Electrical Tools

Select Build> Electrical
or click the parent button to access the electrical child tools.
When you select the Electrical Tools
parent button, the 110V Outlet
active.
tool is
Click in floor plan view to place an electrical

object. Some can only be placed against
walls, some only on the ceiling or floor, and
some will automatically change as needed. If

you click within 12" of the wall, the selected
object will be placed on the wall.
Electrical objects can be selected in floor
plan view and modified. The edit handles can
be used to move, rotate, or delete it.
Electrical objects are placed according to the
settings in the Electrical Defaults dialog.
See Electrical Defaults on page 441.
Outlets
The 110V Outlet
child button
places 110V duplex outlets in walls or
on the floor. The 220V Outlet
child
button places 220V outlets. Outlet type and
height are controlled by the outlet height in
the Electrical Defaults dialog.
Outlet locations are measured from their
centers. Individual outlet heights can be
specified in the Electrical Service
Certain room types and situations cause a
different types of outlet to be placed instead.
To take advantage of the programs
capabilities, be sure that rooms are properly
defined before placing electrical objects. See
Room Specification on page 191.
In rooms defined as Bath or Master Bath,

Ground Fault Circuit Interrupt, or GFCI,
outlets will be placed. If outlets are placed
prior to defining the room as a Bath, standard
outlets will be placed and will have to be
replaced to have them be GFCI outlets.
Outlets placed outside the building or in an
exterior-type area such as a deck or porch
will be labeled WP, or Water Proof.
Outlets placed on the wall behind a base
cabinet containing a dishwasher or sink are
placed at the normal 12" (300 mm) above the
floor. If an outlet is placed above a cabinet,
the Above Cabinet Default Height will be
used instead. See Electrical Defaults on
page 441.
Other types of outlets, such as floor outlets,
are available in the Electrical Library
430
Lights
Lights
Click away from any walls to place a light on

the ceiling. Click near a wall to place the
light in the wall. An individual lights height
can be specified in the Electrical Service
If the flat ceiling has been removed so that
the ceiling follows the roof line, a ceiling
light will be created at the ceiling height but
will sit perpendicular to the floor as though it

were attached to a flat ceiling.
Many lights are available in the Electrical
Library
, all of which create light
sources in render and raytrace view.
Light Render Data

The rendering characteristics of individual
lights can be specified. Select the light in
edit button to open the Electrical
Service Specification dialog. Adjust the
settings on the Render Data tab to specify
how the light will display in render or
raytrace views. See Render Data Tab on
page 439.
Switches
The Switch
child tool places wall
switches as specified in the
Electrical Defaults dialog. Like outlets,
the height of switches is measured from the
floor to the center of the object and is set in
the Electrical Defaults dialog, along with
default switch type. See Electrical Defaults
on page 441.
If you connect 2 or more switches in a
circuit, they update to 3-way or 4-way
switches automatically.
Switches placed from the Electrical Library

do not automatically update by default, but
can be specified to do so. See Electrical
Service Specification Dialog on page 437.
If two or more switches or outlets are close

enough in floor plan view, they will appear to
merge in 3D.
Floor Plan
View
3D view
Zoom close enough in floor plan view to

move two switches or outlets close enough
together to overlap. The switches or outlets
must be within 9 inches, at the same height
on the wall, and of the same dimensions. Up
to 32 switches can be merged together.
Switches and outlets appear separately in the
materials list.
431
Electrical
The Light
child tool places lights
as specified in the Electrical
Defaults dialog. Depending on where you
click in floor plan view, the light may be
mounted on the ceiling or on a wall. All
lights placed in a plan also serve as light
sources in render and raytrace views.
Creating Wiring Schematics

Electrical schematics can be created in a
couple of ways. Using the Connect
Electrical
tool is quick and easy;
however, if you need detailed schematas, you
can create your own wiring diagrams using
the CAD tools.
Connect Electrical
The Connect Electrical child tool is
used to illustrate circuits, showing
which lights and outlets are attached to
any given switch, for example.
To create a new circuit or to add to an
existing circuit, press the left mouse button
on one electrical object while using Connect
it and clicking Delete
Del
New connections can only be created on

either end of a given circuit, not in the
middle. Two objects already part of the same
circuit cannot be connected together. Any
additional connections which are needed
but which cannot be done using the Connect
Electrical
Connect Electrical
tool. Sometimes
additional connections are desired, however.
Before adding extra connections:
1.

button to
open the Layer Display Options dialog. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 119.
2.
Click on the name of the Electrical layer

to highlight it.
3.
Place a check in the Current CAD

Layer check box to make Electrical the
current CAD layer.
tool may be created in CAD
mode
using the Arc
tool. Place these
connections on the same layer as the regular
electrical connections.
More than one switch can control an object
or group of objects. Two switches controlling
the same objects are referred to as three-way
switches. Three switches controlling the
432
Electrical
tool can be modified. Click
anywhere along a connection arc to display
two handles and reshape it. Drag from the
middle handle to change the curvature of the
arc. Drag from the other handle to create an
S-curve with one portion more tightly curved
than the other. The middle handle can be
dragged along the arc to make one of its
portions longer than the other.
An electrical object can have at most two

connections attached to it placed using the
tool or by selecting
edit button or
Connections created with the Connect
Drawing Your Own

Electrical Connections
Electrical
tool; drag to the next object;
and release. Remove an electrical object
from a circuit by clicking on it with the
Connect Electrical
same objects are referred to as four-way

switches. The number of ways is one more
than the number of switches in the same
circuit. This number will display with the
switch symbol in floor plan view.
All CAD objects will be placed on the CAD

layer that you have defined in the Current
Auto Place Outlets
CAD Layer field until it is changed. They

will have the attributes defined for that layer.
When the new Current CAD Layer is
specified, activate the Arc
tool in CAD
mode and draw additional electrical

connections. See Arc Tools on page 736.
Note: Deselect Angle Snaps if you would
like arcs to draw more smoothly.

tool
places outlets, usually 110V, around
entire rooms at intervals not greater than
twelve feet so that no wall position is greater
than 6 (1800mm) from the nearest outlet. To
use Auto Place Outlets
, select the tool
button and then click in a room.
Auto Place Outlets

requires that a room
have a door before outlets are automatically
placed in that room and will not work in any
room defined as any exterior type room.
Exterior rooms require that the outlets be
placed individually using the 110V Outlets
tool or by selecting an outlet from the
Outlets are placed based on settings in the

Electrical Defaults dialog. Electrical
Defaults on page 441. It is important that
the room type be defined before using Auto
Electrical Library
Place Outlets
so that outlets are placed
appropriately in each room type.
Place Outlets
is used in a room defined
by railings or invisible walls, outlets will be
automatically placed in all adjacent rooms
that share these wall types with that room.
Stand-alone or built-in appliances such as

ranges, washers, and dryers each have their
required 110V or 220V outlets placed
automatically. Lights are always placed
above sinks.
Railings and invisible walls do not separate

rooms for Auto Place Outlets
: If Auto
Any outlet can be moved, deleted, or merged

with other outlets or switches. See
Switches on page 431.
Electrical Library
The Electrical Library
button
accesses a library full of various
electrical symbols. The Electrical library
category is divided into numerous
subcategories.
Browse for electrical objects such as bath
vent fans; an electrical panel; fluorescent
lights; chandeliers; a smoke detector;

thermostat; and much more. Select a symbol,
then click in your plan to place it on a wall,
floor, or ceiling.
electrical symbols and save them to your
own library. See Create Symbol Wizard on
page 859. In addition, create your own tool
433
Electrical
Auto Place Outlets
buttons and customize your toolbar to

quickly place frequently-used library objects.
See Place Library Object Button on page

588.
Selecting Electrical Objects

Electrical objects may be selected in floor
plan, 3D, and cross section/elevation views.
The easiest way to select an electrical

object in floor plan view is by clicking on
it using one of the electrical tools. Only
electrical objects will be selected.
Electrical objects can also be selected by
clicking on them using the Select
Objects
tool. If a nearby object is
selected first, click the Select Next
Object
edit button or Tab key until
the desired electrical object is selected.
Right-click on the object to select, and

use the Select Next Object
edit button as needed until the desired electrical
object is selected.
Electrical objects cannot be group

selected.
Deleting Electrical Objects

Select an electrical object or a connection
between electrical objects. Click the Delete
edit button or press the Del key on the
keyboard to delete that object.
Note: When an electrical object is deleted,

any connections to that object from other
electrical objects are deleted, as well.
Copying Electrical Objects

Select the electrical object you would like to
copy. To make a single copy, click the Copy
edit button and then click in a view to
place the copied object.
To make multiple copies, double-click the
Copy
edit button, then click to place
copies as many times as desired.
434
You can also copy between plans. If both

plans are open and tiled, after the Copy
edit button is pressed, click the other plan to
activate it, then click again to place the copy
or copies. If the other plan is not tiled, use
Edit> Paste to load the object for pasting
into the new plan.
By Dragging
Select an electrical object. Then grab the
square handle when the pointer changes to a
Move pointer, and drag the electrical
object to the new position.
electrical objects using the Manual

Dimension
child tool. The dimensions
which locate the electrical object can be used
to position that object. First, select the
electrical object to be moved, then click on
the dimension value that locates that object.
When the Move Object Using
Dimension dialog displays, replace the
current dimension with the desired value.
Using the Transform/

Replicate Object Tool
By Using Dimensions
To dimension to electrical objects, first
specify that electrical objects be located
using dimensions on the Locate Objects tab
of the Dimension Defaults dialog. Click
in the check box to have electrical objects be
located by manual dimensions.
Make sure that dimensions are actually
locating the correct objects before using the
dimension to manipulate the electrical
object. If needed, for example by adjusting
the dimension by moving the extension from
the outside to the inside of the wall.
Once dimensions are set to locate electrical
objects, drag a dimension line through the
Select an electrical object not located on a

wall and click the Transform/Replicate
Object
Transform/Replicate Object dialog. To
move the object without copying it, check

the Relative to Itself box and specify the
distance and/or angle to move the selected
object. See Transform/Replicate Object on
page 793.
Objects can also be replicated along an array
using the Transform/Replicate Object
dialog. See Transform/Replicate Object on
page 793.
Rotating Electrical Objects

Any electrical object not attached to a wall
can be rotated. Select the object; move the
pointer above the triangular handle; and click
down when the pointer changes to the
Rotate pointer. Drag to the new position
and release. Electrical objects can also be
rotated by clicking the Transform/Replicate
Object
edit button. See Transform/
Replicate Object on page 793.
435
Electrical
Like most objects in Chief Architect,

electrical objects can be moved using a
number of methods.
Adjusting the Height

The heights at which electrical objects
display in 3D views are initially based on
settings in the Electrical Defaults dialog.
In floor plan view, an outlet placed where a
base cabinet meets a wall will be placed
above the counter unless the cabinet contains
a fixture or appliance other than a bathroom
sink. If the fixture requires electricity, the
outlet will remain behind the cabinet at
normal wall height, where it can supply
power to the fixture or appliance. See
Electrical Defaults on page 441.
Kitchen sinks are assumed to require
electricity since they often contain a garbage
disposal. Dishwashers are not considered to

require electricity since they are usually
plugged in under a nearby sink. If an outlet is
needed above a cabinet containing a kitchen
sink, place the outlet before adding the sink.
To change the height of an electrical object in
floor plan view, open the object for
specification and type the desired height in
the Electrical Service Specification dialog.
Electrical items placed in 3D views will be
placed wherever you click on a wall,
regardless of the height. In 3D views, the
position of an electrical object can be
adjusted by using its edit handles.
Other Edit Tools

Reflect Tools
An electrical object can be reflected using
either the Transform/Replicate Object
edit button or the Reflect About Line
edit button.
To reflect an electrical object using the
Transform/Replicate Object dialog,
select the electrical object and click the
Symbol Editing
The underlying 3D symbol data, CAD block,
and other properties of an electrical symbol
can be modified in the Open Symbol
dialog. To access the dialog, select the
electrical object and click the Open Symbol
Transform/Replicate Object
edit
button. See Transform/Replicate Object on
page 793.
edit button. See Symbol Specification

Dialog on page 880.
To use the Reflect About Line

tool, first
create a CAD line that will be used as the line
of reflection. Next, select an electrical object;
Electrical symbols can be saved in the

Electrical Library. Select the object and
click the Reflect About Line
436
and click on the line of reflection. See

edit button;
Add to Library
click the Add to Library

edit button.
The Add to Library dialog will display,
allowing you to add the object to a specific

library in the Electrical category. See
Edit Components
Components dialog. To open the dialog,

select the electrical object and click the
Components
edit button. See Editing
Columns on page 944.
View and/or modify the Material List record

for a given electrical object in the

button to
open the Layer Display Options dialog
and control the display of objects in floor
plan; cross section/elevation; and 3D views.
119.
The display of electrical objects in an

individual 3D view can be controlled by
clicking the Display Options
button
from within that view. The Layer Display
Options dialog that displays is specific to
that single view: any changes made in the
dialog will affect only that view.

Select an electrical object and click the Open
Object
the Service Data, Layer and Material tabs are

available for switches and outlets.
Electrical Service Specification
dialog.
The Electrical Service Specification
dialog consists of four tabs:
The Service Data tab specifies the location of individual electrical objects.
The Render Data tab specifies how

lights appear in render views.
The Layer tab specifies on which layer

the object is placed.
The Materials tab allows you to change

materials on electrical objects.
Depending on the type of symbol selected,

only some of the tabs will be available. Only
437
Electrical
Service Data Tab
1
2
3
1 Name - This is the name that will be

sent to the Materials List.
2 Height to Center - Specify the height
to the center of the switch, outlet or

wall light.
Offset From Floor - This option displays for

electrical objects placed on the floor.
Offset From Ceiling - This option displays
for electrical objects placed on the ceiling.
438
3 Dist From Wall - Specify the switch,
outlet or lights distance from the wall.
Check this box to Automatically

Change Switch Type When Wiring.
This option is only available for switches.
Switches placed from the toolbar have this
box checked by default; switches placed
from the Electrical library will not.
Render Data Tab
1
2
3
4
Electrical
5
11
6
7
8
9
10
The Render Data tab of the Electrical

Service Specification dialog is similar
to the Light Specification dialog. See
Light Specification Dialog on page 669.
The enabled options on this tab vary
depending on the light source Type selected.
1 Light Source - Each light object can
have multiple light sources. Select a

current light source to be modified. Click
Add Light or Delete Light to add or delete
light sources from the list. See Light
Sources on page 660.
13
12
14
15
Light, and Parallel Light. The type selected

determines which options are enabled on this
tab. Each type behaves differently; but all
have some rendering properties in common.
See Defining Light Types on page 665.
3 Auto Intensity - Select the check box
to have the program set intensities for

each light in render views. When you select
Auto Intensit,y the program provides an
average intensity to render with reasonable
lighting effects. Clear the check box to
enable the slider bar and control how bright
the light appears in the render view.
2 Type - Select a light source Type.
Available types are Point Light, Spot
439
Lights with an intensity of 0% are the same

as lights that are turned off. It is possible to
have too much light: if you have multiple
lights in a room all set to maximum intensity,
colors and textures can become washed out.
4 Color - Click on the rectangle to define
the color of the light being modeled.

Colored lights alter the appearance of
material colors and textures and can be used
to achieve special lighting effects.
The default color of light is pure white,
which has the least affect on the material
colors and textures.
5 Attenuated - Check this box to control
how quickly the light intensity drops

off as a result of the distance from the light
source. Only Spot and Point Lights can have
attenuation values set.
The three edit values represent the three

coefficients (a, b, and c) in the expression: 1 /
(a + b*d+c*d*d), where d is the distance
from the light source. Increasing any of these
values results in the light intensity dropping
off faster (the light does not travel as far).
Decreasing any value results in the light
intensity dropping off slower, (the light
travels farther). Small changes in these
coefficients can have significant impact on
lighting effects. Some experimentation
should be done to fully understand how to
use them.
6 Offset From Base controls how far the
light source is relative to the position of

the fixture base. The fixture base is
determined by the surface that it is attached
to, (i.e. wall, floor, or ceiling).
Offset up Wall/Offset Along Wall are only
available when you are editing a wallmounted fixture. These allow you to set the
440
lights distance up/down the wall, and left/

right along the wall.
Offset in X/Offset in Y are only available
when you are not editing a wall-mounted
fixture. These allow you to position the light
relative to the center of the fixture, along the
floor/ceiling.
7 Tilt Angle - The Tilt Angle is used to
control the angle of the light with

respect to the horizon. A value of -90 degrees
means that the light is pointing straight down
and a value of 90 degrees means that the light
is pointing straight up. 0 degrees is parallel to
the horizon.
8 Dir Angle - Defines the angle that a
Parallel or Spot Light is pointed along.

Zero degrees is measured horizontally on
your screen pointing to the right. Positive
values rotate in a counter-clockwise direction
from there. Enter a value up to 360 degrees.
If you enter a negative value, the program
uses Zero.
Direct a Spot Light in floor plan view by
selecting and dragging the rotate handle.
9 Cut Off Angle - The Cut Off Angle
controls the angle of the cone of light

for Spot Lights only. A cone angle of 180
degrees would create a Spot Light that shines
on one side of the lights position,
representing a half sphere. A small cone
angle, say 10 degrees, would create a very
narrow cone of light. The cut off angle
should always be between 0 and 180 degrees.
The cut off angle for an added light can be
defined in the floor plan view by dragging
the handles at the ends of the cone lines in or
out.
10 Drop Off Rate - This affects how fast

the light intensity drops off from the
Electrical Defaults
The default value for this is set to 7.5 which

means the light drops off fairly quickly. It is
not useful to set this value too low because
there are limitations in the OpenGL lighting
model which result in jagged looking circles
of light when they are shining on large flat
surfaces. Appearances can be improved by
decreasing the Maximum Triangle Size and
increasing the Drop off Rate but it is
impossible to get a nice sharp circle of light
using current methods under OpenGL.
11 Soft Shadows (raytracing) - This

allows you to set how a light will cast
soft shadows in a Raytrace view. Setting the
Light Size will set how big the light should
appear. A size of zero indicates a true point
light source, while a size of 3 indicates a
larger source such as a lightbulb. Setting the
Softness determines how many iterations the
raytracer should go through to soften the
light. This value determines the quality of the
raytrace, but also slows down the raytrace. It
is not recommended to use values greater
than 2 or 3, unless the Light Size is very
large.
12 On - This controls whether or not the
light should be used for lighting effects

in the render view. The default is On.
13 Casts Shadows - Controls whether or

not the light casts shadows when
Shadows are turned on in a render view.
It is recommended that you only use one, or

at most two lights to casts shadows at a time.
Shadow calculations are very complicated
and can slow rendering significantly.
14 Show Position in render View - Check
this box to display an indicator where a

light source is actually positioned in a render
view. The light position indicator is only
drawn when the light is "On" and only for
positional lights such as "point" or "spot"
lights. This tool can be used to determine if
your light source is positioned correctly.
15 Use in Real-Time Rendering/Use in
Raytracing/Use in Both - These

options allows you to specify whether a light
is used only in a raytrace view, only in a
render view, or used in both views. Raytrace
views can handle many more lights than
render views, and some fixtures may have
four or five lights in a raytrace view while
only one in a render view. Be warned that the
more lights you use in either view, the slower
the time to generate that view.
Layer Tab
Materials Tab
Electrical Defaults
Default Settings for electrical objects
can be accessed by selecting Edit>
Default Settings from the menu or by
double-clicking the Electrical Tools

parent button.
441
Electrical
center of the cone of light to the outside

edge. This is only available for Spot Lights.
Default heights of individual objects can be

overridden in the Electrical Service
Specification dialog. See Electrical

3
5
2
4
6
1 Default Library - These are the items
that will get used when electrical items

are automatically generated or placed from
the toolbar. Select an item from the list to
display a preview to the right.
2 Library - Select an object type in the

Default Library list and click on the
Library... button to open the Library Browser
to the Electrical category and select a new
default library object. See Electrical on
page 577.
3 Use Default Heights - Check this box
to apply Default Heights to electrical

objects placed in floor plan view. Heights
442
can be specified for individual objects. See

Electrical Service Specification Dialog on
page 437
4 Outlet - Specify the Default Height for
outlets, phone jacks and television

outlets.
5 Switch - Specify the Default Height for

switches, doorbells and thermostats.
6 Above Cabinet - Specify the Default
Height for switches and outlets placed

above most cabinets in floor plan view. See
Adjusting the Height on page 436.
Chapter 17:
Trim & Moldings
Chapter Overview
Chapter Contents
Corner Boards
Corner Board Specification Dialog
Quoins
Quoin Specification Dialog
Molding Polylines
Frieze Moldings
Displaying Molding Polylines
Changing Profiles on Existing Moldings
Molding Polyline Specification Dialog
3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog
Corner Boards
Corner boards are added to a building
exterior by selecting Build> Trim> Corner
Boards
while in floor plan or a 3D view.
They are also available on the toolbar by first
selecting the Trim Tools
parent button
and then selecting the Corner Boards

child tool.
443
Trim
Chief Architect offers a wide selection of

trim and molding options. Corner boards,
quoins, and frieze moldings can be added to
a buildings exterior. Molding polylines and
3D molding polylines can be edited as 2D
CAD objects using the CAD editing tools,
then extruded to display in 3D for a variety
of powerful applications.
A selected corner board or boards cannot be

dragged or otherwise moved; but you can
delete it by pressing the Del key; or edit it by
Click outside the wall

corner where you want to
add trim. You should click
where the outside wall
surfaces meet. If you click
where the inside surfaces
meet, you will create
corner trim inside the
room.
clicking the Open Object

edit button to
open the Corner Board Specification
dialog.
You must add corner

boards to all floors of the
building that will have
trim. Placing them only
creates corner boards for the current floor.
The corner boards will extend from the top
plate down over the floor platform below the
walls.
The trim shows in the floor plan view as two
lines at the corner, slightly out from the wall
surface. This display is controlled by the
Corner Boards layer.
The default material for corner boards is

defined in the Exterior Trim entry in the
Material Defaults dialog. See Material
Resizing Corner Boards

You can change the top and/or bottom height
of a corner board by selecting the corner
board in a 3D view and moving the
appropriate vertical handle; however, it is
more accurate to enter the desired values in
the Corner Board Specification dialog.
Corner Board Specification Dialog

General Tab
1
2
3
4
444
5
6
Quoins
The General tab of the Corner Board

Specification dialog allows you to change
the dimensions for the corner boards.
Width - Specify the width of the

selected corner boards.
2 Thickness - Specify the thickness of

the selected corner boards.
3 Set Top - Specify the height of the top
of the corner board. If the check box is

unchecked, the top of the corner board will
automatically extend to the top plate.
4 Set Bottom - Specifiy the height of the
bottom of the corner board. If

unchecked, the bottom of the corner board
will automatically extend to the bottom of
the floor platform.
5 Initial Width - Specify the initial width
boards. This will not change the width of any

existing corner boards.
6 Initial Thickness - Specify the initial
thickness of all subsequently created

corner boards. This will not change the
thickness of any existing corner boards.
The Initial Width and Initial Thickness are

not saved with the plan file and will be reset
the next time you run the program.
Layer Tab
Materials Tab
Trim
of all subsequently created corner
Quoins
Quoins are added the same way as corner
boards. In floor plan or a 3D view, select
Build> Trim> Quoins
and click outside
the corner where you want to place quoins.
While they are created the same way as
corner boards, quoins can be distinguished
by their larger size in floor plan view.
A selected quoin or quoins cannot be
dragged or otherwise moved; but you can
delete it by pressing the Del key; or edit it by
Material Defaults dialog. See Material
Resizing Quoins
You can change the top and/or bottom height
of a quoin by selecting it in a 3D view and
moving the appropriate vertical handle;
however, it is more accurate to enter the
desired values in the Quoin Specification
dialog.

edit button to
open the Quoin Specification dialog.
The default material for corner boards is
defined in the Exterior Trim entry in the
445
Quoin Specification Dialog
1
2
3
4
1 Width - Specify the long dimension of
one quoin. The dimension along the

other wall will be one-half this value when
they are staggered or mirrored.
2 Thickness - Specify the amount that

the quoin protrudes from the exterior
surface of the wall.
3 Height - Specify the height for all
quoins.
4 Gap - Specify the distance between

successive quoins.
5 Set Top - Specifiy the height of the top
of the quoin. If the check box is

unchecked, the top of the quoin will automatically extend to the top plate.
6 Set Bottom - Specifiy the height of the

bottom of the quoin. If the check box is
unchecked, the bottom of the quoin will
446
10
automatically extend to the bottom of the

floor platform.
7 Initial Values - Each of the above
values can be set for all subsequently

produced quoins. Changing these values will
not change the settings for any existing
quoins.
8 Staggered - Produce quoins that have
one long side and one short side

staggered on opposite sides of the corner.
Swap Start Block - Switch the starting order

for staggered quoins.
Uniform - Produce quoins that are of

equal length on both sides of the corner.
10 Mirrored - Produce quoins that
alternate having either two long sides or

two short sides.
Molding Polylines
Staggered
Mirrored
Uniform
Layer Tab
Materials Tab


Molding polylines are 2D molding profiles

that extrude along a polyline path in 3D.
Molding polylines are used to create custom
room moldings and decorations anywhere in
your 3D model.
The Molding Polyline tools are
accessed through the Build> Trim>
menu or by clicking the Trim Tools
parent button.
A molding polyline can be created in a
number of different ways:
Using the Molding Polyline
tool.
Using the Molding Line
Using the 3D Molding Polyline
Using the 3D Molding Line
Selecting from the Moldings and Profiles

library category. See Moldings and Profiles on page 581.
tool.
tool.
Using a room molding. See Room

Using a CAD polyline. See Converting

Polylines into Special Polylines on page
804.
Molding Polyline Tool

Click the Molding Polyline
child
button to open the Library Browser.
Select a molding profile from the Moldings
and Profiles category, then drag a rectangle
from corner to corner. This creates a
rectangular molding polyline that extrudes
the selected molding profile along its path.
Molding polylines can be created, selected,
and edited only in floor plan view. See
tool.
447
Trim
Molding Polylines
Molding Line Tool

Click the Molding Line
child button to open the Library Browser. Pick a
molding profile from the Moldings and
Profiles category, then drag a line from end
to end. This creates a single segment
molding polyline that extrudes the selected
molding along its path. Multiple molding
lines can be connected to make a custom
polyline path. Molding lines can be created,
selected, and edited only in floor plan view.
See Polylines on page 741.
Pick a molding profile from the Moldings

and Profiles category, then drag a line from
end to end. Multiple molding lines can be
connected to make a custom polyline path.
3D molding lines can be created in floor plan
and cross section/elevation views. In a cross
section/elevation view, select and edit the
shape and orientation of a 3D molding line
using the CAD tools. See Polylines on
page 741.
Floor Plan View
Cross Section/
Elevation View
(selected)
Molding polyline and molding line in
Floor Plan View and 3D overview
3D Molding Polyline Tool

Click the 3D Molding Polyline
child button to open the Library
Browser. Pick a molding profile from the
Moldings and Profiles category, then drag a
rectangle from corner to corner.
3D molding polylines can be created in floor
plan and cross section/elevation views. In a
cross section/elevation view, select and edit
the shape and orientation of a 3D molding
polyline using the CAD tools. See
3D Molding Line Tool

Click the 3D Molding Line
child
button to open the Library Browser.
448
3D Overview
3D Molding polyline and 3D molding line

as they appear in three different views.
Editing Molding Polylines

Molding polylines behave just like CAD
polylines. Molding lines and polylines can
only be edited in floor plan view. 3D
molding lines and polylines can also be
edited in cross section/elevation views.
Molding lines and polylines can be selected
and opened for specification. See Molding
Polyline Specification Dialog on page 451.
Frieze Moldings
Moldings and Profiles Library

In the floor plan view, open the Moldings
and Profiles category of the Library Browser
and select a molding profile. The Molding
Polyline
tool becomes active, allowing
you to draw a molding polyline using the
selected molding.
Converting Room Molding

Select a room and click on the Make Room
Molding Polyline
edit button. This
opens the Make Room Molding Polyline
dialog, allowing you to select which type of
room molding to convert to a molding
polyline. When you click on the OK button

the new molding polyline will be selected.
Outside rooms can also be selected, allowing
molding polylines to be created from its
perimeter.
Converting a CAD Polyline

A CAD polyline can be converted into
a molding polyline or a 3D molding
polyline. Select the CAD polyline and click
the Convert Polyline
edit button. Either
the Molding Polyline Specification
dialog or the 3D Molding Polyline
Specification dialog will display,
depending on which option is selected. On
the Moldings tab of either dialog, specify a
molding profile. See Converting Polylines
into Special Polylines on page 804.
Trim
3D molding lines and polylines can also be

selected and opened for specification. See
on page 453.
Frieze Moldings
Frieze moldings and frieze boards can be
created automatically through the Frieze tab
of the Build Roof dialog. See Frieze Tab
on page 325. Frieze moldings are 3D
molding polylines that are generated with
automatic roofs.
Creating Frieze Moldings

To create frieze moldings, specify a molding
profile on the Frieze tab of the Build Roof
dialog; check Build Fascia, Gutters on the
Build tab of the Build Roof dialog; and
click OK.
Displaying Frieze Moldings

Frieze moldings are mounted below the eave
of roof planes. Their shape, size, and position
are specified on the Frieze tab of the Build
Roof dialog.
By default, frieze boards display in 3D
views, but not in floor plan view. Their
default layer, Roofs, Frieze Moldings, is
locked. For more information, see Layer
449
Frieze moldings below the eave of automatically generated roof planes
Selecting Frieze Moldings

To select a frieze molding, its layer must first
be unlocked and set to display. See Locking
Layers on page 126. In floor plan or cross
section/elevation view, select a wall and click
the Next
edit button or press the Tab key
until the frieze molding is selected. When the
frieze moolding is selected the status bar will
say "3D Molding Polyline". See Status Bar
on page 6.
Editing Frieze Moldings
section/elevation views. See Editing

Molding Polylines on page 448.
Select a frieze molding and click the Open
Object
edit button to open the 3D
Molding Polyline Specification dialog.
See 3D Molding Polyline Specification
Dialog on page 453.
If you edit a frieze molding, you should
uncheck the Automatic Frieze property on
the 3D Molding Polyline Specification
dialog to avoid losing your edits if fascia is
recalculated.
The shape of frieze moldings can be edited

using the CAD tools in floor plan and cross
Displaying Molding Polylines

Once placed, molding polylines are visible in
all views.
In Floor Plan View

The display of molding polylines in floor
plan view is controlled in the Layer
Display Options dialog. See Displaying
Objects on page 125. By default, molding
polylines are placed on the Moldings layer.
450
In 3D Views
button to
This dialog allows moldings and other
objects to be turned on and off by layer. See
119.

In 3D views, select a molding profile from
the Library Browser and the pointer will
change to indicate that a molding profile has
been selected. Click on a molding polyline;
3D molding polyline; room molding; cabinet
molding; door molding; or window molding
to change the current molding profile. This is
the same as changing the molding profile in
the objects specification dialog.
Click on a molding in 3D view to change it
To open the Molding Polyline

Specification dialog:
1.
2.
Select a molding polyline or group of

molding polylines.
When the selection set is complete, click
the Open Object
edit button to open
the Molding Polyline Specification
dialog for the selected polyline or
polylines.
General Tab
No Molding on Selected Edge - Select to

create blank section in the molding polyline
along the selected line segment.
Polyline Tab
Selected Line Tab

The Selected Line tab displays when the
selected segment of the molding polyline is a
line, as opposed to an arc. For information
about the Selected Line tab, see Selected
Line Tab on page 742.
Arc Tab
Height - Specify the Height of the polyline

path that the molding extrudes along.
The Arc tab displays when the selected

segment of the 3D molding polyline is an
arc, as opposed to a line. See Arc Tab on
page 739.
451
Trim
Molding Polyline Specification Dialog
Moldings Tab
1
2
3
1 Molding - Select the molding to edit.

2 Add New - Click to add a new molding
to the molding polyline.
Delete - Click to delete the currently selected

molding.
Inside - Click to extrude the molding profile

on the inside or right side of the polyline.
Clear to extrude the molding profile on the
outside or left side of the polyline.This is
only available for molding polylines.
3 Height - Specify the molding profile
Line Style Tab
Select - Click to change the profile for

currently selected molding.
height.
Width - Specify the width. This option is

not available for molding polylines created
from default room moldings.
Offset - Specify the offset from the molding
polyline height to the top or bottom of the
molding profile. A positive offset always
moves the molding up and a negative offset
always moves the molding down.
To Top - Click to specify that the top of the
molding will be at the polyline height plus
the offset.
452
To Bottom - Click to specify that the bottom

of the molding will be at the polyline height
plus the offset.

Fill Style Tab

Materials Tab

Selected Line Tab
Select a 3D molding polyline and click the

edit button to open the 3D
Molding Polyline Specification dialog.
Open Object
General Tab
1 Uncheck Molding on Selected Edge to
turn off the display of the specified

molding profile on the edge of the 3D
molding polyline which was selected when
the dialog was opened. For more information
about the selected edge, see Selecting CAD
2 Automatic frieze is enabled when a
frieze molding is selected (see

Selecting Frieze Moldings on page 450).
When Automatic Frieze is checked, the
frieze molding is updated whenever you
check Build Fascia, Gutters on the Build
Roof dialog and click OK.
Once Automatic Frieze has been
unchecked, it cannot be checked again.To
restore the automatic updating behavior of
the frieze molding, it must be regenerated.
See Creating Frieze Moldings on page
449.
1 The Length/Angle section in the 3D
Molding Polyline Specification
dialog is different other Selected Line tabs.

Length specifies the 3D length of the
selected line of the 3D molding polyline.
Angle in XY Plane specifies the counterclockwise angle that the selected line makes
with the positive X axis when viewed from
above, as in floor plan view.
Angle from XY Plane specifies the angle
that the selected line makes with the
horizontal XY plane when viewed from the
side, as in a cross section/elevation view. A
positive value means that the line slopes up;
a negative value means that it slopes down.
For more information about using the
Selected Line tab, see Selected Line Tab
on page 742.
453
Trim

selected segment of the 3D molding polyline
is a line as opposed to an arc.
Selected Arc Tab

The Selected Arc tab displays when the
selected segment of the 3D molding polyline
is an arc as opposed to a line.
2
6
3
7
4
1 The Lock options specify how
changing one value affects other values.
Select Start to keep the start and center of

the arc fixed and move the end.
Select End to keep the end and center of the
arc fixed and move the start.
Select Center to keep the center of the arc
fixed and move the start or end.
Select Arc to keep the arc geometry fixed
and translate the arc.
454
Select Chord to keep the start and end fixed

and change the radius.
2 The Start options specify the
coordinates of the starting point of the

selected arc, and are editable when either
Lock End or Lock Arc are selected.
3 The End options specify the
coordinates of the end point of the

selected arc, and are editable when either
Lock Start or Lock Arc are selected.
and angle of the selected arc and are

editable when either Lock Start or Lock
End are selected. The Chord Angle is also
editable when Lock Arc is selected.
Chord Length - the 3D distance between

arc start and end.
Chord Angle - the angle created by the
arc chord and the positive X axis.
5 The Arc options specify radius, angle

and length values of the selected arc:
Radius - the distance from the arc to the

arc center.
Start Angle - the angle created by a line

from the arc center to the start and the
positive X axis.
End Angle - the angle that a line from the

center to the end
Arc Angle - the angle created by a line

from the arc center to the start and a line
from the center to the end.
Arc Length - the length of the arc.
Moldings Tab
For information about the Moldings tab, see
Line Style Tab

Materials Tab
Trim
4 The Chord options specify the length
6 The Center options specify the
coordinates of the center point of the

selected arc and are editable when Lock Arc
is selected.
7 The Normal options specify the
coordinates of the normal for the plane

that the arc exists in. The normal is a vector
that is parallel to that plane and is expressed
as a line between two points: (0,0,0) and the
point defined in the dialog.
In plan view, the arc direction is counter
clockwise if the normal has a positive value
on the z axis (0,0,1) and clockwise if the
value on the z axis is negative (0,0,-1).
455
456
Chapter 18:
Cabinets
Chapter Overview
A cabinet placed adjacent to another of the

same type which faces the same direction
will merge with it. If a cabinet is created at
the back of another of the same type, the two
cabinets will merge back-to-back. When
cabinets are merged, the toe kick, back
splash, and countertop will be continuous.
The appearance of base, wall, full height
cabinets, soffits, and shelves/partitions in
floor plan view can be controlled
individually by modifying the display
properties of the corresponding layer in the
Chapter Contents
Cabinet Defaults
The Cabinet Tools
Selecting Cabinets
Displaying Cabinets
Cabinet Labels
Deleting Cabinets
Copying Cabinets
Moving Cabinets
Rotating Cabinets
Resizing Cabinets
Editing Cabinets
Editing the Cabinet Door/Drawer Style
Editing Custom Countertops
Attaching Cabinets
Special Cabinets
Cabinet Specification Dialog
Custom Countertop Specification Dialog
Cabinet Defaults Setup
457
Cabinets
Cabinets are very versatile, allowing a wide

range of customization.
Cabinet Defaults
Default Settings for each cabinet type
can be accessed by selecting Edit>
Default Settings from the menu.
Each type of cabinet has a default definition
for height, width, depth, distance from floor,
etc. General cabinet settings, as well as the
default settings for Base Cabinets, Wall
Cabinets, Full Height Cabinets, Shelves, and
Partitions, are defined here. Open the
Cabinet Defaults dialog for easy access to
each by double-clicking on the Cabinet

Tools
parent button; then clicking the
appropriate button in the Cabinet
Defaults dialog. To allow the maximum
range of sizes, modify the General Cabinet
defaults so that Minimum Width is 1" and
Width Increment is 1/16". See Cabinet
The Cabinet Tools

Click the Cabinet Tools
parent
button to display the cabinet child
tools.
To create a corner cabinet, click as close to
the inside wall corner as possible in using
either the Base Cabinet
, Wall Cabinet
, or Full Height
cabinet mode. A
corner cabinet will remain a corner cabinet
when it is moved, edited or copied.
Base Cabinets
Clicking the Cabinet Tools
parent
button automatically selects the Base
Cabinet
child button. Click near a wall
in any view to attach the cabinet to it. Base
cabinets generate a countertop and toe kick
by default.
Wall Cabinets
To place a wall cabinet, select the Wall
Cabinet
near a wall in any view. Click directly over a
base cabinet to place a wall cabinet above it.
The base cabinet will not interfere with the
placement.
Full Height Cabinets

To place a full height cabinet, select
the Full Height
child button and
click in your plan in any view. A full height
cabinet cannot be placed on top of a base or
wall cabinet. Full height cabinets generate a
toe kick by default.
Soffits
Soffits typically fill the space between
cabinet tops and the ceiling. Soffits
can also be used to create any object than can
be modeled as a 3D box. To place a soffit,
458
The Cabinet Tools
child button and click in
Soffits appear in both floor plan and 3D

views. They can be assigned materials that
will be calculated in the Material List; but by
default, they will use the material assigned to
the default wall. Like cabinets, soffits can
have custom molding profiles specified for
them.
The default size for soffits cannot be
changed. Soffits are sized to be the same
width as and 1" (20mm) deeper than the
default wall cabinet. Their heights adjust
automatically to fill the space between the
ceiling and the top of the wall cabinets.
Individual soffits can be selected and edited,
however.
Maximum soffit width is 135 feet (32m).
Minimum width is 1/16" (1 mm).
For a more detailed description of soffits, see
Other Objects on page 541.
Shelves
Select the Shelf
button and click in
any view to create a shelf based on
default settings. Once created, shelves can be
modified. Select a shelf and click the Open
edit button to display the Shelf
Specification dialog and specify its
Object
dimensions, position, and material.

Corner shelves are created by placing one
shelf on each wall, then moving or stretching
them until they touch.
Partitions
Select the Partition
button and
click in floor plan view to create a
vertical partition. Once created, partitions
can be modified. Select the partition and
edit button to
open the Partition Specification dialog
and specify the partitions dimensions,
position, and material. Partitions can be used
with shelves to create complex storage
systems.
Custom Countertops
Choose Build> Cabinet> Custom
Countertop or click the Custom
Countertop
child button to create a
custom countertop. Click in floor plan view
and drag a rectangle from one corner to the
opposite corner. The rectangle is a closed
polyline defined as a countertop. You can
continue creating custom countertops until a
different tool is selected.
Cabinets generate their own countertop as
defined in the Cabinet Specification
dialog. When a custom countertop covers
any portion of a base cabinet, it will override
the default countertop.
The countertop takes its thickness and height
from the base cabinet below. If there is no
base cabinet below, the custom countertop
will take its thickness from the base cabinet
defaults. The countertop initially takes its
material from the default base cabinet. You
may define the height, position, and material
in the Countertop Specification dialog.
See Editing Custom Countertops on page
469.
459
Cabinets
click the Soffit

any view.
Custom Counter Holes

Choose Build> Cabinet> Custom
Counter Hole
to create a custom
counter hole. Click in floor plan view and
drag a rectangle from one corner to the
opposite corner entirely within a custom
countertop. This rectangle is a closed
polyline defined as a counter hole. You can
continue creating custom counter holes until
a different tool is selected.
Cabinet Library
Click the Cabinet Library
button
to access a library of cabinets. Select
the desired library object and click OK.
Click to place a cabinet. Once placed, library
cabinets can be edited. Select the cabinet and
edit button. The
Cabinet Specification dialog will open,
allowing you to edit the cabinet.
Cabinet Door and

Drawer Library
Click the Cabinet Door Library
child button to access a library of
special cabinet doors and drawers. Select a
library object and click OK. Click on an
existing cabinet to place a door or drawer
from the library.
Uuse the symbol development tools to create
cabinet doors and save them in your own
library for use in future plans. See Adding
460
Built-In Appliances
Appliances and fixtures can be found in the
Library Browser in the Interior Fixtures
library. Some appliances, such as
refrigerators, can be placed directly into a
plan as stand-alone symbols. Many kitchen
appliances, such as sinks, dishwashers, and
garbage disposals, must be placed into an
existing cabinet. See Interior Fixtures on
page 578.
Place range tops and sinks into cabinets early, so that any resizing can be
done before too many cabinets are placed.
To install an appliance into a cabinet, select

the appliance for placement in the selection
pane of the Library Browser and click on a
cabinet. There must be enough space in the
cabinet or adjoining cabinets to contain the
selected appliance. See The Library
Appliances can be added to both the
top and front of the same cabinet. Appliances can also be added to the top of cabinets that may conflict with certain face items.
While some appliances can share a cabinet
in the real world, others cannot. Its up to you
to determine which appliances can be effectively (and safely) combined.
Electrical Objects
Electrical objects such as switches and
outlets can be placed on cabinets in most
views. See The Electrical Tools on page
430.
Selecting Cabinets
Selecting Cabinets
Using Cabinet Tools

If a base cabinet, wall cabinet and soffit are
stacked in floor plan view it may be difficult
to pick the correct object. To select only a
particular cabinet type, click on it while that
cabinet tool is active. For example, choose
the Base Cabinet
tool to select only base
cabinets, or the Wall Cabinets

tool to
select only wall cabinets. This method limits
the selection set to that type of cabinet. When
the proper tool is active, it is easy to doubleclick on a cabinet to open the Cabinet
Specification dialog for that object. There
is one exception: the Full Height
tool
will allow you to select base, wall, or full
height cabinets.
Using Select Objects

Select cabinets by clicking on the cabinet
tool. This
method may not select the desired cabinet the
first time. If another object is selected, click
the Select Next Object
edit button or
press the Tab key on the keyboard until the
desired cabinet is selected. It may be difficult
to double-click on a cabinet using the Select
Objects
tool and open the correct
cabinet for specification.
Right-Click
You can right-click on a cabinet while using
any tool to select it. You do not need to
change tools before selecting a cabinet or any
other object with a right-click.
Using a right-click, you can at first select an
adjacent object and may need to click the
Select Next Object
edit button or press
the Tab key until the proper cabinet is
selected. The right-click may be used in any
3D view as well. Once selected with this
method you can use the contextual menu to
open it for specification.
Cabinet Handles
Select a cabinet and notice the various edit
handles that display. Each handle has a
specific purpose. Handles on corner cabinets
display differently than other cabinets.
Triangular handle at back
rotates the cabinet.
Side handle(s) change the
cabinet width.
Center handle moves the
cabinet.
Front handle (with v)
changes the cabinet depth
and indicates cabinet front.
Selecting Multiple Cabinets

Once a cabinet has been selected, additional
cabinets may be added to or subtracted from
the selection set by holding down the Shift
key and clicking on additional cabinets.
461
Cabinets
Cabinets may be selected for editing in floor

plan, 3D, or cross section/elevation view.
When working with multiple cabinets on a
single wall, it is often easier to work in a wall
elevation view.
When multiple cabinets are selected, the Edit

toolbar will show different options. The
If the Base Cabinet

tool is active,
only base cabinets can be selected.
Open Object
edit tool will display only
if cabinets of the same type are selected.
If the Wall Cabinet

tool is active,
only wall cabinets can be selected.
If the Full Height

cabinet tool is
active, all cabinets - base, wall and full
height - can be selected. This allows you
to select all cabinets as a group for editing and/or moving. Since only cabinets
can be selected, an entire kitchen cabinet
group can be selected this way.
If the Soffit
tool is active, only soffits
can be selected.
If the Shelf
tool is active, only
shelves can selected.
If the Partition
tool is active, only
partitions can be selected.
Selecting Stacked Cabinets

To select a group of stacked cabinets in floor
plan view, hold down the Shift key and drag a
marquee around the cabinets. This will select
any free-standing objects including
cabinets. You can limit the selection set to
cabinets if you first activate Full Height
mode before group selecting. The marquee
select will never select doors, walls or
windows.
To de-select an object from the selection set,
hold down the Shift key and click the object.
If one object is selected, you cannot drag a
marquee to group select. You must use the
Shift +click method to add to the selection set.
If the Select Objects

tool is active,
everything which can be selected is
selected.
Selection Restrictions
Cabinets cannot be selected in CAD mode.
Click the CAD Toggle
button, F2 , or
choose CAD> CAD Mode Off to return to
the Architectural mode and select cabinets.
Displaying Cabinets
Cabinets can be placed in all views, and are
visible in all views.
In Floor Plan View

The display of cabinets in floor plan view
can be controlled separately in the Layer
462
In 3D Views
button to
and turn off the display of cabinets. See
Cabinet Labels
Displaying Cabinet
Module Lines
When cabinets merge, the delineation line
between cabinet sections disappears in floor
plan view. Cabinet module lines, the lines

between individual cabinets, can be
displayed in floor plan view using the Layer
Display Options dialog. See Layer
Cabinet labels will display in floor plan view

if they are set to display in the Layer
Standard depth is twenty four inches for

base and full height, twelve for wall.
Standard height for base cabinets is thirty

six inches, including countertop.
Cabinet labels can also be created

individually, See Label Tab on page 485.
Wall cabinets are assumed to have doors,

so the (D) is not listed; the R or L is still
included for a right or left door, however.
Cabinet labels do not display fractional

information. The label for a 30 3/8 inch wide
base cabinet will appear as BD30. The
fractional width will show in a dimension
line that marks the cabinets sides.
The format for a cabinet label is the same as
the Material List entry. Example labels are:
BDR24: Base cabinet, twenty four inches

wide, one right opening door, one drawer.
B30-4: Base cabinet, thirty inches wide,

four drawers.
W3030: Wall cabinet, thirty inches wide,

thirty inches high.
BLPW3318x24: Blind peninsula wall

cabinet, thirty three inches wide, eighteen
high, twenty four inches deep.
A cabinet label can have up to five parts, the

second and third of which are always
present. The other parts are optional. These
can be diagrammed with the aid of brackets
([ ]), braces ({ }) and bars (|).
Something enclosed in braces is required. It
is optional if enclosed in brackets. Choose
one of a list of objects that is separated by
bars. Here is a simple diagram, with four
examples drawn from it.
[B|P]{B|U|W}
B U BB PW
The five parts are:
1.
BL: blind P: peninsula R: radius E: end

C: corner
Labels consist of letters designating a type or

style, and numbers for dimensions or drawer
counts. Objects are omitted if they are
standard values, which are:
Standard number of drawers is one for a

base cabinet, none for full height or wall.
[ [BL] [P] | [P] R | [R] E | C ]
Some allowed combinations are thus

blind peninsula or radius end.
2.
{ B [D | S] | U [D] | W} [L | R]
B: base U: utility (full height) W: wall
D: door(s) S: sink L: left R: right
463
Cabinets
Cabinet Labels
L and R can appear only if D (door)

appears, and it does not appear for double doors.
3.
width [height] [x depth]
4.
[ OV | RF ] [G]
Moving Cabinet Labels

Cabinet labels may sometimes appear on top
of each other. You can move a label to
OV: oven RF: (built in) refrigerator G:

glass doors
5.
drawers: number of drawers
[PO] [CB] [-drawers [D]]

PO: pull out shelves CB: cutting board
D: double drawers
correct this problem. Click the Text

tool;
select a cabinet label by clicking on it; then
drag from the handle to move the label
toward the front or back of the cabinet.
Deleting Cabinets
Select the cabinet(s) and press the
the keyboard or click the Delete
button on the toolbar.
Del
key on
edit
You can delete all cabinets by using the
Delete Objects dialog. See Delete
Copying Cabinets
In Plan View
Then select Edit> Paste from the menu. The
One or more cabinets can be copied from one

location to another, either within the same
plan or across plans. If you are copying
across plans, both plans must be open during
the operation.
copy pointer
will appear. Click to place
a copy of the selected cabinet(s).
To copy one or more cabinets, first select the

cabinet(s) to copy. When the selection set is
complete, click the Copy
edit button.
The copy pointer

will appear. If copying
the cabinet(s) within the same plan, click to
place the copy.
If copying the cabinet(s) to a different floor
of the same plan or to a different plan
altogether, click in the new floor or new plan.
464
Copying Groups
Stacked cabinet combinations, created with a
row of base cabinets, wall cabinets and full
height cabinets, may be copied as a group. In
Full Height mode, drag a marquee to select
them in floor plan view. When the selection
set is complete, click the Copy
edit
button. The copy pointer
will appear.
Then move to another location in the same
plan, or even in a different plan, choose
Edit> Paste, then click in floor plan view to
place a copy of the group of cabinets.
Moving Cabinets
In 3D Views
To make copies in any 3D view, select the
cabinet or group of cabinets in any 3D view
using the Shift + click method. Click the
Copy
edit button then click and drag
from the center handle of the cabinet or
group to create the copy and release the
button; or, click in the view.
Multiple Copies
To create multiple copies of the same
object(s), double-click the Copy
edit
button when the selection set is complete;
then click in the plan to place a copy.
Multiple copy requires that the receiving
plan be open so that you can toggle to it by
clicking on-screen. If using multiple copy
across plans, open both plans first and select
Window> Tile Horizontally
or Win-
dow> Tile Vertically

to place them sideby-side on screen. See Multiple Copy on
page 792.

Any object or objects which have been group
selected may be replicated along an array
tool. See Transform/Replicate Object on
page 793.
Architectural Blocks
Cabinets can be blocked together as an
architectural block, saved to the library, and
used in other plans. See Creating
Architectural Blocks on page 556.
Select the cabinet(s) to be moved and place

the pointer above the middle handle. When
the pointer changes to the Move pointer,
click and drag the cabinet(s) to the new
position.
If a single cabinet is selected, and a side of
the cabinet is already against the side of
another cabinet of the same type (base, full
or wall), moving the first cabinet toward the
second pushes them together. Multiple
cabinets can be moved in this way provided
that they face the same way, touch side-toside, and that the last cabinet in the group is
not obstructed. The group will be stopped by
an obstruction.
In 3D Views
When moving a cabinet in 3D views,
movement stops when another object (such
as a cabinet, soffit, wall, ceiling or floor) is
hit. You can force movement through another
object by holding down the Ctrl key and then
making the move. It is possible to move one
cabinet over another object when the Ctrl key
is held.
Base cabinets, wall cabinets, and full height
cabinets cannot be moved down through the
floor in a cross section/elevation view, even
using the Ctrl key. Soffits and shelves may be
moved through the floor if the Ctrl key is
used.
465
Cabinets
Moving Cabinets
Using the Move Tools
Move Restrictions
Cabinets may be moved with more precision

with the edit tools. Select the cabinet(s) and
Cabinets will move side to side and front to

back. Groups of cabinets will move
horizontally or vertically across the screen.
To override either restriction, press the Ctrl
key after completing the selection set and
before grabbing the center handle. This will
override any restriction imposed. It works in
2D and in 3D.
click the Transform/Replicate Object

edit button. The Transform/Replicate
Object dialog will open. To move without
copying, check the box Relative to Itself,
then specify the distance and/or angle to
move the selected objects. See Transform/
Multiple cabinets can also be moved with
precision using the Point to Point Move
tool. See Point-to-Point Move on page
790.
A single cabinet will stop moving when it

meets a wall. To enable the cabinet to move
freely through the wall, press the Ctrl key
after the cabinet has stopped against the wall,
while you are still dragging the cabinet. This
will enable the cabinet to be moved through
the wall, but will still maintain the
directional restriction.
Rotating Cabinets
When a cabinet is selected, five handles or
grips appear. Grab the triangular handle at
the back of the cabinet and drag it to rotate
the cabinet. To rotate multiple cabinets
selected as a group, drag from the triangular
handle that displays when the cabinets are
group selected.
Cabinets will rotate in either 15 degree or 7
degree increments, or at any allowed angle
defined in the Plan Defaults dialog. See

Cabinets may be rotated by using the edit
tools. Select a cabinet or group of cabinets
and click the Transform/Replicate Object
edit button. The Transform/
Replicate Object dialog will appear.
Choose the desired parameters and click OK.
The selected object(s) will rotate to the
specified angle. See Transform/Replicate
Object on page 793.
Resizing Cabinets
Individual cabinets can be resized using the
edit handles; by typing new values into the
Cabinet Specification dialog; or by using
466
the Transform/Replicate Object

button.
edit
Editing Cabinets
By Dragging
In floor plan view, select the cabinet to resize.
resized through the floor, but soffits and

shelves can.
Drag from either of the two side handles

to increase the width.

Drag from the front handle, indicated by

a v, to increase the cabinet depth.
Cabinets may be resized by using the Trans-
Temporary dimension numbers will display and will change according to the
resize increment set in the Cabinet
Defaults dialog as the size is changed.
When resizing a cabinet, its movement

stops when another cabinet, soffit or
other object is hit or when the floor or
ceiling is reached. You can force movement or resizing through cabinets, walls
and the ceiling by holding down the Ctrl
key, then stretching or moving the cabinet. Base cabinets, wall cabinets and full
height cabinets cannot be moved or
form/Replicate Object
edit button.
Select a cabinet or group of cabinets and
edit button. The Transform/Replicate
Object dialog will appear. See Transform/
Corner Cabinets
To resize a corner cabinet, select it. Then drag
from the side handle to increase the overall size
of the cabinet without increasing the depth
where it joins to other cabinets. Drag from the
front handle to change the cabinet depth.
Individual cabinets can be selected and

opened for specification by clicking the
Open Object
edit button. See Cabinet
Multiple Cabinets
When cabinets are selected as a group they
can be modified as a group in the Cabinet
Specification dialog. Any specifications
that the selected objects share in common
can be edited when the group is selected.
When you group select cabinets of different
types, some options will be unavailable in
the Cabinet Specification dialog. For
example, you will not be able to redefine the
crown molding on a full height cabinet if it

was selected with a base cabinet that does not
have crown molding.
Soffits, shelves, and partitions can be group
selected and edited using their corresponding
specification dialog. It is important that only
soffits, or only shelves, or only partitions be
a part of the selection set in order to access
the needed specification dialog.
See Cabinet Specification Dialog on page
475.
In a 3D View
Cabinets can be resized in 3D views using
their edit handles. Temporary dimensions
467
Cabinets
Editing Cabinets
will display in a 3D view when a cabinet is

selected. As you drag one edge, the
dimensions update as the size changes.
For example, a wall cabinet created above a
refrigerator can actually hang down into the
space also occupied by the refrigerator. To
fix the problem, select the wall cabinet in the
3D view. Grab the lower handle and drag
upwards to raise the bottom of the wall
cabinet up until it is above the refrigerator.;
then release the wall cabinet.
If the numbers are difficult to see when the
view is in color, select Tools> Color Off
to turn off the color and display the view as a
line drawing.
Reflect Tools
A cabinet or group of cabinets can be
reflected by one of two methods:
Reflect a cabinet using the Transform/

Replicate Object dialog by selecting
the cabinet and clicking the Transform/
Replicate Object
edit button. See
Transform/Replicate Object on page
793.
Use the Reflect About Line

tool.
First, create a CAD line to be used as the
line of reflection. Select the cabinet; click
the Reflect About Line
edit button;
then click the line of reflection. See
Symbol Editing
The Open Symbol tool is only available for
cabinets that contain library symbols such as
sinks, cooktops, or dishwashers. To use the
Open Symbol tool, select the object and
468
click the Open Symbol
edit button. The
Symbol Specification dialog will open,
allowing you to modify the 3D data, CAD

block, and properties of the appliance
symbol. SeeSymbol Specification Dialog
on page 880.
Add to Library
Cabinets can be saved in the Library
Browser. Select the cabinet and click the
Add to Library
edit button. The Add to
Library dialog will display, allowing you to
add the cabinet or cabinet components to
specific libraries under Cabinet Modules,
Cabinet Doors and Drawers, or the
Fixtures (Interior) category. If you choose a
library under the Cabinet Doors and
Drawers category, only the cabinet door will
be saved. If the library is from the Cabinet
Modules category, the cabinet will be saved
along with the cabinet door and any drop-in
appliance. If the cabinet contains a drop-in
appliance, the Fixtures (Interior) category
will be available. If a library from this
category is chosen, only the drop-in
appliance will be saved to the libray. For
more information see Adding to the
Edit Components
You can view and/or modify the Material
List record for a cabinet or group of cabinets
through the Components dialog. To open
the dialog, select the cabinet and click the
Components
edit button. For detailed
information about the specific fields and uses
of the component list, see The Components
Dialog on page 948.
Select/Load Same Type

The Select Same Type tool allows the user
to select cabinet objects that have attributes
common to the selected cabinet. Select a
cabinet and click the Select Same Type
edit button to access the Select Similar
Objects dialog. This dialog provides a list of
attributes to use for filtering the selection
process. Select the attributes that you would
like to match on and click OK. The cabinets
that have the same attributes that were
entered will now be selected. At this point
you can access the Load Values to Make
Same tool from the edit toolbar. Click the
Load Values to Make Same

edit button
and then click on a cabinet in the plan. The
loaded attributes will then be applied to the
selected cabinet. See, Select Same / Load
Same on page 815.
Replace from Library

Select a cabinet and click the Replace From
Library
edit button to open the Replace
From Library dialog. This dialog allows you
to replace the selected cabinet, and others
exactly like it, with any object from the
library. See Replace From Library on page
573.
If the desired cabinet style is known before

cabinets are placed, the door style can be set
up in the Cabinet Defaults dialog. Select
Edit> Default Settings> Cabinets and click
on the desired cabinet type to specify the
default door and drawer styles to use for each
new cabinet.
Once cabinets have been placed, group select
them and click the Open Object
edit
button to choose a new door style from the
Cabinet Specification dialog.
If a door/drawer style is specified from the

Library, the Library Browser may be used to
change the cabinet doors in floor plan or any
3D view.
Open the Library Browser to the desired door
or drawer style and click once to select it.
Then, click on cabinets one-by-one in that
view to drop the selected door into that
cabinet. If you are in a 3D view, you will see
the door style change immediately. Select a
different tool to stop using this function.
Editing Custom Countertops

Use CAD tools to alter the shape and size of
a selected countertop:
Convert straight edges to curved using

the Line to Arc
tool.
Add edges using the Break Line

tool.
469
Cabinets
There are several ways to specify the cabinet

door and drawer style.
Use Chamfer
the corners.
or Fillet
Use Polyline Union
tools on
Edit the polyline with the CAD tools to

define the shape of the countertop.
3.
When a sink or built-in appliance is

added, a hole for the fixture is automatically cut in the custom countertop.
4.
To create a circular countertop, draw a

rectangular polyline and fillet the corners. You can also edit the line segments
that define the polyline with the Line to
, Polyline Inter-
section
, and Polyline Subtract
edit buttons to create or modify countertops using multiple custom countertops.
See Editing Polylines on page 771.
The following illustrates the use of a custom
countertop to fill in a corner behind an
angled sink.
1.
2.
Select Build> Cabinet> Custom Countertop

and draw a rectangular CAD
polyline to place the countertop.
Arc
edit button.
Custom Countertop Hole

To create a hole in a custom countertop, click
the Custom Counter Hole
child button.
Click and drag inside of the countertop to
define the countertop hole. Once created, the
hole can be modified using CAD edit tools.
Creating Architectural Blocks

Custom Countertops
Cabinet
modules (3)
Custom countertop
470
and Custom
Counter Holes
can be added to the
Architectural Blocks library category for
simplified control and management. See
Creating Architectural Blocks on page
556.
Attaching Cabinets
Attaching Cabinets
Merged cabinets show a gap in the
Cabinet Module line.
Cabinet faces are

marked with a v.
Two cabinets cannot merge with the same
side of another cabinet. The picture shows
two instances when cabinets are placed backto-back. Cabinet fronts and joining surfaces
are displayed.
Cabinets will merge when two of them face

the same direction; meet at an angle; and
touch at only two corners. When angled
cabinets are merged, fillers are modeled to
display the cabinets as continuous in 3D
views.
A group of attached cabinets move when a
cabinet at one end is pushed into the others.
Moving Walls with

Cabinets Attached
If the side or back of a cabinet moves against

another cabinet side or back, or against a
wall, it attaches to that object.
When a wall is moved, all attached cabinets

move with it. Moving a wall to an unattached
cabinet will not attach the cabinet to it. The
cabinet must be moved to the wall. It can
also be attached to the wall when Plan
Check is done.
Kitchen Island
To form a kitchen island, attach several
cabinets back-to-back as well as side-to-side.
Match the widths so that each cabinet back or
side meets the back or side of only one other
cabinet. If this is not done, the lines
separating the cabinets cannot be suppressed.
When wall layers are resized or the wall

layer definition redefined, the cabinets may
become unattached. To reattach, select them,
drag them away, and then drag them back
again.
471
Cabinets
Cabinets of the same type which have the

same height automatically join when placed
side-to-side or back-to-back. When attached,
the line between them disappears in floor
plan view; in 3D views, the countertop is
continuous.
Special Cabinets
There are several special cabinet shapes
which can be specified. Certain requirements
must be met before some special cabinet
types can be specified.
Corner Cabinet with sides of equal width
Normal Cabinets
Select the Cabinet Tools
Corner cabinets can also be created by

clicking directly in a corner in floor plan
view. Click to place the cabinet when the
cursor touches both corner walls.
Before a corner cabinet can be specified

in the Cabinet Specification dialog,
the cabinets Width must be greater than
its Depth.
The Left Side Width and the Right Side

Width can be set independently for corner
cabinets. See General Tab on page 475.
You can specify a Diagonal Door on corner cabinets to create an angled corner
cabinet. See Front Tab on page 478.
parent button,
click the Base Cabinet

child button, and
click in floor plan view to place a normal
base cabinet.
Normal (default) cabinet
Corner Cabinets
Open a cabinet for specification and select
Corner Cabinet from the Special drop-down
list to create a corner cabinet.
472
Corner cabinet with diagonal door
The diagonal door on corner cabinets can

be curved by entering a negative value in
the second Right Side Width field. See
General Tab on page 475.
Special Cabinets
Radius End cabinets have a ninety-degree arch
Corner cabinet with curved door
End Cabinets

End Cabinet from the Special drop-down list
to create an end cabinet.
As youre facing a cabinet, a right radius

end cabinet curves to the right, and a left
radius end cabinet curves to the left.
Left
Radius
End
Right
Radius
End
Peninsula Radius Cabinets
End Cabinets have an angled front and

side.
A cabinets Width must be no greater

than its Depth for an End Cabinet to be
specified.
Cabinets
Right End Cabinet

Peninsula Radius from the Special dropdown list to create peninsula radius cabinet.
Radius End Cabinets

Right Radius End or Left Radius End from
the Special drop-down list to create a radius
end cabinet.
Peninsula Radius Cabinet
The radius can be adjusted by changing

the Depth/Bow Depth value. See General Tab on page 475.
Angled Front Cabinets

Angled Front from the Special drop-down
list to create an angled front cabinet.
473
Angled Front Cabinet
in a corner are separated from each other by

nine inches or less. Where two walls meet at
an inside corner, a countertop often flows
continuously across base cabinets on one
wall to those attached to the next. A filler is
used to separate the front of one of these
cabinets from the one it meets so that
drawers and doors have room to operate.
The length of the left and right side of an

Angled Front cabinet can be defined by
changing the Depth/Bow Depth value.
Bow Front Cabinets

Bow Front from the Special drop-down list
to create a bow front cabinet.
Two base cabinets and the filler between them
To allow a continuous countertop, wall and

full height cabinets also attach to each other
in this way.
Blind Cabinets
Bow Front Cabinet
The bow depth of a Bow Front cabinet

can be defined. See General Tab on
page 475.
The bow depth cannot exceed half of the

cabinets width.
The doors and drawers on a Bow Front

cabinet will automatically match the curvature of the cabinet.
Fillers
Chief Architect models a continuous
countertop and fillers if two cabinets meeting
474
Often, when two cabinets meet in a corner,

one is partially hidden by the other. The
portion of the cabinet covered by the other
cabinet's side cannot be seen and is called a
blind cabinet. Blind cabinets are handled
the same as other cabinets that meet in a
corner.

The Cabinet Specification dialog allows
you to customize individual cabinets and
cabinet groups. The options in the dialog are
similar to the Cabinet Defaults dialog.
can be changed globally by making the

change in the Cabinet Defaults dialog.
When a value in the dialog is followed by a

(D), it means that it is a dynamic default and
Select a cabinet and click the Open Object

edit button to open the Cabinet
General Tab
1
3
2
4
1 A number of Special cabinets are
available from the drop-down list.

Library doors cannot be used with some
special cabinets. See Special Cabinets on
page 472.
2 Door Style - Select from the list of
available styles. More door styles are
Cabinets
8
9
available in the Cabinet Doors and

Drawers library category. Once a door style
is selected from the library, it will display in
the drop down list. The picture of the cabinet
in the dialog will update as the Door Style is
changed. See Editing the Cabinet Door/
Drawer Style on page 469.
475
3 Drawer Style - Select from the list of

available styles.
Select Plain Drawers to apply flat panel

drawers.
Select Framed Doors to incorporate a

drawer with a frame and panel. The
drawer must be at least 6 inches for the
frame and panel to appear.
Select Library to select a cabinet drawer

from the library. See Cabinet Doors and
Drawers on page 575.
4 Specification - A variety of cabinet
dimensions can be specified here.

Fractional cabinet widths, depths, and
heights are supported to 1/16th of an inch.
Height (Including Counter) - This is the
measurement from the bottom to the top of
the cabinet. For base cabinets, this dimension
includes the Counter Thickness.
Note: Height defines the height of the entire
cabinet. The height of the cabinet face,
countertop and the toe kick are all included
in this value. If you change either the Countertop Thickness or the Toe Kick Height,
the cabinet face height will be altered which
will change the heights of your face objects.
Width - This is the dimension across the

cabinet as you view it in elevation. This does
not include the countertop overhang.
Depth - This is the dimension from front to
back on the cabinet. This does not include
the thickness of 3/4 for overlay doors or the
countertop overhang.
For special type Bow cabinets, specify the
Bow Depth in inches. Up to half of the
cabinets width is allowed.
476
If a corner cabinet is assigned a diagonal

door, the Width and Depth/Bow Depth
fields become Right Side Width and Left
Side Width. The second Right Side Width
field specifies the bow depth: a positive
number creates a bow and a negative
number, an inside bow.
Floor to Bottom - Specify a distance. For
base and full height cabinets, this is usually
0. Increase this value by at least 1/16 to
eliminate the toe kick. If a toe kick height has
been changed from the default values, raising
a cabinet off the floor will not remove the toe
kick.
Follow Terrain - If the cabinet is outside of
a room, check this box to place the cabinet
relative to the terrain height.
Backsplash Height - To add a backsplash to
a base cabinet, enter a positive value. If you
set the height to zero, a backsplash will not
be generated. If the Backsplash Height is set
to use the default "(D)", the backsplash will
only display when the cabinet is against a
wall. Delete the "(D)" and enter a positive
value to display a backsplash on a cabinet
that is not against a wall.
Side - Check this box to have the same
height backsplash added to the side of the
base or wall cabinet which is against a wall
or taller cabinet.
Backsplash Thickness - Specify the
thickness of the backsplash material.
Any base cabinet or wall cabinet can have a
backsplash defined. The backsplash for a
wall cabinet will extend from the bottom of
the cabinet down to the base cabinet. The
backsplash for a base cabinet is measured
from the countertop up.
If a base cabinet and a wall cabinet both have

a backsplash, the backsplash from the wall
cabinet will extend down to the top of the
base cabinet backsplash.
Electrical switches or outlets which are
placed within the backsplash area will
display in front of the backsplash in a 3D
view, when electrical is set to display in the
Counter Thickness and Counter Overhang
- Specify these values for base cabinets. The
Counter Overhang is used for any side of a
cabinet that is not against a wall or another
cabinet. Changing the counter thickness will
not alter the cabinet height but it will affect
the height of face items.
Toe Kick Height and Depth - Specify these
values for base or full height cabinets. If a
Toe Kick Height or Depth is defined, it
becomes part of the cabinet and will not be
deleted if the cabinet is raised off the floor.
If the Toe Kick Height or Toe Kick Depth is
set to use the default "(D)", the toe kick will
only display when the cabinet is resting on
the floor. Delete the "(D)" and enter a
positive value to display a toe kick on a
cabinet that is raised off the floor.
specified width. This will also apply to the

countertop.
Check Rounded to eliminate the 45 degree
plane and round the cabinet corners.
6 Flat Sides can be added to base and full
height cabinets. Checking Flat Sides

eliminates the counter overhang and toe kick
area on the exposed sides of the cabinet.
Check Flat Back to eliminate the toe kick on

cabinets with an exposed back. This will not
eliminate the toe kick on the cabinet front.
Check Closed Toe to extend the cabinet
sides to cover the sides of the toe kick area. If
pilasters that do not extend to the floor are
specified, checking this places a support
block under them at exposed corners.
7 The preview of the cabinet will update

as the cabinet changes.
8 Show Color - Check this box to display

the cabinet preview in color.
9 The automatic Cabinet Label displays

below the dialog preview.
The cabinet label defines the type and size of

the cabinet; it is not editable but you can
specify a custom label on the Label tab.
The labels will display in floor plan view if
Cabinet Labels are set to display in the
Layer Display Options dialog. They also
appear in the Materials List.
Changing the Toe Kick Height will not alter

the cabinet height but it will affect the height
of face items.
5 Corner Width - Enter a value here to

create a Sflat corner plane of the
477
Cabinets
Wall cabinets offer a check box for

Backsplash to Base Below. If a backsplash
is added to a wall cabinet, it will completely
cover the wall from the bottom of the cabinet
to the countertop or backsplash below.
Front Tab
The appearance of the cabinet front is
specified on the Front tab. Most settings can
be set globally in the Cabinet Defaults

dialog. See Cabinet Defaults on page 458.
1 The cabinet diagram on the Front tab is
used to modify the selected cabinets

configuration. Click on a face item in the
diagram to select it. The preview will
highlight the currently selected item. The
Item Type and Item Height will also
identify the part which is currently selected.
2 Item Number - The item number
which is currently selected will display

here. Click the drop-down list to select a face
item. When the cursor is in this field, the
arrow keys on the keyboard will also allow
you to move between face items.
Item Type - Click the drop-down list to
select from the available items.
478
Items that appear in the face of a cabinet such

as doors, drawers, shelves and appliances are
called face items. Each face item is separated
by a face frame piece. The exposed portion is
defined as the separation. At the top, bottom
and sides of the face frame, a separation
represents the cabinet rails and stiles.
Note: The program makes sure that the
heights of your face items will always be the
same as your cabinet face height. When necessary, a blank area will be inserted at the
bottom to fill in any gaps or delete the lowest
face item when there is not enough room.
A cabinet can have any number of face

items; but there is a limit to the number of
items that can actually fit on a cabinet
front.
Cabinet fronts may be composed of any

combination of face items.
When a Panel (false front) is specified, it

will assume the appearance of the drawer
or door which has been assigned to that
cabinet.
Appliances cannot be added from the

Item Type list, but will appear once they
have been added from the library. See
Built-In Appliances on page 460.
Item Height - Define a value for the selected

item in the cabinet front. Fractional heights
are supported to 1/16th of an inch.
When the height of a cabinet is changed,

or the height of a face item is changed,
the height of the lowest face item is
altered to make up the difference.
If you modify the lowest item, the item

directly above will be adjusted. It is recommended that you set the countertop
height and the toe kick height first, and
then work from the top to the bottom
when adjusting face items.
If the height of an appliance has been

altered, entering a "d" will restore its
default height.
Click Add New to add a new face item

directly below the currently selected item.
After clicking Add New the New

Cabinet Face Item dialog will appear.
Define the Item Type, Item Height and
click OK.
If you click Add New when no face item

is selected, the program will add the new
item at the bottom of the cabinet face.
When a face item is added to the cabinet

front, the program will reduce the height
of the lowest item on the cabinet front to
make room for the new item.
Click Delete to remove the currently selected

item. When a face item is deleted, the height
of the lowest item is usually increased to
make up the difference.
Click Move Up to move the currently
selected item up one position, switching
places with the item directly above.
Click Move Down to move the currently
selected item down one position, switching
places with the item directly below.
3 Certain Options are available
depending on the type of cabinet which

is currently selected.
Inset Doors may be selected for all cabinets. This option will make all door and
drawer faces flush with the cabinet face
instead of overlaying it.
Doors On Back may be selected if the

cabinet back is not attached. The back
will match the front.
Glass Doors may be defined for any cabinet that doesnt use a library door. When
selected, the door panel will be created
479
Cabinets
using the glass material. The entire door

will be glass on plain doors.
Diagonal Door - This option is only

available for corner cabinets. Check this
box to create a diagonal door instead of a
double door at right angles.
Bevel - Type in a value to apply beveled

edges to drawers and plain doors. This
affects all of the cabinet drawers and slab
doors. It does not affect framed or library
doors. The bevel width, as viewed from the
front has a maximum value of 3.
If Diagonal Door is checked in the Cabinet Defaults dialog, corner cabinets will
have a diagonal door by default.
480
Stile Between Doors - Select the check

box to have double doors and double
drawers separated by a stile. This has no
effect on other item types.
Roll-out shelves may be defined for base
and full height cabinets attached to a
wall. These do not display but are
reflected in the cabinet label.
Lazy Susan - This option is only available for corner cabinets. These do not
display but are reflected in the cabinet
label and how the cabinet is drawn in
floor plan view.
The Reverse Appliance check box displays if a sink, appliance or other fixture
is placed into the cabinet. Select Reverse
Appliance to reverse the fixture from left
to right. This feature can be used to
change a left hand door on a built-in
refrigerator to a right hand door.
Check Double Face to replace the current cabinet face with two faces, each
approximately half as wide.
Check Triple Face to replace the cabinet

face with three faces.
Enter a Side Overlap value to apply an

overlap condition to doors and drawers. A
value of 2 inches will create an overlap of
one inch on either side.
Enter a Vertical Overlap value to apply a
vertical overlap condition to doors and
drawers. A value of 2 inches will create an
overlap of one inch on top and bottom.
Separation - Defines the exposed space
between doors, drawers, and face items. A
European style cabinet has a zero separation.
Note: The program will try to maintain a single separation between all face items. When
you add or delete a face item, separations will
usually be added or deleted with them.
Left and Right Stile - Define the exposed

width to the left or right of all face items.
These can be set independently.
4 Appliance Front Offset - This option
is available for cabinets with topmounted fixtures, such as sinks and

cooktops. Enter a value to adjust the depth of
the counter surface between the counter edge
and the fixture.
Fill Tab
1
2
The options on this tab control how a cabinet

displays in floor plan view.
Check No Fill to display the selected

appliance with a transparent fill.
1 Check No Fill to display the selected
cabinet(s) with a transparent fill,

displaying only the cabinet border.
Check Use Original Plan Colors to use the

original colors for the fixture inserted into
the cabinet.
Check Use Default to use the default fill

style assigned to the corresponding cabinet.
See Cabinet Defaults on page 458.
Uncheck both boxes and click the Plan Fill

color bar to open the Color dialog and
specify a custom fill color for the appliance.
2 Uncheck both boxes and click the Plan
Fill color bar to open the Color dialog

and specify a custom fill color. See Color
Chooser Dialog on page 128.
3 Appliance Fill - These items are
enabled when the selected cabinet

contains a fixture or appliance.
481
Cabinets
Hardware Tab
1 Select a Door Handle from the drop-
down list or select a Library handle

from the Select Library Object dialog.
Specify the location of the handle In from
Door Edge and Down from Door Top. For
Wall Cabinets, this value is Up From Door
Bottom.
Select a Drawer Handle from the dropdown list or select a Library handle from the
Select Library Object dialog. Entering a
value In from Drawer Edge will create two
handles the specified distance from the
drawers edge.
Hinges - Select from the list of available
styles or select a Library hinge from the
Select Library Object dialog. Specify
the location of the hinges Up/Down from
482
Door Edge. Two or three hinges will be

placed, depending on the door height.
2 Front Pilaster - Select a default front
pilaster, select a Pilaster from the

Library, or select None. The default pilaster
is specified in the Cabinet Defaults dialog
(see Cabinet Defaults on page 458).
Corner Pilaster - Select a default corner
pilaster, select a pilaster from the Library, or
select None. Specifying a corner pilaster will
automatically create a flat corner surface and
will override the Flat Corner setting on the
General tab.
Note: Corner pilasters will be eliminated on
the back if the cabinet is against a wall, and
on either side if is joined with another cabinet.
The Width applies to both front pilasters and

corner pilasters.
Check Extend to Floor to extend front
pilasters and corner pilasters to the floor.
Removing the Toe Kick (on the General tab)
will also extend the pilasters to the floor.
3 Cabinet Leg - Select the default
Cabinets
cabinet leg, select a cabinet leg from

the Library, or select None. Adjoining
cabinets wil share cabinet legs.
Base cabinet with front pilasters and legs
483
Moldings Tab
Multiple moldings for each type of cabinet

can be specified. For example, you may want
a wood edge around countertops of base
cabinets and a crown molding that ties
together the tops of the wall cabinets and full
height cabinets.
1 Molding - Select a molding for the
cabinet. This menu will have items only

if moldings have been assigned to your
default cabinet. These moldings are stored
with individual cabinets in all other cases.
2 Add New - If no moldings have been
selected or if you want to specify a new

molding, click the button to open the
Moldings and Profiles library category.
Browse and add a new molding to the list.
484
Select - Click here to open the Moldings and

Profiles library category. If you select a
molding using the Select button, you will
replace the current molding in the list. This
option substitutes one molding for another; it
does not add a new molding to the list.
Delete - Click here to delete the currently
selected molding from the cabinet.
3 Molding Specification - This section
allows you to modify the molding

profile for the selected cabinet.
Height - This is the vertical dimension of the

molding profile. This value is initially set in
the selected molding profile but can be
adjusted.
Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog
Width - This value can be used to resize the

molding profile horizontally.
Offset - This value defines the distance the
molding is offset from the top or bottom of
the cabinet. Where it is measured from
depends on which option is selected below.
You can enter positive or negative values in
this field. The molding will not be displayed
if it is completely above or below the
cabinet.
type of object is selected. See Label Tab on

page 933.
1
3
2
4
Once an offset is defined, select From Top

or From Bottom to specify a reference point.
From Top will be measured from the
cabinet top and the molding top.
From Bottom will be measured from the

molding bottom and the cabinet bottom.
Layer Tab
Materials Tab
Label Tab
An objects display in floor plan view if
Show Labels is selected on the Label tab of
the Schedule Specification dialog for that
1 Suppress Label - Check this box to
suppress display of the selected objects

label.
2 Automatic Labels - Select this option
to control labels through either the

default schedule or the schedule that the
cabinet is currently in.
3 Use Component Code -Replace the
default label for this object with the

component code. See The Components
Dialog on page 948.
4 Specify Label - Replace the default
label for this object with whatever you

type into the text field.
Note: If you choose a label shape in the
Cabinet Schedule Specification dialog Label tab, it will override these options
and display the schedule label instead.
Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog

Select a shelf or partition and click the Open
edit button to open the Shelf
Specification dialog or Partition
Object
General Tab
For more information about the General tab,
see General Tab on page 544.
485
Cabinets
Fill Tab
For information about the Fill tab, see Fill
Tab on page 481.
Materials Tab
Layer Tab
For information about using the Layer tab,
Custom Countertop Specification Dialog

Select a custom countertop and click the
Open Object
Custom Countertop Specification
dialog.
General Tab
4 Thickness - Specify the thickness of

the countertop.
Polyline Tab
Selected Line Tab

1
2
3
4
1 Check Hole in Countertop to convert

Moldings Tab
Line Style Tab
the polyline into a countertop hole. In

order to use this option, the selected polyline
must be contained within a custom
countertop.

2 Check No Molding On Selected Edge

to turn off the display of molding on the
selected edge.

3 Top Height - Specify the height of the

top of the custom countertop.
Fill Style Tab
Materials Tab
486
Most cabinet default settings are not

dynamic. The following values are dynamic
and will change in existing cabinet objects
whenever the default cabinet is changed:
Separation, Splash Height and Thickness,
Countertop Overhang and Thickness, Toe
Kick Height and Depth, and all Materials.
See Dynamic Defaults on page 90.
Double-click the Cabinet Tools
parent
tool to open the Cabinet Defaults dialog.
The General Cabinet Defaults apply to all

cabinets. Set the Minimum Cabinet Width
and the Width Increment that cabinets snap
to. The Width Increment is 1 inch and the
Minimum Cabinet Width is 1/16th of an
inch or 1 mm. These settings apply only
when you select a cabinet and resize its width
using one of the side handles.
You may want to set these values specifically for particular manufacturers.
This helps you place and resize cabinets with
your mouse quickly.
The other Cabinet Default dialog buttons

access the default dialogs for each cabinet
type. When finished with each, you will
return to this dialog.
Base, Full Height,

Wall, Shelf, Partition
The default dialog for each cabinet type is
similar to its corresponding specification
dialog and can also be opened by doubleclicking the appropriate child tool or by
selecting Edit> Default Settings> Cabinets.
General Cabinet Defaults

Click General to display the General
Cabinet Defaults dialog.
For a description of the settings in the

Cabinet Defaults dialogs, refer to the
documentation in this chapter for their
respective specification dialogs.
487
Cabinets
Most of the values in the various Cabinet

Defaults dialog(s) are initial values. Once
placed, cabinets can be edited individually or
in groups by selecting and opening them for
specification. Changes made to cabinets after
they have been placed will not alter the
default settings. It is a good idea to go over
the settings in the Cabinet Defaults
dialogs before cabinets are placed.
488
Chapter 19:
Terrain
Chief Architect allows you to model the

terrain around a house. Begin by specifying
elevation data which creates the surface
contours, and then add surface features.
Chief Architect builds a three dimensional
map of the terrain. The more information
provided, the better the terrain will model.
Once the terrain is modeled, shadows that
follow the terrain can be created using the
Sun Angle tool. Roads and sidewalks can
also be built, and are covered in their own
chapter, Roads & Sidewalks on page 529.
Chapter Contents
Terrain Configuration Button

Terrain Tools
Terrain Elevation Tools
Terrain Modifier Tools
Terrain Feature Tools
Plant Tools
Sprinkler Tools
Hardiness Zones
The Terrain Library

Displaying Terrain in Floor Plan View
Displaying Terrain In 3D Views
Selecting Terrain Data
Deleting Terrain Data
Copying Terrain
Clearing the Terrain
Editing the Terrain Perimeter
Editing Elevation Data
Editing Terrain Features
Plant Image Specification Dialog
Plant Chooser Dialog
Terrain Specification Dialog
Elevation Point Specification Dialog
Elevation Line Specification Dialog
Hill / Valley Specification Dialog
Raised / Lowered Region Specification
Dialog
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog
Importing Terrain Data
Import Terrain Wizard
Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data
Converting CAD Lines to Terrain Data
489
Terrain
Chapter Overview
Terrain Configuration Button

Access to the terrain and road tools is
centralized through the use of the
Terrain Configuration button.
Click the Terrain Configuration
button
to display the following parent buttons:
Terrain Tools
Plant Tools
Sprinkler Tools
Road Tools
Terrain Tools
There are many tools available for creating
terrain. All tools are accessible through the
Terrain menu. If you need to add any of the
parent buttons to your toolbar, use the
Toolbar Customization dialog. See
Adding Toolbar Buttons on page 18.
Click the Terrain Tools parent button
to display its child buttons to the right.
Click the Terrain Perimeter child
button to create a terrain perimeter.
Terrain perimeter at 0' - 0" in a render view
The terrain perimeter is a closed polyline that

can be shaped to match the size and
orientation of the building site. The terrain
perimeter defines the boundary of the terrain
which will be generated in 3D views. If the
terrain perimeter does not appear on the
screen, click the Fill Window
Terrain Perimeter
490
button.
If you create a terrain perimeter after you

have drawn a building or walls, it will
encompass everything in floor plan view. It
can be resized and edited like other
polylines. See Editing Polylines on page
771.
appears in 3D views. See Terrain

A CAD polyline can be converted into a

terrain perimeter. See Converting CAD
Lines to Terrain Data on page 528.
If you do not add any terrain elevation data
within the terrain perimeter, you will have a
flat terrain at the elevation 0' - 0".
The terrain perimeter contains a variety of
properties that can be customized. Many of
these properties affect how the terrain will
appear when modeled in 3D. See Terrain
Click the Terrain Specification button
to open the Terrain Specification
dialog. The Terrain Specification dialog
controls how terrain is generated and how it
Click the Build Terrain child button to

generate the terrain surface based upon
the provided elevation data. See Building
the Terrain on page 500.
Click the Clear Terrain child button to
remove contour lines and 3D surfaces
generated by the program based on the
provided elevation data. Elevation data
which was entered manually will remain. See
Clearing the Terrain on page 501.
Click the Terrain Library child button
to open the Library Browser to the
Terrain category. See The Terrain Library
on page 499.

should be used in addition to Elevation
Lines
Elevation data can be specified using

Elevation Point
Elevation Spline
, Elevation Line
, Elevation Region
and Terrain Break

child buttons. When
terrain is generated, this data is used to
calculate the surface of your site and is
represented by contour lines in floor plan
view and a curved surface in 3D.
Elevation Points
Elevation Points
contain absolute
elevation data for one location. Chief
Architect requires many points to make an
accurate approximation of your site. They
and Elevation Splines
Even small sites with a slope may require

over a hundred points to generate an accurate
model of the terrain. For the sake of
illustration, the following image displays
only a few elevation points.
To place an elevation point, click the
Elevation Points
in floor plan view. The Elevation Point
Specification dialog displays. Enter an
elevation value and click OK. Click
somewhere else in floor plan view and the
Elevation Point Specification dialog
will open again with the last elevation value
entered. See Elevation Point Specification
Dialog on page 515.
491
Terrain
Click the Terrain Elevation Tools

parent button to display its child
buttons to the right.
constant elevation. Elevation lines can be

connected to create a polyline with many
straight sections. For the sake of illustration,
single-section elevation lines were added to
the following image.
To place an elevation line, click the Terrain
Elevation Tools
Elevation Points before terrain generation
parent button, then click
the Elevation Line

child button and
click and drag in floor plan view. At first, an
elevation line is at elevation 0' - 0". It must
be opened and assigned an elevation.
To generate the terrain, click the Terrain

Tools
parent button then click the Build
120"
Terrain
child button. Chief Architect
gathers the elevation data provided; fills in
the gaps where elevation data has not been
provided; and generates contour lines. See
Building the Terrain on page 500.
0"
Elevation Lines before terrain generation
Contour lines after terrain generation
Elevation Lines
An Elevation Line contains absolute
elevation data for many points at a
492
Render view (Low Detail) after terrain generation
Elevation Splines
Elevation Splines can be used to form
complex curves and shapes. Like
elevation lines, elevation splines contain
absolute elevation data for many points along
a constant elevation.
To place an elevation spline, click the
Elevation Spline
and drag multiple sections in floor plan view.
Elevation splines are initially placed at
elevation 0' - 0"and must be opened and
assigned an elevation.
60"
Elevation lines and elevation splines are

created and edited just like CAD lines and
splines in CAD mode. See The CAD
Drawing Tools on page 726.
Elevation Regions
An Elevation Region contains
absolute elevation data for an enclosed
region and is ideal for creating a flat surface
for your building site. Avoid specifing any
other elevation data within an elevation
region.
0"
Elevation splines before terrain generation
Elevation Region
child button then click
and drag a rectangular polyline in floor plan
view. Once the elevation region is drawn, it
must be opened and assigned an elevation
value. Elevation regions are created just like
rectangular polylines. See Rectangular
493
Terrain
To create an elevation region, click the

36"
Terrain Breaks
240"
120"
A Terrain Break creates a division

along the terrain surface that effects
terrain generation. Elevation data on one side
of the terrain break will not affect the terrain
generation on the other side, allowing you to
create immediate drops in terrain.
To place a terrain break, click the Terrain
Break
child button and click and drag a
line in floor plan view.
0"
Elevation lines used to create a terrain grade,
elevation region used to create building pad.
If the terrain break divides the terrain

perimeter into two separate pieces, the
terrain data on either side will be calculated independently and smoothed separately, resulting in sharp terrain contours.
If the terrain break does not extend completely from one side of the terrain perimeter to the other, the areas near each end
of the terrain break will be blended.
240"
120"

84"
18"
0"
Elevation lines create the grade, elevation
region creates the building pad, and the terrain
break (dashed) creates a vertical drop.
Render Full Overview after terrain generation
494
Render full overview after terrain generation
The Retaining Wall

tool creates a
similar effect and adds a retaining wall that
rests against the terrain break. By default, the
height of the retaining wall matches the
terrain on the high side of the break and the
bottom matches the low side. Height can be
specified independent of the terrain
elevation, as well. See Retaining Wall on
page 132.

Click the Terrain Modifier Tools
Elev. Line
(240")
Raised Region
, Lowered Region
Hill
, Valley
, and Flat Region
child buttons. These tools allow you to
modify the existing elevation data by
drawing a closed polyline. Their height is
relative to the terrain surface generated from
the elevation data provided in your plan.
To add a terrain modifier to your plan, click
one of the child buttons and click and drag a
closed polyline in floor plan view. The
polyline can then be selected and edited in a
variety of ways. See Editing Terrain
Features on page 503.
Hill
Elevation
Region (120")
Flat
Region
Elev. Line
(0")
Raised
Region
Valley
Lowered Region
Elevation lines create the grade,

elevation region creates the building pad,
and the terrain modifiers create terrain
shapes relative to the elevation data.
495
Terrain
The terrain surface can be modified using the
Lowered Region
creates a depression
which is flat on the bottom. The Hill
and
Valley
tools create similar terrain shapes
which come to a point instead of flattening at
their highest or lowest elevations. A Flat
Render Full Overview after terrain generation
A Raised Region
creates a raised area
which is flat on the top, like a plateau, and a
Region
will adjust to the surrounding
terrain to maintain a flat elevation.
Terrain modifiers can be blocked with
images and stored in the library for
future use. See Creating Architectural
Blocks on page 556.

Terrain features are also useful for creating
walkways using the height property.
Click the Terrain Feature Tools

You can create a variety of terrain features
using the Feature Line
; Feature Polyline
Spline
; Feature Spline
; Feature Closed
; Kidney Shaped Feature
and Terrain Hole

tools. Terrain features
are bounded areas created with closed
polylines and are useful for defining areas
that are different from the terrain as a whole.
Terrain features always follow the terrain and
have the same surface shape as the terrain
that lies beneath them. Terrain features can
have a specified height offset and material
and can also clip to other terrain features.
Use terrain features to highlight landscape
elements. For example if the entire terrain is
using a grass material, a flower bed can be
created within the terrain by specifying a
terrain feature that uses a dirt material.
496
To create a terrain feature, select one of the

child buttons then use the mouse to draw the
terrain feature in floor plan view.
Terrain Feature Lines
, Feature Splines
, and Feature Closed Splines

are
created just like standard lines, splines, and
closed splines in CAD mode. See Line
Tools on page 727, and Splines on page
744.
Feature Polylines
and Terrain Holes
are created just like rectangular

polylines. Kidney Shaped Features
are
created by dragging from one end of the
kidney to the other. See Rectangular
Terrain features can only be created from
closed polylines or splines. If they are not
closed, Chief Architect will automatically

close them.
For information about adding height and
material information to terrain features, see
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog on
page 519.
Terrain features were used to create the

following image. Positive or negative
elevation values were assigned to each, as
were special materials such as sand, water,
and soil. The volleyball net, flowers, and tree
are all objects found in the Library Browser.
A Terrain Hole
is a region that cuts a
hole in the terrain. Using this tool is the same
as creating a terrain feature and checking
"make hole" in the Terrain Feature
Specification dialog. See Terrain Feature
The Terrain Hole
tool is useful for
manually clipping the terrain around a
foundation that does not match the footprint
of the first floor. For more information on
clipping, see General Tab on page 512.
Terrain features in floor plan view
Terrain
Terrain features can be blocked with

images and stored in the library for
future use. See Creating Architectural
Blocks on page 556.
Terrain features in a final render view
497
Plant Tools
Click the Plant Tools parent button to
Click the Plant Chooser
child button to
Open the Plant Chooser dialog. See Plant
Click the Plant Library
child button to
open the Library Browser to the Plant
category. See Plants on page 581
Click the Create Plant Image
child
button to create a plant image. See Plant
Image Specification Dialog on page 503.
Once a plant image is created, it can be
added to the library for future use. See
Click the Grow All Plants
child button
to open the Grow Plants dialog.
Click and drag the slider bar and select a

growth period from zero to twenty years.
This will only work for plants that have a
mature height and mature age set. See Plant
Click the Show Hardiness Zones
child
button to access regional climate zone maps.
See Hardiness Zones on page 499.
Add Fencing
to your terrain, complete
with gates from the Doors Library.
SeeFencing on page 138 and Doors on
page 576.
Sprinkler Tools
Click the Sprinkler Tools parent
Click the Sprinkler Head
child button
to select a sprinkler from the Library
Browser. Sprinklers can be selected and
opened for specification. See Sprinkler
Click the Sprinkler Line
child button to
draw sprinkler lines in your plan. Sprinkler
lines are drawn and edited just like CAD
lines. See Line Tools on page 727.
Click the Sprinkler Spline
child button
to draw sprinkler splines in your plan.
498
Sprinkler splines are drawn and edited like

CAD splines. See Splines on page 744.
The appearance of sprinkler lines and splines
can be controlled in the Layer Display
Options dialog. See Displaying Objects
on page 125.
Hardiness Zones
Hardiness Zones
Select Terrain> Plant> Show Hardiness
Zones...
to display the regional
Hardiness Zone Maps. Click the dropdown list to select different regions.
The Library Browser contains a

collection of terrain objects which can
be placed in a plan.
You can also create your own objects and
save them to the library. Select any
combination of elevation points; elevation
lines; terrain features; roads; sidewalks; road
markings; or even the terrain perimeter itself

and send them to the library as one unit. This
library object can then be placed into any
plan. Once placed into a plan each object is
independent and is no longer part of the
group. See Adding to the Library on page
568.
Displaying Terrain in Floor Plan View

The terrain perimeter; contours; elevation
data; and terrain features are all displayed in
floor plan view. The line color, line style, and
lineweight of these objects can be controlled
by layer. See Layer Properties on page

121.
499
Terrain
The Terrain Library
Displaying Terrain In 3D Views

Building the Terrain
When terrain is generated, Chief
Architect gathers all terrain data that
has been added to the model and creates a
terrain surface. The program "interpolates"
the provided data to fill in the gaps.
Contour lines are generated at intervals
specified on the Contours tab of the Terrain
Specification dialog. If elevation data is
added to the model at 24 inch intervals and
the contour line interval is set to 12 inches,
generating terrain will create one additional
contour line between each piece of elevation
data. See Contours Tab on page 514.
A 3D terrain can only be generated when a
terrain perimeter is included. A terrain
perimeter with no additional elevation data
will generate a terrain that is flat at the
elevation 0' - 0".
By default, the terrain is automatically built
before a 3D view is generated.
This process takes a variable amount of time,
depending on the amount of elevation data
and number of terrain features. The
Building Terrain progress dialog displays
as terrain is generated, sometimes only
briefly, indicating the progress being made.
When new terrain data is added, the terrain

will need to be regenerated before it can be
viewed in 3D. The program will rebuild the
terrain automatically before generating 3D
views or when 3D views are active.
To turn off the automatic rebuild, select 3D>
3D Settings...
to open the 3D Settings
dialog. Clear the Auto Rebuild Terrain
check box on the Options tab and click OK.
Rebuild the terrain manually by clicking the
Build Terrain
child button.
Many tools are available to help you adjust

the angle of your view in 3D. See Editing a
Camera in 3D Views on page 627.
Terrain & 3D Drawing Time

Terrain requires many triangles to generate,
which has an effect on the drawing time of
3D views. The amount of the delay is
determined by the quality of the terrain and
the number of terrain features present.
To see terrain in floor plan but not 3D views,
turn off the Terrain Perimeter layer in the
119.
The Terrain adjusts trees and image to the
height of the terrain. This is done each time a
3D view is displayed.
Lights and symbols from the Symbol Library
can be placed outdoors and included in 3D
views when the terrain is generated. When
placed outdoors, lights and symbols follow
the terrain surface.
500
Sun Shadows
Sun shadows are computed based on the
contour of the terrain. If a terrain perimeter
exists, the sun shadow adjusts to the terrain.
The Sun Shadow is automatically rebuilt

whenever terrain is rebuilt. If you generate a
Sun Shadow and the terrain is not up-to-date,
the terrain will automatically rebuild. You
can turn off the automatic rebuild. See Sun
Angle Specification Dialog on page 666.

The terrain perimeter; elevation data;
elevation regions; and terrain features can be
selected by clicking on them using the Select
Objects
tool or by right-clicking on
them using any tool.
When an individual terrain object is selected

in floor plan view, similar objects can be
added to the selection set by holding down
the Shift key. Dissimilar objects cannot
always be group selected.
Deleting Terrain Data

Select the object or objects you wish to
delete and press the Del key on the keyboard
or click the Delete
All terrain objects are deleted when the

Terrain Perimeter is deleted.
edit button.
Copying Terrain
2.
To copy terrain objects
3.
1.
Select the object or group of objects in

floor plan view.
Click the Copy/Paste

The pointer will change:
edit button.
.
Click where you would like to place the

copied terrain objects.
Note: If you copy from one plan to another,

you will not be able to view the pasted objects
in 3D unless a terrain perimeter exists.
Clearing the Terrain

To decrease file size without losing
information, remove the generated
terrain from memory by selecting Terrain>

Clear Terrain
. When the terrain is
501
Terrain
Terrain data and terrain features can be

selected and copied.
cleared, it does not appear in 3D views and

contours do not appear in floor plan view;
but it can be regenerated by clicking Build
Terrain
deletes all
Terrain> Clear Terrain
components required to model the terrain
including the generated 2D contours.
Clearing the terrain does not remove the

terrain perimeter; elevation data; or terrain
features from the model. These objects can
only be removed by deleting the terrain
perimeter or if they are selected and deleted.
To view the contours after clearing the
terrain, the terrain must be built by selecting
Terrain> Build Terrain
Editing the Terrain Perimeter

The shape of the terrain perimeter can be
edited like a CAD polyline. See Editing
Select Terrain> Terrain Specification...
to open the Terrain Specification dialog
and control many of the variables that

determine how your terrain is modeled, as
well as how the terrain perimeter displays in
floor plan view. See Terrain Specification
Dialog on page 511.
Editing Elevation Data

Terrain elevation points; lines; splines; and
elevation regions can be edited with the CAD
tools just like CAD objects.
When the pointer changes to a four-headed

arrow , the elevation point can be relocated by clicking and dragging.
In addition, elevation data can be relocated

with accuracy using the dimensions that
appear in floor plan view when they are
selected. See Moving Objects Using
The Elevation Point Specification

dialog is used to assign height values and
provides a more accurate method for
relocating elevation points. It also lets you
change how elevation points appear in floor
plan view. For more, see Elevation Point
Any time elevation data is changed, the

terrain must be regenerated. This occurs
automatically when 3D views are generated
or already open; and can be done manually
by selecting Terrain> Build Terrain
Elevation Points
Select an elevation point in floor plan view
and place the pointer over the center handle.
502
Elevation Lines and Splines

Elevation Lines and Splines are edited just
like lines and splines. They can be broken,
extended, shortened, etc. Elevation lines can
be connected into polylines. You should be
familiar with editing CAD objects before
spending too much time modeling terrain.
See Line Tools on page 727, Polylines

on page 741, and Splines on page 744.
The Elevation Line Specification
dialog is used to assign different height
values. It also allows you to change the way
elevation lines and splines appear in floor
plan view. See Elevation Line Specification
Dialog on page 518.
Terrain Breaks
Terrain Breaks
are edited like lines and
splines in CAD mode. See Editing Lines
on page 766.
Terrain Modifiers
The shape of a Raised Region
Region
; Hill
; Valley
Region
can be edited like a normal
polyline. See Polylines on page 741.
Terrain objects created with the Terrain
Modifier
tools can also be edited by
selecting them and clicking the Open Object
edit button to open them for
specification. The Raised / Lowered
Region Specification; the Hill / Valley
Specification; and the Flat Region
Specification dialogs contain area
information for the polyline and control the
selected terrain objects relative height and
how it displays in floor plan view. See Hill /
Valley Specification Dialog on page 519.
; Lowered
; or Flat
Use the Polyline Subtract

tool to create
holes in terrain features. When this method is
used the underlying terrain, or whatever lies
beneath the terrain feature, will define the
height and material of the hole. See Polyline

Subtract on page 804.
The Terrain Feature Specification
dialog allows you to assign different height
values; control how terrain features appear in
floor plan view; and select the material that is
applied to the terrain feature in 3D views.
See Terrain Feature Specification Dialog
on page 519.

Select a plant in a floor plan or 3D view and
This dialog can also be accessed by selecting

edit button to open
the Plant Image Specification dialog.
Terrain> Plant> Create Plant Image
503
Terrain
Terrain features are edited just like standard

lines, splines, and polylines in CAD mode.
See CAD Editing Tools on page 763.
Image Tab
1
2
3
5
1 Image File - The path and name of the
3 Height - Enter a height for the selected
selected image file displays here. Click

Browse to open the Library Browser and
select an image that will display in 3D views.
image. The width will adjust

proportionally.
2 Picture Symbol - A number of CAD

blocks are available to mark the
location of the image in floor plan view.
Select one from the drop-down list or click
the Library button to choose a CAD block
from the Library Browser.
image. The height will adjust

proportionally.
If you change the CAD block that displays

for an image, you may want to save the new
image to the library. See Adding to the
504
4 Width - Enter a width for the selected

5 Height Above - Specify the symbols
height above the ground, if applicable.
6 The current image displays here.

Transparency Tab
For information about the Transparency Tab,
see Transparency Tab on page 836.
Plant Information Tab
2
3
4
1 Enter a Scientific Name and a Variety
Name for the plant. You can also enter

a Pronunciation guide and any Common
Names associated with the plant.
2 Enter Plant Size information at
maturity. An average mature height

range can entered using the drop down lists.
This will be used with the Grow Plants
feature. See Plant Tools on page 498.
Terrain
3 Specify a Hardiness Zone range and
any associated comments. See

Hardiness Zones on page 499.
4 Specify the plants Lighting
Preference and any associated

comments.
505
Plant Attributes Tab
1
2
3
4
1 Click the drop-down list and select

from the available options.
2 The option chosen from the drop-down
list above will determine the

checkboxes that display here.
506
3 Add Flower Color Comments here.

4 Add Bloom Time Comments here.
Plant Description Tab
Enter a plant Description or other useful

information.
Layer Tab

Select Terrain> Plant> Plant Chooser
to open the Plant Chooser dialog.
Terrain
Plant Chooser searches the library for plant

images and plant symbols that meet the
provided parameters.
Basic Search Tab

Type a plant name or descriptive word in the
Search Text field to find plant objects in the
Library Browser.
507
Advanced Search Tab
508
Enter text to search for in the Search Text

field to find plant objects in the Library
Browser.
Check Match Entire Word to search for

plants with only the specified text in their
name.
Check Include Folders to include folder

names in the search.
Check Match Case to make the search

capital and lower-case sensitive.
Check Match Keyword to search for

plants with the specified text in their
name.
Plant Information Tab
2
3
4
1 Enter a Scientific Name, a Variety
Name, a Pronunciation reference, and/

or any Common Names associated with the
plant.

maturity.
Terrain
3 Enter a Hardiness Zone. See
4 Enter a Lighting Preference.

5 A list of library items that fit your
selected parameters displays here.
509
Plant Attributes Tab
3
4
5
3 Add Flower Color Comments that you
4 Add Bloom Time Comments that you
list above determines the checkboxes

that display here.
would like to search for here.

would like to search for here.
510
Plant Description Tab
1 Enter a Description to search for here.
The Terrain Specification dialog can be

accessed by any of four ways:
Double-click the Terrain
button.
Select Terrain> Terrain Specification...

.
Double-click the terrain perimeter using

the Select Objects
The Terrain Specification dialog

controls many of the variables that determine
how your terrain is modeled, as well as how
it displays in floor plan view.
When all changes have been made, press the
OK button to store the changes or Cancel to
ignore them.
tool.
Double-click the terrain in 3D view.
511
Terrain
General Tab
2
5
Chief Architect builds 3D terrain surfaces by

splitting them into triangles. Increasing the
triangle count decreases triangle size.
Smaller triangles representing less area yield
more detailed contour lines and a better 3D
approximation of the terrain. Triangle size is
computed roughly as follows:
Size of Triangle = Area of Terrain Perimeter /
Number of Triangles
There is no upper limit to the number of
triangles you can specify; however, smaller
triangles demand longer terrain generation
time; increased memory requirements; and
increased drawing time. If you select a large
number of small triangles for a large site, you
may find yourself waiting a long time for the
calculation.
512
Elevation lines are sampled less frequently

when the surface triangle size is larger,
speeding up terrain generation when there
are many elevation lines in the plan.
The Low (1000), Medium (2000), and High
(4000) values work well for an average lot
area of 20,000 square feet. If your terrain
perimeter varies greatly from this, consider
defining the number of triangles using the
Custom setting or the Triangle Size setting.
1 Triangle Count - Specify the number

of surface triangles.
Triangle Size - Specify the maximum

triangle size in the terrain surface.
Smoothing - Control the amount of

rounding applied to terrain edges. A
3 Flatten Pad - Check this box to flatten

the area beneath your building.
Auto Calculate Elevation - Check this box

to automatically calculate the building pad
elevation value during terrain rebuild. Chief
Architect takes the center of the building
footprint and finds the terrain elevation at
this point. This elevation is added to 8, 12, or
18 inches to calculate the building pad
elevation. 8 inches is used for a slab
foundation, 18 is used if a foundation floor is
present, and 12 is used otherwise.
Building Pad Elevation - Enter the value,
relative to sea-level, of the elevation of the
floor height of the first floor in your plan.
This value does not change elevation data
and does not alter the contours.
The program always defines the first floor
elevation at 0-0. While this is desirable for
adjusting walls, roofs and floor platforms, it
leads to misrepresentations in relation to real
world elevations. Finished grade can be
measured relative to the finished floor; but to
measure elevation in the real world, building
pads are rarely at 0-0 sea-level.
footprint. Checking this box will prevent the

generation of contour lines inside the house.
If your foundation footprint differs from your
first floor footprint you may need to use the
Terrain Hole
tool for custom clipping
instead. See Terrain Feature Tools on page
496.
5 Skirt - Define the thickness of the skirt
added to the terrain. The skirt is only

displayed in 3D views and gives the viewer a
sense of depth when viewing the terrain.
Flat specifies that the skirt be flat at its base.
Chief Architect determines the lowest point
in the terrain and then offsets this value by
the user specified thickness value. The
resulting value is used as a uniform elevation
for the base of the skirt.
Follow Terrain specifies that the skirt base
maintains a consistent distance below the
terrain. The distance is obtained from the
thickness value provided by the user.
Terrain
low value for smoothing produces terrain

that has sharp peaks and abrupt changes in
slope. A high value results in terrain that
continuously flows from point to point.
For example, if a structure is placed in the

middle of a terrain sloping evenly from a
height of 100.00 to a height of 112.00,
entering a value of 106.00 for the building
pad elevation will display the structure at the
correct height in 3D views.
4 Hide terrain intersected by building -
Check this box to cut out the portion of

the terrain that is intersected by the first floor
513
Contours Tab
3
4
The program identifies two types of contour

lines: Primary and Secondary. The two types
are drawn on different layers, so you can
control how they appear in floor plan view.
1 Interval - Define the change in
elevation between contours. If the

interval is set to twelve inches (one foot), a
contour line is computed and displayed for
each elevation change of twelve inches.
Offset - Specify an offset value for contours.
For example, if the offset is set to 5 feet and
the interval is set to 10 feet then contours are
generated at the elevations 5, 15, 25, 35,
etc. Most often, this value is set to 0.
Primary Contour Every__Contours Specify the interval for Primary Contours. A

value of 1 produces only Primary Contours
while a value of 5 defines every fifth contour
line as a Primary Contour line.
2 Specify the Font and Character
Height information for terrain

contours. See Text Specification Dialog on
page 711.
Check Label Secondary Contours to label
secondary contour lines with their elevation
data. Primary Contour lines are labelled with
their elevation data automatically.
3 Contour Line Units - Specify the units

that contour labels display. The labels
514
units can be in inches or feet (millimeters or

meters for metric.)
4 Smoothing - If contour smoothing is

turned on, Chief Architect attempts to
remove sharp bends and jagged sections
from the 2D contour lines.
Passes - Specify the number of passes to
perform when smoothing. The more passes,
the smoother the contour lines become;
however, contours become less accurate.
Polyline Tab
Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab

Materials Tab
Use this tab to select materials to apply to the
terrain surface and terrain skirt in 3D views.
These materials are not calculated in the
Material List. See Materials Tab on page
603.
Selected Line Tab


To open the Elevation Point
Specification dialog, select an elevation
point or group of elevation points and click
the Open Object
edit button; or, doubleclick on an elevation point using the Select
Objects
tool.
Terrain
The Elevation Point Specification

dialog allows you to define the selected
elevation point and control its display in
floor plan view.
OK button to store the changes or the
Cancel button to ignore them.
515
General Tab
2
3
1 Location - Specify the exact location of

the elevation point.
516
Elevation - Enter the height of the elevation point. The default unit for this value
is inches or mm.
X Coordinate - Enter the x coordinate of
Y Coordinate - Enter the y coordinate of

2 Text - Enter notes, such as elevation, in
this box. It will display beside the

elevation point in floor plan view.
3 Marker Radius - Enter the radius, in
inches (or millimeters) for the marker.
Attributes Tab
1
2
3
4
elevation point is to be placed. See

2 Color - Click the color bar to open the

Windows color dialog and choose the
color of the elevation point and
accompanying text. See Color Chooser
Dialog on page 128.
By Layer - Select the check box to use the
default settings of the layer on which the
elevation point is located, rather than
defining the color apart from the layer.
Character Height - Define the character

height of the text.
Version 9 Compatible Size -In Version 9,
text size was based on sizing information
stored in each font rather than actual
character dimensions. Check Version 9
Compatible Size to use this information for
text sizing. See Sizing Text on page 708
Rotate with Plan - Check this box to allow
the text to rotate when the plan is rotated.
Transparent - Check this box to make the
background of the text transparent.
3 Click the drop-down list to specify the
Font of any accompanying text. Check

the boxes to apply text options.
4 Specify the Size of any text
accompanying the elevation point.
517
Terrain
1 Layer - Define the Layer on which the
Elevation Line Specification Dialog

To open the Elevation Line
Specification dialog, select an elevation
1 Elevation - Enter the elevation of the
line/spline or group of elevation lines/splines
2 Interior is Flat - When the Elevation

edit button;
or, double-click the elevation line/spline
tool.
The Elevation Line Specification

elevation line and control its display in floor
plan view.
OK button to store the changes or the
Cancel button to ignore them.
Elevation Tab
Line/Spline in inches (mm).
Line Specification dialog is opened

for an Elevation Region, this option displays.
Check Interior is flat to maintain a flat elevation at the specified height.
3 Interpolate Tangent to Edge - This
options displays for a closed elevation

polylines. Check this option to flatten the terrain surface as it approaches the elevation
region.
Polyline Tab
Selected Line Tab

1
3
Line Style Tab

Flat Region Specification Dialog

The Flat Region Specification dialog is
similar to the Polyline Specification
518
dialog. See Polyline Specification Dialog

on page 741.

Spline Tab
For information about the Spline tab, see
Spline Tab on page 745.
Selected Line Tab

Hill / Valley Tab
Hill or Valley. This height is relative to

the terrain surface which is generated from
the elevation data in your plan.

Line Style Tab

Polyline Tab
Fill Style Tab

Raised / Lowered Region Specification Dialog

The Raised / Lowered Region
Specification dialog is similar to the Hill /
Valley Specification dialog. See Hill /

Valley Specification Dialog on page 519.
To open the Terrain Feature

Specification dialog, select a terrain
feature or group of terrain features in floor
When all required changes have been made,

press the OK button to store the changes or
the Cancel button to ignore them.
plan view and click the Open Object

edit button; or, double-click on a terrain
feature in floor plan or 3D view.
The Terrain Feature Specification
terrain feature and control its display in floor
plan view.
519
Terrain
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog
General Tab
1
2
Polyline Tab
terrain feature above or below the

terrain surface with a positive or negative
number.
Any gap between the terrain and the raised or
lowered terrain feature is covered with a skirt
composed of vertical surfaces that seam
together the terrain and the terrain feature.
Make Hole - Check this box to make a
terrain hole. See Terrain Feature Tools on
page 496.
2 Clipping - Check this box to remove
sections of the terrain feature that are

covered by other terrain features at a lower
height. When two terrain features meet and
one is lower or equal in height to the other, it
can be clipped from the taller terrain feature.
Clipping is also useful for creating features
that contain other features such as planters or
swimming pools.

Selected Line Tab

Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab

Materials Tab
Terrain Break Specification Dialog

The Terrain Break Specification dialog
contains a unique setting on the General tab
for Transition Distance, which defines the
520
distance from the edge of the terrain break at

which the break stops affecting the terrain.
Sprinkler Specification Dialog
Selected Line Tab

Line Style Tab

Polyline Tab

Sprinkler Specification Dialog

Select a sprinkler and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Sprinkler
General Tab
Terrain
1 Enter the Height; Width; and Depth,

or thickness, of the sprinkler.
521
Enter a Floor to Bottom value to define the

distance from the bottom of the sprinkler to
elevation 0 of floor one.
value of -6 for instance will recess the

sprinkler head 6 inches below the surface of
the terrain.
Check Follow Terrain to make the sprinkler

follow the surface of the terrain.
The elevation of a sprinkler can be

edited in cross section/elevation view.
Check Follow Terrain and enter a Floor to

Bottom value to set the elevation of the
sprinkler relative to the terrains surface. A
2 Click Reset to return the sprinklers
values to the defaults for that sprinkler.
Options Tab
1
2
1 Check Reverse Symbol to reverse the

sprinkler from left to right.
2 Set the sprinklers Spray Angle and

Spray Radius.
Fill Tab
Tab on page 481.
522
Layer Tab
Spray Fill Tab

The Spray Fill tab controls how the area
within the sprinklers reach appears in floor
plan view and is similar to the Fill Style tab
found in many dialogs. See Fill Style Tab

on page 743.
Materials Tab
Label Tab


Terrain data can be created added to a plan
through the processes described earlier in
this chapter; or, it can be imported from an
existing file.
Chief Architect is capable of importing text
files (.txt) and DWG/DXF files (.dwg, .dxf).
If your terrain data is not in one of these file
formats, there are third party programs
available that can convert to these formats.
Text Files
Text files contain elevation terrain data based
on x, y, and z coordinates where x and y
define the location of a point on a Cartesian
grid, and z defines the elevation for that
point. Each point must be on a separate line
of the text file. Importable text files can
come from surveyors; other software

programs; or, you can create your own using
a GPS system.
The Import Terrain Wizard provides an
excellent way to add terrain data in text file
format to your model. See Import Terrain
Wizard on page 523
DXF/DWG Files
If you have a model of your terrain created
on another program that contains contour
lines and elevation data, that information can
be imported directly as elevation data into
Chief Architect as a .dxf or a .dwg file. See
Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data on
page 527.
Terrain

The Import Terrain Wizard allows
you to import text (.txt) files
containing terrain elevation information into
your model.
Select File> Import> Terrain
to open
the Import Terrain Wizard welcome
dialog. Click Next.
523
Select File
1
2
1 Select File to Import -Enter the name
of a text file, or use the Browse feature

to locate a file on your computer.
2 Select the Organization of the Data You need to know how the data in your
text file is organized. Each data point contains information about its X-axis (East to
West location), Y-axis (North to South
location), and Z-axis (elevation). It might
also contain a brief description.
Elevation information can come in one of six
different sequences, and will either be
separated by a comma (comma delimited) or
a space (space delimited).
XYZ - Information in this format will begin
with the X coordinate, followed by the Y
coordinate and the Z coordinate.
#XYZ - Information in this format begins
with a number that belongs to each data point
524
followed by the X coordinate; the Y

coordinate; and the Z coordinate.
#XYZ Description - Information in this
format begins with a number that belongs to
each data point followed by the X
coordinate; the Y coordinate; the Z
coordinate; and a description.
YXZ - Information in this format begins with
the Y coordinate followed by the X
coordinate and the Z coordinate.
#YXZ - Information in this format begins
with a number that belongs to each data point
followed by the Y coordinate; the X
coordinate; and the Z coordinate.
#YXZ Description - Information in this
format begins with a number that belongs to
each data point followed by the Y
coordinate; the X coordinate; the Z
coordinate; and a description.
Filter Data
1
2
3
1 This is the number of points your data
contains. Building terrain with too

many elevation points may take a long time,
depending on your processor speed and
memory. If you import more than 1000 or
2000 elevation points, the Linear Smoothing
option in the Terrain Specification
dialog is recommended.
2 Use Every __ Points - Reduce the data
imported by skipping data points.

Specifying every 2 points reduce thes data by
50%; specifying every 10 points reduces the
data by 90%.
Below - Another way to restrict the data
used is to define a range. Data within these
ranges will be imported, while data outside
these ranges will not.
The outer box in this diagram and the points

within it represent all of the data contained
within a given text file. If there are too many
points in your text file, a subset of this
information could be used instead by
defining a range, which is represented by the
smaller box in this diagram. To do this you
must define the range using X, Y, and Z
coordinates. The same effect would be
accomplished by deleting unwanted data
from your text file before it is imported.
525
Terrain
3 Restrict the Data to the Ranges
Scale Data
1
2
3
4
5
1 This describes the total number of data
points that will be imported and the

range of the coordinates of those points.
2 Translate - Accurately position the
terrain beneath your plan. You need to

know where the origin is located in your
plan, and where that origin is located relative
to the geographical data in your text file. The
coordinates of the data point that correspond
with the origin point in Chief Architect
should be entered here.
To find the origin point in your plan,
open the Move Point dialog; enter
absolute coordinates X=0, Y=0; and click
OK to move the point to the (0, 0) location.
See Moving CAD Points on page 751.
526
3 Units - Select the units of measurement
used in your data for each axis. The

units in the drop down lists are a subset of the
units in the Edit Preferences dialog. Only
linear default units are displayed. For more
information on specifying default units,
seeUnit Conversions Panel on page 105.
4 Scale Coordinates - Multiply the
coordinates of each axis by a specific

number to decrease or increase the relative
relief of your terrain.
5 Rotate Coordinates - Accurately
rotate terrain data counterclockwise

around the Z axis.
Elevation data in DXF/DWG format can be

imported using the Import Drawing
Wizard.
1.
Select File> Import> Drawing (DWG/

DXF)...
to open the Import
Drawing Wizard.
2.
3.
Check the Terrain Elevation Data box.

(See Arrow.)
Continue with the import process
described in the section titled Select
File on page 845.
Imported lines and points will be converted

to elevation lines or elevation points,
preserving the elevation data stored in the
DWG/DXF file.
If the vertices have differing Z values, an

elevation point will be created for each
vertex.
Imported points are converted to elevation points.
Other imported entities (solids, faces,

etc.) are imported normally.
Only import layers containing elevation
data when using the Terrain Elevation
Data option. To import other layers as normal
CAD, run the Terrain Import Wizard
again with this option turned off.
If a terrain perimeter does not already exist, a

perimeter that surrounds the data will be
generated.
If an imported line has vertices with the

same Z values, an elevation line will be
created.
527
Terrain
Converting CAD Lines to Terrain Data

CAD lines can be selected and
converted to terrain data, allowing the
CAD lines of an imported file to be
converted into terrain data and used for
terrain generation.
Select a CAD line, spline, or polyline in floor

plan view and click the Convert Polyline
edit button to display the Convert
Polyline dialog.
Convert Polyline
1
The Convert to Polyline dialog allows

you to convert the selected polyline(s) to a
variety of special CAD objects. See
Converting CAD Objects on page 804.
1 Terrain Perimeter - This option is
only available when a terrain perimeter

does not exist and when only one closed
polyline is selected.
Click OK to convert the selected polyline to
a terrain perimeter.
528
2 A terrain perimeter must exist before
any of these terrain objects can be

created. Click OK to complete the
conversion of the selected polyline.
Roads and road objects are covered in
Roads & Sidewalks on page 529.
When the conversion is complete, the terrain

data will be at elevation 0-0. For
information about how to add elevation data
to your converted CAD lines, see Editing
Elevation Data on page 502, and Editing
Terrain Features on page 503.
Chapter 20:
Roads & Sidewalks
Chapter Overview
Roads and sidewalks can be created in Chief
Architect using the road tools. Roads and
sidewalks are modeled in 3D like other
terrain objects. Because they have much in
common with terrain objects and rely upon
terrain data to be viewed in 3D, you should
be familiar with terrain modeling before
using the road tools. See Terrain on page
489.
Chapter Contents
Road and Sidewalk Defaults

The Different Types of Road Objects
Displaying Road Objects
Selecting Road Objects
Deleting Road Objects
Editing Road Objects
The Road Specification Dialog
Driveway Specification Dialog
Road Marking Specification Dialog
Sidewalk Specification Dialog
Adding Road Objects to the Library

selecting Edit> Default Settings...
from the menu.
The settings in the Road Defaults;
Driveway Defaults; Road Marking
Defaults; and Sidewalk Defaults
dialogs determine the initial settings when

the road and sidewalk tools are used. It is a
good idea to check these settings before
placing any roads or sidewalks in your plan.
To access the Road Defaults dialog,
double click the Road Tools
parent
529
Roads
Road and Sidewalk Defaults
button. The settings in the Road Defaults

dialog are the same as those in the Road
Specification dialog. See The Road
To access the Driveway Defaults dialog,
double click the Driveway
button. The
settings in the Driveway Defaults dialog
are the same as those in the Driveway
Specification dialog. See Driveway
To access the Road Marking Defaults
button. The settings in the Road Marking

Defaults dialog are the same as those in the
Road Marking Specification dialog.
See Road Marking Specification Dialog on
page 539.
To access the Sidewalk Defaults dialog,
double-click the Sidewalk
button. The
settings in the Sidewalk Defaults dialog
are the same as those in the Sidewalk
Specification dialog. See Sidewalk
dialog, double-click the Road Marking

Road objects cannot be placed until a
terrain perimeter exists. See Terrain
Tools on page 490.
When road objects are first placed into your
plan, their initial dimensions and display
properties are controlled by their default
settings. See Road and Sidewalk Defaults
on page 529.
Once road objects have been placed, they can
be edited individually or as a group. See
Editing Road Objects on page 533.
Roads
A road is a line that can be used to
model roads on your building site.
Roads created with the Road
tool have a
consistent width that can be defined in the
Road Specification dialog.
The elevation of a road is flat along its width,
which makes it an ideal tool for creating
roads on terrain with relief.
530
To place a road select Terrain> Road>

Road
from the menu and click and drag
to draw a line in floor plan view. Multiple
road sections can be connected together.
Roads are edited like CAD lines. See Line
Tools on page 727.
Road Polyline
A road polyline can be used to model
roads of any shape. It is ideal for
creating parking lots and other non-linear
road surfaces. Roads created with the Road

Polyline
tool will conform to the surface
of the terrain beneath them.
To place a road polyline select Terrain>
Road> Road Polyline
from the menu
and click and drag to draw a rectangular
polyline in floor plan view.
Road Polylines are edited like CAD
polylines. See Polylines on page 741.
Median
A median is a polyline that can be used
within a road. The median will be
made of the same material as the terrain
beneath it and will have a curb if the road
that encompasses it has one.
Polylines can be converted to road medians.

See Converting CAD Objects on page 804.
Driveway
A driveway is a road without a curb. A
driveway will cut out a curb wherever
it meets a road or a road polyline. Like a
road, the elevation of a driveway is flat
across its width.
To place a driveway select Terrain> Road>
Driveway
from the menu and click and
drag to draw a line in floor plan view.
Multiple driveway sections can be connected
together.
Driveways are edited like CAD lines. See
Line Tools on page 727.
Cul-de-sac
A Cul-de-sac is a road polyline in a
predetermined shape. A cul-de-sac
follows the surface of the terrain beneath it.
To place a cul-de-sac select Terrain> Road>
Cul-de-sac
from the menu and click on a
road end where you want the cul-de-sac to
appear. Culs-de-sac cannot be placed on road
polylines.
Median
drag to draw a rectangular polyline in floor
plan view. Road median polylines must be
contained within a road.
Culs-de-sac can be edited just like CAD

Road Stripe
A Road Stripe allows you to paint lines
on a road surface.
Road medians are edited just like CAD

531
Roads
To place a median select Terrain> Road>
dialog. Sidewalks will cut out curbs and

gutters wherever they meet a road or a road
polyline. The elevation of a sidewalk is flat
across the sidewalks width.
To place a sidewalk select Terrain> Road>
Sidewalk
drag to draw a line in floor plan view.
Multiple sidewalk sections can be connected
together.
To place a road stripe select Terrain>
Road> Road Stripe
from the menu and
click and drag to draw a line within a road in
floor plan view. Multiple road stripes can be
connected together.
Sidewalks are edited like CAD lines. See

Road Stripes are edited like CAD lines. See

Road Marking
A Road Marking paints polylines on a
road surface, allowing any shape to be
created.
To place a road marking select Terrain>
Road> Road Marking
from the menu
and click and drag to draw a rectangular
polyline within a road in floor plan view.
A sidewalk polyline can be used to

create a sidewalk of any shape.
Sidewalk polylines conform to the surface of
the terrain beneath them.
Road markings are edited just like CAD

To place a sidewalk polyline select Terrain>
Sidewalk
A sidewalk is a line that can be used to
model sidewalks on a building site.
Sidewalks have a consistent width that can
be defined in the Sidewalk Specification
532
Sidewalk Polyline
Road> Sidewalk Polyline

from the
menu and click and drag to draw a
rectangular polyline in floor plan view.
Sidewalk polylines are edited just like CAD

In Floor Plan View
Roads and sidewalks are displayed in floor
plan and 3D views based on the settings for
their layers in the Layer Display Options
dialog.
To change the 2D or 3D display properties of
roads, center lines, curbs, road markings or
sidewalks, select Tools> Display Options
to open the Layer Display Options
dialog. See Layers on page 119.
In 3D Views
Roads and sidewalks display in 3D views
whenever the terrain is displayed.
Roads and sidewalks create additional
surfaces that affect the amount of time
required to generate 3D views.
By default, terrain rebuilds automatically
when road objects are added, removed or
edited. If it does not, select Terrain> Build
Terrain
Selecting Road Objects

Road objects can be selected by clicking on
them using Select Objects
or by rightclicking on them using any tool.
Once an individual road object is selected in
floor plan view, similar objects can be added
to the selection set by holding down the Shift
key. The program will not allow dissimilar

objects to be group selected. Road and road
polylines can be group selected, as can sidewalks and sidewalk polylines; and road
stripes and road markings. Medians can only
be group selected with other medians.
Deleting Road Objects

Once the road object or group of road objects
you want to delete have been selected, press
the Del key on the keyboard or click the
All road objects will be deleted if the

terrain perimeter is deleted.

All road objects can be edited and relocated
like ordinary CAD objects using the cursor.
Road objects can also be precisely relocated

using the dimensions that appear in floor
533
Roads
Delete
edit button to remove them from
your plan.
Medians
plan view when they are selected. See

Moving Objects Using Dimensions on
page 690.
Select the perimeter of the median for

editing. Medians are edited like polylines.
See Polylines on page 741.
Selecting a road object and clicking the

Open Object
edit button will open a
specification dialog, allowing for further
customization of the object.
The path of a road can be edited with the

mouse along its centerline, just like standard
lines. See Line Tools on page 727.
The CAD edit buttons which appear for lines
Fillet Two Lines
, Chamfer Two Lines
, and Break Line

can also be used on
roads. The centerline of the selected road
must be used. See CAD Edit Buttons on
page 67.
Select a road and use its side handles to make
it wider or narrower.
Road polylines are edited along their
perimeter, just like standard polylines. The
width of a road polyline is determined by the
polylines shape. See Polylines on page
741.
Select a road and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Road
Specification dialog. This dialog allows
you to add a curb, change the dimensions,
and control other properties that affect their
display in 2D and 3D views. See The Road
534
Object
edit button will open the Road
Specification dialog. The General tab will
not appear for medians. See The Road
Roads & Road Polylines
and polylines, such as Trim Objects
Selecting a median and clicking the Open
For curved medians, the road (a

polyline) can be concentrically resized
and converted into a median using the Convert Polyline edit button. See CAD Panel
on page 108.
Driveways
Driveways are edited along their centerline,
just like standard lines. See Line Tools on
page 727.
The Driveway Specification dialog
allows you to control the dimensions of the
driveway and other properties that affect its
display in 2D and 3D views. See Driveway
Cul-de-sac
Select the perimeter of the cul-de-sac for
editing. Culs-de-sac are edited just like
standard polylines in CAD mode. For more,
see Polylines on page 741.
The Road Specification dialog allows
you to control the properties that affect how
the cul-de-sac displays in 2D and 3D views.
See The Road Specification Dialog on
page 536.
Road Stripes & Markings

Road stripes are edited along their centerline,
just like roads and standard lines. See Line
Tools on page 727.
Road markings are edited along their
perimeter, just like road polylines and
standard polylines. See Polylines on page
741.
Sidewalk
edit button to convert it into a
Road Polyline
or a Sidewalk Polyline
. This allows you to edit the object as a

polyline. See Roads & Road Polylines on
page 534.
Automatically
Generate Sidewalks
Selecting a road stripe or marking and

edit button
will open the Road Marking
Specification dialog, which allows you to
change the dimensions and other properties
that affect how it displays in 2D and 3D. See
Road Marking Specification Dialog on
page 539.
Select a Road
, Road Polyline
Cul-de-sac
, or Median
and
click the the Automatically Generate
Sidewalks
Automatically Generate Sidewalks
dialog. The options that are available depend

on the type of road object selected.
Sidewalks &
Sidewalk Polylines
Sidewalk polylines are edited along their

perimeter, just like road polylines and
standard polylines. See Polylines on page
741.
The Sidewalk Specification dialog
allows you to control the properties that
affect its display in 2D and 3D. See
Sidewalk Specification Dialog on page
539.
Convert to Polyline
Road/Sidewalk
1
2
3
1 Left/Right Side of Road - Check one
or both boxes to generate a sidewalk on

the selected road object.
2 All Connected Roads - Check this box
to generate a sidewalk along all other

roads connected to the selected road object.
3 Offset From Road - Specify a gap
between the generated sidewalk and the

selected road object.
Roads
Sidewalks are edited along their centerline,

just like roads and standard lines. See Line
Tools on page 727.
Select a Road or Sidewalk and click

the Convert to Polyline Road/
535

Select a Road or a Road Polyline and click
the Open Object
edit button to display
the Road Specification dialog.
General Tab
1
2
3

road.
2 Height - Enter a Height above the

terrain for the selected road.
536
3 Flare - Roads can be flared at the Start
and the End when they intersect with

other road objects. Check one or both boxes.
Radius - Enter the flare radius.
Curb Tab
1
2
3
4
1 Has Curb - Check the box if you
Fill Style Tab
Width - Enter a width value for the curb.
The Fill Style tab of the Road

Specification dialog is the same as the Fill
Style tab of the CAD Polyline
Specification dialog. See Fill Style Tab
would like the selected road to contain

a curb.
Height - Enter a Height value for the curb.
2 Cut Curb for Driveways and

Sidewalks - Check this box if you
would like the curb to be cut for driveways
and sidewalks.
3 Select Curb Profile - Click this button
to select another curb profile.
4 Default Curb Profile - Click this
button to use the default curb profile.
Line Style Tab
on page 743.
Materials Tab
the road in 3D views. This material is not
calculated in the Material List.
The Materials tab of the Road
Materials tab on many other specification
dialogs. See Materials Tab on page 603.
Roads
The Line Style tab of the Road

Line Style tab of the CAD Line
Specification dialog. See Line
537
Driveway Specification Dialog

Select a Driveway and click the Open
Object
edit button to display the
Driveway Specification dialog.
General Tab
1
2
3
Fill Style Tab
Height - Enter a Height above the

terrain for the selected driveway.
The Fill Style tab of the Driveway

Specification dialog is the same as the Fill
Style tab of the CAD Polyline
Specification dialog. See Fill Style Tab
driveway.
3 Flare - Driveways can be flared at the
Start and the End when they intersect

with roads or other driveways. Check one or
both boxes.
on page 743.

the driveway in 3D views. This material is
not calculated in the Material List.
Line Style Tab

The Line Style tab of the Driveway
Line Style tab of the CAD Line
Specification dialog. See Line
538
Materials Tab
The Materials tab of the Driveway

Materials tab on many other specification
dialogs. See Materials Tab on page 603.

Select a Road Marking and click the Open
Selected Line Tab
edit button to display the Road

Marking Specification dialog.
For information about the Selected Line Tab,

General Tab
Line Style Tab
Object
For information about the Line Style Tab, see

Fill Style Tab
For information about the Fill Style Tab, see

1 Width - Enter a width value for the

selected Road Marking.
Polyline Tab
For information about the Polyline Tab, see
Materials Tab
the Road Marking in 3D views. This material
is not calculated in the Material List.
For information about the Materials Tab, see
Sidewalk Specification Dialog

or Sidewalk Polyline

button to display the Sidewalk
edit
Roads
Select a Sidewalk
539
General Tab
1
2
3
Line Style Tab

sidewalk.
Height - Enter a height above the

terrain for the selected sidewalk.
3 Flare - Sidewalks can be flared at
either end, check one or both boxes.
For information about the Line Style Tab, see

Fill Style Tab

For information about the Fill Style Tab, see
Materials Tab
Polyline Tab
For information about using the Polyline
Tab, see Polyline Tab on page 741.
Selected Line Tab

For information using the Selected Line Tab,

the sidewalk in 3D views. This material is
not calculated in the Material List.
For information about the Materials Tab, see
Adding Road Objects to the Library

You can create your own road objects and
save them to the library. Select any
combination of elevation points, elevation
lines, terrain features, roads, sidewalks, road
markings, or even the terrain perimeter itself
and send them to the library as one unit.
540
When a group of terrain objects from the

library is placed into a plan, each object will
become independent and can be edited
individually. See Adding to the Library on
page 568.
Other Objects
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect has many additional objects
that can be used to customize your design.
Chapter Contents
Soffits
Special Applications for Soffits
Rules for Calculating Materials on Soffits
Soffit Specification Dialog

Polyline Solids
Displaying Polyline Solids
The Polyline Solid Specification Dialog
Fireplaces
The Fireplace Specification Dialog
Library Fireplaces
Chimneys
Soffits
Soffits typically fill the space between
cabinet tops and the ceiling. Soffits are
very versatile, however, and can be used to
create any other object that can be modeled
as a 3D box.
Maximum soffit width is 135 feet (32m).
Minimum width is 1/16" (1 mm).
Soffit Defaults
The default size for soffits cannot be
changed. Soffits are sized to be the same
width as and 1" (20mm) deeper than the
default wall cabinet. Its height automatically
adjusts to fill the space between the ceiling
and the top of the wall cabinets.
The General Cabinet Defaults apply to
soffits, allowing you to set the Minimum
Cabinet Width and the Width Increment
that soffits snap to. The Width Increment is
541
Other
Objects
Chapter 21:
1 inch and the Minimum Cabinet Width is

1/16th of an inch (or 1 mm). These settings
apply only when you select a soffit and resize
its width using one of the side handles. See
General Cabinet Defaults on page 487.
Placing Soffits
Soffits appear in both 2D and 3D views.
They can be assigned materials that are
calculated in the Material List; but by default
they use the material assigned to the default
wall. Like cabinets, soffits can have custom
molding profiles specified for them. See
Special Applications for Soffits

Anything that can be represented by a three
dimensional box of any size or angle can be
represented by a soffit. They can be resized
to as small as 1/16"x1/16"x1/16" or as large
as 135 feet (32m).
Note: For free form shapes, polyline solids
may be better suited for the job. See Polyline
Solids on page 547.
Soffits can have materials applied to them to

represent simple mirrors; beams in exposed
ceilings; posts; fences; chimneys and so on.
Following are illustrations showing some
possibilities.
Brick Veneer
On exterior walls, create a brick veneer that
extends only halfway up the wall using four
inch (100mm) deep soffits placed around the
base of the house.
Soffits automatically stop at the floor

platform when moved downward. To place a
soffit for a brick ledge, create a Cross
Section/Elevation
view looking straight
at the brick ledge. Select the brick soffit, hold
the Ctrl key down, grab the soffit by its
middle handle, and drag it down past the
floor so that it covers the floor platforms
edge as well.
Tile Surrounds
A material such as ceramic tile can be
assigned to a soffit applied to the walls above
tubs or shower stalls.
542
applications. Bitmap images always rotate to

face the camera, however, and there can be
situations when this quality is not desirable.
Non-Rotating Images
Chief Architect comes with many bitmap
images which are useful in a variety of
One good example is a trellis, which might

look awkward when facing a camera from a
side view. Materials can be attached to
soffits, and textures applied to those
materials. Textures containing transparency
information can be used when mapped to a
thin soffit to model a non-rotating image. See
Texture Tab on page 611.

tom surface areas cannot contribute to the
brick count unless the soffit depth is
greater than 8 inches.
The number of bricks, tiles, shingles, shakes

or other such materials applied to a soffit is
calculated by the following rules:
If the soffit depth is less than the larger of

4 inches (10 mm) or 1 times the material thickness, then only the front area of
the soffit is used. Thus if a soffit is
48"x48x4 thick, and the Dark Red
brick material is used (3"x 8" with 3/8
mortar joint) the front of the soffit is
48"x48=2304 square inches. Including
the mortar joint, each brick requires 3 3/
8 x 8 3/8 = 28.26 square inches. 2304
sq. in. divided by 28.26 sq. in. per brick
gives 81.5 bricks.
If the soffit depth is greater than both 4
inches (10 mm) and 1 times the material thickness, then the surface areas of
the soffit back, sides and top are used in
addition to the front, if these surfaces are
not attached to a wall or other soffit.
However, only those portions of the
sides, top and bottom remaining after
subtracting twice the material thickness
are used. So, for Dark Red brick, which
has a depth of 4", the sides, top and bot-
If surface materials such as brick are

applied to a large soffit, the soffit center
is assumed to be hollow, with only a single layer of the material applied to each
applicable face.
For shingles and shakes, the overlap

amount should be subtracted from the
height, as opposed to brick or tile, where
the joint width is added to the size.
For materials in the area category, the

above soffit area calculation is used, with
the material thickness treated as zero.
For materials in the volume, concrete or

earth categories, the true volume of the
soffit is used.
543
Other
Objects

Soffits can be created in floor plan and 3D
views. They are automatically placed on the
Cabinets, Soffits layer of the Layer
Display Options dialog, but can be moved
to any layer in the Soffit Specification
dialog.
To customize a soffit using the Soffit

Specification dialog, double-click on the
soffit using the Soffit
tool or select the
soffit and click the Open Object

button.
edit
General Tab
1
3
5
2
6
7
1 Height - Define the vertical height of
the soffit. If you are using the soffit to

represent a beam, this will be the depth of the
beam.
2 Width - Enter a value to define the

width of the soffit.
3 Depth - Enter a value to define the
depth, the distance between the front

and the back of the soffit. When selected in
floor plan view, the front of a soffit has a
V, and the back of the soffit has a
triangular rotation handle.
544
4 Floor to Bottom - Enter a value to
define the Floor to Bottom distance.

This is often more easily defined by dragging
the soffit in a 3D view until properly
positioned.
5 Follow Terrain - Check this box to
make a soffit placed outside a building

adjust its height to the height of the terrain.
6 A preview of the defined soffit displays

here.
7 Show Color - Select the check box to
Other
Objects
have the picture of the soffit display in

the defined material.
Options Tab
1
3
1 Sloped Soffit - Select the check box to

slope the soffit vertically.
Remember that the front of the soffit is

defined by the v in floor plan view. Soffits
slope from the back of the soffit, up towards
the front of the soffit.
2 Place Under Roof - Select the check
box to have a soffit slope to follow the

roof. The soffit will move up and the top of
the soffit will be in the same plane as the
roof, at the same pitch as the roof. Be sure to
place the front of the soffit toward the high
side of the roof.
When you define a sloped soffit, the General

tab includes additional options for specifying
the soffit. You must define a height for the
front of the soffit and a height for the back of
the soffit. The front value should be greater
than the back if the soffit is sloped.
box to have the soffit move vertically

until the top of the soffit comes in contact
with the ceiling plane.
To change an angled soffit back to a

horizontal soffit, clear the Sloped Soffit
check box.

3 Place Under Ceiling - Select the check
Moldings Tab
545
Layer Tab
applied, the Material List will also reflect the

change. See Materials Tab on page 603.

Label Tab
Materials Tab
the soffit surface in 3D views. If a material is

Sloped Soffits
When a soffit is turned into a sloped soffit
the General and Options tabs of the Soffit
Specification dialog change. The picture
of the soffit updates when new values are

entered in the fields. This is a side view with
the back of the soffit to the left.
Elevation View
Floor Plan View

3D view
Front
Three diagrams have been inset to show how
the dialog relates to the sloped soffits.
Thickness is measured perpendicular to the
slope of the soffit.
Width is measure left to right across the
soffit.
546
Horizontal Length is measured from back

to front in floor plan view. Since the soffit is
at a slope, this measurement is not the actual
length of the soffit. It cannot, for example, be
used to determine the length of a slope beam.
For sloped soffits, both the front and back

heights must be defined.
Height at back is measured from the
finished floor to the lowest point at the back
of the soffit.
Height at front is measured from the

finished floor to the underside of the soffit at
the upper end.
Polyline Solids
In 3D views, polyline solids generate
polyline shaped objects with a specified
thickness. They can be either horizontal or
vertical. They are useful for creating custom
details anywhere in your 3D model.
Creating Polyline Solids

A horizontal polyline solid can be created in
floor plan view by selecting CAD> Polyline
Solid
and dragging a rectangle from
corner to corner. The polyline can be
reshaped and have vertices added and
removed. See Editing Polylines on page
771.
added and removed. See Editing Polylines

on page 771.
Editing Polyline Solids

In floor plan view polyline solids can be
edited like CAD polylines. See Editing
Polyline solids can be edited in cross section/
elevation views as well, allowing the angle
of polyline solids to be changed. See
Creating Cross Section/Elevation Views
on page 637.
Deleting Polyline Solids
A vertical polyline solid can be created in an

elevation or cross section view by selecting
Select a polyline solid or group of polyline

solids. Once selected, press the Del key on
CAD> Polyline Solid

and dragging a
rectangle from corner to corner. This creates
a rectangular polyline solid. The polyline
solid will be placed in front of any objects
visble in the view behind the polyline solid.
If no objects are behind, the polyline solid is
place one foot in front of the camera. The
polyline can be reshaped and have vertices
the keyboard or click the Delete

button on the edit toolbar.
edit
Converting CAD Polylines

A CAD polyline can be converted into a
polyline solid. See Converting CAD
Displaying Polyline Solids

Once placed, polyline solids are visible in all
views.
547
Other
Objects
Polyline Solids
In Floor Plan View

The display of polyline solids in floor plan
view can be controlled in the Layer
Objects on page 125. Polyline solids are
placed on the default CAD layer.
In 3D Views
Select Tools> Display Options
to open
the Layer Display Options dialog. This
dialog allows polyline solids and other
objects to be turned on and off by layer. See
The Polyline Solid Specification Dialog

To open the Polyline Solid
Specification dialog:
1.
Select a polyline solid or solids.
2.
When the selection set is complete, click

the Open Object
edit button to open
the Polyline Solid Specification
dialog.
General Tab
3 Thickness - Specify the thickness for
the polyline solid. Increasing the

thickness will cause the polyline solid to
grow upward (horizontal) or toward the
elevation/cross section camera (vertical).
Polyline Tab
Selected Line Tab

seeee Selected Line Tab on page 742.
1
2
3
1 Hole in Polyline Solid - Select to
convert the polyline solid into a hole in

a surrounding polyline solid.
2 Height - Specify the height of the top
of the polyline solid. This property is

not available for vertical polyline solids.
Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab

Materials Tab
548
Fireplaces
Other
Objects
Fireplaces
A masonry fireplace can be placed in or
away from a wall by selecting Build> Fireplace
If created in a wall, it is considered an

opening and can be moved or resized like
a door or window.
If created away from a wall, it moves and

resizes like a cabinet.
Standard, corner and see-through

prefabricated metal fireplaces are also
available from the Fixtures (Interior) library
category. These can be framed in with
standard walls.
Built into a Wall

To place a masonry fireplace in a wall, select
Build> Fireplace
and click on a wall.
Grab the center handle and pull toward the

outside of the wall. The fireplace will stop
when the fire box front is flush with the
inside edge of the wall.
Fireplaces always face the interior when
placed on an exterior wall. If a fireplace is
created on an interior wall, click on the edge
of the wall to specify which way the fireplace
should face. The fireplace will be created
with the fire box on the same side as the wall
edge on which you clicked to create it.
Freestanding
To place a masonry fireplace in an open area,
select Build> Fireplace
wall.
and click on a
A fireplace is created with the outside of the

fireplace flush with the outside of the wall.
Unlike fireplaces placed in walls, freestanding fireplace have five handles when
selected, and may be rotated, resized, or
moved in any direction.
Select the fireplace to display three edit
handles located along the wall.
549
Fireplace Foundations
If a fireplace is added on the first floor before
building the foundation plan, a foundation
will be generated under the fireplace when
the foundation is built. The fireplace
foundation will be of the same material type
as the original fireplace, but it will not have a
fire box or a hearth. This fireplace
foundation may be edited or deleted, as
desired. A fire box and hearth may be added
from the specification dialog.
Editing Masonry Fireplaces

Select a fireplace to move or to edit it.
Depending on the type of fireplace selected,
either three handles (for a wall fireplace) or
five handles (for a freestanding fireplace)
will display. These handles may be used to
move, resize or reposition the fireplace.
Moving a Fireplace
Drag from the center handle to move the
fireplace. If the fireplace is in a wall, you are
limited to moving the fireplace along that
wall, or in and out, stopping when either its
back or front is flush with the wall. If the
fireplace is freestanding, it will move
perpendicular to its sides unless you hold
down the Ctrl key before dragging it. In this

case, the freestanding fireplace will move
freely in any direction.
Resizing a Fireplace
To change the width of a fireplace and its fire
box, start at a side handle and drag along the
wall away from or toward the center of the
fireplace. Note that the fire box also resizes if
this method is used. It is more accurate to
enter the desired values for the fireplace in
the Fireplace Specification dialog.
Changing the Depth

Only a freestanding fireplace can have its
depth changed by dragging from a handle.
Drag the front handle to change the overall
depth of the fireplace. This will not affect the
depth of the fire box or of the hearth.
For greatest accuracy, change all
specifications for the selected fireplace in the
Fireplace Specification dialog.
Displaying Fireplaces
The color and display of fireplaces in floor
plan view is controlled by the manual
dimension layer. See Displaying Objects
on page 125.

Select the masonry fireplace and click the
Open Object
Fireplace Specification dialog. Unlike
550
cabinet sizes, dimensions entered here must

be in whole inches.
Other
Objects
General Tab
1
3
5
2
4
1 Height - Specify the Height of the

fireplace.
2 Width - Specify the Width of the

fireplace.
3 Depth - Specify the Depth of the

fireplace.

7 The picture of the fireplace updates as
changes are made. Press the Tab key to

force the fireplace to update to the most
recent change.
4 Hearth Depth - Specify the Hearth
Depth. This is measured from the front

of the fireplace out into the room. To
eliminate the hearth altogether, enter a zero
for this value.
5 Hearth Height - Specify the Hearth
Height. This is the height of the hearth

above the floor in that room.
6 Suppress Dimensions - This option
will appear for fireplaces placed in

walls. Check this box to turn off the display
of dimensions when this fireplace is selected.
The display of dimensions is ultimately
controlled by the Manual Dimension layer in
551
Fire Box Tab
1
2
3
4
5
1 Height/Width - Enter the height and

width of the fire box.
2 Depth - Enter the depth of the fire box.

3 Offset - Enter the number of inches (or
mm) to offset the fire box. This will be

measured from the center. A value of 0 will
cause the fire box to be centered in the
fireplace.
4 Offset to Left/Right - Choose to offset
the fire box to the left or to the right.

The amount of the offset will be the value
specified by Offset.
5 No Fire Box - Select the check box to
eliminate the fire box from the

fireplace. This is often used in the foundation
plan to provide a solid matching base for the
fireplace on the first floor, but without
having a fire box.
Layer Tab
Materials Tab
Library Fireplaces
Several different fireplace symbols are
available in the Fixtures (Interior) library
category. Check the manufacturers product
information for dimensions of framing, and
552
code clearances for the fireplace unit you

intend to use and size the symbols
accordingly once they are in your plan. The
fireplaces in the Library behave just like

other Library objects.
by selecting Library > Fixture (Interior)
There are many ways to access the libraries.
In the Fixtures (Interior) library category,

select the Fireplaces library and navigate to
the Open Front category. In both the With
Stovepipe and Without Stovepipe categories,
three standard fireplace sizes are provided
with opening widths of 36, 42, and 48 inches.
Select Library> Library Browser

to
access all available libraries. Access the
Fixtures (Interior) library category directly
Library
Placing a Library Fireplace
Library fireplaces can be placed anywhere in

your plan. Some library fireplaces have
behaviors that help you place the object in a
wall. Open Front fireplaces, for instance, will
snap the front of the fireplace to the inside
surface of a wall.
The face of a Library fireplace will project

through a four inch wall. If your house has
thicker exterior walls, replace the wall
section in the front of the fireplace with a
four inch wall as shown in the picture on the
far right.
To place a fireplace from the Library, select

your fireplace from the fixture library and
click in the plan where the fireplace will be.
To change the thickness of the wall segment,
in floor plan view, select the new fireplace.

Move it side-to-side in the wall and front to
back, until it is where you want it. Since it is
a wall fixture, it moves like a base cabinet.
Leave its back attached to the wall. If you
move it through a wall, the fireplace front
should move right through the wall until its
face is flush with the other side.
select Break Wall

and click at one end
where the wall segment in front of the
fireplace meets an intersecting wall. Select
the Interior Wall
child tool and delete
the wall segment by drawing over it starting
from the break. Now draw a new four inch
wall in its place.
Once the fireplace is located, you can draw
the walls that will enclose the back of the
553
Other
Objects
Library Fireplaces
fireplace. Draw three walls to complete the

box. Refer to the manufacturers information
to make sure you leave enough room around
the fireplace. Use dimensions to accurately
place the walls.
Following are three pictures showing

alternate methods of having the fireplace
project out into the room. It is best to use one
wall thickness for the side walls.
Projecting Library Fireplaces

Use the same method described above,
except draw the walls to allow the fireplace
to project into the room.
Chimneys
Chimneys for
Masonry Fireplaces
Place a soffit in position over the chimney chase, resize it to match, then extend
the soffit using the same method as
extending the masonry fireplace in the
3D view.
If the chimney chase is drawn with walls

on the exterior of the house, you may also
continue the chase with walls. Align
walls with the chase on each subsequent
floor. The chimney chase room on the
uppermost floor should have a much
higher ceiling defined in the Room
Specification dialog. It should also be
set to have no roof by unchecking Roof
over this room in the Structure tab of
the Room Specification dialog. Then
rebuild floors & ceilings, (and the roof, if
appropriate).
To create a chimney on a masonry fireplace

1.
Select the fireplace in a 3D view.
2.
Hold down the Ctrl key, grab the topmost

handle, and drag the chimney up through
all the floors and the roof until it is to the
desired height. The use of the Ctrl key
will prevent the chimney from stopping
when it reaches the ceiling height.
3.
Once you have dragged the chimney up

until it is approximately the correct
height, you may select the fireplace,
edit button,
and type in the known height.
Chimney Chases
There are a couple of options to extend the
chimney chase.
554
Chimney caps may be made using soffits.

You must hold down the Ctrl key before
dragging them above the ceiling height.
Chapter 22:
Architectural
Blocks
Architectural
Blocks
Chapter Overview
Architectural blocks are built from groups of
3D objects. Once an architectural block is
created, the block behaves as a single object
while the components retain their own
attributes.
Many different types of objects can be added
to an architectural block. Cabinets, soffits,
fixtures, furniture, image objects, electrical
objects, terrain objects, road objects, slabs,
countertops, molding polylines, and polyline
solids can all be included in architectural
blocks.
The display of architectural blocks in floor
plan view can be controlled by layer.
Chapter Contents

Displaying Architectural Blocks
Selecting Architectural Blocks
Exploding Architectural Blocks
Deleting Architectural Blocks
Copying Architectural Blocks
Moving Architectural Blocks
Rotating Architectural Blocks
Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and
Components
Adding Architectural Blocks to the Library
Architectural Block Specification Dialog
The display of architectural blocks in

materials lists and schedules can be turned
off completely. The block can appear as a
single unit or its sub-objects and components
can appear separately.
555

An architectural block is created by blocking
a group of objects. The following is a list of
objects that can be included in architectural
blocks:
Cabinets (Base, Wall, Full Height)
Soffits, Shelves, Partitions
Fixture/Furniture Symbols
Hardware Symbols
Millwork Symbols
Geometric Shape Symbols
Electrical objects
Images
Custom Countertops & Counter Holes
Slabs & Foundation Slabs
Polyline Solids
Molding Polylines
Roads, Driveways, Sidewalks
Terrain Features and Terrain Modifiers
Architectural blocks can be created in any

view.To create an architectural block, start by
group-selecting the set of objects that you
would like to block together.
Click the Make Block

edit button to
block the group-selected objects. The set of
blocked objects will be contained in floor
plan view within a bounding box, indicating
that they are now an Architectural Block.
The Library
Select Library> Architectural Block
Library
to access a library of
architectural blocks. Choose a block in the
Library Browser and click in the plan to
place it.
You can create your own architectural blocks
and save them to the Architectural Blocks
Library. See Adding to the Library on page
568.
Displaying Architectural Blocks

Once placed, architectural blocks are visible
in all views.
In Floor Plan View

The display of architectural blocks in floor
plan view can be controlled separately in the
556

The components of the block can display
using the layer attributes assigned to their
current layer or they can display using the
layer attributes assigned to the architectural
block. See General Tab on page 561.
The label that displays for an architectural

block in floor plan view can be generated
automatically, created manually, derived
from the component code, or suppressed. See
In 3D Views
button to
This dialog allows objects to be turned on
and off by layer. See Displaying Objects
on page 125.

Before an architectural block can be altered it
must first be selected. Two edit handles
display which can be used to move, copy,
delete, rotate, or otherwise modify it.
Once an architectural block is selected, you
can select additional architectural blocks or
architectural block compatible objects by
holding down the Shift key.
In Floor Plan View

There are two ways to select architectural
blocks in floor plan view.
Select Next Object

edit button or the
Tab key until the desired block is
selected.
In 3D Views
Most architectural blocks can be selected in
vector views, overviews, and render views
tool.
Including a selectable object such as a

cabinet in an architectural block will
allow it to be selected in 3D views.
Click on Select Objects

and then
select an architectural block. If your plan
is crowded, this method may not select
the block. If a nearby object is selected
Most architectural block components can be

selected in 3D views using the Select Next
first, click the Select Next Object

edit button or press the Tab key until the
architectural block is selected.
Selecting Sub-Objects
Right-click on the architectural block

while in any drawing mode. This is a
quick way to select a block without
changing modes. This method is similar
to using Select Objects
. If a neighboring object is selected instead, click the
Object
edit button or the
Tab
key.
To edit an individual object within an

architectural block, first click on the object to
select the architectural block by. With the
block is selected, press the Tab key or click
the Select Next Object
edit button. The
selection marquee will switch focus to the
individual object. In most cases, the ability to
557
Architectural
Blocks
You can control the appearence of the

bounding box by changing the layer
properties for the architectural block.
edit the object as part of a block will be more

restrictive than if the object was independent.
Note: CAD-based objects such as countertops cannot be selected in 3D views while

part of an architectural block.
Exploding Architectural Blocks

Many of the editing options for
individual objects are not available if
that object is part of a block. In order
to resize, move, rotate, or delete an
individual object, you must first explode the
block. Select the architectural block and

click the Explode Block
edit button. The
sub-objects of the original block will now be
independent objects.
Deleting Architectural Blocks

Select an architectural block or group of
architectural blocks to be deleted. Once
selected, press the Del key on the keyboard
or click the Delete
edit button on the edit
toolbar. To delete a sub-object of an

architectural block, you must explode the
block, delete the object, and recreate the
block.
Copying Architectural Blocks

One or more architectural blocks can be
copied from one location to another, either
within the same plan or across plans.
Single/Multiple
To copy an architectural block or a group of
blocks, first select one or more architectural
blocks. Once selected, click the Copy/Paste
edit button. If you are copying the
blocks(s) to the same floor of the same plan,
click in the plan to place a copy.
If you are copying the block(s) to a different
floor of the same plan or to a different plan,
go to the new floor or new plan and select
Edit> Paste from the menu which will make
558
the pointer resemble the picture on the Copy/

Paste
edit button. Click on the plan to
place a copy of the selected architectural
block(s).
Multiple Copies
To make multiple copies of the same
object(s), select the object(s) and doubleclick the Copy/Paste
pasting.
edit button before
To multiple copy, the receiving plan be open

and visible so that you can toggle to that plan
by clicking on screen. If using multiple copy
across plans, open both plans first and select
Window> Tile Horizontally
to place them side-

A single architectural block or a group of
blocks can be moved in floor plan view and
3D views.

Using the Mouse
An architectural block or group of blocks can

be moved precisely using the Transform/
The easiest way to move architectural blocks

in floor plan view and 3D views is with the
mouse.
Replicate Object
edit button. For more
information see Transform/Replicate
Object on page 793.
1.
Select the architectural block(s) you

want to move.
2.
Place the pointer over the middle handle

(the pointer will change to the Move
pointer).
3.
Hold down the left mouse button and

drag the blocks(s).
4.
Release the left mouse button to place

the architectural block.
Using the Point to

Point Move Tool
Groups of architectural blocks can also be
moved with precision using the Point to
Point Move
edit button. See Point-toPoint Move on page 790.
In 3D Views
Architectural blocks can be selected and
moved in vector and render views. Moving
an architectural block in 3D view will
regenerate the view. Moving an architectural
block that contains terrain objects will cause
the terrain to be rebuilt.
Rotating Architectural Blocks

When an architectural block is selected, two
edit handles display. Click on the triangular
shaped handle and drag it to rotate the block.
To rotate multiple architectural blocks
selected as a group, drag from the triangular

handle representing the group as a whole.
Architectural blocks can also be rotated
559
Architectural
Blocks
dow> Tile Vertically

by-side on screen.
or Win-
tool. Select a block or group of blocks and

edit button. See Transform/Replicate

Object on page 793.
Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and Components

An architectural block consists of a group of
objects that have been blocked together.
These sub-objects often contain additional
parts called "components". For example, a
kitchen island can be created by blocking
together cabinets, appliances, and a custom
countertop. Each of these sub-objects may
contain components. The cabinet(s) for
instance may contain a countertop, hinges,
and drawer glide.
Architectural blocks can be treated as a
single unit in materials lists, ignoring subobjects and their components. See General
Tab on page 561.
Editing Sub-Objects
Certain attributes of an architectural block
can be edited at the object level. An object
can be edited by accessing the specification
dialog either of two ways:
Explode the architectural block; select

the sub-object; and click the Open
Object
edit button.
Select the sub-object while it is part of

the architectural block (see Selecting
Sub-Objects on page 557) and click the
Open Object
edit button. Some
attributes may not be editable while the
object is part of a block.
You can view and/or modify the components

of an architectural block (or group of blocks)
through the Components dialog. The
Components dialog lists all of the subobjects that comprise an architectural block,
as well as the components that make up each
sub-object.
To open the Components dialog, select an
architectural block and click the
Components
edit button. See The
Adding Architectural Blocks to the Library

Create your own architectural blocks and
save them in the Architectural Blocks
Library
. Once in the library,
architectural blocks can be copied to any
other category. See Copying Library
Note: If you open a plan in the Base version

of Chief Architect that was created in the Full
version and select an architectural block, you
will not be able to unblock it or edit its components.
Select the architectural block and click the

Add to Library
560
edit button. The Add
to Library dialog displays, allowing you to
add the object to a specific library under the
Architectural Blocks category. See Adding

The Architectural Block

Specification dialog controls the way
architectural blocks are displayed in floor
plan view and how they display in materials
lists and schedules.
Select an architectural block or group of

architectural blocks and click the Open
Object
Architectural Block Specification
dialog for the selected block(s).
General Tab
3
4
1 Display Bounding Box - check this to
display the bounding box of the objects

in the architectural block. The box will use
the Architectural Blocks Layer settings.
2 Display Sub-Objects Using Block
Layer - Check this box to apply the

display properties for the architectural block
layer as specified in the Layer Display
Options dialog to all of the sub-objects.
If this box is not checked, all of the subobjects will display according to the display
properties set for their current layer. See
3 Ignore Sub-Objects - Check this box
to treat the architectural block as a

single unit in materials lists and schedules.
This will also turn off the display of subobjects in floor plan view, displaying only
the bounding box.
561
Architectural
Blocks
4 Block Schedule - Specify which
schedule the architectural block will

display in when Ignore Sub-Objects is
checked.
Note: "Other" must be checked in the Schedule Specification dialog for the architectural
block to appear in the schedule. See Text
Tab on page 929.
Select None and the architectural block will

not appear in any schedules.
Layer Tab
1
2
3
1 Default - Check this box to assign this
architectural block to the default

architectural block layer.
3 Define - Click this button to open the
Layer Display Options dialog and

choose from the available layers.
2 Click the drop down list to choose from

the available default layers.
Label Tab
562
Note: Labels for architectural blocks display

only in floor plan view.
Chapter 23:
Libraries
Libraries
Chapter Overview
Chief Architects library contains thousands
of symbols, materials, and images that can
enhance any plan. Anything that you would
like to incorporate in your building design
that cannot be made with Chief Architects
architectural and drafting tools can be found
in the library, or created in the Create
Symbol Wizard and saved in the library for
future use.
New libraries and library enhancements are
being created by Chief Architect on a
continuing basis. There are also third party
developers who have created their own
libraries for Chief Architect which are
available for purchase.
Becoming familiar with the library will help
you realize Chief Architects full potential.
Chapter Contents
Third Party Libraries

The Library Browser
Adding to the Library
Adding Materials to the Library
Adding Backdrops to the Library
Adding a Molding Profile
Editing Libraries
The Select Library Object Dialog
Replace From Library
Library Categories
Library Search Dialog
Placing Library Objects
Place Library Object Button
Displaying Library Objects
Selecting Library Objects
Deleting Library Objects
Copying Library Objects
Moving Library Objects
Resizing Library Objects
Editing Library Objects
Library Objects and the Material List
Library Object Specification Dialog
563
Third Party Libraries

If you have any third-party libraries created
for Chief Architect 7.0, you should copy
them into your Chief Architect 10.0
"Libraries" folder. The next time you open
Chief Architect, the program will
automatically convert those libraries for you.
If you have any third-party libraries for Chief

Architect 8.0 or 9.0 they will be
automatically copied into the Chief Architect
10.0 "Libraries" folder.
Updated information on available libraries
can be found at www.chiefarchitect.com.
The Library Browser

The Chief Architect Library Browser is
a repository of prebuilt components,
symbols, textures, and images that can be
used in a plan. Explore the contents; find
what youre looking for; and place it in your
plan.
The Library Browser allows you to add your
own symbols; organize them into your own
libraries within existing categories; and save
them for use in future plans. See Adding to
the Library on page 568.
To open the Library Browser:
Select Library> Library Browser

from the main menu.
Press Ctrl + L on your keyboard.
Click the Library Browser

parent
button then click any of its child buttons.
Many object families such as the Door

Tools
, Window Tools
Tools
, and Electrical Tools
display a Library
564
, Cabinet
child button that
accesses a library within the Library

Browser with more objects of that type.
In addition, the More Library Tools

parent button can be added to your toolbar. Click this button to display its child
buttons: Fixture (Interior) Library
Fixture (Exterior) Library
ture (Interior) Library
(Exterior) Library
; Furni-
; Fixture
; Hardware
Library
; Geometric Shapes
Library
; and Architectural Block
Library
. Each accesses the library
category of the same name.
The Library Browser window has three
adjustable sections: library directory pane;
selection pane; and preview pane. To adjust
the height or width of a section, place the
pointer over the split bar you want to move.
When the double-headed arrow
appears,
click and drag.
The Library Browser can also be docked to
any side of the screen. See Docking the
Library Browser on page 567.
The Library Browser
Libraries
3
4
1 Select the Library Browser tab to view
the Library Browser.
Select the Project Browser tab to view the

Project Browser. See Project Browser on
page 78.
2 The library directory displays here. The

overall structure is:
Library Category
Library 1
Library Folder 1
Library Subfolder
Library Object 1
Library Folder 2
Library 2
... and so on.
The hierarchy is navigated using the tree

view control; by clicking in the view
window; and by using the keyboard.
3 The toolbar beneath the tree view aids
in navigating and displaying windows.
Click the Library Search button to

open the Library Search dialog. See
Library Search Dialog on page 583.
Click the Plant Chooser button to
open the Plant Chooser dialog. See
Plant Chooser Dialog on page 507.
Click the Online Content button to
launch your default web browser to the
Chief Architect web site, where links to third
party content developers can be found.
Click the Show/Hide Selection Pane
button to toggle the Selection window
on and off.
Click the Show/Hide Preview Pane
button toggles the Preview window on
and off.
Click the Preferences button to open
the Preferences dialogs Library
565
Browser panel, where display properties of

the Library Browser are controlled. See
Library Browser Panel on page 98.
enabled depends on the type of item

currently selected in the Library Browser.
4 The status bar at the bottom of the
Library Browser is divided into three

sections:
The first displays the name of the

selected category, library, folder or
object.
The second section displays the total

number of folders and objects contained
by the selected item.
The third section displays copyright

information for copyrighted symbols.
5 The Selection pane shows thumbnails

for the highlighted portion of the tree
view.
If you have Scrollable List checked in your
preference settings, a scroll bar will be
present at the bottom of the selection pane.
See Library Browser Panel on page 98.
6 The Preview pane displays a 3D or
alternate view of the selected object.
Select an object by clicking on the desired

object in the Selection pane.
You can work on the plan with the Library
Browser open. To close the Library Browser
click the Close button or double-click the
object in the selection pane.
Using the Menus

The Library menu contains all commands
related to the library. Which menu items are
566
For information about these commands,

when they are available, and what they do,
see Library Menu on page 41.
Right-click on an item in the Library
Browser to open a contextual menu
displaying options related to that item. This
menu corresponds to the menu items that
display in the Library menu when the same
library item is selected. See Library Menu
on page 41.
The Library Browser
Docking the
Library Browser
Disable Docking in the Preferences

dialog prevents the Library Browser from
docking to the side of the screen. See
Library Browser Panel on page 98.
Holding down the Ctrl key will prevent

the Library Browser from docking while
moving.
If you close the program with the Library

Browser docked, it will display in the
same position the next time the program
is opened.
The Library Browser can be relocated by

clicking and dragging the title bar.
567
Libraries
When moved to the top, bottom, or side of

your screen it will automatically dock in a
vertical or horizontal orientation, depending
on its location.
Adding to the Library

Libraries shipped with Chief Architect are
locked and cannot be edited, indicated by a
small padlock symbol next to the library
name. Unlocked libraries can be added to
and edited. New libraries, folders, and library
objects can all be added to the Library
Browser. Library objects are always placed
in alphabetical order within their heirarchy.
Add to Library
Library dialog.
to display the Add to
Adding a New Library

To create a new library, open the Library
Browser and choose Library> New>
Library from the menu.
You can also select any current library in the

tree view, right-click on it, and select New
Library from the contextual menu. A new
Library, "Untitled Library 1", will be added
to the currently highlighted Library
Category. The new library can be renamed.
See Renaming Libraries on page 571.
1 Symbols can be added to any library or
Adding a New Object

Any object previously placed in a plan with
the Library Browser or the Create Symbol
Wizard can be added to a library. See
Create Symbol Wizard on page 859. In
addition, some Chief Architect objects which
are not symbols, such as cabinets; windows;
doorways; CAD blocks; molding profiles;
architectural blocks; and terrain objects can
be added to the library. See Symbols vs.
Native Objects on page 591.
To add an object to the library, select the
symbol in floor plan view, vector view, or
render view and choose Tools> Symbol>
568
folder that appears in the Choose

window. The symbol will be added at the
selected directory level.
2 Give the symbol a name. Names are

case sensitive.
3 Click New Library
to add a new
library to the selected category.
4 Click OK to enter the object into the
selected folder. The OK button will be

disabled until an object name is entered and a
library or directory is selected.
Folders in the Backdrops category cannot have the forward slash "/" character.
Refresh Library Browser

If you add a new library or graphics file
by copying the file in Windows
Explorer, it will not show up automatically in
the browser. Click this button to refresh the
Library Browser and display the added file.

Chief Architects Library Browser has empty
libraries and folders for you to save graphics
files in. These unlocked directories all have
the word "My" at the beginnings of their
names, and are found at the top of their
library category when opened. The My
Materials library, for example, is located at
the top of the Materials category tree.
and Adding Images to the Library on page

834.
Chief Architect can use materials and images

in a variety of file formats and provides
several means of adding new material and
image files to the library. For more
information, see Creating Materials on
page 598; Managing Plan Materials on
page 600; Creating Images on page 831;
New files or folders will display in

alphabetical order with any existing files or
folders. New material or image files can be
renamed and moved as long as they are in
unlocked folders. You can also modify any
sub-folders that are in an unlocked folder.
If you make any changes outside of Chief

Architect while the program is running, use
Adding Backdrops to the Library

A backdrop can be added to the library from
anywhere on your computer.
1.
Select File> Import> Backdrop

to
open the Import Backdrop File dialog.
2.
Browse to a backdrop on your computer;

select it; and click Open. The backdrop
can now be found in the Library
Browser in the My Backdrops library.
Multiple backdrops can be added to the

library simultaneously by copying them into
the My Backdrops folder using Windows
Explorer. To make them visible in the
Library Browser without closing and
opening the program, click the Refresh
Library Browser
button.
For information about how to use a backdrop

in a render view, see Images & Backdrops
on page 657.
Adding a Molding Profile

Add a new molding profile to the Moldings
and Profiles library category by drawing a
closed polyline to represent its cross section.
The polyline must be oriented properly for
the molding to be usable.
Drawing the Molding

Moldings can be drawn using the CAD tools
in either floor plan view or in a CAD Detail
window. Draw moldings at their actual size.
569
Libraries
the Refresh Library Browser

tool to
update the Library Browser. See Refresh
The profile must also be created with the

proper orientation. For a window casing or
sill, crown, chair rail or baseboard, the back
of the molding (the part that is against the
wall) must be vertical and at the left of the
polyline. Draw the vertical line first then
continue drawing the molding clockwise.
See Molding Polylines on page 447.
To add your molding to the library, select the

polyline and click the Add to Library
edit button to open the Add to Library
dialog. See Adding to the Library on page
568.
Editing Libraries
Most libraries in the Library Browser are
locked and cannot be deleted, moved,
renamed, or modified; however new libraries
and library objects to be moved, copied,
deleted, and renamed.
Libraries
cannot be copied.
Inserting a New Folder

Select an editable library or folder in the tree
view and right-click on it.
Individual library objects from locked

libraries can be edited after being copied into unlocked libraries.
Copy Library List

To make a copy of the list of all library
objects, select a
Library in tree view and
choose Library> Copy Library List; then
paste the entire library heirarchy as text into
a text program such as Notepad or Text
Editor.
Copying Folders and

Library Objects
To copy a Folder
or Library Object
open the Library Browser and select it.
Right-click on the library item and select
Deleting Libraries
,
Copy
from the contextual menu.
Highlight a new location in the tree view and
select Edit> Paste to paste a copy in the new
location.
570
Choose Insert Folder in the contextual

menu to create a folder beneath the selected
folder or library. You may also select a
location in the tree view and choose
Library> New> Folder.
Unlocked libraries, and the folders and

library objects within them, can be deleted.
To delete a library object, select it in the
Library Browser and choose Library>
Delete Object; right-click on it and choose
Delete from the contextual menu; or press
the Del key on your keyboard.
Editing Libraries
Renaming Libraries
Unlocked Libraries, including the Folders
and library objects within them, can be
renamed.
To rename a library, folder, or library object,
open the Library Browser and select the
library object to be renamed. Choose
Library> Rename Object from the menu,
or right-click on the library object and select
Rename Object from the Contextual Menu.
The keyboard command Ctrl +R also allows
you to rename a library object.
Library names can contain up to 63
characters. Library names are also casesensitive. "OakCabinet" for example, will
not overwrite "Oakcabinet".
Expand/Collapse All
When a
Library level or
Folder level
item is selected in the tree view of the
Library Browser, Expand All and Collapse
All are available in the Library and
contextual menus, allowing you to expand or
contract its contents in the tree view.
Components
The display of library objects in the
Materials List is controlled in the
Components dialog. Select Library>
Components
when any unlocked symbol
Terrain objects, CAD blocks, moldings,

images, backdrops, and materials do not
appear in the Material List. See The
Open Symbol
Any image, material, plant image,or symbol
in an
Unlocked library can be opened for
specification and edited from the Library
Browser menu.
The Symbol Specification dialog is very
similar to the Create Symbol Wizard. To
open the Symbol Specification dialog,
highlight a symbol in the tree view of the
Library Browser and select Edit> Open
Symbol
. See Symbol Specification
Dialog on page 880.
Preferences
Click the Preferences
button at the
bottom of the Library Browser directories
panel to open the Library Browser panel of
the Preferences dialog, where display
properties for the Library Browser are
controlled. See Library Browser Panel on
page 98.
Moving Folders and

Library Objects
Unlocked folders and library objects can be
moved to new locations in the Library
Browser provided that the destination is an
unlocked library. Like libraries, folders and
571
Libraries
Modifying or deleting library objects is

permanent and immediate. You cannot
undo these changes so use care when modifying your libraries. We highly recommend
that you create backups of all your library files
(*.alb) before making any modifications.
is highlighted in tree view. See Symbols vs.

Native Objects on page 591. The
Components dialog opens, allowing you
to change the information that will be used
on the Material List.
library objects are organized alphabetically

within each hierarchy.
To move an unlocked folder or file to a
different location, open the Library Browser
and click the library object. Click and drag
the selected library object to the desired
location.
Folders able to accept additions will

highlight as the file is moved. Release the
mouse button to relocate the selected library
object.
Keyboard Commands
The Library Browser can be navigated using
the arrow keys on your keyboard. The right
and left arrow keys expand and collapse
Folders; and the up and down keys change
which library object is currently selected.
If you have Scrollable List checked in your
preference settings, pressing the Tab key will
switch focus between the tree view and the
selection pane. Use your mouse to select an
object for placement. See Library Browser
Panel on page 98.
If you have Tiled To Fit Window checked in
your preference settings, pressing the Tab
key will switch focus between the tree view
and the selection pane. The arrow keys can
then be used to select a library object within
the selection pane.
The Select Library Object Dialog

The Select Library Object dialog is a
modal version of the Library Browser that is
accessed from any specification dialog that
displays the library
button. Click it to
open the Select Library Object dialog
and select and apply items from the library to
the object currently opened for specification.
The Select Library Object dialog only

displays categories that are related to the
opened object. For example, this is how the
Select Library Object dialog displays
when accessed from the Cabinet
572
The Select Library Object dialog can be

resized
selection
; display the preview
and
panes; and can initiate a
Library Search
To make your selection, highlight the desired

object and click OK; or simply double-click
on the object in the selection pane to close

the Select Library Object dialog.

Select Replace Identical Objects in Room
to replace all objects that are in the same
room as, and are identical to, the currently
selected object.
Select Replace Identical Objects on Floor
to replace all objects that are on the same
floor as, and are identical to, the currently
selected object.
A few things to remember about Replace
From Library
1
2
1 Click the Library button to open the
Library Browser and select an object to

use as a replacement. The object which is
currently selected as a replacement will be
listed above.
2 Select one of the Replacement

Options.
Select Replace Selected Object to replace

only the currently selected object.
Works in floor plan and 3D views.
The replacement option Replace

Identical Objects in Room is not available for doors and windows.

is available for
any object that can be stored in the Library
Browser and can be selected, including:
electrical objects; image objects;
architectural objects; and architectural
blocks. Objects that cannot be replaced using
this feature include: materials; backdrops;
and objects placed within other objects, such
as cabinet doors.
Library Categories
There are many library categories; and
within each, there can be any number of
libraries.
The selection pane always always represents

the items selected in the tree view. If you
select a category or object in the selection
pane, the corresponding item is selected in
573
Libraries
The Replace From Library

edit
button displays in the edit toolbar when
most objects are selected. Click this button to
open the Replace From Library dialog
and replace the selected object, and others
like it if you choose, with an object of the
same type from the library.
the tree view and the 3D picture appears in

the preview pane.
Here are the library categories:
My Libraries
Backdrops
Cabinet Doors and Drawers
Cabinet Modules
CAD Blocks
Doors
Doorways
Electrical
Fixtures (Exterior)
Interior Fixtures
Exterior Furnishings
Interior Furnishings
Geometric Shapes
Hardware
Images
Materials
Millwork
Moldings and Profiles
Plants
Sprinklers
Terrain
Windows
My Libraries
The My Libraries category is a central
repository that can be used to store libraries
containing any and all kinds of objects. This
Click the Architectural Block
Library
child button to open the
Library Browser to the Architectural Blocks
library category.
Architectural blocks are a combination of
objects that are grouped together. Once
blocked, they can be edited as a single object
and stored for future use.
For more information about architectural
blocks, see Architectural Blocks on page
555.
574
is a good place to store third party libraries

and libraries that you have created yourself.
Backdrops
Backdrops
The Backdrops library category contains
many images that can be used for backdrops
in 3D and raytrace views.
Backdrops can be specified from the 3D

Settings dialog; or they can be dragged and
dropped directly from the Library Browser.
See Creating Backdrops on page 648.
Libraries
Click the Cabinet Door Library child

button to open the Library Browser to
the Cabinet Doors and Drawers library
category.
The Cabinet Doors and Drawers category
contains many door styles, organized into
directories, that can be used with Chief
Architects standard cabinets.
These door styles can be selected and
dropped onto existing cabinets in floor plan
and 3D views to change the door style for
that cabinet.
Cabinet Modules
Click the Cabinet Modules Library
Browser to the Cabinet Modules Library.
The Cabinet Modules library category
contains cabinet modules that can be placed
in floor plan view from the Library Browser
or the Cabinet Specification dialog.
Cabinets from the library can be selected and
moved around in the model.
They cannot be resized until they are opened
for specification and Allow Resize is
selected on the General tab of the Cabinet
575
CAD Blocks
Select CAD> CAD Block Library...
CAD Blocks library category.
The CAD Blocks library category contains
2D CAD blocks that can be placed into any
view that allows CAD mode, including
layout pages.
The CAD Blocks library category includes a
wide variety of CAD objects such as product
specific CAD details; commonly used plan
Doors
The Doors library category contains custom
door styles that can be assigned to doors in
the 3D model. These doors can be selected
and dropped into any doorway to change the
door style for that doorway.
The Doors library category also contains
custom doors that can be placed within
doorway objects.
Doorways
Click the Doorway Library child
the Doorways library category.
The Doorways library category contains
doorway configurations for grand entries;
interior archways; and garage door frames.
576
notations; and CAD images. See Creating a

Library of CAD Blocks on page 757.
Electrical
Electrical
The Electrical library category contains

electrical symbols that can be placed in floor
plan or 3D views to create electrical plans.
All of the symbols have a 3D object

associated with them that will appear in 3D
views and may also produce a light source in
render views.
Fixtures (Exterior)
Click the Fixture Library (Exterior)
Browser to the Exterior Fixture library category.
The Exterior Fixture library category
contains symbols for many outdoor objects
commonly found on the exterior of a home.
Barbecues, plants, playground equipment,
hot tubs, mailboxes, doghouses, automobiles,
and a variety of road accessories are just
some of the objects found in the Exterior
Fixtures library category.
Sunrooms
The Fixtures (Exterior) library category
includes a Sunrooms library containing a
variety of sunroom components which can be
used to create many different styles of
sunrooms. Following are some of the
individual library objects assembled as a
sunroom unit.
Only one side of each section is provided. To
get the corresponding unit for the opposite
side, check Reverse Item in the specification
dialog for that sunroom section.
If a short wall is needed under the sunroom,

use solid railings. Change the Floor to
577
Libraries
Click the Electrical Library child

the Electrical library category.
Bottom value from zero to the height of the

solid railing.
Interior Fixtures
Click the Fixture Library (Interior)
Browser to the Interior Fixtures category.
The Interior Fixtures library category
contains a variety of interior fixtures such as
appliances, indoor stoves, fireplaces, HVAC,
surveillance cameras, and fire extinguishers.
Exterior Furnishings
Click the Furnishings Library (Exterior) child button to open the Library
Browser to the Exterior Furnishings library
category.
The Furnishings Library (Exterior) library
category contains outdoor furniture such as
benches, swings, planters, tables, and chairs.
Interior Furnishings
578
Click the Furnishings Library (Interior) child button to open the Library
Browser to the Furnishings Library (Interior)
library category.
There are three types of furniture objects:
A stand-alone object is placed and

moves like a base cabinet. Most furniture
objects are stand alone.
The Interior Furnishings library category is

very large, containing a broad range of
furniture organized into directories.
A table object, such as a table lamp or

portable TV, is placed on top of a table,
countertop, or other object.
A wall object attaches to the wall.
Geometric Shapes
Click the Geometric Shapes Library

Browser to the Geometric Shapes category.
Libraries
Geometric Shapes
resized and combined with many other
objects for a variety of applications.
The Geometric Shapes library category contains cylinders, boxes, wedges, spheres,
cones, and other basic shapes which can be
Hardware
Click the Hardware Library child
button to open the Library Browser
window to the Hardware library category.
The Hardware library category contains
accessories that can be applied to doors and
drawers for commercial or residential use.
Images
Click the Images Library child button
Images library category.
Image objects contain information and

attributes about the represented object, which
display in 3D views. See Picture Files vs.
Image Objects on page 826.
579
Image objects are extremely important for

the appearance of rendered views and VRML
file export. Images are bitmap files which
represent individual objects such as trees,
flowers, cars, or people. They are marked in
floor plan view with a 2D CAD block and are

visible in 3D views. When placed on a
terrain or terrain feature, the images are
placed at the correct elevation.
Materials
The Materials library category contains
materials that display in 3D and raytrace
views.
Materials can be applied to objects directly
from the Library Browser. See Applying
Materials on page 602. Once used in a plan,
materials are independent and can be edited
without changing the original material from

the library.
Materials can be used in plans without
existing in the Library Browser. They can be
added to the Library Browser individually or
all at once. See Managing Plan Materials
on page 600 and Converting Material
Millwork
The Millwork library category contains
objects such as door surrounds, balusters,
newels, corbels, mantels and cupolas. These
580
objects can be applied to other objects in the

program such as railings, fences, and stair
brackets.
Libraries

The Moldings and Profiles library category
contains a collection of molding profiles that
can be used on objects such as cabinets,
windows, doors, curbs, and rooms. Molding
profiles can also be extruded along a path in
floor plan view using the Molding Line
and Molding Polyline
Molding Polylines.
tools. See
Plants
The Plant library category consists primarily
of images of plants and trees. See Plant
The 3D Plants library also contains symbols
of plants. These symbols contain information
and attributes that apply specifically to
plants. See Plant Information on page 874
and Plant Attributes on page 875 .
By default plants reside on their own layer.
119.
581
Sprinklers
The Sprinklers library category contains
different kinds of sprinklers that can be used
with the Sprinkler Tools
582
to detail
irrigation systems. See Sprinkler Tools on

page 498.
Terrain
Terrain
Click the Terrain Library child button
Terrain library category.
The Terrain library category contains road

markings that can be used in parking lots,
crosswalks, etc. See The Terrain Library
on page 499.
Windows
Libraries
The Windows library category

contains windows with custom muntin
patterns as well as windows with custom
shapes.
These windows can be placed in a model just

like other windows and can be resized like
other library objects.

The Library Search button is found
on the main toolbar; on the Library
Browser; and on the Select Library
Object dialog.
Click the Library Search
button to open
the Library Search dialog.
583
Basic Search Tab
1
2
1 Enter text to be used for the search.

2 Click on any of the items in the search
results area to find that item in the

Library Browser and select it for placement.
584
Use the arrow keys to scroll through the

search results.
Advanced Search Tab
Libraries
1
2
3
4
1 Search Text - Enter a keyword or
words to use in your search for a name

in the library.
Match Keyword - Check this box to match
only the entered keyword.
Match Entire Word - Check this box to
match the entire word.
Include Folders - Check this box to include
folders in your search.
Match Case - Check this box to make your
search case-sensitive.
2 Search Categories - Check the box for
Select All - Click this button to select all of

the categories.
Clear All - Click this button to clear all of
the categories.
3 Search - Click this button to begin

searching.
Close - Click this button to cancel the search

and close the Library Search dialog.
4 When the search is complete, the
results display here. Select a folder or

library object to open the Library Browser to
that item.
each category you want to include in

your search.
585
The Find Library Objects dialog

remembers the search information of
the last valid search whenever it is accessed
from the Library Browser, the main toolbar, or
the menu.
Search Attributes
Right-click on an object in the the tree view
of the Library Browser and select Search
Attributes from the contextual menu to open
the Search Attributes dialog.
Here, search words can be associated with

unlocked symbols. These search words can
be used to find the symbol using the "Match
Keyword". See Library Search Dialog on
page 583.

Click on an object in the tree view or
selection pane of the Library Browser to
select it for placement. See The Library
Browser on page 564. Most libraries
contain 3D objects that can be selected from
the Library Browser and placed directly in a
2D or 3D view. A few libraries, such as
materials, contain objects that cannot.
Once an object has been selected, the pointer
may change its appearance, indicating which
library category the object came from. For
example, select an object from the exterior
fixture library and the pointer will change to
an arbor.
To place an object selected from the Library
Browser into the model, simply click in a
floor plan or 3D view. You can continue to
click and place the selected library object
until another library object or tool is selected.
586
Once a library object has been placed, it can

be edited in a variety of ways. See Editing
Library Objects on page 591.
Specification Dialogs
Some objects, such as moldings and cabinet
doors, can be applied through the
specification dialogs of their containing
objects. For example, to place a cabinet door
on a particular cabinet, select the cabinet;
open it for specification; and click the
Library button on the General tab. See The
Select Library Object Dialog on page 572.
Place Library
Object Button
The Place Library Object button can
be added to your toolbar and used for
quick access and placement of frequently
used library items. See Adding Toolbar
Buttons on page 18.
Once a library object has been assigned,

click the button and then click in a view to
place the assigned object.

If you click on a molding profile in the
selection pane of the Library Browser then
you will go into molding polyline mode,
allowing you to create a molding polyline,
which can be used in floor plan view only.
See Layer Tab on page 447.
Materials
Materials on objects can be changed or added
whenever an object is open for specification.
The Materials tab of every specification
dialog allows you to access the Select
Material dialog and change the material.
Placement Restrictions
A library object comes with placement
restrictions based upon typical real-life
placement. Library windows, for example,
must be placed in a wall, just like standard
windows; library doors must be placed in an
existing doorway; and some appliances must
be placed in cabinets.
Library objects that are symbols have
placement restrictions which are determined
when the symbol is created but can be
changed later. See see Symbols vs. Native
Objects on page 591 and Symbol
The placement restrictions for most library

objects simply require that there be enough
space to contain the object; however, some
library objects require special considerations.
Any error messages you receive when
placing library symbols will indicate where
the object must be placed.
Cabinet Doors must be placed within
existing cabinets. They cannot be free
standing.
Doors must be placed into an existing
doorway.
Doorways must be placed into a wall.
Electrical objects from the library come with
a variety of placement restrictions. Some
objects, such as ceiling fans, track lighting,
and smoke detectors attach to the ceiling.
Others, like switches, outlets, and jacks,
mount on walls. Some electrical objects fit
under wall cabinets or directly on a floor.
If an Interior Fixture drops into the top or
front of a cabinet, you must have a cabinet
module large enough to contain it. If you
attempt to place a fixture into a cabinet
module that is too small, an error message
displays. Click OK, resize the cabinet to
accommodate the fixture, then place the
fixture in the cabinet again.
Objects from the Millwork library attach to
walls, doors, drawers and cabinets.
Library Windows must be placed into an
existing wall.
587
Libraries
Up to 100 Place Library Object

buttons
can be dragged onto the same toolbar, each
assigned a different object. See Place
Library Object Button on page 588.
Place Library Object Button

The Place Library Object button can be
added to your toolbar and used for quick
access and placement of frequently used
library items.
If the Place Library Object
button has
not yet been assigned a library object, click it
once to open the Library Object Button
1
2
Double-click a Place Library Object

button which has been assigned a library
object to open the Library Object Button
1 Click the Library button to open the

assign a library object to the button. If a
library object has already been assigned,
click this button to assign a new library
object. See The Select Library Object
Dialog on page 572.
2 When a library object has been
selected, assign a button icon. Choose

from two automatically generated button
icons; or, click Browse to browse your
computer for a different icon.
Displaying Library Objects

In Floor Plan View
All library objects except materials and
backdrops are displayed in floor plan view.
Library objects are represented by 2D CAD
blocks that resemble the size and shape of the
object in 3D. To learn how to change the 2D
588
block that represents an object, see 2D

Block on page 866.
As with other architectural objects, library
objects in floor plan view display according
to their layer settings in the Layer Display
Options dialog. Each library category has
its own layer in the Layer Display
Options dialog. See Layer Display
Change the layer of a library object by

opening it for specification with the Open
Object
edit button. On the Layer tab of
the specification dialog, click the Define...
button to open the Layer Display Options
dialog and specify a layer for the object. See
3D Views
All library objects except CAD blocks
display in 3D views. Images will always
rotate to face the camera in 3D views. For
information about how to avoid this, see
Non-Rotating Images on page 543.
Terrain objects can be viewed in 3D only
when a terrain perimeter exists. See Terrain
Tools on page 490.

Click on a library object using the Select
Objects
tool to select it; or right-click on
the object using any tool.
Multiple Objects
Multiple objects may be selected and moved,
copied or deleted as a group. Select the first
object, then hold down the Shift key and click
on objects to add or subtract them from the
selection set. This can be done in floor plan

view or in any 3D view. In floor plan view
you may also click the Select Objects
button, hold down the Shift key and drag a
marquee (selection box) around the group of
objects. Continue to hold down the Shift key
and click on individual objects to include or
exclude them from the selection set.
Deleting Library Objects

Delete a library object in any view by
selecting it and clicking the Delete
edit
button; or pressing the Del key on your
keyboard.
Specification dialog. See Front Tab on
page 478.
Deleting Built-in Fixtures

and Appliances
A fixture installed into the front of a cabinet
becomes a cabinet face item, like a door or
drawer. It can be resized or deleted the like
other face items in the Cabinet
589
Libraries
Options Dialog on page 119.
Copying Library Objects

Library object can be copied in floor plan
and 3D views, just like other objects.
Copying library objects in 3D views:
Copy/Paste
edit button; and drag the
pointer from the center handle to create a
new copy. Release the mouse button
when the copy is located properly. This is
especially useful in elevation or cross
section views, since it provides good control of relative positioning.
Copying library objects in floor plan view
Select the library object(s). Click the

Copy/Paste
edit button. If floor plan
view is active, click to place the copy. If
the object needs to be copied at a specified distance, use the Point-to-Point
Move
tool for more accuracy. See
Point-to-Point Move on page 790.
Select the object in 3D view; click the

Copy/Paste
edit button or select
Edit> Copy; and click in 3D view to
place the object.
Select the object and click the Transform/Replicate Object

edit button.
See Transform/Replicate Object on
page 793.
Select the object to be copied; click the
Select the object in 3D view; click the

Copy/Paste
edit button; toggle to
floor plan view; choose Edit> Paste; and
click in floor plan view to place the copy.
This method also works to copy from one
plan to the next.
Moving Library Objects

Library objects can be moved in floor plan
and 3D views. Some 3D views will restrict
the movement to one or two directions.
move the object through obstructions, select

it; hold down the Ctrl key; grab the center
Move
handle; and drag it.
Select the object; grab the center Move

handle, and drag it to the new location. To
Resizing Library Objects

Fixture and furniture objects may be resized
to any size up to 2000 inches, down to 1 inch.
To make all objects in the Fixture or
Furniture Libraries resizable:
590
1.

;
select Plan; and click the Edit... button
to open the Plan Defaults dialog.
Select the Fixture/Furniture Resize

Enable check box.
3.
Click OK.
3.
With Typed-in Values
By Dragging
When all five handles appear, the library
object may be resized by dragging.
To resize using typed-in values:

1.
To resize by dragging:
1.
Select the library object.
2.
Grab any of the outside handles and drag

in or out.
The object will be resized.
Select the object and click the Open

Object
edit button to open its specification dialog.
2.
Select the General tab and enter new

values for object height, width, etc.
3.
Click OK to exit the dialog and resize

the object.

Symbols vs. Native Objects
A symbol is an object that is based upon a 3D
.dxf or .dwg file and has been imported into
Chief Architect.
Native objects are those placed into the plan
using Chief Architects standard tools, such
as Hinged Doors
, and Cabinets
.
Native objects do not have a 3D .dxf or .dwg
file associated with them and are not
symbols.
Open Object
can be edited by opening it for specification.

Select the object and click the Open Object
edit button or double-click on the object
tool to open the
objects specification dialog.
For example, selecting a base cabinet from
the library in floor plan view and clicking the
Open Object
edit button will open the
Base Cabinet Specification dialog for
that object, just as it would for base cabinets

created with the Base Cabinet
tool.
Any object, including most library

objects located in unlocked libraries,
591
Libraries
2.
Open Symbol
When a symbol is selected, the Open
Symbol edit button displays. Clicking
this button will open the Symbol
Specification dialog for the selected
symbol. Any changes made affect only the
selected symbol. See Open Symbol on
page 881.
The Symbol Specification dialog has
much in common with the Create Symbol
Wizard. See Symbol Specification Dialog
on page 880.
edit button for a
selected object from the Architectural Blocks
library category to open the Architectural
Block Specification dialog. See
on page 561.
Backdrops
Backdrops can be selected in the 3D
Settings dialog or added directly to a
render view from the Library Browser; they
cannot, however, be opened for specification.
See Images & Backdrops on page 657.
Cabinets
edit button for a
selected object from the Cabinet Modules
library category to open the Cabinet
Specification dialog for that cabinet type.
See Cabinet Specification Dialog on page
475.
If a cabinet is selected and the Open Symbol
edit button displays, clicking it will open
592
the Symbol Specification dialog for the

selected cabinet. See Symbol Specification
Dialog on page 880.
CAD Blocks
edit button for a
selected object from the CAD Blocks library
category to open the CAD Block
Specification dialog. See CAD Block
Doors & Doorways

edit button for a
selected object from the Doors and
Doorways library categories to open the
Door Specification dialog. See Door
If a door or doorway is selected and the
Open Symbol
clicking it will open the Symbol
Specification dialog for the selected door
or doorway. For more information see
Symbol Specification Dialog on page 880.
Electrical
edit button for a
selected object from the Electrical library
category to open the Electrical Service
Specification dialog. See Electrical
If an electrical object is selected and the
Open Symbol
clicking it will open the Symbol
Specification dialog for the selected
electrical object. See Symbol Specification
Dialog on page 880.

edit button for a
selected object from the Images library
category to open the Image
Terrain
Objects added to the Terrain library category
are group selected and saved. Once they are
in the plan, they become separate terrain
objects which can be individually selected
and opened for specification. Terrain features
will open the Terrain Feature
Specification dialog; roads will open the
Road Specification dialog; and so on.
See The Terrain Library on page 499.
Textures
Textures can be applied to materials; they
cannot, however, be opened for specification.
See Plan Materials Dialog on page 601.
Windows
category to open the Window

Specification dialog. See Window
If a window is selected and the Open
Symbol
edit button displays, clicking it
will open the Symbol Specification
dialog for the selected window. See Symbol
Furniture, Fixtures,
Geometric Shapes,
Hardware, & Millwork
edit button for a
selected object from any of these library
categories to open a specification dialog
referred to as the Library Object
Specification dialog. See Library Object
If a library object from any of these
categories is selected and the Open Symbol
edit button displays, clicking it will open
the Symbol Specification dialog for the
selected library object. See Symbol

edit button for a
selected object from the Window library

Library objects are counted in a Material
List. The Material List will not reflect any
changes to the size or materials of any fixture
or furniture object. It will list the library
object as well as any comments added to the
Components dialog for a library object.
593
Libraries
Images

The Fixture Specification; Furniture
Specification; Geometric Shapes
Specification; Hardware
Specification; and Millwork
Specification dialogs all display the same
options and are referred to in documentation
as the Library Object Specification
dialog. The actual name of the dialog that
displays is determined by the type of object

currently opened opened for specification.
For example, selecting a library object from
the Furniture (Ext) library category and
edit button
will open the Furniture Specification
dialog.
General Tab
1
2
4
3
1 Name - Displays the name of the

selected object.
2 Specification - Define size and height

above the floor of the object.
Height - Enter the height for the object.

Width - Enter the width of the object.
Depth - Enter the depth of the object.
Floor to Bottom - Enter the distance from

the floor to the bottom of the object. A value
of zero will cause the object rest on the floor.
Follow Terrain - Check this box if you
would like the object to follow the surface of
the terrain when it is placed outside a
building.
3 Reset - Click to reset to the original,

unmodified size.
594
4 A preview of the library object displays

here and updates with changes.
5 Show Color - Check this box to display

the preview of the object in full color.
Options Tab
Libraries
1 Reverse Symbol - Select the check box
to reverse the library object. This would

turn a right-hand refrigerator into a left-hand
refrigerator, etc.
Label Tab
Fill Tab
Style Tab on page 743.
Layer Tab
Materials Tab
595
596
Chapter 24:
Materials
The objects used in Chief Architect have a

variety of 3D properties. These objects walls, windows, doors, cabinets, roof planes,
lot perimeters etc. - can have materials
assigned to them so that they look realistic in
render views. These materials can also be
used to generate materials lists that can help
with cost estimations.
Designing with objects that look correct in
3D and calculate properly in a material list
requires that you use realistic material
definitions, and apply them appropriately to
objects in your plan.
Chief Architect comes with many materials
that are ready for use. From siding, roofing,
flooring, masonry, tile, and paneling, to road
surfaces, grass, water, and wood materials,
Chief Architect has materials for every
application, inside and out. If you cannot find
a material that suits your needs, you can
customize the materials provided or create
your own.
Learning how to create, manage, apply, and

edit materials will help you save time and
add that professional touch to your designs.
Redefining only the visual properties of
a material may create unexpected
results. For example, changing the image of
a brick material to represent siding will not
cause the material to be considered as siding
during material calculations.
Chapter Contents
Creating Materials
Mapping Patterns and Textures
Managing Plan Materials
Applying Materials
Materials Tab
Editing Materials
Define Material Dialog
Material Defaults Dialog
597
Materials
Chapter Overview
Creating Materials
Chief Architect comes with many materials
which are ready for use. They are found in
the Materials category of the Library
Browser. See Materials on page 580. If you
cannot find a suitable material, edit an
existing material to meet your needs or create
your own new material. See Editing
Materials on page 604.
Once you have a suitable material, it can be
applied to objects. See Applying Materials
on page 602.
Note: Adding a material to a plan is not the
same as adding it to the library. If you would
like a new material to be available for use in
other plans, it should be added to the library.
From the Library Browser

A material can be created from and added
directly to the Library Browser, making it
available for use in other plans. See The
In the library directory pane of the Library
Browser, select a library, folder, or sub-folder
within the Materials library, and select
Library> New> Material from the main
menu. This option is also available as New>
Material through the contextual menu.
When accessed using either of these
methods, the Define Material dialog
opens, allowing you to define a new material.
See Define Material Dialog on page 605.
Once you have defined the new material, it
can be found in the Library Browser within
the library, folder, or sub-folder which was
initially selected.
598
Converting
Textures to Materials
An entire folder of textures can be
converted into a library of materials.
When converted the folder of materials will
assume the same file structure in the
Materials category of the Library Browser.
Select 3D> Materials> Convert Texture to
Materials
and then browse to a folder of
textures on your computer.
Converting
Material.dat files
Material.dat files, which were used in prior
versions of Chief Architect, can be converted
to materials and saved directly to the Library
Browser by selecting 3D> Materials>
Convert Material Definition (.dat) Files
from the menu.
Converting Material
Template Plans
Select 3D> Materials> Create Plan
Materials Library to create a library
of materials based on the materials being
used in the current plan. This is useful for
converting material template plans, a
common way to store material definitions in
prior versions of Chief Architect, into a
materials library. This command will create a
new library in the Materials category using
the same name as the template plan. Adding
materials to the library individually allows
you to store the material within the existing
directory structure.
Patterns and textures are assigned origins,

which determine where the pattern or texture
begins on an X/Y axis. By default, this origin
is 0,0. You can control where a pattern or
texture begins by specifying a new origin.
The origin for patterns can be set on the
Pattern tab of the Define Material dialog.
The origin for textures can be set on the
Texture tab of the Define Material dialog.
A texture or pattern origin is a property of the
material and not of the object the material is
assigned to. When an object is moved, the
pattern or texture will maintain its absolute
position and may not look right. It is a good
idea to assign pattern or texture origins only
after the position of the object has been
finalized.
To determine origin coordinates on the

horizontal plane, place your cursor over the
origin location in floor plan view. When the
pointer is in the position you would like to
establish as the material origin, take note of
the coordinates that display in the Status Bar.
To determine origin coordinates on the
vertical plane, place your cursor over the
origin location in a cross section/elevation
view.
The display of coordinates in the Status Bar
is turned on and off on the Appearance panel
of the Preferences dialog. See Appearance
Panel on page 94.
Once you have taken note of the new origin
coordinates, they must be entered on either
the Pattern or Texture tab of the Define
Material dialog. See Pattern Tab on page
610 and Texture Tab on page 611.
If you have multiple objects using the

same material, they will all share the
same origin. Duplicate materials can be created if you would like different origins specified for the same texture or pattern.
Determining the Origin

Before a new origin can be determined, the
display of coordinates in the status bar must
be enabled. See Appearance Panel on page
94.
599
Materials
Textures and patterns are mapped to

materials, which are saved in the library.
These materials are then assigned to objects.
Whether a pattern or a texture displays on a
given object depends on the type of view.
Patterns appear in vector views. Textures
appear in render and raytrace views.
The pointers current coordinates display in the status bar

All materials that come with Chief Architect are stored in the Library Browser.
You can also create your own materials and
save them in the Library Browser. The Library
Browser offers complete material editing
capabilities. See Editing Materials on page
604.
600
The Plan Materials dialog is used to

manage only those materials that are
used in the current plan. To access the Plan
Materials dialog, select 3D> Materials>
Plan Materials
Plan Materials Dialog

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 This is the list of materials in your plan.
Select a material to display it in the

previews to the right.
If a material is marked **in use**, it is being

used by an object in your plan or is defined
as a default material for one or more objects
in your plan.
2 Click OK to close the dialog and save

any changes; Cancel to delete any
changes made during this session in the
dialog and return to the current view; or Help
for more information about materials.
3 Edit opens the Define Material
dialog for the selected material.
4 New opens the Define Material

dialog to create a new material.
5 Copy creates a copy of the selected
material and opens the Define

Material dialog where changes to the
6 Purge removes unused materials from

your plan.
7 Delete removes a material from the list
of plan materials. If the material is

being used in the model, it cannot be deleted.
8 Click Add to Library to add the
selected material to the Library

Browser, making it available for use in other
plans. See Adding to the Library on page
568.
The preview window on top shows how the
material will display in 3D views.
The bottom preview shows how the texture
will display in render views. If the words
"No Texture" appear, either a texture has not
been assigned to the material or the texture
file could not be found on your system. In
either case, the material will display in
render views as a solid color.
copied material can be made.
601
Materials
Applying Materials
Materials are stored in the Materials library
in the Library Browser. They can be applied
to objects in a variety of ways.
Object Specification Dialog

Select an object (or a group of similar
objects) and click the Open Object
edit
button to open the specification dialog for
that object. On the Material tab you can
specify material assignments for the
components that make up that object. When
a material has been assigned, its appearance
will update in the preview. See Materials
Tab on page 603.
From the Library Browser

Materials can be applied directly from the
library in 3D Views. Select a material from
the Library Browser and notice that the
pointer changes (
) to indicate that the
selected material is ready to be applied to an
object using the Material Painter application
method.
Material Painter
The Material Painter
tool allows
you to apply a new material to a
selected object in a 3D or render view. Click
the Material Painter
button to open the
Select Library Object dialog and select a
material. Once a material has been selected,

the pointer will change (
) to indicate that
the selected material is ready to be applied to
602
an object. Click the surface of an object to

apply that material. The current material will
be reassigned for the selected object only.
You can continue to apply the material to the
surfaces of other objects.
Using the Material Painter
tool is the
equivalent of opening the selected object for
specification and changing the material for
the selected object component. For example,
if you select a material and then select the
counter top surface on a cabinet, this is the
same as opening the Cabinet
Specification dialog; clicking on the
Material tab; selecting the countertop item in
the list of materials; clicking the Select
Material button; and applying a new
material to the countertop.
Material Eyedropper
The Material Eyedropper tool allows
you to load the material assigned to an
existing object and apply that material to
other objects.
In a 3D view, click the Material Eyedropper
button and then click on the surface
of an object to load its material assignment.
The pointer then changes (
) to indicate
that the material is ready to be applied to
another object. The material can then be
applied to other objects using the Material
Painter
tool. You can continue to apply
the material to the surfaces of other objects.
Viewing Materials
Viewing Materials
Materials do not display in vector views. See
Vector View Tools on page 624. Materials
will display in render views and raytrace
views. See Render View Tools on page
652.
If you recieve an error message when
creating render views your plan might
contain two textures of the same name or
textures that did not originally come with the
program.
To resolve this, find the original texture file

named in the error message and copy it
(while recreating its path) into the "Old
Textures" folder. The next time Chief
Architect 9.0 is opened it will find the
missing file and correctly display the texture.
The specification dialogs for most objects

include a Materials tab. The Materials tab is
where materials are assigned to the selected

object.
603
Materials
Materials Tab
The Materials tab shown above is used to

assign materials to an object. The tree on the
left contains the components of the selected
object that can be assigned materials. Some
objects may only have a single component
while some more complex objects may have
many.
Some components will contain additional
sub-components. The contained items will
appear separately in the components tree.
Select a component in the tree to assign

a new material to it.
2 The two boxes on the right display the
color, pattern and the texture of the

material that has been assigned to the
selected component. If "No Texture" appears

in the preview window, either the material
has no texture assigned to it or the texture file
could not be found on the system.
3 Click Library Material to open the
Select Library Object dialog.

Select a material and click OK to assign that
material to the selected component. See The
Select Library Object Dialog on page 572.
Click Plan Material to open the Select

Material dialog and select a material from
those already being used in your plan. See
Managing Plan Materials on page 600.
Select OK to close the dialog and return to
the active view.
Editing Materials
If you cannot find a material that suits your
needs, you can create a new material or edit
an existing one. Applying a different material
to an object is not the same as editing an
existing material. See Applying Materials
on page 602.
When a material is applied from the library
to an object in a plan, a copy of that material
is being made and saved with the plan. If you
access the Define Material dialog through
a menu or object specification dialog , your
edits will affect that material wherever it is
found within that plan. Other objects in that
plan which use that material will be affected;
but objects outside of the current plan will be
unaffected.
If you access the Define Material dialog
for a particular material directly from the
Library Browser, your edits will affect all
objects in other plans that use that library
604
material. In most cases, it is preferable to

create a new material and save it to the
Library Browser instead of editing an
existing material.
Plan Materials
Click the Plan Materials
button to open
the Plan Material dialog for the current
plan. Select a material and click the Edit,
Copy, or New button to open the Define
Material dialog. You can choose to add a
newly defined material to the library from
the Plan Material dialog by selecting it and
clicking the Add to Library button. See
Plan Materials Dialog on page 601.
Adjust Material Definition

This tool is useful for changing plan
materials directly from a 3D view.
Click the Adjust Material Definition

button and then click on any surface in a 3D
or render view to modify that surfaces currently assigned material in the Define
Material dialog. Changing the material definition with this tool affects all objects in the
current plan that are using that material.
Library Browser
Using the contextual menu
Editing a material in the Define Material

dialog when accessed from the Library
Browser will change all instances of that
material in other plans. See Define Material
Dialog on page 605.

Select a material from the Plan Materials
dialog and click Edit, New, or Copy to open
the Define Material dialog for that
material. The Define Material dialog can
also be accessed by right-clicking on any
material located in an unlocked library in the
Library Browser and selecting Open... from
the contextual menu or Library> Open....
You can also create a new material from
scratch by selecting 3D> Materials> Create
Material...
605
Materials
Select a material from an unlocked library in

the directory view of the Library Browser
and select Library> Open from the main
menu to open the Define Material dialog
for that material. You can also right-click a
material in the Library Browser and select
Open from the contextual menu to open the
Define Material dialog.
General Tab
1
2
3
4
The information on the General tab varies

from one material to the next.
1 The name of the material appears here.
In this field you can redefine the name

of the material being edited. If you rename
the material it does not create a new material,
it redefines the existing material.
If the material you are adding has the same
name as a material already in the library, the
materials with the shared name will be
appended "_X" where X is the number of
materials with the same name.
2 Material Color - The current color of
the material appears. This color

displays in 3D views and in render views if
no texture has been selected. Click on the
color box to open the Windows Color dialog
and select a new color. See Color Chooser
Dialog on page 128.
606
3 Line Color - The color of the pattern
lines appears here. Click in the box to

open the Color dialog and to select a new
line color. Lines are only used with patterns
in 3D views and are not used in render views.
See Color Chooser Dialog on page 128.
4 Shading Contrast - Use the slider bar
to specify the amount of contrast

between surfaces at different angles to each
other in 3D views. The farther to the right the
slide bar is set, the more contrast you will
see. This setting has no effect on render
views.
The following is a picture showing the same
curved wall view with three different
contrasts (combined using a separate
graphics program). Notice how the lowest
contrast at the top appears almost flat, while
the highest contrast on the bottom is sharp.
Low Contrast
Normal
Contrast
High
Contrast
Length - Define a length dimension for the

pattern. This value typically refers to the
Pattern across the screen view.
Thickness - Specify a thickness for a
material such as Tile. This information does
not typically effect the display of the material
but is used for material list calculations.
Depth - Specify a depth for the material such
as brick. This information does not typically
effect the display of the material but is used
for material list calculations.
5 This area displays a preview of how the

material will look in vector views. It
updates as you change the material
definition.
Joint Width - Enter a value for joint width

between pieces of the material. This does not
draw the joint any wider, but the information
is used by the program when counting pieces
of tile or brick.
6 Type - This is the list of material types
Mortar Width - Enter a value for the mortar

joints in a brick or block pattern. This does
not draw the mortar any wider, but the
information is used by the program when
counting pieces of bricks or block.
7 Depending on the Type selected,
Overlap amt - Enter the amount that a

material overlaps itself, such as lap siding.
defined by the program. Some types are

associated with patterns. A materials Type
defines how it is calculated in the Material
List. See Types on page 608.
several additional edit boxes may
appear in the dialog.
Height - Define a height dimension for the
material. This value may be restricted to a
ratio of another dimension. When applied to
a strip or siding pattern, this number
represents the width of the material.
Note: the Height - Overlap Amount =
Exposure of the material.
Note: the Height - Overlap Amount =

Exposure of the material.
Angle - Certain patterns may be rotated to
display with a different orientation.
Grouping - With a Strip type, grouping is
used to describe the repeat of the pattern
across the width of the material. i.e. A 13"
wide siding with an overlap amount of 1"
and a grouping of 3 calculates materials
607
Materials
Size - Some patterns are defined by relative

size. Enter a number here. The number does
not have any units, it is more like a scaling
factor.
based on a 12" coverage and a repeat line

pattern of 4".
DXF Code - This field holds up to five
characters that display at the end of the layer
names used when exporting a 3D DXF file.
Types
Every material is classified by Type. The
Type defines how the material is calculated
in the Material List. Some Types are
associated with patterns but not every Type is
associated with a 3D pattern. Not every Type
is calculated in the Material List.
Following are the available Types and their
characteristics:
Framing - These types are used by the
program to estimate stick framing quantities
if they are applied to the main layer of a wall
layer definition.
Brick - Displays a typical brick course
pattern. The height and length of the brick
can be specified. This can be specified for
anything using this type of layout, including
plywood with staggered joints. The Material
List calculates the number of bricks (by
height and length) which fit on the total
surface area of the defined object. For a wall,
the surface area is used. For a full masonry
wall with two layers of brick, be sure to
define the wall as having two layers to get
the right count. You can define the mortar
width which enables the program to do an
accurate count of bricks.
Strip - Shows a parallel line pattern in 3D
views. The height, or separation of the lines,
and the angle can be specified. The Material
List calculates lineal footage based on the
height of the strip and the surface area being
covered. Overlap is subtracted from the
608
height to get the exposure of the material.

Grouping can be used to model a material
that has a repeating pattern across its width.
Sheet - Sheets do not show a pattern. If a
sheet material is applied to a wall or floor
surface, the Material List calculates the
number of sheets needed. If a sheet material
is applied to a library object such as chair, the
Material List does not calculate it.
Gap - This does not show a pattern. Specify
gap to a material to create an Air Gap
between materials as in the case of a wall
layer definition. This would be the same as
defining no material at all. This does not go
to the Material List.
Area - This does not generate a pattern. The
Material List calculates surface area. In the
case of walls it is the area of the vertical
surfaces.
Volume - This does not generate a pattern.
The Material List calculates cubic feet.
Concrete - This does not generate a pattern.
The Material List calculates cubic yards or
cubic meters. When you apply this to a floor
platform, the thickness is defined as four
inches, by default.
Tile - This produces a grid-like tile pattern.
The Material List calculates the number of
units based on the total surface area, exactly
as for bricks.
Shingles - This produces a pattern similar to
the brick pattern, but you are able to define
an overlap amount. The Material List
calculates the number of shingles required to
cover the surface area.
Flooring - This does not produce a pattern.
The Material List calculates the total surface
area.
Shakes - This produces a pattern to represent

wood shingles. The Material List calculates
the number of shingles required to cover the
surface area.
style. Custom materials are calculated in the

Material List as area.
Herringbone - This produces a herringbone

pattern. Height and width are restricted to a
2:1 ratio. The Material List calculates the
number of units required to cover the surface
area.
Octagon - This produces a tile pattern of
octagons and small squares. The size
specified is the size of the small squares
between the octagons. The octagon resizes
proportionally. The Material List calculates
the number of square and octagonal tiles
required to complete the pattern.
Materials
Hexagon - This produces a hexagon pattern.

The Material List calculates the number of
units required to cover the area of the object.
Parquet - This produces a parquet wood
floor pattern of small squares. The Material
List calculates the required number of
parquet units.
Textured - This produces a pattern similar to
stucco. The density or frequency of the dots
is definable. The Material List does not
calculate this material Type.
Earth - This produces a 2D hatch that
represents earth in cross section view. The
Material List does not calculate this material
Type.
Stars - This produces a star pattern. The
Material List does not calculate this material
Type.
Custom - If you select a pattern type from a
PAT file, the materials is automatically
defined as Custom regardless of the pattern
609
Pattern Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2D surface patterns can be used as a visual

tool in 3D views. When a cross section/
elevation view or overview is generated, the
pattern helps define what material is being
used. Patterns that are associated with Types
are used by the program to generate accurate
take-off quantities for the Material List.
Patterns are not used in render views.
1 The name of the material appears in this

field.
2 A preview of the material as it appears
in a vector view displays here. The

pattern is not used in render views. The
preview will update as changes are made.
3 Pattern Type - Select a Chief Architect
pattern from the pull down list. The

Pattern Type defines how the material is
calculated in the Material List. Only Chief
Architect Pattern Types are figured in the
610
Material List. If a PAT file has been defined,

the pattern type is listed as Custom.
4 Pattern File - The name of the current

pattern file is listed here.
Click Browse to select a Pattern File that has

not been defined by Chief Architect. Pattern
files (files with a .pat extension) can come
from a variety of sources and can be saved on
your hard drive. Once you have selected a
pattern file, use the Entries menu to pick a
hatch pattern from the file.
5 Entries - Pattern files are text files that
define more than one hatch pattern.

Individual patterns are defined with names
that appear in the Entries list. Use the menu
to select an entry from the pattern file. The
selected pattern appears in the preview
window.
6 Scale - Rescale the pattern if necessary.
If the pattern displays as black, the

pattern repeats too often and the number in
this field should be increased.
7 Origin - Enter coordinates to specify
where the pattern begins in vector

views. See Mapping Patterns and Textures
on page 599.
Texture Tab
1
2
3
4
Materials
Textures can be applied to materials and

affect how a material appears in render view.
Transparency information contained on the
alpha channel of a texture will be used in
render view. Textures do not show up in any
other 3D view and do not affect the Material
List.
1 The name of the selected material

displays, and can be renamed here if
desired. Renaming a material does not create
a new material it just changes the name of an
existing material.
2 The selected texture displays here.
3 Texture File - Displays the path and
file name of the selected texture. It is

recommended that your texture files reside in
the Textures subdirectory of the Chief
Architect directory, but textures can be stored
anywhere on your system.
Click the Browse button to select a texture
for the material. This accesses the Textures
folder in the Library Browser.
4 Ratio - Adjust the ratio or scaling of the
selected texture. The values are in

inches (or mm).
In this example, the bitmap shown is mapped

to a 42" x 42 area.
611
If the surface being rendered is larger than

this ratio, the surface will have "tiles" that are
42" x 42" of the assigned bitmap. If it is
smaller, only a portion of the texture is
shown.
Select the Stretch to Fit check box to have
the texture image stretch to cover each
surface it is applied to.
Note: Changing the scale or selecting Stretch
to Fit can cause textures to appear distorted if
they are mapped to a surface using a different aspect ratio than they were originally created with.
5 Set a new Origin, if needed, so the
texture displays correctly on surfaces in

render views. See Mapping Patterns and
Textures on page 599.
6 Rotate Angle - Allows you to specify
how the texture is rotated on the

surface.
7 Set Color Using Texture - Selects a
color to represent the material in 3D

views that are not rendered. The program
will average the color of all pixels.
Render Tab
1
2
3
5
The Render tab controls how the material

appears in render views and exported VRML
files. The preview window displays the
material as it is rendered on a panel that is
approximately 3 x 6. As any of the render
properties are changed, the preview will
612
update to show how the new material would

look in a render view.

2 Use the radio buttons to select the
Simple or Advanced editing options.
The Simple options are displayed on this tab

and the Advanced options, below.
The Ambient and Diffuse settings are used

together to modify a materials brightness.
3 Brightness - Controls how bright the
1 Ambient - Controls how bright the
material appears. It can be used to get

the desired appearance relative to other
materials being used.
material appears when only ambient

light is present.
4 Shininess - Controls the sheen of the

material when it is rendered with a
point or spot light source on it. Shiny
materials appear to have a bright white spot
on them which simulates reflection of light.
material appears when illuminated by a

light source.
the material. Most materials are set to

Opaque, but Partial can be used to simulate a
glass surface that you can see through.
Specifying materials with transparency can
slow down rendering but it should have a
minimal effect.
Render Tab - Advanced
The Specular and Shininess settings are used

together to modify a materials shininess.
3 Specular - Controls how bright the
material appears when illuminated by a

positional light source. It simulates the
reflection of light off a surface.
4 Shininess - Controls how shiny the
surface appears when illuminated by a

positional light source. It must be used
together with the specular value to simulate
light being reflected from a surface. Adjust
the shininess value to control the size of the
reflected highlight on a surface.
5 Emissive - Controls how bright a
1
2
3
4
5
6
Advanced options provide more control over
the appearance of the rendered material. If
any Advanced value is changed, the Render
tab displays the Advanced options when you
edit that material. You can always change
back to the Simple settings.
material appears without regard to the

current scenes lighting. It can be used to
simulate surfaces that are glowing with their
own light, such as the glass on a light fixture.
6 Transp - Controls the transparency
range from completely opaque to

completely transparent.
You should note that the material Render

Properties are dependent on the Render
settings in the Preferences dialog and the
lights that have been placed in the model.
To get proper lighting effects on an object,
use at least one point or spot light. For these
highlights to appear on large flat surfaces,
select the Use Triangles and the Use Multi-
613
Materials
5 Transparency - Controls the opacity of
2 Diffuse - Controls how bright the
pass options on the Render panel of the

Preferences dialog.
Raytrace Tab
For information about the Raytrace tab, see
Raytrace Tab on page 677.
Material Defaults Dialog

selecting Edit> Default Settings
.
Expand the Materials category in the tree
view; select General Materials; and click
the Edit... button to display the Material
Defaults dialog.
This dialog functions similarly to the

Material tabs found on the specification
dialogs of objects throughout the program.
See Materials Tab on page 603.
Select an item from the list on the left. Click
the Library Material button or either of the
preview boxes to open the Select Library
Object dialog; or, click the Plan Material
button to open the Select Material dialog.
Not every object has default materials
defined before being placed in a plan. For
example, stairs do not have a default setup
and so do not have default materials. Specify
the materials for the stair components in the
Material Defaults dialog.
Once you create a stairway, you can open the
Stair Specification dialog and change its
materials.
614
Chapter 25:
Zoom & View Tools
Chapter Overview
There are also a number of ways to pan

across the screen, shifting the visible part of
the plan slightly while still maintaining the
same zoom factor.
Multiple views of one or more open files can
be arranged and managed using the view
tools.
Chapter Contents
Zoom Tools
Undo Zoom
Fill Window
Panning the Display
Window Menu Tools
Cascade
Tiling Views
Arrange Icons
Swapping Views
Aerial View
Closing Views
Zoom &
View Tools
The zoom tools are used to position the view.

To work on a specific area, it may be
necessary to zoom in so that the entire screen
is filled by only a single room. At other times
the entire plan may need to be visible.
Zoom Tools
Zoom - This is used to magnify any
given area on the plan or 3D view.
Click the Zoom
tool, then click and hold
down the left mouse button while dragging a
box around an area on screen. When you
release the mouse, the selected area expands
to fill the screen. When the zoom is done,

whatever tool was active prior to selecting
the Zoom
tool automatically becomes
active again. If another zoom is needed, click
the Zoom
tool again.
615
Zooming With the

Mouse Wheel
Zoom In - Click to zoom in to the

screen center by a factor of two.
Zoom Out - Click to zoom out from
the screen center by a factor of two.
Undo Zoom - Reverse the last zoom.
Fill Window - Place all the visible
items on the screen.
Pan Window - Move the display without changing the zoom factor
Using the mouse wheel will allow

you to zoom in and out in plan and
3D views. Scrolling the mouse
wheel one click up or down zooms in or out,
centering on the location of your pointer and
changing the zoom by a factor of about 10%.
Depending on the configuration of your
mouse, it may be necessary to hold down the
control key while turning the mouse wheel.
Undo Zoom
Click the Undo Zoom
button to
reverse the last zoom operation. Undo
Zoom
only works to undo the most
recent zoom.
Note: Undo
zoom.
and Redo
do not affect
Zoom and Undo Zoom are also available

through the contextual menu.
Fill Window
Click the Fill Window
button or
press the F6 key to view everything on

screen that is visible. If you are zoomed in so
close that only a portion of the view displays
on screen, clicking the Fill Window
button will zoom back so that the entire view
fits on the screen. If you are zoomed out so
far that the entire view is smaller than the
Panning the Display

There are four ways to pan the display
without changing the zoom factor.
616
screen, clicking Fill Window

will zoom
closer so that the entire view fills the screen.
Fill Window
is sensitive to whether the
drawing sheet is displayed: when it is, Fill
Window
sheet.
will zoom to the edges of the
Window Menu Tools
Using the Scroll Bars

One method is to use the scroll bars on the
right and bottom edges of the window.
Using the Mouse

The mouse can be used in combination with
the Ctrl key to pan the display.
To pan the display using the mouse:
Drag the square button in the bar itself in

order to pan a larger distance.
Click the end arrow keys on the scroll

bars to shift the display in 12" increments.
The 12" increment is defined in the Plan

Defaults dialog under Inches Scrolled
by Arrow Key. See Plan Defaults on
page 91.
Using the Arrow Keys

In floor plan view, the arrow keys on the
keyboard work exactly like clicking the
arrows on the scroll bar. They shift the
display according to the number of inches
defined in the Plan Defaults dialog.
Hold down the Ctrl key and click on a

point in the view.
2.
Drag the pointer to a new location and

release the mouse. The display shifts in
proportion with the movement of the
pointer.
Using the Pan Window Tool

The Pan Window
tool works much like
the mouse and Ctrl key method, above.
To use the Pan Window tool:
1.
Click the Pan Window

tool. The
pointer will change ( ) to indicate that
the pan window tool is active.
2.
Click on a point in the view, drag the

pointer, and release the mouse. The display shifts in proportion with the pointer
movement.
Window Menu Tools

Click the Window Menu Tools
Click Cascade
to cascade all open
views. See Cascade on page 618.
Click Tile Horizontally
or Tile
Vertically
to tile all open views. See
Tiling Views on page 619.
Click Arrange Icons
to arrange all open
views which are currently minimized. See
Arrange Icons on page 620.
617
Zoom &
View Tools
1.
Click Next Window

to switch to the
next open view. See Swapping Views on
page 620.
Click Aerial View

to open the aerial
view window. See Aerial View on page
621.
Click Previous Window

to switch to the
previous open view. See Swapping Views
on page 620.
Cascade
Select Window> Cascade to cascade
all open views. Cascade is a Windows
function which allows you to organize open
618
windows in a cascading pattern. Click on any

visible edge to activate that window.
Tiling Views
Chief Architect produces a 3D model as you

draw in floor plan view, which can be
demonstrated by tiling the floor plan view
next to a vector or render view:
1.
Draw a basic wall perimeter and create a

Render Full Camera
2.
3.
view.
Select Window> Tile Vertically

or
press Shift + F6 on the keyboard to display both views in a vertical orientation.
Select Window> Tile Horizontally
to display both views in a horizontal orientation.
you make are reflected in the render camera

view as well.
To end window tiling, click the Maximize
button in the upper right corner of any of the
open views.
Tiling is useful for copying objects, details,
or architectural symbols from one plan to
another. Select the object(s) to be copied;
click the Copy
edit button; activate
another view; and click to place the copied
object.
To activate floor plan view, click anywhere

in the title bar or view. Note that any changes
619
Zoom &
View Tools
Tiling Views
Arrange Icons
Arrange Icons is a Windows function
used when several active windows have been
minimized. Select Window> Arrange Icons
to align the minimized title bars in a row at
the bottom of the working desktop. You can

then click the minimized title bars to
reactivate them or use them for swapping and
closing views.
Swapping Views
There are several ways to swap views.
The Swap Views

button toggles
between the current view and the view
which was current before it.
Selecting Window> Swap Views or

pressing F7 functions the same as the
Swap Views
620
button.
Pressing the Ctrl + Tab keys allows you to

cycle through all open views.
Selecting Window> Next Window

or Window> Previous Window
allows you to cycle through all open
views in whichever order you prefer.
At the bottom of the Window menu is a

list of all the views currently open. Each
view is identified by its name, followed
by what type of view it is. Select one to
go directly to that view.
Aerial View
Aerial View
the right side of the window; but it can be
moved to any other edge or into the middle
of the window while pressing the Ctrl key.
Zoom &
View Tools
In floor plan view, select Window>

Aerial View to open the Aerial View
window. This window is initially docked on
The border that displays in the aerial view window (in red for
illustrative purposes) coincides with the floor plan view display.
The aerial view window facilitates zooming

and panning of the floor plan view window.
The aerial view has no scroll bars or
maximize button, and always stays on top of
other windows.
The aerial view window can be moved

and resized.
Use the right mouse button to drag the

aerial view marquee within the aerial
view window. The floor plan view will
update accordingly.
No matter which tool is active, when you

move the pointer to the aerial view win-
621
dow and drag a marquee, the floor plan

view will zoom in on that area.
Since the aerial view remains on top and
always displays the entire plan, it is easy to
maintain overall perspective while zooming
into different areas without continually using
the Fill Window
button.
When you are finished, close the aerial view

as you would any other window.
The display of objects in the aerial view is
controlled in the Aerial View layer set. Select
Tools> Display Options...
to open the
Layer Display Options dialog. Choose
Aerial View Set from the Layer Set menu

and edit its layers as needed.
Closing Views
Choose File> Close or click the
at the top
right corner of the window to close any view
when it is no longer needed. If the view is
622
still needed, swap to a different view without

closing the current views.
Chapter 26:
Vector Views
Chapter Overview
Render views are similar to vector views and

overviews, but are much more photo
realistic. They are covered in their own
chapter, Render Views on page 649.
From the 3D model, you can define and
create cross section/elevation views that
detail the structure of the model. Cross
section/elevation views can be saved and the
program will update them as the model is
edited. The automatic updating of cross
section/elevation views can save a lot of time
once your drawings have been sent to layout.
Chapter Contents
Vector View Tools

3D Tools
Creating Camera Views
Editing a Camera in 3D Views
Editing a Camera in Floor Plan View
Creating Overviews
Displaying Overviews
Displaying 3D Views
Zooming in Vector Views
Speeding up 3D View Generation
Editing Objects in 3D Views
Delete 3D Surface
Saving 3D Views
Walkthroughs
Editing Cross Section/Elevation Views
Saving Cross Section/Elevation Cameras
Displaying Cross Section/Elevation Views
Camera Specification Dialog
Cross Section/Elevation Camera
Specification
Camera Defaults
3D Settings
623
Vector
Views
A vector is a line, which is the fundamental

component of all Vector Views. Instead of
displaying textures and images on the
surfaces of objects, as in render views, vector
views display patterns and colors. This
makes them ideal for use in layout drawings.
Eliminating textures and images often helps
speed up view generation too.
Vector View Tools

Click the Vector View Tools parent
Camera Views
The Vector Full Camera tool creates a
multi-floor view of the 3D model. It
can be used to create both interior and
exterior perspectives. The Vector Full
Camera is a good tool for displaying
cathedral ceilings, roofs, lofts, stairwell
openings, or any other variation in floor and
ceiling levels.
The Vector Floor Camera creates a
vector view of the current floor only.
This camera does not show anything above
the ceiling or below the floor. It is faster to
generate than a vector full camera view,
because less of the model is calculated.
Checking Restrict Camera to Room in the
3D Settings dialog will limit the view to
the current room. See 3D Settings on page
645.
A Render Full Camera
view can be
created from a vector camera view. See
Render Views From Vector Views on page
652.
Both theVector Full Camera and the Vector
Floor Camera can be moved, rotated,
raised, lowered or have their line of sight
adjusted. The default camera height, angle
and move increment are defined in the
Camera Defaults dialog. See Creating
Camera Views on page 626.
624
Overviews
The Vector Full Overview creates an
isometric drawing of the entire model,
including all floors, ceilings, and the roof.
All surfaces such as roofs, walls, and ceilings
can be removed from the view in order to see
into the model.
The Vector Floor Overview creates a
single floor isometric drawing of the
current floor without a roof or ceiling. All
lines are in true length but the drawing
cannot be scaled.
The Framing Overview creates an
isometric drawing of the framing in the
model. Framing must be built before
generating a framing overview. Framing
overviews include all floors, walls, roof
framing and foundations. Overviews can be
rotated and viewed from any angle.
Overviews can be printed directly; sent to
the layout; or sent to a CAD detail. As a
CAD detail, the lines defining any part of the
view can be edited. If sent to the layout, the
lines defining any part of the view can be
modified or deleted in the layout using the
Edit Layout
tool. See Creating
Cross Section/Elevation Views

A Cross Section/Elevation view
displays all floors of the model. It can
be used to create both interior and exterior
elevation views. If the cross section/
elevation view is created outside the
structure looking toward it, the result is an
exterior elevation. Nothing has been cut. If
3D Tools
the view is created inside the structure, or

passes through any of the structure, a cross
section is created.
The Backclipped Cross Section tool
includes only the objects between the
starting point and stopping point of the cross
section line.
The Wall Elevation tool creates a
single floor, single room elevation. It
creates a 2D projection of a vertical face,
such as a wall, and the objects between the

wall and the camera. It is used primarily for
applications such as kitchen elevations or
bath elevations. It does not cut through walls
or show the ceiling, flooring, or roof. The
view can be taken at any angle to the wall(s).
For information about cross section/elevation
views, see Creating Cross Section/Elevation
Views on page 637.
Choose from the

architectural tool
buttons that allow placement of Cabinets,
Doors, Electrical Objects, Windows,
Fireplaces, and Corner Trim in 3D views.
Click the Adjust Material Definition

button and click on a surface to open the
Define Material dialog for that surface.
See Define Material Dialog on page 605.
Click the Edit Camera button to edit

properties of the current render camera,
such as field of view. See Camera
The Material Painter allows you to

redefine the texture of a material while
in a render view. See Editing Materials on
page 604.
Click the Save Camera button to save

the current camera in the plan. Saved
cameras can be re-opened for later use. See
Saving 3D Views on page 635.
Click the Delete View Surface button
and click on a surface to reveal the surfaces
behind it. Click the button again to restore
the most recently deleted surface.
Click the Toggle Low Detail button to
switch between High- and Low-Detail
display. Low-Detail allows quicker view
drawing, editing and camera movements. See
Low Detail Display on page 634.
Click the Material Eyedropper button

then click on a surface to load the eyedropper
with that surfaces material. Click on a
different surface to apply the loaded material
to the new surface. See Material
Eyedropper on page 602.
Click on the Render button in a vector
view to generate a render view of the scene.
In render views, click on the Adjust
Lights button to open the Light
Specification dialog for that view. See
Light Specification Dialog on page 669.
625
Vector
Views
3D Tools
In render views, click the Quality/Style

Setting parent button to adjust view quality,
lighting and style.
In render views, click the Raytrace
button to open the Raytrace Options
dialog and produce a raytrace view of the
scene. See Creating a Raytrace View on
page 673.
Click on the Walkthrough Recording
Tools parent button to record scenes for a
walkthrough of your plan. See
Click on the Play Walkthrough button

to play the walkthrough of your plan.
Toggle off the Grid Snaps button to
allow for greater precision when
editing in 3D views.
Click the Export Picture button to
save the current screen image to disk as
a .bmp, .jpg, or .png file. See Exporting
Picture Files on page 828.
Click the Print Image button to print
the current screen image. See Print
Image Dialog on page 902.
Creating Camera Views

Both the Vector Full Camera
tool and
the Vector Floor Camera

tool are used
in the same way. The results vary depending
on which tool is used.
To create a vector camera view:

1.
In floor plan view, click the Vector Full

Camera
era
2.
Line of
Sight
(drag)
Camera
(click)
626
child button. The pointer will
change to a camera ( ) with a crosshair

marking the position of the pointer.
Focal
Point
(release)
FOV Indicators
or the Vector Floor Cam-
Click and drag a line to define the perspective.

Where your line begins is the cameras
position.
The line that you drag will define the
direction the camera is pointed.
The end of the line is the focal point of
the view, the point around which the
camera will rotate.
By default the field of view is 45
degrees which is similar to what the
human eye sees or a 50mm camera
lens.
3.
4.
When you release the mouse button, a

view will generate in a new window.
Click the Swap Views
button to
return to the floor plan view. A camera
symbol displays in floor plan view.
Tile a 3D view and the floor plan view

and use the camera movement tools to
you can see how they effect the camera.

The camera functions available as both
vector and render tools operate in a similar
fashion. Once these views are created, there
are many ways to manipulate the camera
location, focal point, and line of site to adjust
the view on-screen.
Orbiting the camera rotates the camera about

the focal point.
Camera movement is controlled in

incremental steps from either the toolbar or
with keyboard strokes. The distance or
increment the camera will move are defined
in the Camera Defaults dialog. See Camera Defaults on page 643.
Orbit Camera Left - Rotates the camera to the left about the focal point.
Whether the movements are entered from the

toolbar or the keyboard, the tools provide the
ability to pivot the camera in any direction,
move it orthogonally to the line of sight and
rotate the camera around its focal point.
Camera Orbit Tools

Click the Camera Orbit Tools parent
button to access these child tools.
Orbit Camera Downward - Rotates

the camera down about the focal point.
The camera will not rotate below the vertical
line going down from the focal point.
Orbit Camera Upward - Rotates the
camera up about the focal point. The
camera will not rotate past the vertical line
going up from the focal point.
Move Camera In - Moves the position
of the camera closer to the focal point
along the line of sight. The camera will not
rotate past the focal point using this tool.
Move Camera Out - Moves the position of the camera away from the focal
point along the line of sight.
Camera Tilt Tools

Click the Camera Tilt Tools parent
Tilting keeps the camera in one place and
627
Vector
Views
Each time you move the camera, the view is

redrawn to reflect the camera movement. If
you are using either the toolbar or keyboard
to move the camera, and you have a large
distance to move you can hold down the Shift
key as you click a button or hit the keys on
the keyboard. This will suppress the redraw
of the view until the Shift key is released.
Orbit Camera Right - Rotates the

camera to the right about the focal
point.
pivots the camera about its vertical or

horizontal axis. This movement is similar to
tilting your head up and down or turning it
side-to-side.
Tilt Camera Left - Turns the camera
toward the left while staying in the
same location.
Tilt Camera Right - Turns the camera
toward the right while staying in the
same location.
Tilt Camera Upward - Tilts the camera upward while keeping it in the same
location. The camera will not tilt beyond the
vertical position.
Tilt Camera Downward - Tilts the
camera downward while keeping it in
the same location. The camera will not tilt
beyond the vertical position.
Camera Move Tools

Click the Camera Move Tools parent
These tools relocate the camera, while
keeping the direction of the field of view in
the same place.
Move Camera Forward - Moves the
camera and the focal point forward.
Move Camera Back - Moves the camera and the focal point back.
Move Camera Left - Moves the camera and the focal point to the left in a
line perpendicular to the line of sight.
Move Camera Right - Moves the cam-
628
era and the focal point to the right in a line

perpendicular to the line of sight.
Move Camera Up - Moves the camera
and the focal point up.
Move Camera Down -Moves the camera and the focal point down.
Keyboard Camera Movements

Camera movement in vector views and
render views can be controlled using the
keyboard as well as the toolbars.
F - Move forward (camera views only).
B - Move backward (camera views only).
U - Move up (camera views only).
D - Move down (camera views only).
L - Move left (camera views only).
R - Move right (camera views only).
I - Moves inward along the line of sight
(camera views and overviews).

O - Move outward along the line of sight
(camera views and overviews).

S - Camera spins about focal point until
another key is hit. Hitting the S again will

reverse the direction of the spin. This is
available only in render camera views.
Hitting the Esc key stops the spin.
Left or Right Arrow - Orbits the camera to
the left or right about its focal point. Pressing
this key works in overviews as well.
Up or Down Arrow - Orbits the camera up
or down about its focal point. Pressing this
key works in overviews as well.

Return to floor plan view without closing the
vector view or render view. In Select
When you activate the window related to the

camera, it will reflect the changes.
Objects
The position of the camera is related to the

model. When the camera is outside of a
building it is relative to the terrain and will
follow the terrain as you move the camera.
When you are inside a building, the camera
will go up and down stairs automatically and
bounce off walls.
mode, select the camera object.
When the camera is selected you can:
Drag the camera to relocate it, while

maintaining the focal point.
Drag the center handle to reposition the

camera, the focal point, and line of sight.
Drag the focal point to reposition it,

while maintaining the cameras position.
If the camera is on an upper floor and you

move the camera outside of the building, the
camera will remain at the same height
relative to the floor it was created on.
Creating Overviews
Click the Vector Floor Overview
Vector Full Overview
; or Vector Fram-
adjusted. See Displaying Overviews on

page 631.
ing Overview
button to generate an
overview in a new window.
To create an overview
Overviews are always created at the same

angle. Once generated, the view angle can be
1.
Click the View Tools

Tools
or the Render
parent button.
629
Vector
Views
Camera edit
handles
2.
Click the Floor Overview

Overview
; Full
; or Framing Overview
child button.
3.
An overview will immediately generate

in a new window.
Full Overview
Click the Full Overview
button to
generate an isometric drawing of the entire
building. The overview will begin to
generate immediately.
To see a different floor, return to floor plan

view and make the other floor current before
generating the floor overview.
Framing Overview
Click the Framing Overview
button to
generate an isometric drawing of the entire
building, displaying only framing and
foundation. Framing must be built before
generating this view, otherwise the view will
be empty. The overview will begin to
generate immediately.
Floor Overview
Floor Overview
is an effective
troubleshooting tool, since it can isolate each
floor for review. Click the Floor Overview
button to create an isometric drawing of
the current floor. The ceiling is removed,
giving a 3D view of that floor plan.
630
parent
button and then the View Angle

child
button to display the View Angle dialog.
The dialog displays a picture of the exterior
walls of the current floor as seen from the
current view angle. Select the check boxes or
move the slide bars to adjust the view. The
picture will update to show all the
adjustments being made. When satisfied,
click OK to have the isometric drawing of
the model adjusted to match.
With the View Angle
tool, an isometric
drawing can be generated from any
conceivable angle; From the Top (birds eye
view) to an Elevation (straight on view) to
the Bottom (worms eye view), and
anywhere in between.
View Angle Dialog

1
2
3
4
5
1 Select the check boxes to view model

from Elevation, Top or Bottom.
2 Use the slide bar to adjust the height to

view the model from.
3 Use the slide bar to adjust how close the

view is to the model.
4 Use the slide bar to view the model

from a different direction.
5 Select the check boxes to view the

model from each side.
Note: An Elevation created by turning the

view is different from that created using the
camera. The
CAD tools are not accessible in this type of
view.
6 The picture of single floor changes to

show results.
View Direction Tools

These toolbar buttons are present in
Overviews only.
View Angle - Click to open the View
Angle dialog.
Front View - Click for front view.
Back View - Click for back view.
Top View - Click for top view.
Bottom View - Click for bottom view.

Left Side View - Click for left side
view.
631
Vector
Views
Click the View Direction Tools
Right Side View - Click for right side

view.
Restore Original View - Click to

restore the original view position.
Displaying 3D Views
Up to eight total 3D view windows can be
open with one floor plan view. A camera
symbol displays in floor plan view for each
3D view window that is open. The views are
named and numbered sequentially in the
order they were created. The camera symbol
is an on-screen reference, and does not print.
Note: An object will not show in 3D views if
its 3D display has been turned off in the

From a vector view or overview, select
Tools> Display Options
to open
Color Off/On
Click the Color toggle button to
control the display of color in all views
except render views. You can set defaults to
specify whether cross section/elevations;
vector views;and vector overviews will be
generated with colors turned on in the
Options tab of the 3D Settings dialog.
The display of colors may or may not make a
view easier to understand. Experiment to see
what works for you, then set your default for
each view.
Colors are used in vector views to represent
the use of different materials. The colors can
632
be printed if you have a color printer, or can

appear as shades of gray on a black and white
printer. If you have assigned a bitmap to
represent the texture of a material in render
views, the program can sample that bitmap
and define an approximate color to use in all
vector views.
Selecting Tools> Color Off
turns off
color for the current window. The window
will become black and white. Solid fills are
black, and all lines are black. The
background remains as defined in the
Preferences dialog.
When you go to print a view, the color toggle
sets the initial value of the Color or Shaded
check box in the Print dialog.
If Color is on and the current printer has
color capabilities Color will be checked in
the Print dialog. If the printer is black and
white, Shaded will be checked in the Print
dialog.
If Color is off, the check box will not be
selected.
Changing Materials
in 3D Views
From a vector view or overview, there are a
number of ways to change the way that
objects display. See Editing Materials on
page 604.

The Zoom
tools are available for all
vector camera views and vector overviews.
Although the zoom tools function normally
in vector views, the results may be affected
by perspective distortion.
Vector cameras are created with a field of
view of 45 degrees. This setting can not be
changed as it can for render views.
Clicking the Zoom In
, Zoom Out
or Fill Window
buttons does not change
the field of view, but will redraw the view
zoomed or out, or adjusted as you want. You
can use the Zoom tools to simulate Field of
View settings.
Speeding up 3D View Generation

Depending on the speed of your processor
and the memory of your computer, a 3D view
should generate in a few seconds or less.
When you have a large, complex model with
a lot of interior detail; many objects; or hatch
petterns with many lines, it may take a few
minutes to generate a vector view of
everything in the model.
subdivided into vertical panels - and View

Panel Factor 2 determines how many
surfaces are contained in each vertical panel.
While this process is happening, look at the

information window in the toolbar. It will
indicate that surface sorting is occurring.
There are several ways to speed up the
generation time of your views.
Suppress Objects in 3D Views
Vector views are drawn using an adaptive

method that saves time by dividing the
screen into horizontal and vertical panels.
The Options tab of the 3D Settings dialog
has two tuning factors that allow you to
adjust the way the adaptive method works.
The display of objects in 3D views can be

turned on or off by layer in the Layer
Display Options dialog. If done from a 3D
view, any changes will only affect that view;
3D settings done from floor plan view,
however, will affect every new 3D view that
you create.
If you are using many patterns, turning them
off may have a big effect on drawing speed.
You can turn patterns off until you are ready
to print or send to layout.
The View Panel Factor 1 determines how

many surfaces are drawn for each horizontal
panel. Each horizontal panel is then
633
Vector
Views
Change View Panel Factors
The default settings are reasonable for most

computers, but with some experimentation
you can find the optimal solution for each
plan on your computer.
Halt Generation with Esc Key

Using the Esc key, you can interrupt the
modeling process at any point and display
the incomplete model as is. This is
particularly helpful when you just need to
reorient a model on the screen for a specific
angle or view.
The Esc option allows you to place the view
quickly, then use Window> Refresh Display
to redraw the model with all 3D Faces intact.
You may use this option with elevation
views, vector views, render views and

overviews.
Low Detail Display

You may also want to switch to Low
Detail view. Low Detail suppresses
patterns and draws 3D approximations of
some objects, allowing for a quicker screen
redraw time and quicker camera movement.
See Low Detail Display on page 634.
Editing Objects in 3D Views

Objects can be created and edited in 3D
views as well as floor plan view.
Creating Objects in 3D Views

You can place windows, doors, cabinets,
electrical objects, corner trim, and most
library objects directly into 3D views. To do
this, select the appropriate tool from the
toolbar and click in the 3D view. You can
then edit the objects size and placement.
Selecting Objects in 3D Views

Most objects can be selected and edited in
3D views. Select Edit> Select Objects
and click on the surface of an object. Edit
handles will appear which can be used to
move and resize the object. Double-click on
the object or click the Open Object
edit
button to display the specification dialog for
the object.
When you select an object, handles and a
handle surface display. The handle surface is
a rectangle around the perimeter of the object
634
which indicates the overall height and either

the width or depth of the object.
Normally, five handles display. The top and
bottom handles raise and lower the heights of
the object's top and bottom. Side handles
move the object's sides in and out, changing
its width or depth. The middle handle moves
the object horizontally or vertically, changing
its position but not its size.
All moving or resizing is in the plane of the
handle surface. By default, movement is
restricted to one inch or 10 mm increments;
but this restriction can be set to custom
increments in the Plan Defaults dialog and
toggled off and on using the Grid Snaps
button. Unrestricted positioning can also
enabled by holding down the Ctrl key while
moving an object. You cannot move an
object directly towards or away from the
camera, it will be restricted to the handle
surface plane.
If the program does not allow you to move or
resize the object due to an obstruction, select
Delete 3D Surface
the object, hold down the Ctrl key, and move

or resize it as desired.
If Furniture/Fixture Resize Enable is
cleared in the Plan Defaults dialog, only a
single handle displays for furniture and
stand-alone fixtures and appliances. In this
case the object can only be moved.
Dimension lines are displayed to help you
resize an object and determine its height.
These are more visible when the color is
turned off.
Due to movement restrictions, cross section/

elevation views are sometimes more suitable
for editing objects than vector views or
overviews.
When several floor plan views and 3D views
display, changes made in one automatically
display in the others. If you have major
changes to make to your plan, it is faster to
make them with as few windows as possible
displaying that plan.
Delete 3D Surface
Individual surfaces can be temporarily
removed from any 3D view by clicking
the Delete View Surface
button and then
clicking on a surface. Surfaces removed in
one view will be removed in all 3D views,
but are not permanently removed from the
model. Continue clicking on surfaces to
remove them, then select another tool to end
the process.
The Delete View Surface

button can
also be used to restore surfaces. Click in the
locations of removed surfaces up to 32 times
to restore previous removals one at a time.
All surfaces can be restored by selecting
Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
or by
exiting the 3D view and reopening it.
Saving 3D Views
Saving 3D Camera Views
You can save any vector or render
camera view either by opening the
camera for specification in floor plan view
and clicking the Save button in the Camera
Specification dialog; or by clicking the
Save Camera
open.
button when the view is
635
Vector
Views
All views except overviews can be saved.

Once a camera or cross section/elevation
view is saved, it can be named. This name
will appear as a label with the camera object
in floor plan view. It will also be listed in the
Project Browser, where all saved views can
be accessed. See Project Browser on page
78.
Saving Cross
Section/Elevation Views
If CAD objects have been added to a cross

section/elevation view, the program prompts
you to save the view before closing.
To save a cross section/elevation view
Click the Save Camera

within the view to save it.
Select a cross section/elevation camera in

floor plan view; click the Open Object
Activate Camera
If a vector camera view, render camera view,

or cross section/elevation view has not been
saved, it will display in floor plan view using
the same color designated for moving
objects. See Colors Panel on page 96.
Cameras and views that have been saved will
display using the color specified for the
Cameras, Inactive layer in the Layer
Display Options dialog. See Layer
Activating Views
edit button.
Double-click on the camera symbol in

floor plan view.
To activate a saved cross section/elevation view

Select the camera symbol and click the
Activate Camera
button from
edit button to open the Camera

Specification dialog; and click the
Save button.
Select the camera symbol and click the
edit button.
Select the camera symbol; open it for

specification; and click Activate.
Double-click on the camera symbol in

floor plan view.
Note: If the symbols for your saved cameras
do not appear in floor plan view, make sure
that Display Inactive Views is checked in
the 3D Settings dialog, then refresh the
display. If the camera still does not show, it
does not exist.
Remove 3D
Choose 3D> Remove 3D from floor
plan view to close all 3D views
associated with the current plan file and
remove unsaved 3D data from memory.
Any views saved with the plan will be closed
but not deleted.
To activate a saved camera:
Select the camera symbol; open it for

specification, and click Activate in the
Camera Specification dialog.
Walkthroughs
Any vector camera view or overview can be
used to record a walkthrough. Walkthroughs
636
are recorded as .avi files. See

Cross Section/Elevation View
Wall Elevation View
Wall Elevation
same way:
1.
views and
views are created in the
Click either Wall Elevation
or
buttons
and the pointer changes to a
with
crosshairs on the icon marking the position of the pointer.
2.
Click in the floor plan view at the spot

where the section is to be cut, or elevation is to be viewed from.
3.
Drag in the direction of the line of sight,

perpendicular to the cut line, and release
the mouse button. The cut line is the line
that you would traditionally think of as
the section line in a floor plan drawing.
When you release the mouse button the view

generates in a new window.
views and
Wall Elevation
views are accurate 2D
elevations of the 3D model. Although they
display objects at different depths from the
camera, all lines in the view are in the same
plane when sent to layout.
Cross section/elevations and wall elevations
have the editing capabilities found in other
3D views, and can be further enhanced with
the CAD tools. They are the traditional,
orthogonal views that are used in drafting.
Lines and dimensions are true lengths, which
makes it easy to see accurate spatial
relationships of the 3D objects created in the
model.
If a cross section line does not cut through a
3D object and the object is within the back
clipped distance, such as a window shown in
elevation, the object retains its 3D definition.
3D objects can be selected, moved, stretched,
or otherwise modified in a cross section/
elevation view. The 3D model is updated in
all views.
637
Vector
Views
Cross section/elevations and wall elevations

can be calculated at any allowed wall angle.
This makes it possible to create a true length
elevation of any wall, provided that the wall
is on an allowed angle.
Wall Elevations
Always drag the Wall Elevation
camera
perpendicularly toward the wall to be
viewed. The length of the line is not
important.
Editing Cross Section/Elevation Views

Cross section/elevation views are actual 2D
representation of the 3D model and are very
versatile. Architectural objects in the model
can be edited directly from the view. See
Editing Objects in 3D Views on page 634.
If dimensions are set to locate an object, such
as cabinets or windows, these objects will be
located in cross section/elevation views, as
well. If the 3D model is edited in another
view, the cross section view will update.
CAD objects can be added to cross section/
elevation views that will save with the view.
Any added objects will need to be manually
replaced, however, if the model changes and
the view needs to be updated. Note that when
editing CAD objects in a cross section/
elevation, the 3D model may obscure the
CAD snapping grid.
You can convert everything in a cross
section/elevation view to CAD objects,
disassociating it from the 3D model
completely. This allows for the most editing
capabilities, but requires that all manual
work be redone if the 3D model changes and
the view needs updating.
Adding CAD to Cross Section/

Elevation Views
The CAD tools are accessible in cross
section/elevation views. Any CAD
638
information added to a cross section or

elevation view, including dimensions and
text, is stored in that view when it is saved.
Any added CAD objects are superimposed
on the view and have no affect on the 3D
model itself. If CAD objects are added to a
cross section/elevation view, the program
will prompt you to save the window before
closing the cross section/elevation or floor
plan view.
Cross sections and elevations are the only 3D
views which can have information added
using the 2D CAD tools. They can be fully
annotated and dimensioned and then printed
to scale. A cross section/elevation printed
directly from the view can be printed to
multiple pages if the scale requires it.
Auto-Detailing
To save time, use the Auto-Detailing
tool to give you a head-start in
detailing your cross section/elevation
view. The auto-detailer automatically creates
CAD objects for commonly detailed aspects
of a view. To activate the auto-detailer, select
CAD> Autodetail...
Dialog on page 166. Specify which

rooms should have insulation below the
floor or above the ceiling. See Room
Foundation Walls - Closed polylines are

created for foundation walls and footings
Slabs - Closed polylines with a concrete

pattern are created for slabs where the
slab intersects the front clipping plane.
For more information on editing CAD

objects, including closed polylines, see
When the auto-detailing tool is used, CAD
objects are placed on the default CAD layer.
Using the auto-detailing tool twice will result
in two copies of the same CAD objects.
Wall Details - Add closed CAD

polylines for each wall layer to a crosssection or elevation view where the wall
intersects the viewing plane. The polyline
fill defaults to the fill specified in the
Wall Specification dialog. See The
Wall Specification Dialog on page 166.
Insulation - Specify which wall layers in
should appear as insulation when autodetailed. See The Wall Specification
CAD Detail From View

When you have finished modifying
your cross section view, use the CAD
Detail From View
tool to
generate a CAD detail of the view. This
converts all 3D lines to CAD lines, and
copies them with any added items to a CAD
Detail. This tool can be used in any view
except render or raytrace views. CAD details
created from a view will not update when the
model is changed. See CAD Detail from
View on page 760.

Views created using the Cross Section/Elevation
, Wall Elevation
, and

tools can be
edited with the CAD tools. Once CAD
objects are added to a cross section/elevation
view, the program prompts you to save the

view before closing. They are linked to the
model and will update when changes are
made. Any CAD objects added to a cross
section/elevation view are stored with the
639
Vector
Views
The auto-detailer creates CAD objects for the

following:
view. These views are saved individually as

part of the plan file.
To save a cross section/elevation view:
In floor plan view, select the camera symbol; click the Open Object
edit
button to display the Cross Section/
Elevation Camera Specification
dialog; and click the Save Camera button.
From within the view, click the Save
To open a saved cross section/elevation:
Camera
button.
Close the cross section/elevation view.

Click on Yes when prompted to save the
view.
Note: Any time objects are added to a cross
section/elevation view, the program prompts
you to save the view before closing.
Saved cross section/elevation camera

symbols display in floor plan view, even if
the view is not open.
Select the camera symbol in floor plan

view and click the Activate Camera
edit button.
Double-click the camera symbol using

the Select Objects
tool.
Select the camera symbol; open it to display the Camera Specification dialog; and click the Activate button.
Double-click the cross section/elevation

view in the Project Browser. See Project
Browser on page 78.
Note: If the symbols for your saved cameras
do not display in floor plan view, be sure that
Display Inactive Cameras is checked in the
3D Settings dialog; then refresh the display. If the camera still does not show, the
view was not saved.
Displaying Cross Section/Elevation Views

The display of objects in cross section/
elevation views is controlled in the 3D
column of the Layer Display Options
dialog. See Displaying Objects on page
125.
640
To show framing in a cross section/elevation

view, framing must first be built in the Build
Framing dialog. See Framing on page
377.

The Camera Specification dialog is
accessible from Vector Full Camera
Open Object
and Render Camera

views. Select the
camera symbol that represents the cameras
location in floor plan view and click the
Camera Specification dialog.
This dialog is also accessible from 3D views

by clicking the Edit Camera
button.
4
Clip Surfaces Within - Specifies that the
camera does not display an object within this
distance.
Remove Wall Within - Removes the view of
walls within this distance of the camera.
1 Camera Name - The camera name
Both of these distances are measured as a

radius from the camera position.
2 Settings in the Wall and Surfaces
Check Unless Opening to display a wall

which is inside the Remove Wall Within
range if the camera is pointing through an
opening such as a door or window.
displays in floor plan view and is listed

in the Project Browser. See Project
Browser on page 78.
section determine the extent of the
camera view.
Check Default for any value to use the

default setting. See Camera Defaults on page
643.
641
Vector
Views
Use the Camera Specification dialog to

change settings for the selected camera view
only. Depending on the type of camera view
in use, not all of the settings may be editable.
In addition, some settings only affect some
types of views.
3 Settings in the Plan Display section
determine the cameras display in floor

plan view. For more information, see
Editing a Camera in Floor Plan View on
page 629.
Check Show Field of View Indicators to
display the field of view indicator for
cameras in floor plan view. You can also
change the FOV Indicator Length, which is
measured in plan inches.
Check Show Camera Focal Point to
display the cameras focal point in floor plan
view.
The Camera Symbol Size is measured in
plan inches.
643.
4 Click Save Camera to save this camera
view with the plan. The camera view

can be named and will appear in the Project
Browser. See Project Browser on page 78.
5 Settings in the Positioning section
determine the position and orientation

of the camera.
The Incremental Move Distance controls
how many inches the camera moves each
time you direct it to move right, left,
forwards or backwards. For interior views a
small number is good, but for exterior you
may want a larger increment.
The Incremental Rotate Angle defines how

many degrees the camera rotates each time
you direct it to. A setting of 90 degrees
would make one full rotation in four moves.
The Height Above Floor defines the height
that the camera is above the floor level for
the current floor.
The Field of View defines the cameras field
of vision in angular degrees. This is not
available for vector views.
The Tilt Angle determines the angle at
which the camera is tilted. The camera will
maintain its focal point and position in floor
plan view; however if the camera is tilted,
the focal point will be above or below the
current camera height. Tilt angles greater
than +/- 10 degrees may produce unexpected
results.
Specify the Camera Angle for the selected
camera. This is an absolute value. Entering a
value of 90 degrees will orient the camera to
the top of the screen.
Specify the X Position and Y Position for
the selected camera. These are absolute
coordinates. Specifying zero for both will
place the camera at the plans origin point
(0,0).
643.
Cross Section/Elevation Camera Specification

The Cross Section/Elevation Camera
Specification dialog is accessible from
642
, Wall Eleva-
tion
, and Backclipped Cross Section

views. Select the camera symbol that
Camera Defaults
represents the cameras location in floor plan

view and click the Open Object
edit
button to display the Cross Section/
Elevation Camera Specification
dialog.
in the Project Browser. See Project

Browser on page 78.

camera view.
Back clip after - Enter the distance in iches
from camera to backclip plane. If zero, no
clipping will occur.
1
2
determine the elevation of the camera.
3
4
Specify the X Position of the camera in

absolute coordinates.
Specify the Y Position of the camera in

absolute coordinates.
4 Click Save Camera to save this camera
Camera Name - The camera name

displays in floor plan view and is listed
view with the plan. The camera view

can be named and will appear in the Project
Browser. See Project Browser on page 78.
Camera Defaults
the menu or by double clicking the Render
Tools
parent button.
Vector
Views
The settings in the Camera Defaults

dialog define how the camera clips and
captures views, how it displays in floor plan
view, how the camera is positioned, and how
the camera moves.
643

camera view.
cameras in floor plan view. You can also

change the FOV Indicator Length, which is
Clip Surfaces Within - Specifies that the

camera does not display an object within this
distance.
Check Show Camera Focal Point to

display the cameras focal point in floor plan
view.
Remove Wall Within - Removes the view of

walls within this distance of the camera.
The Camera Symbol Size can be changed. It

is measured in plan inches.
Both of these distances are measured as a

radius from the camera position.
You can change the Clip Plane Indicator

Length which displays in floor plan view for
Check Unless Opening to display a wall

which is inside the Remove Wall Within
range if the camera is pointing through an
opening such as a door or window.
2 Settings in the Plan Display section
Views,
Views, and
Wall Elevation
Views. The length is
determine the cameras display in floor

plan view. For more information about how a
camera displays in floor plan view, see
Editing a Camera in Floor Plan View on
page 629.
Check Show Field of View Indicators to
display the field of view indicator for
644
Clip plane indicator in an elevation view
3D Settings
determine the position and orientation

of the camera.
The Incremental Move Distance controls
how many inches the camera moves each
time you direct it to move right, left,
forwards or backwards. For interior views a
small number is good, but for exterior you
may want a larger increment.
The Incremental Rotate Angle defines how
many degrees the camera rotates each time
you direct it to. A setting of 90 degrees
would make one full rotation in four moves.
The Height Above Floor defines the height

that the camera is above the floor level for
the current floor.
The Field of View defines the cameras field
of vision in angular degrees.
The Tilt Angle determines the angle at
which the camera is tilted. The camera will
maintain its focal point and position in floor
plan view, however if the camera is tilted, the
focal point will be above or below the current
camera height. Leaving this default value at
zero is recommended. Any tilt angles greater
than +/- 10 degrees may produce unexpected
results.
3D Settings
All 3D views are affected by settings in the
3D Settings dialog. 3D settings are not
global settings, they are saved with each plan
file.
Select 3D> 3D Settings
; or double-click
the Vector View Tools

parent button to
display the 3D Settings dialog.
Options Tab
5
7
11
2
4
6
8
Vector
Views
12
13
9
10
645
1 Start in Low Detail 3D Mode - Check
this box to create any camera in Low

Detail mode by default. See Low Detail
Display on page 634.
Restrict Camera to Room only

affects subsequently generated Vector
Floor Camera
Views. See Vector View
Tools on page 624.
Check this box to suppress the generation of
objects beyond the room containing the
camera. If checked, the view through a
doorway into another room shows only blank
space. Use this option to maximize computer
resources or to minimize file size when
creating a single room 3D Walkthrough
movie.
Unrestricted camera view.
3 Camera Bumps Off Walls - Uncheck
this box if you would like the camera to

move freely through walls.
4 Display Inactive Views only affects

saved Wall Elevation
and Cross
Section/Elevation
views. Choose this
option to show section and elevation cameras
in floor plan view. Active cameras display in
red; inactive cameras display in green and
can be reactivated. Inactive cameras can also
be selected for display in the Layer
Display Options
dialog. Saved
cameras are listed in the Project Browser.
5 Auto Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
Select the check box to automatically

rebuild floors and ceilings before a 3D view
or elevation is displayed.
6 Auto Rebuild Terrain - Check this
option to automatically rebuild terrain

to reflect recent changes before generating a
3D view. If this option is unchecked, you will
be prompted about whether or not to rebuild
the terrain.
7 Auto Remove 3D - Clear this check
Restrict Camera to Room is checked.
box to retain the 3D model in memory

when you are making changes to the model.
This can speed up the generation of
additional 3D views of the model, but may
slow down the speed of working in 2D.
8 Check Opaque Glass From Outside to
make the glass in windows and doors

opaque when seen from outside the house in
vector views.
69 View Panel Factors can adjust the
performance of vector views. Normally,

these values should not need changing;
however, you may be able to get modest
646
3D Settings
performance improvements by trying other

values. These panels have no effect on render
or raytrace views.
When a vector view is generated, the view is
first divided into panels. View panel factors
represent target numbers of surfaces to use in
defining each panel. A value of 10000 for
Factor 1 means that a total of 10,000 or more
surfaces will be collected to define each
panel vertically. A value of 2000 for Factor 2
means that 2,000 or more surfaces will be
collected to define panels horizontally.
Making these numbers larger will result in
fewer panels; making them smaller will
result in more panels. Adjusting these
numbers either too low or too high will cause
the time required to draw to increase.
When changing these values, turn on "Show
Screen Redraw Time" in the Preferences>
Appearance panel to see if a change
improves drawing speed. See Appearance
Panel on page 94.
12 Default Color Display has check
boxes for each type of vector view.

Select the check box to generate that view
type in color; or, clear the box to generate
that view type as a line drawing. A colored
view can always be changed to a line
drawing and vice versa by choosing
Options> Color Off/Color On.
13 The Scroll Bars check boxes control
the display of scroll bars along the right

side and bottom of each type of vector view.
Clear the check box to suppress the scroll bar
and yield more viewing area when using
smaller display windows.
When the scroll bars are suppressed, use the
keyboard arrow keys to scroll. To pan the
display, hold the key and drag the pointer
across the window. See Panning the
Display on page 616.
10 Framing Back Clip defines the back
clip for framing members in cross

section/elevation view. Framing must be
included in 3D views to see the effects of this
value. A zero value does not back clip at all.
11 Render View Options - Click and drag

Vector
Views
the slide bar to adjust these options.
Interior Ambient controls the overall light

when a render view is inside the model.
Daytime Ambient controls the overall light
when a render view is outside the model and
Sunlight Toggle is on.
Nighttime Ambient controls the overall
light when a render view outside the model
and the Sunlight Toggle is off.
647
Backdrop Tab
2
3
1 A preview of the selected backdrop

displays.
2 Click Select Backdrop to open the
Select Library Object dialog.

Browse the Backdrops library; select a
backdrop; and click OK.
3 Click Remove Backdrop to change the
backdrop to a solid color. The color

used is defined in the Background Color
section of this dialog.
4 Select the check boxes to specify in
what views the backdrop will display.
5 Render View Options can be used to
create spherical panoramic backdrops.

A spherical backdrop is created by placing
the selected backdrop onto a sphere that
surrounds your scene. The horizontal and
vertical angles control how far around the
sphere the backdrop is stretched.
648
Click on the color bar to change the

Background Color that displays when
a backdrop is not being used.
Creating Backdrops
New backdrops can be created using a
variety of graphic file formats. Backdrops
are automatically adjusted to fit the window
size, so they look best when they are created
with the same height to width proportions as
the window you are working in.
Scanned images from photographs or digital
photos can be used to create backdrops of a
specific building site.
See Images & Backdrops on page 657 and
Adding Materials to the Library on page
569.
Chapter 27:
Render Views
Chapter Overview
From a render view, you can create final and

raytrace views which appear even more
realistic.
Many objects can be placed and edited in
render views, just as they can in vector
views.
Render views can be saved with the plan for
use in layout and easy access to commonly
used interior and exterior views.
Chapter Contents
OpenGL and Hardware

Rendering Tools
Render View Tools
Glass House View
Low Detail
Preview vs. Final Render View
Using the Contextual Menu
Camera Movement
Field of View
Images & Backdrops
Materials In Render Views
Editing Objects in Render Views
Saving a Render View Picture
Printing a Render View
Rendering Tips and Tricks
Light Sources
Light Types
Defining Light Types
Adjusting Lights
Sun Angle Specification Dialog
Light Specification Dialog
Cross Section Slider Dialog
Render
Views
Render views are similar to vector views, but

have a more realistic appearance because
they display surfaces of objects using
textures and materials and can also calculate
light sources and generate shadows. The
render camera tools and the render overviews
function just like the vector camera and
vector overview tools.
649
OpenGL and Hardware

Chief Architect contains a built in, easy to
use rendering engine which makes use of
OpenGL rendering technology. OpenGL, the
standard for high-end 3D graphics, has the
advantage of good hardware support on most
video cards. With OpenGL, render views
should look the same on all computers
regardless of the graphics card being used.
The only difference is in the speed that it
takes to perform the rendering. It is highly

recommended that users have a graphics card
with OpenGL hardware acceleration, to take
full advantage of the rendering capabilities in
Chief Architect. For complex models, an
accelerated card generates quality renderings
in seconds that might otherwise take hours
with a non-accelerated card.
Rendering Tools
These tools are unique to the render view and
can accessed from the 3D and contextual
menus as well as the Quality/Style Settings
parent button.
The Adjust Lights option allows a
user to edit the current lights that are
being used in the render view. The lights are
displayed in a list for easy selecting. Interior
default lights in the list cannot be changed or
altered, but the default sun can be changed.
You can quickly adjust lights to get the
desired appearance in the render view. Use
the checkboxes to turn lights on and off.
Selecting a light and choosing "Adjust" in
the Adjust Lights dialog opens a dialog
box. If it is an added light, the dialog is the
Light Specification dialog. If you open a
Light Fixture, the dialog consists of the Render Data tab of the Electrical Service
Specification dialog. See Adjusting
Lights on page 666.
Click the Sunlight Toggle button to
turn on and off the light source that
represents the sun. This feature can be used
650
to simulate day vs. night exterior views. User

defined exterior lights are turned off in day
views and turned on in night views. See Sun
Angles on page 663.
Click the Final View button to
regenerate the render view based on the
Final View settings on the Render panel of
the Preferences dialog. See Preview vs.
Final Render View on page 654.
Click the Toggle Glass House button
to turn on/off Glass House mode. This
mode makes the scene semi-transparent, so
that you can examine the interior and exterior
of your structures simultaneously. See Glass
Click the Glass House Options button
to modify the settings for the Glass
House view, such as transparency level and
color. See Glass House View on page 653.
Click the Cross Section Slider button
to open the Cross Section Slider
dialog which allows you to adjust the cutting
Rendering Tools
Click the Raytrace button to Raytrace

the current render view. See
One unique feature of render views is
the ability to use the mouse to adjust
the camera. Select the Move Camera with
Mouse
parent button on the render
toolbar to open its child tools. See Camera
Movement on page 655.
Other 3D Tools
These tools are common to both the vector
and render views and overviews. They can
be either accessed from the render toolbar or
the menu.
Choose from the Camera Orbit,
Tilt and Move tools in the render toolbar to
adjust the camera view. See Editing a
Camera in 3D Views on page 627.
Select the Delete View Surface button

and then click on a surface in a 3D view to
remove it from the view; click the button
again to restore surfaces. See Delete 3D
Surface on page 635.
Click the Save Camera button to save
the current render camera in the plan.
Saved cameras can be re-opened for later
use. See Saving 3D Views on page 635.
Click the Adust Material Definition
button and select an object to display the
Define Material dialog. Changes made
here affect this material everywhere it
appears in the plan. See Define Material
Dialog on page 605.
The Material Painter allows you to
redefine the texture of a material while
in a render view. See Editing Materials on
page 604.
Choose from the

architectural tool
buttons that allow placement of Cabinets,
Doors, Electrical Objects, Windows, and
Corner Trim in render views.
The Material Eyedropper allows you

select an object with a material you wish to
use elsewhere and then click on another
object to apply that material to it. See
Material Eyedropper on page 602.
Click the Toggle Low Detail button to

switch between High- and Low-Detail
Modes. In Low-Detail Mode, the scene is
drawn quickly with less detail, allowing fast
editing and camera movement. See Low
Detail on page 653.
Click the Export Picture child button

to save the current screen image to disk
as a .bmp, .jpg, .png, .tif or .pcx file. See
Exporting Picture Files on page 828.
Unclick the Grid Snaps toggle button

to allow for greater precision when
editing in 3D.
Click the Print Image button to print

the current screen image. See Print
Image Dialog on page 902.
Click the Edit Camera button to edit
properties of the current view, such as
651
Render
Views
plane of a Rendered View. See Cross

Section Slider Dialog on page 672.
speed of movement or field of view. See

Camera Specification Dialog on page 641.
Click the Walkthrough Recording

Tools button to create a series of vector or
render views that serve as a tour of the model
when played back.
Render View Tools

Very little preparation needs to be done
to create a render view. Chief Architect
has default values for most surfaces and even
creates default light sources so that the
render view looks realistic when first
generated. For better render views, add or
adjust light sources and specify the materials
being rendered.
Create a render view from a floor plan view
using the Render Full Camera
child
button. Once selected, click and drag a
camera angle just like a vector view.
A render floor camera view can be created
similarly using the Render Floor Camera
child button. The render floor camera
view will only render one floor at a time,
reducing the number of surfaces to be
calculated and thus the rendering time.
Creat a glass house render camera view using
the Glass House Render Camera
child
button. See Glass House View on page
653.
Create a Render Full Overview
der Floor Overview
652
, Ren-
, or a Render
Framing Overview
by first clicking the
Render Tools
parent button and then
clicking the child tool. See Creating
Chief Architect renders the image based on
the render view Options on the Options tab
of the 3D Settings dialog. See 3D
Settings on page 645.
Render Views From

Vector Views
If a vector view is the active view, it can be
rendered by selecting 3D> Render, or by
selecting the Render
button from the
toolbar. Chief Architect renders the view
based on your Preview settings on the Render panel of the Preferences dialog.
Once an image is rendered, settings can be
adjusted, materials can be modified, and
perspectives can be moved. When you have
an image that you are satisfied with, select
3D> Final View
to render a final quality
image which can then be printed or saved.
See Preview vs. Final Render View on
page 654.
Glass House View
Glass House View

You can display a current render view
as a Glass House view by clicking the
Glass House Toggle
button on the render
toolbar. You can also create a glass house
view from floor plan view by clicking the
You can modify the settings for glass house

view clicking the Glass House Options
button to the Glass House Options
dialog.
Render Tools
parent button and
selecting the Glass House Render Camera
tool to click and drag a camera angle.
In glass house view, your render view is
drawn by making the surfaces in the scene
semi-transparent. This allows you to view
the spatial relationships between areas within
the house, and examine the interior and
exterior simultaenously.
Color - This allows you to specify which

color is used in glass house view.
Transparency - This allows you to specify
how transparent the surfaces are in glass
house view. For example, to create a
wireframe line drawing of your structure,
turn transparency to full and minimize line
thickness.
When positioning the camera or editing

in a render view, speed is often more
critical than visual quality. In these situations
the fastest display option is Low Detail. You
can switch between high and low detail
views by clicking the Low Detail
button.
When drawing in low detail, textures,

lighting, and smoothing are not used. The
model is also simplified by using
approximations for symbols, moldings, and
other objects. This allows you to quickly
establish camera location or perform 3D
editing.
653
Render
Views
Low Detail
Preview vs. Final Render View

A render view is first drawn using the Preview settings on the Render panel of the
Preferences dialog. By default, many
available options are turned off for the
preview which allows the rendering to
display much faster.
When you have finished making adjustments
in render view, select 3D> Final View
.
You will then apply the Final View settings
from the Render panel of the Preferences
dialog to your render view. This will create a
much higher quality image which is more
suitable for printing or saving as a .bmp,
.jpg, .png, .cif or .pcx file. It will usually
take significantly longer to generate the final
view than the preview. The render view will
revert back to the Preview settings as soon as
anything is changed within the view.
For faster rendering speed, but lowest
rendering quality, all options in Preview
settings should be turned off. To speed up the
render speed even further, you can switch to
Low Detail rendering mode, which will
which will draw a simplified version of your
scene witohut lighting. For the best rendering
quality, but slowest rendering speed, all

rendering options should be turned on in
Final View settings.
The rendering option that has the greatest
impact on rendering speed is the Show
Shadows option. It is recommended that you
dont use this feature unless you have
OpenGL hardware acceleration on your
video card.
When rendering shadows, a percentage
complete value displays on the status bar.
You can turn on the Show Shadows option at

any time using the Contextual menu. You
may adjust your Preview and Final View
settings to best fit the speed of your graphics
card and still give you satisfactory rendering
quality. See Render Panel on page 114.
To generate higher quality renderings
than can be created with the final view
settings, use the Raytrace
feature. See
Using the Contextual Menu

When in a render view,
click the right mouse
button to access the render
view contextual menu. In
most views the contextual
menu contains the same
tools as the Edit toolbar;
but in render views the
654
options are a mix of tool buttons and quick

toggles that allow you to override the settings
on the Render panel of the Preferences
dialog, or to access special render features.
Refresh, Nighttime, Low Detail, Raytrace,
Glass House, and Final View are all options
available from the toolbar.
Camera Movement
Selecting Smooth Edges, Smooth Faces, or

Show Shadows will enable or disable the
specific Render capability and generate a
new render view.
Changing a setting from the menu only
affects the current view, it does not affect the
settings in the Preferences dialog.
You also have the option to Raytrace from

this contextual menu. See Raytracing on
page 673.
Finally, you can toggle to and from the fast
Low Detail mode, or switch to the Glass
House mode. When in Glass House mode
you can also access and adjust the Glass
House Options from the contextual menu.
Camera Movement
In Floor Plan View

When a render view is active it is represented
in floor plan view with a camera object that
displays an "R" (for render). This camera
object clearly displays the focal point, field
of view, and camera angle. The camera
object can be selected and edited in floor
plan view. See Editing a Camera in Floor
Plan View on page 629.
In 3D Views
Render Full Camera
Views can be
edited in 3D just like Full Camera

Views. You can use the toolbar buttons and
the keyboard to move the camera in a render
view. See Editing a Camera in 3D Views
on page 627.
One unique feature of Render Full
Camera
Views is the ability to use
the mouse to adjust the camera. First click
the Move Camera with Mouse
parent
button then click the Mouse-Orbit Camera
, Mouse-Pan Camera
, the Mouse
Dolly Camera , or 3D Center Camera

On Point
child buttons. To use these
tools, left-click in the render view, hold down
the left mouse button, and drag the mouse
across the screen.
The Mouse-Orbit Camera
allows
you to rotate the camera around the
current camera center. You can also click in
the render view, move the mouse, and release
the mouse button to "throw" the view. Click
again in render view to stop the view from
rotating.
The Mouse-Pan Camera
allows
you to move the camera up, down, left
and right.
The Mouse Dolly Camera
allows
you to move the camera forward and
backward by moving the mouse up and
down. It also allows you to turn the camera
left and right in the same way.
The 3D Center Camera On Point
allows you to focus the camera at a
particular point in the scene. This also sets
the camera center so that future use of the
655
Render
Views
There are many different ways to adjust a

render cameras focal point, field of view,
and angle.
Mouse-Orbit tool will rotate around that

particular point. To use the 3D Center tool,
activate the tool and then click on any object

in the scene.
Field of View
The Field of View can be adjusted in render
views. In an active render view, click the
Edit Camera
button to open the
Camera Specification dialog. Change
the Field of View to the desired angle. See
Camera Specification Dialog on page 641.
The field of view can also be adjusted with
the mouse wheel while in render view, if
your mouse is equipped with one.
The Field of View option produces results

that are similar in appearance to zooming in
vector views. The Field of View does not
alter the cameras position, but instead
adjusts the angle of vision. A wider Field of
View makes the focal point appear further
away, as more of the image is included.
Materials In Render Views

A render view is similar to a vector view
except that the surfaces of objects are
displayed with textures (picture files) instead
of patterns. If you have not selected a texture
for a material or you have turned off the
display of textures, the surfaces will be
displayed using a solid color instead.
The display of surfaces, whether or not you
are using textures, is also influenced by the
render settings on the Render tab of the
Plan Material dialog. There you can adjust
the brightness, shininess, transparency, and
other material properties which will affect
the display of surfaces in render views.
Materials assigned to the surfaces of objects
help the object appear realistic in render
views and affect the generation of materials
lists. Each material has a texture assigned to
it. Textures are bitmap files which are used to
represent irregular surfaces of objects, such
656
as bricks, tile, wood, lawn, and carpet in

render views. Textures are assigned to
Materials and Materials are assigned to
objects. Materials are stored in the Library
Browser along with their assigned textures.
See Materials on page 580.
For more realistic render views, it is
important to use realistic textures and adjust
material properties correctly. Textures can be
mapped to objects for correct placement. See
Mapping Patterns and Textures on page
599.
The texture and render properties for
materials are defined in the Define
Material dialog. See Define Material
Dialog on page 605.
From a render view there are many ways to
change an objects appearance. See Editing
Materials on page 604.
Images & Backdrops
Images & Backdrops
Images
Images are very important for the appearance
of rendered views and VRML file export.
Images are bitmap files which represent
individual objects, such as trees, flowers,
cars, people, etc. They are marked in floor
plan view with a 2D Block and are visible in
vector views.
Backdrops
Backdrops are images which display in the
background of 3D views. Only one backdrop
can be used at a time. If a backdrop is not
applied, Chief Architect will apply a default
background color. Backdrops are selected
and removed on the Backdrop tab of the 3D
Settings dialog. The background color for
render views is also defined there. See
Creating Backdrops on page 648.
You can drag and drop a backdrop directly
into a render view from the Library Browser.
Select a backdrop from the upper pane of the
Library Browser, notice that the pointer
changes in render view (
) to indicate that
a backdrop is loaded for placement, and then
click in a render view to apply the selected
backdrop.
Spherical Backdrops
The render view allows a special type of
backdrop called a Spherical Panoramic
Backdrop. These options are used to have
the backdrop rotate as you move the render
view Camera.
To enable Spherical Panoramic Backdrops,
you can turn them on from the Backdrop tab
of the 3D Settings dialog. You can then
adjust how much the backdrop wraps around
the scene.
Adjusting the Horizontal Angle will
determine how many times the backdrop
should appear as you rotate in a full circle
from side-to-side. A value of 360 will cause
the backdrop to wrap around the scene once.
A value of 720 will cause it to wrap around
the scene twice. 180 will cause only half the
backdrop to wrap around the scene.
Adjusting the Vertical Angle will determine
how much the backdrop should stretch upand-down. To have the backdrop stretch from
the highest point in the sky to the lowest
point in the ground, use a value of 180. To
have the backdrop stretch from just below a
horizontal render to just above, use a smaller
value such as 100.
It takes a special camera or an image
processing program to generate spherical
panoramic backdrops. Some experimenting
with the images and the Angle values may be
necessary to achieve the desired results.
Render
Views
Hundreds of graphics files have been

included with Chief Architect. They are
categorized into three groups: Images,
Materials, and Backdrops. By using them,
you can create more realistic render views.
657
Plan Export
When transferring a plan to another
computer, or to another user, it is helpful to
have all of the Images, Textures, and
Backdrops used in the plan. The Plan
Export tool accessed through File> Export
> Entire Plan allows you to save the plan

and all associated images, textures, and
backdrops, into a single directory. For more
information see Exporting an Entire Plan
on page 84.
Editing Objects in Render Views

You have full editing functionality in a
render view, including the ability to add,
resize, move, group, ungroup, and delete
objects. See Editing Objects in 3D Views

on page 634.
Saving a Render View Picture

Render views may be saved as .bmp, .jpg, or
.png files.
To save a render view:
1.
Select File> Export> Picture or click

the Export Picture
button on the
render toolbar.
2.
The Export Picture File dialog displays with the current directory specified.
3.
Navigate to the desired directory before

saving the file.
4.
Use the file type drop-down to choose

which file type to save to.
5.
Give the file a name and click Save.
Once saved, a picture can be opened and

converted into many other formats using one
of numerous graphic programs. Picture files
can be sent to layout or utilized in word processing; desktop publishing; and web
development programs to create advertisements, brochures, etc.
The picture will be saved using the size
of the current window. You can maximize or minimize your render window to create a smaller or bigger picture.
Printing a Render View

Since render views are created from pixels
instead of lines, File> Print> Print Image
must be used to send them to the printer.
File> Print> Print Image is a special Chief
658
Architect function which prints the screen in

picture format. The entire view will print,
including images such as trees and textures.
The quality of your print image is affected by

your current window size and screen
resolution. To maximize the quality of your
printed image, generate it in full screen size
and use the maximum screen resolution.
If you want to save or print a picture

whose resolution is higher than your
screen, you can create the image using Raytracing. See Raytracing on page 673.
Faster Rendering
To improve rendering speed, consider
turning off the following options
Always Rebuild - This forces Chief
Architect to re-create the entire model for
each frame. For most video cards you will
want to turn this off, and turn Keep All
Surfaces on.
Keep All Surfaces - When Chief Architect
creates the 3D model, this option toggles
whether to only create surfaces facing you.
On most OpenGL-accelerated video cards, it
is faster to create the model with all surfaces
once, rather than re-create it every time the
camera position changes. For most scenarios
you will want to turn this on, and turn
Always Rebuild off.
Use Triangles - This determines whether or
not lights will illuminate the scene
accurately. Turning off this option will speed
up render times, but will result in large
objects (such as walls) appearing to be lit
incorrectly. When you are editing in a render
view, or when you have no lights, you

probably want to turn off Use Triangles.
Soft Shadows - Only used when Shadows
are turned on, this significantly slows down
the rendering speed. Only use this option for
final images, and consider Raytracing as an
alternative way to generate a high-quality
image.
H/W Backdrop - For some OpenGLaccelerated video cards, this option will
drastically increase you render speeds. When
turned on, this option uses the video card
OpenGL acceleration to draw the backdrop
instead of simply using software.
Use Optimizations - Many OpenGLaccelerated video cards are capable of
optimizing the view for subsequent
redraws. Use of this option will vary from
video card to video card.
In general, you should leave this option
turned on unless you are experiencing
crashes when rendering.
Smooth Edges - Only use this option for
final views, as this will slow down even the
fastest video card.
Show Shadows - This should only be used
for final views, unless you have an extremely
fast OpenGL-accelerated video card.
659
Render
Views
You can achieve significantly different

results in rendering speed or quality by
adjusting the following options in the
Render tab of the Preferences dialog. To
access this dialog go to Edit> Preferences>
Render.
In general, you should make sure you are

only using a minimum number of lights to
cast shadows.
Use Textures - Some older video cards will
significantly slow down using textures. Look
at your Render> Texture Filter settings:
Some video cards will perform significantly
faster using either Nearest or Linear texture
filters instead of using a mip-mapping filter.
In addition, the number of light sources in a
plan can drastically effect rendering speed,
especially if you are using shadows. Light
sources are added by selecting 3D> Add
Lights and can be removed by clicking on
the light source in floor plan view and
deleting it.
Higher Quality Rendering

Use Triangles - when you have lights in your
scene, triangles are used to make those lights
appear to illuminate objects properly.

Generally speaking the smaller you set your
Triangle Size, the slower the render, but the
higher-quality result you can achieve.
Texture Filters - Mip-mapping, though
slightly slower on older video cards, greatly
improves the appearance of scenes where
objects are far away.
Use Multipass - Necessary to display
transparent or semi-transparent surfaces in a
render view. This also improves the
appearance of lighting on textured surfaces.
Smooth Edges - Though slow, this can
significantly improve the quality of a final
view.
To generate a high-quality picture of
your scene, consider Raytracing. See
Light Sources
Lighting is extremely important for render
views, raytracing, and VRML file export.
Even small changes can have a large impact
on image quality.
In a render view, lighting calculations are
done on a room-by-room basis. The render
view uses only the lights in the room which
contains the camera. When the camera is
outside of a building the program normally
uses sunlight for lighting calculations. In this
case, all of the other lights are turned off.
It is possible to turn the sunlight off and to
have all the other exterior lights turned on to
simulate night time views. The sun can be
controlled like other light types.
660
The maximum number of light sources that

can be turned on in a room at the same time
is determined by your video card. See
Render Panel on page 114. If eight is your
maximum number of lights, the program will
only use the eight light sources closest to the
cameras position for its lighting
calculations. You can manually turn on and
off certain lights in order to get desired
lighting effects. See Adjusting Lights on
page 666 for more information.
Ambient Lights
Ambient light is additive to other lights in a
room or scene. Ambient light settings are
Light Types
controlled on the Options tab of the 3D

Settings dialog. Select 3D> 3D Settings...
to access the dialog. Here you can adjust
the ambient light settings, which affect the
overall brightness of a render view.
Interior Ambient controls the light when a
View is inside the model.
Daytime Ambient controls the light when
you are outside the model and the Sunlight
Toggle is on.
Nighttime Ambient controls the light when

you are outside the model and the Sunlight
Toggle is off.
Ambient light is used to simulate the way
that light bounces around a scene. Ambient
light approximates this by simply ensuring
that all objects are at least as bright as the
appropriate ambient value. To create a more
realistic model of how light bounces around
a scene, use Raytracing with Radiosity. See,
Light Types
Light Fixtures
Added Lights
Sunlight
Default Lights
Each individual light has a set of Rendering

properties that can be defined.
You can adjust a lights color, intensity,
attenuation (which affects how quickly the
light drops in intensity over distance),
whether it can cast shadows and whether the
light is on or off.
There are three possible types of light
sources that can be used to specify how a
light is calculated by the Renderer:
Parallel Light sources
Point Light sources
Spot Light sources.
See Defining Light Types on page 665.
Default Lights
If you create an interior render view and no
user defined lights exist, the program will
create a Default Light source within the
room. The Default Interior light acts like a
central point source.
It cannot be adjusted in any way. If you want
control over the light sources in your interior
render views, you must add a light to the
room that you are rendering by placing a
lighting fixture or by adding a light using
3D> Add Lights.
Default Sun Light

If you create an exterior render view, and no
Sun Angle exists, the program creates a
Default Sun Light. The default sun light can
be selected for specification from a render
view by selecting 3D> Adjust Lights.
If there are no other lights in the scene, you
will immediately get the suns Light
Specification dialog. If there are other
lights in the scene, but no sun angles, you can
edit the sun by selecting Default Sun from
661
Render
Views
In addition to the ambient light levels that are

specified in the 3D Settings dialog, there
are four additional ways that light sources
can be created for Render or Raytrace Views:
the list of available lights in the Adjust

Lights dialog. See Adjusting Lights on
page 666.
Select Adjust and the Light
Specification dialog will open.
The Light Specification dialog will have
many options grayed out. See Light
The Default Sun Light acts like a parallel
light source. For the Default Sun Light you
can specify:
Intensity
Color
Tilt Angle
Dir Angle
On
Casts Shadows
Soft Shadows
The Default Sun Light acts like a sun but its

location is not based on any real world
locations.
If you place a sun angle in floor plan view,
the default sun light can no longer be used as
a light source in exterior render views unless
the sun angles light is turned off. Sun angles
can be specified with Earth data to make
them much more realistic interpretations of
the Sun.
Light Fixtures
Electric symbols placed in floor plan view
that represent a Light Fixture may create
one or more light sources in Render and
Raytrace Views. The light type and
properties for each fixture can be modified
by selecting the fixture, clicking the Open
662
Object
edit button, and opening the
Electrical Service Specification
dialog to the Render Data tab. See

Electrical Service Specification Dialog on
page 437.
Use the "Light" drop-down to choose which
of the fixture lights you want to edit. You can
then specify the Light Type - (parallel, point,
or spot), the Color, Intensity, and adjust the
Offsets to determine the light position
relative to the fixture.
Offset From Base controls how far the light
source is relative to the position of the fixture
base. The fixture base is determined by the
surface that it is attached to, (i.e. wall, floor,
or ceiling).
Offset in X/Offset in Y are only available
when you are not editing a wall-mounted
fixture. These allow you to position the light
relative to the center of the fixture, along the
floor/ceiling.
Offset up Wall/Offset Along Wall are only
available when you are editing a wallmounted fixture. These allow you to set the
lights distance up/down the wall, and left/
right along the wall.
If the light source is a Point or Spot Light,
you can define its offset relative to the fixture
base. For instance, if the fixture is on the
ceiling you may want to set the Height Offset
field to move the light source down to the
location where the bulb might be in real life.
By using Show Position in Render View
you can tell where in the scene your light is
located.
Due to limitations in the OpenGL lighting
model, and limitations of raytracing, lighting
Light Types
Added Lights
3D> Add Lights allows you to quickly add a
light in the floor plan view. Added Lights
are similar to Light Fixtures, but they only
generate a light source in the Render and/or
Raytrace View. They do not create a 3D
object that appears in 3D views. Added lights
can be placed into an object which would
normally not generate a light source such as a
TV.
To add a Parallel Light:
1.
Select 3D> Add Lights.
2.
Click and drag in floor plan view.
Parallel Lights can be added to the exterior or

interior of a model.
To create a Point Light source:
1.
Select 3D> Add Lights.
2.
Click in floor plan view. Do not drag the

pointer when you click on the screen, or
you will create a parallel light source.
To create a Spot Light source:

1.
Create a Parallel or Point Light source

using one of the above methods.
2.
Select the light and open it for specification.
3.
Change its Type to Spot Light in the

Light Specification dialog.
Sun Angles
Special> Sun Angle or click the Sun Angle

button and click in floor plan view to
place a Sun Angle. In each Sun Angle you
can specify time of year, time of day, and a
location based on longitude and latitude.
If you have defined a North Pointer, using
the CAD> Special> North Pointer
tool,
the Suns location in reference to the model
is accurate.
The Sun Toggle
controls the
display of either the default Sun or the
current Sun Angle.
Sun Angles can only act as Parallel light
sources. Their location and direction are
defined per plan. The Render Data tab on
the Sun Angle Specification dialog
offers more control of Render properties
such as color, shadows, etc. See Sun Angle
Through the Sun Angle Specification
dialog, you can specify the location and time
that the program uses to model the actual sun
angle as a light source.
When rendering an exterior View, the
program looks for the first Sun Angle which
is turned on. If you have multiple Sun
Angles, you must select the one you want to
use and make sure it is turned on in the Sun
Angle Specification dialog. Verify all
others are turned off and the program will
render the correct sun. If one does not exist,
the program uses the Default Sun Light.
To define a Sun Angle:
1.
Make the first floor the current floor.
In floor plan view you can create

multiple Sun Angles. Select CAD>
663
Render
Views
looks most realistic if it is offset from a

surface.
2.
In floor plan view, select CAD> Special> Sun Angle
and click.
3.
The Sun Angle Specification dialog

opens. Fill in the options to define the
Sun Angle, and click OK.
4.
A Sun Angle arrow will appear in floor

plan view.
More than one Sun Angle may be placed in

the same plan to allow the simultaneous display of shadows at different times. A Sun
Angle can only be specified in a first floor or
foundation plan. Each Sun Angle is represented in floor plan view by a Sun Angle
arrow
.
The Sun Angle arrow is a marker that shows

you the angle of the sun. Its location does not
affect the calculation of the shadows, it may
be moved if desired. Each Sun Angle can
define the position of the building on the
Earth and the date and time at which the calculations are performed. This position is pinpointed by the Latitude and Longitude
settings. The following table lists latitude
and longitude values for some cities:
Sun angle for:

March 1, 2004
12 p.m. (noon)
Coeur dAlene, ID
The shadow cast by a building at a particular
time and at a particular location can be displayed. If no terrain perimeter has been created, the shadow falls on an imaginary plane
at height zero, the default height for the first
floor. If a terrain perimeter exists, the shadow
will be modified to indicate where the real
shadow would fall on the actual terrain.
Deleting Shadows
Shadows
The Sun Angle function allows the shadow
cast by a building at any time of the year to
be displayed. Sun Angles can also be used as
a light source in render views.
664
There are several ways to delete the shadow

created by a Sun Angle.
In floor plan view, select and delete the

defining polyline.
In floor plan view, select and delete the

Sun Angle arrow.
In the Sun Angle Specification dialog, click Make shadow to delete the
existing and create a new shadow.
In the Sun Angle Specification dialog, click the Delete Shadow button.

Each light type may be defined as modelling
either a Point Light source, a Parallel Light
source, or a Spot Light source. These
definitions can be assigned and modified to
create many different lighting effects.
Parallel Lights
A Parallel Light has a direction but
no position. The light appears to
illuminate all objects with equal intensity, as
if it were at an infinite distance from the
object. A Parallel Light source is commonly
used to simulate distant light sources, such as
the sun. It is the best choice of light to use for
maximum speed generating render views.
Parallel Light sources are represented in
floor plan view by three arrows. To modify
the light, double-click on it or select it, then
edit button. The

Light Specification dialog opens,
allowing you to modify the lights
characteristics. Any light source can be
changed into a Parallel Light source by
changing its light type in the Light
of electric lighting and should be used where

visual fidelity is the deciding concern.
If no user defined light exists, Chief
Architect creates a Point Light source to
represent a light within a room. Any light
source, except a sun angle, can be changed
into a Point Light source by changing its
light type in the specification dialog.
To modify the light, double-click on it (or
select it, then click the Open Object
edit
button). The Light Specification dialog
opens.
Spot Lights
A Spot Light focuses the light in a
specified direction. The location,
cone angle, direction and intensity
of a Spot Light can be defined. Spot Lights
cannot be placed directly in the plan. They
are created by changing an existing lights
specification. Once defined as a Spot Light,
the direction of a spot light can be changed in
the Light Specification dialog or for an
added light source, by rotating the light in
floor plan view.
Point Lights
Render
Views
Like a bare light bulb, a Point Light

radiates light equally in all directions
from its origin. It slows rendering
down, but it is a more realistic representation
665
Adjusting Lights
Once lights have been added to the model,
they can be edited or adjusted using the
Adjust Lights dialog. Sometimes you will
want to adjust the lights from the render view
to get immediate results, other times you
may want to adjust lights in floor plan view
where you can easily see their position
within a room.
Adjust Lights Dialog

In a Preview or render view you can use the
Adjust Lights dialog to select a light and
open the appropriate Specification dialog
for that light.
1.
2.
Create a plan with fixture, sun angle, or

other added lights.
Select 3D> Adjust Lights
button.
The Adjust Lights dialog opens.
3.
All lights in the plan will appear in the

list. You can use the check boxes to turn
lights on and off. To adjust the properties of a specific light, select the light to
be adjusted and click Adjust. The Light
Specification dialog opens.
4.
Make changes to the light and click OK.
5.
You will return to the Adjust Lights

dialog.
6.
Select another light to adjust or click

Done.
When you are in a render view, the view is

regenerated based on the new light settings.
666
To open the Sun Angle Specification
Tools
dialog, click the CAD Mode On/Off

button to enter CAD mode, click the Line
child button, and then click anywhere on

screen. See Sun Angle on page 731.
parent button, click the Sun Angle
Earth Data Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 Latitude is measured North or South of

the equator.
2 Longitude is measured West or East of

the Greenwich meridian.
Common values for latitude, longitude can

be found in any atlas.
3 Date - Enter a date for each arrow you

create.
4 Time - Enter a time for each arrow you
create. Define whether or not it should

be adjusted to allow for Daylight Savings
Time.
5 Time Zone - Specify the time zone.
The previous values default to the settings on the Special CAD panel of the
Preferences dialog.
10
11
12
6 In the lower part of the Sun Angle
Specification dialog is a section displaying the calculated angles.
The Solar altitude angle displays the angle

of the sun in degrees above the horizontal
plane.
The Solar direction angle shows the angle
between true north and the sun's direction.
This is the angle at which the Sun Angle
arrow displays in floor plan view.
This angle is always measured relative to
north. North is defined by a user specified
North Pointer . If you have not created a
North Pointer, north is assumed to be straight
up in the floor plan view. If a North Pointer is
drawn, or the direction of an existing North
Pointer is changed, Sun Angles and their
shadows automatically update.
667
Render
Views
7 Always Update - Select the check box
to have the program update the shadow

for this arrow whenever any of the defining
information is changed. When checked, it
slows the system down while the Sun
Angle Specification dialog is displayed.
If this is not checked, you can click the
Make Shadow button to generate a new
shadow based on the new information.
Show Date on Sun Angle - Select the
check box to have the date and time display on the Sun Angle arrow in the floor plan
view.
noon to test the function. If the shadow

appears, your original time setting was too
early or too late to generate shadows.
Note that the Make Shadow option does not
affect the Render view. To turn shadows on
and off for the Render view, use the Render
tab.
12 Delete shadow - Removes the sun
shadow generated using Make Shadow

from the floor plan view.
Render Data Tab
9 Auto Rebuild Terrain - Select the
check box to rebuild the terrain

automatically whenever you create a sun
shadow.
If the Auto Rebuild Terrain check box is
checked, then if you rebuild the sun shadow,
the terrain will automatically rebuild as
needed before the sun shadow generates. If
this check box is unchecked, you will be
prompted to rebuild the terrain.
Note that when you use the Build Terrain
command in floor plan view, all sun shadows
in the plan are automatically updated.
3
4
You can define if the Sun Angle will be used
as a light source in render views. Set the
parameters here if you want to use the Sun
Angle as a light source in render views.
10 Length of Plan Symbol - Enter the

length of the Sun Angle arrow for floor
plan view.
The settings defined on the Render Data tab

are not related to how the shadow is displayed in floor plan view. They only affect
render views.
11 Make shadow - Select the check box to
1 On - Check this box to select the cur-
calculate the shadow on screen. The shadow

is a polyline filled with a hatch pattern
derived from the Sun Angle direction.
No shadow generates if the sun is not above
the horizon or if the sun is so low on the horizon that the shadow would be extremely
long. If no shadow appears, reset the time to
668
rent Sun Angle as a rendering light

source. If there is more than one defined Sun
Angle, the renderer selects the first Sun
Angle that is defined as On. To make sure
you are rendering the correct Sun Angle,
make sure all others do not have this box
checked.
Line Style Tab
2 Casts Shadow - Check here to have
this light source cast shadows. These

shadows are similar to the shadow shown in
floor plan view, but they may render differently based on other light sources.
3 Intensity - Use this slider bar to define
the relative intensity of the light source.

Time of day as set on the Earth Data tab,
does not affect how the Sun Angle renders as
a light source, but this does.
4 Color - Select a color for the light

source.
On the Line Style Tab you can set Line

Color, Line Style, and Line Weight for the
Sun Angle arrow in floor plan view. See
You can also set the Layer on which the Sun
Angle appears. Sun angles appear on CAD
layer 20 by default. Note that Sun Shadow
polylines and hatching appear on the same
layer as the Sun Angle arrow from which
they are created.

When a light has been placed in the plan
using the 3D> Add Lights menu command,
you can redefine its behavior and modify
certain properties of each light using the

Light Specification dialog.
Light Specification
1
2
3
4
5
11
6
7
9
10
13
12
14
15
Render
Views
669
Depending on the type of light selected, the

options available will vary.
1 Type - Select a source type for the light.
Available source types are Point Light,

Spot Light, and Parallel Light. The selections
in the dialog are affected by the Type that
you select. Each type of light source behaves
differently but they have some rendering
properties in common. See Defining Light
Types on page 665.
2 Auto Intensity - Select the check box
to have the program set intensities for

each light in the render view. When you
select Auto Intensity the program provides
an average intensity to render with
reasonable lighting effects. If you clear the
check box, the slider bar controls how bright
the light appears in the render view.
Lights that have an intensity of 0% are the
same as lights that are turned off. Lights that
have an intensity of 100% have the
maximum brightness allowed. If you have
multiple lights in a room all set to maximum
intensity, it is possible to have too much light
for a realistic View. Colors and textures
become washed out if there is too much light.
3 Color - Click on the rectangle to define
the color of the light being modeled.

Colored lights may be used to achieve
special lighting effects. They alter the
appearance of your material colors and
textures.
The default color of light is pure white,
which has the least affect on the material
colors and textures.
4 Attenuated - Check this box to control
how the quickly the light intensity

drops off as a result of the distance from the
light source. Only Spot and Point Lights can

have attenuation values set.
The three edit values represent the three
coefficients (a, b, and c) in the expression: 1 /
(a + b*d+c*d*d), where d is the distance
from the light source. Increasing any of these
values results in the light intensity dropping
off faster (the light does not travel as far).
Decreasing any value results in the light
intensity dropping off slower, (the light
travels farther). Small changes in these
coefficients can have significant impact on
lighting effects. Some experimentation
should be done to fully understand how to
use them.
5 Floor Number - Define where the
symbol for an added light appears in

floor plan views.
The Floor Number controls on which floor
plan the added light symbol is drawn. If you
assign the number of a non-existent floor,
you will not see the light display and you
cannot delete that light.
A floor number of -1 draws the light symbol
on all floors, a value of 1 draws the light
symbol on the first floor. The floor number
has no effect on the light height. Set the
number equal to the floor plan that contains
the room that the light is in, if you want it to
6 Height - Define a height for the light.
Heights of Added lights are always

relative to the first floor. If you want an
Added light to appear in a room on the
second floor you must enter a height value
that includes the first floor. A value of 0
equals the floor elevation of the first floor.
7 Tilt Angle - The Tilt Angle is used to

control the angle of the light with
670
respect to the horizon. A value of -90 degrees

means that the light is pointing straight down
and a value of 90 degrees means that the light
is pointing straight up. 0 degrees is parallel to
the horizon.
decreasing the Maximum Triangle Size and

increasing the Drop off Rate but it is
impossible to get a nice sharp circle of light
using current methods under OpenGL.
8 Dir Angle - Defines the angle that a

Parallel or Spot Light is pointed along.
Zero degrees is measured horizontally on
your screen pointing to the right. Positive
values rotate in a counter-clockwise direction
from there. Enter a value up to 360 degrees.
If you enter a negative value, the program
uses Zero.
allows you to set how a light will cast

soft shadows in a Raytrace view. Setting the
Light Size will set how big the light should
appear. A size of zero indicates a true point
light source, while a size of 3 indicates a
larger source such as a lightbulb. Setting the
Softness determines how many iterations the
raytracer should go through to soften the
light. This value determines the quality of the
raytrace, but also slows down the raytrace. It
is not recommended to use values greater
than 2 or 3, unless the Light Size is very
large.
9 Cut Off Angle - The Cut Off Angle
controls the angle of the cone of light

for Spot Lights only. A cone angle of 180
degrees would create a Spot Light that shines
on one side of the lights position,
representing a half sphere. A small cone
angle, say 10 degrees, would create a very
narrow cone of light. The cut off angle
should always be between 0 and 180 degrees.
The cut off angle for an added light can be
defined in the floor plan view by dragging
the handles at the ends of the cone lines in or
out.
10 Drop Off Rate - This affects how fast
the light intensity drops off from the

center of the cone of light to the outside
edge. This is only available for Spot Lights.
The default value for this is set to 7.5 which
means the light drops off fairly quickly. It is
not useful to set this value too low because
there are limitations in the OpenGL lighting
model which result in jagged looking circles
of light when they are shining on large flat
surfaces. Appearances can be improved by
12 On - This controls whether or not the
light should be used for lighting effects

in the render view. The default is On.
13 Casts Shadows - Controls whether or
not the light casts shadows when

Shadows are turned on in a render view.
It is recommended that you only use one, or

at most two lights to casts shadows at a time.
Shadow calculations are very complicated
and can slow rendering significantly.
14 Show Position in Render View -
Check this box to display an indicator

where a light source is actually positioned in
a render view. The light position indicator is
only drawn when the light is "On" and only
for positional lights such as "point" or "spot"
lights. This tool can be used to determine if
your light source is positioned correctly.
15 Use in Real-Time Rendering/Use in
Raytracing/Use in Both - These

options allows you to specify whether a light
671
Render
Views
Direct a Spot Light in floor plan view by

selecting and dragging the rotate handle.
11 Soft Shadows (raytracing) - This
is used only in a Raytrace View, only in a

Render view, or used in both views. Raytrace
views can handle many more lights than
Render views, and some fixtures may have
four or five lights in a raytrace view while

only one in a Render view. Be warned that
the more lights you use in either view, the
slower the time to generate that view.
Cross Section Slider Dialog

Click the Cross Section Slider
button in
a render view to open the Cross Section
Slider dialog.
Choose one of the cross section angles and

move the Position slide to adjust the position
672
of the cutting plane. Select the option at top

right to turn off the cutting plane.
Raytracing
Chapter Overview
Raytracing is a technology which allows the
creation of highly realistic images from your
Chief Architect plans. Whereas rendering
draws your model onto the screen, raytracing
actually traces the rays of light from your
camera as they bounce and reflect into your
scene. As a result, raytracing is somewhat
slower than OpenGL rendering, but can be
used to achieve much more complicated
effects such as reflections and ultra-realistic

lighting models.
Chapter Contents
Creating a Raytrace View

The Raytrace Window
Creating Materials for Raytracing
Tips and Tricks
POV-Ray

To create a raytraced image in Chief
Architect 10.0, start with a render
view. The camera position, orientation, and
field of view in the render view will
determine the way the scene appears in the
raytrace window. None of the other render
settings, including your render preferences,
will be used for generating a raytrace view.
The lighting used for creating a raytrace view
is different than the lighting used for a render
view. All of the lights currently modeled in

the plan will be used when creating a
raytrace view, as long as the light has been
turned "on" in its specification dialog, and it
has been set to "Use in Raytracing". Unlike
the render view, the raytrace view has no
limit on the number of lights that can be used
to create a scene so lights are not limited to
the current room. The more lights there are in
a scene, the longer it will take to raytrace.
673
Raytracing
Chapter 28:
In a render view, click the Raytrace

button, or choose Raytrace from the 3D
menu to start raytracing. The Raytrace
Options dialog will open.
Raytrace Properties
1 Width/Height the size, in pixels, of
the image you are about to create. The

initial values are identical to the size of your
previous render view. You can set these
values to virtually anything you want;
although images larger than 2000 x 2000
pixels cannot be viewed from within Chief
Architect and must be saved directly to a file.
Make certain that you have sufficient disk
space before starting a raytrace saved to a
very large file.
Save As You can optionally save the
raytrace image directly to a file while it
raytraces. The only supported file format is
the Windows Bitmap (.bmp) format. Saving
674
to a file is mandatory for very large images

that cannot be viewed from within Chief
Architect.
Raytrace Parameters
2 Radiosity Radiosity is a slower, but
much more realistic, lighting model

than standard raytracing. Without radiosity
the raytracer will use a lighting model similar
to a render view, which uses a constant value
for ambient lights. Unlike the constant
Ambient Lighting model which assumes any
object not directly exposed to a light is a preset brightness, Radiosity traces light as it
bounces around a scene, capturing the subtle
variations in shadows.
Without Radiosity
4 Anti-Aliasing This setting
determines what quality of smooth

edges to create in your raytraced image. The
High Quality setting is somewhat slower
than the Normal quality setting. This is
similar to the Smooth Edges option used in
render views. See Faster Rendering on
page 659.
5 Use Soft Shadows You can set up
With Radiosity
The following options allow you to adjust

how Radiosity works in the scene:
None - uses an ambient lighting model
similar to the render view
Low Quality - This option should provide
reasonable image quality for most images,
though the results may appear blotchy. This
is the fastest Radiosity option.
Medium Quality - This option should only
be used for images where Low Radiosity is
insufficient, as it is more time-consuming.
High Quality - Extremely time-consuming
and only necessary for the most discerning
tastes. High Radiosity will often take hours
to render what takes minutes using Low
Radiosity.
soft shadow settings for each light in

the Adjust Lights dialog. See Adjusting
Lights on page 666. These settings will only
take effect if you enable Use Soft
Shadows. Soft shadows require extra work
on the part of the raytracer and can slow
down the image generation.
6 Create Default Light If you have no
lights in your scene, the raytracer will

optionally create one for you. Default lights
are only created if you are indoors.
7 Direct/Diffuse Sunlight Radiosity
allows for advanced lighting models

such as the ability to have light coming
directly from the sun, combined with light
scattered through the clouds. Direct
Sunlight allows you to brighten the intensity
of the light coming directly from the sun.
Diffuse Sunlight allows you to brighten the
intensity of the light from the surrounding
atmosphere. For a cloudy day, you might turn
up the diffuse sunlight, and turn down the
direct sunlight.
3 Time of Day similar to the Daytime/
Nighttime setting in Render views, this

allows you to choose whether to render a
daytime or a nighttime image.
675
Raytracing
The Raytrace Window

If your raytraced image is small enough to fit
in a window, your image will appear as it is
created. Unlike render views, you can
minimize your raytrace window or perform
other tasks while the raytrace is progressing.
Simply restore your raytrace window when
you are ready to view your image.
The following options are available from the
raytrace window:
A raytracer mimics a camera while it

generates your image. Select File> Image
Adjustment to open the Image
Adjustment dialog and adjust the camera
lens aperture, which affects brightness; as
well as film speed, which affects contrast.
This can be done during the raytrace process
or once the raytrace is completed.
File> Print Image From the File menu,

you have the ability to print your picture.
File> Save Image - You can save your
picture to several file formats including .jpg,
.bmp, and .png.

There are several properties of materials that
only come into effect when you are doing a
raytraced image. To view the effect of your
material settings in a raytrace, you can use
676
the Show Preview option on the Raytrace

tab in the Plan Material dialog. See
Define Material Dialog on page 605.
Raytracing
Raytrace Tab
1
2
3
4
5
The Raytrace tab has controls which effect

how materials appear in raytrace views.
Modifying any of these values will have no
effect on vector or render views. You can
activate the raytrace preview window by
hitting the Show Preview button.

2 Reflectivity - This controls how
reflective the material appears in

raytrace views. Push the slide bar all the way
to the right to simulate a highly reflective
material such as a mirror.
3 Use Bump Map - A bump map is an
image file which is used to make a

material appear non-flat where light hits it.
For more information on bump maps, see
Raytracing on page 673. To create a bump
map, turn on Use Bump Map and select a
bump map to use. Any image file or texture
can be used as a bump map, with dark areas
of the image corresponding to low points in
the bump map, and brighter areas

corresponding to high points
4 Bump Height allows you to specify
how drastic the effect of the bump map

will be. The Ratio and Stretch to Fit options
work for bump maps the same way that they
do for textures. If you are using a texture and
a bump map, they will both use the same
values for Ratio and Stretch to Fit.
5 Material is translucent - A translucent
material allows light to pass through it,

but will appear in the image. An example of
a translucent material is a lampshade.
Translucency is an effect which looks best
when rendering with Radiosity.
6 Transparency Filters Light A
material which filters light acts like a

stained-glass window. A material that does
not filter light simply transmits it, such as
white tissue paper.
677
Tips and Tricks

Faster Raytracing
Calculating a realistic image can take time.
However, there are several things to think
about before you raytrace that can drastically
reduce your raytrace time.
Without the appropriate setup, a scene
that should take five minutes to raytrace
can quite literally take five to ten days. These
tips can help you reduce raytrace times so
you can get the image you want, when you
want it.
Number of Lights Unlike a render view,

which can support only a limited number of
lights, a raytrace view can handle as many
lights as you like. Leaving the lights on is the
number one cause of slow raytracing.
Use the Adjust Lights dialog available in
render or floor plan views to turn off any
lights which are not important to your scene.
Remember that most lights are on by
default.
Radiosity Quality For simple scenes, Low
Quality Radiosity is usually sufficient. High
Quality Radiosity is extremely timeconsuming and only necessary for very
complicated scenes where Low or Medium
radiosity is not sufficient.
If your image is very large, or if you have
complicated aspects such as grills or grates,
you may want to try Medium radiosity.
Always try Low radiosity first to see if you
get the desired result.
Preview Your Raytrace When you are
setting up lighting for a scene, there is no
need to raytrace a full-screen image. Try
678
using a much smaller image size such as

300x200 which can give you the
information you need to determine whether
lighting is appropriate.
Image size is a significant factor in
determining raytrace speed. Only raytrace
your full image when you are certain that
your scene lighting is correct.
Anti-Aliasing Level Anti-aliasing works
to smooth edges that otherwise would appear
jagged. High-quality anti-aliasing is most
useful when you are raytracing a smaller
picture that contains a very complicated
scene. If you are raytracing a very large
picture, you probably only need low-quality
anti-aliasing.
Bump Maps Bump map calculation is
time-consuming and should only be used as
necessary.
Soft Shadows Soft shadow calculation is
time-consuming and should only be used as
necessary. Only enable soft shadows for
lights whose shadows are significant to the
scene you are raytracing.
Raytrace Quality
It is not hard to create an image that looks
reasonably realistic with raytracing;
however, producing an image that really
looks like a photograph takes extra attention
to detail. Here are a few tips for achieving
the most photo-realistic images possible:
Use Radiosity - Although slower, radiosity
adds significant depth to the scene by
simulating the way that light works in the
real world. Radiosity is especially effective

in scenes with a fair amount of shadows.
Use Reflections For outdoor scenes,
ensure that your windows are slightly
reflective. You may want to set up a building
across the street which, though not in the
scene, will appear in the reflections in the
windows. Especially important are partly
reflective materials on objects such as
stovetops, tile floors, and coffee pots. The
subtle effect of the reflections help convince
the viewers eye that the picture is a real
photograph.
Sunlight Settings The brightness of the
sun varies dramatically from climate to
climate, from cloudy day to sunny day. Use
the Direct/Diffuse Sunlight Settings to find
a setting which provides the appropriate
lighting for the scene you are rendering.
Lighting Lighting is an extremely
important tool for achieving high-quality
results. Work with the lighting of your scene
until you achieve something realistic.
Add 3D lights as necessary to capture the
effect you want. For lights which cast
shadows into the scene, consider soft
shadows which will smooth the appearance
of the scene lighting. See Added Lights on
page 663.
Finally, from the raytrace window, use the

File> Image Adjustment options to subtly
adjust the brightness of your finished
rendering. Dont be afraid to over-saturate
your image slightly in very bright areas this
is a common occurrence in actual
photographs.
Interior Shots - If you are raytracing an
interior radiosity view in which the primary
source of light is the sun through a window
or door, you will probably need to adjust
your image brightness using File> Image
Adjustment in the raytrace window. You
may also need to use Medium radiosity
quality to ensure that the raytracer models
the light bouncing through the window
accurately.
Bump Maps Though the effect of bumpmaps are usually very subtle, they do add to
the impression that the scene is actually a
photograph. A tile floor which shades
appropriately to the lighting in the room, for
example, lends to an appearance of realism.
Emissive Materials A material with
emissive properties will actually cast light
into the scene when Radiosity is used. This
effect can be used to achieve the subtle
variations of light seen in the real world.
POV-Ray
The Persistance of Vision Raytracer (POVRay) is a high-quality, yet entirely free
raytracer. The POV-Ray raytracer has been
used for over ten years to generate images of
virtually anything imaginable. POV-Ray has
even been used on the space shuttle!
Chief Architect uses POV-Ray to generate

raytraced images. It communicates with and
manages POV-Ray directly, so you do not
need to understand POV-Ray to create highquality, raytraced images from within Chief
Architect.
679
Raytracing
POV-Ray
Hobbyist raytracers or those interested in the

highest possible visual quality may want to
learn about POV-Ray to take advantage of
the complete flexibility that it provides. For
more information on POV-Ray, or to
download the latest version, please visit the
POV-Ray Web site at www.povray.org.
To use a Chief Architect scene in the POVRay raytracer, you can export your scene to
POV-Ray format (.pov) file. You must be in
a render view to export to POV-Ray format.
From the render view go to File> Export
Exporting to POV-Ray Format
When exporting to a POV-Ray file, you have

the option of including all of the images
which are used in the scene. This will make a
copy of the necessary textures and images
into the same directory as the destination for
your POV-Ray export.
Note: You do not need to export a POV-Ray

scene in order to raytrace in Chief Architect.
680
, and choose POV-Ray (.POV) from the

list of file types.
Chapter 29:
Dimensions
Dimensions
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect provides many dimensioning
tools. In addition, Dimension Lines can be
selected, edited, and customized. Extension
Lines can also be customized with the mouse
or opened for specification.
Dimensions are also useful for accurately
positioning objects by defining the
dimensions that locate them.
Chapter Contents
Compatibility With Previous Versions

Dimension Fonts
The Dimension Tools
Displaying Dimension Lines
Selecting Dimension Lines
Deleting Dimension Lines
Editing Dimension Lines
Editing Extension Lines
Moving Objects Using Dimensions
The Dimension Line Specification Dialog
The Dimension Defaults Dialog
Compatibility With Previous Versions

Dimensions function differently in Versions
9 and 10 of Chief Architect than they did in
previous versions. Being familiar with these
changes is necessary if you will be opening
plans from versions prior to Version 9.
The Version 8 Compatible Accuracy option
in the Dimension Defaults dialog
controls how Chief Architect handles

dimensions in legacy plans. This option is
automatically selected for plans created in
earlier versions, and will have an affect on
your available options. See The Dimension
681
In Version 8, extension lines had two modes:

normal and short. Version 9 and later offer
full control over extension lines. If Version 8
Compatible Extensions is checked, you will
not have this control. See Extensions Tab
on page 700.
Accuracy
Chief Architect utilizes a different method
for rounding dimensions than in prior
versions. Prior versions displayed the
distance between equally spaced objects
correctly, but dimension runs werent always
accurate when added. In Versions 9 and later,
dimension runs always add up correctly.
Dimensioning the same object in different
ways will also obtain the same results as long
as the object being dimensioned is placed in
the model with the same accuracy as the
precision of the dimension lines. If, however,
an object is placed using more precision than
the dimensions, results may vary.
An example is a 36 1/16" window centered

on a wall that is 20' long. Since the precision
of the centering is 1/32" you will get cases
where a dimension differs by 1/16" from
another. This is expected behavior as there is
no "correct" answer. The solution to this is to
force the window to be positioned to 1/16"
accuracy.
A good approach to accurate dimensioning is to turn on the accuracy indicators and position objects so that the
inaccuracy indicators do not appear. See
The Dimension Defaults Dialog on page
695.
Dimension Fonts
In Version 9 and prior, text size was based on
sizing information stored in each font rather
than actual character dimensions.
To maintain the same font size in legacy
plans, select Legacy Dimension Conversion
and check the Version 9 Compatible Size
box on the Font panel of the Preferences
dialog. See Font Panel on page 97.
Dimension Defaults
selecting Edit> Default Settings
or by double-clicking the Dimension Tools
parent or Manual Dimension
button.
child
The settings in the Dimension Defaults

dialog define the behavior and appearance of
dimensions. Understanding of the options in
this dialog is extremely valuable. See The
Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 695.
The Dimension Tools

Click the Dimension Tools
parent
button to access the dimension tools.
682
These tools can also be activated by selecting

CAD> Dimension from the main menu.
The Dimension Tools
To display the distance between two

objects, click the Manual Dimension
child button and drag a dimension line
near or through the objects. The dimension
line will locate objects specified in the
Locate Objects tab lying within the Manual
Reach specified in the Dimension
Defaults dialog. Each manual dimension
line can be edited individually. See Editing
Dimension Lines on page 687.
Drag manual
dimension
The wall is 40" from where

the dimension was created.
This is too far, the dimension cannot reach the wall.
The sink is within
reach so is located
Using the Manual Dimension

child
button, dimension lines can be drawn at any
of the allowed wall angles defined in the
Plan Defaults dialog. See Plan Defaults
on page 91.
End-to-End Dimensions
The End-to-End Dimension
tool
is used to dimension between any two
defined points or objects in floor plan view.
Click the End-to-End Dimension
tool,
then drag the dimension from the first object
to the second object. The dimension line will
snap to each object, ignoring any other
objects located between either end.
Angular Dimensions
The Angular Dimension
tool
displays the angle between any two
straight edges, including lines; walls; the
sides of boxes; the straight sides of polylines;
cabinets; and soffits. Any straight line or side
within a CAD block can be dimensioned, as
well. Edges nested up to four levels deep
within a CAD block can be dimensioned.
Click on the first line, then drag and release
on the second. The line's start and end points
should be as close as possible to the objects.
Do not pull the angular dimension past the
object as you might with a normal straight
dimension line.
Manual dimension lines can be also be drawn

at unrestricted angles if this preference is
chosen by unselecting the Angle Snaps
toggle button, or by selecting Unrestricted
under Allowed Angles in the CAD panel of
the Preferences dialog. See CAD Panel
on page 108.
As with a straight dimension line, an angular

dimension selected with other CAD objects
can be included in a new CAD block. When
the block is exploded the angular dimension
may become invalid and disappear when
683
Dimensions
Manual Dimensions
edited or changed. If this occurs, the angular

dimension can be redrawn.
Angular dimensions can be selected and
moved by dragging from a handle along the
arc in its middle. The dimension moves to
maintain the location of its own arc's center.
If one of the dimensioned objects is moved,
the angular dimension adjusts, but may have
to be moved manually to a more visible
position.
Double-click on an angular dimension to
display the Dimension Line
Specification dialog. This dialog allows
the number height and arrowhead size to be
changed, and the arrowhead type and fill to
be specified. See The Dimension Line
Dimension Defaults dialog. See Locate

Objects Tab on page 698.
Point to Point Dimensions

The Point to Point Dimension
tool dimensions between any two
locations. If you click or release the mouse
within 3" of an object using the Point to
Point Dimension
tool, that object will
be located. If no object can be found near the
beginning or end of the dimension line, a
point marker will be created. Point markers
have no text and show up as a "+" at either
end of the dimension line. See Markers on
page 722.
The dimension can be placed on a CAD

layer. If left on the default layer it will
behave and appear as a normal manual
dimension line.
Interior Dimensions
The Interior Dimension
child
button is used to create interior
dimensions. Draw a dimension line through
walls, at right angles only, to create interior
dimensions in floor plan view.
The Interior Dimension
tool locates
interior walls only. It will not dimension
between surfaces in the same wall. Allowed
dimension angles match the allowed wall
angles for each plan.
Interior Dimension will locate either the
wall surface or the main layer, depending on
the settings in the Locate Objects tab of the
684
Point markers can be selected and edited. See

Editing Markers on page 722.
Point markers become a permanent part of
your plan until deleted. Deleting the Point to
Point Dimension
line that created them
will not delete these markers.
If the objects or point markers located by a
Point to Point Dimension
line are
moved, the dimension will update to reflect
the change.
The Dimension Tools
to Point Dimension
line can be
accurately relocated by specifying new
dimension values. See Moving Objects
Baseline Dimensions
The Baseline Dimension
tool
creates a series of dimensions that all
share the same origin instead of continuing
from each previous location. Dimension
lines created by the Baseline Dimension
tool are independent and can be edited
separately.
Select the Baseline Dimension
child
button; click near an object in floor plan
view; and drag a dimension line near or
through the objects requiring dimensions.
The spacing between lines is the Line

Separation value, which is also used by
automatic dimensions. See The Dimension
Auto Exterior
Dimensions
The Auto Exterior Dimension
tool generates dimensions around a
plans exterior in floor plan view. The
dimension lines locate walls and openings as
specified in Dimension Defaults dialog.

See The Dimension Defaults Dialog on
page 695.
Auto Exterior Dimension
will not
generate properly if there is a gap in the
exterior walls. Sometimes angled walls may
not connect properly. If automatic dimensions
do not generate, try Build> Wall> Fix Wall
Connections
These dimensions can be edited individually,

but all such editing will be lost if Auto
Exterior Dimensions
are created again.
To save an automatic dimension line, convert

it to a manual dimension line by unchecking
Automatic in the Dimension Line
Specification dialog. See The Dimension
There are a maximum of three rows of
automatically generated dimensions per
exterior wall direction. The innermost
dimension line locates exterior walls, interior
walls, and all openings in exterior walls. The
second dimension line locates exterior and
interior walls. The outermost dimension line
is the overall exterior dimension.
Display Temporary Dimensions

Select CAD> Dimension> Display
Temporary Dimensions
to toggle
on or off the display of temporary
dimensions created when an object is
selected. This toggle affects all views and is
saved between launches of Chief Architect.
685
Dimensions
Objects and point markers located by a Point
Displaying Dimension Lines

Dimension lines display in CAD details;
floor plan; cross section/elevation; and
layout views. Dimension lines created by any
of the dimension tools share the same
components.
Dimension
Lines
Extension
Lines
Dimension
Labels
Arrowheads
Dimension Lines run parallel with the

distance being measured.
Extension Lines are perpendicular to
dimension lines, indicating where they begin
and end.
Arrowheads appear at the intersections of
dimension and extension lines.
Dimension Labels appear at the midpoint of
dimension lines and display the distance of
the dimension line.
Dimension lines can be placed on different
layers, allowing their appearance to be
customized. See Dimension Tab on page
693.
Selecting Dimension Lines

To select a dimension line, click the Select
Objects
button or any of the Dimension
Angular Dimensions, however, cannot be

group selected.
Tools
child buttons and click on a
dimension line; or by right-clicking on it
using any tool. When you have selected a
dimension line, edit handles display. See
Editing Dimension Lines on page 687.
Multliple dimension lines can be added to a
selection set by holding down the Shift key.
Deleting Dimension Lines

Dimensions can be erased by drawing
another dimension line over the first line.
686
The entire dimension line or only a section

may be erased in this way.
Delete dimension lines after they have been

selected by clicking the Delete
edit
button or pressing the

keyboard.
Del
key on the
Dimension lines can also be selected

individually or multiply and opened for
specification. See The Dimension Line
Dimension lines can be customized.
Numbers and existing extension lines can be
moved and deleted individually and new
extension lines can be added.
Select a dimension line with the mouse to
display several handles, each of which edits
the line in a different way.
Dimensions
Dimension lines can be selected and edited

with the mouse in a number of ways. You can
continue to edit dimension lines until you
click another toolbar button.
To move a dimension line, select it and grab

the edit handle at its midpoint. The pointer
should change to a Double-Headed Arrow .
Click and drag this handle to move the
Dimension Line perpendicular to itself.
Moving Dimension Labels
Edit handles are located in four locations:

1.
Where the dimension line was selected.
2.
At each dimension label.
3.
Just beyond each end of the dimension

line.
4.
Where each extension line meets its

mark.
Moving Dimension Lines
To move a dimension label, select the

dimension line and grab the handle at the
dimension label. The pointer should change
to a four-headed arrow . Click and drag
this handle to move the dimension label.
If a wall is moved, some dimensions may

remain in the original location. If the
dimensions were generated automatically,
generate them again to locate the new wall
location; or, use the Proximity Fixed option.
See Extensions Tab on page 700.
687

Extension lines can be added and edited with
the mouse. Extension lines are also affected
by the settings on the Extensions tab of the
Dimension Line Specification dialog.
See The Dimension Line Specification
Dialog on page 692.
Adding Extension Lines

To add an extension line to an existing
dimension line:
5.
1.
Select the dimension line.
2.
Grab the handle just beyond either end

of the dimension line. The pointer will
change to a double-headed arrow
3.
Release the button to add an extension

line.
Drag the pointer to the object that you

would like to locate. In this example, an
extension line to the window edge will
be added.
Moving Extension Lines

Extension lines can be moved to locate the
centers, sides, or surfaces of most objects. In
this example an extension line is moved from
the windows edge to the center.
4.
688
As you drag the pointer, a temporary line

displays indicating where an extension
line can be added.
To move an extension line:

1.
Select the dimension line it is connected

to, not the extension line itself.
2.
Grab the handle that appears where the

extension line meets the mark. The
Editing the Length

of Extension Lines
pointer will change to a double-headed

.
1.
Select the extension line to display two

handles.
2.
Grab either handle with the mouse, turn-
Dimensions
arrow
ing the pointer into an arrow

3.
Drag the pointer to a new location.

The extension line will snap to possible
marks as the pointer is moved.
4.
Release the button.
Dimension lines will not locate library

objects when the dimension line is
drawn; but an extension line of an existing
dimension line can be moved or added to
locate a library object.
3.
Extend or contract the extension line and

release the mouse.
Deleting Extension Lines

When an extension line is deleted the
remaining dimensions will be updated. To
remove an extension line:
1.
Select the dimension line it is connected

to, not the extension line itself.
2.
Grab the extension handle.
3.
Drag it perpendicular to the direction of

the arrows, away from any dimensionable object, and release the button.
689

Any object can be quickly moved by
changing a dimension value which locates it.
This technique can be applied in nearly any
situation where dimensions are present,
including angular dimensions. If an
appropriate dimension line is not displayed,
create it using the techniques discussed
above.
If you do not know which dimension is
related to the object you want to move, select
the object and drag it in the desired direction.
As you drag, watch to see which dimensions
update. These dimensions are the dimensions
which may be used to move that object.
To move an object accurately:
1.
Select the object and click on the dimension that will be used to locate it.
2.
The Move Object Using

Dimension dialog displays.
Moving a CAD Object

Using Dimensions
The same principles apply when moving
CAD objects. Make sure dimensions are set
to locate CAD objects on the Locate Objects
tab of the Dimension Defaults dialog.
When two objects are parallel, selecting one
will create a temporary dimension line to the
other if Display Temporary Dimensions is
enabled. This temporary dimension line can
be used to move the selected CAD object.
Always make sure that the endpoints of the
dimension line are in the desired locations. It
is sometimes easier to position a manually
created dimension for moving an object
rather than using temporary dimensions
which may locate the wrong sides. See
Display Temporary Dimensions on page
685.
Resizing a House Using

Exterior Dimensions
When resizing a house using dimensions, it
is important to work your way around the
house in one direction. Relocate one wall at a
time in succession so that you do not redefine
dimensions more than once.
The Previous distance is displayed as it is in

floor plan view, as well as in decimal form.
690
3.
Enter a value in the New Distance field.
4.
The selected object will be moved when

OK is clicked unless there is another
object blocking it.
Resizing exterior dimensions is much

easier to accomplish before windows,
doors and interior walls are placed.
1.
Sketch the general shape of the house

using the Exterior Wall
tool. Generate exterior dimensions with the Auto
Exterior Dimension
child button.
Repeat steps 2 & 3, adjusting each wall

sequentially as you work your way
around the house until done.
Dimensions
6.
2.
Select a wall, click a related dimension,

type new values.
Set Angular Dimension Line

Dialog
3.
Select Rotate Edge to move the selected

edge when OK is clicked; or, select Rotate
entire polyline to rotate the entire object of
which the selected edge is a part, maintaining
the Previous Value of the angle.
Click OK.
Using Angular Dimensions

Angular Dimensions
are useful for
adjusting the angles of CAD lines and walls.
4.
Draw the angular dimension line, beginning and ending the line on the objects
you want to move.
2.
Select the edge that you want to move.
Click the Automatic Exterior Dimension
5.
1.
child button again.
Fill Window
691
3.
4.
Enter a value in the New Value field.
5.
Select Rotate Edge to move the selected

edge when OK is clicked; or, select
Rotate entire polyline to rotate the
entire object of which the selected edge
is a part, maintaining the Previous Value
of the angle.
6.
Click OK to apply the change.
Click on the dimension value to open the

Set Angular Dimension dialog.

To open the Dimension Line
Specification dialog, double-click on a
dimension line using the Select Objects
or Manual Dimension
692
tool; or, select a
dimension line or group of dimension lines

edit button.
Dimension Tab
Dimensions
1
2
4
1 Number Height - Define a new
number height for the selected

dimension. Type "d" in the box to reset the
number size to the default.
2 Inches Only - Check this box to change
the display from feet and inches to

inches only. Uncheck it to display that
dimension in feet and inches. This is only
available in plans using Imperial units.
3 External Only - Check this box to
suppress display of those portions of

the dimension line that stretch between two
surfaces of the same wall. It will still locate
both sides of the interior walls but will not
display the wall thickness.
4 Automatic - Check this box to change
an automatic dimension line to a

manual dimension line, and vice versa. An
automatically produced dimension line that
is changed to a manual one will not be
deleted when automatic dimensions are
produced again.
693
Extension Tab
2
4
6
1
3
The Extension Tab is not available for

multiply selected dimensions.
Note: The settings in this dialog will have no
affect on the selected Dimension Line if the
option Version 8 Compatible Extensions is
checked in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Extensions Tab on page 700.
1 Selected Extension - Click the drop
down list to select which extension line

of the selected dimension line is being
specified. The numbers for each extension
line display above the dimension line in floor
plan view when it is selected.
2 Gap From Marked Object - Specify a
fixed gap between the marked object

and the end of the extension line. If the
dimension line is moved, the extension line
will update, and the gap will be maintained.
3 Length Towards Marked Object -
Specify a fixed length for the portion of

the extension line that points toward the
marked object.
694
4 Length Away From Marked Object -

the extension line that points away from the
marked object.
5 Proximity Fixed - Check this box to
specify a fixed distance between the

marked object and the dimension line. This
has no effect when the mark is at the
arrowhead.
You can only fix the proximity for a single
extension line.
6 Distance to Marked Object - Displays
the distance from the dimension line to

the marked object.
7 Use Plan Default - Check this if you
would like to use the Plan Default

settings for the current extension lines. See
The Dimension Defaults Dialog on page
695.
8 Apply to All - Click this box to apply
the settings on this tab to all of the

extension lines on the selected dimension
line.
Layer Tab
Arrow Tab
For information about the Arrow Tab, see
Arrow Tab on page 735.

Control how you use dimensions and how
they display in the Dimension Defaults
dialog.
the Dimension Tools

parent button to
access the Dimension Defaults dialog.
The settings in this dialog are saved with the
plan. It is recommended that you save your
setting in your default template file for use in
future plans. See Template Plans on page
79.

; select
Dimension; and click Edit...; or double-click
Setup Tab - Left Side

Metric Plans
Imperial Plans
1
3
5
7
9
1 Eighth Inches/Millimeters - Check
this box to display dimensions in

abbreviated eighths, or millimeters. For
instance, 5' 3-1/2 would display as 5'3" 4,
with the 4 representing 4/8 which is equal to
1/2. A dimension which does not have an
exact equivalent in eighths will be rounded
2
4
6
8
up to the nearest eighth (i.e. 7' 6-3/16 would

round to 7'6"2).
2 1/16 Inches/Centimeters - Check this
box to display dimensions in fraction

format, or centimeters. This is the more
precise of the two options.
695
Dimensions

0" - Check this box to supply a zero after the

decimal, even if there is no fractional part.
This will display whole numbers of inches
even if it is zero, and will place a dash
between feet and inches. If 1/16th Inches is
also checked, the double quote () will
always appear after the dimension.
For example, if 1/16 Inches is checked but
0" is not checked, the following dimension
will display: 7' 1/2; if 0" is checked, the same
value will display as: 7'- 0 1/2.
3 Decimal Inches/Centimeters/mm -
Check this box to display inches in

decimal format. For example 3 feet 1 1/2
inches would be represented as 3 1.5".
above the dimension line, rather than in the

center of the line.
6 Add Zeros - Check this box to display
zeros out to 3 decimal places. For

example 314.500 instead of 3.145.
7 Check Imperial and/or Metric to
define the units which are used for

displaying dimensions. Although Imperial
plans always use the Imperial dimensions,
dimensions may be changed to display in
metric only or in both metric and Imperial
units simultaneously. These options are not
available in metric plans.
8 Use ~ Before Number - Check this box
4 Decimal Feet/Meters - Check this box

to display feet or meters in decimal
format. For example 5 feet 2 1/2 inches
would be represented as 5.5208 feet.
5 Number Above Line - Check this box
to indicate dimension values that are

not accurate with the ~ symbol.
9 Use +, or - After Number - Check this
box to indicate that the actual

dimension value is higher or lower than the
value shown.
to have all of the dimensions display
Setup Tab - Right Side

Metric Plans
Imperial Plans
11
13
15
17
19
21
696
10
12
14
16
18
20
height, in inches or mm, of dimension

numbers. 6" will print a 1/8 tall number at 1/
4 = 1 scale.
11 Min. Number Size - Specifies

minimum screen size (in pixels) for
dimension numbers. The screen dimensions
will be no smaller than this value. This does
not affect printed or exported output. To see
the dimension numbers on the screen at the
printing scale, set this value to 0. Changing
this value will affect all dimensions
immediately.
12 Moving Speed - (allowed values 1-9)
Defines how closely the mouse and the
selected object move together while
dragging. 1 means 1:1, or that both move
at exactly the same speed. 8 means 1:8, or
that the mouse must move 8 units to make
the selected object move by 1 unit. In other
words, the selected object moves 1/8th as
fast as the mouse.
This can be used to move walls and openings
more accurately. To temporarily change the
moving speed, press a number key on the
keyboard while moving a wall or door or
window. The moving speed will be changed
for that move only, and will return to normal
as soon as the selected object is released.
13 Automatic Reach - Specify how far
automatic dimension lines will reach

to locate objects along exterior walls that are
set back. The default is 192 inches. If
exterior walls are set back farther than this, a
second set of dimension lines will be
produced to dimension the set back walls.
reach to locate walls and/or objects

specified in the Locate Items tab.
15 1st Line Offset - Specify the distance
(in scale inches or mm) between the

exterior wall and the first automatic
dimension line.
16 Line Separation - Specify the distance
(in scale inches or mm) between

automatic and baseline dimension lines.
17 Min. Dimen Area - Specify the
minimum enclosed area needed for the
Auto Exterior Dimensions

generate dimensions.
tool to
18 Check the Auto box next to Locate
Opening to have the Auto Exterior
Dimensions
tool locate doors and
windows automatically. If the check is
removed, openings may still be located using
the Manual Dimension
tool.
19 Check the Auto box next to Overall
Dimension to have the Auto Exterior
Dimensions
tool locate the overall
exterior dimensions.
20 New Lines Inches Only - Check this
box to have all subsequently created

manual dimensions show inches only (37"
instead of 3-1). This does not affect
existing dimensions. Uncheck this box to
return to drawing manual dimensions using
feet and inches. Imperial plans only.
21 Chief Version 8 Compatible
Accuracy - See Compatibility With

Previous Versions on page 681.
14 Manual Reach - Specify how far
manually drawn dimension lines will
697
Dimensions
10 Number Height - Specify the scaled
Locate Objects Tab

The Locate Objects tab specifies whether or
not dimension lines locate specific types of
objects. Changes made in this box affect only
1
3
5
7
new dimension lines, not those already

drawn.
9
2
4
10
6
8
Walls - This section affects both the Auto

Exterior Dimensions
Dimension
and Manual
tools.
1 Select Surfaces to locate exterior walls
by outer surface and interior walls by

one of their surfaces.
2 Select Wall Dimension Layer to locate
exterior walls by the outer surface of

the main layer and interior walls by a main
layer surface. The Wall Dimension Layer is
specified in the Wall Type Definitions
dialog. See Wall Type Definitions Dialog
on page 157
698
3 Check Interior Wall Centers to have
dimension lines locate the centers of

interior walls. Exterior walls are
dimensioned by the option selected above.
4 Check Both Wall Surfaces to have
dimension lines locate both surfaces of

walls. Wall thickness will be dimensioned, as
well. The surface dimensioned will either be
the outside surface or the main layer surface,
depending on the option selected above.
5 Check Internal Only for dimensions to
ignore the interior surface of exterior

walls. They will still locate both surfaces of
an interior wall, but will not display the wall
thickness. Internal only is available only
when Both Wall Surfaces is checked.
Dimensions
Both Wall Surfaces
Both Wall Surfaces & Internal only

Cabinets - This section affects only manual
dimensions.
6 Sides - Check this box to locate cabinet
sides using manual dimensions. The

sides must be perpendicular to the dimension
line.
7 Corners - Check this box to locate the
corners of all cabinets within the

manual reach area. Angled cabinets will be
dimensioned to their corners at a right angle
to the dimension line. The cabinet fronts or
sides do not need to be perpendicular or
parallel to the dimension line.
Electrical - Check this to locate

electrical objects. You can use this
option once you are ready to precisely
position electrical objects.
9 Openings - Check one of the four
options to determine both the default

program and manual override behaviors
when dimensioning openings. This section
affects both the automatic and manual
dimension tools.
Centers - Check this to locate dimensions to
the center of windows and doors.
Sides - Check this to locate both sides of
windows and doors. This does not dimension
the rough opening. It dimensions to the
window or doors nominal width.
Casing - Check this to locate both sides of
windows and doors at the edge of the casing.
Because casing can have different widths on
each side of an exterior wall, an opening may
show different widths depending on which of
its sides the dimension line is drawn.
699
Rough Opening - Check this to locate both

sides of windows and doors at the rough
opening. When editing dimension lines and
moving their marks, this must be checked in
order to place a mark at the rough opening.
Otherwise a mark can be placed at the
opening side or the casing edge, but not at
the rough opening.
Line/Sides - Check this to locate lines and

sides which are perpendicular to the
dimension line. If the lines or sides are not
perpendicular to the dimension line, they will
not be dimensioned. In CAD mode,
dimensions will automatically locate
perpendicular CAD lines or sides whether
this is selected or not.
Note: If neither box is checked, Automatic

dimensions will default to locating the centers
of openings. Manually drawn dimensions will
not locate openings at all.
Ends/Corners - Check this to locate all ends

of lines or corners of polylines, no matter
what angle they are in relation to the
dimension line.
10 CAD Objects - This section affects
Text - Check this box to locate text objects.
only manual dimensions of 2D objects.
Extensions Tab
1
3
2
4
1 Gap From Marked Object - Specify a
fixed gap between the marked object

and the end of the extension line. If the
dimension line is moved, the extension line
will update, and the gap will be maintained.
700
2 Length Towards Marked Object -

the extension line that points toward the
marked object.

the extension line that points away from the
marked object.
4 Proximity Fixed - Check this box to
specify a fixed proximity between the

marked object and the dimension line. This
will have no effect when the mark is at the
arrowhead.
If you specify fixed proximity as your default
automatic dimensions will set the closest
mark as fixed proximity. Automatic
dimensions ignore the fixed proximity

default and use the default spacing values.
You can only fix the proximity for a single
extension line.
5 Chief Version 8 Compatible
Extensions - Check this box for

extensions to function as they did in Version
8. See Compatibility With Previous
Versions on page 681.
56 Short Extensions - Check this box to
have short, uniform-length extension

lines created instead of the extension lines
reaching the object it locates.
Font tab
1
2
1 Layer - Specify and define the
properties of the layer on which

dimensions are placed. See Layer Tab on
page 123.
2 Font - Specify the font and font style
used for dimensions. See Text Tab on

page 711.
Arrow Tab
For information about the Arrow tab, Arrow
Tab on page 735.
701
Dimensions
3 Length Away From Marked Object -
702
Chapter 30:
Text
Text
Chapter Overview
Text is an ideal way to draw attention to
design elements. Text can be added in floor
plan view; cross section/elevation view; and
to layout.
Text lines with arrow can be attached to text
objects, allowing you to direct attention to
specific plan details.
The display of text can be controlled by layer
or set specifically for each text object.
Chapter Contents
Text Defaults
The Text Tools
Fonts
Adding Text
Text Arrows
Displaying Text
Selecting Text
Editing Text
Text Macros
Special Text Characters
Text Specification Dialog
Text Defaults
Arrow Defaults
Text Defaults
Default settings can be accessed by
See Text Defaults on page 714.
may want to include them in a template used

for all new plans. See Template Plans on
page 79.
Text default settings are stored with the plan.

If you use certain text settings often, you
703
The Text Tools

Click the Text Tools
parent button to
line with arrow. See Text Arrows on page

705.
Click the Text child button; enter text

in the Text Specification dialog;
and click OK to place text. See Text Specification Dialog on page 711.
Click the Callout child button and

click in a plan or layout to place a
callout. See Callouts on page 718.
Click the Text Line With Arrow child

button and draw a line to place a text
Click the Marker child button and

click in a plan or layout to place a
marker. See Markers on page 722.
Fonts
Chief Architect allows multiple fonts to be
used within the same file. Only one font may
be defined for each text object; but each text
object may use a different font.
Blueprint Fonts
Three architectural fonts: Blueprindbt, City
Blueprint, and Country Blueprint are
included with Chief Architect.
Adding Text
Text can be added in floor plan view; to
CAD details; to elevation views; or in
layout files.
To add text
704
1.
Click the Text

button or select
CAD> Text> Text. from the menu.
2.
Click where you would like the center of

the first line of text to appear. The Text
Specification dialog opens. See Text

3.
Enter text and click OK.
4.
To edit text, select it and use the edit

handles that display. See Editing Text
on page 707.
Up to 32,000 characters can be inserted in

one text object. It is usually better to use
several smaller text objects when a lot of text
must be inserted.
Text Arrows
Text Arrows
The Text With Arrow tool places a text
object with an arrow already attached.
This arrow can be selected and moved like
any other arrow.
Check these if you would like the text line

with arrow to update its position on the text
object if the text object or text line with
arrow is moved.
The first segment of a polyline arrow

attached to text maintains its angle when
Auto Position is off.
Auto Position is turned off automatically

when an arrow is not attached to one of
the auto position locations.
using the Text Line with Arrow

child
button or by selecting CAD> Text> Text
Arcs and splines with arrows can also be

attached to text in CAD mode.
Line with Arrow

from the menu. There
is no limit to the number of text lines with
arrow that can be attached to a text object.
The behavior of auto positioning is

illustrated in the following image. The arrow
has the Auto Position Tail option checked.
When selected, grabbed at the head, and
moved, the tail of the arrow snaps to different
locations while maintaining its connection to
the text object.
Text Line With Arrow

Text lines with arrow can be attached
to text objects, callouts, and markers
A Text Line with Arrow
behaves like a
Line With Arrow

with one exception:
Text Line with Arrow are initially placed on
the default Text layer as specified by the
default and text object, not the default CAD
layer. For more information see Line With
Arrow on page 730.
Auto Positioning Arrows

Open a text line with arrow to open the Line
Specification dialog. On the Arrow Tab,
Auto Position Tail and Auto Position Head
become available if either or both ends of the
text line with arrow are attached to a text
object.
Special Use Arrows

A text line with arrow designated as a special
use arrow offers unique functionality that
may be useful when annotating the height of
various platforms. A special use arrow
replaces the first number in the attached text
object with the height of the architectural
705
Text
Text With Arrow
object it is attached to on the other end. The

height is relative to the first floor elevation of
0-0.
To create a Special Use Arrow
1.
Create a text object that includes a number such as, Foundation Wall Height 1.
2.
Using the Text Line With Arrow

tool, draw an arrow that connects the
text object with a stem wall, footing,
slab, foundation slab, custom
countertop, or stair landing.
3.
Select and open the arrow for specification, check Special Use on the Arrow
tab, and click OK.
4.
The text object should now read Foundation Wall Height 3' 0".
Displaying Text
Text display attributes can be controlled by
layer. By default, text is initially placed on
the layer specified by the default text object.
The display attributes can also be controlled

for individual text objects, independent of
the layer that contains it. See Text Specification Dialog on page 711.
To move text to a different layer, select the

text object (or group of text objects), then
Text objects do not need to be displayed at all

times. For instance, electrical notes need to
be displayed with the electrical plan but not
with the framing plan. You can create layer
sets to control the display of text and other
objects. See Layer Sets on page 127.

edit button to
open the Text Specification dialog. The
layer containing the selected text object can
be changed on the Line Style tab. See Line
Selecting Text
To select a single text object, click on that
object while in Text
706
or Select Objects
mode; or, right-click on it in any mode.

When the handles display, click the Open
Editing Text
Text Specification dialog will not
edit button to access the Text

Specification dialog for that text object.
You can also open the text object for
specification by double-clicking on the text
Object
or Select Objects
mode.
Group Selecting Text Objects

Multiple text objects as well as text arrows
can be selected using a variety of methods.
Click the Text

button to enter Text
mode. Hold down the Shift key and drag a
marquee around the text objects to be
selected. This selection method will limit
the group selection to text only. The
Click the Select Objects

button.
Hold down the Shift key and drag a marquee around the objects to be selected.
This selection method allows dissimilar
objects such as cabinets, furniture and
CAD objects to be selected. Clicking the
Open Object
edit button will not
open the Text Specification dialog.
When a group of objects is selected, you

can add or subtract from the selection set
by holding down the Shift key and clicking on objects.
Editing Text
Text can be edited in a variety of ways.
Selected text objects can be edited using

edit handles.
Selected text objects can be opened for

specification.
Selected text objects can be edited using

the tools that appear on the Edit toolbar.
See Editing Selected Objects on page

10.
Rotate
Resize
A text box cannot be resized smaller than

the text will allow. It can be resized wider
than is necessary.
As a text box is made narrower or wider,

the bottom of the text box will expand or
contract to allow all text to be displayed.
When Concentric
editing is selected
(see CAD Panel on page 108) the text
box will resize, not the text object.
Using the Edit Handles

Selected text objects display edit handles,
illustrated in the following graphic, and edit
as CAD boxes do with a few unique
exceptions
Relocate
707
Text
object in either Text
allow the contents of the selected text

objects to be changed, but other text
attributes can be.
When Resize
editing is selected (see
CAD Panel on page 108) both the text
box and the text object will resize.
Sizing Text
Text size can be set on the Text tab of the
Text Specification dialog.
To use the Printed Size Input dialog
This value is subject to the current drawing
scale, derived from the Page Setup dialog.
See Page Setup Dialog on page 898.
Note that text can be sized in two different
ways:
The Version 9 compatible size uses a

method similar to most word processing
applications, in which size is based on
information stored in the font. This information varies from font to font and is
responsible for apparent differences in
font height.
Chief Architect now uses a font sizing
method similar to that used in most CAD
programs. In this method, text size is
specified as the measurement from the
baseline to the topmost part of the capital
letter A.
To determine the Height needed to produce

text of a certain printed size, click the Scale
button to open the Printed Size Input
dialog.
1.
Click the Scale button on the Text tab of

the Text Specification dialog to open
the Printed Size Input dialog.
2.
Enter the Desired Print Size of the text.
3.
Click OK to return to the Text

Specification dialog. The Height will
update, reflecting the character height
necessary to print the text at the Desired
Print Size when printed at the specified
Drawing Scale.
In most cases, the Drawing Scale will not

need to be changed in the Printed Size
Input dialog unless you intend to send the
current view to layout at a different drawing
scale.
An uppercase "A" is used to calibrate
the size of printed text. If the desired
print size is one inch, a CAD box of 1" height
should match the height of a capital A,
assuming margins have been turned off. This
rule does not apply to Legacy Plans
Aligning Text
To align text, select it and click the Align
Left
708
edit button; Align Right
edit
Text Macros
Tab Spacing
edit button; or Justify
edit button.
Using these edit buttons to align text is the
same as using the Alignment drop down box
on the Attributes Tab. See Attributes Tab
on page 713.
The Make Parallel
edit button can be
used to make text parallel with architectural
objects.
Text objects can be aligned with other text
objects using a variety of methods. See
Case Study: Aligning Text on page 791.
Tab spacing for tabbed text objects such as

tables can be visually edited.
For example:
1.
Highlight a block of text objects from

the Material List, and press Ctrl + C to
copy them to the Windows clipboard.
2.
Return to the floor plan view; activate

the Text
tool; and click to place a
text object.
3.
Press Ctrl + V to paste the copied materials into the text box; then click OK. The
text object will appear on screen.
4.
Select the text object and note the additional lines with handles separating each
column.
5.
Drag the handles to adjust column spacing.
Copy, Cut and Paste

Copy, Cut and Paste of text in the Text
Specification dialog uses the Windows
clipboard, making it possible to tranfer text
from your plan into other applications or to
copy text from any program in Windows into
Chief Architect.
General notes can be created and saved in a
word processing program; then copied and
pasted into a text box. Sections of the
Material List can also be copied and pasted
into a text box or a word processing or
spreadsheet program.
Text Macros
Text macros insert dynamic information
relevant to the current plan or layout file.
Macros are particularly useful in layouts:
page numbers; drawing scale; and
information to identify drawings can be
inserted to improve organization and clarity.
To insert a text macro

1.
Click the Insert button on the Text tab

of the Text Specification dialog.
709
Text
button; Center
Text Macros
2.
3.
Select from the list of available text

macros. In this example Short Date
(%date.short) is selected.
Click OK to return to the Text
Specification dialog. The formula
will appear in the Text Entry portion of
the dialog.
Macro
Description
%date.short
Inserts a short version of the

date using system settings.
(10/25/04)
Inserts a long version of the
date using system settings
(Monday, Oct 25, 2004)
The drive letter of the current
file. (C:)
The name of the current file.
(myPlan)
The directory path of the current file. (\myplans\)
The directory path of the current file. (\myplans\)
All of the parts of the filename
(C:\myplans\myPlan.plan)
Page number of the current
layout page or nothing if not on
a layout.
Living area of the current plan.
Internal room area of the room
that the center of the text is in.
Standard room area of the
room that the center of the text
is in.
Dimensions of the room that
the center of the text is in.
Current drawing scale. On
screen this will vary based on
the zoom factor. In printouts
this will display the exact scale
used for printing.
The size of the sheet.
24 hour time.
AM/PM time.
Inserts the % sign.
%date.long
%file.drive
%file.name
%file.dir
%file.ext
%file
%page
4.
Click OK to close the Text

Specification dialog. The text will
appear in your plan or layout where it
was placed.
%living.area
%room.area
.internal
%room.area
.standard
%room.dim
ensions
%scale
%sheet.size
%time.24
%time
%%
710

Special text characters such as and can
be inserted into text in the same manner as
text macros. Click the Insert button in the
Text Specification dialog; then click on a

special character to add it to the text.

When text objects are group selected, the
textual content cannot be changed, but
everything else (character height, color,
transparent background, etc.) can be.
Text
The Text Specification dialog displays

for individually selected or group selected
text objects.
Text Tab
1
3
5
2
4
1 Specify the Text Size.
Enter the character Height. This height is

subject to the current drawing scale.
711
Click the Scale button to open the Printed

Size Input dialog.
In Version 9, text size was driven by
dimension information associated with the
current font. Check Version 9 compatible
size to use this information for text sizing.
See Sizing Text on page 708.
2 Click the drop-down list to select a
different Font. If a font is missing when

a file is opened, you will be prompted to
select from the available fonts in the Font
dialog.
The text styles Bold, Underline, Italic, and
Strikeout are available. Check any of the
boxes to apply that style.
3 Click the Insert button to choose from
a list of special characters and text

macros. See Text Macros on page 709.
4 Enter text in the Text Entry Box. If text
is selected and opened for specification

it will display here.
712
Depending on the current preference settings, pressing the Enter key will either
force a new line in the text box or close
the dialog. See Text and Page Setup
Panel on page 99.
Text will automatically wrap to a new

line without requiring a hard return.
Tabs can be added to the text by pressing

the Tab key.
To jump from the text entry area to Text

Size Height using the keyboard, press
Shift + Tab .
5 Check Rotate with Plan to prevent the
the selected text from rotating if the

Rotate View command is invoked. See
Rotate View on page 822. If checked, the
position of its center point will rotate with
the plan, but the angle of the text will not
change in relation to the plan.
Check Preview to show the text in the Text

Specification dialog using the selected
font and font size, as well as the current
settings in the Page Setup dialog.
If you are entering text in a view that will be
sent to layout at a drawing scale that is
different from the current drawing scale in
the Page Setup dialog, the text may not
preview accurately.
Note: Changing the drawing scale in the
Printed Size Input dialog will not effect
the appearance of text in preview mode.
Click the Spell Check button to check the

spelling of the text that displays in the Text
Entry area. If Spell Check finds words that
may be spelled incorrectly, the Check
Spelling dialog will open. See Spell
Check on page 811.
Attributes Tab
1
2
Text
4
5
1 Tabs - Check Box/Grid to have a text
object with tabs display with gridlines

separating the rows and columns of tabbed
text. When no tabs are present, a simple box
is drawn around the text.
The edit box defines the number of spaces
from the left edge of the text box at which
each new column will begin. The first
column will always start at 0. In this case, the
second column (following the first Tab )
starts 10 spaces in, the next at 20 spaces, etc.
2 Select an Alignment option from the

drop-down list to apply to the text.
3 Specify the Position of the text using

CAD coordinates.
The X Position and Y Position of the pointer

can be set to display in the status bar, which
may help determine the exact coordinates of
a location in a plan or layout file. See
Appearance Panel on page 94.
An exact Angle can be entered. An angle of
90 is vertical (pointing up) and an angle of
180 is upside down.
4 Adjust the Size of the text box
surrounding the text by entering a

Height and Width.
713
A width of 0 will make the text box as small

as the text within it will allow. This is a onetime resizing. To make text automatically
resize to the width or height, use the Auto
Width and Auto Height check boxes. If you
manually edit the width or height of the text
box, the corresponding auto size option will
turn off.
5 Specify the Margins to be used with
If no text object is entered on the Text

tab, the link will have nothing to attach
itself to and will not be created.
Chief Architect will append the http://

prefix automatically for links that begin
with "www" when Test Link is clicked.
To create a hyperlink
the text. This is the distance between

the text and the edge of the text box.
1.
A default Left and Right margin will be

applied. Top and Bottom margins are
measured relative to the line height and may
not extend to the text box completely when
given a value of 0.
2.
Link Tab
3.
Enter text on the Text tab of the Text
Enter a link on the Link tab.

Click the Browse button to browse to a
file on your computer or network.
The link can be tested by clicking the
Test Link button.
Click OK to close the Text
To use a hyperlink
1.
Select the text object.
2.
Click the Follow Hyperlink

button to activate the link.
edit
Line Style Tab

Hyperlinks can be associated with text
objects. The link entered on the Link tab will
be associated with the text object that is
entered on the Text tab.

Fill Style Tab

Text Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings from the
menu. Open Text, Callouts and
714
Markers from the Default Settings

dialog; select the Text subheading and click
Arrow Defaults
Edit to open the Text Defaults dialog. For

information about these settings, see Text
determine the initial settings for text objects.

Changes made to default settings will not
alter existing text objects.
The Text Defaults dialog looks almost the

same as the Text Specification dialog.
The values in the Text Defaults dialog
Text Defaults dialog before placing text.
It is a good idea to go over the settings in the
Arrow Defaults
The settings on the Arrow Defaults dialog
determine the initial settings for arrows
drawn using the Text Line With Arrow
tool and the Line With Arrow
tool. For
more information about the settings in this
dialog, see Arrow Tab on page 735.
715
Text

menu. Open Text, Callouts and
Markers from the Default Settings
dialog; select the Arrow subheading and
click Edit to open the Arrow Defaults
dialog.
716
Chapter 31:
Callouts & Markers
Chapter Overview

parent button in
floor plan view or in layout to access the
Callout
, and Marker
child buttons.
Chapter Contents
Callouts &
Markers
Callouts and Markers are a common way to

raise attention to special details in plans.
They come in a variety of shapes, and can be
customized in a variety of ways.
Callouts
Selecting Callouts
Editing Callouts
Callout Specification Dialog
Markers
Selecting Markers
Editing Markers
Marker Specification Dialog
Callout/Marker Defaults
menu to acces callout and marker
defaults. Defaults for callouts and markers
are saved with the plan or layout file.
The default settings for callouts and markers
determine the initial values and settings for
newly placed callouts and markers.
Specification dialog. See Callout

The options in the Marker Defaults dialog
are the same as those in the Marker
Specification dialog. See Marker
The options in the Callout Defaults dialog

are the same as those in the Callout
717
Callouts
Select the Callout
child button,
then click in floor plan view where you
would like a callout to be placed. The
Callout Specification dialog will display.
See Callout Specification Dialog on page
719.
Click OK to close the Callout
Specification dialog and the callout will
added.To add a pointer to a callout, select the

callout and click near the outside of the
circle. A pointer will be created.
If there is a cross section line, only one

pointer may be created.
Change the pointers direction by selecting the callout and dragging the edit handle appearing just beyond the pointer.
Remove a pointer by selecting the

Callout and dragging the pointers handle
into the center of the callout.
Change a pointer into an arrow by dragging the handle away from the callout.
You can form up to two arrows in this
way. Each arrow will be jointed and
behave the same as a text object arrow.
Pointers and Arrows

Callouts can have arrows
and/or pointers added.
With
With
Circles without cross
Pointer
Arrow
section lines can have
several pointers added. Circles with cross
section lines can have only one pointer
Selecting Callouts
Using the Select Objects
or Callout
tool, click on the callout to be selected. You
may also group select callouts by holding
down the Shift key and dragging a marquee
around them using the Callout
tool.
If more than one callout is selected, clicking

the Open Object
edit button will open
the Callout Specification dialog. You
will be able to change the appearance, but
not the text. See Editing Callouts on page
718.
Editing Callouts
The text, size, layer, and color of an existing
callout can be changed. Select the Callout
Specification dialog will open. See

Callout Specification Dialog on page 719.

edit button;
or, double-click on the callout using the
Cross Section Lines
tool. The Callout
Select the Cross Section Line check box on

the Callout tab of the Callout
Callout
718
line perpendicular to the nearest wall. Cross

section lines can be added to any shape.
Move or stretch the cross section line by
selecting the Callout and dragging from the
handle near the end of the cross section line.
The Transform/Replicate Object

edit
button can also be used. See Transform/
Resizing Callouts
Delete a cross section line by selecting the

Callout and grabbing the handle located near
the end of the cross section line and dragging
it to the center of the Callout. Or open the
specification and clear the Cross Section
Line check box.
Changing the character height in the

Callout Specification dialog will
increase text size. The Callout will adjust to
fit the text. Adding more text to either the top
or bottom area will enlarge the Callouts size
as well, unless you have checked "Specify
Callout Size".
Deleting Callouts
Callout size can be adjusted without regard

to its contents by checking Specify Callout
Size in the Callout tab of the Callout
Specification dialog. The value entered
will dictate that individual Callouts size.
Uncheck the box to allow the Callout to
automatically adjust.
Select one or more callouts . Click the Delete

edit button or press the
Del
key.
Moving & Rotating Callouts

Move and rotate Callouts as you would text.
See Using the Edit Handles on page 707,
and Using the Edit Handles on page 707.

Click the Callout
child button and then
in floor plan view where you would like a
callout to be placed. The Callout
Specification dialog will display.
719
Callouts &
Markers
Specification dialog to add a cross section
Callout Tab
1
2
3
4
5
1 Callout Label - Enter the text for the

top row of the callout.
2 Text Below Line - Enter text for a

bottom row if desired.
3 Cross Section Line- Select the check
box to add a cross section line. Cross

section lines may be added to any shape.
720
4 Define the callout shape.

5 Specify Callout Size - Check this box
to specify individual callout size in

inches or millimeters. If this box is left
unchecked, the callout will be sized
according to the size of the text in the callout.
Attributes Tab
1
2
3
1 Check Default to place the callout or
marker on the default layer. Click the

drop down list to select from all layers.
Click Define to open the Select CAD

Layer dialog and choose from all layers. See
Select CAD Layer Dialog on page 124.

Windows standard Color dialog. Use
the dialog to choose the desired line color.
default color for the specified layer.
You can assign white if an object is to
exist but not display on the screen or in
printouts (must print with color on).

different Font.
The text styles Bold, Underline, Italic, and

Strikeout are available.
4 The Character Height is subject to the

current drawing scale.
Click the Scale button to open the Printed

Size Input dialog. For more information,
see Sizing Text on page 708.
In Version 9, text size was based on sizing
information stored in each font rather than
actual character dimensions. Check Version
9 Compatible Size to use this information
for text sizing.
Check Rotate with Plan to prevent the
selected callout from rotating if the Rotate
View command is invoked. See Rotate
View on page 822. If checked, the callouts
center will move with other objects as the
plan rotates, but the orientation of the callout
will not change.
Check Transparent to allow objects behind
the callout or marker to display. If
unchecked, the callout or marker will display
on top of other objects.
721
Callouts &
Markers
Markers
Markers for Level Lines, Test
Borings and Point Markers can be
placed in floor plan view, cross sections, or
CAD details. Framing Reference Markers
should only be placed in floor plan views.
You can also place a framing reference
To create a marker select the Marker

child button. Click in floor plan view to
create a marker. The Marker
Specification dialog will appear. See
Marker Specification Dialog on page 723.
using the Point to Point Dimension

tool.
A point marker will be placed automatically
if you use the Point to Point Dimension tool
and an existing object is not available to snap
to. See Point to Point Dimensions on page
684.
marker by using the Framing Reference

child button directly. See Framing
Reference Markers on page 394.
In addition, point markers can be placed
Selecting Markers
Using the Select Objects
or Marker
tool, click on a marker to select it.
You may also group select multiple markers

by holding down the Shift key and dragging a
marquee around them while using Select
Objects
Editing Markers
Markers can be selected and edited in a
number of ways.
Deleting Markers
Select one or more markers. Click the Delete
edit button or press the Del key.
Moving Markers
Markers are moved the way text objects are.
See Using the Edit Handles on page 707.
722
A new marker or moved marker positioned

near a CAD point, CAD object, or wall
surface will snap to it.
Rotating Markers
Any marker can be rotated. Select it, then
grab the handle at the end of the line between
the two rows of text. Drag the handle to
rotate or stretch it. The text will always be
centered along the line.
edit
button can also be used. See Transform/

To create a marker, select the Marker
child button and click in floor plan view .
The Marker Specification dialog will

display.
Marker Tab
1
2
3
4
Callouts &
Markers
1 Enter optional Text Above Line.

2 Enter optional Text Below Line (Level
Line Marker only).
3 Choose a Marker Type.

Level Line
Test Boring
Point Marker
Reference Marker
4 Enter the Height of the marker in 3D
space. Changes will not affect floor

plan view. Height can only be entered for a
Level Line and Point Marker.
Enter the Marker Radius, in inches

(or millimeters).
Attributes Tab
The Attributes tab for markers is the same
as the Attributes tab for callouts, see
Attributes Tab on page 721.
Only a Framing Reference marker effects

the model. The other marker types are only
cosmetically different.
723
724
Chapter 32:
CAD Objects
Chapter Overview
CAD lines are 2D objects and can be

superimposed on floor plan views; cross
section views; elevation views; and layouts.
They do not affect 3D objects or appear in
3D views.
CAD polylines, however, can be converted to
polyline solids and displayed in 3D views.
Custom countertops, slabs and molding are a
few examples of the many custom objects
that can be created using CAD polylines.
Chapter Contents
The CAD Drawing Tools

Line Tools
Line Specification Dialog
Arc Tools
Arc Specification Dialog
Polylines
Polyline Specification Dialog
Splines
Box Tools
CAD Box Specification Dialog
Circle Tools
CAD Circle/Oval Specification Dialog
Point Tools
Displaying CAD Objects
CAD Blocks
CAD Block Specification Dialog
Creating a Library of CAD Blocks
Dimensions
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog
CAD Details
Plot Plans and Plan Footprints
725
CAD
Objects
With the 2D Computer Aided Drawing

(CAD) tools included in Chief Architect,you
can add the details necessary to create
complete working drawings. Custom details
can be created, saved, and used in other
plans. Individual elevations and cross
sections can also be customized.
The CAD Drawing Tools

Arc Tools
The CAD drawing tools are available when

CAD mode is on. CAD mode can be turned
on using any one of the following methods:
Click the Arc Tools

parent button
Click the CAD Mode On
Select CAD> CAD Mode On from the

menu.
Center/Radius/End Arc
Press
Tangent/End Arc
button.
on the keyboard.
F2
When CAD mode is on, the CAD drawing

tools become available.
The CAD menu can also be used to access

the CAD drawing tools. For an outline of the
CAD drawing tools and their corresponding
menu items and shortcut keys, see CAD
Menu on page 46.
The Draw Arc
About Center
Line Tools
Click the Line Tools
parent button
, Input Line
, Line
, North Pointer
, and
the Sun Angle

child tools are discussed
in detail later in this chapter. See Line
Tools on page 727.
726
, Start/
, Input Arc
, Arc
, and the Arc With Arrow
Spline
Click the Spline
button to draw
connected line segments that form a
spline. See Splines on page 744.
Box Tools
Click the Select CAD Objects

button to select CAD objects and some
CAD-based architectural objects, such as
roof planes. See Selecting Objects on page
8.
With Arrow
child tools are discussed in detail later in

this chapter. See Arc Tools on page 736.
Select Objects
The Draw Line
, Start/End/On Arc
Click the Box Tools

parent button
The Rectangular Polyline
Framing
, Box
, Wall Bridging
, Cross
Box
, and Insulation
child tools are
discussed in detail later in this chapter. See
Box Tools on page 745.
Circle Tools
Click the Circle Tools
parent
right.
Line Tools
The Circle
, Circle About Center
and the Oval

child tools are discussed in
detail later in this chapter. See Circle Tools
on page 748.
Point Tools
Click the Point Tools
parent button
The Place Point
Marker
, Input Point
, Point
, and Delete Temporary Points
child tools are discussed in detail later in

this chapter. See Point Tools on page 749.
Dimension Tools
Click the Dimension Tools
parent
The Dimension Tools

can be used with
CAD objects and are discussed in their own
chapter. See Dimensions on page 681.
Text Tools
parent button
The text tools are functional in CAD and
Architectural modes.
Text
, Text Line with Arrow
Callout
, and Marker
are discussed
in the Text chapter. See Text on page 703.
CAD Layer
Click the CAD Layer button to change
the current default CAD layer. See
Current CAD Layer on page 126.
right.
Click the Line Tools parent button to

Draw Line
Click the Draw Line
child button,
then drag to draw lines from beginning
to end, just like walls are drawn. Like walls,
a line may be drawn back on itself to erase a
section. If Object Snaps
are enabled,
you can connect the end of two lines or arcs
or a line and an arc together. This new entity
is a polyline, which is simply two or more
lines and/or arcs joining end to end into a
single unit. If one end of the polyline is
connected to the other, it becomes a closed
polyline. Closed polylines can be filled with

a pattern, or turned into special 3D objects
such as countertops or slabs which will then
Lines and polylines can be distinguished by
the edit handles that display when selected.
A line displays an edit handle at each end and
one in the middle. If more than three edit
handles display, the object is a polyline.
Line
Polyline
727
CAD
Objects
Line Tools
Lines which may appear connected to a

polyline when unselected may prove to be
unconnected when selected.
All segments forming a polyline display edit
handles when the polyline is selected. To
display the edit handles of one individual
segment at a time, activate the Edit Polyline
New CAD Line dialog

To create a line using absolute values, click
the Input Line
child tool or double-click
the Line Tools

parent button to display
the New CAD Line dialog. This dialog can
be used in four different ways.
Parts
toggle button. See The CAD
Editing Tools on page 764.
1
3
2
4
5
6
The two shapes above appear identical when
unselected. When selected at their left edge,
the polyline on the left reveals that the left
edge is not attached. The polyline on the
right confirms that the left edge is part of the
larger polyline unit.
1 Absolute Location requires the input
of the X Position and Y Position using

plan coordinates. Any location on-screen can
be described using absolute coordinates. It
may help to display the absolute coordinates
of the pointer in the status bar for reference.
See Appearance Panel on page 94.
Input Line
CAD lines can also be created using
absolute values entered using the
keyboard. This method is more precise, but
slower, than using the mouse and is ideal
when the desired length and angle of each
line is known, such as with property lines.
Before any line can be drawn using this
method, a starting point needs to be defined.
If a starting point has not been defined, Chief
Architect will assume a starting point of 0,0.
Any point can be uniquely

described using absolute
coordinates
2 Relative to Start Point requires input
of the X Distance (horizontal) and Y

Distance (vertical) to locate the next
endpoint. This method is easier to understand
728
Line Tools
when one of the two values is 0, which is

straight either horizontally or vertically.
Points can be described

relative to the starting point
using coordinates
3 Relative to Start Point, Polar requires
input of the Distance and the Angle

between the start point and the new line
endpoint. This angle is an absolute angle
where 0 degrees points to the right of the
screen and values are measured CCW such
that 90 degrees is straight up.
from the previous line drawn. Angles can be

in bearings or decimal degrees.
Points described relative to the

previous line depend upon the
previous line for orientation
5 Click Next to create a line without
exiting the dialog so you can input the

data for the next line. The current point
(starting point) is the end of the last line.
6 Click the Num Style button to change
the units displayed in the New CAD

Line dialog. See Number Style/Angle Style
Dialog on page 759.
Points can also be described

relative to the starting point
using angle and distance
4 Relative to Previous Line requires the
input of Distance and relative Angle

from the previously created line. This option
is enabled only when the current point is on
the end of an existing line or polyline. The
relative angle is measured counter clockwise
1.
Click the Place Point

child button,
then click on screen to place a point. The
current point is usually the most recently
created point and is highlighted. The
current point is the starting point.
2.
Click the Input Line

child button.
The New CAD Line dialog will open.
3.
Once youve decided which of the four

methods to use (see New CAD Line
dialog on page 728), enter the information and click the Next button at the bottom of the dialog. Continue entering
new values and clicking Next until the
polyline is finished.
729
CAD
Objects
To use the Input Line feature
Note: If you accidentally click OK instead of

Next and you need to continue drawing the
polyline using the New CAD Line dialog,
click the Input Line
4.
button again.
When finished, click OK.
Line With Arrow

Create a line or polyline with an arrow
on one or both ends, using the Line
With Arrow
child button.
A line with arrow is created like a standard

line: click the Line With Arrow
child
button and click and drag on screen. When
the mouse button is released, a line with an
arrowhead is created. The default attributes
are determined by the settings on the Arrow
Defaults dialog. See Arrow Defaults on
page 715.
Change the appearance and behavior of the
line with arrow by selecting it and clicking
the Open Object
edit button. See
Continue to draw connected lines to form a
polyline with an arrowhead at the end. The
arrowheads appear only at the free ends, not
where the lines connect.
Arcs with arrowheads can also be created.
See Arc with Arrow on page 738.
North Pointer
The North Pointer defines the
direction of true north in floor plan
view. If north is not defined, it is assumed to
be straight up. Every bearing is in relation to
north, so establish this direction before
730
entering survey information for plot layouts

or for using bearings to establish polar
direction for the creation or editing of points,
lines, arcs, etc.
There can be only one north pointer per plan.
After selecting CAD> Special> North Pointer
, click and drag to define the pointer,
starting at the tail and dragging toward the
point. The size and orientation of the pointer
are not important at first. Once drawn, the
exact values can be input using the Line
When the north pointer is drawn, select it and
open it for specification. For Angle, type in
the actual angle for north (0 degrees is
horizontal to the right, 90 degrees is straight
up, etc.) For Length, type in the desired
length of the north pointer.
When a north pointer is placed on one floor
of a plan, a north pointer drawn on any other
floor will automatically point in the same
direction. If the direction of the north pointer
is reset on any floor, those on all other floors
will be automatically reset, as well.
To enter the angle in bearings, first type N or
S (for North or South) then the degrees
(followed by d) then the minutes (followed
by ') then the seconds (followed by ") and
finally type either E or W (for East or West).
If minutes are zero, you do not need to enter
a value. Following are some examples of
bearings: It is not necessary to capitalize the
letters. Spaces are also optional.
N 20d 30' E
S 45' W
N 89d 48' 30" W
N 90' E
If you choose to display the angle of a line

when a North Pointer exists, be sure to select
the appropriate format on the Line Properties
Panel of the Preferences dialog. If angles
are set to display as Degrees then the angle
displayed is in relation to 0 degrees
(horizontal to the right) even though a north
pointer is already established. Set the angles
to display as Bearings to display the
relationship to the north pointer. See Line
The same line angle is set to display

as Bearings. This shows the angle in
reference to the North Pointer.
Sun Angle
In floor plan view you can create
multiple Sun Angles. Click the Sun
If you have created a north pointer, the sun

angles location relative to the model is
accurate. For more information, see Sun
Angles on page 663.

Select a line, line with arrow, or text line with
arrow, and click the Open Object
edit
button to open the Line Specifcation
dialog.
731
CAD
Objects
Line angle displayed in degrees. This

does not reference the North Pointer.
Angle
child button and click in floor plan
view The Sun Angle Specification
dialog will display. For each sun angle you
place, specify time of year, time of day, and a
location based on longitude and latitude.
Line Tab
1 Lock - These lock options control how
changing properties on this dialog

affect the line.
Start - Select this option to keep the start of

the line fixed when changing the length,
angle, and end.
End- Select this option to keep the end of the
line fixed when changing the length, angle,
and start.
Center- Select this option to keep the center
of the line fixed. Changing the length of the
line will move the start and end of the line
equally. Changing the angle will rotate the
line around the center.
Select Length/Angle to keep the length and

angle of the line segment fixed. Moving the
start or end will move the other end so the
length and angle of the line do not change.
2 Specify the Length and Angle of the

selected line.
3 Specify the X and Y coordinate for the

Start of the line.
4 Specify the X and Y coordinate for the

End of the line.
The format for these controls can be changed

by clicking the Num Style button. See
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog on page
759.
Line Style Tab

The Line Style tab is found on the
specification dialogs for many different
732
objects. Here you can control the display of a

CAD line or the lines that make up an object.
1
2
3
4
5
selected object will be located. For

more information, see Layer Tab on page
123
2 Specify the Line Color used to display

the selected object.
Check By Layer to use the line color

assigned to this layer.
Click the color bar to assign another line
color to the selected object only using the
Color Chooser dialog. See Color
3 Specify the Line Style used to display

the selected object.
Check By Layer to use the line style

assigned to this layer.
Click the drop-down list to select from all
available line styles. You can use the
keyboard arrow keys to scroll up and down

through the options.
4 Define the Line Weight (in pixels).

Check By Layer to use the Line
Weight assigned to the specified layer.
Setting the line weight to zero (0) will
cause the line weight to be printed as
thinly as is possible.
5 Select from the available Options.

Check Show Length to have the length
of each line display along the line itself,
above the line and centered. This option is
available with line and arc segments. This
feature is commonly used for property lines.
The length format for imperial units (either
fractional feet or decimal feet) is defined on
the Line Properties panel of the
733
CAD
Objects
1 Specify the Layer on which the
Preferences dialog. See Line Properties
Panel on page 108.

Check Show Angle to have the angle of each
line display along the line itself, below the
line and centered. The angle format (either
degrees or bearings) is defined on the Line
dialog. See Line Properties Panel on page
108.
Uncheck All Angles to display only those
angles which are neither horizontal nor
vertical. This is automatically checked when
Show Angle is checked.
Check Reverse Angle to reverse the angle by
180 degrees. This is most commonly used
when showing the bearing of a line, since the
start point of the lines defines the bearing.
Check Move to Front to have the selected
object show in front of other CAD objects in
the same location. This is useful for shifting
the layering of CAD objects to mask or
display objects as desired. (i.e. Move a solid
circle representing rebar to the front of a
hatched foundation wall in a cross section so
734
that the rebar will display and not be masked

by the hatched foundation wall.)
Note: "Move to Front" is not an attribute, it is
an action. When you click OK, the operation
is performed and the box will not be checked
the next time the object is opened.
Check Maintain in Back to have the

selected CAD object drawn first, behind
everything else. In floor plan view, this will
draw the object behind all other objects,
including the architectural objects. In cross
section/elevation views, this will draw the
selected objects behind the structure.
Note: "Maintain in Back" is an attribute and
will remain checked after clicking OK and
reopening.
Check CAD Stops Move to stop the object

when moved against most CAD objects.
Stops can be defined for polylines and any of
the box types except Oval.
Check Wall Stops Move to stop the CAD
object when it bumps into a wall. Stops can
be defined for polylines and any of the box
types except Oval.
Arrow Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
Check Include Arrow to turn the arrow

display on or off.
Select an arrowhead Type from the

drop-down list.
If multiple arrows are selected, and they have

more than one arrowhead type, check No
Change to leave each arrow with its defined
arrow type.
Check Default to set the arrow type to the
default specified on the Arrow tab of the
Text Defaults dialog. See Text Defaults
on page 714.
3 Select the Fill Color used to fill the

arrowheads.
If multiple arrows are selected, and they have

more than one fill color, check No Change
to leave each arrow with its defined Fill
Color.
Check Default to use the default fill color.
4 Define a Size for the arrow(s).

Check Default to use the default size.
5 Specify the Line Weight of the selected

arrow(s).
Setting the line weight to zero (0) will

cause the line weight to be printed as
thin as is possible.

Check Arrow on Both Ends to place a
head on both ends of the selected arrow(s).
Check Special Use Arrow to create an arrow
that can be used in layouts and floor plan
views to display platform elevations. See
Special Use Arrows on page 705.
Auto Position Tail and Auto Position Head
become available when either end of the text
line with arrow or line with arrow is attached
to a text object. Check either or both options
if you would like the text line with arrow to
update its position on the text object if the
text object or text line with arrow is moved.
See Auto Positioning Arrows on page 705.
735
CAD
Objects
The Arrow Tab appears for any line, arc,

polyline, or spline that can have an arrow.
Arc Tools
Click the Arc Tools
parent button
Before deciding which arc tool will work
best for the project at hand, it may be helpful
to be familiar with the different components
that make up an arc.
End
Tangent
Start
Radius
Chord
Start/End/On Arc
Click the Start/End/On Arc child
button; click and hold the mouse button
at the start point of the arc; drag to the end
point of the arc; release the mouse button and
move it to adjust the curvature of the arc;
then release the mouse. Once drawn, an arc
can be edited. See Editing Arcs on page
766.
Center
The center of an arc is the point about

which the arc is drawn.
The radius is the distance from the center

to the arc.
The start is where the arc begins.
The end is where the arc stops.
The chord is the straight line between the

start and end point.
A straight line which intersects an arc and

is perpendicular to the radius of the arc at
that point is tangent to the arc.
Draw Arc
Click the Draw Arc child button, click
at the arcs start point; drag to draw the
arc; then click again at the end point to
complete the arc. Moving the pointer along
the curve while dragging the arc will cause
the arc to curve accordingly. Once drawn, an
736
arc can be edited. See Editing Arcs on

page 766.
Click the Center/Radius/End Arc

child button; click at the center of the
arc; drag to define the length and radius of
the arc; release the mouse button; then move
the mouse to the end of the arc and click
again. Once drawn, an arc can be edited. See
Start/Tangent/End Arc
Click the Start/Tangent/End Arc
child button; click at the start of the
arc; drag a line that defines the arcs tangent
at the start point; then release the mouse.
Arcs can be selected and edited using the
handles or opened for specification. See
Input Arc
An arc can also be drawn to exact
specifications using the New Arc
dialog.
Arc Tools
To use the Input Arc feature

1.
Define a start point by clicking on the

screen using the Place Point
tool.
The X defines the current point, which
is the start point for the new arc.
2.
With the start point is established, click

the Input Arc
the New Arc dialog. Define the arcs
endpoint, curvature, and direction.
Start Direction = 0
Chord Direction = 45
4.
Define the Radius of the arc.
5.
Define one of the values in the Extension group:

Arc Angle: The positive number of
degrees from the center point of the arc
to each of its two endpoints.
Arc Length - The length along the arc
itself from one endpoint to the other.
Chord Length - The length of the
straight line from one end to the other.
Arc Angle = -90
3.
Select either the Start Direction or the

Chord Direction.
The Start Direction defines the angle
of the tangent from the start point.
The Chord Direction defines the angle
of the arcs chord from the start point.
CAD
Objects
Chord Length =
282 13/16
Radius = 200
Arc Length = 314 3/16
6.
Select which direction the arc bends,

either cw (clockwise) or ccw (counter
clockwise).
7.
Click OK to draw the specified arc.
Click the Num Style button to display the
Number Style / Angle Style dialog. See
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog on page

759.
737
Arc About Center

The Arc About Center
child
button allows you to draw an arc by
defining the center and then the end points.
To use the Draw Arc About Center tool
1.
Click the Arc About Center

button.
child
2.
Click once to define the center. If you do

not first click on the arc's center point,
the current point will be used.
3.
Click and drag from the start point of the

arc to its end point.
Arc with Arrow

You can create an arc with an arrow on
one or both ends, using the Arc With
Arrow
child button.

Select an arc and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Arc Specification
dialog.
738
Draw an Arc With Arrow

like a
standard arc. When you release the mouse
button, it will have an arrowhead at the end.
The default attributes are determined by the
settings on the Arrow Defaults dialog.
See Arrow Defaults on page 715. The
arrowhead can be changed by selecting one
or more arrow arcs and clicking the Open
Object
edit button. See Arrow Tab on
page 735.
Continue to draw connected lines and arcs to
form a polyline with an arrowhead at the end.
The arrowheads appear only at the free ends,
not where the lines connect.
Lines with arrowheads can also be created.
See Line With Arrow on page 730.
Arc Tab
changing properties on this dialog will

affect the arc.
Start - Select this option to keep the start
fixed when changing the arc, chord, or end.
Center Y - Specify the y coordinate for the

center of the arc.
Radius - The distance between the center of
the arc and the arc surface.
CAD
Objects
1 The Lock options control how
End - Select this option to keep the end fixed

when changing the arc, chord, or start.
Center - Select this option to keep the center
of the arc fixed when changing the arc.
Arc - Select this option to keep the arc fixed
when changing the arc location.
Chord - Select this option to keep the arc
chord fixed when changing the arc radius.
2 Arc - These parameters define the arc.

Various controls will be disabled
depending on what lock option is used.
Center X - Specify the x coordinate for the
center of the arc.
Start Angle - Specify the angle that a line

drawn from the arc center to the arc start
makes with a horizontal line to the right.
End Angle - Specify the angle that a line
drawn from the arc center to the arc end
makes with a horizontal line to the right.
Arc Angle - The angle between the center of
the arc and each end.
739
End Y - Specify the Y coordinate for the end

of the arc.
End Direction - Specify the angle of a
tangent line at the end of the arc.
5 Chord - These values define the chord

of the arc.
Arc Length - The length of the arc along the

curve.
3 Start - These values define the start

point of the arc.
Start X - Specify the X coordinate for the

beginning of the arc.
Start Y - Specify the Y coordinate for the
beginning of the arc.
Start Direction - Specify the angle of a
tangent line at the start of the arc.
4 End - These values define the end point

of the arc.
End X - Specify the X coordinate for the end

of the arc.
740
Chord Length - The straight line distance

between the two ends of the arc.
Chord Angle - Specify the angle of the

chord (the imaginary straight line going from
the start of the arc to the end of the arc).
Line Style Tab

Arrow Tab
For information about the Arrow tab, see
Polylines
Polylines
Closed Polylines
A polyline consists of two or more line and/

or arc segments which are attached at their
endpoints. If a polyline connects with itself,
it is said to be a closed polyline; if there is a
gap in the polyline, it is said to be open.
An important use of lines and arcs is the
construction of polylines. Create a polyline
Open Polylines
by drawing lines end-to-end, allowing the

end of each successive line to snap to the end
of the previous line. There are a number of
unique polyline editing behaviors that you
should be familiar with before creating and
editing polylines. See Editing Polylines on
page 771.
Select a polyline and click the Open Object

edit button to open the Polyline
Polyline Tab
The Polyline tab of the Polyline

Specification dialog displays the length of
the perimeter, the enclosed area, and the
volume of a closed polyline.
If the polyline is not closed, "Not closed"
will display.
Polylines may be copied, moved, reshaped,
or resized as a single unit. See Editing
741
CAD
Objects
Selected Line Tab

selected segment of the polyline is a line as
opposed to an arc. The data here applies to
the selected line segment. The currently
selected line segment displays an extra
handle at its midpoint when selected.
Moving the start of a line segment will move
the end of the previous connected line, if
there is one. Moving the end of a line
segment will move the start of the next
connected line, if there is one.
The Selected Line tab of the Polyline
742
Line tab of the Line Specification dialog.

See Line Tab on page 732.
Arc Tab
The Arc tab displays when the selected
segment of the polyline is an arc as opposed
to a line. The data here applies to the selected
arc. The currently selected arc displays an
extra handle at its midpoint when selected.
See Arc Tab on page 739.
Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
9
10
You can apply a fill pattern to boxes, circles

and most closed polylines. The pattern
options are disabled until a pattern other than
None is selected from the drop-down list.
Select a pattern, then click anywhere in the
box to close the drop-down list.
Fill Pattern - Choose a pattern from
the drop-down list. If the pattern
Custom is selected, the custom pattern
options will become available.
2 Spacing - Define the spacing for the

selected fill pattern.
3 Angle - Define the angle of the selected

hatch pattern.
Set the Line Weight for the selected

object.
5 Transparent Pattern Fill - Check this
box to make the hatch patterns

transparent. When checked, any objects
behind the fill pattern would then show

through.
Fill Pattern Color - Define a different
line color or fill color if a solid is
specified. This will override the layer color.
7 Select Use Background Color to use
the background color for solid fills or

patterns.
8 Use Layer Color - Check this box to
have the fill pattern use its own layers

color for the pattern lines. If it is a solid fill,
checking this will cause the fill color to be
the same as the layers color.
9 Custom Pattern File and Name -
Select Custom from the fill pattern

drop-down list to activate this option.
If any custom pattern files (.pat files) exist,
enter the file name or click Browse to find
the file on your computer.
743
CAD
Objects
11
10 Pattern - Choose a pattern from the
drop-down list. This list will display all
custom patterns available in the selected file.
11 Scale - Choose a scale for the pattern.
Splines
A Spline is a curve which passes
smoothly through a set of points.
Splines can be selected and opened for
specification. See Polyline Specification
Dialog on page 741.
4.
As soon as two straight spline segments

connect end-to-end, the straight segments become a curve which passes
through the endpoints defined by the
original segments. Each point is called a
vertex.
To use the Spline tool
5.
Draw a few more segments, connecting

each to the free end of a previously
drawn segment.
1.
Click the Spline
child button.
2.
Draw the first spline segment just as you

would a line. A single spline segment
will appear identical to a line. You may
need to turn off Angle Snaps
draw freely.
Result
to
As drawn
6.
Notice as additional segments are drawn

that the spline changes the curvature of
the previous segment to create a continuous curve between the last three points.
As drawn
3.
Draw the second segment from the end

of the first at a different angle.
Result
As drawn
7.
Result
744
Form a closed spline by drawing a segment between its two free ends.
Box Tools
Spline Tab
Draw segment to close
8.
The result is an irregular curve which

flows smoothly through each vertex.
Result
Applications for Splines

Splines are typically used in situations where
there is an irregular curve. A contour line is a
typical example. Splines are useful wherever
a free-flowing curve is needed.
Polylines that are splines will display the

spline tab in the Polyline Specification
dialog.
New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
between line segments that are used to draw
the spline. Specifying a smaller angle will
cause the spline to draw smoother.
Specifying a larger angle will cause the
spline to draw faster.
Click the Box Tools

parent button
Rectangular Polylines
A Rectangular Polyline begins as a
rectangle, drawn from corner to corner.
Once selected, a rectangular polyline can be
edited into any shape. See Editing Boxes
on page 773.
Boxes
Draw a box from one midpoint to the
midpoint of the opposite side. A box
draws as a square at first and can be reshaped
into a rectangle. A box will always have four

90 degree corners.
Boxes have some unique editing behaviors
that are important to be aware of. See
Editing Boxes on page 773..
Framing
Click the Framing
child button to
draw a 1-1/2" (38 mm) wide box of any
length. When dragging the length, the
framing box appears to be a line until the
mouse button is released. Specially designed
to represent general framing materials, the
box can be resized to any specification using
745
CAD
Objects
Box Tools
the handles or the Framing Specification

dialog, discussed later in this chapter.
Multiple copies can also be laid out
automatically at defined spacing using the
Multiple Copy
edit button or the
Transform/Replicate Object dialog.
Objects drawn with this tool are listed in the

Framing category of the Materials List. To
specifically draw rafters or joists, click the
Rafter
button or Joist
button and
drag to draw a framing member.
Cross boxes are automatically maintained at

ends of framing members cut by the cross
section cutting plane. They automatically
update when the cross section first displays
The Trim Objects
and whenever the Fill Window

used.
and Extend Objects
tools work well to adjust the framing

members to the correct length, and to cut
their ends off at an angle to fit against the
trimming members.
Wall Bridging
Click the Wall Bridging
child
button to draw wall bridging in a wall
detail. For more information, see Editing
Cross Section/Elevation Views on page
638.
Cross Boxes
The Cross Box behaves the same as a
box. The only difference is the cross
which is automatically drawn whenever this
tool is used. Use the cross box add framing
detail to cross sections.
You may want to create and resize one cross

box for each framing member size used, such
as 2x4, 2x6, 2x12; then copy and paste the
original as needed. It is easiest to resize using
CAD Box Specification dialog.
Insulation
Use the Insulation
tool to draw
insulation in cross section details. Drag
the length of the insulated area, then select
object and use the edit handles to move or
resize it. It may be easier to use the CAD
Box Specification dialog to define the
insulation width and length exactly.
Drag to
create
746
tool is
Result
Select
to edit

Select a rectangular poyline, a box, a framing
box, a wall bridging box, a cross box, or
edit button to open the CAD Box

insulation and click the Open Object
General Tab
1
2
Select Normal to specify a normal box.

Select Cross to specify a cross box.
Select Insulation to specify an insulation
box.
2 Define the Position of the box.

Specify the X Position of the center of
the box.
Specify the Y Position of the center of the
box.
Specify the Angle of the box.
3 Specify the Size of the box.

Specify the Height of the box.
Specify the Width of the box.

To find out which direction is the height
and which is the width of a square box,
select it. The triangular rotate handle will be
nearest the side you originally dragged from
when creating the box. Changing the height
will change the length of this side.
Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab

747
CAD
Objects
1 Specify a Box Style.
Circle Tools
Click the Circle Tools
parent
Snaps
, both the center point and the
radius point will snap to any appropriate
nearby CAD object, intersection or
point.
right.
Draw a Circle by dragging across the
diameter. If a small circle is needed,
draw a larger circle and then resize it.
Use the Circle Specification dialog to
accurately define size, position and other
attributes. You may also fill a circle with a
hatch pattern or solid fill. See CAD Circle/
Oval Specification Dialog on page 748.
Draw Circle About Center

Click the Circle About Center
child button to create a circle by
dragging the radius out from the center point.
To use the Draw Circle About Center tool
1.
Click the Circle About Center
2.
Click on screen to define the center of

the circle
3.
tool.
Drag the radial distance and release the

mouse button. If you are using Object
Ovals
An Oval is drawn first as a circle and
then reshaped into an oval.
To use the Oval tool
1.
Drag the length of the oval then release

the mouse button.
2.
Select the oval. Note the edit handles

that display. See Editing Circles and
Ovals on page 774.
Two visual clues distinguish between ovals

and circles, even when both appear circular.
The center of an oval displays a + when
drawn. An oval also displays a triangular
rotation edit handle when selected. Neither
of these is true for a circle.
Use the CAD Oval Specification dialog
to accurately set the length and width of the
oval, as well as other attributes.
CAD Circle/Oval Specification Dialog

The CAD Circle Specification dialog
and the CAD Oval Specification dialog
are almost exactly the same. The CAD Oval
748
Specification dialog has an additional

setting for Angle.
Point Tools
General Tab
1 Specify the Position of the circle/oval.
Line Style Tab
Specify the X Position of the center of

the circle/oval.

Specify the Y Position of the center of the

circle/oval.
Specify the ovals Angle.
2 Specify the Size of the circle/oval.
Fill Style Tab

CAD
Objects
Specify the Length and Width of an

oval; or the Diameter and Radius of a circle.
Point Tools
Click the Point Tools
parent button
Click the Place Point
child button
and click on screen to place a
temporary CAD point in the plan. These
temporary points can be used to accurately
position other CAD objects.
To use the Input Point tool

1.
Click the Input Point

child button
to open the New CAD Point dialog.
Input Point
A new point can be placed using
absolute coordinates as well.
749
Note: When using Imperial units, lengths and

distances may be entered as inches or feet
and inches, in either decimal or fractional
form. Fractional inches with denominators 2,
4, 8 and 16 are allowed. Millimeters are used
for all metric distances. Angles may be
entered as bearings, decimal degrees, or
degrees, minutes and seconds.
2.
Select Absolute Location, and enter the

CAD points absolute coordinates. The
new point becomes the current point and
is highlighted.
3.
To locate a second point, click the Input

Point
child button, opening the

New CAD Point dialog again. A new
point may be located using keyboard
input in the same way a line is drawn
using keyboard input. The only difference is that there is no line connecting
each of the points. See To use the Input
Line feature on page 729.
Absolute Location requires input of
the X and Y coordinates which are
related to the absolute origin (0,0).
Relative to Current Point (not Polar)
requires input on the distance along the
X-axis (horizontal) and along the Yaxis (vertical) to locate the next point.
Relative to Current Point, Polar
requires input of the distance and the
angle between the start point and the
new point. This is the most typical
method.
The Next button at the bottom of the New

Point dialog is helpful when placing several
points at a time. Place a point, click Next,
and place another point, without closing the
New Point dialog.
Point Markers
Use a permanent Point Marker as a
snap point for dimension lines and
other CAD objects. Click the Point Marker
child button and click in the view to
place a permanent point marker. Point
markers are one of the available types of
markers that display as a simple cross, with
or without a text label. They can be opened
for specification and modified to include a
label or to alter their display attributes.
You can also place point markers using the
Marker
tool, which will allow you to
specify the marker label and type when
placed. See Markers on page 722.
Temporary Points
Temporary points are used for snapping
objects. These may be added manually or the
program may add them automatically, such
as when the Input Line
or Input Point
750
, Input Arc
tools are used. These
Point Tools
points are temporary and will not be saved

with the plan.
When multiple temporary points are displaying, the current point is highlighted so it can
be easily identified. The current point is
either the most recently created or the most
recently accessed point. To make a different
point the current point, click on it while
using the Place Point
tool.
Moving CAD Points

Points can be repositioned relative to
themselves; another point; or a CAD object
such as a line. This can be used to locate the
point exactly one-quarter the distance along a
given line, or exactly 6 inches from one end.
This new location can then be used for many
things, such as the start point of a new line.
To reposition a point, double-click on the
point you want to move to display the Move
Point dialog.
There can only be one current point
To delete the current point, make sure no

other CAD objects are selected, and press the
Del key on the keyboard. You can continue
to press the Del key to delete temporary
points one at a time in the reverse order in
which they were created.
Delete Temporary Points

All temporary points can be deleted at
once using the Delete Temporary
Points child button.
Delete Temporary Points
saves time
when there are a lot of points on the screen.
There are four ways to move a point using

this dialog. The two relative ways allow you
to specify normal or polar values.
Absolute Location is set the same as when
positioning a new point. The current location
is always listed in absolute coordinates at the
bottom of the dialog.
Relative to Itself sets the point's new
location relative to its current one. The new
location can be placed using rectangular or
polar coordinates, just as when positioning a
new point.
Relative to Prev. Point positions the new
point location relative to the point that was
current just before the point being moved
was created or made current. To be sure that
the correct reference point is used, click on
751
CAD
Objects
Current
Point
it; then double-click on the point to be

moved. This will make the reference point
the previous point. The point you are moving
is always the current point.
From Line End is enabled when the point is
near a CAD object. The Along Line box
allows a value to be entered to position the
point on the CAD object at the defined
distance from the end to which it was
originally closest. For an arc, the distance is
measured along the curve. This distance may
be defined as a percentage of the total line or
arc length by checking the percentage %
box. Thus 0, or 0% moves the point to the

closest end of the nearest edge, 50% to the
midpoint, and 100% to the other end.
Negative numbers and percentages greater
than 100 are allowed.
If the point is near a box or polyline, then

Along Line applies to the line or arc
forming the closest side just as it does to
a unconnected line or arc. If the point is
near an oval or circle, then the point is
placed along an (invisible) axis line along
which the item was originally drawn.
Displaying CAD Objects

Current CAD Layer - Click to
display the Select CAD Layer
dialog. Any CAD objects drawn are
automatically placed on the selected layer.
The current CAD layer is displayed in the
right side of the Status Bar at the bottom of
the screen.
Display Options - Click to display the
Layer Display Optionsdialog.
The CAD Default Layer is where all CAD
objects are placed unless otherwise specified.
Each CAD layer has several options which
affect every item on that layer. See
CAD Layers in Cross Sections

When CAD mode is enabled in a cross
section, CAD objects can be drawn on any
CAD layer desired, just as when CAD is
enabled in floor plan view.
752
For each wall, floor, ceiling, roof or other

surface that is cut by a cross section plane, a
CAD line is produced that follows the cut.
For any framing item or truss that is cut, a
cross box is produced to represent the cut
end. These CAD objects can be used as snap
guides to locate other CAD objects or blocks,
as well as dimension line indicators.
CAD objects generated by cross section
views are placed on the Cross Section Lines
layer and are updated whenever the Fill
Window
button is selected in the cross
section view. The Cross Section Lines layer
is located by default in the Layer Display
Options dialog, since these lines should
remain with the cross section view.
The Layer Display Options dialog can be
displayed in an elevation or cross section
view by selecting Display Options
button when the CAD mode is active.
CAD Blocks
CAD Blocks
Make Block
Create a CAD block by selecting
multiple CAD and text objects, then
click on the Make Block
edit button that
appears on the Edit toolbar. The new block
acts like a single CAD object. CAD blocks
can contain other CAD blocks, referred to
these are called "Nested" CAD blocks.
When creating a new block from a group of
CAD objects, two things are actually created.
A block definition, which holds all of the
items in a group is created, as well as a block
instance that displays the block at a position,
orientation and size that matches that of the
items in the original group. More instances
of the new block are made by copying the
first instance. Any copy can be repositioned,
resized and rotated independently of any
other block instance.
For a single plan file, these instances share
the same definition regardless of which floor
or CAD detail in which they appear. Copying
a block instance to a completely different
plan file also copies the block definition to
that plan.
Select a block instance by clicking on any
one of its components. It moves, rotates and
resizes much like a CAD box. Drag from a
corner to resize the block proportionately.
Drag from a side handle to resize in only one
dimension. Resizing each dimension
differently can distort ovals and arcs, and

prevents exploding the block instance.
A CAD block cannot contain the following
CAD objects: roof planes, layout boxes,
north pointer, plan footprint, roof/gable line,
sun angle arrow, bearing line, or joist
direction line. If any these are selected in the
group from which a block is made, the group
cannot be turned into a CAD block.
Text
, Callouts
and Markers
may be included in a CAD block. CAD
objects that display in 3D (such as counter
tops and slabs) can be part of a block.
Counter Tops and Slabs that are blocked in
a CAD block will still generate in 3D views.
Explode Block
Click on any item in a single block to
select the block. When a single block is
selected, click the Explode Block
button
to break it back into its individual
components. You cannot explode a block by
using a marquee to select it: you must click it
to select it.
If the block is composed of other blocks,
exploding the outermost block will break it
down into the component blocks. Note that
the block definition is not exploded or
changed, just the instance.
753
CAD
Objects
A CAD block is a group of CAD objects that

have been joined together. CAD blocks can
be saved to the library for use in other plans.
CAD Block Management

1
2
3
4
5
6
Select CAD> CAD Block Management
to display the CAD Block Management
dialog.
1 Displays a list of all CAD blocks for the
current plan file. This includes all CAD

blocks that appear as instances on any floor,
in a CAD detail or saved elevation/cross
section view. It can also include CAD blocks
that currently have no instance anywhere in
your plan. These blocks can remain after all
of their instances have been deleted.
2 In Use shows which blocks have at

least one instance being used.
754
3 Select any block in the list, click Insert,
then click in floor plan view; a CAD

detail; or in a cross section/elevation view to
place a new instance of the block into that
view.
4 Rename - Click to specify a new name

for the CAD Block.
5 Press the Purge button to mark all
unused block definitions from your

plan for deletion. Blocks will delete when
OK is clicked.
6 Delete/Undelete - A selected block
may be marked Delete or Undelete with

this button. Blocks will delete when OK is
clicked.

General Tab
1
4
CAD block in the plans CAD block

list. While all other changes in this dialog
affect only this instance of the block,
changing the name modifies the block
definition.
This name is used when the block is exported

via DXF/DWG, and is also imported with
DXF/DWG block definitions. A CAD
blocks name is limited to 255 characters.
If you use a name that is in use, the definition
of the other block is overwritten and the
instances of that block will be updated to
match the current definition.
Copyright - Displays the blocks copyright,
if there is one.
2 X Position - Specify the x coordinate of

the center of the CAD block instance.
Y Position - Specify the y coordinate of the

center of the CAD block instance.
Angle - Specify the angle for the CAD block
instance.
3 Height - Specify the height of the CAD

block instance.
Height Factor - Specify the ratio of the

height of the CAD block instance to the
height of the original CAD block.
If the height and width factors are set to
different values, the instance cannot be
exploded and ovals and arcs will be
distorted.
755
CAD
Objects
1 Block Name - Specify the name for the
Width - Specify the width of the CAD block

instance.
CAD panel of the Preferences dialog. See

Preferences - CAD Panel on page 776.
Width Factor - Specify the ratio of the

width of the CAD block instance to the width
of the original CAD block.
By Object - Specify that the individual

objects in the block control their own line
style and fill style.
If the height and width factors are set to

different values, the instance cannot be
exploded and ovals and arcs will be
distorted.
4 By Block - Specify that the blocks line
style and fill style should override the

line style and fill style of the individual
objects in the block.
New block instances default to By block

unless New blocks by layer is checked in the
756
Line Style Tab

Tab, see Line Style Tab on page 732.
Fill Style Tab

For information about using the Fill Style
Tab, see Fill Style Tab on page 743.
CAD Blocks can be saved in the library and

used in all plan files.
4.
In the Add to Library dialog, add a

new CAD Block category or select an
existing one.
To create your own CAD Block library:
5.
Name or rename the block if desired. If

multiple blocks are selected, the block
names will be used as the library names.
1.
Have one or more CAD blocks ready in

the current view.
2.
Select the CAD block(s).
3.
Click the Add to Library

ton.
edit but-
757
CAD
Objects
Use the CAD Blocks library

like you
would any other library. Select the item, then
place it in the drawing.
CAD Blocks which are placed from the
library can be exploded back into their
component parts. This allows for
modifications to the blockl. Once you have
made the modifications, you can create a
new block with the changes and add that
modified block to the library as well.
6.
Browse the library.
Many manufacturers provide CAD details in

DXF format. You can import these into a
plan, block them, and turn them into library
items. Some manufacturers details have
already been provided in library format for
you.
Dimensions
For detailed information about using
the Manual Dimension tool,
seeDimensions on page 681. There are
several things to remember when
dimensioning CAD objects.
758
Make sure that CAD objects are displayed in the current view. Dimensions
will not look for CAD objects that are not
displayed. If CAD objects are turned off
and do not display, related dimensions
will not display either. See Dimension
Fonts on page 682.
Automatic dimensions do not work in
CAD mode. Dimensions must be manually drawn.
Dimensions in CAD mode follow the

Allowed Angles set in the Plan
Defaults dialog. If the Angle Snaps
toggle button is on, dimensions can be

drawn at any angle. To find the length of
a line or polyline edge drawn at a nonrestricted angle, drag a dimension line
along it. Once drawn, the dimension line
will snap to the exact direction of the line
and give its exact length.
Select the Angular Dimension button

to dimension angles between CAD
objects and within CAD blocks. Angular
dimensions can also be used with objects,
such as walls, joists or cabinets. See
Angular Dimensions on page 683.
Many of the CAD dialogs have a Number

Style button. Clicking this opens the
Number Style/Angle Style dialog which
controls the format for distances and angles.

This affects which units display in the
dialogs.
Each plan file can store any number of CAD

Details. These are a special window which
can be used to draw and store any type of
separate detail, such as plot layouts, cross
section details, etc. The CAD Detail
windows save and restore with the plan from
which they were created. They may be sent
to the printer or to the layout sheet like any
other plan or view. CAD information can
also be copied in or out of a CAD Detail
window using group select and CAD copy
functions.
Creating CAD Details
CAD
Objects
CAD Details
The Create New CAD Detail dialog will

open. Name the CAD Detail and click OK.
Select CAD> CAD Detail from the menu to

open the CAD Details dialog. Click New to
create a new detail.
759
A new CAD Detail with the given name is

created in a new window. The new CAD
Detail automatically saves with the model.
Opening CAD Details

Select CAD> CAD Detail from the menu to
open the CAD Details dialog. Select from
the list of CAD details, then click Open.
CAD Details are listed in the order they were
created.
(with a count for each) will be in the Truss

Detail CAD detail.
When walls are framed using the Framing
dialog, a special detail is created for each
wall. These details, however, are not
accessible via the CAD Details dialog, but
only by selecting a wall and clicking the
Open Wall Detail
edit button. See Wall
CAD Detail from View

This tool works for any view that is
derived from drawings, such as floor
plan views, cross section/elevations, and
vector views. It does not work for render
views or material lists. It converts what is
seen on screen into CAD objects, which can
then be edited independently.
Special Details
Some CAD details are created automatically
by the system. If you have any roof trusses in
your plan, a diagram of each truss type used
Note: It is important to understand that a

detail created with the CAD Detail from View
tool is not dynamically linked to your view.
Once made, any changes made to the view
will not be updated in the detail.

With conventional survey information you
can create an accurate plot plan in a CAD
Detail window using the CAD tools. See
elevation data and accurately position

buildings for 3D modeling of home and lot.
The plot plan can be sent to Layout and

included in working drawings. See Floor
Plan Views and CAD Details on page 912.
Plan Footprint is a function that quickly

imports the building footprint into a CAD
detail. Once the plan footprint is imported
into the detail, you can control what
information displays.
The plot plan can also be converted into a

terrain perimeter which allows you to add
760
Plan Footprint
To use the Plan Footprint feature

1.
6.
Open the floor plan view of the plan

from which you would like to create a
plan footprint.
DN
The floor plan will display in the CAD

Detail window. You may need to click
Fill Window
to center the footprint
on screen. The footprint edits like a
polyline and can be moved, rotated, or
placed anywhere in the CAD Detail window.
DECK
15'8 x 9'7
30" GE
electric
cooktop
DN
KITCHEN
12'4 x 10'5
DINING
Allow 39"
for ref.
12'4 x 13'5
Double
electric
oven
LIVING
15'6 x 25'2
HALL
2'6 x 6'5
NOOK
10'3 x 9'5
UP
DN
HALL
4'8 x 31'10
CLOSET
2'2 x 7'2
two vents, min 50 sq in ea.,

max 5 in off floor
FAMILY
13'1 x 19'1
UP
solid core door, 1

hr rating
UP
DN
5/8 inch, wallboard on walls

& ceiling between house and
garage
GARAGE
22'7 x 27'5
BATH
6'6 x 5'6
PORCH
UP
15'7 x 5'6
DN
Floor Plan View
Select CAD> CAD Detail from the

menu to open the CAD Details dialog.
3.
Click the New button, name the CAD

Detail, and click OK.
4.
From the CAD Detail select CAD> Special> Plan Footprint from the menu.
The Plan Footprint dialog will open.
5.
Choose which floor to use from the

drop-down list and click OK.
DN
Plan Footprint
If the model consists of several buildings, a

footprint will be created for each building.
Each footprint will act like a polyline, but
adjusting one footprint will automatically
adjust all the footprints in order to maintain
their relationship.
If the footprint is adjusted, sometimes the
screen will not refresh properly. Select
Window> Refresh Display from the pull-down
menus to redraw the screen.
If you have edited your 3D model since
creating the Plan Footprint, you can update
the footprint by refreshing the screen in the
761
CAD
Objects
2.
CAD detail containing the plan footprint.

The footprint will update to include any
changes made to the 3D model.
If you reverse a plan, or edit it using the Edit
Area, the plan footprint will be updated
automatically.
762
Layer Display
Options Dialog
The items that display in a Plan Footprint can
be controlled using the Layer Display
Chapter 33:
CAD Editing Tools
CAD objects, discussed in the previous

chapter, can be edited extensively once
placed into a plan. The size and shape of
CAD objects can be edited using the mouse.
When a CAD object is selected, edit buttons
also appear that allow you to perform a
variety of advanced editing functions. Plan
default settings and global preference
settings allow you to control program and
object behavior when editing CAD objects.
Chief Architects CAD editing tools will help
you create plan details quickly and
communicate them clearly.
Chapter Contents
The CAD Editing Tools

Selecting CAD Objects
Editing Lines
Editing Arcs
Editing Splines
Editing Polylines
Editing Boxes
Editing Circles and Ovals
Preferences - CAD Panel

Preferences - Line Properties Panel
Preferences - Snap Properties Panel
Object Snapping
Angle Snapping
Grid Snapping
Edit Polyline Parts
Edit Types
Blocking CAD Objects
Moving CAD Objects
Case Study: Aligning Text
Copying CAD Objects
Reflect About Line
Delete
Reverse Direction
Change Line/Arc
Make Parallel/Perpendicular
Break Line
Trim and Extend
Fillet and Chamfer
Polyline Union, Intersection, and Subtract
Converting CAD Objects
763
CAD
Editing
Chapter Overview
The CAD Editing Tools

All of the CAD editing tools become
available when a CAD object is
selected. Many of the buttons that display in
CAD mode also display in architectural
mode. See Menus and Toolbar Buttons on
page 17.
Some buttons such as lines, splines, arcs,
boxes, etc. only display in CAD mode. These
buttons are covered in the following section.
Edit Handles
The edit handles that display when a CAD
object is selected are similar to the edit
handles that display when architectural
objects are selected. See Editing Selected
Objects on page 10. The edit handles
behave uniquely for a few of the CAD
objects. Any unique editing behaviors are
covered in this chapter by object.
CAD Edit Buttons

Edit toolbar buttons display when objects are
selected. The edit buttons that will display
depend on what type of object is selected.
Toggle Buttons
Toggle buttons are essentially shortcuts to
global settings in the Preferences dialog
and plan settings in the Plan Defaults and
the Layout Defaults dialogs.
Color On/Off - Toggles the display of
color. See Color Off/On on page 632.
Display Temporary Dimensions Toggles the display of temporary
dimensions, which appear when objects are
selected. See Display Temporary
Edit Polyline Parts - Toggles the
ability to edit individual line segments
of polylines. See Edit Polyline Parts on
page 786.
Display Arc Centers - Toggles the
display of arc centers. See Preferences
- Line Properties Panel on page 778.
Display Reference Grid - Toggles the
reference grid display, as specified in
the Plan Defaults/Layout Defaults dialog.
See Plan Defaults on page 91.
Angle Snaps - Enables snapping to
allowed angles as specified in the Plan
Defaults/Layout Defaults dialog. See Plan
764
By default the CAD edit toolbar appears

along the bottom of Chief Architects main
window.
Grid Snaps - Enables snapping to the

grid as specified in the Plan Defaults/
Layout Defaults dialogs. See Plan Defaults
on page 91.
These edit buttons will be covered

throughout this chapter. For a complete
overview of all of the edit buttons, see Edit
Toolbar Buttons on page 65.
Object Snaps - Enables the snapping

to objects. This button will also enable
the toggle buttons shown in the following
image. These buttons are shortcuts to settings

in the Preferences dialog. For a detailed
description, see Preferences - Snap
Status Bar
The status bar displays the current CAD
layer as well as the CAD coordinates of the
pointer. See Appearance Panel on page 94.
You do not need to be in Select CAD

Objects
mode to select CAD objects.
When any CAD tool is active, any CAD
object can be selected. The only exception to
this rule is the Place Point
tool. Clicking
on screen when the Place Point

active will always place a point.
tool is

Using a Fence
Sometimes group selecting CAD
objects is difficult if there are many
CAD objects occupying the same area. The
Select/Make Fence selection tool can be
useful in these situations. This tool offers
another method of selecting multiple CAD
objects.
The Select/Make Fence
tool uses a line
or polyline to select all CAD objects that it
crosses or touches. This selection method is
useful when a marquee would select too
many enclosed items, or when the shape of
the selection set will not easily be contained

by a marquee.
The selection fence can be any existing line
or polyline. Select that line or polyline and
click the Select/Make Fence
edit button.
All CAD objects in contact with the fence
line will be selected. The line or polyline
used as a fence line will become deselected.
You can hold the Shift key and continue to
select or deselect objects.
If you will be selecting a group of CAD
objects more than once this technique
might be helpful. Draw the line or polyline
through the CAD objects, then use that fence
to select the same items every time. Leave
the fence in place until all editing is done,
then delete it. You can also keep all fences on
their own layer for easy management, turning
off the display when not needed. See Layers on page 119.
Once selected, CAD objects can be edited in

a variety of ways. Their shape and
orientation can be changed using the mouse,
they can be opened for specification, or
advanced editing functions can be performed
using the edit toolbar buttons that display.
How each CAD object can be edited is
covered in the following sections object -byobject.
765
CAD
Editing
To select CAD objects when in CAD

mode, click the Select CAD Objects
button, then click on any CAD object. For a
general overview of the basic selection
methods, see Selecting Objects on page 8.
Editing Lines
Select a line or line with arrow to enable the
possible edit functions.
Using Edit Handles

When selected, a line will display edit
handles.
Stretch/Change Angle
Move
Click and drag the move handle to move

the line perpendicular to itself.
If in concentric resize mode, you can set

the jump unit. See Edit Types on page
786.
To move the line freely in any direction,

press and hold the Ctrl key, then drag
from the handle to move the line.
As a line is being moved, the endpoints

will snap to the endpoints of other lines.
If the Angle Snaps

toggle button is
on, click and drag either end handle along
the line to lengthen or shorten it or drag it
to any allowed angle. See Plan
If Angle Snaps
toggle button is off,
the end of the line can be dragged anywhere, including off of allowed angles.
Using the Line

Select a line and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Line Specification
dialog and change the lines dimensions and
display attributes. See Line Specification
Dialog on page 731.
Change Line/Arc
A line section of a polyline can be changed to
an arc. Select the polyline by the line section
and click the Change Line/Arc
edit
button. For more information, see Change
Line/Arc on page 796.
Reversing a Line
Select a line then click the Reverse
Direction
edit button to reverse its
direction. Reversing a line is useful with
certain line styles or with an arrow at one
end. See Reverse Direction on page 796.
Editing Arcs
Select an arc to enable the possible edit
functions.
766
Using Edit Handles

When selected, an arc displays five edit
handles.
Editing Arcs
Resize
(changes radius)
radius. If concentric resize mode is

active, movement will be affected by the
jump unit. See Preferences - CAD
Panel on page 776.
Reshape
(moves center)
Move
Stretch (along arc,

or along chord)
The end edit handles will expand or contract the arc when moved along the arcs
radius. If you follow the path of the arc,
the end edit handles will allow you to
adjust the arc length.
Resize edit handle
Unlike other objects, the triangular

handle on an arc is not used to rotate the
object. It is used to reshape the curvature
of the arc between the endpoints.
Reshape edit handle

End edit handles
The move edit handle allows the arc to be

relocated without changing its shape. To
move the arc freely in any direction,
press and hold the Ctrl key while moving
the arc.
Using the Arc

For information about editing an arc by
opening it for specification, see Arc
Lock Center Arc

An arcs center may be locked or
unlocked. The Lock Center Arc edit
button displays when an arc is selected.
Move edit handle
Click and drag the resize edit handle to

change the relative size of the arc. This is
also referred to as changing the arcs
A locked center arc extends along its arc,

rather than its chord, when an adjacent line
or arc is moved in a polyline. Thus the chord
angle will usually remain constant for a non
lock center arc, while the center and radius
767
CAD
Editing
Make Arc Tangent
will usually not change for the lock center

arc.
If a lock center arc in a polyline is itself
moved, it moves concentrically about its
center, so only its radius changes. For an
unlocked center arc the chord moves,
keeping the arcs subtended angle constant.
Change Line/Arc
An arc section of a polyline can be
changed to a straight line. Select the
polyline by the arc section and click the
Change Line/Arc edit button. For more
information, see Change Line/Arc on page
796.
If a selected arc is attached on one or

both ends to another line or arc, the
Make Arc Tangent
edit button displays.
Use this tool to adjust the arc and attached
lines so that they form a smooth shape.
If the selected arc is attached to a line or arc
on both ends, clicking the the Make Arc
Tangent
edit button will open the
Radius of Tangent Arc dialog, allowing
you to specify the target arc radius. Click OK

and the arc and attached objects will adjust
so that the radius will match the target as
closely as possible. If the arc is attached to
two perpendicular lines, this dialog will
display, but the Arc Radius field will not be
enabled.
Editing Splines
Select a spline to enable the spline editing
functions.
Vertex
Using Edit Handles
Move
Several different types of handles display.

The handles that display depend on whether
the Advanced Splines
edit button is on
or not. See Advanced Splines on page 769.
Rotate
The spline on the right illustrates the edit handles
that display when Advanced Splines is turned on
768
The move handle displays near the center

of the spline. Click and drag it to move
the entire spline. To move the spline
freely in any direction, press and hold the
Ctrl key while moving it.
Editing Splines
reshape the spline with more control at each

vertex.
If you would like all subsequently drawn
splines to be advanced splines, check
Advenced Splines on the CAD panel of the
Preferences dialog.
Tangent line
Move edit handle
Click and drag the rotate edit handle to

rotate the entire spline.
Rotate edit handle
The vertex edit handles display along the

perimeter of the spline. Click and drag
the vertex edit handles to change the
shape of the spline.
Vertex
The line between the vertex and the control

handles defines the tangent to the spline
through the vertex. Move the control handles
at the end of the line to change the direction
of the spline at that point. The spline curves
away from its tangent direction at the vertex
on its way to the next vertex.
Change the shape of the spline by clicking and dragging the control handles.
Control handle
Vertex edit handle
Advanced Splines
Select a spline and click the Advanced
Splines edit button to turn on advanced
splines for the selected spline. When
Advanced Splines is turned on additional
edit handles display. These edit handles are
called control handles and allow you to
Control
Handles
Result
Notice that the control handles on either side

of a vertex maintain their relationship to each
other in a straight line. When one is moved,
the other moves to keep the tangent line
tangent with the vertex.
Lock Control Handle Angle

The Lock Control Handle Angle edit
button is usually selected when
advanced splines is turned on. This button
769
CAD
Editing
causes the relative angle between the vertex

and its control handles to remain the same.
Click the Lock Control Handle Angle
button to turn off this behavior and free the
control of the relative edit angles between the
vertex and its control handles. The control
handles can now be adjusted individually.
The opposite handle will remain unaffected
by the change. Notice that the spline adjusts
so that it is tangent to the lines between the
vertex and both of its control handles.
Notice that the control handles are not colinear
Click on a spline segment
Result
If you reselect the spline, you will see that

the two control handles point toward the
straight section from each vertex point on
either end of the straight section.
Adding a Vertex
You can add a vertex to a spline by selecting
the spline, clicking the Break Line
edit
button and clicking on the spline. A vertex
will be added at the point where you clicked.
The spline will remain selected and you will
see the additional vertex and control handles.
Result
Straighten Spline Segment

The Straighten Spline Segment edit
button is used to straighten a segment
of an advanced spline between two vertex
points. To use, first select the spline. Click
the Straighten Spline Segment
edit
button, then click on the spline between two
vertices. That portion will become straight.
770
Result
Editing Polylines
Converting Splines
into Polylines
Converting Polylines
into Splines
A curved portion in a spline is

represented as a number of smaller
straight lines. You can change a spline into a
normal polyline that is made up of these
straight lines by selecting it and pressing the
Convert Spline to Polyline edit button.
A polyline can be converted into a

spline by selecting it and pressing the
Convert to Spline edit button. The same
number of edit handles that display for the
polyline will display once it has been
converted into a spline. This tool only works
for polylines that were originally created
from connected lines.
Using Trim & Extend
The spline is replaced by the new polyline
Other CAD objects such as lines

and arcs can be trimmed against
and extend to a spline. Select the spline,
press the Trim Objects or Extend Objects
edit button, then click on the portion of each
CAD object to be removed or extended. See
Editing Polylines
Select a rectangular polyline or any multiple
sided polyline to enable the edit functions.
Vertex
Using Edit Handles

Move
Rotate
CAD
Editing
A polyline can be composed of many

segments. See Polylines on page 741.
When selected, the edit handles that display
depend on which segment of the polyline is
selected.
Reshape
This spline was selected on the

bottom (straight) segment
In the previous image, the polyline was

selected on the straight segment at the
bottom of the polyline. Because this segment
is straight, the extra edit handle that displays
is the same as those for lines. See Editing
Lines on page 766.
771
When a polyline segment is moved, the

adjacent segments will maintain their
connections, and can only be stretched in
their original direction.
What is the move
edit handle for a
single line segment
will reshape a
closed polyline
If an arc segment of a polyline is selected, as

in the following image, the extra edit handles
that display are the same as those for arcs.
See Editing Arcs on page 766.
Dimensions can locate CAD objects
Using Extension Line Snaps

Extension line snaps, especially tangent
snaps, can be useful when editing polyline
vertices. See Extension Line Snapping on
page 783.
Using the Polyline

Move
Reshape
Moving or reshaping this arc segment will

reshape the closed polyline.
Polylines can be edited using the Polyline

Specification dialog. See Polyline
Using Edit Buttons
To add a corner to a polyline, use the

Break Line
edit button. See Break
Line on page 798.
Change straight edges to curved using the

Change Line/Arc
button. See
Change Line/Arc on page 796.
Fillet or chamfer the corners, or trim

away a section using the Fillet Two
Lines
or Chamfer Two Lines
edit
buttons. See Fillet and Chamfer on
page 800.
Using Dimensions
Dimensions can be used to reshape polylines
in the same way that dimensions can be used
to position walls and other architectural
objects. See Moving a CAD Object Using
772
Closed polylines can be changed into

custom counter tops and other 3D CAD
objects by selecting them and clicking the
Convert Polyline
edit button. See
Converting CAD Objects on page 804.
Editing Boxes
Editing Boxes
Select a box, cross box, or insulation box to
enable the edit functions.
Using Edit Handles

The edit handles for boxes behave differently
than they do for polylines.
Resize
Rotate
Click and drag the rotate edit handle to

rotate the box.
Click and drag the reshape edit handle to

reshape the box. A box can only have
four corners at 90 degrees to each other.
Move
The move handle displays near the center

of the box. Click and drag it to move the
box. To move the box freely in any
direction, press and hold the Ctrl key
while moving it.
Click and drag the resize edit handle to

change the size of the box without changing its relative shape.
Note: The behavior of the resize handle will
depend on the current edit type mode. See
Edit Types on page 786
CAD
Editing
Reshape
Using the CAD Box

For information about editing a box by
opening it for specification, see CAD Box
773
Using Edit Buttons
Fillet or chamfer the corners, or trim

away a section using the Fillet Two
Lines
edit
buttons. See Fillet and Chamfer on
page 800.
Use the Trim Objects
Parallel
edit button. The entire box
will rotate. See Make Parallel/Perpendicular on page 796.
Relocate a box with precision using the

Point to Point Move
edit button. See
Point-to-Point Move on page 790.
and Extend
Objects
edit buttons to clip or
lengthen intersecting CAD objects. See
Make an edge of a box parallel or perpendicular to another object using the Make
Boxes can be converted into 3D CAD

objects using the Convert Polyline
edit button. See Converting CAD

Select a circle to enable the edit functions.
Using Edit Handles
Resize
A Circle
can only be a circle. It cannot
be edited into any other shapes.
Concentric Resize
Oval
For a perfect oval, place a circle, select
it, click the Make Block edit button,
then resize the CAD block. See CAD Blocks
on page 753.
Move
Resize
Circle
An oval is first drawn as a circle and then

reshaped using the resize handle.
774
When selected, an oval displays the same

edit handles as a circle. In addition, a rotate
handle also displays.
The move handle displays at the center of

the circle/oval. Click and drag it to move
the circle/oval. To move it freely in any
direction, press and hold the Ctrl key
while moving it.
The four edit handles beyond the perimeter are concentric resize edit handles.
Move them in or out to resize the circle/
oval without moving the center.
Note: The behavior of the resize handle will
depend on the current edit type mode. See
Edit Types on page 786
Using the Circle/Oval

For information about editing a circle or oval
by opening it for specification, see CAD
Circle/Oval Specification Dialog on page
748.
Using the Edit Buttons
Use the Trim Objects
and Extend
Objects
edit buttons to clip or
lengthen intersecting CAD objects. See
The resize handle that appears on the

perimeter of the circle/oval will resize it,
maintaining the position of the opposite
side of the circle/oval.
using the Point to Point Move

edit
button. See Point-to-Point Move on
page 790.
The Transform/Replicate
edit button can be used to perform a variety of
powerful edit functions. See Transform/
Click and drag the rotate handle of an

oval to change its orientation.
775
CAD
Editing
Relocate a circle or oval with precision

The key to mastering the CAD editing tools
is in understanding the options available on
the CAD panel of the Preferences dialog.
This dialog contains settings which affect the
editing of all CAD objects. For most of these

settings there are toolbar shortcuts.
Select Edit> Preferences...
and select
the CAD panel on the Preferences dialog.
The settings on the CAD panel are global

settings. Many of the settings on the CAD
panel are quickly toggled on and off from the
toolbar. A few can only be accessed from the
Preferences dialog.
1 The Rotate/Resize About section
defines the point about which an object

or a group of objects will rotate or resize.
776
Object Center is the default setting. You can

also select Current Point to rotate the object
about the current point.
This functionality can also be accessed by
clicking the Rotate/Resize About
button. See Rotate/Resize About Current
Point on page 789.
Rotate about
Object Center
Rotate about
Current Point
To resize a CAD object about a current point,

the Resize Edit Type must be selected.
Box rotating about Current

Point with Jump set to 45
This functionality can also be accessed by

clicking the Resize
on page 787.
2 Select from the available Options:
button. See Resize
Check Object Snaps to snap the start

and end points of any object being drawn
to other locations within the specified
screen distance. When Object Snaps
is checked, lines and arcs drawn end to
end will merge to form a closed polyline.
Resize About
Current Point
Rotate Jump defines the angle increment at

which an object or group of objects will jump
as it is being rotated. It overrides the angle
snaps set in Plan Defaults. If set to zero
the angle snaps set under Plan Defaults are
used.
clicking the Object Snaps

toggle
button. See Object Snapping on page
783
Check Edit Polyline Parts

to edit the
individual components of a polyline. This
functionality can also be accessed by
clicking the Edit Polyline Parts
button. See Edit Polyline Parts on page
786.
Check Advanced Splines to enable the

advanced spline setting as the default
editing behavior for all subsequently
drawn splines. This functionality can also
be accessed by clicking the Advanced
Splines
button. See Advanced
Splines on page 769.
777
CAD
Editing
Concentric
Resize
When Object Snaps

is unchecked,
the lines do not unite automatically. This
functionality can also be accessed by
3 CAD Blocks - These settings determine
the default fill style behavior for CAD

blocks. See CAD Panel on page 108.
Check Always use By Object for CAD

block fill style to retain the fill pattern for
component objects when they are blocked. If
unchecked here, the fill pattern is determined
in the CAD Block Specification dialog.
See CAD Block Specification Dialog on
page 755.
Check Use By Object when creating new
CAD blocks to have By Object checked on
the General tab of the CAD Block
Specification dialog. See General Tab
on page 755.
Checked
Unchecked
4 Select one of the four Edit Type
options. For detailed information about

the different edit types and how they affect
different objects, see Edit Types on page
786.
5 The Angle Snaps
option defines
the angular constraint for any new CAD
object being drawn. Keep it set to 15 Degree
Increments unless Unrestricted is
necessary. It is easier to drag a horizontal or
vertical line when restricted to 15 degree
angles. See Angle Snap Settings on page
785.

Select Edit> Preferences
and go to the
Line Properties panel on the Preferences
dialog. For a full size view, see Line
778
The Line Properties panel sets the

preferences for displaying lengths and angles
of CAD lines and polyline edges as well as
the Line Style Pattern Scaling.
1
2
3
4
1 Line Label Height - Defines the height
Fractional Degrees
2 Display Line Lengths as - Select either
Fractional feet or Decimal feet. This

setting is not available in metric format,
which will always use millimeters.
Decimal Feet Bearing
3 Display Line Angles as - Select either

Degrees or Bearings relative to the
North Pointer. If no North Pointer has been
established, north is assumed to be straight
up on the screen.
779
CAD
Editing
of the information displayed for lines in

scaled inches. This value is not related to the
size of other text objects or dimension
numbers. You can set this higher so that line
labels on objects such as Property lines can
be easily read at small scales.
Display Arc Centers - Select the

check box to display arc centers. A
displayed center is also a snap point.
drawn with a solid white fill. This makes it

easy to tell which framing member is on the
top, since the objects below are blocked by
the solid white fill. You can change the color
for framing once created.
Use Line for Framing - Check this box to
show all framing members as a single line.
5 Endcap Length (Pixels) - The
Display Arc Centers
Fill New Framing Members - Select the

check box to have all new framing members
beginning and end of CAD lines that

are not solid are sometimes difficult to
distinguish. Endcaps can be placed to
eliminate this problem. Specify the number
of pixels for endcaps.

Select Edit> Preferences
and go to the
Snap Properties panel on the Preferences
dialog.
780
The settings on the Snap Properties panel of

the Preferences dialog control how object
snaps behave and display.
1 Set the Snap Distance, measured in
screen pixels, from which your cursor

must be from a snap point for a snap to occur.
2 Check any combination of object
snapping options. The corresponding

toggle buttons are shortcuts to these settings.
Endpoint - Enables snapping to the
ends of lines, arcs, splines, and other
objects.
Midpoint - Enables snapping to the
midpoint of an object such as a line or
arc. For objects such as boxes, you can snap
to the midpoint of any side of the box.
Endpoint and midpoint snaps
Center - Enables snapping to the

center of cabinets, fixtures, furniture,
as well as circles and arcs.
Note: Center snapping will only work for arcs
and circles if Display Arc Centers is turned
on.
Quadrant - Enables snapping to the

left, right, top, or bottom of an object.
Only used for arcs and circles.
781
CAD
Editing
Specify the number of extension line anchors

that can display at one time by changing the
Objects in History setting. See Extension
Line Snapping on page 783.
Tangent Extensions - Enables

snapping to a point tangent to the
object at which the extension anchor sits.
Quadrant snaps
On Object - Enables snapping to any

point on the selected object, including
CAD objects and cabinets.
Tangent extension
Perpendicular Extensions - Enables

snapping to a point perpendicular to the
object at which the extension anchor sits.
On object snaps
Points/Markers - Allows you to snap

to any temporary points you may have
placed, as well as callouts and markers.
Points/Markers snaps
Intersection - Enables snapping to the

intersection of two objects, such as the
intersection of a line with another line.
Intersection snapping also snaps extension
lines to objects, and allows you to snap two
extension lines to each other.
Perpendicular extension
Orthogonal Extensions - Enables

snapping to a point on a 90-degree axis
from the extension anchor.
Orthogonal extension
4 Control the display of Snap

Intersection snaps
3 Check any combination of extension
anchor options. The corresponding

toggle buttons are shortcuts to these settings.
782
Indicators.
Specify an Indicator Size in pixels.

Click the color bar to select an Indicator
Color and an Extension Color from the
Color Chooser dialog.
Object Snapping
Object Snapping
When editing CAD objects, it is often
important to position objects exactly relative
to each other. For example, it is frequently
necessary to position lines so that their
endpoints are coincident.
toggle button turns object snapping on

and off.
There are many locations on a CAD object
that can be snapped to other objects. Each
type of object snap can be toggled using
toolbar buttons or by checking boxes on the
Snap Properties panel of the Preferences
dialog. See Preferences - Snap Properties
Panel on page 780.
Extension Line Snapping

For some operations, it is easier to snap to a
point far away from an original object, while
maintaining a relationship to a point on that
object. For example, you may want to snap to
a point exactly perpendicular to a line's
endpoint. Extension line snapping may be
helpful in this situation.
Extension lines
Extension line snapping is done relative to

extension line anchors. Extension line
anchors are indicated by a small "X" on the
screen. These anchors appear automatically
for endpoint, midpoint, and quadrant snaps.
For example, you can create an extension
anchor by dragging the pointer over the
endpoint of a line. You must have some type
of extension line snapping enabled for
extension anchors to appear.
Only a limited number of anchors can
display at one time, creating a new anchor
will remove the oldest existing anchor. You
can control the number of anchors that
display by changing the Objects in History
setting. See Preferences - Snap Properties
Panel on page 780.
Once an anchor has been established, you
can perform orthogonal, perpendicular, and
tangent snapping operations relative to it. For
more information, see Preferences - Snap
Object Snapping Hotkeys
Press the Esc key to clear out all current

extension anchors.
783
CAD
Editing
Object Snaps
allow you to snap CAD
objects to other objects, such as other CAD
objects, walls, cabinets, or fixtures. Object
snapping is indicated visually as you create
or edit CAD objects, and has the highest
priority over all other types of snapping in
Chief Architect. Clicking the Object Snaps
Hold down the "S" key to temporarily

disable object snaps. You will still be able
to use extension snaps to existing
anchors. If no extension anchors are
established, holding down the S key will
temporarily disable object snapping. If
extension anchors are established, the "S"
key can be used to avoid picking up any
new extension anchors while moving the
mouse.
2.
Temporarily disable object snapping by

holding down the S key.
3.
Move the mouse to the end of line B.
4.
Release the S key to establish the second

endpoint anchor.
5.
Move the mouse to the intersection of

the two extension lines and draw the
new object.
The "S"Key - Case Study

In the following example, there are several
lines. Suppose we want to start a line at the
intersection of two orthogonal extension
lines drawn from two lines, A and B. To
establish an extension anchor, we need to
drag the mouse over a line As endpoint; but
there are several lines between the endpoints
of lines A and B. We need to establish the
two extension anchors without snapping to
the interfering objects.
4.
5.
1.
3.
The S key can help establish extension
snaps when other objects may interfere
To establish two extension anchors

1.
Drag the mouse over the endpoint for

line A to establish the first endpoint
anchor.
Angle Snapping
Sometimes it is important that objects
be drawn at exact angles. In Chief
Architect this can be accomplished using
Angle Snaps. Angle Snapping allows you to
snap at either 15 degree angles, 7.5 degree
angles, or any other specified angle. Angle
snapping allows you to draw lines, walls, and
other objects at specified angles. Angle snaps
784
also affect the way objects rotate, the radius

of arcs, and a variety of other operations.
To enable/disable angle snapping, you can
use the Angle Snaps
toggle button. You
can also select Unrestricted or 15 Degree
Increments on the CAD Panel of the
Preferences dialog. See Preferences CAD Panel on page 776.
Grid Snapping
Angle Snap Settings

You can change settings for Angle Snaps in
the Plan Defaults dialog (Layout
Defaults dialog for layout files).
Specify 15-degree or 7 -degree angle

snaps. Fill in the fields for additional allowed
angles. Additional angles can only be entered
when using 7 -degree increments.
Angle Snapping
and Object Snapping
Angle snapping takes a lower priority to
object snapping. If a valid object snap exists,
the program will use that instead of an angle

snap. However, sometimes both angle snaps
and object snaps will apply. For example,
suppose a line is drawn at exactly 15 degrees
using angle snaps and another line is
approached. You can draw the new line at an
allowed angle of 15 degrees while using
intersection snapping to snap to a point on
the existing line.
Use both object
snapping and
angle snapping to
create a 15-degree
line that intersects
an existing line
Now suppose that we don't want the new line

to end on the existing line. Sometimes you
may want angle snapping to override object
snapping. You can hold down the "S" key to
temporarily disable object snapping,
allowing only angle snapping.
Grid Snapping
the Plan Defaults dialog. See Plan
CAD
Editing
The lowest priority snap is grid

snapping. Grid settings can be found in
There are two grids in Chief Architect. The

Reference Grid is not used for snapping and
is provided to give you a visual sense of
scale. The reference grid is useful for

zooming in and out, or for general layout
guidelines. See Plan Defaults on page 91.
785
The Snapping Grid allows you to snap to

points on screen. To enable grid snapping,
check Use Snap Grid/Units and specify the
Snap Unit to be used.
You can snap to an invisible grid, or you can
check Show Snap Grid to provide a visual
reference of the snap grid.
Grid Snaps and Angle Snaps

Grid snaps are the lowest priority and are
overridden by angle snaps and object snaps.
To draw objects that snap only to the grid,
you should disable Object Snaps

Angle Snaps
and
Grid snaps can work well with angle snaps.

For example, if the grid Snap Unit is set to
12" (1 foot), drawing a new line at an
allowed angle will snap the line length to 0",
12", 24", and so on. This is also true of walls
drawn at allowed angles.
To draw a line or wall at an allowed angle,
but with unrestricted length, disable grid
snaps, and leave Angle Snaps
on.
Edit Polyline Parts

Polylines are composed of lines and
arcs connected end to end. Selecting
any segment of a polyline will select the
whole polyline. If you move a polyline
segment, the adjacent segments will adjust to
maintain their connection. See Editing
Polyline segments maintain their connections

when Edit Polyline Parts is not selected
Sometimes a single edge of a polyline needs

to be removed, breaking the connection to
adjacent polyline segments. Select the Edit
Polyline Parts
toggle button to enable
polyline segments to be edited individually.
Polyline segments can be edited individually

when Edit Polyline Parts is selected
Edit Types
There are four CAD editing modes that affect
object behavior as object corners are
dragged. These modes can be accessed
through the CAD panel of the Preferences
786
dialog, or by clicking the corresponding

toolbar buttons: See Preferences - CAD
Panel on page 776.
Edit Types
Fillet
Fillet mode allows you to add a fillet at
any corner of an object. Dragging the
corner will allow you to adjust the fillet
radius at that corner.
Using the Fillet edit type on a box will cause
all the corners to adjust at once. The radius of
each corner is the same.
same as the Resize

tool. Move Corners
allows you to change the shape of a polyline
using edit handles (also known as joints,
corners, or hinge points). This method is
used often with 3D polyline objects such as
roofs and slabs.
Fillet will not have an effect on arc segments,

circles or ovals.
To produce fillets of an exact radius (or
chamfer), it is better to set the Fillet/
Chamfer radius and use the Fillet Two
Lines
edit
buttons. These can be used on lines already
connected in a polyline. See Fillet and
Chamfer on page 800.
Move Corners edit type
Note: Move Corners should be your default

edit type, unless you prefer one of the others.
Its a good idea to be familiar with these
options and how they affect CAD behavior.
Fillet edit type
Move Corners
Move Corners is the default edit type
for closed polylines. Move Corners
allows you to adjust any corner of a polyline,
without resizing the rest of the polyline. The
edge you select restricts how the corner will
move For boxes and several other types of
CAD objects where the corners cannot be
moved individually, this tool will work the
Resize mode will scale the object. As

you drag the corner of an object, you
will get an exactly scaled version of the
original. For example, this tool can be used
to resize an object to 50% of its original size.
To Resize a closed polyline proportionally,
always drag a corner, not an edge.
787
CAD
Editing
Resize
value to zero, and turn off grid snapping, you

can concentrically resize an object with no
restrictions.
Double-clicking the Concentric
toggle
button will open the CAD panel of the
Preferences dialog.
Resize edit type
Concentric
Concentric mode allows you to resize
objects such that the distance moved by
each object edge is the same as all other
object edges. For example, Concentric mode
can be used to resize an irregularly shaped
polyline such that each edge is exactly one
foot in from the original position. This can be
useful in many siuations, such as creating
boundary line setbacks for lots.
Normally, resizing an object using
Concentric mode will adjust the object so
that each edge moves using the Snap Grid
Units. For example, if your grid unit is set to
1 foot, then resizing the corner of an
irregularly shaped polyline will allow you to
move each edge in (or out) from the original
position by 1 ft., 2 ft., 3 ft., and so forth.
However, in concentric mode, Snap Grid
Units can be overridden. If you double-click
on the Concentric mode toolbar button, you
can access the CAD preferences, where the
Concentric Jump value can be set. When this
value is set, dragging the corners of an object
will use the jump value instead of the snap
grid value. Alternatively, if you set the jump
788
Concentric edit type
Copying Concentrically
Concentric copies of an object can be
made in concentric mode using the
Copy/Paste edit button.
Select an object and click the Copy/Paste
edit button. Drag a corner of the selected
object. The original object remains
unchanged and a concentric copy is created.
Copying using the concentric edit type
Rotate/Resize About
Current Point
The Rotate/Resize About edit type
allows you to define the point about
which an object or a group of objects will
rotate or resize. See Preferences - CAD
Panel on page 776.
Double-clicking the Rotate/Resize About

toggle button will open the CAD panel
of the Preferences dialog.

CAD objects can be group selected and
blocked together using the Make
Block edit button.
Once blocked they can be added to the

library and saved for use in other plans. See
Creating a Library of CAD Blocks on page
757.
Moving CAD Objects
If the Ctrl key is not used until after the items

have begun to be dragged, the items will only
move in the normal allowed directions. This
is normally the desired option.
To move selected CAD objects freely with
no constraints whatsoever, select the items,
hold the Ctrl key, and then grab and drag the
items.
Boxes, circles and polylines can also be set
to stop at other CAD objects and/or at walls.
This is defined in the Line Style tab on the

specification dialog for each item. See Line
Click Method
Select the item or group of items to be
moved, click the Point to Point Move
edit button, then click at a start point, not
necessarily on the object to be moved, and
then click on the end point. The items will be
moved by the distance and direction between
the two points. You can use object snaps to
precisely position the start and end points.
Drag Method
You may also click on the start point, then
drag to the end point while holding the left
789
CAD
Editing
Selected items can be moved by dragging the

center handle. Some CAD objects such as
cross boxes, framing members and insulation
automatically stop when moved against other
CAD objects. Tap the Ctrl key once while
continuing to drag, and the item will move
through the stop.
button. In this case, the item will move only

in its normal restricted direction. The
distance moved will be the distance between
your start and end point projected onto that
move direction.
Move to Front
Click the Move To Front edit button to
move the selected object in front of
other CAD objects.
To override the restrictions using the drag

method, hold down the Ctrl key before
dragging the selected items. If you do this,
the item will move as if you had used the
click method already described.
Accurate Move
Select an object and click the Accurate
Move edit button to slow down the
movement of the object with the mouse. This
can be useful for precisely moving and
resizing objects. This edit button is available
for many architectural objects such as walls,
windows, and stairs.
Copying
Point to Point Move
may be used with
copy if you hit both the Copy
edit button
then the Point to Point Move

edit button
after selecting your item(s), then clicking the
start point and end point. You may instead
choose to drag the copy in order to place the
copy along the restricted move path.
Point-to-Point Move
The Point to Point Move edit button
allows a selected CAD object or group
of CAD objects) to be accurately moved.
There are two different ways to use the same
tool, each method producing a different
result. See Point-to-Point Move with Edit
Area on page 819.
790
Moving Roof Planes

Point to Point Move
works with roof
planes. If a roof plane is accidentally moved
so the baseline is off the wall, use Point to
Point Move
to move the baseline back
onto the outside edge of the main wall layer.
Any group of free-standing objects
(whether CAD, architectural, or a combination) can be moved or copied accurately
relative to snappable items (points, intersections, etc.) using the Point to Point Move
tool. See Point-to-Point Move on page 790.
Move to Framing Reference

Framing members can be positioned
relative to a framing reference using
this tool. See Framing Reference Markers
on page 394.
Curved Items
Affect CAD Stops
Arcs as polyline edges, circles and curved
walls stop CAD moves of the same, as well
as straight polyline edges, box sides and

straight wall surfaces stopping CAD moves.
CAD Stops Move and/or Wall Stops Move
must be checked in the Line Style tab of the
specification dialog for the object being
moved.
When CAD Stops Move and/or Wall Stops
Move are checked in the Line Style tab of the
specification dialog for the item being
moved, arcs and circles now will stop when
they touch another line, straight wall, arc,
curved wall or circle.
Moving CAD Objects

A CAD object only moves in certain
directions if the Ctrl key is not held.
Normally the directions along and
perpendicular each edge of a polyline or box
are the allowed directions for moving. A
circle normally moves horizontally or
vertically.
When an object to be moved is already
against another straight object, such as a
straight wall or polyline or box edge, there
will be an additional move direction along
the direction of the straight object.

object to reveal a snapping point and
Using the information covered in this

chapter, lets look at several ways to perform
a common operation, aligning text.
CAD stops move - Draw a vertical line.

Group select the text boxes, open them
for specification, and on the Line Style
tab check CAD Stops Move. Drag each
of the text objects up against the line.
Delete the line.
Type in - Group-select the text objects,

open them for specification, and on the
Attributes tab set all the Widths to the
same value and enter an X Position,
which locates the center of the text
objects. When done you can manually
resize the text boxes to the natural width.
Dimensions - Create a temporary or

manual dimension relative to an object
such as a wall or line, and relocate the
text objects using the same dimension.
See Moving Objects Using Dimensions
Text can be aligned using a variety of methods
To align text
Snap to grid - Turn on Grid Snaps

,
select the left side of the text object, and
drag from the center move handle. This
will snap the selected side to the grid.
Repeat this step for all text objects.
Snap to reference object - Select the left
side of a text object. Drag the left side
and visit the left side of another text
791
CAD
Editing
If we want to align three different text

objects of different fonts, there are a variety
of methods to choose from.
release the mouse. Object Snaps

must be turned on.
Stops Move. Draw a vertical line and

bump them against it. Explode the cad
blocks when done and remove them from
the cad block list. See CAD Block Management on page 754.
on page 690. You can also resize text

using this method.
Shift + select and block each text object

to itself, in its own block. Open each
block for specification and check CAD
Copying CAD Objects

Copy/Paste
The Copy/Paste edit button allows
single or multiple copies to be made of
the selected item(s). Just as in Architectural
mode, single click the Copy/Paste
edit
button for a single copy (then click on screen
to place the copy).
Double-click the Copy/Paste
edit button
to place multiple copies. A copy will be
placed each time you click on the screen.
Click the right mouse button to stop copying
(or click on any other toolbar button).
You can also single click the Copy
edit
button, and then drag from a handle on the
selected items. This allows the new copy to
be positioned or resized precisely with
respect to its original. Double-click the
Copy/Paste
edit button to place multiple
subsequent drag-copiess.
Copy/Paste
can also be used in
combination with the Point to Point Move
edit button to make a copy of the
selected item(s) at a specified location.
Select the item(s), click Point to Point Move
, click the Copy/Paste
edit button,
then click the start point and then the end
792
point. An exact copy of the selected item(s)

will be created. The two copies will have the
exact relationship as the start and end point
had in relationship to each other.
Multiple Copy
The Multiple Copy tool makes it easy
to lay out multiple copies of any CAD
object or group of CAD objects, including
CAD blocks.
To use multiple copy
1.
Select the CAD object(s) to copy.
2.

edit
button, and drag from the center handle.
Linear replications will be made
between the copied item and the
pointers location.
3.
Release the mouse button to place copies. The distance of drag will determine
the number of copies placed.
Dragging from a corner handle instead of the

center handle will produce concentric copies.
Separate intervals are used for:
CAD objects
Framing (general, floor and ceiling)
Rafters
Roof and floor trusses
Studs (in wall framing details)
To set the copy interval for CAD objects or

Roof Trusses, click the Multiple Copy
button when it appears, and click on it again
when in multiple copy mode.
The copy interval for rafters, joists, or studs

is set in their own tab in the Framing
dialog. Double-click the Framing Tools
parent button. Choose the appropriate tab,
and define the spacing. Once the copy
interval is defined for each type of item, it
will remain set at that interval until changed.
CAD
Editing
Select any CAD object or group of

CAD objects and click the Transform/
Replicate Object edit button to open the
Transform/Replicate Object dialog.
793
Transform/Replicate Object Dialog
1
2
3
4
5
6
Select an option and click OK to perform the

selected operation. If multiple options are
selected, the operations will be performed in
the order they appear on the dialog, from top
to bottom.
Number Of Copies - Specify the

number of copies to make.
2 Relative to Itself - Select this option to
move the object relative to its current

position. You will need to specify the amount
to move the object along the X Delta and Y
Delta.
Absolute Location - Select this option to

move the object to an absolute location. You
can either specify its X and Y Position, or
Angle and Distance, if Polar is checked.
Relative to Current Point - Select this
option to move the object relative to the
current CAD point. You can either specify its
X Delta and Y Delta, or Angle and
Distance, if Polar is checked.
If a Z Delta is specified, it moves the object
up or down.
3 Angle - Specify the angle to rotate the

object.
794
Reflect About Line
Absolute Angle - Select this option to rotate

the object so that its orientation is at an
absolute angle.
Vertically - Select this option to reflect the

object vertically.
Relative Angle - Select this option to rotate

the object the specified angle.
option to perform the specified edit

function(s) about the objects center.
4 Specify the Resize Factor. A resize
factor of 2 doubles the size of the

object. A resize factor of 0.5 halves the
objects size.
Axis of Reflection - Specify which axis

to reflect about.
Horizontally - Select this option to reflect

the object horizontally.
6 About Object Center - Select this
About Absolute Point - Select this option to

perform the specified edit function(s) about
the specified point.
X Position - Specify the X coordinate of the
point to rotate about.
Y Position - Specify the Y coordinate of the
point to rotate about.
About Current Point - Select this option to
rotate about the current CAD point.
Reflect About Line
Draw a CAD line (not a polyline) to act as

the reflect line. Once the Edit Area has been
defined, the Reflect About Line
edit
button appears in the Edit toolbar. Click the
Reflect About Line
edit button, and then
click on the CAD line to reflect the selected
area about that line. It does not matter
whether or not the line is inside the selection

rectangle.
The selected area will then be reflected
around the CAD line, and the original
selection area will no longer be there. You
can use the copy tool with the Reflect About
Line
edit button if you want to preserve
the original selection.
Note: CAD objects can reflect about any line,
regardless of its angle.
Delete
whatever is selected. The Del key on
the keyboard also works the same way.
which should not be deleted are part of the

selection set, hold the Shift key while clicking
the individual items to remove them from the
Make sure that only those items which

should be deleted are selected. If extra items
selection set before clicking the Delete

edit button.
The Delete edit button will delete
795
CAD
Editing
A selected area or an entire floor may

be reflected about any line, regardless
of its angle.
Reverse Direction
Select a line, arrow, or polyline, then
click the Reverse Direction edit button
to reverse the direction. Reversing a line or
polyline is useful with certain line styles or

with an arrow at one end.
Change Line/Arc
Select an arc or line segment of a
polyline and click the Change Line/
Arc edit button to convert the selected
segement to a line or an arc.
The Make Parallel edit button is an
alignment tool. Any CAD line; straight
edge of a CAD block; framing member;
polyline edge or roof plane edge can be made
parallel or perpendicular to another straight
edge.
Click button
then click wall
Select the straight line, click the Make Parallel

edit button, then click on a second
wall (or line/edge) to align to. The first item
should be within 45 degrees parallel (or
perpendicular) to the second, and will rotate
until parallel (or perpendicular). Walls are
often used to align CAD edges or roof edges.
796
Select edge
Result
If you initially clicked near the first item's

center, it will rotate about its exact center. If
it was clicked near its end, it will rotate about
that end.
If a specific angle is needed, create a wall or

CAD line at that angle before using it to align
the edge of a roof or other CAD object.
CAD Blocks & Polylines

The Make Parallel
edit button appears
for a selected CAD block instance when a
line, including a straight polyline edge, or
box edge within the block instance, is
selected. The entire block is rotated to make
the selected line or edge parallel or
perpendicular to the item subsequently
clicked on.
The Make Parallel
edit button normally
rotates a polyline edge while leaving other
edges in the polyline unchanged, except
those that must be extended or contracted to
maintain contact with the rotated edge. The
line rotates about its end if selected nearby,
or about its center if you click within its
middle third. To rotate the entire polyline
instead, double-click the Make Parallel
edit button to display the Make Parallel
dialog.
in the CAD area of the Preferences

dialog, see CAD Panel on page 108.
Arcs
The Make Parallel
edit button affects
arcs in two different ways, depending on
which part of the arc is selected. The arc is
divided into three equal selection areas: the
two outer thirds, and the center third.
Selecting near either of the ends (in the outer
third) affects that end. Selecting the arc in the
center third affects the center point.
If you select the arc on either end (in the
outer third), the Make Parallel
edit
button will extend or contract the free end of
the arc along the arc until the tangent at that
end is parallel/perpendicular to a second item
which could be a straight wall or CAD
object. Just click on the arc near the desired
end, then click on the Make Parallel
edit
button, then click on the second item. The
selected arc end will extend or contract if it is
already within about 20 degrees of being
tangent or perpendicular to the second item.
This method can also be used to adjust the
end direction for curved stairs.
Choose to either rotate just the selected edge,

as before, or to rotate the entire polyline.
Your setting will remain until you access the
Make Parallel dialog again and change it.
Polylines and CAD blocks will rotate about
center or about the current point depending
on the setting under "Rotate/Resize About"
Make Parallel
edit button will move the
arc so that its center coincides with the center
of a nearby curved wall, arc or circle. Just
click in the middle third of an arc, then on the
Make Parallel
edit button, and finally
click on a nearby arc, circle or curved wall,
and the first arc will move so that its center
coincides with that of the second item. The
radius of the arc will not change.
797
CAD
Editing
If you select the arc in the middle third, the
In order to prevent unforeseen changes, an

arc can be moved only a limited distance, so
you may want to move the arc into an
approximate position before using the Make
Parallel
edit button to reposition the arc
center exactly. An arc is moved only if the
distance between its center and the second
item's center is less than half the minimum

radius of either item. Also, an arc that is part
of a polyline is moved only if it and lines it is
connected to are not extended or contracted
more than half of their original length.
This tool can also be used with curved stairs.
Break Line
The Break Line tool adds a complete
or partial break in a line or polyline
edge. It will not break items created with the
intersection. See Preferences - Snap

Properties Panel on page 780 for Auto
Snap priorities.
Circle
A partial break adds a

joint to a single line to
make a polyline. It can
also be used on a
polyline to add
corners so the shape
may be changed.
, Oval
Insulation
, Box
, Spline
, or Cross Box
tools.
Creating Breaks
A complete break means that the line is
totally severed at that point. A partial break
means that a joint has been added to the line
or polyline, and that joint can be used to
change the shape of the polyline if Move
Corners is selected on the CAD panel of the
Preferences dialog, but the sections are
still part of the same polyline unit.
Framing members are always completely
broken when a break is added. You cannot
add a partial break to a framing member.
To partially break a line (add
a joint for reshaping), select
the line, click the Break
Line
edit button, then
click the location for the
Singlebreak. If there is a nearby
click
point or intersecting line or
arc on the item to be broken,
the break location will snap to that point or
798
Result
Select the line exactly on the break. (If

you dont know where it is, select the
line, position the pointer above the diamondshaped handle, click once to unselect, then
click again to re-select.) Grab the handle and
drag to the new shape.
To completely sever a line

or polyline so that a
section is removable,
select the line, double-
Doubleclick the Break Line

click
button, then click on the
location for the clean
break. As before, the break location will snap
to nearby points or intersections. If a
complete break is needed at an exact
distance, first place a point or a crossing line
Trim and Extend
at that location so that there will be an exact

location for the break point to snap to.
Breaking near a polyline corner will snap to
the corner and simply separate the adjacent
polyline components. If a segment needs to
be removed from a closed polyline, two
complete breaks will be necessary before the
segment may be deleted. (Don't worry if the
pointer shows a double arrow if breaking at a
polyline joint).
A complete break turns a single line into two

separate lines. It can also be used to cut a
polyline.
Deleting a Polyline Edge

There are two ways to delete an edge of a
polyline:
Select Edit Polyline Parts

the edge and delete.
. Select
Create a complete break at both ends.

Select the edge and delete.
Trim and Extend

Trim Objects
First select the items to trim against. Then

click on the Trim Objects
button.
Finally, click on the part of the item to be
trimmed off. You may repeat this final step
as many times as desired. Right click or hit
the Esc key to terminate this process.
A circle may be trimmed against any other
CAD objects, turning it into an arc. A circle
cannot be broken at only one point. A portion
of it must be removed. The cutting items
must therefore cross the circle on both sides
of the portion clicked on to be removed.
Use the Fillet Two Lines

tool to
trim one framing item to another and
create the appropriate miters at the junction.
Extend Objects
Lines, arcs, polylines or framing items
may also be extended. The boundary to
which the items will be extended may be any
CAD object or group of CAD objects. It may
even be a CAD block.
First select the boundary items, the ones to
which the CAD objects will be extended.
Then click on the Extend Objects
edit
button. Finally, select the part of the item to
be extended. You may repeat this final step
as many times as desired. Right click or hit
the Esc key to terminate this process.
799
CAD
Editing
Lines, arcs, polylines, framing items,

and circles may be trimmed. The
trimming, or cutting item may be any CAD
object, or a group of CAD objects. The
cutting item may even be a CAD block.
Note: If you use Fillet Two Lines

to
extend one framing item to another framing
item, both framing items will be angle cut.
To trim or extend using a fence for

multiple selection, first select the
cutting item(s) or boundary(s) as before.
Extend Object
The Trim Objects
and Extend Objects
edit buttons utilize the Select/Make
Select/Make Fence
Then click on the Trim Object
Be sure the fence crosses the items on the

side to be edited, especially when trimming
to edit the correct half of the item properly.
or
edit button. Next, click
the Select/Make Fence

edit button.
Then, click on the line, arc or polyline that
will serve as the fence. Items crossing the
fence will be trimmed or extended where
they are crossed by the fence.
As an alternative final step, instead of
clicking on an existing fence item, drag a
temporary line fence while holding the left
button down.
Fence
tool in a slightly different manner.
In this case, you will first select the line(s)
defining the boundary (for Extend Objects
) or the cut line (for Trim Objects
).
Then click the Select/Make Fence

tool
and either click on the line or polyline to act
as the fence or else drag a temporary line
across the CAD objects to be trimmed or
extended. Whatever was crossed by that
temporary fence line will immediately be
acted upon if appropriate. If you do not select
the Select/Make Fence
tool, you will
need to individually click on the CAD
objects.
Fillet and Chamfer

To fillet or chamfer two lines or lines with
arrow, select the first line, click the Fillet
Two Lines
edit button, then click on the second line.
Fillet Two Lines

The Fillet Two Lines
tool allows
you to use an arc of a specified radius
connecting any two non-parallel lines. The
Fillet Two Lines
tool can also be used to
create a mitered intersection between
800
framing items such as joists or rafters. The

miter will display in both floor plan view and
in 3D views.
Chamfer Two Lines

The Chamfer Two Lines
tool
allows you to create a straight corner
bevel of a specified size connecting any two
non-parallel lines. The chamfer is a third
short line which cuts off the corner between
the two selected lines.
Fillet and Chamfer
The two lines will join together with the

specified fillet or chamfer at the intersection.
If the lines did not originally meet, they will
extend until they do. If the lines overlapped
originally, the fillet or chamfer will keep the
part of each line toward the selected end, and
discard the overlap when the fillet or chamfer
is created. The edited lines will also be
joined as a polyline.
The lines may be single lines; adjacent edges
of a the same polyline or arrow polyline; or
outside edges of two different open
polylines. So long as the two lines are not
parallel to each other, a fillet or chamfer may
be created between them. Arcs may also be
edited. (See note).
The size of both the fillet or chamfer is
specified within either the Fillet Two Lines
Lines
mode. Either way, the Fillet radius and
Chamfer distance values specified will be
the default values used until you choose to
change them. There is no need to keep
defining the same value over and over.
Define it once, use it multiple times.
A value of 0 for either tool will cause the two
lines to meet at a sharp corner.
Deleting Intervening Lines

Fillet Two Lines
and Chamfer Two
Lines
can also be used to eliminate parts
of a polyline. To use, fillet or chamfer two
non-adjacent lines that are in the same closed
polyline.
or the Chamfer Two Lines

tool.
The method is the same. First, select any line
in order to bring up the tools. When the Fillet
When used this way, the following dialog

will open. Click OK to approve the polyline
edit and see the changes occur.
CAD
Editing
Two Lines
and Chamfer Two Lines
buttons become visible, double-click on
either button. The Fillet/Chamfer dialog
will open. Type in the desired values.
Click OK when done. At this point, you may

select on a second line to create the fillet or
chamfer between the original line selected
and the second line selected. Or you may
click a different tool to get out of Fillet Two
801
Note: An Arc will always respond as though

the fillet or chamfer has been set to 0. It will
extend or shorten along the curve to meet the
other item, creating a sharp intersection
between them. You MUST select the arc on
the half to be affected by the edit. Otherwise
you may have nothing occur, or the wrong
end may be affected.

Polylines can be created based on existing
closed polylines. Special tools are provided
for this purpose.
Polyline Union
Use the Polyline Union
edit button
to combine two or more polylines into
a single polyline.
Once the polylines are created, there are two

methods of combining them using the Polyline Union
edit button.
Single Select:
1.
Select one polyline in Select Objects

mode.
2.
Click on the Polyline Union

button.
edit
3.
Select another polyline to create a new

polyline defined by the boundaries of
both of the polylines.
4.
The new polyline is selected. Move it

away from the original polylines. Otherwise it will be superimposed.
Group Select:
The example shows three closed polylines
and the single closed polyline which resulted
when all three were merged using the Polyline Union
Group select two or more polylines.
2.
Click on the Polyline Union

edit
button to create a new polyline defined
by the boundaries of all the polylines.
3.
A dialog will open. Choose to retain or

delete the original polylines.
edit button.
Create two or more closed polylines of the

same type. (If one polyline is a counter top,
the others should be counter tops as well.)
802
1.
Create two or more closed polylines of the

same type. (If one polyline is a counter top,
the others should be counter tops as well.)
Once the polylines are created, there are two
methods of finding the overlap area using the
The new polylines will be of the same type

(counter top, lot perimeter, etc. as the
originals).
If the original polylines did not overlap, all
the polylines are duplicated on top of
themselves.
Polyline Intersection
Use the Polyline Intersection
edit
button to create a single polyline from
the overlap area of two or more closed
polylines.
Polyline Intersection
edit button.
Using the single select method:

1.
Select one polyline.
2.
Click on the Polyline Intersection

edit button.
3.
Select another polyline to create a new

polyline defined by the intersection of
both of the polylines.
4.
The new polyline is selected. Move it

away from the original polylines. Otherwise it will be superimposed.
Using the group select method:

1.
Group select two or more polylines.
2.
Click on the Polyline Intersection

edit button to create a new polyline
defined by the intersection of all the
polylines.
3.
A dialog will open. Choose to retain or

delete the original polylines.
CAD
Editing
The second method allows you to combine

more than two polylines simultaneously.
The example shows two closed polylines and

the single closed polyline which resulted
when the Polyline Intersection
button was applied to them.
edit
The second method allows you to work with

more than two polylines simultaneously.
803
The new polylines will be of the same type

(counter top, lot perimeter, etc.) as the
originals.
If the original polylines did not overlap, no
new polyline will be created.
1.
Draw two closed polylines that overlap,

or one closed polyline within another.
2.
Select one of the polylines. This is the

polyline you want to keep a portion of.
3.
Click the Polyline Subtract

edit
button and then click on the other closed
polyline. This is the polyline which will
be deleted from the first polyline.
4.
A new polyline will be created by subtracting the second polyline from the
first. The new polyline will be of the
same type (counter top, lot perimeter,
etc.) as the polyline selected first.
Polyline Subtract
Use the Polyline Subtract
edit
button to subtract one closed polyline
from another to create a third. The Polyline
Subtract
tool appears on the Edit
toolbar when you select a closed polyline.
This
polyline
The original polylines are not changed. The

new polyline remains selected so that it can
be moved or copied easily.
If the two polylines do not intersect a copy of
the polyline is formed right on top of itself,
since the program was unable to subtract
anything from it.
This
polyline
Originals

CAD to Walls
This feature allows you to convert a
flat line drawing into a 3D model.
Once a drawing has been imported into Chief
Architect, double CAD lines which represent
wall layers and other structural items can be
converted to actual Chief Architect walls,
railings, windows, or doors. See CAD to
Walls on page 155.
804
Converting Polylines
into Special Polylines
Lines, polylines, splines, and boxes can
be turned into special polylines such as
counter tops, slabs, landings, material list
polylines, molding polylines, roof/ceiling
holes, polyline solids, and many terrain
objects.
To convert a CAD object into one of these

objects, select the object and click the
Convert Polyline
edit button. The
Convert Polyline dialog appears. Select
one of the options and click OK.
Converting Special
Polylines into Polylines
Special polylines can be converted to
plain polylines. Select the special
polyline and click the Convert to Plain
Polyline
edit button. This can be used to
convert a counter top to a plain polyline and
then to a slab.
Convert Polyline Dialog
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1 Countertop - Convert to a countertop.
Only available when the polyline is

closed. See Custom Countertops on page
459.
Slab - Convert to a slab. Only available

when the polyline is closed.
3 Foundation Slab - Convert to a

foundation slab. Only available when
the polyline is closed.
4 Landing - Convert to a landing. Only
available when the polyline is closed
and is not a spline.
11
13
15
12
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
5 Material List Polyline - Convert to a
material list polyline. Only available

when the polyline is closed.
6 Molding Polyline - Convert to a

molding polyline.
7 3D Molding Polyline - Convert to a 3D

molding polyline.
8 Hole in Roof/Ceiling - Convert to a
roof/ceiling hole. Only available when

the polyline is closed and is contained inside
a roof plane or ceiling plane.
805
CAD
Editing
9 Polyline Solid - Convert to a polyline
solid. Only available when the polyline

is closed.
10 Sprinkler Line - Convert to sprinkler

line. See Sprinkler Tools on page
498.
11 Terrain Perimeter - This option is

only available when:
The polyline is closed
A terrain perimeter does not yet exist
When only one polyline is currently

selected
12 Elevation Line - Convert to an

elevation line. Only available when a
terrain perimeter exists.
13 Terrain Break - Convert to a terrain
Break. See Terrain Breaks on page
503.
14 Terrain Feature - Convert to a terrain
feature. Only available when a terrain

perimeter exists.
15 Road (Perimeter) - Convert to a road
polyline where the polyline represents

the perimeter of the road. Only available
when a terrain perimeter exists and the
polyline is closed.
806
16 Road (Center Line) - Convert to a
road where the polyline represents the

center line for the road. Only available when
a terrain perimeter exists.
17 Road Median - Convert the selected
polyline to a road median. This is

helpful for creating medians on curved roads.
18 Road Marking (Perimeter) - Convert
to a road marking where the polyline

represents the perimeter of the road marking.
Only available when a terrain perimeter
exists and the polyline is closed.
19 Road Stripe (Center Line) - Convert
to a road stripe where the polyline

represents the centerline of the road stripe.
exists.
20 Sidewalk (Perimeter) - Convert to a
sidewalk polyline where the polyline

represents the perimeter of the sidewalk.
exists and the polyline is closed.
21 Sidewalk (Center Line) - Convert to a
sidewalk where the polyline represents

the center line of the sidewalk. Only
available when a terrain perimeter exists.
Click OK to convert the object or objects.
Chapter 34:
Advanced Design
& Editing
Chapter Overview
Chief Architects advanced editing tools

offer a powerful variety of editing options.
Groups of objects can be selected based on a
shared quality or location and then edited in
many unconventional ways.
Before beginning any major plan revisions
manually, take a moment to become familiar
with the tools described in this chapter.
Chapter Contents
Time Tracker
Time Log Dialog
House Wizard
Spell Check
Plan Check
IRC Checklist
Select Same / Load Same
Edit Area Tools
Point-to-Point Move with Edit Area
Reflect About Line with Edit Area
Copy/Paste with Edit Area
Delete Objects
Rotate View
Reverse Plan
Advanced
Design
Chief Architects advanced design tools let

you draw and model plans with ease and
flexibility, giving you the tools you need to
ensure the quality and integrity of your work.
807
Time Tracker
The Time Tracker tools allow you to
monitor the time spent on each plan. Start
and end times can be entered each time a
plan is opened and closed and can be added
and edited as needed. Time Tracker
information is stored with each plan and can
be printed or exported.
Control how the Time Tracker functions on
the Time Tracker panel of the Preferences
dialog. See Time Tracker Panel on page
109.
Click the Time Tracker Tools parent

right.
Click the Start Time Logging
button to
begin logging time for the current plan. This
will create a new entry. Opening a plan will
automatically start a time log if you set your
preferences to do so.
Click the Stop Time Logging
button to
stop logging time for the current plan. This
button will only be available when an entry is
currently being recorded.
Click the View Time Log
button to open
the Time Log dialog. See Time Log
Dialog on page 808.
Time Tracker panel of the Preferences dialog
Time Log Dialog

The Time Log dialog displays all entries
logged for the current plan. Entries can be
added, deleted, edited, exported, and printed.
808
Click the View Time Log

the Time Log dialog.
button to open
Time Log Dialog
3
4
5
Select an entry in the Start Time

column and edit the details in the lower
portion of the dialog.
2 Click Add to add a new entry using the

current time.
Select an entry and click Delete to remove it.

Click Export to open the Select Log
Export File dialog and specify a name and
destination for the exported file. Time log
information can be exported as a text file
(.txt) or as a Comma Separated Values file
(.csu).
Click Print to open the Print dialog and
print a time tracker log.
3 Select an entry and edit the Start and
End times. Highlight the digits and

enter new values or use the arrow keys on the
keyboard. You can also click the drop-down
list and select a date from the calendar. The
start time must predate the end time.
The Duration of the selected entry and the
Total Duration display at right.
4 Initially the User information is derived
from the Chief Architect license

registration information. By default, the User
information is prefilled from the Default
User Name on the Time Tracker panel of the
Preferences dialog. You can select an
entry and change the User here.
5 Select an entry and add Notes.
809
Advanced
Design
1 A summary of the entries displays here.
House Wizard
Editing Rooms
The House Wizard is a timesaving

feature used to create a preliminary
room-by-room design of a home without
getting caught up in the details. Once the
shape and layout of the rooms are finalized,
the House Wizard will convert them into a
working plan that can be edited and detailed
to completion.
Start House Wizard

Select Tools> House Wizard> Start
House Wizard
. The House
Wizard will lead you through a series of
windows that gather information about the
rooms you want to include in your house.
Once you have clicked Finish and closed the
House Wizard, the selected room boxes
will display.
Select room boxes using the Select

Objects
tool just like other objects in
Chief Architect. Room boxes can be
resized, rotated, and rearranged.
Try to line up the rooms so that they are

just touching. Excessive overlaps may
cause your rooms to form incorrectly.
Rooms can be copied and pasted using

the Copy/Paste
edit button and
deleted using the Delete
Room boxes can now be arranged into a floor

plan.
810
edit button.
Click the House Wizard

parent button to display child buttons and place
additional rooms in your plan. Select a
child button and click in the plan to place
a room box of that type.
Spell Check
Build House
When the rooms are in place, select Tools>
House Wizard> Build House to convert the
rooms into a building model.
Walls and doors will be created between the

rooms that you arranged. If you specified a
two-story house, go to the second floor and
select Tools> House Wizard> Build House
to create the second floor.
Spell Check
The Spell Check feature can be
accessed in the Text Specification
dialog or by selecting Tools> Spell Check
or .layout file is checked consecutively for

spelling errors.
to open the Check Spelling dialog.

The toolbar button can also be added to your
toolbar. See Adding Toolbar Buttons on
page 18.
Advanced
Design
When accessed through the Text

Specification dialog, only the selected text
object is checked for spelling errors. See
Text Specification Dialog on page 711.
Click the Spell Check button to open the
Check Spelling dialog and initiate Spell
Check.
When accessed through the menu or tool
button, each text object in the current .plan
811
Check Spelling Dialog
1
2
3
5
Note: Spell Check has its own Help system.

For complete documentation, click Help.
1 Spell check looks in for each word in
all open dictionaries. Any words not

found display in this field. Type a correction
in the field and click Change or select one of
the suggested corrections below.
2 Spell check makes Suggestions for

corrections and display them here.
3 If a word is not misspelled but is not
found in a dictionary, it can be added.

Click the drop-down File list to select which
dictionary the word is saved to.
Note: New words can be added to any dictionary file; however, if Chief Architect is uninstalled and reinstalled, only additions to the
User Dictionary, userdic.tlx, will be retained.
Words added to other dictionary files will not
be saved.
4 Click Undo to reverse the previous

spell check operation.
812
Click Options to open the Spelling

Options dialog. Select options to specify
how Spell Check functions.
Click Dictionaries to open the Spelling
Dictionaries dialog. Additional
dictionaries can be opened or closed by
clicking the Add File or Remove File
buttons. Click the New File... button to add a
new dictionary to the list.
Click Help to open the Spelling Checker
Dialog help system for complete
documentation.
Click Cancel to close the Spell Check
dialog without making any further changes.
5 The selected text will display here.

6 Click Ignore to ignore the word in
question during the current spell check

session. Running spell check again will not
ignore the same word.
Click Ignore All to ignore the word in
question every time spell check is run.
Click Add to add the word in question to the
dictionary.
Plan Check
Click Change to replace the word in

question with the suggested word which is
currently highlighted.
When Spell Check is finished checking the

text object or file for errors, the Spell Check
results window will display.
Click Change All to replace all instances of

the word in question with the suggested word
which is currently highlighted.
Click Suggest to initiate a deeper search for
suggested corrections. Once all possible
suggestions have been made, the button will
be disabled.
Plan Check
Plan Check Dialog
Plan Check checks the currently

displayed floor of your plan for
anything that appears to violate common
building codes or practices. Plan Check will
not find all the problems in a plan but will
point out areas that may need improvement.
With each error that it finds, Plan Check

displays a dialog offering several choices.
When Plan Check is done, take a look at the
issues it flags and then run it again.
Click Next to ignore this error and proceed to the next.
Click Previous to return to the previous

error.
Disclaimer: The Plan Check feature in

Chief Architect compares your plan with
commonly known building codes and practices. This Plan Check does not claim to
detect all building code and design requirements. Always have your plans checked by a
licensed professional before beginning actual
construction.
Hold suspends Plan Check so you can fix

the problem. Select Plan Check again
from the menu, or hit F9, and it will pick
up where it left off.
Done terminates Plan Check.
If this dialog obscures the floor plan view,

drag its title bar to move it out of the way. It
will remember its new position and continue
to display there.
813
Advanced
Design
Potential plan errors that are found usually

display a circle around them. To prevent the
circled item from being off-screen, make
sure the entire plan is displayed within the
window before you run Plan Check.
Some rooms that have not yet had their

Room Type specified using the Room
Specification dialog can be automatically
changed by Plan Check. Hallways, entry
halls, clothes closets, garages, bedrooms,
bathrooms and kitchens can often be located
and typed automatically. Some rooms are
determined by their size and shape; and
others, by their contents. For example, a
shelf in a small room indicates a closet; a
stove or refrigerator indicates a kitchen; or a
bed, a bedroom. If the program cannot assign
a room type, Plan Check will circle it and
suggest that you assign the Room Type.
The first time Plan Check runs, it
automatically assigns a room type to as many
rooms in your plan as it can and requests that
you assign the rest. Do this by doubleclicking in the room in Select Objects
mode to display the Room Specification

dialog, then select a Room Type for the
room. Plan Check can do a much better job
of checking for problems if it knows what a
room is to be used for.
Several things that may become incorrect as
your plan evolves can be fixed using Plan
Check. For example, some walls may change
from exterior to interior as they become
enclosed by other walls. Doors in these walls
are redrawn without the threshold that marks
an exterior door. Any wall that changes from
interior to exterior, or becomes a wall
between the house and its attached garage
has its doors redrawn with a threshold. A
cabinet, fixture or furniture item that is
against a wall due to the wall being moved
into it, as opposed to the item being moved,
will be attached to the wall.
IRC Checklist
Chief Architect includes the
International Code Councils IRC
Checklist, a comprehensive list of
standard building codes which can greatly
facilitate your planning; design; and plan
approval processes.
814
Select Tools> View IRC Checklist

to
view a copy of the IRC Checklist in .pdf
format.
Note: The IRC Checklist is a useful

reference tool but is not an alternative to
the local building codes in your area.
Select Same Type

tool allows you to
quickly locate all objects that have specific
matching attributes. These objects can then
be modified as a group using the Load
Values to Make Same
tool. Both tools
provide complete control over which object
attributes are used for matching and loading.
Select Same Type

The Select Same Type
edit button
displays when you select a room,
cabinet, window or door object. Use the
Select Same Type
tool to select all
objects that have the same selected attributes
set as the original object selected. This can
be useful to quickly find all objects which all
have the same set of attributes. With the
exception of rooms, all objects selected can
then be opened for specification and
modified all at once.
Click the Select Same Type
tool to open
the Select Similar Objects dialog. Select
815
Advanced
Design
The Select Same/Load Same tools are a fast

way to locate and modify objects within your
plan. These tools are currently available for
rooms, cabinets, windows and doors. The
all attributes that you want to match by

checking the corresponding boxes. The set of
attributes available will vary depending on
the type of object selected. Click OK to
select all objects in the current plan which
have the same selected attributes as the
original object.
All objects that match the orignal will be
displayed as highlighted and the Load
Values to Make Same
edit button will
become available. Depending on the type of
object selected, several other tools might be
available, including the Open Object
edit button and the Delete
edit button.
Load to Make Same Value

The Load Values to Make Same
edit button will become available after
first using the Select Same Type
tool to
select a group of objects that share the same
attributes. This tool can be used to load the

selected attributes into any objects that do
not currently have the same values.
Click the Load Values to Make Same
tool after using the Select Same Type
tool. Then click on any object which is not
currently highlighted to match its attributes
to the original selection set. You can keep
selecting objects to load values until the Esc
key or any other tool is used.
Some attributes can only be used for
selecting objects and cannot be loaded from
one object to another. These attributes are
displayed in the Select Similar Objects
dialog followed by a star.
Although Multiple Select is not available for
rooms, the Load Same tool can be used to
quickly modify multiple rooms. Click on any
rooms that are not highlighted to change their
attributes so that they will match the original.
Edit Area Tools

The Edit Area Tools allow you to
quickly edit groups of objects in a
variety of ways. Select Edit> Edit Area>
to view the Edit Area tools or click the
Edit Area parent button to display the child
buttons.
Edit Area
Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area
and drag a rectangular marquee
around the area of the plan to be edited.
816
Some objects, such as cabinets, will be

included with the edit group only if more
than half of the object is contained within the
marquee.
Edit Area
affects both visible objects
and those in the selected area that are not
currently displayed in floor plan view.
Click the Edit Area Visible
button
to perform the Edit Area function on
visible objects only. Objects not currently
displayed in floor plan view are unaffected.
Edit Area Tools
Edit Area Polyline

If the rectangular marquee does not allow
you to define an area precisely, use a closed
polyline instead. Select the polyline covering
the desired area in floor plan view and then
select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area
. The
polyline will temporarily change to a dashed
line.
You will be able to delete, move, or copy all
of the objects surrounded by the marquee,
within the same floor, from floor to floor, or
from plan to plan. You can also reflect, or
mirror the area around any given CAD line.
If you select Edit> Edit Area> Area (All
Click the Edit Area (All Floors)

Visible
button to perform the Edit
Area (All Floors) function on visible objects
only. Objects not currently displayed in floor
plan view are unaffected.
The Edit Area tools provide a simple means
of copying an entire building from one plan
and placing it into another. It can also be very
useful if a plan needs to be rotated.
or Edit Area (All Floors)
Visible
, the same actions will be taken
for all floors of your plan file.
The Edit Area tools can affect widespread changes across an entire plan
and should always be used with caution.
Moving an Area

allows you
to select everything within a given
area across all floors in a plan. Once selected,
you can copy, delete, move everything in the
selected area simultaneously.
To move an area defined by a marquee, drag

from its center, the area within which the
pointer turns into a four-headed arrow.
Everything in the rectangle is moved.
Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area (All

Floors)
, then drag a rectangular marquee
around the entire area you want to copy,
delete or move. Remember that you are
defining the same area for all the floors, so
be sure to draw the marquee large enough to
select all the items on every floor, if that is
what you want.
When the desired area is defined by the
marquee, most of the Edit Area functions
described in this chapter may be used.
Walls crossed by the marquees boundaries

are cut and the portions in the rectangle are
moved. Cut walls that are parallel to the
move are lengthened or shortened and
reconnected. Walls are affected in this way
when an area is moved: not when it is
rotated, reflected or copied.
When an area is moved, it will jump at
increments defined in the Grid Settings
section of the Plan Defaults dialog. See
817
Advanced
Design
Floors)

affects both
visible objects and those in the selected area
that are not currently displayed in floor plan
view.
Allowed Angles
If more than one percent of the straight walls
selected with Edit Area or Edit Area All
Floors marquee are not at an allowed angle,
To move the area an exact distance, set the
Snap unit to that value before moving the
area. The Snap unit may be as high as 48, or
1200 mm. To move an area a distance greater
than that amount, move it in two or more
steps: set the Snap unit set to 48 and move
the area to within 48" of its new location;
then set the snap unit again to precisely move
the area into place.
the Allowed Angles

edit button will
appear. Click this button to display the
Place at Allowed Angles dialog.
Place at
Allowed Angles Dialog

edit
button can also be used with the Edit Area
tools for accurate moving. See Transform/
Rotating an Area
If Current Point is checked under Rotate/

Resize About on the CAD panel of the
Preferences dialog, the rotation will be
about the current point instead of the center.
Select the first option to rotate the plan so

that the largest group of off angle walls move
to an allowed angle. This may place this
largest group at allowed angles, but has two
disadvantages. First, other groups of off
angle walls will remain off angle. Second,
any walls that were at an allowed angle
before will move off angle. The dialog will
show how much (weighted by length) of the
selected walls are in each category.
The location of text changes appropriately

with the rotation. To prevent a text object
from rotating, unselect the Rotate with Plan
check box on the Text tab of the Text
Select the second option to add new entries

to the Allowed Angles list and allow new
walls to be placed at these new allowed
angles. Walls already at allowed angles will
remain so.
To rotate a selected area, drag the triangular

handle in a circular motion. Unless otherwise
specified in the Preferences dialog, the
selected area will rotate about its center.

edit
button can also be used with the Edit Area
tools for accurate rotating. See Transform/
818
Select the third option to do nothing.

Checking this and clicking OK is the same as
clicking Cancel.
Often, you will rotate the majority of the
walls to one of the normal allowed angles.
Then use the Edit Area

tool to select
everything again and select two to provide
new angle entries to cover the remaining
walls.
Deleting an Area
When an area is defined using Edit Area
, click the Delete
edit button to delete
everything in the selection set.
Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area (All
Floors)
and click the Delete
edit
button to delete all items in the selection area
on all floors of your model.
Copying an Entire Floor

An entire floor can be copied to another floor
using the Edit Area
tool.
To copy an entire floor to another floor

1.
Use the Edit Area

tool to select the
objects you would like to copy.
2.
3.
Click the Floor Up/Down

to go to another floor.
4.
Press Ctrl + V, or click the Copy/Paste
edit button.
tool
edit button.
5.
Click to place the copied objects.
Click Method
Define an Edit Area by dragging the
rectangular selection marquee. Select the
Point-to-Point Move
edit button; click
at a starting point; and then click at the end
point to move to. The selected area will be
moved the distance and direction defined by
the two points. Use CAD points or other snap
points to place the selection set accurately.
Drag Method
If you click and drag while using the Pointto-Point Move
edit button, the move
will be restricted by the Allowed Angles
defined in the Plan Defaults dialog.
Define an Edit Area by dragging the
rectangular selection marquee; select the
Point-to-Point Move
edit button; click
at a starting point; and drag the pointer to an
end point while holding down the mouse
button. The selected area will be moved the
distance and direction defined by the drag.
If you hold down the Ctrl key before dragging
the selected area, it will move as if you had
used the Click Method described above.
819
Advanced
Design
The Point-to-Point Move

edit
button allows a selected Edit Area to
be accurately moved. There are two different
ways to use this tool.
Copying
The Point-to-Point Move

tool can also
be used to place a copy of the selected area.
edit button, then
use the Point-to-Point Move

edit button
to place the copy just as you would use it to
move an area.
Reflect About Line with Edit Area

A selected area or an entire floor can
be reflected about a CAD line drawn at
one of the allowed angles.
3.
To reflect a selected area about a line:
The selected area will be reflected around the

CAD line, and the original selection area will
no longer be there.
1.
Draw a CAD line (not a polyline) to act

as the reflection line.
2.
Define an Edit Area and click the

Reflect About Line
edit button.
Click on the CAD line to reflect the

selected area about that line. It does not
matter whether or not the line is inside
the selection rectangle.
To retain a copy of the selected area in the

original location, use the Copy/Paste
tool with the Reflect About Line
tool.
Copy/Paste with Edit Area

The Copy/Paste
edit button allows
a selected Edit Area to be duplicated in
the same plan; copied to another floor; or
copied to another plan.
Copy Restrictions
When copying into the same plan, the
distance between the center of the original
area and the center of the copied area must be
more than half the width or height of the
area. This prevents a copy being placed on
top of the original.
820
Copy - Drag
Select an Edit Area; click the Copy/Paste
edit button; and drag from the center of
the selected area to position the copy at its
new location. Position the copy accurately
with respect to its original position by
watching the readout of the moved distance
in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen.
Copy - Click
The Copy/Paste
edit button can also be
used to place a copy by clicking in the same
or in a different plan.
Delete Objects
To copy to another window, first click once

to activate that window; and click a second
time to place the copy.
If you have to go to the Window menu or
click on the toolbar of a tiled window to
display the other plan file, select Edit> Paste
and then click to place the copy.
Making a Reflective Copy

with Edit Area
To reflect a copy within the same plan,
draw a CAD line to reflect about;
select an Edit Area; click the Reflect About
Line
edit button; then the Copy/Paste
edit button. Click on the reflection line

and a copy will be reflected about that line.
Hold Position
When copying between different
floors of the same plan, place a copy
exactly over or under the original by clicking
the Hold Position
edit button before you
click the Copy/Paste

edit button. Switch
to the desired floor and click in floor plan
view or select Edit> Paste and then click
anywhere to place the copy. The copy will be
placed directly above or below the original.
If you select File> Edit Area (All Floors)
, the Hold Position
edit button will
copy all floors from one plan to another and
retain the absolute position of the data in the
new plan.
Note: If you do not click on a reflection line,

but click elsewhere in the same or a different
plan, a copy will be reflected about a
vertical axis centered on the point clicked.
Delete Objects
Use the Delete Objects
feature to
delete all objects of a specified type,
such as cabinets or electrical, in one room;
on the current floor; or in the entire plan.
1.
Advanced
Design
If you delete from a room, place your checks

in the dialog, then click in that room before
clicking Done. The items will be deleted.
Select Edit> Delete Objects...
to
open the Delete Objects dialog.
821
5.
When the scope is set to Single Room,

click in a room of the plan to delete the
selected objects without closing the dialog. Continue clicking on rooms or
choose a different scope.
6.
Click Done when all selections have

been deleted.
If you select All Rooms or All Floors, you

do not need to click in floor plan view. The
Done button will change to OK and clicking
this button will cause the changes to be
made.
2.
Use the radio button to select the Delete

Scope as Single Room, All Rooms (current floor only), or All Floors.
3.
In the Delete section, select the check

boxes for the items you want to delete.
4.
Click Select All to select all check boxes

or Clear All to clear all check boxes.
Rotate View
To rotate a floor plan view, select
Tools> Rotate View...
to open the
Rotate Plan View dialog. Enter the
amount of degrees to rotate the floor plan

view. Degrees can be entered in fractional or
decimal units, and in positive or negative
numbers.
822
Text objects will rotate with the plan unless

you unselect the Rotate with plan check box
Reverse Plan
in the Text Specification dialog for each

object. Floor plan views and CAD details can
also be rotated in a layout file.
When a floor plan view is rotated, the
Cartesian coordinates applied to CAD
objects are also rotated. If the view is rotated
by 90 degrees, the positive X direction will
now be from bottom to top; and the positive
Y direction, from right to left.
Using the Rotate View tool will not alter the

orientation of the plan on the printed page. If
you want to rotate the plan on the drawing
sheet, you will need to rotate the drawing
sheet. See Show Sheet on page 887.
.
A plan rotates relative to its original orientation. For example, entering 90

degrees twice will result in a rotation of 90
degrees from the original orientation, not 180.
Reverse Plan
The Reverse Plan tool is a quick way
to mirror a plan so that everything is
swapped left to right.
Select Tools> Reverse Plan
to reflect an
entire plan right to left about a vertical line.
Reverse Plan reverses all floors associated
with the current floor.
Advanced
Design
Reversing a plan will cause the entire model

to be rebuilt and will also close any 3D views
currently open.
823
824
Pictures, Images,
& Movies
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect can save any view in a wide
variety of picture file formats. Picture files
can also be imported into Chief Architect and
displayed in most views for a variety of
applications.
Chief Architect also contains many images
of real world objects such as trees, plants,
people, vehicles, etc. in the Library Browser.
Images are actual objects that can be edited
in a variety of ways.
Chief Architect allows you to create virtual
tours that can be saved, shared with others,
and played back later.
Chief Architect can also generate a POV-ray
file from a 3D view for photo-realistic
rendering capabilities. The POV-ray feature
is covered in its own chapter, see
Chapter Contents
Picture Files vs. Image Objects

Importing Picture Files
Editing Picture Files
Exporting Picture Files
Picture File Box Specification Dialog
Creating Images
Placing Images
Viewing Images
Copying Images
Moving Images
Resizing an Image
Adding Images to the Library
Image Specification Dialog
Windows Metafiles
Walkthroughs
VRML
825
Images &
Movies
Chapter 35:
Picture Files vs. Image Objects

In common computer language, a "picture
file" is synonomous with "image". In Chief
Architect however, there are some notable
differences between the two terms.
A picture file (such as a .bmp, .jpg, .gif, .png,
etc.) is a two dimensional image, examples
of which can be found on most computers.
An image object (in Chief Architect) is a two
dimensional image that also contains Width
and Height data, and an associated 2D CAD
Block. This associated data enables Chief

Architect to accurately model the image in
3D and 2D. Like other objects, an image can
be selected, opened for specification, and
edited in a variety of ways.
A picture file can be converted into an image
object. Existing images can also be edited
and saved to the library as new images. See
Creating Images on page 831.
Importing Picture Files

Select File> Import> Picture (BMP, JPG,
be used in cross section/elevation views.
PNG)
to insert a picture file into a plan.
The Import Picture File dialog will open
and allow you to browse to a picture file on
your computer.
Picture files can be used in layout pages as in

the case of logos or scanned cut sheets, but
they cannot be applied to the model and
viewed on a layout sheet. If you want to use a
picture on a layout sheet, select File>
Picture files can be imported into floor plan

view, cross section/elevations, Wall
Elevations, CAD Details, and Layouts. Chief
Architect allows you to import a variety of
graphics file formats.
Picture files do not show in 3D views but can
826
Import> Picture (BMP, JPG, PNG)

from a layout file. The picture will then
appear on the current layout page. If placed
on layout page zero, the picture will print on
all pages.
Images &
Movies
Import Picture File Dialog

1
2
3
4
1 Navigate to the folder containing the

picture to be imported.
2 Select the picture file from the list.

3 File name shows the selected picture.
4 Files of type can be *.bmp, *.jpg,
*.png, *.gif, *.tif, or *.pcx.
Click Open to finish importing the picture.

The picture will be placed in the center of the
current view.
Importing Backdrops
Backdrops can be directly imported into the
Library Browser from anywhere on your
computer. See Adding Backdrops to the

Picture files can be edited in a variety of
ways.
Grab the rotate handle to rotate the picture to any angle.
Using the Mouse
Resize Factor
Picture files have a border which acts just

like a CAD box. It can be used to relocate,
rotate, or resize the picture using the mouse.
If you import a picture of a house plan or

property layout, you will usually want it to
be drawn at full scale. This can be done with
a little bit of calculation.
Select the border and drag from a corner

to resize the picture proportionally.
Drag an edge to stretch the picture horizontally or vertically.
1.
Import the picture file.
827
2.
Find two items on the picture which are

a known horizontal or vertical distance
apart.
Resize Picture
A selected picture can be resized in
either the X or Y direction with the
Resize Picture tool.
3.
Draw parallel CAD lines on top of these

two items.
4.
Find the distance between the CAD

lines.
1.
Select the picture.
5.
The Resize Factor for the image will be

the true distance on the image divided
by the distance between the CAD lines.
2.
Click the Resize Picture

button.
3.
Click on two points in the image that

have a known distance between them.
4.
After you click at the second point, the

Resize Picture dialog opens showing
the distance between the points.
5.
Enter a new dimension that matches the

known distance between the points.
6.
Click OK and the picture will be

resized.
In other words, if the items are supposed to

be 10 feet apart on the picture, but the
distance between the two CAD lines
superimposed on those items is only 2 feet,
you need to set the Resize Factor for the
picture to 5. (10 divided by 2 equals 5).
When the picture is 5 times the original size,
the items on the picture are at the actual scale
shown on the picture.
6.
edit
Select the picture and click the Transform/Replicate Object

edit button.
dialog opens.
7.
Select the Resize Factor check box and

enter the calculated Resize Factor.
8.
Click OK and the image will be

rescaled.
Exporting Picture Files

The Export Picture tool is similar to
creating a screen capture of everything
that appears in the current Chief Architect
window. Select File> Export> Picture or
click on the Export Picture
button to
save the current view as a picture file. The
828
Export Picture File dialog will open.
This dialog will allow you to specify the file

name, location, and file format to use.
Files may be saved in a variety of picture file
formats. These files can then be used outside
of Chief Architect in other applications.
Images &
Movies
1
2
3
4
1 Navigate to the desired directory.
2 The pictures which exist in the current
directory display here.
3 Give the picture a name.

4 Save as type can be *.bmp, *.jpg,
*.png, *.tif, or *.pcx.
Click Save to finish.

Select an imported picture file and click the
Open Object
Picture File Box Specification dialog.
829
1
2
1 Filename - The full pathname for the
picture file. You can type in a new

name to change the picture assigned to this
box.
Browse - Click this button to browse for a
new picture file or to relink one that was not
found.
2 X Position - The location of the picture

box relative to the absolute origin.
Y Position - The location of the picture box

relative to the absolute origin.
Angle - The current angle of the picture box
relative to a horizontal line pointing towards
the right hand side of the screen.
3 Check Save in Plan if you would like
to embed the image in the plan file. If a

picture file is embedded in the plan you do
not need to include the picture separately
when sending a plan.
830
Picture files that were originally using

.jpg format select the .jpg option by
default.
Picture files that were using .gif or .png

formats select the .png option by default.
4 Keep Aspect Ratio - Keeps the aspect
ratio (the ratio of width to height)

constant. If you change one value, the other
will be recalculated so that the image does
not get stretched unevenly.
Width - the width of the picture in plan
units.
Height - the height of the picture in plan
units.
Reset Original Aspect Ratio - Click this
button to resize the picture to the original
aspect ratio. This will change the current
width value and keep the height value.
Creating Images
Enter a degree of Contrast from 1 - 100%
Options.
Check Black and White Dither to dither

the selected picture file. Dithering creates a
two tone effect which may produce better
results when printing some pictures.
Check Grayscale to replace the color in the
selected picture file with shades of gray.
Check Reflect to reverse the image.
Line Style Tab

For information about ising the Line Style
Fill Style Tab

For information about ising the Fill Style tab,
Enter a degree of Brightness from 1 - 100%
Creating Images
2D Images that represent real world
objects can be used to enhance 3D
views. Images have the advantage of making
3D views and renderings more realistic
without adding many surfaces to the model.
For example, a realistic tree image can be
used instead of a tree symbol that might have
thousands of surfaces. This can dramatically
improve realism without compromising
drawing time.
An image is not the same as a picture file.
See Picture Files vs. Image Objects on
page 826. For a picture file to become an
image it must be associated with a CAD
Block (for floor plan view representation)
and must have width and height data
associated with it. Once assigned, this data
will be saved with the image in the Library
Browser.
To create an image from a picture file:
1.
unlocked library in the Library Browser

and select New> Image. See Image
2.
Click the Browse button to browse to a

picture file on your computer or enter
the path to a valid picture file in the
Image File field.
3.
Select a CAD Block that will represent

the image in floor plan view. You can
choose a Picture Symbol from the list
or click the Library button and select a
CAD Block from the library. For information about adding new CAD blocks to
the library, see Creating a Library of
4.
Enter Height and/or Width information.

You can also enter Height Above if you
would like the image to sit above or
below 0 elevation.
5.
Enter transparency information and

layer information on the Transparency
tab and the Layer tab.
6.
Click OK to close the Image

Select Tools> Image> Create Image

to open the Image Specification
dialog. You can also right-click on an
831
Images &
Movies
5 Choose from a variety of Display
7.
Converting a
Folder of Images
Place the new image in floor plan view.
For information about saving images to the

library, see Adding Images to the Library
on page 834.
To create an image from the Library Browser
A folder of images can be converted

into image objects all at once, saving
the effort of converting them individually.
1.
To convert a folder of images:
2.
3.
4.
From the Library Browser, select an

unlocked library, folder, subfolder, or
image.
1.
Select Tools> Image> Create Image

Library
Right-click with the mouse to open the

contextual menu.
2.
Select New> Image to open the Image

Select a folder of images to convert in

the Browse For Folder dialog and
click OK.
3.
Once all of the images in the folder have

been converted, the Library Browser
will open (if it is not already open). A
new library of the same name and directory structure as the converted folder can
be found in the Library Browser.
Once created, the image will display in

the Library Browser where you rightclicked.
Placing Images
Select Library> Image Library or
click the Image Library toolbar
button. The Library Browser opens to the
Images directory. Select an image from the
Library Browser and click in floor plan view,

3D view, or render view to place it.
The image will display in floor plan view
with a CAD block to represent its location.
The image will be displayed in 3D views.
Viewing Images
An image consists of a two-dimensional
picture file, an associated CAD Block, and
width and height data. Depending on which
type of view is current, the image will appear
differently, or may not appear at all.
832
In Floor Plan View

In floor plan view, images are represented by
a 2D CAD block. Any 2D CAD block from
the library can be used to represent an image
object. See, Image Specification Dialog on
page 834.
The CAD Blocks that represent an image in

floor plan view are placed on the Images/
Trees layer by default. They can be moved to
othger layers. See Image Specification
Dialog on page 834.
To turn off the display of images, click the
Display Options
button to open the
Layer Display Options dialog. Clear the
Images check box in ther appropriate

column and click OK.
In Layout
The symbols representing images in floor
plan view, whether 2D symbols or CAD
blocks, can be displayed on a layout sheet
and can be printed or plotted.
Copying Images
Copying the 2D symbol in floor plan view
copies the attached picture within a plan or to
another plan. Multiple images can be copied
simultaneously, either within the same plan
or between plans. The relationship between
the images is maintained in the copy.
Copy images by selecting them in 2D or 3D

views and clicking the Copy/Paste
edit
button. When the Copy pointer
appears,
click to place a copy.
Moving Images
Images can be selected and moved in both
floor plan view and 3D views. When selected
in floor plan view, the move handle
allows you to relocate the image. The
elevation of an image cannot be changed in
floor plan view.
In a 3D view, the image can be selected by
clicking anywhere in the rectangular border
that defines the image. Once selected, use the

move handle
to move the image up,
down, or side-to-side. The movement will be
restricted to lines that are perpendicular to
the angle of the camera that produced the
current 3D view. Dimensions will appear to
help you locate the item properly.
Resizing an Image
Images can be resized in either 2D or 3D
views. When either the height or the width is
changed, the rest of the image resizes
proportionally.
access the dialog, select the image and click

the Open Object
edit button.
The Image Specification dialog

associated with any image allows you to type
in a width or height value for that image. To
833
Images &
Movies
Copying Images
You can select the

image in any 3D view
and resize it by
dragging from any of
the four outside
handles. The picture
image and the 2D
symbol resize
proportionally.
The image can be resized

in floor plan view by
dragging from the two
outside handles of the
selected 2D symbol. This
method changes the width
of the image and adjusts the height
proportionally.
Adding Images to the Library

Chief Architect can use any image with a
*.bmp, *.jpg, *.png, *.gif, *.tif, or *.pcx.
extension.
it in the Image Specification dialog, to

the Library Browser.
Generally .png files work best as images

because this format has good compression
and allows for the image to contain
transparency information.
You can create new folders within the Images

directory to store your images. The files
display in alphabetical order. Once a folder is
created, it becomes available the next time
Chief Architect is started or when the
Select an image in floor plan view and click
Refresh Library Browser
the Add to Library

edit button to add
the image, and all of the data associated with
For information about adding images, see

Graphics Directories on page 103.
tool is used.

Any image can be modified. It may be
adjusted in size or even changed to a
different image altogether. Select the 2D
CAD Block that represents the image in
edit button to open the selected image for
specification. The Image Specification
dialog appears.
834
Existing images can also be opened for

specification directly from the Library
Browser. Select an image in the tree view,
right click, and select Open from the
contextual menu. The Image
Specification dialog appears.
Images &
Movies
Image Tab
1
3
5
4
6
1 Image File - The path and name of the
selected image file displays here. Click

Browse to open the Library Browser and
replace the current image with a different
one.
2 Picture Symbol - Several universal
CAD Blocks are available to mark the

location of the image in floor plan view.
Select one from the drop-down list or click
the Library button to choose a CAD block
from the Library Browser.
5 Height Above - Specify the symbols
Height above the ground, if applicable.
6 Check Do not rotate in render view if
you do not want the image to rotate

with the camera.
7 The current image displays here.
If you change the CAD block that represents

an image in floor plan view, you may want to
save the new image to the library. See
Viewing Images on page 832.
image. The width will adjust

proportionally.
image. The height will adjust

proportionally.
835
Transparency Tab
1
3
1 Choose which pixel color will indicate
transparency (applies only to .bmp

files).
2 Check Show Transparency to display
the transparent color in the dialog

preview.
3 Enter a level of Tolerance to be applied
to colors that are almost the same color

as the specified transparency color. The
value entered is in color units. Every color
can be described using a value from 0 - 255
in each of three color channels: red, green,
and blue.
For example, white has a value of 255 in
each of the three color channels: red, green,
and blue. If a Tolerance value of 3 is
entered, a color which appears as white, but
is actually 254 in each of the three color
channels will become transparent. Similarly,
a color which is 252 in one channel and 255
in the other two will also be transparent.
836
The Transparent Color

Depending on the image, the transparent
color can be either black or white. The
program automatically selects one or the
other based on characteristics of the image.
There are times when it is necessary to
override the default and choose the
transparent color manually, mainly in
situations where an image contains a lot of
black or a lot of white (such as with black or
white cars). If the transparent color is
inappropriate for the image, the image
appears partially disintegrated. Try each of
the options (at step 7) in the Image
Specification dialog to find the best color.
If black is defined as the transparent color,
every solid black pixel in the image becomes
transparent. If white is selected, every solid
white pixel becomes transparent.
Windows Metafiles
Images &
Movies
Layer Tab
For information about using the Layer tab,
Windows Metafiles
A Windows Metafile (.wmf) is a special file
format that is made up of vectors (lines) that
allow the image to be rescaled without loss
of quality. High resolution pictures can be
exported as a Windows Metafile.
Exporting Windows Metafiles

A Windows Metafile can be exported from
any view except Render and raytrace Views.
Only items which are displayed are written to
the Metafile. If the view is in color on the
screen when the Metafile is written, the
Metafile picture will be in color.
When the view is accurately positioned on
screen, select File> Export> Metafile. Drag
the marquee pointer
from the upper left
to the lower right corner, encompassing the
area to be created into a Windows Metafile.
Enter the name for the Metafile, making sure

to save it in the desired directory location.
You do not need to add the .wmf
extension,the program will do that
automatically. Click Save and the Metafile
Size dialog opens.
When you release the mouse after defining

the area, the Write Windows Metafile
dialog opens.
It is fine to accept the default Width and

Height, Windows Metafiles can always be
resized later.
The Metafile Size dialog from a 3D view
has one additional option. Since line weights
are not definable for 3D items, an option is
837
provided to increase the printing line weight

of a Metafile created from any 3D view.
plan view use the line weights defined in the

Enhanced Metafiles
To increase the printing line weight of a

Metafile created in a 3D view, increase the
value in the Use line weight box. A line
weight of 3 or 4 is usually sufficient for
plotting. This option is not needed from floor
plan view since Metafiles created in floor
Chief Architect has the ability to export

normal Windows Metafiles (.wmf) or
Enhanced Windows Metafiles (.emf). In
general, you should use the Enhanced
Metafile for transferring data to other
applications because it is more precise and
contains more complete drawing
information. If you have problems importing
the Enhanced Metafile in other applications,
try using the Windows Metafile instead.
Walkthroughs
A recorded 3D Walkthrough is a series of
picture files saved in .avi format, which can
be opened by other applications such as
Windows Media Player.
Recording a Walkthrough
Click the Walkthrough Recording
Tools parent button to display the
child buttons to the right.
Record Walkthrough - Click this
button from a 3D view to begin
recording a walkthrough.
Stop Recording - Click this button to
stop recording the walkthrough. This
closes the walkthrough file.
Pause Recording - Click this button to
pause the recording of a walkthrough.
When paused, you can change the camera
838
position without saving an image to the

walkthrough file.
Save Frame - Click this button to save
a single frame to the walkthrough file.
Use this button when a walkthrough has been
paused to control which screens are saved.
To record a 3D walkthrough:
1.
Create a vector or render view. This

view will be the first frame of the walkthrough.
2.
From the view choose 3D> Walkthroughs> Record Walkthrough or

click the Record Walkthrough
button. Specify a location and name for the
walkthrough in the Write Movie File
dialog and click Save.
3.
In the Walkthrough Options dialog,

specify a Frame Rate and a Compres-
4.
5.
sion Percent and click OK. See Walkthrough Options Dialog on page 839.
To convert a .wlk file to a .avi file:
Use the camera movement tools to create additional views. Each time the
screen redraws, that view is recorded as
the next frame in sequence. See Editing
a Camera in 3D Views on page 627.
1.
To move the camera without saving a
.WLK file to .AVI

2.
Recording
6.
from the menu.
Select a .wlk file to convert from the
Select Walkthrough File dialog and
click Open.
3.
Specify a location and name for the .avi

walkthrough in the Select AVI File
dialog and click Save.
4.
In the Walkthrough Options dialog,

specify a Frame Rate and a Compression Percent and click OK. See Walkthrough Options Dialog on page 839.
view, use the Pause Recording

button to temporarily stop recording. You
can then use the Save Frame
button
to control which views get saved, or start
recording again by clicking the Pause
Select 3D> Walkthroughs> Convert
button.
When the walkthrough sequence is com-
Walkthrough Options Dialog
plete choose Stop Recording

or
simply close the view and the walkthrough file will be closed.
Note: Zooming in and out and using the scroll
bars does not change the viewpoint and will
not produce a frame for the walkthrough.
Playing a Walkthrough
A Walkthrough file can be played by
clicking the Play Walkthrough button.
This will open the Open Movie File dialog
and allow you to browse to an .avi on your
computer. Your default video
Select a Frame Rate between 1 and 100.

The value entered is the number of frames
per second.
Seelct a Compression Percent between 0
and 100. A value of 0 will provide the
highest quality images and the largest file
size.
Converting a .WLK File

to an .AVI File
Walkthrough files created using the .wlk
format in prior versions of Chief Architect
can be converted to .avi files, which can be
viewed in many other video applications.
839
Images &
Movies
Walkthroughs
VRML
VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling
Language) is a 3D file format that can be
imported by various walkthrough viewers
as well as other rendering packages. An
exported VRML file contains the entire 3D
model with texture, image, and lighting
information that cannot be exported via

DWG/DXF.
You can post a VRML file on your Web site,
or email it to a customer who can then view it
and walk through it using a VRML viewer.
Exporting VRML Files

VRML files are created from vector and
render views. The entire model is exported,
but the starting point for the walkthrough is
defined by the camera location at the time of
export. VRML files use the same textures
that appear in render views.
VRML files will match render views more

closely than vector views since they will use
similar methods of display including lighting
and textures.
When a vector or render view is active, select
File> Export> Export VRML
. The
VRML Export Options dialog opens.
2
4
6
8
1 Define the Camera Field of View.
5
7
3 Walk Through Surfaces allows you to
Standard most closely corresponds to

the default Chief Architect camera view. The
other options generate a wider field of view.
walk through walls and closed doors

from room to room, instead of stopping when
you reach a wall.
Then select as many options along the right

side as desired.
4 Turn off Ambient Lights turns off the
2 No Textures Exported keeps
associated texture files from being

exported with the VRML file. If textures are
exported, the texture files must be in the
folder with the VRML file.
840
default lights that are used to light a

scene.
5 Turn off Fixture Lights turns off the
default lights which are generated for

fixtures and are used to light a scene.
6 Night Sky/Ground colors darkens the
ground plane and sky to give a night

appearance.
7 Run Default VRML Viewer starts the
VRML viewer and opens the new

VRML file as soon as it is generated.
8 Copy Images to Export Directory
should be checked if you are saving the

VRML to a file on a disk to be shared with
others. This copies texture bitmaps with the
VRML file so that they render correctly
when exported.
Once the general parameters have been
selected click OK. Name the VRML file and
save it to the desired VRML folder, give the
VRML file a name, and click Save.
You may add new texture and image files for

Chief Architect to use if you use the same
file formats as those provided with the
program. If you want to use a .bmp file in
Chief Architect and still be able to export it
with the VRML file, you should also create a
.gif file with the same name in the same
directory. When you export the VRML file,
Chief Architect will automatically substitute
the .gif for the .bmp file used in the render
view. It is recommended that you use either
the .jpg or .png file format instead of using
.bmp and .gif pairs.
For more information about VRML players,
visit the Chief Architect web site at
It is best to keep all VRML files in a

folder separate from your normal Chief
Architect files, since all textures used in the
model will also export corresponding texture
files to the same folder. This could add a significant number of files, creating potential
organizational problems. A folder named
VRML export can be found in the Chief Architect root directory for this purpose.
VRML use of Texture

& Image Files
The VRML specification does not support
the use of .bmp files. Instead, VRML only
supports compressed file formats such as
.gif, .png, or .jpg files. These are more
compatible, compressed, efficient formats. In
order for VRML to render textures correctly,
the texture and image files must be in the
same directory as the exported .wrl file. So
keep the .wrl and graphic files in the same
directory when moving or copying the
VRML file.
841
Images &
Movies
VRML
842
Chapter 36:
DXF/DWG
DXF/DWG
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect allows you to import and
export files from, and to, other plans, or even
other CAD programs. Importing is the
process of opening a file in Chief Architect
which was produced in a different program.
Exporting is the process of saving a file in a
format that can be read by another program.
Chapter Contents
Compatibility
DXF vs. DWG
CAD to Walls
Importing 2D DXF/DWG Files
Additional 2D Import Information
Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files
Additional 2D Export Information
Exporting a 3D DXF/DWG Model
Compatibility
Importing
Chief Architect supports import of the
following:
2D .dxf or .dwg files compatible with

AutoCAD, including versions 2004/2005
2D Solids (Not ACIS Solids)
3D faces
Exporting
Polylines (Bulges- Arcs in Polyline)
Chief Architect supports export of the

following:
Multi Line Text
Complete 3D .dxf or .dwg models
Lightweight Polylines
3D views as 2D .dxf or .dwg files
843
Polylines (Bulges- Arcs in Polyline)
Filled areas are exported as 2D solids
Dimensions
Chief Architect supports the import and
export of aligned, rotated, and angular
dimensions. Imported dimensions which are
not supported by Chief Architect can be

edited only as lines and text.
CAD blocks containing dimensions as text
must be exploded before the text can be
edited separately. For more on exploding, see
DXF vs. DWG

Many design programs can read and write
.dxf and .dwg file formats. Both formats
interpret data as CAD objects such as lines,
polylines, circles, etc.
.dwg is the native AutoCAD file format.
Originally a proprietary format, it is now
widely used with many different products.
The .dxf (Drawing eXchange Format) is a

standard file format created by Autodesk for
the transfer of data between other programs.
Due to limitations in its structure a higher
degree of data loss should be expected using
.dxf files than .dwg.
CAD to Walls
This feature allows you to convert a flat line
drawing into a 3D model. Once a drawing
has been imported into Chief Architect,
double CAD lines which represent wall
layers and other structural items can be

converted to actual Chief Architect walls,
railings, windows, or doors. See CAD to
Walls on page 155.

A .dxf or .dwg file can be imported into floor
plan view; Wall Elevation
Section/Elevation
Detail window.
844
view; Cross
view; or a CAD
To import a 2D file, select File>

Import> Drawing DWG/DXF
. to
open the welcome page of the Import
Drawing Wizard. Click Next to continue.
Select File
DXF/DWG
1
2
3
1 Enter the name of the drawing file you
want to import; or, click Browse to

locate a file on your computer. The last file
name selected here will appear in this field.
2 If you want to convert lines to polylines

or boxes check the appropriate options.
Polylines will be imported as polylines
regardless of these settings.
Terrain Elevation Data - Check this box to
import lines as Terrain Data. See Importing
DXF/DWG Elevation Data on page 527.
associated with that file. See CAD Block

Management on page 754.
4 Import only referenced CAD blocks,,
which reduces the volume of

transferred data.
Click Next to load the file into memory so

that Chief Architect can present you with
information about the contents of the file.
This can take a while for larger files.
Polylines - Check this option to import lines

as polylines. Unconnected lines will be
connected. This option is rarely needed.
Boxes - Check this option to import lines as
boxes. Unconnected lines will be connected.
This option is rarely needed.
3 Import all CAD blocks, which will
enable you to access all CAD blocks
845
Select Layers
2
1
3
Sspecify which layers you want to import.
1 Boxes checked at left will be imported,

unchecked boxes will not.
2 Layers which were visible on import
will be checked by default. You may

choose to include an invisible layer by
checking the box at left.
846
3 Layers which were frozen on import
will not be checked by default. You can

include them by checking the box at left.
Layers are designated as "visible" or "frozen"
before a file is saved/exported in the original
program. Changes must be made in the
original program and saved/exported again.
DXF/DWG
Layer Mapping
1
2
3
4
5
The Layer Mapping page specifies how

layers will be structured once imported into
Chief Architect.
Mapping to a Single Layer

1 The simplest layer mapping option is to
assign all CAD objects to a single Chief

Architect layer. This choice offers the least
control. Original layer attributes will not be
imported. Line color, style, and weight will
be preserved on a per object basis.
2 All CAD objects to be imported will be
placed on the layer indicated in the box.

Select a layer from the drop-down menu; or
click the Define... button to open the Layer
Display Options dialog and specify a layer
and define its properties. See Layer Display
Mapping Layers By Name

3 The second option is to map layers by
name. Layers will be created in Chief

Architect with the same names as those listed
on the Select Layers window of the Import
Drawing Wizard, and the imported CAD
objects will be placed on those layers.
4 In combination with the second
alternative, you may choose to import

all attributes for each layer or none at all.
The third option is to map each layer
individually with complete control of
all layer mapping options. Selecting the third
option will open the Advanced Layer
Mapping page.
847
Advanced Layer Mapping

\
If you select the Advanced Layer Mapping

alternative, the Advanced Layer
Mapping page will display. This window
allows for complete user control of all layer
mapping options.
1 Displays the layers found in the
drawing file and the layer in Chief

Architect that each will be imported onto.
Select a layer and specify which layer to
import it to below. Multiple layers can be
selected while the Shift key is depressed.
848
2 Displays the Chief Layer that the
currently selected drawing file layer

will be imported onto. Select a different layer
in Chief Architect to import onto from the
drop-down menu; or, click the Define...
button to open the Layer Display Options
dialog where Chief layers can be specified
and defined. See Layer Display Options
Dialog on page 119.
Repeat these steps for additional layers.
Click Next to continue.
DXF/DWG
Duplicate CAD Blocks
1
2
3
4
If one or more CAD blocks in the imported

file have the same name as a block in the
current plan, the Duplicate CAD Blocks
page will display.
4 Select the fourth option to open the
Advanced Duplicate CAD Blocks
page and manage each duplicate individually.

There are four alternatives. Selecting any of

the first three will apply that choice to all
duplicate CAD blocks in your plan.
1 The first choice is to allow the program
to automatically generate unique names

for each duplicate. For instance if the
original files name is "blockname" the
program will give the new file a name like:
"blockname-copy", or "blockname-copy-1".
2 The second alternative is to replace the
existing block in the plan with the

duplicate. This option is not recommended,
as all instances of the CAD block will be
replaced.
3 The third is to keep the existing block

and discard the duplicate.
849
Advanced Duplicate CAD Blocks
3
1
4
2
If you chose the fourth option from the
Duplicate CAD Block dialog the
Advanced Duplicate CAD Block
window will appear. It allows you to apply

the first three alternatives from the previous
window to each duplicate individually.
1 Highlight a block in the menu at the far
left. Multiple blocks may be selected

while the Shift key is depressed.
2 Click one of the 3 buttons in the center
of the window to specify how the

highlighted blocks are to be treated.
3 Review your choices in the tables at the

right.
4 Highlight block(s) within tables at far
right and click Remove to reverse

choices.
850
DXF/DWG
Drawing Unit
1
3
1 What unit of measurement was used
to create this drawing? - Click the

drop down box and select a unit of
measurement. This will ensure that your
imported drawing is accurate.
3 Import as CAD blocks - Select this
radio button to import dimensions as

CAD entities that are not recognized by
Chief Architect as dimensions.
Import Complete
Note: During the import process, Chief Architect defaults to inches or millimeters. If you
are importing a site plan or topo prepared by
a surveyor, or if you are importing a metric
drawing into an imperial plan (or vice versa),
you might need to change the units.
2 Import as dimensions where possible
- Select this radio button to import

dimensions as Chief Architect supported
dimensions.
Once a file is imported it appears in Chief

Architect selected as a unit, with a central
Move handle
available for relocating the
entire file. A Rotation handle is available
as well.
Imported CAD objects can be manipulated
with the CAD tools. See CAD Editing
Tools on page 763.

2D import is accomplished by reading
entities from the .dwg or .dxf file and
creating the equivalent CAD objects in Chief

Architect.
851
In general all z coordinates are mapped to

zero. If an entity has thickness Chief
Architect ignores it.
Following is a list of the entities that are read
and how they are converted. All other
entities are ignored:
Lines
- Both 2D and 3D lines.
Circle - Fully supported in 2D.

Arc - Fully supported in 2D.
Text & Multi-line Text - Both are mapped to
our text object. Multi-line text objects retain
their original width. The first font in a multiline text object is applied to the entire object.
Blocks & Block Inserts - Blocks are loaded
by name. The Duplicate CAD Blocks
dialog controls whether the block is imported
under a new name, replaces an existing block
or simply uses the existing block of the same
name. A block is a group of entities.
Currently a 32K limit on number of entities
per block exists.
Solid - A solid is a 4-sided filled area. These
are imported as filled polygons. Note: there
is currently no export of these items.
3D Face - A 3D face has its z coordinate
mapped to zero, and is imported as a
polygon.
Dimension - Chief Architect supports the

rotated, aligned and 3-point angular
dimensions. All other dimension types have
their associated block imported and placed as
an insert at the appropriate location.
Polylines and Lightweight Polylines Polylines are imported as polylines. Bumps
are converted to arcs. Line widths are
ignored.
Attributes - Attributes are text objects that
are associated with other items, like blocks.
These are imported as text objects at the
appropriate location. The association with
the original object is broken.
Layers - There can be some confusion
between importing a layer and actually
mapping entities to a layer. The distinction is
important. The filter and layer mapping
pages of the Import Drawing Wizard
mostly deal with how entities get mapped
from one layer to another. Layer information
is only imported through the path that maps
all layers to successive numbered layers or in
the Advanced Layer Mapping dialog
when the appropriate item is checked.
Line Styles - Line styles are not imported.
Instead, if a style of the same name appears
in the Chief Architect line styles, that line
style is used. Otherwise a solid line style is
used.

2D and 3D files can be exported from Chief
Architect in both .dxf and .dwg file formats.
You can select the version of AutoCAD that
you prefer to export to. Compatibility with
other software may vary.
852
To export the floor or CAD detail

which is currently displayed, select
File> Export> Current View DWG/DXF.
To export the floor plan view for all
floors simultaneously, select File>
Export> All Floors DWG/DXF from any

floor of the plan.
The Export Drawing File dialog opens.
Export Drawing File
DXF/DWG
2
3
4
5
6
10
7
9
11
13
15
12
1 Save In - The current directory displays

here.
2 Existing .dxf or .dwg files in the

current directory are listed here.
3 Enter a file name.

4 Save as type - Specify which file
format Chief Architect will use to

export.
5 File Format Options - .dxf and .dwg

files created by Chief Architect are
compatible with many versions of
14
AutoCAD. Specify which version from the

drop down list.
6 Binary DXF - Check this box to export
the file in binary .dxf format. Binary

.dxf is easier for the computer to read, is
more accurate, and occupies less disk space.
However, some applications do not support
binary .dxf.
The .dxf format must be selected at step 4 to

allow binary .dxf as an option.
853
7 Split Wall Assemblies Into Layers -
Wall assemblies can be split into layers,

allowing them to be edited separately.
15 Export Filled Areas - Check this box
to export filled areas as AutoCAD 2D

solid entities.
8 Export only displayed layers - Select
Select Save to complete.
9 Export all used and named layers -

119.
If you chose to export all floors the file

will contain all floors superimposed on
each other. The items are on distinct layers, each for its own floor. Items or entire
floors can be turned on or off as desired.
For each floor, different plan items are

placed on separate layers. The floor an
item is located on will be indicated by a
number following the layer name. For
example: "Electrical-2" contains the electrical information for the second floor.
Each fixture and furniture item is a CAD

block in the exported file. Fixture blocks
are referenced on the cabinet layer while
furniture blocks are referenced on the furniture layer.
this radio button to export only those

layers that are displayed.
Select this radio button to export all

layers that either have something on them or
have a layer name specified.
This file is now ready to be imported by

another program.
10 Layer Set - Select a layer set to export.

Customize layer sets to accommodate
desired naming conventions or display
attributes. See Layer Sets on page 121.
11 Define Layers - Clicking this button
will open the Layer Display

Options dialog and allow you to edit your
layer sets before exporting. See Layer
12 Scaling Unit - Select a unit of

measurement to be used.
13 Create Associative Dimensions -
Check this box to export dimensions as

associative dimensions. Associative
dimensions are recognized by AutoCAD and
many other CAD programs.
Uncheck this box to export dimensions as
simple CAD entities that are not recognized
dimensions.
14 Export Pattern Lines - Check this box
to export pattern lines. Pattern lines are

exported as normal CAD lines.
854
DXF/DWG 2D View
Sometimes a flat 2D DXF is needed from a
3D view, such as an elevation, camera view
or overview. When the desired 3D view is on
screen with the desired items displayed,
choose File> Export> Current View. Give
the file a name and save in the desired
location.
Before creating the file, turn off the color
(Window> Color Off) in the 3D view
so that only lines show. This reveals which
lines will be visible in the exported file.
Elevation and cross section views produce a

file with accurate dimensions. Vector and
overviews are not produced to scale.

Export of 2D data takes what would be
drawn on screen and converts it to entities.
Chief Architect exports all data to model
space. We currently support the following
entity types for 2D export:
When an exported dimension is modified

in AutoCAD or another CAD program,
its appearance will change.
Chief Architect does not support arrowhead styles or fonts.
Line - The simplest entity. In AutoCAD, this

is a 3 dimensional line with the z coordinate
set to zero.
Three kinds of dimensions are generated:

Aligned, Rotated and 3 Point Angular.
Please refer to AutoCAD documentation

for more information.
Arc - Arcs have a start angle, end angle and

radius.
Circle - Fully Supported.
Multi Line Text - If exporting to an
AutoCAD release that supports multi-line
text, Chief Architect will write the file as
multi-line text. If exporting to a version that
does not support multi-line text, the file will
be written as simple text.
Polyline - Polylines are a collection of points
with lines or arcs connecting them. Chief
Architect supports both lines and arcs. Arcs
are referred to as bumps in AutoCAD.
Dimension
Each dimension has an associated block

that contains a representation of the
dimension as it is drawn in Chief Architect. It also contains all the data to recreate that information.
Note: Uncheck "Use Associative Dimensions" in the Export Drawing File dialog
if the CAD program you are using does not
support AutoCAD Associative dimensions.
See Export Drawing File on page 853.
Block Insert - A block insert is a reference

to a block. A block is simply a named
collection of entities. A block can also
contain block inserts.
In addition to the above entities several other
things are also written to the file as follows:
Line Type
A line type is used by layers and entities to
determine how lines are drawn. Chief
Architect line types are supported on export.
Layers
Layers in other systems are similar to Chief
Architect layers. However, there are some
855
DXF/DWG
Use the CAD Detail from view tool to

automatically create a 2D view from a
3D view. See CAD Detail From View on
page 639.
subtle differences. The following

information in a layer is mapped as follows:
Chief
Other Systems
Name
Name
Color
Nearest AutoCAD Color. We

use the default AutoCAD color
table to determine this
mapping.
Display
On
Size
Line Weight. In AutoCAD line

weights are determined by a
table of mm line widths. We
map to the closest match in the
default line weight table based
on the assumption that we are
going to output our drawing to
600 dpi printer.
Style
Line type
Lock
Lock

The entire 3D model can be exported from
Chief as a 3D file, with all surfaces exported
as 3DFACE entities. This file can then be
imported by any program which is fully
compatible with AutoCADs 3D .dxf or
.dwg format.
To export the 3D model, a 3D view must be
active. Make sure that everything to be
exported is displayed. When the model is
ready, choose File> Export> 3D Model
(DWG/DXF)...
. Give the file a name,
making sure to save it in the desired location.
The 3D model is created.
If you use the delete surfaces tool, the
deleted surfaces will not be exported.
856
Layers for 3D DWG/DXF Model

When you export a 3D model all surfaces are
exported as 3DFACE entities. Each entity
represents a surface in the 3D model. The
entities are placed on layers that are named
by Chief Architect. The names currently
used by Chief Architect are listed below.
AutoCAD Layer
Name
A-APPL-MAIN
A-CASE-CABF
A-CASE-CABN
A-CASE-CNTR
A-CASE-GLAS
A-CASE-SOFF
Chief Architect
Surface / Object
Appliance
Cabinet Door
Cabinet Box
Cabinet Counter Top
Cabinet Glass
Soffit
A-CEIL-MAIN
A-CEIL-SLOP
A-DOOR-STND
A-EQPM-DOOR
A-EQPM-HDWR
A-FIXT-GLAS
A-FIXT-MAIN
A-FLOR-BAY
A-FLOR-MAIN
A-FOOT-FOOT
A-FRAM-CEIL
A-FRAM-DECK
A-FRAM-GENL
A-FRAM-JOIS
A-FRAM-ROOF
A-FRAM-TRUS
A-FRAM-WALL
A-FURN-MAIN
A-GLAZ-DOOR
A-GLAZ-WIND
A-HRAL-BAL
A-HRAL-BLST
A-HRAL-NWEL
A-HRAL-RAIL
A-CASE-CABD
A-MASN-FIRE
A-NONE-NONE
A-PLAT-RIM
A-RISR-MAIN
A-ROOF-EAVE
A-ROOF-FASC
A-ROOF-MAIN
A-STRS-RUNR
A-STRS-TRED
Cabinet Toe Area

Bay / Bow Window
Ceiling
Platform Ceiling
Roof Ceiling
Door
Window Hardware
Cabinet Hardware
Fixture Glass
Fixture
Bay / Bow Window
Floor
Platform Floor
Footing Top
Ceiling Framing
Deck Framing
Framing
Floor Framing
Roof Framing
Truss Framing
Wall Framing
Furniture
Door Glass
Window
Stair Baluster
Railing Baluster
Newel
Handrail
Cabinet Drawer
Fireplace
Miscellaneous
Platform Rim
Stair Riser
Roof Soffit
Roof Fascia
Roof
Stair Runner
Stair Tread
A-STRS-UNDR
A-WALL-BAY
Stair Bottom
Bay / Bow Window
Wall
A-WALL-EXTW Corner Board
A-WALL-MAIN Wall
A-WALL-PAPE
Wallcovering
A-WALL-PONY Pony Wall
A-WDWK-EXTR Exterior Door /
Window Trim
A-WDWKExterior Sash
EXTTRIM
A-WDWK-MOLD Molding
A-WDWK-SHLF Shelf
A-WDWK-TRIM Interior Door /
Window Trim
C-PROP-CURB
Curb
C-PROP-ROAD
Road
C-PROP-TERA
Terrain
C-PROP-TRFE
Terrain Feature
C-PROP-TRSK
Terrain Skirt
E-ELEC-TRIM
Electrical
DXF Code
Each layer name exported can include a DXF
Code from the materials used for items on
that layer. If a material has been specified for
an item and appears on the surface of the
item, the DXF code for the material is
included in the layer name. This DXF Code
is specified on the General tab of the Plan
Material dialog.
These codes are specified in the Plan
Material dialog for each Chief Architect
material. As you add new materials in this
dialog, you can specify an appropriate DXF
code for each.
857
DXF/DWG
A-CASE-TOEA
A-CEIL-BAY
858
Chapter 37:
Symbol
Wizard
Create Symbol Wizard
Overview
Chief Architect provides a complete set of
architectural tools for highly customized
design. In addition, the Library Browser
contains a vast supply of objects that can be
used to add more detail to a plan. For
everything else, theres the Create Symbol
Wizard. With the ability to make your own
symbols, the amount of detail that can be
added to a plan is limitless.
With the Create Symbol Wizard, you can
import 3D objects and convert them into 3D
symbols for use within Chief Architect. You
can also modify existing library symbols.
This chapter guides you through the process
of creating a symbol in Chief Architect using
the Create Symbol Wizard. Adding
symbols to the library; editing them; and
placing them in a plan are covered in the
Libraries chapter, see Libraries on page
563.
Chapter Contents
Importing 3D Data
Opening the Create Symbol Wizard
Selecting the Symbol Category
Loading the 3D File
2D Block
Symbol Options
Sizing
Plant Information
Plant Attributes
Plant Description
Materials
Openings
Floor Plan View
Closing the Create Symbol Wizard
Symbol Specification Dialog
859
Importing 3D Data
Creating a symbol that can be used by Chief
Architect is a relatively simple process which
begins with previously created 3D data.
More than likely, this 3D data will have
come from a program other than Chief
Architect. If another 3D modeling program is
used to create the 3D data, be aware of the
following requirements before attempting to
create symbols.
Chief Architect is not able to provide
support for any third party software.
There are a number of requirements that

must be met before any 3D data can be used
to create a symbol in Chief Architect:
860
The 3D data must be stored in a standard

Drawing Exchange File (.dxf), AutoCAD
Drawing File (.dwg), or object (.obj) format. If you have 3D data in another file
format, you will have to find a way to
convert it into one these formats first.
The 3D model must be composed of face

data. These are typically referred to as 3D
faces, polygonal faces, or poly meshes.
Other types of entities in your file (such
as lines, curves, circles, polylines, freeform surfaces, and solids) can exist in the
file but will not be imported when the
symbol is created. This is true for all
(.dxf /.dwg/.obj) file types.
The face data should be assigned to different layers so that you can map them to
the correct materials when viewing them
in 3D. It is helpful to name your layers
using a convention that identifies which
materials should be assigned to each subcomponent.
Pay attention to the origin and orientation

of the 3D data when designing symbols.
Chief Architect allows for some adjusting
when creating the symbol, but it is easier
to build the 3D data correctly before
importing it into Chief Architect. For
more information about defining the origin, see Origin Locations on page 864.
Surface Normals
If you will be using third party software to
help you create the .dxf /.dwg/.obj files that
will be turned into symbols, you should be
familiar with the concept of surface normals.
A surface normal is a vector
which is perpendicular to
the plane of a surface. This
vector points in one
direction, determined by the
way the face is drawn.
If the face is drawn
clockwise, the surface normals are directed
outward, if the face is drawn counterclockwise, the surface normals will point
inward.
Converting OBJ Files
Many objects can be drawn using only one

side of each face. A cube is a good example.
The inside of a cube is not visible when only
the outside faces are drawn. When the inside
faces are not calculated, 3D views in Chief
Architect will generate faster. Chief
Architect assumes that the face on the
positive side of the normal vector is the
outside face.
A time saving option, Make Faces Double
Sided, allows you to view faces from any
perspective. See Loading the 3D File on
page 862.
The .obj file format makes use of faces

drawn in a counter-clockwise direction to
determine the outward orientation of each
surface. This is exactly opposite of Chief
Architect, which makes use of clockwise
faces. Chief Architect assumes this condition
will always be present whenever an .obj file
is imported and reverses the orientation of all
faces.
If an .obj file was created using faces
drawn in a clockwise orientation, the
resulting 3D symbol may appear incorrectly.
One remedy is to make faces double sided,
another is to re-export the .obj file from the
original application using counter-clockwise
faces.

To open the Create Symbol Wizard,
select Tools> Symbol> Create Symbol
A slightly different version of the Create

Symbol Wizard allows you to edit an
existing symbol and can be accessed by

selecting a symbol and clicking the Open
Symbol
edit button. See Symbol
Selecting the Symbol Category

The Select Symbol Category window
allows you to determine the symbol type.
Each category contains properties specific to
the type of item being created. These properties are viewable later in the Create
Symbol Wizard.
861
Symbol
Wizard
The cube on the left shows which direction

each face was drawn and the cube on the
right shows which direction the surface
normal for each face points as a result.
2
1 Category - Choose a category. This
category will determine where the

symbol is stored in the Library Browser and
may affect some of the options in the symbol
creation process.
2 Type of Object - This drop down list is

available only for the Fixture and
Furniture categories. Select a Type of Object

to determine where the symbol will appear in
Material Lists.
Some object types for Fixtures may also
affect how the symbol can be placed. The
following table lists these effects. See
Symbol Options on page 868.
Item Type
Placement Affect
Appliances
(built-in base cabs)
Appliances
(under wall cabs)
Cooktops
Ovens (built-in)
Refrigerators
(built-in)
Sinks (bathroom)
Sinks (kitchen)
Sinks (laundry)
Placement in base cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Front option is

selected.
Placement under wall cabinet is allowed if Fits under Wall Cabinet option is
selected.
Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is selected.
Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Front option is
selected.
Loading the 3D File

The options in the 3D window determine
how the symbol will display in 3D.
862
Loading the 3D File
1 Enter the name and directory of the file
you want to import, or click Browse to

locate a file on your computer.
If a file with faces containing more than
four vertices is imported, the faces will
be truncated, resulting in an object that
appears to have holes. The best remedy is to
re-export the model from the original application using only triangular or quadrilateral
faces.
2 Check Make Faces Double Sided to

make all symbol faces double sided.
While making faces double sided increases

the amount of information calculated for
render views, it also simplifies the symbol
building process by ensuring that all surfaces
are visible from any perspective. To
understand this option it is helpful to be
Symbol
Wizard
2
3
4
5
6
9
10
familiar with the concept of surface normals.

See Surface Normals on page 860.
3 Automatic Edge Lines: Check this box
if you would like Chief Architect to

automatically determine which lines will
When displaying a model in 3D, edge lines

are used to emphasize the edges and corners
of the model. Each face has up to 4 edge
lines. Some edge lines are helpful in thirdparty programs but are not needed in Chief
Architect. If your modeling program has the
capability to turn edges off, that may be the
ideal place to do so.
Instead of manually turning edges on and off,
Chief Architect offers another alternative
with Automatic Edge Lines. This interprets
which lines are needed in Chief Architect
and turns the others off.
863
Origin Locations
6 Specify Origin - The origin of an
object determines where that object will

be placed in Chief Architect. It is the point
where the X, Y, and Z axes intersect (0,0,0).
The center edge lines on this object will not display

when Automatic Edge Lines is checked
4 Surface Smoothing Angle - This value
is used to determine whether two

adjacent surfaces are displayed with a
smooth or sharp angle between them in
render view. If the angle between any two
surface normals is less than this angle then
normal averaging will be used in the render
view to give the effect of a curved surface.
This angle also effects the generation of
automatic edge lines.
For example, a smoke detectors top surface

typically rests against a ceilings bottom
surface, while an armchairs bottom surface
typically rests on the floors top surface. For
an object to be placed correctly, the origin
needs to be at the right location.
The origin of an object is defined when it is
created in a third party modeling program.
Chief Architect also has default origins for
most object types. The following table lists
these default origins by symbol type.
A good example is a hexagonal cylinder. The

angle between adjacent surfaces is 360/8, or
45 degrees. If you want it to look cylindrical
then the Surface Smoothing Angle should
be set to something greater than 45 degrees.
If you want to make the cylinder look
hexagonal, set it to less than 45 degrees. The
default is 35 degrees.
864
Origin location
Furniture
Fixture
Electrical Floor
Items
Electrical
Wall
Items
Electrical Ceiling
Bottom, Back, Middle

Center, Bottom (against
floor)
Center, Back (against
wall)
Center Top (against
ceiling)
Bottom, Outside, Middle
(of sill)
Bottom, Outside, Middle
Windows
Cabinet Door
Doors
Doorways
5 Units - Enter the units that were used
when the symbol was created.

Specifying any units other than inches or mm
will cause the program to convert the data
into units appropriate for Chief Architect.
See Unit Conversions Panel on page 105.
Symbol Type
This portion of the dialog allows three

options:
Leave this box unchecked to accept Chief

Architects default origins for the symbol. Checking this box and entering 0 in
the X, Y, and Z fields will produce the
same results.
Loading the 3D File
Check this box if you would like to use

the origin point from the original .dxf/
.dwg/.obj file. The values in the X, Y,
and Z fields represent the difference
between the default Chief Architect origin for that type of symbol and the origin
from the original .dxf/.dwg/.obj file.
Check this box and enter new values to
manually adjust the origin. The values in
the X, Y, and Z fields represent the offset
of the origin point from the default Chief
Architect origin.
Origin 0,0,0
located middle,
bottom, back of
object
8 A preview of how the object will
appear in 3D views displays here. The

display is updated in this dialog when the
symbol is rotated and when a 3D data file is
selected.
9 Enter a Symbol Name up to 63
characters. Symbol names are case

sensitive. Symbol names appear in the
Materials List, the Symbol Specification
dialog, and any specification dialogs that
apply to this particular symbol.
10 Display Size - This allows you to
append the name of the symbol with

size information which is relevant to the
current plan. Select the format from the dropdown list and the symbol name will be
automatically appended with the selected
sizing information. Choosing "None" will
not append anything to the name.
Window origin located bottom, outside, middle.
7 Select an axis and click Rotate 90 to
roatate the object 90 degrees around

that axis when creating the symbol.
865
Symbol
Wizard
2D Block
Most 3D objects require 2D representation in
floor plan view. 2D CAD blocks are not
required for Windows, Doors, Cabinet
Doors, and Doorways.
The 2D Block window of the Create

Symbol Wizard allows you to choose 2D
CAD blocks from a variety of sources.
1
5
2
1 Select Blocks From - Checking these
Generated - Check this box to automatically

generate a CAD block based on an overhead
projection of the object.
Plan - Check this box if you would like

every CAD block that is currently in your
plan to appear in the list. See CAD Blocks
on page 753.
2 Available Blocks - The available 2D
boxes will populate the list with

available 2D CAD blocks.
File - Check this box to include any CAD

blocks contained in the 3D .dxf/.dwg/.obj
file.
866
blocks display here.
3 Plan Fill Color - Select a color for the

background of the 2D symbol.
4 No Fill (transparent) - Select the
check box to have the 2D background

transparent.
2D Block
Use Plan Colors - Select the check box to

make the background white.
5 The selected CAD Block displays here.

6 Enter an angle if you would like to
rotate the 2D CAD block from its

original angle. The orientation of the 2D
CAD block in floor plan view is independent
of the symbol orientation in 3D view.
Blocks can also be imported with the

Import Drawing Wizard. Nested
blocks, however, cannot be used in the
symbol development process. See DXF/
DWG on page 843.
Symbol
Wizard
Creating Your Own

CAD Block
Create your own CAD blocks to represent

symbols in floor plan view. The only
requirement is that the correct X and Y
dimensions are defined. An incorrect CAD
block size will cause inconsistent placement
of your symbol.
It is usually best to build your CAD block
symbol with solid filled properties. This will
keep background patterns and other objects
from showing through.
For more information on creating CAD
blocks, see CAD Blocks on page 753.
Once the CAD object has been blocked it
needs to be named. Select the item and click
the Open Object
CAD Block Specification dialog. See
CAD Block Specification Dialog on page

755.
867
Symbol Options
2
3
The options that appear in this window vary

depending on the type of symbol being
created.
1 Options - How each of these options

affects a symbol is detailed in the
following table.
2 Height Off Floor - Enter a value if you
would like the symbol to rest a certain

height above the floor.
3 Material Components - Click this

button to open the Components
868
dialog. See The Components Dialog on

page 948.
Default Light Offset - This field is available
only for electrical symbols and is enabled
when the Light option is checked. Enter a
distance to offset the light source from the
symbols origin.
Available Options
The following table lists each of the options
that are available and how this option will
affect the behavior of the symbol:
Symbol Options
110 / 220 Volts
3-Way
Categories
Electrical
Electrical
4-Way
Appears
in
appliance
schedule
Appears
in
HVAC schedule
Appears
in
plumbing
schedule
Breaker Panel
Can sit on base
cabinet or table
Ceiling
Mounted
Doorbell
Fan
Fixture
Fixture
Fixture
Electrical
Fixtures,
Furniture,
Electrical
Electrical
Electrical
Electrical
Fits under wall

cabinet
Fixtures
Floor Mounted
Electrical
GFCI
Electrical
Hangs on wall
Fixtures and
Furniture
Effect on Symbol
If a 110V or 220V item is on a wall and you select Build>
Electrical> Auto Place Outlets
, an outlet will not be
placed in that area.
Check this box to make an electrical symbol a 3-way
switch.
Check this box to make an electrical symbol a 4-way
switch.
Check this box to make this fixture appear in the Appliance Schedule.
Check this box to make this fixture appear in the HVAC
Schedule.
Check this box to make this fixture appear in the Plumbing Schedule.
No effect
Allows fixture to be placed on top of a cabinet. Symbols
remain selectable and independent of cabinet after placement. Can also be placed independently, 0" from floor to
bottom.
Electrical item is attached to ceiling at origin.
Uses switch default height.
Recognized by Plan Check as needing to be connected
to a switch.
Attaches fixture top to bottom of selected wall cabinet
and fixture back to adjacent wall. Fixture can be placed
independently on plan, and will locate itself 54" from floor
to bottom.
Electrical item is attached to floor at origin. Height Off
Floor can be used to specify distance from floor.
If an electrical symbol is given the GFCI attribute and is
placed behind a cabinet in a bathroom, Build> Electrical> Auto Place Outlets
recognizes it and will not
insert a GFCI outlet behind the cabinet.
Fixture will attach to wall at 54" from floor if placed within
8" of the nearest wall. Can be placed independently of
wall if placed more than 8" away and will insert at 54"
from floor to bottom.
869
Symbol
Wizard
Option
Option
Inserts
into
cabinet front
Fixtures
Inserts
into
countertop
Fixtures
Light
Electrical
Move
casing
out 1/2 inch, 1
inch at sill
Doorways
and Windows
No default door
in this doorway
Outdoor
Doorways
and Windows
Electrical
Outlet
Electrical
Phone
Electrical
Requires high/
standard voltage
Requires natural gas
Requires water
drain
Sits on floor
Fixtures
Smoke Detector
870
Categories
Effect on Symbol
Fixture will attach itself centrally to the front of a full
height cabinet. The fixture becomes merged with the cabinet, and is selectable and resizable only from the Cabinet Specification dialog. Cannot be placed independently.
When this is the single option selected, fixture can be
placed in a full height cabinet only.
*Note: CAD must also be the same size as the 3D's or
width/depth modification is required. For modification,
depth must equal distance from back of block to point
wanted to attach to cabinet, in order for 2D CAD to show
properly.
Fixture will rest on top of base cabinet, merging itself to it.
Cannot be placed independently. Fixture is not selectable.
Creates light source with available properties to individual symbols. Recognized by Plan Check as needing to
be connected to a switch.
This option only applies when a sill is present. Check this
box to have the casing moved out from the window or
doorway. The option System Supplies Rectangular Casing must also be checked.
Check this option to exclude a door from the doorway.
Fixtures
Plan Check will warn that this is not a waterproof switch/

outlet.
Can be placed automatically using the Place Outlets
option. Electrical Defaults determines placement above
floor.
Presence is recognized by Plan Check. Uses outlet
default height.
If against a wall, Place Outlets will place an outlet of the
appropriate type behind the fixture. Also makes fixture
appear in Appliance Schedule.
Appears in Appliance Schedule.
Fixtures
Appears in Plumbing Schedule.
Fixtures and
Furniture
Electrical
Default option for Fixtures. Places fixture on floor.

Recognized by Plan Check as a requirement for certain
rooms.
Sizing
Categories
Switch
Electrical
Switched
Electrical
System
supplies rectangular casing
Thermostat
TV
Doorways
and Windows
Electrical
Electrical
Wall Mounted
Electrical
Effect on Symbol
Recognized by Plan Check for connection to a switched
item. Electrical Defaults determines placement above
floor.
Recognized by Plan Check as needing to be connected
to a switch.
Chief Architect will automatically supply rectangular casing if your model does not already have a casing.
No affect. Uses switch default height.
Presence is recognized by Plan Check. Uses outlet
default height.
Electrical item is attached to wall at origin.
Sizing
The Sizing window allows you to control the
size of a symbol and how it behaves when
resized. The objects Width (X), Depth (Y),
and Height (Z) are referenced to the nearest
1/16". The default size information for the
symbol will display, representing the actual

boundaries of the 3D object.
In most situations, the default values for
Width (X), Depth (Y), and Height (Z) should
be left unchanged.
1
2
871
Symbol
Wizard
Option
1 Size -The size values only need to be
modified if the boundary box (the

selectable area) of a symbol is not the same
size as the 3D symbol.
the following illustration, a stretch plane was

placed at x=0 and the symbol stretched along
the x-axis.
For example, to make an object such as a

fireplace or air conditioner protrude through
other 3D items, smaller size values will need
to be used. Size values larger than the 3D
objects can be used if a symbol needs to be
spaced away from other 3D items (e.g. toilets
and sinks that need minimum clearance).
2 Stretch Planes: Stretch Planes allow
you to define where the symbol will

stretch when resized. If no stretch planes are
added, the symbol will resize uniformly.
A stretch planes coordinates are relative to
the symbols origin point. For more about the
origin point, see Loading the 3D File on
page 862.
Before
One Stretch Plane

One stretch plane means that the symbol will
stretch only at the location of that plane. In
872
It will resize like this:

(Y axis into paper)
Below one Stretch Plane is specified 6" from

the symbols origin.
Sizing
Stretch Zones
3 Stretch Zone - A Stretch Zone defines
Two Stretch Planes

If you want to stretch the symbol without
disrupting the outer arches, two stretch
planes will need to be specified.
In this example two YZ stretch planes are
specified on the X axis, the first at -6", the
second at 6". Stretch planes to the left of the
origin will need to be expressed as a negative
number, while stretch planes to the right are
positive.
In the following example we want to

designate a Stretch Zone for an archtop. To
stretch only the middle when the archtop is
stretched vertically, select Height 1-2.
"Height" means that we are going to make
the object taller, and "1-2" directs Chief
Architect to the two planes that define the
area.
In the following example the area to be
stretched is between 18" - 24" from the
bottom. Only this area becomes taller.
873
Symbol
Wizard
an area between two planes that will

stretch uniformly, leaving the area outside
unaffected.
Plant Information
This window appears for plant symbols.
When a plant search is conducted, this
information will be used to create a list of
plants that meet your search parameters. See

Plant Chooser Dialog on page 507.
2
3
4
1 Enter a Scientific Name, a Variety
Name, a Pronunciation reference, and/
874
or any Common Names associated with the

plant.
Plant Attributes

maturity.
4 Enter a Lighting Preference for the

plant.
3 Enter a Hardiness Zone. See
Plant Attributes
Symbol
Wizard
1
2
3
4

list above will determine the

checkboxes that display here.
3 Add Flower Color Comments here.

4 Add Bloom Time Comments here.
875
Plant Description
Enter a description of the plant. The

description can be used in the Plant
876
Chooser dialog. See Plant Chooser
Dialog on page 507.
Materials
Symbol
Wizard
Materials
Materials window for an imported .obj file
The Materials window of the Create

Symbol Wizard is like the Materials tab on
many other specification dialogs. See
DXF/DWG Files
All of the layers and layer names from the
original .dxf/.dwg file display on the left.
Double click a name to rename it.
Select a material component, click the

Select Materials button to open the
Select Library Object dialog, and
assign a material to the selected material
component.
If the .dxf/.dwg file for a symbol has

changed, all material information will be
lost.
OBJ Files
One of the most useful features of the .obj
file format is its ability to record material
data that can be transferred from one
application to another.
Any material names associated with a face in
the .obj file will be listed on the left.
877
OBJ Files and Materials
OBJ Files and Textures
Material definitions for most .obj files are

located in a separate file which is given the
.mtl extension. If such a file exists, the
material definitions associated with the .obj
file will display on the left.
Material definitions for .obj files can include

texture information. As with material
definitions, any image files used to define the
texture (.jpg, .png, etc.) are typically
included and referenced. If a textured object
is created in another application and exported
as an .obj file, Chief Architect will need the
.obj file; the .mtl file; and any referenced
texture files in order to properly import the
object. If a texture file is not available, the
material will be created without a texture.
If Chief Architect does not receive material

definition information in an accompanying
materials file, default material properties will
be assigned. Materials from the library can
be assigned by selecting a component of the
object and clicking the Select Materials
button.
The material definitions associated with an
imported .obj symbol will not be available
for use by other objects until that symbol has
been placed into a plan.
Once an .obj file is imported and turned into

a symbol, the .obj file and the .mtl file can
be deleted. The associated texture file will be
copied to the My Textures library of the
Library Browser. If a texture of the same
name exists already, the following dialog will
appear. Choose one of the three alternatives
and click OK.
Openings
The Opening window of the Create
Symbol Wizard appears only for Windows
and Doorways.
When creating a doorway or window
symbol, Chief Architect needs information
878
about the space that will contain it. The

Opening window defines the specifications
of the hole to be cut. The hole needed is the
same as the rough opening that would be
created in actual construction.
Floor Plan View
If a window or doorway requires an arch top

opening or triangle you will need to select
more than one opening section from the drop
down list to correctly display the opening in
Chief Architect.
You can approximate the opening for arch or
other odd shaped windows or doors by
specifying up to three sections.
Floor Plan View

The Plan View window appears only for
Windows and Doorways. The preview shows
how the symbol will display in floor plan
view. By default the program brings up a
door symbol for a doorway. To change from
a door swing to a window, click on the image
itself in the dialog. Click again to toggle
back.
To edit a dimension, click on it and type the
desired size.
879
Symbol
Wizard
Edit the size of the opening by clicking on

the appropriate side and entering the
dimension.
Mulled Units
To represent a .dxf/.dwg that is a mulled
window or doorway you may need several
windows and possibly a door in floor plan
view.
Click the drop down list and select the
number of units. You can have up to 5
windows or 4 windows and a doorway. This
is independent of the opening.
Closing the Create Symbol Wizard

This window will appear when you have
completed the Create Symbol Wizard.
Select the Back button at any time during the
process to make changes.
Click Finish to close the window and place
the new symbol in your plan with the next
click.
Check the Add to Library box to close the

window and proceed to the Add to Library
dialog with your new symbol. See Adding
If you created a symbol that must be
contained by another object, click Finish to
close this window, place the object, then
select Tools> Symbol> Get Last Symbol...
to retrieve the last symbol created.

The Symbol Specification dialog
provides a convenient method for editing
existing symbols.
The Symbol Specification dialog can be
accessed in two ways. Whichever method is
used will determine whether the original
symbol or a copy of the symbol is edited.
880
Edit> Open Symbol

Any symbol from an
Unlocked library
can be opened for specification and edited
from the Library Browser menu. Highlight a
symbol in the tree view of the Library
Browser and select Edit> Open Symbol
The tabs on the Symbol Specification

dialog correspond with the windows that
appear in the Create Symbol Wizard.
Type Tab
Editing a symbol using the Edit> Open

Symbol menu command will open the
Symbol Specification dialog and allow
you to make changes to the original symbol
and all future instances of it.
Changes made using this method are
permanent. Use the Edit> Open
Symbol menu command only if you want to
overwrite the original library symbol. Instead,
copy a symbol and then add it to the library.
See Adding a New Object on page 568.
Open Symbol
The Open Symbol
edit button
appears when a library object is
selected in floor plan view or 3D view. Click
it to open the Symbol Specification
dialog and edit the selected symbol.
A library symbol which has been placed in
floor plan view is a copy of the original,
which is stored in the Library Browser.
Changes made to a symbol using the Open
Symbol
edit button will only apply to the
selected copy.
Click the drop down list if you want to

change the Item Type. See Selecting the
Symbol Category on page 861.
3D Tab
The options in this dialog are the same as the
3D window in the Create Symbol
Wizard. See Loading the 3D File on page
862.
If you load a new .dxf/.dwg to an existing
symbol, all material information will be lost.
See Materials on page 877.
2D Block Tab
This dialog is similar to the 2D Block
window in the Create Symbol Wizard. It
allows you to select from the 2D blocks in
the list or generate a new one. See 2D
Block on page 866.
Options Tab
Options window in the Create Symbol
Wizard. See Symbol Options on page
868.
881
Symbol
Wizard
This tab will be present when the Symbol

Specification dialog is opened for a
selected Fixture or Furniture object.
Default Light Offset is not present in the

Symbol Specification dialog. If you
would like to change the Light Offset for an
existing symbol, select the symbol and click
for a selected Window or Doorway symbol.

See Openings on page 878.
the Open Object

edit button. See
Render Data Tab on page 668.
The floor plan view Tab will be present when

the Symbol Specification dialog is
opened for a selected Window or Doorway
symbol. See Floor Plan View on page 879.
Materials Tab
Materials window in the Create Symbol
Wizard. See Materials on page 877.
Opening Tab
The Opening Tab will be present when the
Symbol Specification dialog is opened
882
Floor Plan View Tab
Sizing Tab
The Sizing Tab is the same as the Sizing
Window of the Create Symbol Wizard.
See Sizing on page 871.
Chapter 38:
Printing & Plotting
Chapter Overview
The layout facility is suitable for complete

working drawings. The layout facility allows
you to create a customized template that
appears on each page. Different views can be
set at different scales, and each can be
controlled individually. Once sent to layout,
views and details can be resized, replaced,
updated, rotated, relocated, and otherwise
edited to your liking. For more information
about the layout facility, see Layout Files
on page 903.
Chief Architect also allows you to save your
drawings in an electronic file format which
can then be sent to a printing service.
Chapter Contents
Introduction to Printing
Printers and Plotters
The Printing Tools
Displaying Objects
Line Weights
Printing Text and Dimensions
Printing to Scale
Printing Directly from a View
Printing from Layout
Printing Across Multiple Pages
Alternate Printing Methods
Creating Custom Sheet Sizes
Troubleshooting Printing Problems
Page Setup Dialog
Print Dialog
Print Image Dialog
Printing
Chief Architect offers a wide variety of

printing options. The simplest and quickest
method may be to print directly from any of
the views using either the Print dialog or the
Print Image dialog.
Screen captures are provided for

illustrative purposes only and are not an
endorsement of any products.
883
Introduction to Printing
Always familiarize yourself with your
printer or plotter before a deadline. It
may take a little time to configure the
machine properly when you first start.
Chief Architect offers printing options for a

variety of needs. You will benefit from
understanding the output options clearly and
choosing the one that makes the most sense
for the project at hand.
Output Options
Printing From Layout - For professional
quality drawings and details in full size
format, printing from layout provides the
most control and the best results. For more
information, see Layout Files on page 903.
Printing Directly From a View - For
individual drawings or details, you may
prefer to print directly from a view. The
process is quick and allows full control over
scaling, positioning, line weights, etc. See
Printing Directly from a View on page
893.
Printing to a Remote Plotter/Printer Plans can be saved electronically and printed
remotely. Available file formats are .prn/.plt
or .pdf. See To print to a remote printer/
plotter: on page 895.
Export the plan and print from another
program - Plans can be exported in either
.dxf or .dwg file formats; imported into
another CAD program that supports these
file types; and printed. See Exporting 2D
DXF/DWG Files on page 852.
884
Print Model - If your final printed output

will be used to create a 3D model of your
design, the Print Model feature will work
best. See Model Maker on page 923.
Terminology
There are a few terms that you should
familiarize yourself with.
Sheet Size - The dimensions of the final
printed output. This may or may not be the
same as the paper size. If the sheet size and
paper size are the same, only one page will
be required per sheet. See Page Setup
Dialog on page 898.
Paper Size - The dimensions of the paper to
be printed upon. Specifying a paper size that
is smaller than the sheet size allows large
drawings to be printed across multiple pages.
The preview in the Page Setup dialog
clearly illustrates the difference between
page size and sheet size. For more, see Page
Setup Dialog on page 898.
When a "printed
paper" size of 8
x 11 is selected,
15 pages will be
required to fill an
Architectural D
"drawing sheet"
size (24" x 36").
Check Plot - A test printing (typically made

at a smaller scale) before final output to large
paper format. For more information, see

Check Plots on page 893.
Line Weight - The thickness of a line. A
thicker lineweight is easier to see, but may
not display as much detail. For more, see
Line Weights on page 888.
Printing Scale - Drawings are often printed

to scale for accuracy. " = 1' and 1 m = 50 m
are examples of common scales. When
accuracy is not important, drawings can also
be sized to fill a particular area. For more,
see Printing to Scale on page 892.

There are many different types of printers
and plotters. In general, a printer is smaller,
normally outputting 8 x11 (Letter or ANSI
A size), 8x14 (Legal Size) or sometimes as
large as 11x17 (Tabloid or ANSI B size).
whenever the Windows operating system is

changed.
Plotters are typically used to output larger

sheets of paper such as 17x22 (ANSI C size),
22x34 (ANSI D size) or 34x44 (ANSI E
size).
To find out which version of your print driver

you are using, choose Start> Settings>
Printers to display the Printers information
for Windows. Select the printer in question,
then choose File> Properties.
Ink Jet Plotters and Printers use a liquid

ink which is sprayed on the paper through
tiny jets. These printers are usually letter or
legal size, but some hold 11x17 or 17x22 size
paper.
Print Drivers
Print driver programs are interpreters
between software programs and the printer.
The drivers are usually created by the
manufacturer of the printer and are typically
updated regularly. Different drivers are used
for different versions of Windows. It is
useful to keep track of the drivers for each
printer or plotter, making sure to update them
In the Printer Properties dialog should be

a button called About. Click this button to
find the version and creation date of the
driver currently being used. If you are
experiencing printing problems and yours is
not the latest driver, you may want to replace
it with an updated driver. Visit your printer
manufacturers web site for more
information.
Windows provides information about
installing print drivers. To access Windows
help, choose Start> Help. If you have
problems installing a print driver, refer to
your printer documentation for technical
support.
885
Printing
Laser Plotters and Printers use a dry toner,

similar to a copier. These produce crisp,
clean lines at high resolutions and are
commonly available for black and white
prints up to 11x17 in size.
Note: You should only update your printer

driver if you are having problems printing.
Options available with one driver may

not be available with another. Printers
and plotters supported in one version of
windows may not be supported by the
manufacturer in another.
The Printing Tools

Click the Print Tools parent button to
All printing options can also be accessed
from the File> Print menu.
Print - Prints the current view or
layout sheet. See Print Dialog on
page 899.
Print Image - Prints a screen view
including images, textures and
backdrops. See Print Image Dialog on
page 902.
Print Model - Opens the Print
Model dialog which allows you to
print plan templates for making a physical
model of your plan. See Model Maker on
page 923.
Page Setup - Opens the Page Setup
dialog which allows you to set up
printing options. See Page Setup Dialog on
page 898.
Scale to Fit - Automatically selects a
scale that fits your plan to the drawing
sheet. See Printing to Scale on page 892.
886
Center Sheet - Automatically centers

your drawing on the sheet. See Center
Sheet on page 888.
File>Print>Customize Paper Sizes Allows you to create custom sheet sizes. See
Creating Custom Sheet Sizes on page 896.
Toggle Buttons
Toggle buttons are either on or off. When on
they appear depressed and will remain
depressed until clicked again. See Toggle
Buttons on page 64.
Show Line Weights - When this is on,
line weights appear on screen as they
will appear on printed paper. See Show
Show Sheet - Turn this toggle on for a
preview of your plan relative to the
current sheet size. See Show Sheet on page
887.
Print Preview - Turn this toggle on for
a preview of how your plan will appear
when printed. See Print Preview on page
887.
Display Options and Printing
Display Options and Printing
Objects must be displayed for them to print;

however, not all items that display will print.
The reference plan and camera symbols in
floor plan view, for example, do not print.
To see how your printed output will
appear on paper, select File> Print>
Print Preview or click the Print Preview toggle button.
Displaying Objects
To control the display of objects when
printing directly from a view, click the
Display Options
button and turn layers
on/off in the appropriate column of the
119.
To control the display of objects in a plan
view sent to layout, select the view; click the
Layout Box Layers
edit button; and edit
layers to control the display of objects in the
selected view in layout.
To control the display of objects in a camera
view sent to layout, you must turn on/off the
desired layers in the view before it is sent to
layout.
Creating a special layer set for printing may
be useful if you are not printing from layout.
Show Line Weights

Click the Show Line Weights toggle
button for an accurate on-screen
representation of line weights and line styles.
When Show Line Weights is turned off, the
scaling of line styles is also turned off.
When Show Line Weights is turned on you
can Zoom In
to see the location of lines
and dashed lines as they will appear on the
printed page.
When Show Line Weights is off, dashed
lines will appear the same, regardless of the
zoom factor.
Show Line Weights may also be turned on or
off on the Appearance panel of the
Preferences dialog. See Appearance
Panel on page 94.
Print Preview
Objects that appear in some views but
do not appear when printed, such as
camera objects and CAD points, will not
appear in a print preview. Text and
dimension objects appear on-screen as they
will on the printed page.
When Print Preview
buttons Show Sheet
Weights
is on, the toggle

and Show Line
are overridden.
Show Sheet
Click the Show Sheet button to display
the drawing sheet on screen. The
887
Printing
The display of objects in views may be used

to affect the printed output. Some display
options allow you to preview the printed
output on screen before any paper is used.
Setup dialog. See Page Setup Dialog
drawing sheet size is specified in the Page
Setup dialog.
The current view will display at the scale

specified in the Page Setup dialog. Any
portion of your plan that cannot fit on the
selected drawing sheet will appear outside of
the sheet. A blue border represents the
printable area, which may vary depending on
which printer is currently selected. For more
information, see Page Setup Dialog on
page 898.
on page 898.
Note: Using standard sheet sizes as chosen

from File> Print> Page Setup
is preferable to editing the sheet size on-screen.
When Show Sheet is on, the sheet behaves

as an object.
When selected at its border the sheet displays edit handles, allowing it to be
resized, relocated, and rotated. See Editing Selected Objects on page 10.
If the sheet size is changed, the drawing

sheet dimensions will update in the Page
Dimension lines will locate the borders of

the sheet. These dimensions can be used
to relocate other objects in relation to the
sheet. See Moving Objects Using
Center Sheet
Click the Center Sheet button to
center the drawing sheet on the
drawing. This moves the sheet relative to the
drawing but does not affect the position of
the drawing. The location of the drawing
sheet is independent for each floor of the
model.
Line Weights
The weight of a line is measured in absolute
terms as a fraction of a unit, such as 1/600th
of an inch or 1/25th of a millimeter. Line
weights are assigned to objects using whole
numbers which correspond to the numerator
of this fraction.
The required method for changing the Line
Weight for a particular object depends on the
object and the type of view.
888
Most objects can have their line weight

set individually on the Line Style tab of
their specification dialog. See Line Style
Tab on page 732.
The line weight for a group of objects can

be set by layer. See Layer Properties on
page 121.
The line weight for walls in floor plan

view is defined by Wall Type in the Wall
Type Definitions dialog (see Wall
Type Definitions Dialog on page 157).
When 3D views are sent to Layout, there

is a separate line weight for pattern lines
and a line weight for object lines (see
Editing Layout Lines on page 916).
The end cap length of dashed lines in

floor plan view is controlled in the
Preferences dialog. See Line
Line Weights
The line weight applied to Vector Overviews can be set in the Print dialog. See
Print Dialog on page 899.
The line weight for fill patterns is always

1. See Fill Style Tab on page 743.
An assigned line weight of 0 draws a line

weight of 1 pixel, the thinnest line weight
a printer will allow. This will vary from
printer to printer.
It is important to understand the dynamic

relationship between drawing scale and
printed line weights. Chief Architect will
automatically make the necessary
adjustments to maintain line weight on the
printed page. In the previous example, if the
drawing scale were changed to inch = 10
ft, the same line would have 1/10 the length
on printed paper but would retain the same
thickness.
The line weights assigned to individual

objects and groups of objects are subject to
line weight scaling. It is recommended that
the line weight scaling be set before anything
has been drawn. Ideally, the line weight
scaling should be set in the template plan so
that the same line weight scaling is used in
each plan. See Template Plans on page 79.
The line weight scaling in a plan is set in the
Page Setup dialog.
The effect of the drawing scale on line

weight is illustrated in the following images,
which show the same CAD line at four
different drawing scales. In all instances the
CAD line is assigned a line weight of 5. In
the first set of lines, only the toggle button
Show Line Weights
is depressed.
inch = 1 ft
Scaling portion of the Page Setup dialog
inch = 2 ft
For example, a drawing scale of inch = 1 ft

will produce a printed line weight of 1/600th
of an inch with a given line weight of 1. If a
line is assigned a line weight of 600, its
thickness will be one inch on printed paper.
inch = 4 ft
To see this for yourself on screen (without printing), click the Show Line
Weights edit button. For more information,
see Toggle Buttons on page 886.
inch = 8 ft
What this graphic does not illustrate is the
amount of space the CAD line occupies on
the printed page at each scale. To see this,
889
Printing
Line Weights and Scaling
depress both the Show Line Weights

and the Show Sheet
toggle buttons.
Click the Fill Window

button each time
the print scale is changed. This will show an
accurate on-screen representation of the
amount of space a drawing will occupy on
the drawing sheet.
line weight of 1 to a CAD line in a model

where 1 = 1/600th of an inch will produce the
same results on the printed page as applying
a line weight of 4. The same results could
also be achieved by applying a line weight of
1 and changing the line weight scaling to 1 =
1/150th of an inch.
inch = 1 ft
inch = 2 ft
inch = 4 ft
inch = 8 ft
Notice that the same CAD line does not
become thicker or thinner on the printed page
as the drawing scale changes. The line
weight is maintained in relation to the
drawing scale, becoming thicker or thinner
as necessary to preserve its assigned weight
on the printed page. A given line weight will
appear on the printed page with the same
thickness, regardless of the specified
drawing scale.
Printers and Line Weight

Line weight and print scaling are subject to
the limitations of the printer being used. For
example, assume a given printer can only
print 150 dots per inch (DPI). Applying a
890
Changing the line weight scaling

denominator can have a dramatic effect
on the line weights of all objects in a plan. It is
recommended that the line weight scaling be
set before anything has been drawn. Ideally,
the line weight scaling should be set in the
template plan so that the same line scaling is
used in each plan (see Template Plans on
page 79).
Setting the line weight scaling to 1 = 1/600th

of an inch will not produce bad results when
printed on a 300 DPI printer; it simply means
that a CAD line with a weight of 5 will
appear the same as a CAD line with a weight
of 6 when printed. In most cases a line
weight scaling of 1 = 1/600th of an inch will
produce positive results.
Legacy Plans
When plans created in prior versions of Chief
Architect are opened in Version 10, they will
assume the settings specified on the Text and
Page Setup panel of the Preferences
dialog. For more information, see Text and
Page Setup Panel on page 99.
print is to Zoom In
The following tables detail the resulting print

height when character height is assigned at a
given scale. This relationship is also detailed
on the Text tab of the Text Specification
dialog. See Text Tab on page 711.
Imperial Plans
1/8" = 1
" = 1'
3/8" = 1'
" = 1'
" = 1'
on them.
Text may not display accurately on

screen when the font used by the
printer is different than the font used on
screen. Consult your printer documentation
for more information on font substitution.
Also, see Fonts on page 704.
Plan Scale
in Layout
Necessary
Desired
Character
Print Height
Height
1"
"
3/8"
"
1/8"
1"
"
3/8"
"
1/8"
1"
"
3/8"
"
1/8"
96
48
36
24
12
48
24
18
12
6
36
18
12
8
4
1"
"
3/8"
"
1/8"
1"
"
3/8"
"
1/8"
24
12
9
6
3
16
8
6
4
2
This table can be used to determine the

necessary Character Height for printed
output of a certain size. If, for example, you
send a drawing to layout at a scale of 1/8"=1'
use Row A.
In Row A, several options for text size are
listed in the Desired Print Height column. To
set the text in your layout at 1/8" high, for
example, the character height in the drawing
needs to be set at 12.
Character height is set in the Character
Height field of the Text Defaults dialog.
See Text Defaults on page 714. If the
character height is changed to 12, the text
height of your drawing in Layout will change
to 1/8". Text height will not, however,
change in floor plan view.
Dimension numbers are not affected by
adjustments to text character height.
Dimension number height is changed in the
Number Height field of the Dimension
Defaults dialog. See Dimension Defaults
on page 88. To set the print height of
dimensions at 1/8", the Number Height must
be changed to 12. Note that when you click
OK, dimensions in floor plan view will
891
Printing
Text may not print exactly as it appears onscreen. To get a better idea of how letters,
numbers and other characters in text will
change to 12. Dimensions, when sent to

layout, will also appear 1/8" high.
Different fonts may introduce slight variations in text height. When conducting
your own printing tests to determine optimal
text height in a Layout, we recommend using
a true-type or open-type font.
1:50m
1:75m
1:100m
1:200m
Metric Plans
The following table is a metric equivalent of
the imperial dimensioning system.
Plan Scale
in Layout
Desired Print
Height
Necessary
Character
Height
1:25m
25 mm
20 mm
15 mm
10 mm
5 mm
62.5
50
37.5
25
12.5
25 mm
20 mm
15 mm
10 mm
5 mm
25 mm
20 mm
15 mm
10 mm
5 mm
25 mm
20 mm
15 mm
10 mm
5 mm
25 mm
20 mm
15 mm
10 mm
5 mm
125
100
73
50
25
187.5
150
112.5
75
37.5
250
200
150
100
50
500
400
300
200
100
Printing to Scale
Several different print scaling options are
available. The type of view that you are
printing will determine which options you
may choose from.
Imperial scales are typically noted in inches

per foot. Larger scales, such as 1 inch = 50
feet or 1:200m, are often used for property
layouts.
Orthogonal Views
Floor plan views, cross section/elevation
views, and CAD details are considered
"orthogonal". Orthogonal views can be
printed to scale through the Print dialog.
892
A scale set in the Page Setup dialog is

inherited by the Print dialog and the Send
Once a view has been sent to layout, there

are a variety of additional scaling options.
See Rescaling Views on page 915.
The Scale to Fit
button is available for
orthogonal views. Clicking this will select a
suitable scale and recenter the sheet so that
everything that is displayed fits on the
drawing sheet.
3D Views
Vector and render views are referred to as 3D
views; can only be printed through the Print
Image dialog; and cannot be accurately
scaled. See Print Image Dialog on page
902.
3D views cannot be printed to scale. If Full

Page and Entire Plan/View are selected, a
percent value can be set which defines how
much of the printed page to fill. A value of
50% causes the print to be 50% of both the
height and width of the paper, not including
the non-printable border. If printing to an
8x11 page with a 1" non-printable border in
each direction, 100% would print 7 x 10,
and Full Page 50% would print 3 x 5. Each
printer may vary slightly.
Check Plots
Check plots can be made from the Print
dialog. Check plots temporarily adjust
everything in a plan to the specified fraction.
Drawing scale and line weights are subject to
the scale adjustment for check plots. See

To set up print formatting before printing,
click the Page Setup
button. For more
information, see Page Setup Dialog on
page 898.
reassemble the pages. For more information,

see Printing Across Multiple Pages on
page 894.
Line color in vector views is always black.
To print directly from any floor plan view or

cross section/elevation view, choose File>
Print. For more information, see Print
Dialog on page 899.
Render views can be printed using the File>
Print Image option. For more information,
see Print Image Dialog on page 902.
Floor plan views, cross section/elevation
views, and layouts can be printed at a
specified scale across multiple pages. Crop
marks are printed, showing where to
893
Printing
to Layout dialog. This scale can be

overridden on an individual basis in either
the Print dialog or the Send to Layout
dialog.
Printing from Layout

Layout sheets can be created to print
professional working drawings. Multiple
views at different scales can be sent to each
page and organized as desired. Layout sheets
can accomodate a border and title block
which display on all sheets and can be
printed at full size or printed at a smaller
scale for check plots.
Images of rendered or shaded vector views

can be exported and then placed into a
layout.
For more information about layout, see
Printing Layout Files on page 921.
Printing Across Multiple Pages

When printing directly from a floor plan
view, cross section/elevation view, or layout
it is possible to print at a scale which does
not fit the image on one page. To do this,
specify a larger drawing sheet and print
across multiple pages.
When printing to a paper size that is smaller
than the sheet size, a 2% overlap is used.
Crop marks will print where the paper needs
to be cut between pages. A solid line is
drawn at the drawing sheet boundary on the
bottom and right sides. The left and top sides

will not need to be cut.
To see how this will print on-screen, click the
Show Sheet
toggle button and then the
Fill Window
button to display the plan
in relation to the drawing sheet. Lines
indicate where the page breaks will occur.
The blue border which represents the
printable area of your printer may not appear
on all sides. See Show Sheet on page 887.

Alternative printing methods are available to
help overcome a variety of printing
challenges.
Printing to a PDF File

One of the most efficient and universally
compatible file formats is .pdf. The .pdf file
format was designed for creating viewable
and printable documents.
894
Creating a .pdf document requires a .pdf

print driver to be installed on your computer.
This is not a physical print device, but a
program that appears to all other programs as
a printer. Printing to a .pdf print driver will
automatically prompt you for a filename and
create a .pdf file that can be read and printed
using Adobe Reader.
A driver called PDF995 is available on the
Chief Architect program disc.
To install the PDF995 driver:

Insert the Chief Architect program disc
into your CD-ROM drive.
2.
When the Chief Architect Installer

dialog starts, click Exit.
3.
On the Windows task bar click Start>

Run to open the Run dialog.
4.
Enter the drive letter (for your CD-ROM

drive) followed by "PDF995".
5.
When installation has completed you

will see a new icon in your Printers and
Faxes folder.
To create a .pdf document, select the pdf

printer driver as you would select any other
printer. This can be done at print time or any
time beforehand by clicking the Printer
button in the Page Setup dialog.
Printing to File
Before using this printing method, you
should try creating a .pdf file. See Printing
to a PDF File on page 894.
If you do not own a plotter, you can print to a
file; send the file to a service bureau via
email or disk; and have prints made. Either
the .prn or the .plt file extension can be
used. Unlike .pdf files, .prn and .plt files
cannot easily be viewed.
If you are using a printing service, it is

important to install on your computer
the same version of the printer driver that
they use.
To print to file:
1.
Find out the exact make and model of

the plotter which is to be used to print
your drawings.
2.
Get the driver for the specific plotter

that your print service is using and your
version of Windows.
3.
Install the driver for that plotter on your

computer and configure it as a printer in
the Control Panel. Change the printer
port to File instead of sending the
information to a parallel or serial port.
4.
Test to make sure that everything is configured properly and functioning. Create
print files of a simple plan and send
them to the service bureau for printing.
Once everything is configured properly,

remote printing is a straightforward process.
The following instructions assume printing
from layout; remote printing from a view
works exactly the same way, however.
To print to a remote printer/plotter:
1.
Before opening the layout, choose File>

Page Setup. Select the remote plotter.
Be sure all properties such as paper size
and orientation are properly defined.
2.
Open the layout file.
3.
Go to the first layout page to be printed.

Choose File> Print. In the Print dialog
Make sure that Print to File is checked
895
Printing
1.
and Copies set to 1. If there are any

problems printing more than one page at
a time, select Current Page. Scaling
should be Print to Scale. Entire Plan/
View should also be selected. Click OK.
6.
Repeat the process starting at step 3 for

each layout sheet until a print file for
each sheet is created. Each sheet must
have a unique name. If you use the same
name twice, a file will be overwritten.
4.
The Print to File dialog opens. Give

the print file a name making sure to add
the .prn or .plt extension. If you would
like to save the file to a different directory, enter the path here. Click OK.
7.
Take the disk to the service bureau

which has the specified plotter, or transfer the file electronically.
5.
The .prn or .plt file is created with the

name you specified in the directory you
defined.
Views and layout files can also be exported

as .dwg or .dxf files. These files can be
opened by other CAD programs; edited; and
printed. This may result in loss of
information since these formats will not
show certain things that you see in layout.
The file will also need to be rescaled before
printing. See Exporting 2D DXF/DWG
Files on page 852.
Exporting to DXF/DWG
Creating Custom Sheet Sizes

Standard drawing sheet sizes can be selected
in the Page Setup dialog.
To create custom sheet sizes, select File>
Print> Customize Sheet Sizes... or click
Customize in the Page Setup dialog.
Several options are available:
896
Click New to create a new sheet size.
Select a sheet size and click Copy to create a duplicate sheet size.
Click Delete to remove the selected sheet

size.
Select a sheet size and click Edit to open

the Edit Paper Size dialog and change
its description, dimensions, and units of
measurement.
Click OK to close the dialog. Any new

sheet sizes created will now be available
in the Page Setup dialog.
The data for this dialog is stored in the

"sheetSizes.sheet" file in the program
directory.
Printers and plotters vary widely in how they

function. Often, solving a problem is as
simple as installing updated print drivers
downloaded from the Internet. Sometimes a
faulty cable can be a problem. Other times,
the plotter requires that the paper be loaded
in a different orientation.
It is a good idea to keep the Owners
Manual for your printer or plotter close
at hand. Write inside the Owners Manual the
various phone numbers for technical support
for that printer or plotter for the original
manufacturer as well as for your local dealer.
Chief Architect can print to almost any

printer or plotter which supports printing
graphics from Windows programs.
Testing the Printer
If the test page prints properly, try printing

from Chief Architect. If there is a printing
problem, make sure that you can print from a
graphics program such Windows Paint. If
there is a problem printing the test page or
printing from a different graphics program,
the printing problem is probably unrelated to
Chief Architect. Make sure that the latest
printer drivers are installed, then solve the
printing problem for the other programs.
Once the printer prints properly from the
other graphics programs, it should print from
Chief Architect.
Help Database
For answers to frequently asked questions
regarding printing and other topics, visit the
Technical Support section of our Web site at
When setting up a printer for the first time,

make sure that the test page prints properly.
There is usually a Print Test Page button
available in the Printer Properties dialog
for that printer.
897
Printing
Page Setup Dialog

Select File> Print> Page Setup
from
the menu to open the Page Setup dialog.
The settings in this dialog, including the

selected printer, are saved with the .plan or
.layout document.
3
4
5
6
1 Select the printer paper Size and
Source. The options in the Size and

Source drop-down lists are controlled by the
printer driver.
To edit the default printer, click the Printer
button at bottom. If you have questions about
your particular printer, consult the
documentation that came with it.
Specify the Orientation of the printer paper.
Check Show Page Breaks to turn on the
display of page breaks. Page breaks will only
display when the drawing sheet is displayed.
898
Plotters can often have paper inserted

into the machine in either of two orientations. Test your own machine, and refer to the
printer manual to find out which way to insert
the paper for correct results.
2 Specify the Size of the Drawing Sheet,

which is the final printed output.
Click the Customize button to open the

Customize Sheet Sizes dialog. See
Creating Custom Sheet Sizes on page 896.
Specify the Orientation of the drawing
sheet, which is the orientation of the entire
drawing. The dialog preview at right will
update as the orientation is changed.
Print Dialog
3 Specify the Drawing Scale at which
your plan will be printed. The scale is

specified in two parts, which by default are 1
ft = 1 ft or 1 m = 1 m for layout views; and
inch = 1 ft or 1 m = 50 m for all other views.
Both imperial and metric units of
measurement are available and can be
selected independently.
The units of measurement available here can
be controlled in the Preferences dialog.
The specified scale effects the size of your
plan on the drawing sheet but not the printed
paper.
Click the Show Sheet
button to preview
the scale at which the plan will be printed on
the drawing sheet.
This scale is applied for printing purposes
only and has no effect on the plan scale.
The Drawing Scale will act as the default
scale for the Print ; Printed Size Input;
and the Send to Layout dialogs. Layout
rescale uses the value input in the Send to
Layout dialog.
4 Select the Line Weight Scale. Note
that line weight is subject to the

drawing scale. See Line Weights and
Scaling on page 889.
Setting the line weight to zero (0) for

any object or group of objects will cause
the line weight to be printed as thin as is possible.
5 Check Use These Settings When
Converting Old Files and click OK to

establish the current settings as the default
settings for plans, elevations, and CAD
details when opening plans created in earlier
versions of Chief Architect. Layout plans
must be set separately. See Text and Page
Setup Panel on page 99.
6 Click the Printer button to select
another printer. A printer will not

appear until its driver has been installed. The
current printer can be changed at any time.
Clearing Printer Information

Select File> Print> Clear Printer Info from
the menu to clear the printer-specific
information stored in the Page Setup
dialog.
This is useful for creating template plans
without an associated printer. See Template
Plans on page 79.
Print Dialog
Direct printing can be used with any printer
and any sized paper. To print directly from
any floor plan view or cross section/elevation
view, choose File> Print> Print
Print dialog opens.
Render views can be printed using the

File> Print Image
command.
. The
899
Printing
Check Show Drawing Sheet to display the

drawing sheet on screen.
2
5
3
4
1 Specify Printer parameters.

Browse the Name list to choose a
printer.
Click Properties to verify that the printer is
configured correctly. Paper size, orientation,
and other settings can be accessed here.
Select the Print to file check box to create a
file for remote printing. Be sure to give the
file name a .prn or .plt extension. Do not
check Print to file if you are creating a .pdf
file. See Printing to File on page 895.
Printing to a PDF file may be preferable.
For more information, see Printing to a
PDF File on page 894.
2 Specify the Print Range.

From a layout file, select Current Page
or All. By default, the current page is
selected.
900
Current Screen prints only the portion of

the entire View showing on screen.
Entire Sheet prints the entire sheet even
though you may be zoomed in on a portion of
the view.
Note: If you are zoomed out, and Current
Screen is selected, any white space around
the plan is calculated for printing.
3 Fit to Paper prints the plan on one
page. The program will use whatever

scale is necessary to fit the plan on one page.
If a percentage less than 100 is specified,
only that portion of the printable area is used.
Select To Scale to print at the scale specified
in the Page Setup dialog. See Page Setup
Dialog on page 898.
To print a check plot, select Check Plot at
and choose a scale adjustment from the dropdown list. This temporarily modifies the
Print Dialog
Note: None of these options will override the

printer paper size specified in the Page Setup
dialog.
4 Check the accuracy of your printed
scaled documents using Height/Width

Correction. If your scaled documents are not
correct, you can fine tune or calibrate the
printer with these adjustments. These
numbers are multiplied into the scaling units.
Such corrections should only be necessary if
you are using a dot matrix printer.
Check printer calibration by printing a
four foot square at = 1-0. Measure
the print to see if it measures out exactly 1"
square.
5 Copies - Define the number of copies.

Check the Print in Color box to print
in color or clear the check box to print in
black and white. If you are using solid fills,
any fill color will print as black also. This
option is available from layout files as well.
Most black and white printers will print a
grey scale approximation of the colors if
Print in Color is selected.
If a vector view is being printed, the shading
prints in addition to the delineation lines.
Images will print using grey scale.
Use Outline Printing - Select the check box

to have True Type text and dimension
numbers drawn as outlines.
If Use Outline Printing is selected when
printing to a regular printer, only the outlines
of text objects and dimension numbers print.
If you are using a pen plotter, you may be
unable to print solid-filled True Type fonts
such as Arial. This option gives you an
outline font solution.
If you are still having difficulty printing fonts
on your pen plotter, try using a single pixel
plotter font such as Modern.
Double Buffered Printing uses computer
memory to render the output at printer
resolution. The resulting bitmap is then
printed. This can greatly improve print speed
when printing vector views; however, a lot of
memory is required. This method is not
recommended for layouts, plans, or details.
If there are a lot of pictures on your plan or
layout, using double buffered printing may
improve your print speed.
Line Weight - In vector views only, specify
the Line Weight for all lines defining the
edges of 3D objects. This is a global setting
for all edges. Individual lines, other than
superimposed CAD lines, cannot be defined
with different line weights. To modify
individual lines, the 3D view must first be
sent to layout. To edit a line once the 3D
view has been sent to layout, select Edit>
Edit Layout, and then select the line to be
modified. See Editing Layout Lines on
page 916.
Printing to pen plotters is not supported.
901
Printing
scale but does not alter the scale specified in

the Page Setup dialog. Line weights will
also be subject to the temporary scale
adjustment. If a drawing sheet larger than the
printer paper is specified, a check plot will
print across multiple pages.
Print Image Dialog

Any view can be printed using the File>
Print Image
command. This is the only
way to print a render view or raytrace view.
See Exporting a 3D DXF/DWG Model on
page 856.
The Print Image dialog is identical to the

Print dialog, but the printing process is
different. Print Image prints individual pixels
as opposed to vectors.
1 Specify Printer parameters.

Choose a printer from the Name list.
Click Properties to verify that the printer is
configured correctly. Paper size, orientation,
and other settings are accessed here.
Select the Print to file check box to send the
print to a file for remote printing. Be sure to
902
give the file name a .prn or .plt extension.

For more information, see Printing to File
on page 895.
2 Specify the Print Range.

3 Specify the number of Copies.
Chapter 39:
Layout Files
Chapter Overview
Layout files can be printed on any printer

that uses a Windows driver. Layout files can
also be printed to file and printed off site.
When you are ready to print a layout file to a
printer or plotter, it may be helpful to refer to
the chapter on printing and plotting for
information about controlling the final
printed product. See Printing & Plotting on
page 883.
Screen captures are provided for illustrative purposes only and are not an
endorsement of any products. Many options
available with one driver may not be available
with another. Printers supported in one version of windows may not be supported by the
manufacturer in another.
Chapter Contents
The Layout Tools

Preparing for Layout
Creating a Layout File
The Current Page
Layout Page Zero
CAD and Text in Layout
Images in Layout
Sending Views to Layout
Keeping Layout Views Current
Editing Layout Views
Rescaling Views
Displaying Layout Views
Editing Layout Lines
Edit Layout Lines Dialog
Managing Layout Links
Printing Layout Files
Exporting Layout Files
Layout Box Specification Dialog
Layout Defaults
Layout
Files
The Chief Architect layout facility can create

large or small format plot sheets for working
drawings. Each layout file contains many
pages; and each page can contain multiple
views, details, images, CAD objects, text,
etc.
903
The Layout Tools

Many of the tools available in layout are
covered in the printing chapter. See The
Printing Tools on page 886. Some
additional tools are available to help you get
the most out of Chief Architects layout
facility.
Layout Buttons
Click the Send to Layout button to
open the Send to Layout dialog and
send the current view to the specified layout
page. See Sending Views to Layout on
page 908.
Use the Page Up, Page Down, and
Change Layout Page buttons to
navigate the layout document. See The
Current Page on page 905.
Click the Edit Layout button to allow
the lines of a vector view sent to layout
to be edited individually. See Editing
Layout Lines on page 916.
Click Swap Views to switch between
the current view and the view that was
current before it. See Swapping Views on
page 620.
Click the Show Layout button to

switch to a layout file which is
currently open. You may need to add this
button to your toolbar. See Adding Toolbar
Buttons on page 18.
Edit Buttons
Select a layout view and click the
Open View edit button to open the
view that was originally sent to layout. See
Opening Dynamic Views on page 914.
Rescale Layout edit button to open the
Change Scale dialog and apply a different
scale. See Rescaling Views on page 915.
Relink File edit button to open the
Choose Layout File Reference dialog
and relink the selected layout view. See
Relinking Layout Views on page 920.
Layout Box Layers edit button to
for the selected view only. See Displaying
Preparing for Layout

Very little preparation is necessary before
creating layouts. Most changes can be made
any time before the layout file is sent to the
printer. There are a few things that are
helpful to keep in mind.
904
Printer Setup
You can install print drivers on your
computer for any printer. The new driver can
then be specified as your printer even if the
printer has never been physically attached to
your computer. To print to a printer that is
not connected to your computer, you will
need to print to file. See Printing to File on

page 895.
You can change the current printer at any
time in the Page Setup dialog. See Page
Setup Dialog on page 898.
Printing Services
If you are going to use a printing service, be
sure to install the driver for the printer in the
Printers folder of the Control Panel. Find out
what paper size the printer company uses and
select this printer and paper size in the Page
Setup dialog. See Page Setup Dialog on

page 898.
When using an outside service it is a
good idea to run printing tests to make
sure that the setup is correct, and that all of
the hardware is functioning properly.
Check Plots
If a large size printer has been chosen for the
layout, it is still possible to run a check plot
on a smaller printer. This allows you to make
final checks before printing to the larger
sizes. See Check Plots on page 893.
To open an existing layout file, select File>

Open Layout
. Browse to a directory and
select the layout file to open. When a layout
file is open it appears at the bottom of the

Window menu as an open view. Layout files
also appear in the Project Browser. See
Project Browser on page 78.
Select File> Save
to save the layout file.
It is important that you save the file in the
same directory that contains the plan files
and views contained on the layout pages.
You should also save any plans that appear in
the layout at the same time you save your
layout.
The Current Page

The current page is indicated at the
center of the Layout Page buttons.
When a layout file is first created, the current
page is page one.
The current layout page is the target of any
view sent to layout. If sent to the wrong page,
a view may be moved from one page to
another. To accomplish this, click on the

view you want to move. Once it is selected,
edit button to
open the Layout Box Specification
dialog, which allows you to change the Page
number on the Line Style tab. See Layout
Box Specification Dialog on page 922.
905
Layout
Files
Choose File> New Layout

to create a
blank layout file. A layout file is created with
the name untitled.layout. By default, new
layout files open to page one. If you have
specified a default template file for layouts,
this file will be opened. See Template
Plans on page 79. Only one layout file can
be open at a time.
To navigate between layout pages:
Click the arrow buttons on either side of

the Layout Page button.
Click the Current Page number between

the arrows to open the Go To Layout
Page dialog. Enter a page number and
click OK.
Select one of the options from the Tools>

Layout> menu.
Press Shift + N (up one page) or Shift + M

(down one page) on the keyboard.
Double click a page in the Project

Browser. See Project Browser on page
78.
Note: The current page cannot be printed if it

is blank.
Layout Page Zero

Layout page zero is unique.
Anything on page zero displays
and prints on all layout pages, allowing you
to create title blocks and borders that are
used by layout pages without having to
recreate them on each page. Add anything to
page zero that you would like on all
subsequent layout pages.
To create border lines on a layout page

1.
In the Plan Defaults dialog, set the

Snap Grid/Units to the desired distance
between border lines. A setting of will
display a snap grid in inch increments.
See Layout Defaults on page 922.
2.
With layout page zero open, click the

Box Tools
Creating Borders
Once the print area of the layout sheet is
established, you can use CAD tools to create
borders for your layout pages on sheet zero.
For information about the printable area, see
Show Sheet on page 887.
Drawing borders may be simplified by
making a few changes in the Preferences
dialog. To access the dialog, select Edit>
Preferences from the menu, or click the
Preferences
button. When you have
finished creating borders you will probably
want to reverse these changes.
906
parent button, then click
the Rectangular Polyline

ton.
3.
4.
child but-
Draw a rectangular polyline inside the

printable area of the drawing sheet, indicated by a blue border.
Go to the CAD panel of the
Preferences dialog, select Concentric
Edit Type, and set the Jump to . This

will allow a concentric copy of the
polyline to be made a inch from all
edges. See CAD Panel on page 108.
Layout Page Zero
4.
5.
Select the rectangular polyline, click the

Copy/Paste
edit button, and drag
one of the corner edit handles to the
inside. A concentric copy of the polyline
will be made.
6.
Thicker borders can be created by defining the color, style, and/or line weight
for the CAD objects.
7.
It may be easier to see your final product

with the display of the snap grid and the
reference grid turned off. See Layout
To create a filleted border

1.
Draw a rectangular polyline inside the

printable area of the drawing sheet, indicated by a blue border.
2.
Double click the Fillet Two Lines

edit button and set the Fillet Radius
value in the Chamfer/Fillet dialog. A
value of 1 will fillet one inch of each
line at their intersection.
3.
Select one side of the rectangle, click the

Fillet Two Lines edit button and then
select an adjacent side. The two lines
will fillet where they meet.
Note: The printable area varies from printer

to printer. For best results, inset layout borders 1/2" to 3/4" from the paper edge for large
format layouts, or about 1/8" fo smaller sizes.
Title Block
Create the title block using CAD boxes, lines
and text on layout page zero. Include only
those items which should display on every
layout page. You can create areas for pagespecific information, which can be filled in
later on each page.
A company logo can be added to a layout by
importing it as a bitmap into a CAD detail;
then sending the CAD detail to the layout.
You can also embed the image in the layout
file.
Text Macros
Page numbers can be entered on page zero
using text macros that are available with the
Text tool. The correct page number will
appear on all pages. A variety of other macros are also available including date/time,
file name, drawing scale, and others. See
Text Macros on page 709.
907
Layout
Files
e
c
a
pl
e
R
Repeat step 3 until all corners are filleted.
CAD and Text in Layout

CAD objects and text may be added to any
layout page. These are attached to the layout
page itself, not to any specific view
contained on the page.
Text sent to layout is specified in model
coordinates. Text placed on a layout page is
specified in printer coordinates. If you want
text in a plan, elevation, or detail to print at a
particular size, you will need to calculate its
size based on the scaling you use when you
send a view to layout. See Sizing Text on
page 708.
By default, text and CAD objects drawn on a
layout page are black with a line weight of 1.
Object
edit button. The specification
dialog for the selected object(s) opens.
CAD objects can be edited in layout just
as they are edited in floor plan view. See
CAD Objects on page 725.
To edit text objects, select them individually or as a group and click the Open
edit button. The Text
Specification dialog opens. Text
Object
objects can be edited in layout just as

they are edited in floor plan view. See
Text Specification Dialog on page 711.
To edit CAD objects, select them individually or as a group and click the Open
To move text or CAD objects to another

page, change the Page number on the
Line Style tab.
Images in Layout
Images can be imported into a layout file just
as they are imported into floor plan view. See
Importing Picture Files on page 826.
dialog, including line style, fill style, and

transparency information. See Picture File
Box Specification Dialog on page 829.
Once imported into layout an image can be

selected and opened for specification.
Display attributes for the image can be set in
the Picture File Box Specification
When selected, an image will display edit

handles that allow you to resize, relocate, or
rotate the image. See Editing Picture Files
on page 827.

Only one layout file can be open at a
time.
Layout files can contain many different

views and details from different plan files.
To send a view to layout
1.
908
Before sending a view to layout, be sure

that the destination layout file is open.
2.
Prepare the view so that objects which

should be seen are displayed and those
which should not are suppressed.
If there are layer settings that you use

often, it may be helpful to define custom
layer sets for your layout files. See Layer
Sets on page 121.
3.
5.
You must go to the layout file to see the

view that was just sent to layout. You
can choose the layout file from the list at
the bottom of the Window menu, or
double click the layout page from the
Project Browser. (see Project Browser
on page 78) to open the layout file.
6.
The current layout page contains the

view you just sent, in the middle of the
page. It is at the scale that was defined in
the Send to Layout dialog.
7.
To send other views to layout, repeat this

process.
When the view is displayed as desired,

choose File> Send to Layout or click
the Send to Layout
button. The
Send to Layout dialog will open. The
available options will vary depending on
the type of view being sent to layout.
4.
click OK to send the view to the specified page.
When you have selected the desired

options in the Send to Layout dialog,
Floor Plan Views and CAD Details

1
2
Layout
Files
3
4
5
1 The default printer displays, but is not
editable. The printer can be changed in

the Page Setup dialog. See Page Setup
Dialog on page 898.
2 Select Current Screen to send only

what is shown on screen to layout.
Select Entire Plan/View to send what would

be visible if the Fill Window
were clicked.
button
3 Select Fit to Sheet to send the view to
layout without a specific scale. The

current screen will appear in the layout view.
You can define the percentage of the sheet
909
that the view occupies. It can be resized on

the layout sheet later if necessary.
4 You can also specify an exact scale at
which the view will be sent to layout.

The view can be rescaled later from layout if
necessary. Both imperial and metric units of

5 Send to Layout Page # - Enter a page.

Snap to Active CAD Point - Check
this box to snap the view to the active CAD
Point. See Temporary Points on page 750.
Cross Section/Elevation Views

1
5
3
6
7
1 The default printer displays, but is not
editable. The printer can be changed in

the Page Setup dialog. See Page Setup
Dialog on page 898.
2 Select Fit to Sheet to send the elevation
view to layout without a specific scale.

The current screen will appear in layout. You
can define the percentage of the sheet that the
view occupies. It can be resized on the layout
sheet later if necessary.
3 You can specify an exact scale at which
the view will be sent to layout. The

view can be rescaled later from layout if
necessary. Both imperial and metric units of
910

Check Snap to Active CAD Point to
snap the view you are sending to layout to
the active CAD Point. See Temporary
Points on page 750.
5 Line Weight determines the printed
line weight for the view. Any CAD

lines or dimensions added to the original
view are not affected. This value can be
changed later for the view in layout; or, the
weights of individual lines can be set.
6 Select Current Screen to send only

what is shown on screen to layout.
Select Entire Plan/View to send what would

be visible if Fill Window
were clicked.
7 Check Suppress Line Merge to pre-
vent the merging of colinear lines. Horizontal and vertical lines will still merge.
If Suppress Line Merge is not selected and
a cross section/elevation view is sent to
layout, the program will merge any lines
which are superimposed or parallel with each
other so that the layout has only one line

rather than several. This makes the final view
easier to edit in layout if necessary; but may
slow down the process of sending 3D views
containing non-vertical or horizontal lines to
layout.
Vector Camera Views and Overviews

1
4
2
1 The default printer displays, but is
grayed out. This can be changed in the

Page Setup dialog. See Page Setup
Dialog on page 898.
2 Select Fit to Sheet to send the view to

layout without a specific scale. The
current screen will appear in the layout view.
You can define the percentage of the sheet
that the view occupies. It can be resized on
the layout sheet later if necessary.
Check Snap to Active CAD Point to
snap the view you are sending to layout to
the active CAD Point.
Line Weight determines the printed

line weight of lines in vector views.
5 In vector camera views only, the
Current Screen can be sent to layout.

Any lines or information beyond the current
screen will not be sent to layout.
Either the Current Screen or the Entire
Plan/View can be sent to layout for vector
overviews.
6 Check Suppress line merge to prevent
overlapping lines from merging. When

a vector view is sent to layout, the program
looks for line segments which are in line
(colinear) with each other and merges them.
When merged, the layout line is made up of
911
Layout
Files
only one line segment rather than several

colinear or overlapping line segments. See
Cross Section/Elevation Views on page

910.

If a model changes after views of the model
have been sent to layout, some of the views
are likely to be out of date. Depending on the
type of view, some may update automatically
and some may need to be updated manually.
Dynamic Views
A dynamic view is one that references the
view saved with the original plan. Any
changes made to the original plan will update
the dynamic layout view.
For information about controlling the display
of dynamic views in layout, see Displaying
When a view is sent to layout, the layout view is linked to the .plan file. Once
linked, do not change the path name by moving the .plan file to a new folder or renaming
it. If the path name is changed, the link within
the layout file will need to be reestablished for
the view to appear in layout. The best way to
do this is to use the Relink File tool or to
resend the drawing to layout. See Relinking
Static Views
A static view does not reference the original
plan and will not be updated when the plan
changes. Changes made in the original plan
must then resent to layout manually.
Floor Plan Views

and CAD Details
Floor plan views and CAD details sent to
layout are dynamic. Any changes made to
these items in plan will be reflected
automatically in layout.
The display of everything is under your

control. All editing must be done in floor
plan view or the original CAD detail, and
all changes are automatically reflected on
every copy in layout.
Layer display attributes can be set independently without affecting the original
plan or detail. See Displaying Layout
Views on page 915.
To edit the floor plan view or CAD Detail

from layout, double-click inside the view
while in Select Objects
mode. This
will open the plan file where editing can
be done. Any changes made will update
on each layout copy.
Cross Sections/Elevations
Views created using the Cross Section/
Elevation
, and

tools are
dynamic; however, their behavior in layout
is different from other dynamic views.
912
, Wall Elevation
Cross section/elevations allow CAD

objects to be added. Any CAD objects
added to a cross section/elevation view
will automatically update in the layout.
changes made to a layout view using the

Edit Layout tool should be made only
after the model has been finalized.
CAD objects added in a cross section/elevation view can only be edited in the
cross section/elevation view.
CAD objects added in a layout view can

only be edited in the layout view.
Double-clicking a cross section/elevation view in layout while in Select
Views created using the Vector Full Camera
Objects
mode will activate the original view, allowing modifications to the
model or added CAD objects.
Floor Overview
The lines that define cross section/elevation views in layout are automatically
generated copies that are no longer linked
to the 3D model. Once in layout, these
lines can be edited using the Edit Layout
button. See Editing Layout Lines on
page 917.
Updating Cross
Sections/Elevations
If a cross section/elevation view has been
sent to layout,and that camera is activated
while the layout sheet is open, closing the
view will open the following dialog:
If the layout view is up-to-date with the

3D model, you can choose NO.
To update the view on the layout page

choose OK. When the picture is updated,
the layout view is replaced with a new
copy. Any manual changes made to the
original picture are lost. For this reason,
, Vector Floor Camera
, Vector
, Vector Full Overview
, or Vector Framing Overview

are static views.
tools
Any changes made to the 3D model will have

no effect on a vector view already present in
layout. Copies of vector views are like a
snapshot taken at a specific time: any
subsequent changes will not appear on that
snapshot. To update these views in layout,
delete the old view and send a new one. See
Static Views on page 912.
You cannot add CAD objects, text, or

anything to vector views. Changes must
be made to the 3D model.
CAD objects added in layout can only be

edited in layout.
The lines that define these views are generated automatically. When vector views
are sent to layout, a line-for-line copy of
the view is sent to layout. The view is no
longer associated with the 3D model.
Lines in vector views can be edited using

the Edit Layout
button. Changes
made in layout have no effect on the 3D
model.
913
Layout
Files
Vector Views
Editing Layout Views

Select a view in layout using the Select
Objects
tool. An edit handle along the
border between each corner; at each corner;
and in the center will appear.
relocate the view relative to the sheets edge.

See Moving Objects Using Dimensions on
page 690.
Moving Views to
a Different Page
Moving Layout Views

To reposition the view on the layout page,
select it, grab the center edit handle and
reposition it. The box and the image relocate.
Rotating Scaled Views

Floor plan views and CAD details display a
triangular handle when selected. This handle
can be used to rotate the view. Both the box
and the image will rotate.
Deleting Views
To move a view from one layout page to

another, select the view border, click the
Open Object
edit button, and change the
Page on the Line Style tab.
Opening Dynamic Views

Select a dynamic view and click the Open
View
edit button to open the original
view that was sent to layout. This is the same
as double-clicking a dynamic view in layout.
See Dynamic Views on page 912.
To delete a view select it, then click the

Delete
edit button or press the
Del
Copying Views
You cannot copy a view by selecting the
view border in layout and copying it.
If multiple copies of one view are needed,
send the view to layout as many times as
necessary. Each view will behave
independently.
Moving Views Using

Temporary Dimensions
When a layout view is selected, temporary
dimensions locating its position relative to
the sheet boundary display. Click on these
dimensions and enter new values to precisely
914
Resizing Scaled Views
key.
Scaled views retain their scale regardless of

how you resize the border. You can resize the
border proportionally from a corner handle
or select one of the handles on an edge to
change the size in one direction only. Make
the border smaller and the image may be
cropped.
Resizing Non-Scaled Views

If the view was sent to layout using the Fit to
Sheet setting, resizing may have one of
several results:
Drag a corner handle in or out to resize

both the border and the image proportionally. This is how you make the image
larger or smaller.
Rescaling Views
If you drag a side handle in or out, the

image does not change size, but the border does. If you make the border smaller,
it may crop the image; if you make it

larger, you may show more of the image.
Rescaling Views
Floor plan views, section/elevations,
wall elevations and CAD details can
be rescaled on the layout page. To
change the scale of the image, select the
border, and click the Rescale Layout View
edit button or select Tools> Layout>
Rescale Layout View. The Change Scale
dialog opens.
1 Choose No Scale to remove any
specific scale factor from being

associated with the selected view.
2 Select this option to specify a scale for
the image. When the scale is changed,

the layout picture will resize accordingly.
In most cases, you will want to specify a

scale for floor plan views, CAD details, and
cross sections/elevation views. Typical scales
are in = 1ft and 1 m = 50 m.
Displaying Layout Views

Every layout view displays the same items
which were visible when the original view
was sent to layout. After a view has been sent
to layout, three methods are available to
change the display properties. The display of
dynamic views can be changed using any of
these methods. The display of static views is
only affected by changes made to the layer
settings of the entire layout. For more information about changing layer attributes, see
2.
Click the Layout Box Layers

edit
button to open the Layer Display
Options dialog.
A locked copy of the original layer set
is used.
All layers are set as they were when the
plan was originally sent to layout.
Changes made affect only the selected
layout view.
You will need to save your changes
before closing the layout.
To edit the layer settings for a layout view

1.
Select the layout view.
915
Layout
Files
1
2
To edit the layer settings of the original view
To edit the layer settings of the entire layout
1.
Double-click the layout view while in
1.
Select Objects
original view.
2.
2.
mode to open the
Click Display Options
to open the
Notice that the layer settings in the

Layer Display Options dialog
match those in the layout view but not
necessarily other views.
The layer set from the layout view is
active. This layer set is called "Layout
Set" to indicate the unique connection
it has to the layout view. If a layer set
already exists by the same name, a 1, 2,
3, etc. will be appended.
Changes made in the Layer Display
Options dialog while this layer set is
active will only affect the layer settings
of that layout view. This layer set is not
saved with the plan, but will remain
accessible from the layout.
Open a .layout file to any page.

button.
This Layer Display Options dialog
contains layers that are specific to this
.layout file.
All views on all pages of the layout
will be affected by the settings in this
Text and Dimensions

Text and dimensions do not always print
exactly as they appear on screen. One way to
get a better idea of how they will print is to
click the Print Preview
toggle button.
A table has been prepared to help you determine what size your text and dimensions
should be set for printing purposes. See,
Printing Text and Dimensions on page 891.

Individual lines in any vector view sent
to layout can be modified or added in
the layout file.
Using the Edit Layout
tool, you can
draw, move, delete and change the properties
of lines in a vector view. This feature is often
used to delete extraneous lines that may
appear in a layout view. Changes made will
have no effect on the 3D model
916
.Selecting Layout Lines

CAD lines sent to layout cannot be edited
with the Edit Layout
tool. Only lines
generated by the program can be edited.
To select a line in a layout view, click the
Edit Layout
button and click on the line.
You can select additional lines within the
same layout view by pressing the Shift key.
A marquee will appear around the lines when
you finish selecting them. With the Shift key
down, lines can be deselected as well.
Before any lines are selected, press the Shift

key and use the marquee select method to
select a group of lines. See Marquee Select
on page 9.
Adding New Layout Lines

Add a line in a layout vector view by clicking
the Edit Layout
button; selecting a
layout view; and dragging a new line. Once
drawn, this line can be edited like any other
layout line and will maintain its position in
relation to the view or image that it was
drawn in.
Deleting Layout Lines

Once selected you can click the Delete
edit button or press the Del key on the
keyboard to delete lines.

When a line is selected, the edit handles can
be used to change length and angle of the
line. The line will pivot at its opposite end.
Lines in a CAD detail offer the full set of
CAD editing tools. You may find it more
convenient to edit these lines in a CAD
Detail and then send that CAD Detail to
layout. See CAD Detail From View on
page 639.

Layout
tool, click the Open Object
edit button to open the Edit Layout Lines
dialog.
The dialog allows you to change the

properties of the selected lines without
affecting the other lines in the view or
change the properties for all lines in the view.
Layout
Files
When lines have been selected with the Edit
Line Weight Tab
1
2
3
5
7
4
6
917
1 Weight for Selected Lines - If this
value is set to 0, the selected lines use

the Default Weight for their line type
defined in the lower part of this same dialog.
Default Weights - Set the line width for all
Normal lines and all Pattern lines.
2 Selected lines can be changed to take
on the properties of either the Pattern

Lines or the Normal Lines.
3 Normal Lines are those lines defining
the edges of the surfaces of the 3D

objects.
4 Pattern Lines are those lines defining
patterns such as brick, siding, and

shingles.
5 Highlight Certain Weight - Select the
check box if you want to isolate lines of

a specific weight. This activates the
Highlight Weight section, where you must
specify which weights of lines are

highlighted.
6 All Lines Editable - Check this box to
be able to select all layout lines, even

those which are not highlighted. If All lines
editable is not checked, only the highlighted
lines are selectable until you return to this
dialog and uncheck Highlight certain weight.
7 Highlight Weight - Specify the line
weight for each line type to highlight.

In the above example, normal lines have
been defaulted to line weight 3; choosing to
highlight normal lines of line weight 2
displays those lines which were changed to
line weight 2 and are no longer linked to the
defaults. If All lines editable is unchecked,
the highlighted normal lines of line weight 2
would be simple to select by holding down
the Shift key and dragging a marquee around
the view (inside the border). Only the
highlighted lines would be selected.
Line Color Tab
Layout line color can be changed in either of

two ways: by changing it for the selected
lines only; or by changing it for the entire
layout line type.
918
1 Click the box under Color for selected
lines and choose a new color from the

menu to change all selected lines to the
newly defined color.
2 Check Use default color to restore the
selected layout lines to the default color

for that line type.
3 Use the menu to define new Default
colors for Normal lines and for

Pattern lines. Unless changed individually,
every layout line in that view will take on the
newly defined color for its line type.
Layout files should never be moved. If a

layout file must be moved, the entire
folder it is saved in should be moved or
copied and then moved.
Use Export> Export Entire Plan to create an independent copy of the original
layout. Avoid use of "Save As".
Protecting Layout Links

Careful file management is needed to avoid
disrupting layout links and producing
missing files. See File Management on
page 71.
The following guidelines can help prevent
layout links from being disrupted:
Save plan files in the same folder as the

layout, or in a sub-folder in that folder.
Custom graphics included in a plan or

layout should be embedded in the file or
saved in the same folder as the layout.
Plan files used to save CAD details or

other information should be copied and
saved in the same folder as the layout.
Plan files should never be renamed. If a

new name is desired, make a copy of the
file and rename it. Changes made in the
copy do not affect the layout.
Avoid sending cross section/elevations to

layout more than once. Changes made to
the view can affect layout views in unintended ways.
Finding Missing Files

When a layout file is opened, it looks for
dynamically linked views in the following
order:
1.
Files in the same directory or

subdirectories as the layout being
opened.
2.
Files in the directory from which the

files were sent to the layout.
3.
If files of the same name as those

originally sent to the layout are not
found in these locations, the Layout
Files dialog will appear. See Layout
Files Dialog on page 920.
To relocate missing files

1.
Select the file and then click the Browse

button to locate the file. Click Open to
restore the link. When all missing files
have been restored, click OK.
919
Layout
Files
Chief Architect allows you to review plan

files present in a current layout; change
existing links from one plan file to another;
and reestablish links to plan files that have
been moved or renamed.
2.
3.
Choose Tools> Layout> Layout files to

double-check that all files have been
found. If some are still missing, repeat
the above process. If a missing file is no
longer needed, delete the view borders
associated with it in the layout.
Be sure to choose File> Save when the
missing files have been restored to save
the new pathnames.
Results of Missing Files

If all missing files are correctly redefined,
the layout will open when you click OK.
Each section lists files by full pathname.

Click Browse to locate files in the
directory structure.
Relinking Layout Views

You can change the file that a dynamic
layout view is linked to by selecting the
view and choosing Tools> Layout> Relink
File or clicking the Relink File
edit
button. The Choose Layout File
Reference dialog will open. Select the file
that you want to link to and click Open.
If an error message appears, one or more of

the missing files could not be replaced by the
redefined file. Click OK to continue. The
layout opens, but with the following
characteristics:
1.
Any floor plan views or CAD Detail

views associated with the missing file(s)
are blank. Only the border displays.
2.
Any elevations or cross sections associated with the missing file(s) display the
automatically generated lines, but any
added CAD objects will be absent.
If you want to relink all references to this

file, use the Layout Files dialog by
choosing Tools> Layout> Layout Files....
SeeLayout Files Dialog on page 920.
Layout Files Dialog
Finding Files from

an Opened Layout
To view a list of the files that the current
layout is linked to, choose Tools> Layout>
Layout files to open the Layout Files
dialog. SeeLayout Files Dialog on page
920.
920
If all files are located, only one section

will display: Files present in layout.
If files are missing, a second section also

displays: Files NOT FOUND in layout.
1
3
2
1 The Files present in layout list
displays all files with intact links to the

layout.
2 The Files NOT FOUND in layout list

displays the names of files with
disrupted links to the layout. Any files listed
here have been moved or renamed and
cannot be found by the program. Intervention
is required to find these files and reestablish

their links to the layout.
3 Select a file and click the Browse
button to find the file in the directory

structure. Locate a missing file and click
Open to link it to the layout. You can also
type the entire path and file name of the file.
Customizing the options in the Page Setup

dialog before creating a layout file may save
time in the long run; however, these options
can be changed at any time. See Page Setup
Dialog on page 898.
Select File> Print> Print from the .layout
file menu to open the Print dialog. See
Scaling
The only noteable difference in the Print
dialog when accessed from a .layout file is
the scale that displays.
Because a layout file contains many different

views that may have been sent to layout at
different scales, the scaling portion of the
Print dialog reads To Scale: 1 in = 1 in and
is disabled. All layout views will be printed
at the scale specified when they were sent to
layout.
To see the current scale or change the scale
of a layout view, select the view and click the
Rescale Layout View
edit button. See
Rescaling Views on page 915.
Exporting Layout Files

Layout files can be exported just like any
other view. The main difference is in the
scale of the output. The output is in paper
units rather than model units. If a line would
be 1 inch on paper it will be exported as a 1
inch line instead of what the model might be.
See Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files on

page 852.
921
Layout
Files
Printing layout files is similar to printing

files directly from a view. See Printing
Directly from a View on page 893.
Layout Box Specification Dialog

A layout box is essentially a CAD box that
contains a view once it has been sent to
layout. When selected, a layout box displays
edit handles similar to those of a CAD box,
which allow you to rotate, relocate, and
resize the layout box.
Select a layout view and click the Open
Object
edit button to open the Layout
Box Specification dialog. The Layout
Box Specification dialog is very similar
to the CAD Box Specification dialog.
Line Style Tab

The Line Style tab allows you to set the
display properties of the selected layout box
and to move the selected layout box to
another layout page. For more information
about the options in the Line Style tab, see
Fill Style Tab

General Tab
On the General tab you can specify the exact
size and location of the layout box. See
Layout Defaults
To access the layout defaults for the
current layout file, select Edit>
Default Settings; select Layout from the
Default Settings dialog; and click Edit....
The settings in the Layout Defaults dialog
are comparable to those in the Plan
Defaults dialog. Some options that do not
922
apply to layouts are disabled. See Plan

The default settings are saved with the layout
plan. If you would like to customize the
layout settings for future plans, a template
plan can be created. See Template Plans on
page 79.
Chapter 40:
Model Maker
Chapter Overview
Since different people will build house

models in different ways, the Model Maker
focuses on providing the most necessary
tools. It may not necessarily give you
everything you might want in order to build
house models your way. For example, you

may want to affix tabs to certain wall or roof
edges to help attach them to their neighbors.
While you can draw some of these things
onto printed sheets, the system does not
provide them automatically. What it does
provide is accurate templates for wall and
roof sections. Combining these with your
own skills will help you create professional
quality models.
Chapter Contents
Printing the Model

Assembling the Model
Model
Maker
The Model Maker allows you to create a

template of your plan that can be printed to
scale and assembled into an actual 3D model.
Three groups of templates are used in the
process. Walls and roofs are printed
separately. These can then be placed onto a
floor plan view, which is printed as a layout
for the entire model.
Printing the Model

The best way to understand how the various
options affect the final product is to make a
very simple two story plan and try them out.
To print the model templates, choose File>

Print> Print Model. The Print Model
dialog will open.
923
The Print Model Dialog

1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
9
1 Printer - Select the printer for your
model. Larger sheet sizes are better.

Landscape is usually the best mode for
printing models. If it is not your default
printing mode, it can be selected via the
Properties button.
2 Printer Info - Information about your
printer and its current setup display

here. Check this box if you prefer to Print to
File instead.
3 Walls - Clear the check box to suppress

walls from printing.
4 Exterior Only - Check this box to
suppress interior wall surfaces.

Normally it is only the exterior walls that
appear in a model. If interior walls and
surfaces are produced, much more paper will
be required. Interior surfaces are typically
printed when composing a model of only the
current floor, without a roof.
10
11
12
13
14
5 Fold Interior Down - Check this box
to print the interior surface of a wall

above its corresponding exterior surface and
upside down. This allows both walls to be
cut in one piece and folded over. This is
convenient when making a separate model
for each floor to show its interior.
6 Combine Floors - Check this box to
print together the exterior surfaces of

walls that are on top of each other. Interior
surfaces of those walls will still print
separately.
Allow Offset - This modifies the outcome of
the Combine Floors Option. Normally the
main layers of stacked walls must be closely
aligned and have the same thickness for
walls to combine. Check this box to allow an
offset of up to six inches (15 cm) and allow
different thicknesses.
7 Railings - Check this box to print

railings along with walls.
924
Check this box to include Outdoor

Walls and/or Foundation Walls in the walls
group. This will also affect which walls
appear in the floor plan view template.
Outdoor Walls - An Outdoor wall is
normally a garden wall or a wall used as a
fence. It may be a No Room Def. type wall,
see The Wall Specification Dialog on page
166, or have exterior type rooms, such as
Court, Deck, Porch, or Attic on both sides of
it.
If there are extensive outdoor walls, printing
them all may use a considerable amount of
paper.
Foundation Walls - Walls on floor zero, the
foundation floor, will still print if they are not
marked as foundation walls in the first or
third tab of the Wall Specification dialog.
See The Wall Specification Dialog on page
166.
Roofs - Remove check from box to

suppress roofs from printing.
Plan View Instructions - Remove check

from box to suppress floor plan view
instructions from printing.
10 Copies - Use the spin box to specify the

number of copies to be printed.
11 Scale - Specify the scale to be printed
in inches per feet. A simple ratio (1:48

for example) is used for metric plans.
The system will arrange as many wall
sections or roof sections as possible onto a
single sheet. For larger scale models a printer
with a larger sheet size can be helpful. If any
wall surface, roof surface, or floor plan view
covers more than a sheet, it will print by
itself on the number of sheets required.
Models with large surfaces may require a lot
of paper.
12 Use Scale Wall Thickness - Remove
check from box to print walls to the

width specified in the edit box, ignoring the
scale width. The walls of your plan will
temporarily resize so that their interior and
exterior surfaces accurately match the
materials with which they will be modeled.
These changes can be most readily seen
when the floor plan view of your model
template is printed. Changing the wall
thickness is useful when producing a model
with an interior using material of the
specified thickness for walls.
13 Floor Thickness - Specify the
thickness of the material you will use

for the floor platform.
14 Shaded/Color - This selection
appearing here will depend on if you

have a color printer or not. Check this box to
print in grey scale or color.

Once the templates have been printed they
are ready to be assembled. You will need
scissors and an adhesive. You will also need
a rigid material that can be easily cut and
glued, such as thin cardboard or styrofoam,

to provide support for the 3D model.
925
Model
Maker
8 Outdoor Walls/Foundation Walls -
Floor Plan View Template

Begin by laying out the floor plan view,
which will be used as a layout for the entire
3D model. If your floor plan view template
printed on a number of sheets they should be
combined into one. Exterior and interior wall
surfaces should match throughout.
Adhere your complete floor plan view
template to a sturdy and dedicated surface to
provide support for your walls.
Walls
Walls should be cut and fixed to a rigid
backing so that they can stand on their own
and/or support the weight of the roof or
floors above them. How they are cut and
assembled will vary depending on the
desired appearance of the Model and how
they were printed. It may be helpful to take
the thickness of the rigid material being used
into consideration and override the scale
thickness of the walls so that it agrees with
your material thickness.
If your walls were resized in the Print
Model dialog you may see unwanted lines
926
between floors that should merge together

seamlessly. This is usually due to walls
whose exterior surfaces match but overall
thickness does not. You can prevent this by
checking Use Scale Wall Thickness, which
prevents walls from resizing. This is best if
you do not want to print the interior wall
surfaces, or are using a modeling material
that closely matches the scale thickness of
your walls.
Roofs
Roof planes are joined together when
possible before printing. For each roof
surface, the fascia and soffit surfaces are
attached at the eave, so that the least amount
of taping will produce the roof and adjoining
surfaces.
All flattened roof/fascia/soffit surfaces are
placed into a CAD detail named "Model
Detail". This is overwritten and updated each
time the roof group is printed for a particular
model. If the roof or portions of the roof need
to be reprinted, those pieces can be printed
from the detail.
Chapter 41:
Schedules
Chapter Overview
A schedule is essentially a large, tabbed, text
object with grid lines separating rows and
columns. Schedules are available for Doors,
Windows, Fixture, Furniture, and Electrical
items. A schedule can contain information
for one or all floors of your plan.
Chapter Contents
Schedule Defaults
Creating Schedules
Schedule Specification Dialog
Converting Schedules to Text
A Window Schedule Example
Once created, the schedule is updated

automatically whenever an object is created,
deleted, moved or otherwise altered.
Schedule Defaults
Schedule defaults can also be accessed by
selecting Edit> Default Settings...

from the menu. Click the "+" next to
Schedules to display the schedule subheadings. Select a subheading and click the
Edit... button to open the Schedule
Defaults dialog associated with your
selection.
double-clicking the Schedules

parent
button to open the Schedules Defaults
dialog.
Schedules
927
dialogs. The settings determine the initial

settings in the Schedule Specification
dialogs.
Individual schedules can be edited without
altering the default settings. See Schedule
The Schedule Defaults dialogs look the

same as the Schedule Specification
The defaults are stored with your plan. You

can create a template plan with defaults set
the way you like for future use. See
Creating Schedules
Schedules can be created in floor plan view
and in CAD detail windows.
In Floor Plan View

Create a schedule by clicking one of the
Schedule Tools
child buttons or by
selecting one of the corresponding options
from the Tools> Schedules menu. The
Schedule Specification dialog opens,
allowing you to control how the schedule
will display. See Schedule Specification

Dialog on page 928.
When you close the Schedule
Specification dialog, the schedule you
have just created will display.
In Layout
Schedules can be placed in plans or CAD
details. If you want a schedule to only appear
in a layout, create the schedule in an empty
CAD detail window and send it to layout.

Schedules can be edited in the Schedule
Specification dialog. To open the
Schedule Specification dialog for a
schedule, either select the schedule and click
928
the Open Object

edit button or doubleclick on the schedule itself using the Select
Objects
tool.
Text Tab
5
6
2
4
1 Columns to Include - Select the check
box for each column you want to

appear in the schedule. At least one column
must be checked to create a schedule.
Columns will display in their order of
appearance on this list. Columns may be
added or removed at any time by selecting
the schedule, clicking the Open Object

edit button, and selecting or clearing check
boxes. Many of the columns described below
are available only for some of the schedule
types.
labeled sequentially. This number may also

be used as all or part of the objects label.
Qty - Quantity of the items represented by
the row. The quantity of an item is dependent
on how much information about it is
displayed in the schedule. For example, if a
schedule only lists Number, Quantity and
Floor, all the windows on that floor would
appear with the same schedule number, even
though the windows might be different sizes
and types. The schedule does not show
enough information to distinguish them,
although the labels in floor plan view might.
Schedules
The Number and Qty columns are

unique in that they may be displayed on
either or both ends of a schedule.
Number - Describes the sequence of this

schedule entry. For example, the first
window in the schedule will be defined as
W01, and the rest of the windows will be
929
By simply displaying one more column, such

as Size, the two windows above are
separated by the schedule.
Be careful to have sufficient columns to
distinguish the objects. A 3040 fixed glass
window is not the same as a 3040 arch top
window, but they may appear the same in
the schedule if Description is not displayed.
Floor - Displays the floor for each item in the
schedule. This column is usually needed only
if the check box for All Floors is selected.
Size - Displays the window or door size in
feet-inches or millimeters, according to the
format defined on the Label tab. A 3640
window is 36"x40", with the dimension
order defined on the Label tab. Size does not
state units of measurement: they are implied.
Dimension - Displays the dimension of the
opening, including the units, in the format
Width x Height. If Include Type is selected
in the Label tab, the dimension is followed
by letters describing the object type. Size and
dimension are typically not used together, as
they provide similar information.
Width - Lists the width of an item.
Depth - Lists the depth of an item.
Height - Lists the height of an item.
R/O - Lists the rough opening size.
Attached To - Indicates what an electrical
object is attached to in electrical schedules.
Description - Displays the general
description of the object. This is the same
information as appears in the Item column of
the Components dialog. It includes the
type (double hung or ext., hinged); indicators
such as "ct" (circle top) or "at" (arched top);
930
and materials, if specified in the objects
Components dialog.
Drawer Pull - Lists the name of any attached

drawer pull hardware.
Door Pull - Lists the name of any attached
door pull hardware.
Hinge - Lists the name of any attached
hinge.
Header - Displays the dimensions and
quantity of header stock for each item.
Thickness - Displays the door thickness in
door schedules only.
Code - Lists the value entered in the Code
cell of the objects Components dialog.
Manufacturer - Lists manufacturer
information, if added in the objects
Components dialog.
Comments - Displays the information
entered in the Comments column of the
Components dialog.
Information in the Description, Code,
Manufacturer, and Comments columns is
edited in the objects Components dialogs.
Some objects have several rows, but the
schedule refers to only one. To find the
correct row, look at the Description column.
Often, although not always, the first item in
the ID column is the one the schedule refers
to: for doors, this is D1; for windows, W1;
for cabinets, C1; and so on.
Note: When editing a Components dialog,
double-click in a cell to edit it.
In addition to the default columns, the
Components dialog displays a column for
each subcategory defined under the
categories in the Preferences dialog. See

Categories Panel on page 113. Check any
of these to create a column for that
subcategorys information.
Objects to Include - Check the boxes for
objects you want to include in the schedule.
Multiple schedules can be created using
these filters as desired. See Text Tab For
Other Objects on page 931.
2 Character Height - Specify a height

for text in the schedule.
To specify a printed text size, click the

Scale... button to open the Printed Size
Input dialog
Glass Sliding Doors - Include sliding glass

doors. These may be included as part of a
window schedule if desired.
Pocket Doors - Include pocket doors.
Bifold Doors - Include bifold doors.
Garage Doors - Include garage doors.
Mulled Door Units - Include mulled door
units. If Treat as door is checked in the
Mulled Window Specification dialog, it
will be included here. See Options Tab for
For Windows
3 Transparent Background - Check this

box to make the schedule background
transparent, allowing items behind the
schedule to show through. If unchecked, the
schedule will have an opaque background
that blocks everything behind it.
4 Dont Rotate With Plan - Select the
check box to prevent the schedule from
rotating when Tools> Rotate View...

selected.
Sliding Doors - Include sliding doors.
is
5 Title - Enter a title for the schedule and

select the Show Title check box to
display the title at the top of the schedule.
6 Include From Floor - Specify the floor
whose objects display in the schedule.

The default is the current floor. Check All
Floors to include all floors in the schedule.
Standard Windows - Include any window

that is not a bay, box, bow, or mulled unit.
Bow Windows - Include bow windows.
Bay Windows - Include bay and box
windows.
Glass Sliding Doors - Include sliding glass
doors as part of a window schedule. Also
available for door schedules.
Mulled Window Units - Include mulled
window units. If Treat as door is unchecked
in the Mulled Window Specification dialog,
it will be included here. See Options Tab for
For Cabinets
Base Cabinets - Include base cabinets.
For Doors
Single Doors - Include single doors.
Double Doors - Include double doors.
Full Height Cabinets - Include full height

cabinets.
Other - Include other cabinet objects: soffits,
shelves and partitions.
931
Schedules
Wall Cabinets - Include wall cabinets.
Text Tab For Other Objects
For Fixtures
Plumbing - Include any fixtures with the
Appears in plumbing schedule option
checked in the Symbol Specification
dialog.
Appliances - Include any fixtures with the
Appears in appliance schedule option
checked in the Symbol Specification
dialog.
HVAC - Include any fixtures with the
Appears in HVAC schedule option checked
in the Symbol Specification dialog.
Indoor - Include any fixtures in the Fixtures
(Interior) library category that dont appear
in Plumbing, Appliances, or HVAC.
Outdoor - Include any fixtures in the
Fixtures (Exterior) library category that
dont appear in Plumbing, Appliances, or
HVAC.
932
Other - Include other fixture objects that do

not fall into any of the above Fixtures
categories.
For Furniture
Indoor - Include any furniture that is in the
Furniture (Interior) library.
Outdoor - Include any furniture that is in the
Furniture (Exterior) library.
Other - Include other furniture objects that
dont appear in Indoor or Outdoor.
For Electrical
Outlets - Include any electrical items that are
designated as outlets.
Switches - Include any electrical items that
are designated as switches.
Lights - Include any electrical items that are
designated as lights.
Other - Include any electrical items that are
not outlets, switches or lights.
Attributes Tab
1
2
3
4
the default layer. Click the drop down

list to select from all layers.
Click Define to open the Select CAD

Layer dialog and choose from all layers. See
Select CAD Layer Dialog on page 124.
Windows standard Color dialog. Use

the dialog to choose the desired line color.
default color for the specified layer.
different Font. The text styles Bold,

Underline, Italic, and Strikeout are
available.
4 Tabs - The edit box defines the number
of spaces from the left edge of the text

box at which each new column will begin.
The first column will always start at 0. In this
case, the second column (following the first
tab) starts 10 spaces in, the next at 20 spaces,
etc. Default tab settings can be se in the
schedule defaults. See Schedule Defaults
on page 927.
You can assign white if an object is to

exist but not display on the screen or in
printouts (must print with color on).
Label Tab
The Label tab of the Schedule
Specification dialog sets the type, size and
appearance of the labels that display in floor

plan view.
933
Schedules
1 Check Default to place the schedule on
2
3
1 Shape - There are six label shapes to
choose from. The size of the shape is

determined by the text it contains.
2 Size - Select which of the three formats
to use when displaying opening size.

This applies to doors and windows only and
will also affect the display in the Size column
of the door or window schedule.
3 Include Type - Select the check box to
If a shape is selected and Show Labels is

also selected, windows or doors will display
the shaped label; the schedule number; and
nothing else. All other label options, except
for Character Height and Initial Offset,
will have no effect.
append the Size and Dimensions

columns selected on the first tab with letters
that designate the opening type. For example,
3050DH describes a 3050 double hung
window.
4 No rotate with plan - Dont rotate the

label with the plan.
5 Include Schedule # - Displays the
schedule number in front of the size.
If no shape is selected and Show Labels is

also selected, window or door are labeled
according to the format defined on this tab and
the Label tab for the specific object.
934
6 Product Code Label - Replaces the
size with the Code information added

to Code column components dialog.
the Suppress labels check box in the Labels

tab of the objects Specification dialog.
Turning off the label will remove that item
from the window or door schedule.
7 Show Labels - Select the check box to
display object labels in floor plan view.

This will also turn on the appropriate layer
for the objects labels in the Layer Display
Options dialog.
You can suppress the display of the label for
an individual door or window by checking
8 Character Height - Specify the height
of characters (in inches or mm)

associated with the labels.
9 Label Text - Specify the leading
characters to be used for the label.

The Schedule to Text
edit button
displays when a schedule is selected.
Click this button to convert the selected
schedule to a tabbed text object. You can
then edit the schedule as text. When this is
done, the schedule will no longer be

automatically updated.
You can copy the text from the Text
Specification dialog and paste it
into other applications.
A Window Schedule Example
Schedules
The following is a brief example of how to

add additional information to a windows
schedule.
935
First, create the two subcategories in the

Preferences dialog. See Categories
Panel on page 113.
Next, create the window schedule with the
new subcategories set to display. See
Schedule Specification Dialog on page
928.
To add definitions, select the window in floor
plan view and click the Components
edit
button. Click the Add button two times, and
two rows of "accessories" will be added to the
component material list. For each accessory,
936
click in the SubCat column; choose a subcategory from the drop-down list; and rename the
Item from "accessory" to the actual material
information.
If you need a new subcategory, click Edit Sub
Categories, then use the subcategory when
you return to the Components dialog.
The window schedule will update to reflect
the new materials as soon as you click OK.
These materials will also be placed into any
material lists that you generate.
Materials Lists
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect can calculate a Materials List
in three ways: From All Floors, From Area,
or From Room. In addition, a polyline or
multiple polylines can be used to define areas
in a plan from which a materials list can be
generated.
Materials lists can then be created, edited,
and printed directly from the program. They
can also be exported as text, html or
Microsoft Excel format files for use in other
programs.
The Materials List is based on certain
assumptions which may not match your
building style. Chief Architect makes no representation as to the accuracy or reliability of
the Materials List generated by Chief Architect. Always compare the Materials List with a
manual take-off before providing a quote or
ordering material for a job.
Chapter Contents
Creating an Accurate Materials List

Working With the Materials List
Calculate From All Floors
Calculate From Area
Calculate From Room
Materials Polyline
The Master List
Editing Columns
Editing Materials Lists
Material List Display Options Dialog
The Components Dialog
Managing Materials Lists
Manufacturers
Exporting the Material List
937
Materials
Lists
Chapter 42:
Creating an Accurate Materials List

als is generally better with manual framing, since each framing piece is
calculated based on the model. When no
framing has been built the framing is calculated based on rules that will likely
result in a different amount of material.
In order to take full advantage of Chiefs

materials list capabilities there are several
things to keep in mind.
938
The accuracy of your materials list is tied

directly to the accuracy of your model. It
takes more than just making your model
look right to generate an accurate materials list. If, for example, you use CAD
lines to draw an item on a floor plan, that
item will not show up in the materials
list. A better way would be to use a symbol or some other structural element.
Framing items will be added to the materials list even if you havent done any
framing. The accuracy of framing materi-
Keep in mind that certain "tricks", such

as using soffits to represent items, which
arent directly supported in Chief Architect can result in items being placed in the
materials list that you didnt expect.
The more work you put into making
your model right, the more accurate
your materials list will be.

The materials list is based on accumulating
quantities of various items that appear in
your model. There are several different ways
to generate a list, each described below. The
materials list generated from each method
behaves the same; only the content will vary.
When a materials list is generated, it takes a
snapshot of the materials as they would be
given the current state of the model. You can
save a materials list with your plan; however,
it will not update to include changes that you
make after the list is generated. Create a new
materials list to reflect any changes.
When a materials list is generated, it uses
your preferences for which columns are
shown and the order of those columns. See
Material List Panel on page 110.
When you close the materials list window,
you will be asked whether you want to keep
the materials list. You can name it or throw it
away.
Saved materials lists can be accessed via the

Materials Lists dialog which allows you
to edit, delete, or rename them. See
Managing Materials Lists on page 950.
You can control which columns will display
and the order that they are displayed. See
Materials Lists on page 125 and Material
List Display Options Dialog on page 947.
A materials list can be generated at any time.
It is not necessary to wait until the plan is
complete. Comparisons can be made by
generating the materials list with and without
a proposed modification.
If you are designing an addition and the
floor, ceiling, and roof information is
needed, create the building design to completion and use File> Save As to create a copy
of the plan under a different name. Then
delete the existing structure, leaving only the
building addition. (Be sure to Build Floors/
Ceilings afterward.) You can then generate
the Materials List for the entire plan by using
the Calculate From All Floors option.
Calculate From All Floors

Choose Tools> Materials List> Calculate From All Floors
to
generate a materials list for the entire model.
Materials lists calculated From All Floors
include the framing information if framing
has been built.
Any changes made to the model, after a
materials list is generated, will not be
included in that list. To update the Materials
List, reselect Tools> Materials List> Calculate From All Floors
Materials Lists can be long. Only a portion of

the list may display on your screen. Use the
scroll bar on the right to scroll through the
complete list. You may move the pointer to
certain cells, in order to make changes.
939
Materials
Lists
Calculate From Room

To calculate the Materials List for a
room, you must first select the room.
See Selecting a Room on page 191. Then
choose Tools> Materials List> Calculate
From Room
. This button can also be
selected from either the room edit toolbar or
the Materials List child buttons. A materials
list is created for only the contents of that
room: wall materials will not be included.
Calculate From Area

Calculate from Area produces a
materials list for the portion of a plan
within a material list polyline on a single
floor.
Material list polylines can be created in two
different ways:
In Architectural mode, select the Calculate from Area

child button and
draw a rectangle around an area in your
plan. When the mouse button is released,
a material list for the area will display.
Material list polylines created in this way
are not displayed in floor plan view after
the list is created.
In CAD mode, use the Rectangular

Polyline
child tool to draw a polyline
around an area of your plan. Click the
Convert Polyline
edit button to open
the Convert Polyline dialog. Select
Material List Polyline and click OK to
open the Material List Polyline
Specification dialog. Material list
polylines created in this way are dis-
940
played in floor plan view after the list is

created.
First select the polyline, then select Calculate from Area from the menu and the
materials list is produced for items within the
polyine on the current floor. If you select the
polyline and then instead select Calculate
from All Floors from the menu, the
materials list is produced for items within the
polyline on all floors. The amount or portion
of items included in the materials lists is as
described above under Calculate from
Area.
You can group-select multiple polylines
before selecting Calculate from Area or
Calculate from All Floors by holding down
the Shift key in Select Objects
mode.
Materials are calculated for each polyline
and added into the total. If two polylines
intersect, materials in that area are counted
twice. Normally the only time polylines
would intersect is when Materials Polylines,
described in the next section, are used. In this
case each of the intersecting polylines would
specify different materials categories.
Materials Polyline
To create a materials polyline, select
Tools> Materials List> Materials
Polyline. Draw a rectangular polyline
in floor plan view around the area to be
calculated. Select the polyline and click the
four foot square area, the materials list will

show 12 linear feet of joist material. This can
be useful for additions and/or remodels.
Calculate Materials List

edit button. A
materials list is created for items within the
rectangle on the current floor.
A materials polyline can specify which

materials categories, such as General,
Foundation, or Masonry, will be calculated
within this polyline prior to the generation of
the materials list.
Portions of walls, floors, and framing that are

inside the designated area will be placed on
the materials list. Items such as cabinets,
furniture, studs, windows and doors will
appear in the materials list only if their center
is within the materials polyline.
Large objects such as walls, framing, floor/
ceiling covering, and floor and ceiling joists
are split at the area boundaries so that only
portions of them appear on the materials list.
A few objects, such as floor joists, which
show as pieces in a full materials list, must
be listed in footage to accomodate this. For
example, if three 16-foot joists fall within a
Categories
To do this:
1.
Select and open the polyline.
2.
Check the categories to be included in

the materials calculation. Categories not
checked for this polyline will be
ignored. Since you can group-select
polylines for materials calculation, one
polyline might show only Masonry and
Framing where another might include
only roofing. Everything else could be
checked for another polyline.
The Master List

Any materials list generated will
access the Master List for price and
supplier information.
The Master List is referenced by all plan
files. It allows you to manage supplier,
manufacturer, price and other information for
all of the materials you use.
When a materials list is calculated, the
program refers to the Master List and checks
for a record for each item. If one is available,
it will be used to provide missing

information such as the Supplier, Price,
Code and/or Comment for that item. If a
record is not available one is added to the
Master List. Whatever information is
available at that time will be placed into the
materials list.
You can update information in the Master
List by selecting one or more rows in a
materials list and selecting Tools> Update to
Master.
941
Materials
Lists
Materials Polyline
You can also edit the materials list directly to

add or modify price information for
particular items.
If the information in your Master List
changes, you can update items in a materials
list by selecting the row or rows that you
want to update and the select Tools> Update
from Master from the Materials List menu.
Note: If the Master List contains more than
one record for an item, the program will reference the last one entered. You can override
this by defining one specific entry as the
default. This is achieved by clicking on the
check box in the Def column.
Chief Architect allows you to have more than

one Master List. Only one can be active, and
only the active list will be updated with new
information. You can specify which Master
942
List is current and active on the Master List

panel of the Preferences dialog. See
Master List Panel on page 112. Select
Choose to select a new file for the Master
List File.
Choose Tools> Materials List> Master list
to view the current Master List.
Note: You should back up the master materials list (mmaster.mat) you are using. You
can access and back it (them) up using Windows Explorer.
Displaying the Master List

To open the Master List, select Tools> Materials List> Master List; click the Master
List
child button; or press Ctrl+M on
your keyboard.
Materials
Lists
The Master List
The Master Window is almost identical to a

Materials List, but has a few additional
controls to help with viewing.
The category menu at the top of the window
lets you limit the Master List to only show a
particular category or display all categories.
When viewing the Master List, you can
adjust the width of columns as well as
control which columns are included in the
spreadsheet. These settings will be
remembered the next time the Master List is
opened. For more, see Material List Display
Searching the Master List

Use the Find field near the bottom of the
window to search for text in the Master List.
It starts from the currently selected cell and

moves to the right, then moves down to the
next row starting at the left column, and so
on, until it finds an instance of the text you
entered. If the text is not found, you will hear
a beep. The status bar at the bottom displays
how many entries are being displayed.
Editing the Master List

New records cannot be inserted directly into
the Master List, but they can be deleted or
modified. New records are added to the
Master List when a Materials List is
generated if a matching record is not found.
943
You can also use the Tools> Update to

Master option to add edited records from a
Materials List.
will highlight. Choose Edit> Delete, click

the Delete
edit button, or press the
key on your keyboard.
Del
To delete a row from the Master List, click

the row number at the far left. The entire row
Editing Columns
The columns in a materials list, the
Components dialog and the Master List
are all very similar. Some columns dont
appear in all places, however. Refer to the
following for a description of the capabilities
of each column.
For columns that can be edited by typing in
text; double click to cell to begin editing.
ID - This column displays an automatically
generated identifier for each entry. If you
click on this column in the components
dialog or in the materials list dialog you can
change the category of an item.
Use - This column appears only in the Master
List and Components dialog. It is a check
box that indicates whether the item will be
displayed in a generated materials list. If this
is unchecked in either place the item will not
show up in the materials list. This is very
useful in cases where Chief will generate
several items but you really only want 1 item
to be displayed because it will be purchased
as a single unit.
Sub Cat. - This column allows you to choose
the sub category. Sub categories are defined
on the Materials> Categories panel of the
Preferences dialog. You can also type in
the sub category directly by double clicking
on the cell.
944
Flr - This column displays the floor that the

displayed material came from. It is only
visible in a materials list and is not editable
Size - This column displays the size of the
item being displayed. You can edit this item
in a components list and a materials list. If
you want to get the un-edited text back
simply delete the text you typed in. If you
want to blank it out simply type a single
blank character.
Description - This column displays a short
description of the item. It is editiable in the
same way as the Size column.
Quantity - This column only appears in the
Master List. It can be used to enter a quantity
discount. Type in the number of items
required to obtain the discounted price in the
Master List. If at least that many items show
up for a material entry, the price, supplier,
and other information will be recorded.
Count - This is the quantity of an item as
calculated by Chief Architect. In a materials
list this cannot be edited. In a components
dialog it can be edited for added accessories.
Extra - This is available in the components
dialog and in the materials list. It is used to
provide extra units of the item. When this is
edited in the components list it is added to
the count column in the materials list.
Un - This displays the units of an item. It is

not available in the master list. When you
change the units of an item it will update the
quantity to reflect the change. For
accessories in the components dialog you can
choose any unit that you want. The quantity
wont be updated when editing the units of
an accessory in the components dialog.
Additional unit conversions can be added in
the General> Unit Conversions panel of the
preferences dialog.
Price - This is the price per unit of an item. If
this is not entered in the components dialog it
is taken from the Master List.
% Markup - This is used to mark up the
price of an item as entered. If this is not
entered in the components dialog it is taken
from the Master List.
Labor - This is the cost of labor per unit
required to install an item. If this is not
from the Master List.
Equip - This is the rental or other cost of
equipment per unit to install an item. If this is
not entered in the components dialog it is
taken from the Master List.
Tot. Cost - The calculated total cost. This
uses the Count, Un, Price, %Markup, Labor
and Equip colums to calculate the cost. The
formula used is
Supplier - The supplier of an item. If this is

not entered in the components dialog it is
taken from the Master List. Once more than
one supplier has been added to the master list
for a given item, double-click the supplier
field for that items row in a materials list to
activate a menu of all the suppliers which
have been added. Choosing a different
supplier will reference a different record in
the Master List.
Def - This column is only available in the
Master List. It indicates which item is to be
used as the default if more than one item is
available. Click on this column to change the
default.
Code - Enter a code to specify an item. This
could be a SKU number of the supplier for
example. This can also be displayed in a
schedule or used as a label. If this is not
from the Master List. See Schedules on
page 927.
Comment - You can add additional text here.
This can also be displayed in a schedule. If
Manufacturer - This column can be used to
specify the manufactuer of an item if desired.
This can also be displayed in a schedule. If
(Count + Extra) * Price * (1 + (%

Markup/100)) + ((Count + Extra) * Labor)
+ ((Count + Extra) * Equip)
If a column is not displayed then 0 is used for
the value of that column with the exception
of Count and Price, which are always used in
the calculation even if they are not displayed.
945
Materials
Lists
Editing Columns
Editing Materials Lists

Adding Information
You can enter information in the Price,
Supplier, Code and Comment columns for
each item. Once Master List information
exists for a particular item.You wont have to
enter this information. The system can load
the Price, Supplier, Code and Comment
fields for subsequent Materials Lists. The
combination of Item, Size, and Supplier are
used to identify unique materials in the
Master List.
Adding a supplier and price for any item is
very straightforward. While in a materials
list, Click in the cell, then enter the
information. When the information is
correct, highlight the entire row and select
Tools> Update to Master from the
Materials List menu. The new entry will be
added to the master list.
You can switch between several existing
suppliers for a given item by double-clicking
on the supplier field in a Materials List. A
drop down button appears to the left of it.
Click the button to display a menu of all the
suppliers for that item and select one.
When a Materials List is calculated, the
program searches the Master List for the
Price, Supplier, Code information for each
item. This information, marked as default in

the Master list, is used in the Materials List.
Copying
Sections of the Materials List can be copied
and then pasted into a text box or into a word
processing program or spreadsheet program
using the standard Windows Copy, Cut and
Paste commands.
You can also copy and paste items that can
normally be edited by selecting a block of
cells.
Changing the Font

Open the Font panel of the Preferences
dialog to change the font used for the
Materials List.
Click Materials, then click the Select Font
button.
Choose a new font from the list of those
available. This will change the default
Materials List font for all plan files, not just
for the current plan.
If you have problems with the Materials List
printing too small, try changing the font.
Displaying Objects in the Materials List

Both the inclusion of objects in the materials
list and the display of objects in the materials
list can be controlled.
946
Controlling Object
Display by Layer
The inclusion of objects in the materials list
can be controlled by selecting Tools>
Display Options
Options Dialog.
to open the Display
The display of objects in materials lists can

also be controlled in the Mat column of the
Layer Display Options dialog. An "M" in
this column indicates that objects in a layer
will be included in the materials list. Click in
the cell to add or remove the "M". See
Material List
Display Options Dialog
When a materials list is open, click the
Display Options
button or select
Tools> Display Options from the Materials
List menu to open the Material List
Display Options dialog for the materials
or the Master List. These options correspond
with the options in the Master List panel of
the Preferences dialog. See Master List
Panel on page 112.
Each plan file can be set to display materials

according to their category. Check boxes for
any columns you want to display. The lists
will display categories in the order they are
presented here. These categories display in
the ID columns of the Material and Master
List.
The Materials List changes automatically to
reflect these changes as soon as the OK
button is selected.
Note: The display of the category is suppressed, but the information is still part of the
materials list. If the materials list is exported,
the information related to the suppressed categories will be exported as well.
Subcategories
The materials list and Master List come with
predefined categories. For each of these
categories you can define any number of
subcategories. Subcategories are defined in
the Categories panel in the Preferences
dialog. See Categories Panel on page 113.
Subcategories can be specified for any item
in the Materials List or Components
dialog. Once a subcategory is defined, it can
be selected from the drop down list in the
Type column.
A subcategory consists of a code and a
description. The code can be any sequence of
characters, up to 12 characters in length. The
description is how you want to label, or
describe the sub-category. For example:
LKS Lockset
Subcategories are used when creating door
and window schedules. When creating a
schedule, you could, for example choose to
see the lockset for all doors and windows in
947
Materials
Lists
Displaying Objects in the Materials List
the schedule. If a door or window has a

material with the LKS "Lockset"
subcategory, any text in the item field will be
shown in the schedule under the lockset
column. You would typically add an
Accessory with a LKS subcategory to a door
or window to add a lockset to a door or
window. See Creating Schedules on page
928.
Move Up - Click this button to change the

order of the selected columns. This will
move them up in the list. The order that items
appear in this list is the order that they will
appear when the Materials List is displayed.
Move Down - Click this button to change the
order of the selected columns. This will
move the slected items down in the list.
Options Tab
Columns Tab
1
2
1 Check Restrict floor and select the
floor to restrict Materials List to. To

restore it to showing all floors, remove the
check. This only affects the Materials List
Calculated From All Floors.
Check to define which columns to display in
the Materials List. You can suppress the
columns display by removing the check next
to the column name.
2 If all the supplies for a job will be
purchased from the same supplier,

restricting the supplier saves a lot of time
Check Restrict supplier to restrict it, then
choose the supplier from the list.

You can open the Components
dialog by selecting an object and then
clicking the Components
edit
948
button. The Components dialog can also

be opened from the contextual menu.
Materials
Lists
Editing the Components Dialog
Accessories
Besides editing and adding information for

items in the Materials List and Master List,
you can edit and add information directly for
some items through the Components
dialog. The Components dialog for an
item is basically the Materials List entry for
an individual item or group of items.
In the Components dialog you can add

additional Materials List entries for the item
being edited. The additional Materials List
entries are called Accessories and are saved
with the item. Accessories added to an item
are embedded in the item and will display in
the Materials List.
Once the dialog is open you can edit it just as

you would a Materials List or Master List.
Entering specific Price, Supplier,
Manufacturer, Comments or Type will
embed that information into the item itself.
When that item is copied, even into a
different plan, all the information stays with
the copy as well. This information will go
into the Materials List.
To create a new accessory:
Components information can also be edited

for library items. When an item in a library is
placed into a plan the components
information goes along with it.
1.
Select an object and click the

Components
Components dialog.
2.
Click the Add button and a new line will

be added to the spreadsheet.
3.
The new entry will be given an item

name of Accessory#. You can edit this
and give it any item name you like.
4.
You can also edit all of the other columns for accessory items, except for the
ID field.
949
5.
To remove an accessory, click on any

part of the accessories information and
click the Delete
edit button.
For a specific example on how this is

applied, see A Window Schedule Example
on page 935.
Managing Materials Lists

To open the Material Lists dialog,
choose Tools> Materials List>
Materials List Management... or click the
Materials List Management
child tool.
Done - Click this to close the dialog.

Help - Click this to get help.
Edit - Click this to open the selected material
list. Double clicking a materials list is
equivalent.
Delete - Click this to delete the selected
materials list.
Rename - Click this to bring up the Rename
Material List dialog.
Manufacturers
Select Tools> Material Lists>
Manufacturers to open the
Manufacturers dialog.
The Manufacturers dialog contains contact

information for the manufacturers whose
products appear in Chief Architects Library.

Any Materials List can be exported into a
text (.txt) file which can be opened directly
by most spreadsheet programs. From the
950
Materials List or Master Materials List,

select File> Export Material List. The
Material Export Options dialog opens.
1
3
2
4
1 Tab Delimited (TXT) - Select this
option to create a text file with a tab

between each field entry in the Materials
List, and a carriage return between each row.
2 Comma Delimited (CSV) - Select this
option to create a text file with a

comma between each field entry in the
Materials List and a carriage return between
3 Excel (XLS) - Select this option to
create a Microsoft Excel format file.
4 HTML - Select this option to create an
html file that you can view with your

web browser.
5 No Column Headers - Check this box
to prevent column headings from

appearing in the first row of the text file.
6 Run Default Spreadsheet/Editor -
Check this box to immediately open the

exported file with the program specified on
your computer.
5
7
Materials
Lists
Estimating Software
You can export the Materials List to a word
processor or spreadsheet program to arrange
it in your estimating format. You can also
export the Materials List to a number of
commercial estimating programs in whose
database you would keep your current
pricing, labor costs, markups, etc. and be
able to generate many different reports based
on this data.
If you are purchasing an estimating software
program, make sure in advance that the
program supports the direct import of the
Chief Architect Materials List.
Any questions regarding estimating software
packages and how they interact with Chief
Architect should be directed toward the
company providing the estimating software.
Chief Architect is unable to provide any
technical support for third party programs.
7 Export Version 8 Columns Only -
Check this box to limit the export to

only those columns that would have been
exported by version 8. This is useful if you
are using a program that expects the file to be
in this format.
951
952
Appendix A
Tech
Support
Technical Support
Services
Chief Architect is committed to providing
world-class technical support and training to
complement our professional products. Our
support professionals are eager to work with
you to make certain your program is
functioning as designed.
Although the primary function of technical
support is to make sure your program is
functioning correctly and to help you quickly
resolve problems that prevent its normal use,
our Technical Support staff is trained in the
use of Chief Architect and will be happy to

answer basic questions about how to find or
use a particular function of Chief Architect.
In addition to technical support, Chief
Architect has assembled a team of certified
trainers to offer instruction in using the
program. You can access our trainers in
several ways. Chief Architect offers one-onone personal tutor sessions; online training
sessions; and classroom seminars.
Reference and Training Resources

Chief Architect offers a variety of reference
and training options in addition to the
resources that come standard with the
program.
Help Database
The Chief Architect Technical Support Help
Database at www.chiefarchitect.com contains a variety of articles describing how to
resolve common technical problems and
achieve specific design goals. The Help
Database can be referred to again and again
at your convenience.
Video Training
Chief Architect offers a video CD training
series and toolkits that contain in-depth
training on a wide range of topics from
beginning to advanced experience levels. For
more information about these products, visit
our Web site: www.chiefarchitect.com.
Interactive Training
If you have questions about how to use Chief
Architect, consider contacting our training
department for a personal tutoring session.
953
Personal tutoring sessions are an excellent

way to learn how to use the program,
providing one-on-one interaction with a
certified Chief Architect trainer via the
Internet. Unlike a telephone call to Technical
Support, a personal tutoring session lets you
follow along with the trainer and see what is
happening on your computer screen. Discuss
topics that interest you and learn how to
accomplish your specific design goals.
Seminars
Throughout the year, Chief Architect
conducts training seminars in various
locations around the United States and
Canada. Learn about upcoming sessions on

the Internet at: www.chiefarchitect.com.
User Forum
Our ChiefTalk User Forum is a great place to
discuss and exchange ideas with other Chief
Architect users. Here you can post questions;
read discussions from other users; and post
suggestions to improve our product. In
addition to our regular users, you will find
that from time to time, our engineering and
support teams monitor the forum and provide
input and discussion on current topics. This
resource is available without charge at
www.chiefarchitect.com/chieftalk.
Before Contacting Technical Support

Before contacting Technical Support, take a
moment to see if the answer to your question
is found in the Reference Manual, tutorials,
training CDs, or in our on-line Help
Database. When you contact us, Technical
Support will refer you to these resources if
the answer can be found there.
Look up items related to your question in

the index of the Chief Architect Reference Manual. This manual will assist
you in resolving most "how to" questions.
Click Help> Index in Chief Architect to

access a comprehensive index of help
topics.
954
Refer to the Tutorial CDs included with

Chief Architect, which answers many
"how to" questions.
Visit our Technical Support Help Database at www.chiefarchitect.com which
contains articles describing how to
resolve common technical problems.
The Help Database also includes a

wealth of articles describing how to
accomplish many design goals. Use the
How Do I Solution Finder to locate
articles of interest to you.
If you have a question about how best to

accomplish a certain design task, you
may find the users at the ChiefTalk user
forum a valuable resource for information and advice.
Installation Issues
The following are common reasons for
installation failure of Chief Architect and
other software:
1.
Anti-virus software is enabled and interfering with installation. Anti-virus software is the number one cause of
installation failures for any type of software. Refer to the documentation for
your anti-virus software for details on

how to disable the software and reenable it once installation is complete.
if the problem is specific to Chief Architect,

try the following:
2.
The recommended minimum system

requirements are not met.
1.
Begin by clicking on the Windows

"Start" button, and select "Printers".
3.
The CD has fingerprints, scratches, or

other defects. Sometimes a small fingerprint can prevent the program from
installing. Clean the CD with soft cotton
cloth that will not cause scratching on
the CD. Avoid using paper products on
CDs.
2.
Right-click on the printer that is not

functioning properly in the "Printers"
folder.
3.
Click on "Properties" in the menu that

displays.
4.
On the "General" tab, click the "Print

Test Page" button.
If you see visible cracking on a CD, do

not insert it in your CD ROM drive.
Cracked CD's can fly apart and cause
damage to your CD drive.
Refer to the on-line Help Database for
solutions to common installation problems.
If the answer to your question is not found
there, contact our Technical Support
department for assistance.
Hardware Lock Not Recognized

If your hardware lock is not recognized on
startup, the Hardware Lock
Troubleshooter can be launched. The
Troubleshooter can diagnose and provide
solutions to most common problems with
hardware locks. The Troubleshooter can also
be launched manually by selecting Help >
Hardware Lock Troubleshooter.
Printing Problems
Printing problems fall into two main
categories: problems that prevent the printer
from working in any program; and problems
printing from Chief Architect. To determine
If the printer does not produce a test page,

the problem is not one that Chief Architect
Technical Support can solve. Follow these
suggestions:
Check the connection between the computer and the printer.
Check your printer documentation for

troubleshooting printer problems.
Contact your printer's manufacturer or

check their Web site for support information.
Your printer manufacturer is the best source

for solving these types of problems. Chief
Architect Technical Support will not be able
to help diagnose and solve these types of
printing problems.
If you determine that the printer is working
but continue having difficulty printing from
Chief Architect, refer to Printing &
Plotting on page 883. Chief Architect 10.0
has many new features and enhancements; as
a result, techniques that were used in prior
versions may not work in this current
version.
Make sure that you use Print Preview before
printing. Print Preview will show you how
955
Tech
Support
Before Contacting Technical Support
the sheet is scaled to your drawing. If the

drawing is not on the drawing sheet onscreen, it will not be on the sheet when you
print.
For more information on how to set up and
use the enhanced printing functions in Chief
Architect 10, see Printing & Plotting on
page 883.
Make sure that your scaling is correct for the
paper size. If the plan is much smaller or
much larger than the print preview then you
may need to change your print scaling
settings. See Printing to Scale on page 892.
The online Help Database is another source
of solutions to common printing problems.
Our Technical Support specialists post new
articles periodically to help you resolve any
problems you encounter.
Error Messages
It is important that abnormal errors be
reported to Chief Architect Technical
Support so that we can identify and resolve
any problems. Windows XP error reports do
not get sent to us: the only way we can find
out about an error message that you
encounter is if you report it to us by e-mail or
telephone.
The content of an error message is useful in
diagnosing its cause. If you get an error
message, read it carefully and write down the

error number and the exact text of the error
message.
If you click the Print Screen key on your
keyboard, you can capture a picture of the
error message. Open a new word processing
document or e-mail message and choose
Edit> Paste to paste a copy of the error
message into the document for later
reference.
If you encounter the error more than once,
make a note of the steps that you did just
prior to getting the message.
Before you report an error, check the Help
Database to see if the error is already
documented by typing the error message or
part of the error message into the search
form. Most common error messages have a
known cause and simple resolution.
Finally, check to see if there are program
updates available. These updates are
provided free for the current version of Chief
Architect and contain enhancements and
other changes that allow the program to
perform at an optimum level. From within
Chief Architect, select Help> Download
Program Updates... to visit our web site,
www.chiefarchitect.com, and follow the
instructions.
If You Need to Contact Technical Support

There are several things you can do to ensure
a speedy answer to your question when you
contact Technical Support.
956
When you first encounter a problem or

error message, copy the exact wording of
the message or a detailed description of

the problem. This will help us isolate the
problem and provide you with a solution
as quickly as possible.
If You Need to Contact Technical Support
When placing a call to Technical Support,

be at the computer or work station that is
experiencing the problem and have Chief
Architect running. If you do not have
access to the problem computer at the
time of the call, the technician may be
unable to reproduce the issue and/or suggest a remedy that can be implemented
and verified immediately.
Be prepared to reproduce the problem

when you contact us. If the problem cannot be reproduced, there is a reduced
chance that we will be able to resolve the
problem on your first phone call.
Before contacting Technical Support,

check to see if there are program updates
available for download. Our engineering
team periodically creates updates to the
program to resolve functionality or program issues that were unknown at the
time of release. These updates are provided free of charge for the current
released version and can be accessed by
clicking on Help > Download Program
Updates.
Before contacting Technical Support,

select Help> About Chief Architect
and make a note of the serial number and
the exact version of Chief Architect you
are using. Technical support is available
to the owners of software licenses. When
you contact Technical Support, be prepared to verify that you are the owner of
the software license.
Contacting Technical Support

Chief Architect's world-class technical
support is available Monday through Friday
from 6 AM to 5 PM Pacific Standard Time
and can be reached at (208) 292-3399 or by

e-mail at support@chiefarchitect.com.
Chief Architect provides free e-mail and
telephone support for the latest Full version
of Chief Architect. Free e-mail and telephone
support for the Base version of Chief
Architect is provided for the first 90 days
after purchase. If you wish to extend your
telephone support for the Base version,
contact the Chief Architect Sales
Department. See the Getting Started Guide
for contact information.
Web Support
Chief Architect has a variety of support
resources available on our Web site. These
include our Technical Support Help
Database; the How do I? Solution
Finder; downloadable program updates; and
ways to contact our Technical Support
department. To access these resources, visit:
Our support team is happy to assist you in
finding the best resource to answer your
questions, and can resolve most issues in just
a few minutes. In order to allow us to quickly
answer your calls, we ask that you limit
yourself to one question per support call.
E-mail Support
Questions can be e-mailed to the Technical
Support department. To send an e-mail, visit
the Technical Support section of our Web site
and use the e-mail submission form. This
route ensures that your e-mail will be
delivered to the first available support
professional. E-mailing an individual
specialist directly is not always a good idea,
957
Tech
Support
since that person may not be available to

answer your e-mail in a timely manner.
Submitting Plans
If Chief Architect asks for a plan file to be
submitted via e-mail, your plan will be used
internally to answer your question and will
not be released to anyone outside of our
office.
In some cases, you may need to submit a
plan to Technical Support for evaluation. If
you are asked to submit a plan, follow these
steps.
958
1.
Create a folder on your desktop with

your name in the folder name.
2.
Open the Chief Architect plan or layout

file in question.
3.
Select File> Export Entire Plan from

the menu.
4.
Unless asked to do otherwise, select

Export Plan Files Only in the Export
Entire Plan dialog.
5.
Click OK and browse to the folder you

created on the desktop in Step 1 in the
Browse for Folder dialog.
6.
Click OK and the files will be created in

that folder.
7.
Create a zipped folder out of the folder

and submit it via the web submission
form or follow the directions given you
by Technical Support.
Telephone Support
Our support team is committed to answering
your questions as quickly as possible. There
are times when we get more calls than
expected and you may have to wait a few
minutes before speaking to a technician.
Your call is important to us and will be
answered as quickly as possible in the order
in which it was received.
Appendix B
Whats New
in 10.0
Whats New in
Version 10.0
Upgrading Customers - What You Need To Know

Be sure to read this section before opening any plans created in earlier versions
of Chief Archtiect.
Before opening any plans created in earlier versions of Chief Architect, it is important to be
aware of some significant changes and the affect they may have on your plans. There are many
new features in Chief Architect Version 10 and there are many existing features that have
changed. Some of these changes will affect the way you use Chief Architect so it is very
important to review them carefully. We have provided the following checklist of what you
should do as an upgrade customer to help migrate your plans to Chief Architect Version 10.
More information about each of these steps can be found after the following checklist.
959
Getting Started Check List

1.
Check for any available program updates.
2.
Migrate your custom and/or third party library files.
3.
Migrate your custom graphics files.
4.
Setup your legacy plan conversion preferences before opening any plan files.
a. Set your legacy text and dimension conversion fonts.
b. Set your legacy plan and layout page setup information.
c. Set your legacy layer conversion settings.
5.
Review the rest of the program preferences.
6.
Migrate your custom template plan and layout files.
7.
Setup your custom toolbar configurations.
8.
Review the new features list and familiarize yourself with the changes.
a. Text and arrows attached to text.
b. Layers and the Layer Display Options dialog.
c. File Management.
d. Materials are now stored in the library.
e. CAD and Grid Snaps.
f. Printing and Page Setup.
g. 3D Layer Control.
h. Transform/Replicate dialog.
i. Roof Planes are moved up and down using the Transform/Replicate dialog.
j. Show Layout button is not in default toolbar configuration.
9.
Review the Chief Architect Tutorial Videos.
10. Check www.chiefarchitect.com for more information.
1. Check for any available program updates - Program updates often contain many
improvements over the original release version and we highly recommend using the most
current version available. By the time you have received and installed your copy of Chief
Architect Version 10, a program update will probably already be available. The first time you
run Chief Architect, the program will automatically check for any program updates. At any
time after this, you can manually check for updates by selecting the menu option Help>
Download Program Updates. You can also check for program updates by going directly to the
960
2. Migrate your custom and/or third party library files - The Chief Architect installer
should find any custom library files from previous versions and ask you if you want to copy
them into your Version 10 Libraries folder. If you install Version 10 on a different machine than
your previous version, the installer will not be able to find your custom library files. If the
installer does not ask you to copy your old library files or if you decide that you only want to
bring some of them forward into Version 10, you can always migrate them forward manually.
To manually migrate any library files to Version 10, you only need to copy the library files
(these will usually have the .alb file extension) from your previous Libraries folder into your
Version 10 Libraries folder using Windows Explorer. You should avoid copying any of the
library files that were installed with your previous version of Chief Architect because these
files have all been updated for Version 10 and the new ones should include everything that was
previously available. You might notice that the library files that get installed with Chief
Architect Version 10 will no longer be installed in the Libraries folder. These files will be
installed in a new folder called Core Libraries and you should not install or copy any of your
custom libraries into the Core Libraries folder. More information about transferring third party
library files can be found at, Third Party Libraries on page 564.
3. Migrate your custom graphics files - If you had any custom graphics files, including
textures, images or backdrops, that you were using in a previous version of Chief Architect,
you will need to manually copy them using Windows Explorer to use them in Version 10. Copy
any custom texture files from your previous Textures folder to your Version 10 Textures folder.
Copy any custom image files from your previous Images folder to your Version 10 Images
folder. Copy any custom backdrop files from your previous Backdrops folder to your Version
10 Backdrops folder. We recommend that you keep all of your custom graphics files in a
subfolder that has a unique name to keep them separate from the graphics files that are installed
with Chief Architect. We have provided folders specifically for this purpose, called My
Textures, My Images, and My Backdrops. You may note that your texture and image files will
not automatically show up in the Library Browser in Version 10. Material and image objects
are now stored in the library instead of just storing the graphics files. There are several new
tools available for creating material and image objects in your library either one at a time or as
a whole group. For information about converting images, see Creating Images on page 831.
For information about converting textures and materials, see Creating Materials on page 598.
4. Setup your legacy plan conversion preferences before opening any plan files - We
have provided several different preference settings that will help you control how your legacy
plans are migrated into Chief Architect Version 10. You may want to do some experiments with
these settings so that you fully understand how they affect your older plans when they are read
into Version 10.
a. Set your legacy text and dimension conversion fonts - Default text and dimension
fonts can now be set up on an individual plan basis. You should set your Legacy Text
961
Whats New
in 10.0
Chief Architect Web site at www.chiefarchitect.com and navigating to the program updates
page. Note that you will only be able to download an update if you have internet access.
Conversion font and your Legacy Dimension Conversion fonts in your preferences
before opening any old plans. Use the same settings here that you had in your preferences for your previous version of Chief Architect so that your text and dimensions
will look the same. For more information, see Font Panel on page 97.
b. Set your legacy plan and layout page setup information - Page Setup information
can now be setup on an individual plan basis. Use the Page Setup preference for legacy plans and layouts so that your plans and layouts are setup the same way they were
in your previous version. Note: You should make sure you leave the scale for layouts
at 1 to 1. For more information, see Text and Page Setup Panel on page 99.
c. Set your legacy layer conversion settings - Significant changes have been made to
improve the setup and control of layers in Version 10. Preference settings have been
provided to allow you to control how your legacy plan layers are converted when you
open a previous version plan in Version 10. By default, layers should be converted
into the new format so that they will more closely match the defaults that we have provided in the template plans. You can modify these settings so that your layers will
more closely match how they looked in your previous version. For more information,
see Layers Panel on page 104.
5. Review the rest of the program preferences - Any changes that you made to preference
settings in your previous version will not be migrated into Chief Architect Version 10. You
should review all of the program preference settings to make sure any settings that differ from
the system defaults are modified appropriately. If you ever need to reinstall Chief Architect you
should review the preference settings again. For more information, see Preferences Dialog on
page 94.
6. Migrate your custom template plan and layout files - By default, Chief Architect
Version 10 will install a template plan that will be used for new plans. You may want to
continue using any custom template files that you used in your previous version. To do so, you
can manually migrate these files by copying them using Windows Explorer from your previous
Templates folder to your Version 10 templates folder. You should then open the template files
you have migrated by selecting File> Open Plan and review all of the default settings, making
changes where appropriate. You may also want to review all of the settings in the default
template plan, profile.plan, to make sure the settings are how you want them. For more
information, see Template Plans on page 79.
7. Setup your custom toolbar configurations - It is possible, but not recommended, to
migrate toolbar configuration files from previous versions to Chief Architect Version 10.
Instead, we recommend that select Tools> Customize Toolbars in Version 10 and setup your
custom toolbars the way you would like them.
8. Review the new features list and familiarize yourself with the changes - Some of the
new features allow you to produce plans much more efficiently so it is to your advantage to get
to know all of the new features. Some of the existing features have been enhanced significantly
962
and you will need to know how they work to take advantage of them. The following list are
some of the features that have changed significantly that we feel are the most important for you
to know about. You should review these areas before starting a new project or bringing any
existing projects into Version 10.
a. Text and arrows attached to text - The text tools have changed significantly in Chief
Architect Version 10. For more information, see Text on page 703. Arrowheads
attached to text objects also behave very differently in Version 10. For more information, see Text Arrows on page 705.
b. Layers and the Layer Display Options dialog - You now have the ability to create
as many layers using any naming convention you like in Chief Architect Version 10.
You also have the ability to assign any object to any layer without being restricted by
the type of layer. For more information, see Layer Display Options Dialog on page
119.
c. File Management - Chief Architect now stores all of your plan information in a single file with a .plan extension instead of storing each floor in a separate file (.pl1,
.pl2, etc.). We have also changed the way backup and archive versions of plan files
behave. For more information, see File Management on page 71.
d. Materials are now stored in the library - Instead of seeing a list of available texture
files in the Library Browser, you will now see a complete list of materials objects.
This means that you no longer need to maintain a lengthy list of materials in your template plans and you can access them directly from the library when you need them.
Chief Architect will still maintain a copy of the material in a plan when it is used, so
for the most part you can continue to use materials as you did in previous versions.
There are also several new tools available for migrating materials into your Version 10
libraries. For more information, see Creating Materials on page 598.
e. CAD and Grid Snaps - Visual CAD snaps are now available in Chief Architect Version 10. These tools work very differently than the CAD snaps of previous versions.
There are many customizable settings and tools available for you to control how these
tools behave. There is also a snap grid and a reference grid available that you have full
control over. The old Unrestricted Angle tool is now called Angle Snaps. For more
information, see Object Snapping on page 783, Angle Snapping on page 784, and
Grid Snapping on page 785.
f. Printing and Page Setup - Chief Architect Version 10 has the ability to setup your
page information on an individual plan or layout basis. This will allow you to design
your plan or layout around the specific paper size that you intend to print to. For more
information, see Page Setup Dialog on page 898. Version 10 also has much better
control over text and line scaling so that you can use the Print Preview mode to see
exactly what will get printed out. For more information, see Display Options and
Printing on page 887.
g. 3D Layer Control - The functionality of the Include tab of the 3D Preferences dialog
has been replaced by the 3D column in the Layer Display Options dialog. You can
963
Whats New
in 10.0
now control the display of all objects in 3D views in the Layer Display Options dialog. For more information, see Displaying Objects on page 125.
h. Transform/Replicate dialog - The Move Object, Rotate Object, Resize Object,
Reflect Object dialogs have been replaced with the Transform/Replicate dialog. For
more information, see Transform/Replicate Object on page 793.
i. Roof Planes are moved up and down using the Transform/Replicate dialog. Roof
planes are no longer moved up and down using the Roof Plane Specification dialog.
Other objects can be moved up/down using this dialog as well. For more information,
see Raising/Lowering Roof Planes on page 307.
j. Show Layout button is not in default toolbar configuration - The Show Layout
button is available through the customize toolbars feature. For more information, see
Layout Buttons on page 904.
9. Review the Chief Architect Tutorial Videos - The tutorial videos included with Chief
Architect Version 10 will give you a nice overview of the features available. It is also
recommended that you obtain the Chief Architect 10.0 CD Video Training Series. These
resources can be very helpful even for upgrade users because many of the new features are
covered. They may also show you some great new ways to use the features that you are already
familiar with.
10. Check www.chiefarchitect.com for more information - If you have additional questions
about the changes in Version 10, we have more up to date information on our web site in the
support area. You can also post questions on the ChiefTalk web forum.
New and Improved Features, by Chapter

The following list describes the new and
improved features that have been added to
Chief Architect Version 10.0. Cross
References to additional information about
that feature have also been included when
possible.
The All Views toolbars replace the Utility

toolbar and display at the top of the
screen in all views.
The edit toolbar appears at the bottom of

the screen by default.
Menu items display their respective toolbar button for quick association and ease
of use. See Toolbars and Menus on
page 21.
New Toolbar Configuration buttons

enable different toolbar sets. See Toolbar Configurations on page 21.
Menus and
Toolbar Buttons
964
Toolbar buttons and menus have a new

look. Icons have been updated to improve
clarity. See Toolbars and Menus on
page 21.
Chief Architect now functions in a single

file model rather than having separate
files for each floor. The new file extension are .plan for plan files and .layout
for layout files. See Saving a Plan or
Layout File on page 73.
New dormer defaults specify initial settings for automatically created dormers.
See Dormer Defaults on page 334.
Frequency of Undo saves can be specified based on idle time. See General
Panel on page 100.
New Reset Preferences option restores all

preferences to factory defaults. See
Reset Options Panel on page 118.
The Project Browser offers easy access to

all camera views, elevations, wall details,
layout pages, and materials lists saved
with a plan. See Project Browser on
page 78.
An archive folder is automatically created whenever a plan is first saved. The

archive folder contains both autosave
files and archive files. See Auto
Archive on page 75.

has been streamlined and reconfigured.
All layers are visible by scrolling up or
down. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 119.
A new Preference option generates large

thumbnails. See Saving a Plan Thumbnail on page 74.
The Layer Display Options dialog is

resizeable. See Layer Display Options
Dialog on page 119.
Functionality of the Include tab on the

3D Settings dialog has been moved to
See Layer Display Options Dialog on
page 119.
Layers have been renamed and reorganized for easy access, management, and
compatibility with other CAD programs.
page 119.
Default dialogs are centralized for easier

access. See Default Settings on page
88.
Layers can be added and deleted with no

limit to the number of layers in a plan.
page 119.
Any object can be put on any layer. See

Items in the Layer Display Options

dialog can be sorted by any column See
119.
New "Used" column shows which layers

contain objects and default objects. See
119.
Layers
Defaults & Preferences
Arrows have their own defaults. See

Text, Callout, & Marker Defaults on
page 89.
New text, callout and marker defaults

improve control of these objects. See
Text, Callout, & Marker Defaults on
page 89.
965
Whats New
in 10.0
File Management
Any layer can be locked. See Locking

Layers on page 126.
Breaks can be placed in curved walls. See

Break Wall on page 139.
3D column controls the display of objects

in 3D views. See Layer Display Options
Dialog on page 119.
Terrain Retaining Walls can be created

See Retaining Wall on page 132.
Materials column allows easy control of

layers in the materials list. See Layer
Balusters and newels can display in floor

plan view. See Newels/Balusters Tab
on page 177.
All layers are named. See Layer Display

Walls can be locked by layer. See Locking Layers on page 126.
Layers can be renamed. New Reset

Names option restores all default layer
names. SeeLayer Display Options Dialog on page 119.
Wall length dimensions display when

walls are drawn. See Wall Defaults Dialog on page 181.
Which wall layers dimensions locate can

be specified. See Wall Type Definitions
Dialog on page 157.
Wall coverings can be specified for individual walls. See Wall Covering Tab on
page 178.
New Layer Painter

tool allows you
to change the layers of objects in any
view. See Layer Painter on page 124.
When an object is selected, the layer it is

on displays in the status bar. See Layer
Layer sets can be exported from one plan

and imported into another. See Exporting/Importing Layer Sets on page 127.
Walls, Railings, & Fencing
966
Wall layer line styles, colors and weights

can be locked to the layer the wall is
placed on. See Wall Type Definitions
Dialog on page 157.
Wall length can be specified in the Wall

Specification dialog. See General
Tab on page 166.
Walls can be placed on any layer. See

119.
Wall types can be deleted. See Wall

Type Definitions Dialog on page 157.
Rooms
Rooms can be selected and opened for

specification in 3D views. See Room
Specification on page 191.
The whole room highlights when

selected. See Selecting a Room on
page 191.
Wall coverings can be specified for entire

rooms. See Wall Covering Tab on page
204.
Doors
Doorway
tool allows you to place
doorways without doors directly into a
wall. See Doorways on page 210.
New Change Opening/Hinge Side

and Change Swing Side
door edit
dormers in a roof. See Dormers on

page 300.
Ignore top floor option builds a roof

based on the first floor footprint. See
Build Tab on page 320.
Roof plane baselines can now be angled.

New Double Swing door option. See

Options Tab on page 221.
Floors
Up to 30 floors can be created in Chief

Architect Full Version 10.0. See Working With Multiple Floors on page 268.
Second roof pitch beginning can be specified by height or offset from baseline.
See Roof Tab on page 170.
All floors are stored in a single plan file

.plan. See Saving a Plan or Layout File
on page 73.
Multiple roof planes can be edited at

once. See Roof Plane Specification Dialog on page 326.
Existing floors can be swapped with

other existing floors. See Exchanging
Floors on page 270.
Custom gutters can be specified. See

Gutter Tab on page 324.
A new floor can be added between the

first floor and the foundation floor. See
Adding Floors Between Existing
Floors on page 269.
Stairs
The first floor can be deleted. See Deleting Floors on page 270.
Plan files can be opened more than once
to display multiple floor plan views at the
same time. See The Current Floor on
page 270.
Electrical
Outlets placed on walls can be selected

and moved away from walls. See Outlets on page 430.
Draw your own electrical connections on

the electrical layer. See Drawing Your
Own Electrical Connections on page
432.
Roofs
New Auto Roof Returns options create

custom returns when roofs are built. See
Roof Returns on page 302.
New Curved Roof options create curved

roof planes. See General Tab on page
327.
New Auto Dormer

ing Dormer
Trim & Moldings
3D molding polylines can be placed,

selected, and edited in cross section/elevation views as well as floor plan view.
See 3D Molding Polyline Tool on page
448.
CAD polylines can be converted into 3D

molding polylines, and vice versa. See
and Auto Float-
tools place complete
Balusters and newels on staircases and

landings can display in floor plan view.
See Newels/Balusters Tab on page 372.
967
Whats New
in 10.0
tools easily change hinge side and swing

direction. See Changing Door Swings
on page 215.
Converting a CAD Polyline on page

449.
Frieze moldings can be generated whenever roofs are automatically generated.

See Displaying Frieze Moldings on
page 449.
Molding profiles can be changed in 3D
views. See Changing Profiles on Existing Moldings on page 451.
Cabinets
Corner cabinets and other special cabinets can be created directly in the
Cabinet Specification dialog. See
Sinks can now be placed in corner cabinets and can span across cabinets. See
Editing Cabinets on page 467.
Bow front cabinets can be created with

convex or concave faces. See General
Tab on page 475.
Rounded concave or convex fronts can be

placed in corner cabinets with curved
standard or library doors. See General
Tab on page 475.
968
Radius end, peninsula radius, and bow

front cabinets support curved library
doors. See Special Cabinets on page
472.
Front and corner pilasters can be added to

cabinets. They can extend to the toe kick
area or all the way to the floor. See
Hardware Tab on page 482.
Backsplashes can be created on cabinets

not placed against walls. See General
Tab on page 475.
Roll-out shelves can be placed in island

cabinets. See Front Tab on page 478.
Lazy susans can be placed in corner cabinets. See Front Tab on page 478.
Multiple appliances can be added to the

same cabinet. See Built-In Appliances
on page 460.
Cabinet top appliances can be selected in

floor plan view and 3D views and moved
within the countertop. See Front Tab on
page 478.
Diagonal doors can be added to corner

cabinets. See Front Tab on page 478.
Library door and drawer fronts can be

applied to cabinets. See General Tab on
page 475.
Side and vertical overlap can be defined

for door and drawer fronts. See Front
Tab on page 478.
Cutting boards are not beveled and do not

generate hardware. See Front Tab on
page 478.
Cabinets can have rounded and angled

corners. See General Tab on page 475.
Terrain
The toe kick can be eliminated on the

back of a cabinet without eliminating it
on the front. See General Tab on page
475.
New Terrain toolbar configuration centralizes terrain tools. See Terrain Configuration Button on page 490.
Double-faced and triple-faced cabinets

can be easily created. See Front Tab on
page 478.
New Retaining Wall

tool places
retaining walls in the terrain. See Terrain
Breaks on page 494.
New Create Plant Image

tool
allows new images to be added to Plant
library. See Plant Image Specification
Dialog on page 503.
New Sprinkler Head, Line and Spline
blocks. See Creating Architectural

Blocks on page 556.
New Terrain Break

tool places
breaks to control terrain generation. See
Terrain Breaks on page 494.
tools place irrigation components in

the terrain. See Sprinkler Tools on page
498.
More objects can be included in architectural blocks, including custom countertops; slabs; image, electrical, and terrain
objects; molding polylines; and polyline
solids. See Creating Architectural
Blocks on page 556.
New Plant Chooser

tool searches for
plants based on specified landscaping
needs. See Plant Chooser Dialog on
page 507.
Architectural blocks can display as a single object in floor plan view, schedules,
and materials lists. See General Tab on
page 561.
Architectural block labels can be generated automatically; created manually;

derived from the component code; or
suppressed. See Label Tab on page
562.
Expanded Plant Image

Specification dialog complements
search capabilities of the Plant Chooser
tool. See Plant Image Specification Dialog on page 503.
Hardiness Zone regional maps are available for reference. See Hardiness
Zones on page 499.
Grow All Plants

tool "grows" plants
to display future sizes. See Plant Tools
on page 498.
Terrain objects can be placed in architectural blocks. See Creating Architectural

Blocks on page 556.
Libraries
Over 7,200 new objects were added to

the library.
New Materials category. See Materials

on page 580.
New Plants category. See Plants on

page 581.
New Sprinklers category. See Sprinklers on page 582.
New My Libraries category can be used

to store third party libraries. See My
Libraries on page 574.
Terrain can be created on any floor.
Terrain contour label font can be specified. See Contours Tab on page 514
Roads & Sidewalks
Library search results now display in the

Library Search dialog. See Library
Search Dialog on page 583.
Keywords can now be used to search for

library objects. See Library Search Dialog on page 583.
Roads, driveways, sidewalks and road

stripes can be added to architectural
969
Whats New
in 10.0
object to another. See Material Eyedropper on page 602.
Library folders can be included in library

searches. SeeLibrary Search Dialog on
page 583.
New Plant Chooser

allows you to
search for library plants using a variety of
plant characteristics. See Library Search
Dialog on page 583.
New Color Chooser eyedropper applies

colors from any pixel on the screen to a
user-created material. See Color
The Plan Materials dialog allows

materials used in the current plan to be
managed and edited in a variety of ways.
See Plan Materials on page 604.
The Create Plan Materials Library feature allows users of prior versions to convert material template plans to libraries in
the 10.0 format.
Material.dat files from prior versions of

Chief Architect can now be converted to
materials and saved in the Library.
New materials can be created and added

directly to the Library Browser. See
Define Material Dialog on page 605.
Materials based on textures can be created and added to the Library Browser.
See Converting Textures to Materials
on page 598.
Materials can be stored in the Library

Browser. All materials in the Library
Browser are available for all plans. See
Creating Materials on page 598.
Materials can be opened for specification

and edited directly from the Library
Browser. See Editing Materials on
page 604.
Editing the material assignments for an

object used to be handled through the
Select Material dialog. Now it is done
through the Select Library Object or
Plan Materials dialog. All prior functionality is still accessible through the
Any library object can be assigned to a

special button which allows you to place
it directly into the plan without going
through the Library Browser. See Place
Library Object Button on page 588.
The Replace from Library
edit button allows you to replace the selected
object and others like it with a different
item from the library. See Replace From
Different library objects can be stored in

the same library.
Objects can be added to the library in 3D

views. See Adding a New Object on
page 568.
Objects in locked libraries can be

dragged and dropped to create copies in
an unlocked library.
Materials
970
Textures are now referenced and stored

with materials in the Library Browser,
allowing the same materials to be used in
each plan; and avoiding the need to
import and export material.dat files.
Materials can be applied directly to

objects in 3D views from the Library
Browser.
New Material Eyedropper

tool
applies selected materials from one
Vector views stay active until they are

closed. See Editing Objects in 3D
Views on page 634.
Vector views update when walls, floors,

ceilings or framing are built, edited, or
rebuilt.
Saved camera views are listed in the

Project Browser. See Project Browser
on page 78.
Saved cameras can be named. Names

appear in floor plan view as labels. See
Saving 3D Camera Views on page 635.
The redesigned Aerial View

tool
allows you to use the right mouse button
to move the floor plan view display. See
Aerial View on page 621.
Expanded Camera Defaults dialog is

accessible provides greater control of
camera views. See Camera Defaults on
page 643.
New Pan Window

tool offers powerful options for controlling the display
of floor plan view. See Panning the Display on page 616.
The display of objects in cross section/

elevation views is controlled by layer in

is a tool
and no longer a toggle. See Cross Section/Elevation Views on page 624.
contextual menus. See Materials Tab

on page 603.
The starting points of textures and patterns can be specified, allowing textures
that are assigned to materials attached to
objects to be mapped. See Mapping Patterns and Textures on page 599.
New Benjamin Moore paints library in

the Materials category.
New Corian custom countertop materials

in the Materials category.
Zoom & View Tools
New Arrange Icons
, Next Window
and Previous Window

tools
help manage the display of view windows. See Window Menu Tools on
page 617.
Render Views

controls the display of objects in 3D
views by layer. See Displaying Objects
on page 125.
Render views stay active until they are

closed. See Editing Objects in Render
Views on page 658.
New Render Floor Camera

tool
restricts render view generation to only
one floor of your model at a time. See
Render View Tools on page 652.
Vector Views

controls the display of objects in 3D
views by layer. See Displaying Objects
on page 125.
Camera position, orientation, and focal

point can be edited in floor plan views.
See Editing a Camera in Floor Plan
View on page 629.
971
Whats New
in 10.0
Camera icon in floor plan views provides

improved display and editing of the cameras position, angle, and field of view.
See Editing a Camera in Floor Plan
View on page 629.
ment and dimensioning; and grid snapping. See Editing Text on page 707.
Text objects can be rotated to any angle.

See Attributes Tab on page 713.
Left, right, top, and bottom margins can

be set for text objects. See Attributes
Tab on page 713.
New font menu allows easier editing and

previewing of text and text style. See
Text Tab on page 711.
Three new architectural fonts are

included: Blueprindbt, City Blueprint,
and Country Blueprint. See Fonts on
page 704.
Additional text styles such as strikeout

and underline are available. See Text
Tab on page 711.
Auto Width and Auto Height options

resize text boxes whenever the text is
edited. See Attributes Tab on page 713
Text box position, angle, and size can be

specified exactly. See Attributes Tab on
page 713.
Text macros generate relevant text, such

as layout page number, file name, date
and scale, automatically. See Text
Macros on page 709.
Raytracing
The Image Adjustment dialog now

has both brightness and contrast sliders.
See The Raytrace Window on page
676.
Dimensions
Dimensions can locate text objects. See

Locate Objects Tab on page 698.
Dimension font is specified in

Dimension Defaults dialog instead of
Preferences dialog. See Font tab on
page 701.
Display Temporary Dimensions

can be toggled on and off. See Display
Temporary Dimensions on page 685.
Text
Text default settings, including default

font, are saved with the plan in the Text
Defaults dialog. See Text Defaults on
page 714.
Text can be sized and scaled with precision in the Text Specification dialog.
See Sizing Text on page 708.
Special text characters are now available.

See Text Tab on page 711.
The placement of text is precise. Each

letter is never be more than one pixel
away from its original placement. See
Displaying Text on page 706.
Background fill styles and colors can

now be added to text box. See Fill Style
Tab on page 743.
Text objects can be assigned Move to

Front or Maintain in Back positions relative to other objects. See Line Style
Tab on page 732.
972
Text objects edit just like CAD boxes,

allowing flexible display; precise align-
CAD and Wall Stops Move options help

control text box placement. See Line
Text lines with arrow are independent

objects placed and edited like CAD
arrows and automatically attached to text
objects. See Text Arrows on page 705.
New and improved CAD editing tools

include visual object snaps; grid snaps;
angle snaps; and the Transform/Replicate
edit button. See CAD Editing Tools on
page 763.
Over 20 new arrow styles are available

for lines with arrow and text lines with
arrow.
An unlimited number of text lines with

arrow can be attached to text objects. See
Text Arrows on page 705.
Hyperlinks can be associated with text

objects. See Link Tab on page 714.
Text Preview option displays how text

will appear when printed. See Text Tab
on page 711.
Callouts & Markers
Callouts and markers have their own

default settings which are saved with the
plan. See Callout/Marker Defaults on
page 717.
Fonts can be set for callouts and markers.

Text line with arrows can be attached

attached to callouts and markers. See
Text Arrows on page 705.
CAD Objects
New arc tools Start/End/On Arc

CAD Editing Tools
Snaps
. See Angle Snapping on
page 784.
Improved control of line weights. See

Improved CAD object input control. See

. See Grid Snapping on
New set of object snap child buttons

improve control of object snapping. See
page 780.
The snap distance and number of objects

in snap history can be specified. See
page 780.
New Visual CAD snapping displays possible snap points for CAD-based objects.
See Grid Snapping on page 785.
Temporary points are no longer created

when drawing lines.
New Transform/Replicate Object

dialog centralizes move, rotate, resize,
and reflect options. Objects can now be
moved up and down on the Z axis. See
Transform/Replicate Object on page
793.
New buttons for CAD edit types:

concentric, resize, move corners, fillet,
Tangent/End Arc
increase control of
arc creation. See Arc Tools on page
736.
Unrestricted positioning is now called

Grid Snaps
page 785.
, Start/
Unrestricted Angles is now called Angle
973
Whats New
in 10.0
and rotate about center. See Preferences

- CAD Panel on page 776
Arrow polylines can have fillets and

chamfers. See Fillet and Chamfer on
page 800.
Arrow polylines can display length and

angle values. See Line Style Tab on
page 732.
New extension line snaps. See Extension Line Snapping on page 783.
Improved Make Parallel

tool allows
angles of up to 45 degrees. See Make
Parallel/Perpendicular on page 796.
Allowed angles and grid settings set in

Plan and Layout Default dialogs.
New Time Tracker

tools allow you
to keep track of time spent on a plan. See
New Spell Check

tool allows you to
check the spelling of text in your Chief
Architect documents. New words can be
added to the dictionary. See Spell
Check on page 811.
New Space Planner toolbar configuration

accesses House Wizard tools. See
Toolbar Configurations on page 21.
Previous button in Plan Check dialog

allows you to navigate to prior errors. See
Plan Check on page 813.
Expanded House Wizard provides

more control over choosing room types
for each floor. See House Wizard on
page 810.
Pictures,
Images, & Movies
Picture file formats *.bmp, *.jpg, *.png,

*.gif, *.tif, or *.pcx are all supported. See
Import Picture File Dialog on page
827.
New Import Backdrops

tool
imports graphics file into the library. See
Adding Backdrops to the Library on
page 569.
Images are actual objects stored in the

Library Browser, not references to files
saved elsewhere on your computer. See
Adding Images to the Library on page
834.
Height information for an image is no

longer derived from the image title. All
data entered for an image is stored with
the image in the Library Browser. See
Image Specification Dialog on page
834.
Images can be placed on any layer. See

2D CAD blocks can be assigned to

images. The CAD block associated with
an image is selected in the Image
Specification dialog and stored with
the image in the Library Browser. See
Image Specification Dialog on page
834.
New images can be created individually

and saved directly to the Library
Browser. See Creating Images on page
831.
New customizable reference grid displays in floor plan view. See Plan
Advanced
Design & Editing
974
Images can be created and opened for

specification directly from the Library
Browser. See Image Specification Dialog on page 834.
Picture files can be converted into images

individually or a folder of picture files
can be converted at once. See Creating
Images on page 831.
Images can be rotated to any angle. See

Using the Mouse on page 827.
Transparency information for picture

files is now supported in floor plan view.
New Plant Image Specification dialog contains plant-specific information.

See Plant Image Specification Dialog
on page 503.
The Create Symbol Wizard supports the

import of .obj files. These files contain
both material and texture information,
and allow you to map these textures so
that they appear realistic in render views.
See OBJ Files on page 877.
Printing & Plotting
New Page Setup dialog allows you to

access printer settings within Chief
Architect and save them with the plan.
The current printer can be changed at any

time in the Page Setup dialog. Print
settings can also be specified at any time.
All output can be displayed relative to the

drawing sheet size. See Show Sheet on
page 887.
Center sheet command allows you to center your plan relative to the drawing
sheet. See Center Sheet on page 888.
Layer Mapping and Advanced Layer

Mapping pages of the Import
Drawing Wizard have been simplified
and streamlined. See Importing 2D
DXF/DWG Files on page 844.
Lineweight values are absolute. They do

not vary from printer to printer and can
appear on screen as they do on paper. See
New layers can be added from within the

Import Drawing Wizard. See
Importing 2D DXF/DWG Files on
page 844.
The on-screen display of text is more

accurately representative of how it will
appear on paper. See Print Preview on
page 887.
Check plots can be created at a smaller

scale without changing the drawing scale.
See Check Plots on page 893.
Plans can be printed across multiple

sheets on any size paper. See Printing
Across Multiple Pages on page 894.
Walkthroughs are recorded only in .avi

format. See Walkthroughs on page 838.
Walkthroughs created in the .wlk file format using prior versions of Chief Architect can be converted to .avi files. See
Converting a .WLK File to an .AVI
File on page 839.
DXF/DWG
Create Symbol Wizard
Importing .dwg/.dxf drawings from

AutoCAD 2005 and prior is supported.
See Compatibility on page 843.
975
Whats New
in 10.0
Objects can be precisely positioned relative to the paper edge using the dimension tools. See Moving Objects Using
Dynamic print preview allows you to see

on-screen how objects will appear when
printed. See Print Preview on page 887.
The Scale to Fit

button automatically
selects an appropriate drawing scale and
centers the plan on the drawing sheet. See
Printing to Scale on page 892.
The Print dialog allows Double Buffered

Printing. See Print Dialog on page 899.
Layout Files
976
The display of CAD and text objects can

be controlled by layer in layout. See
CAD and Text in Layout on page 908.
Layout views can be relocated in relation

to the layout sheet using temporary
dimensions. See Moving Views Using
Temporary Dimensions on page 914.
Display of dimensions is controllable in

layout. See Displaying Layout Views
on page 915.
There is no limit to text size.
Up to a thousand pages per layout file are

available.
Text macros that automatically display

layout page numbers, file name, drawing
scale, etc. can be added to layout page
zero. The corresponding text will display
on every layout page. See Text Macros
on page 709.
Layout files are no longer tied to a particular printer. The current printer can be
changed at any time using the Page
Setup dialog. Printer and print settings
can also be specified at any time. See
Page Setup Dialog on page 898.
Layouts can be printed across multiple
sheets on any size paper for full scale
check plots. See Printing Across Multiple Pages on page 894.
The Open View

edit button opens
the plan file and view associated with the
selected layout view. See Edit Buttons
on page 904.
The Layout Box Layers

edit button
allows you to change the layer settings of
layout views without changing the original plan. See Displaying Layout Views
on page 915.
Schedules
Schedule font is controlled in one dialog.

New layer controls simplifies schedule

layer specification. See Attributes Tab
on page 933.
New Scale... button for character height

allows schedule text to be scaled to
desired print size. See Printing Text and
Dimensions on page 891
Materials Lists
The display of objects in materials lists is

controlled through the Layer Display
Numerics
2D Block ............................................. 866

3D
Face .................................................. 856
Generation, increase speed ................ 633
Remove 3D views .............................. 636
Terrain ...................................... 489 , 529
3D Cameras, Save ............................. 635
3D Data, Import.................................. 860
3D Final View ..................................... 654
3D Home Architect
files .................................................... 72
3D Menu ............................................... 43
3D Molding Polyline Specification
Dialog .............................................. 453
3D Origin ............................................ 864
3D Settings......................................... 645
3D Surface, Delete............................. 635
3D Tab ................................................. 881
3D Toolbar Buttons ............................ 62
3D Tools ............................................. 625
3D View Generation,
Speed up ......................................... 633
3D View Line Weights ....................... 889
3D Views ............................................. 589
Display .............................................. 632
Display Terrain In ............................... 500
Edit Walls in ...................................... 151
Panels ............................................... 646
3D, Remove ........................................ 636
Absolute Location
Move point ........................................ 751
New line end ............................. 729 , 737
New point ......................................... 749
Activate Camera ............................... 636
Active Cameras ................................. 646
Add
a Gable Over Doors ........................... 219
a Molding Profile ............................... 569
a New Library .................................... 568
a New Symbol ................................... 568
Extension Lines ................................. 688
Floor Between Existing Floors ............ 269
Floors ............................................... 269
Images to the Library ......................... 834
New Layout Lines .............................. 917
Road Objects to the Library ............... 540
Textures, Images, and Backdrops to the
Library ........................................... 569
to the Library ..................................... 568
Tool Buttons ........................................ 18
Adding................................................ 269
Adjust
Lights ............................................... 666
Overviews ......................................... 631
the Height ......................................... 436
the View Angle .................................. 631
Adjust Lights Dialog ........................ 666
Adjust Material Definition................ 604
Adjust Wall Angle ..................... 107 , 140
Advanced Duplicate CAD Blocks ... 850
Advanced Layer Mapping ................ 847
Advanced Render Tab ...................... 613
Aerial View ........................................ 621
977
Index
Index
Align
Curved Stairs Between Floors ............ 352
Curved stairs between floors .............. 352
Curved Walls Between Floors ............ 154
Curved walls between floors .............. 154
Ends of Curved Stairs ........................ 350
Ends of curved stairs to walls or CAD . 350
Roof Edges ....................................... 306
Stem Walls and Footings ................... 279
Text .................................................. 708
Walls ........................................ 153 154
Walls between floors ......................... 167
All Views Toolbars ............................. 19

Allowed Angles ................................. 818
Allowed Angles Dialog..................... 818
Allowed Wall Angles ........................ 140
Alpha Channel................................... 611
Alter Default Wall ............................. 132
Ambient Light ................................... 660
Angle Snapping ................................ 784
Angle Snaps ...................................... 776
Angled dormer hole
see also Framing, Hole, Roofs ........... 392
Angles
Allowed for CAD ................................ 778
Angular Dimensions................. 683 , 691
Anti-aliasing ...................................... 115
Appearance
Color, background and reference ......... 96
Appearance Preferences ................... 94
Appliances
Built into cabinets .............................. 460
Outlets, where placed ........................ 436
Arc Specification Dialog .................. 738
Arc Tab .............................................. 739
Arc with Arrow .................................. 738
Arch Tab .................................... 226 , 263
Arched Door ...................................... 226
Architectural Block
Specification Dialog...................... 561
Architectural Blocks ................ 556 , 592
Copy ................................................. 558
978
Delete ............................................... 558

Displaying ......................................... 556
Edit ................................................... 560
Explode ............................................. 558
Library .............................................. 574
Move ................................................. 559
Rotate ............................................... 559
Selecting ........................................... 557
Architectural
Architectural
Architectural
Archive Files
Blocks Library ........... 556

Edit Buttons ................. 65
Preferences................ 107
....................................... 76
Manage Auto Archives ......................... 76
Arcs ............................................ 736 , 797
About center ...................................... 738
Affect CAD stops ............................... 790
Change to lines ................................... 68
Chord direction .................................. 737
Direction of bend ............................... 737
Draw using center and radius ............. 738
Edit ................................................... 766
Length of arc ..................................... 737
Length of chord ................................. 737
Lock center ....................................... 767
Radius .............................................. 736
Start direction .................................... 737
Tangent, make ............................ 68 , 154
Area
Living ................................................ 194
Minimum which will dimension ............ 697
Polyline ............................................. 741
Room, display ................................... 194
Arrange All......................................... 620
Arrange icons .................................... 620
Arrow
Special use ....................................... 705
Arrow Defaults .................................. 715
Arrow Tab .......................................... 735
Arrows, Text Line With..................... 705
Attach Cabinets ................................ 471
Attenuatation ............................. 440 , 670
Attic
Retain attic wall ................................. 167
Walls ................................................ 167
B
Backclipped Cross Section Tool ..... 625
Backdrop
Add new .................................... 648 , 834
Create ....................................... 648 , 834
Definition ........................................... 657
Backdrops .................................. 592 , 657
Backdrops Library ............................ 575
Background
Colors ................................................ 96
Render ...................................... 648 , 657
Balconies............................................ 192
Balcony
Room label ........................................ 193
Balusters ............................................ 174
Base Cabinets.................................... 458
Base, Full Height, Wall

Cabinets, Shelf, Partition ............. 487
Base, Truss ....................................... 413
Baseboard
Molding ..................................... 203 , 208
Baseline ............................................. 295
Baseline (Roofs) ................ 303 , 328 , 330
Baseline Dimensions ....................... 685
Baselines (Roofs) ............................. 293
Bathrooms ......................................... 192
Bay Window....................................... 232
Bay Trimmers .................................... 388
see also Windows
Bay Window Specification
Dialog.............................................. 245
Bay, Box, Bow Windows
and Roofs ....................................... 247
Beam Specification Dialog .............. 405
Beams
Exposed ........................................... 198
Soffits ............................................... 198
Bearing Line .............................. 380 , 396
Bearings ............................................ 779
Relative to North pointer .................... 730
Bedrooms .......................................... 192
Bi-levels ............................................. 187
Bitmaps
Directories ........................................ 103
Blind Cabinets .................................. 474
Blocked Doors and Windows .......... 219
Blocked Units.................................... 235
Blocking............................................. 380
Borders (Layout)............................... 906
Bottom Chord.................................... 393
Bottom Plate
Thickness ......................................... 386
Bow Window ...................................... 233
Bow Window Specification.............. 246
Box Tools .......................................... 745
Box Window ...................................... 232
Box, 3D .............................................. 579
979
Index
Attic Rooms ....................................... 192

Attic Trusses...................................... 409
Attributes Tab .................................... 713
Auto Archive ................................ 75 , 101
Auto Roof Returns ............................ 302
Auto Save ........................................... 100
Auto Stairwell .................................... 365
Auto-Detailing .................................... 638
Automatic Exterior Dimensions ...... 685
Automatic Framing............................ 381
vs. Manual Framing ............................ 378
Automatic Rebuild of Floors and
Ceilings ........................................... 319
Automatic Roofs................................ 287
vs. Manual Roofs ............................... 286
Sidewalks ........................................ 535
Automatically Generated
Roof Styles ..................................... 288
Automatically Mulled Units .............. 235
Autosave Files .................................... 75
Break
CAD item .................................... 67 ,

Line ..................................................
Partial ...............................................
Wall .......................................... 132 ,
798
798
799
139
Brick Veneer ...................................... 542
Bridging ............................................. 380
Build
Additional Floors ............................... 269
Ceiling Framing ................................. 378
Foundation ................................ 270 , 274
House ............................................... 811
New floor .......................................... 269
new floor ........................................... 269
Terrain .............................................. 500
Wall Framing ..................................... 378
Build Framing Dialog ....................... 382
Build Menu .......................................... 29
Build Roof Dialog ............................. 319
Building Codes ................................. 813
Built-in Fixtures
Create .............................................. 587
Delete ............................................... 587
Buttons
3D Toolbar .......................................... 62
Edit Toolbar ........................................ 65
C
Cabinet
Defaults ............................................ 458
Handles ............................................ 461
Labels .............................................. 463
Cabinet Defaults ................................. 88

Cabinet Designer .............................. 457
Cabinet Door Library........................ 460
Library ............................................ 575
Cabinet Front Tab ............................. 478
Cabinet Library ................................. 460
Cabinet Modules
Library .............................................. 575
980
Cabinet Specification Dialog........... 475

Cabinet Tools .................................... 458
Cabinets ..................................... 457 , 592
Angled front .............................. 472 , 475
Attach ............................................... 471
Attach to wall ..................................... 471
Backsplash ........................................ 476
Base Cabinet ..................................... 458
Bevel ................................................ 480
Blind ................................................. 474
Built-in appliances ............................. 460
Copy ................................................. 464
Copy, (individual, multiple, stacked) .... 464
Corner .............................................. 458
Corner, resize ................................... 467
Counter top ....................................... 477
Countertop, custom ........... 459 460 , 470
Delete ............................................... 464
Delete face items ............................... 479
Delete, (individual or multiple) ............ 464
Diagonal door .................................... 480
Dimension to corners/sides ................ 699
Display .............................................. 462
Door style ......................... 469 , 475 476
Door, glass ........................................ 479
Door, on back .................................... 479
Doors and drawers library .................. 475
Edit ................................................... 467
End cabinets ..................................... 472
Face Style ................................. 475 476
Filler ................................................. 471
Flat sides .......................................... 479
Full height ......................................... 458
Glass doors ....................................... 479
Handles ............................................ 461
Lazy Susan ............................... 479 480
Library .............................................. 460
Library, doors styles .................. 476 , 486
Min. Width ......................................... 458
Minimum Width .................. 458 , 487 , 541
Module lines ...................................... 463
Move ................................................. 465
Move (individual or multiple) ............... 465
Move, restrictions .............................. 466
Move, with wall .................................. 471
Normal ...................................... 472 , 475
Outlet placement ............................... 436
CAD
Align edges .................................. 67 , 790

Allowed angles ................................... 778
Angle Snapping ................................. 784
Bitmap, insert ......................... 62 , 66 67
Block ........................................... 67 , 753
Block, copy ........................................ 753
Block, create ................................ 67 , 753
Block, delete ...................................... 753
Block, edit ......................................... 753
Block, rotate ...................................... 753
Block, scale ....................................... 753
Block, select ...................................... 753
Box ................................................... 745
Box, draw .......................................... 745
Box, edit ............................................ 745
Box, framing .............................. 745 746
Break ................................................ 798
Callout ............................................... 753
Chamfer ...................................... 67 , 800
Circle ................................................ 748
Circle about center ............................. 748
Concentric copy ................................. 788
Convert to Terrain .............................. 528
Copy ......................................... 788 , 792
Copy Point to Point ............................ 819
Copy, Point to Point ........................... 819
Cross box ......................................... 746

Current Layer .................................... 126
Delete Points .................................... 751
Detail window ............................ 727 , 759
Dimension ......................................... 758
Dimensions, locate settings ............... 700
Edit types .......................................... 776
Explode Block ............................. 67 , 753
Extend ................................ 67 , 798 799
Fence ....................................... 765 , 800
Fillet ........................................... 67 , 800
Fillet type .......................................... 787
Framing .................................... 745 746
Joist direction .................................... 397
Layer 9, cross section ........................ 752
Layers, change current ...................... 122
Line .................................................. 727
Line Properties .................................. 779
Line to Arc button ................................ 68
Locate ends and corners ................... 700
Make Parallel/Perp. ..................... 67 , 790
Marker .............................................. 753
Move by dragging .............................. 789
Move Corners ................................... 787
Move Point to Point ........................... 819
Number style ..................................... 759
Oval ................................................. 748
Partial break ..................................... 799
Point, current ..................... 729 , 737 , 750
Point, keyboard input ......................... 751
Point, move (general) ........................ 751
Point, move along line ....................... 752
Polyline ............................................. 304
Polyline, rectangular (tool) ................. 745
Resize ............................... 776 , 787 , 789
Rotate around ................................... 777
Rotate items .............................. 776 , 789
Rotate Jump ..................................... 777
Rotate/Resize About .......................... 776
Select ............................................... 765
Snap Properties ................................ 780
Stops affected by curves .................... 790
Tangent button .................................... 68
Trim .................................... 67 , 798 799
CAD and Text in Layout ................... 908

CAD Block .......................... 592 , 753 , 757
Add to the Library .............................. 568
981
Index
Partition ............................................. 459

Peninsula radius ........................ 472 , 475
Pilasters ............................................ 482
Radius end ................................ 472 , 475
Resize ............................................... 466
Restrictions, move ............................. 466
Reverse Appliance ............................. 480
Roll-out shelves ................................. 480
Rotate ............................................... 466
Rotate (individual or multiple) ..... 466 , 559
Select ................................................ 461
Select handles ................................... 461
Separation ......................................... 480
Shaped .............................................. 472
Special shape ............................ 472 , 475
Special shapes .................................. 475
Stile .................................................. 480
Toe kick ............................................. 477
Wall ................................................... 471
Width Increment ................. 458 , 487 , 541
982
Creating Library ................................ 757

Delete ............................................... 754
Duplicates ................................. 849 850
Insert ................................................ 754
Management ..................................... 754
Nested ...................................... 753 , 758
Undelete ........................................... 754
Floor Heights ..................................... 187

From All Floors .................................. 939
From Area ......................................... 940
From Room ....................................... 940
Materials ............................................... 3
Materials on soffits ............................ 543
Room area ........................................ 194
CAD Block Specification

Dialog.............................................. 755
CAD Blocks
Create a Library ................................ 757
CAD Blocks and Polylines............... 797
CAD Blocks Library .......................... 576
CAD Box Specification
Dialog.............................................. 747
CAD Circle Specification
Dialog.............................................. 748
CAD Detail
Trusses ............................................ 412
CAD Detail from View............... 639 , 760
CAD Details ....................................... 759
CAD Drawing Tools .......................... 726
CAD Edit Buttons ............................... 67
CAD Layers in Cross Sections ....... 752
CAD Line Properties ........................ 779
CAD Menu ............................................ 46
CAD Mode .............................................. 4
CAD Objects
Convert ............................................. 804
Copy ................................................. 792
Display ............................................. 752
Drawn in Layout ................................ 912
Move ................................................ 789
Select ............................................... 765
CAD Oval Specification Dialog ....... 748
CAD Panel.......................................... 108
CAD Polylines ................................... 741
CAD Preferences .............................. 776
CAD to Walls ...................... 155 , 804 , 844
Calculate
All Floors ............................................ 66
Area, using polyline ........................... 940
Callout Defaults .................................. 89

Callout Specification Dialog............ 719
Callout Tab ........................................ 720
Callout/Marker Defaults ................... 717
Callouts .............................................. 718
Arrows .............................................. 718
CAD .................................................. 753
Color ................................................. 718
Cross section line .............................. 720
Delete ............................................... 719
Edit ................................................... 718
Height ............................................... 517
Layer ................................................ 718
Move ................................................. 719
Resize .............................................. 719
Rotate ............................................... 719
Select ............................................... 718
Shape ............................................... 720
Size .......................................... 718 , 720
Text .................................................. 718
Camera
Activating .......................................... 636
Change Settings ................................ 641
Clip Surfaces within ................... 641 645
Color (red and green) ........................ 646
Defaults ............................................ 643
Degrees each rotate .................. 642 , 645
Edit Perspective and Render .............. 627
Green in Floor Plan View ................... 646
Height above floor ..................... 642 , 645
Move Tools ....................................... 628
Movement ......................................... 655
Movement Tools .................................. 62
Orbit Tools ........................................ 627
Remove Wall within ................... 641 , 644
Restrict to room ................................. 646
Save 3D ............................................ 635
Save Cross Section/Elevation ............ 639
Tilt Tools ........................................... 627
Camera Defaults .......................... 88 , 643

Camera Specification Dialog ........... 641
Cape Cod
Platforms, combine ............................ 398
Cascade .............................................. 618
Views ................................................ 618
Windows ............................................ 618
Casing
Ignore for opening resize ..................... 92
Casing Tab ......................................... 257
Categories .......................................... 941
Cathedral Ceilings............................. 197
Ceiling
Basement .......................................... 275
Cathedral ........................................... 197
Coffered ............................................ 197
Diagram ............................................ 188
Different styles ................................... 187
Dropped ............................................ 196
Exposed beams ................................. 198
False ................................................. 196
Flat ceiling over this room ................... 205
Framing ............................................. 378
Height ............... 187 188 , 201 202 , 207
Height, floor below ............................. 203
Lowered ............................................ 196
Materials ........................................... 186
Remove flat ceiling ............................. 205
Tiles .................................................. 196
For deck ............................................ 163
Ceiling Plane .............................. 288 , 312
Ceiling Plane Specification
Dialog .............................................. 330
Ceiling Truss...................................... 408
Ceilings .............................................. 247
Ceilings, Special ............................... 196
Center
Curved walls, maintain location ........... 151
Doors ................................................ 214
Handle, curved walls .......................... 149
Lock Arc ............................................ 767
Window along wall ............................. 242
Window to sink .................................. 242

Windows ........................................... 242
Chair rail .................................... 204 , 208

Molding ..................................... 203 , 208
Chamfer ............................................. 800
Change
Arc to line ................................. 766 , 768
Door Swings ..................................... 215
Layout Line Length ............................ 917
Line to arc ......................................... 772
Materials in 3D Views ........................ 632
Radius of Curved Stairs ..................... 353
View Panel Factors ........................... 633
Wall Types for Pony Walls ................. 135
Change Roof Pitch or
Height Dialog ................................. 307
Check Plots ....................................... 893
Checklist, IRC ................................... 814
Chief Architect
Exit ..................................................... 83
Serial number ..................................... 62
Terms ................................................... 4
Tools .................................................. 23
Version number ................................... 62
Child Buttons ...................................... 18
Chimneys ........................................... 554
Masonry fireplaces ............................ 554
Metal fireplaces ................................. 554
Chord ................................................. 141
Direction, arc .................................... 737
Circles ................................................ 748
Circle about center ............................ 748
Create .............................................. 748
Draw using center and radius ............. 748
Edit ................................................... 748
Clear the Terrain ............................... 501
Click
Definition .............................................. 5
Close
Create Symbol Wizard ....................... 880
Plans and Views .................................. 83
Views ............................................... 622
Closed Polyline
see also Polylines
983
Index
Tools ................................................. 627

Vector ....................................... 624 , 626
Closets ............................................... 192

Coffered Ceilings.............................. 197
Color Chooser Dialog ...................... 128
Color Chooser eyedropper ................. 128
Color Off/On ...................................... 632
Colors Preferences ............................ 96
Columns............................................. 579
Materials List settings ........................ 110
Tabs ................................................. 713
Columns Tab ..................................... 948
Components ....................... 244 , 560 , 571
Components and Master
List Columns.................................. 944
Components Dialog .......................... 948
Compound Angled Walls ................. 165
Concave
Curved Walls and Resulting Roofs ..... 162
Walls and resulting roofs ................... 162
Concentric ......................................... 788
Copy, CAD ........................................ 788
Concrete Stairs ................................. 364
Cone ................................................... 579
Configurations Tab ............................ 20
Connect Electrical ............................ 432
Connect Walls ................................... 152
Contextual Menu ............................... 654
Contours Tab .................................... 514
Convert
CAD Lines to Terrain Data ................. 528
CAD Objects ..................................... 804
CAD Polylines ................................... 547
Polyline ............................................. 528
Polyline Dialog .................................. 805
Polylines into Special Polylines .......... 804
Polylines into Splines ........................ 771
Room Molding ................................... 449
Schedules to Text ............................. 935
Special Polylines into Polylines .......... 805
Splines into Polylines ........................ 771
to Polyline Road/Sidewalk .................. 535
WLK File to AVI File .......................... 839
Copy ................................................... 792
Architectural Blocks ........................... 558
984
Cabinets ........................................... 464

CAD Objects ..................................... 792
Concentrically ................................... 788
Doors ................................................ 213
Electrical Objects ............................... 434
Floors ............................................... 270
Floors with Edit Area .......................... 821
Folders and Library Objects ............... 570
Images .............................................. 833
Library List ........................................ 570
Library Objects .................................. 590
Restrictions ....................................... 820
Stairs ................................................ 344
Terrain .............................................. 501
Trusses ............................................. 410
Views ................................................ 914
Walls, Railings, and Fences ............... 143
Windows ........................................... 239
Copy with Edit Area .......................... 820

Copy, Cut and Paste ......................... 709
Corner Boards ................................... 443
Corner Cabinets ................................ 467
Corner Windows................................ 234
Countertops, Edit Custom ............... 469
Court
Room label ........................................ 193
Courts................................................. 192
Create
Backdrops ......................................... 648
Bay, Box and Bow Windows Manually . 233
Bench Seat ....................................... 247
CAD Block ......................................... 867
CAD Blocks library ............................. 757
CAD Details ...................................... 759
Compound Angled Walls .................... 165
Cross Section/Elevation Views ........... 637
Doors ........................................ 211 , 234
Exterior Decks ................................... 163
Flared Stair ....................................... 359
Interior Stairwells ............................... 163
Layer Set .......................................... 127
Materials for Raytracing ..................... 676
Model ................................................ 923
Muntins ............................... 65 , 243 , 307
New Electrical Symbol ....................... 868
Create Plant Image ............................ 503

Create Symbol Wizard ...................... 861
Creating Layout Borders .................. 906
Cross Boxes....................................... 746
Cross Hair .......................................... 101
Cross Section Lines.......................... 718
Cross Section Slider Dialog............. 672
Camera Specification Dialog ........ 642
Cross Section/Elevation Views ....... 624
Cross Section/Elevations ......... 910 , 912
Create ............................................... 637
Edit Truss Shape in ............................ 411
Save ................................................. 639
Ctrl key
Pan the display .................................. 617
Cubes .................................................. 579
Cul-de-sacs ........................................ 534
Curb Tab ............................................. 537
Current CAD Layer .................... 122 , 126
Current Floor ..................................... 270
Delete ............................................... 270
Curvature
Handle, curved wall ............................ 149
Curved
Deck Railing ......................................
Roofs ................................................
Stairs ................................. 338 , 345 ,
Stairs Made Tangent .........................
Stairs, Change Radius .......................
Treads ..............................................
Wall Tools .........................................
Walls ........................................ 144 ,
Walls and Roofs ................................
Walls, Draw ......................................
Walls, Edit ........................................
133
328
349
352
353
360
133
152
161
141
148
Custom Counter Tops ...................... 459
Custom Counterholes ...................... 460
Custom Countertop
Custom Countertops, Edit ............... 469
Custom Muntins........................ 219 , 243
Custom Shaped Landings ............... 345
Customize Toolbars ....................... 3 , 18
Cylinders ........................................... 579
D
Dash
Add to dimensions ............................. 696
Decimal feet ...................................... 779
Deck ................................................... 163
Ceiling over ....................................... 163
Create .............................................. 163
Room label ....................................... 193
Deck Designer ................................... 137
Deck Railing ...................................... 189
Deck Railing Defaults ...................... 183
Deck Railings .................................... 132
Decks .................................. 132 , 189 , 192
Default Lights.................................... 661
Default Origin Locations ................. 864
Default Settings .................................. 88
Defaults
Arrow ................................................ 715
Cabinet ............................... 88 , 458 , 487
985
Index
New Fixture ....................................... 868

New floor ........................................... 269
New layout .......................................... 73
New plan ............................................ 72
Nook ................................................. 164
Objects in 3D Views ........................... 634
Plan Database File .............................. 81
Polyline Solids ................................... 547
Pony Wall .......................................... 134
Raked Walls ...................................... 165
Raytrace View ................................... 673
Render Views from Perspective Views 652
Rooms Beneath Staircases ................. 366
Schedules ......................................... 928
Stairwell ............................................ 365
Stepped Walls and Footings ............... 163
Template Plan .................................... 80
Terrain Features ................................ 496
Winders ............................................. 356
Wiring Schematics ............................. 432
Callout ........................................ 89 , 717

Camera ....................................... 88 , 643
DeckRailing ...................................... 183
Dimension ........................... 88 , 682 , 695
Door ................................... 88 , 209 , 229
Dormer ....................................... 88 , 334
Driveway ............................................. 89
Dynamic ............................................. 90
Electrical ..................................... 88 , 441
Fencing .............................. 90 , 181 , 183
Floor ................................... 88 , 207 , 267
Foundation .................................. 89 , 273
Framing .............................. 89 , 377 , 382
Marker ........................................ 89 , 717
Material ...................................... 89 , 614
Plan .............................................. 89 , 91
Pony Wall ......................................... 182
Railing ................................ 90 , 181 , 183
Reset ............................................ 90 , 93
Road .................................................. 89
Road and Sidewalk ............................ 529
Roof ................................................. 286
Room ................................................ 186
Room Material ................................... 186
Schedule .................................... 89 , 927
Sidewalk ............................................. 89
Text ............................................ 89 , 714
Wall .................................... 90 , 130 , 181
Window ............................... 90 , 231 , 265
Define
Light Types ....................................... 665
Line Weight ....................................... 888
Define Material Dialog...................... 605

Delete ......................................... 570 , 795
3D Surface ........................................ 635
Area ................................................. 819
Built-in Fixtures and Appliances ......... 589
Cabinets ........................................... 464
Cabinets (individual or multiple) ......... 464
CAD items ........................................ 795
CAD points ....................................... 751
Callouts ............................................ 719
Current Floor ..................................... 270
Dimension Lines ................................ 686
Dimension section ............................. 686
Doors ............................................... 212
986

Extension Lines ................................. 689
Floors ............................................... 270
Foundation ........................................ 278
Foundations ...................................... 278
Hatch, walls ...................................... 138
Keyboard .......................................... 751
Landing ............................................. 342
Layer Set .......................................... 127
Layout view ....................................... 914
Library Objects .................................. 589
Markers ............................................. 722
Objects ............................................. 821
Polyline Edge .................................... 799
Polyline Solids ................................... 547
Road Objects .................................... 533
Roof Planes .............................. 288 , 303
Shadows ........................................... 664
Stairs ................................................ 342
Stairs/Stair section ............................ 342
Surface ............................................. 650
Temporary Points .............................. 751
Terrain Data ...................................... 501
Tools from Toolbars ............................. 19
Trusses ............................................. 410
Views ................................................ 914
Wall hatch ......................................... 138
Walls ................................................ 152
Windows ........................................... 239
Delete Gable Over Opening ............. 318

Depth .................................................. 384
Fireplace ................................... 549 , 924
Framing ............................................ 384
Detail a Cross Section/Elevation .... 638
Detail Mode, Low .............................. 653
Details
CAD .................................................. 759
Truss ................................................ 412
Wall Framing ..................................... 400
Diagram
Floor and ceiling ................................ 188
Room cross section ........................... 203
Diamond style
see Lites
Dimension Defaults .................... 88 , 682
Locate opening automatically .............

Locate overall ...................................
Locate railing ....................................
Locate specified items .......................
Manual reach ....................................
Metric ...............................................
Min. size on screen ...........................
Minimum area ...................................
Minimum number size ........................
Move CAD item .................................
Move Extension Lines ........................
Move Labels .....................................
Move walls ................................ 146 ,
Move Walls Using ..............................
Number height ..................................
Number Size, individual dimension .....
Offset ...............................................
To openings ......................................
Overall ..............................................
Point to point .....................................
Print size ..........................................
Printing Text and ...............................
Reach, automatic ..............................
Relocate Objects Using .....................
Screen size, minimum .......................
Separation ........................................
Temporary ................................ 685 ,
To electrical items .............................
To openings ......................................
To walls (surface, center, main layer) .
When automatic does not work ..........
697
697
167
683
697
696
697
697
697
690
688
687
690
146
697
693
697
698
697
683
697
891
697
690
697
697
690
699
699
698
685
Dining Room ..................................... 192
Directories ......................................... 102
Display
3D Views .......................................... 632
Arc Centers ........................ 141 , 352 , 780
Arc Ends ........................................... 780
Cabinet Module Lines ........................ 463
Cabinets ........................................... 462
CAD Objects ..................................... 752
Center of curved wall ......................... 141
Control Handles ................................ 769
Dimension Lines ................................ 686
Doors ............................................... 211
Electrical ........................................... 437
Foundations ...................................... 278
987
Index
Dimension Defaults Dialog .............. 695

Dimension Line
Specification Dialog ...................... 692
Dimension Lines
Delete ............................................... 686
Display .............................................. 686
Edit ................................................... 687
Select ................................................ 686
Dimension Tab ................................... 693
Dimension Tools ............................... 682
Dimensions ................................ 758 , 844
1st line offset ..................................... 697
Add extension .................................... 688
Angular dimensions ............................ 683
Angular, CAD ..................................... 758
Automatic reach ................................. 697
Automatic/Manual Toggle ................... 693
To cabinets ................................ 698 699
To CAD ............................. 698 699 , 758
Create interior .................................... 684
Customize individual .......................... 693
Delete complete line ........................... 686
Delete extension line .......................... 689
Delete section .................................... 686
Different Formats ............................... 695
Distance between .............................. 697
Edit ................................................... 687
To electrical items ...................... 698 699
End-to-end ......................................... 683
Erase ................................................ 686
Exterior ............................................. 685
Fireplace, suppress dimension ............ 551
Font ............................................ 97 , 701
General settings ................................. 697
Handle locations ................................ 687
Height ............................................... 697
Imperial ............................................. 696
Inches only ........................................ 697
Interior .............................................. 684
Items located ..................................... 699
Line separation .................................. 697
Locate CAD ....................................... 758
Locate electrical ................................. 435
Locate items ...................................... 698
Locate no locate walls ........................ 167
Locate on walls .................................. 698
Framing ............................................ 401

Inactive Views ................................... 646
Layout Views .................................... 915
Library Objects .................................. 588
Line angle in bearings ....................... 779
Line angle in degrees ........................ 779
Line Angles ............................... 108 , 778
Line Length ............................... 108 , 778
Molding Polylines .............................. 450
Objects ............................................. 125
Pointer CAD Coordinates ..................... 95
Polyline Solids .................................. 547
Pony Walls in Floor Plan View ............ 142
Road Objects .................................... 533
Roof Planes ...................................... 302
Room Labels ..................................... 193
Stairs ................................................ 340
Terrain In 3D Views ........................... 500
Terrain in Floor Plan View .................. 499
Text .................................................. 706
the Master List .................................. 942
View Borders .................................... 916
Windows ........................................... 238
Display Temporary Dimensions...... 685

Displaying Fireplaces ...................... 550
Distance Above Floor ...................... 208
Divided Lites see Lites
Docking the Library Browser .......... 567
Doll House View................................ 652
Door Defaults ...................... 88 , 209 , 229
Door Specification Dialog ............... 219
Door Tools ......................................... 210
Doors
6-panel see Doors, Library
Arch ................................................. 226
Bifold Doors .............................. 210 , 217
Blocked ............................................ 219
Casing, interior and exterior ............... 223
Center .............................................. 214
Change Opening/Hinge Side .............. 215
Change Swing Side ........................... 215
Copy ................................................. 213
Creating your own ............................. 211
Curved doors .................................... 222
988
Custom ............................................. 211

Delete ............................................... 212
Displaying ......................................... 211
Door style, library .............................. 220
Doorways .......................................... 210
Doorways Library ............................... 576
Double-swing .................................... 221
Edit ................................................... 219
Entry ................................................. 235
Exterior Plinth Block .......................... 221
Frame ............................................... 223
Gable over ........................................ 219
Garage .............................................. 211
Headers ............................................ 389
Hinged Doors ............................ 210 , 215
In curved walls .................................. 222
Interior Plinth Block ........................... 221
Library 200 201 , 211 , 220 , 460 , 561 , 576
Lites (across and vertical) .................. 224
Move ................................................. 214
Move (individual or multiple) ............... 214
Move by dragging ...................... 214 , 559
Move restrictions ............................... 214
Muntin Width ..................................... 225
Opening ............................................ 209
Opening, wrapped ............................. 218
Openings in railings ........................... 218
Plinth block, add ................................ 221
Pocket Doors ............................. 210 , 216
Recessed .......................................... 221
Recessed to sheathing layer .............. 221
Replicate ................................... 213 , 558
Resize .............................................. 217
Resizing ............................................ 217
Rough opening .................................. 387
Schedule ........................................... 928
Select ............................................... 212
Select (individual or multiple) ............. 212
Sliding Doors ..................................... 216
Special casings ................................. 222
Standard ........................................... 209
Style ......................... 200 201 , 220 , 561
Swing, change ................................... 215
Swing, changing for bifold .................. 217
Swing, changing for pocket ................ 216
Threshold .......................................... 814
Transom window ............................... 218
Transoms .......................................... 218
Doors and Doorways ........................ 592

Doorways
Openings (ISD) .......................... 878 879
Dormer Defaults .......................... 88 , 334
Dormer Specification Dialog............ 331
Dormers ...................................... 300 , 313
Angled hole for framing ...................... 392
Auto Dormer ...................................... 301
Auto Floating Dormer ......................... 300
Manually drawn .................................. 300
Over Windows and Doors, Gable ........ 318
Double Buffer Drawing ...................... 96
Double Buffered Printing ................. 901
Double Sill see Windows
Double Truss see Trusses
Double-click
Definition .............................................. 5
Drag
Definition .............................................. 5
Draw
Curved Railing ................................... 141
Curved wall ........................................ 141
Curved Walls ..................................... 141
Custom Moldings ............................... 569
Electrical Connections ........................ 432
Framing Members .............................. 401
Wall Framing Members ....................... 401
Walls ................................................. 139
Draw Arc About Center..................... 738
Draw Circle About Center ................ 748
Drawing
Unit ................................................... 851
Dressing Room .................................. 192
Driveway Defaults .............................. 89
Driveway Specification Dialog......... 538
Driveways ........................................... 534
Drop Hip ............................................. 420
Drop Hip Truss see Trusses

Duplicate CAD Blocks ...................... 849
DXF
3D DXF layers ................................... 856
Code ................................................ 857
Export 2D, all floors ........................... 852
Export 2D, cross section .................... 852
Export 2D, current floor ..................... 852
Export 2D, elevation .......................... 852
Export 2D, layers ............................... 854
Export 2D, overview .......................... 852
Export 3D, layers ............................... 856
Export 3D, model .............................. 856
Layers .............................................. 854
vs. DWG ........................................... 844
DXF/DWG
2D View ............................................ 854
Elevation Data, Import ....................... 527
Export 3D ......................................... 856
Files ................................................. 523
Files, Export 2D ................................ 852
Files, Import 2D ................................. 844
Dynamic Defaults ........................... 7 , 90
Dynamic Print Preview............. 886 887
Dynamic Views.................................. 912
E
Earth Data Tab ..................................
Eaves..................................................
Plumb cut .........................................
Square cut ........................................
Edge Lines.........................................
Automatic Edge Lines ........................
Edit
Architectural Blocks ...........................
Arcs Using Handles ...........................
Bay Box, and Bow Windows ...............
Cabinet Door Style ............................
Cabinets ...........................................
Callouts ............................................
Components Dialog ...........................
Curved Walls ....................................
Custom Countertops ..........................
667
392
323
323
863
863
560
766
244
469
467
718
949
148
469
989
Index
Trim .................................................. 223

Trimmers ........................................... 387
Type .......................... 200 201 , 220 , 561
Use to make opening in railing ............ 136
Wrapped opening ............................... 218
Wrapped Openings ............................ 218
Dimension Lines ................................ 687

Doors ............................................... 219
Elevation Data .................................. 502
Extension Lines ................................. 688
Extension lines length ........................ 689
Framing ............................................ 402
in a 3D or Render View ...................... 634
Layout .............................................. 916
Libraries ........................................... 570
Library Objects .................................. 591
Markers ............................................ 722
Masonry Fireplaces ........................... 550
Master List ........................................ 943
Materials ........................................... 604
Materials in Render Views ................. 656
Materials Lists ................................... 946
Objects in Render Views .................... 658
Pier and Grade Beam Foundations ..... 281
Piers and Pads .................................. 281
Polyline Solids .................................. 547
Polylines ........................................... 772
Road Objects .................................... 533
Roof Baselines .................................. 293
Roof Planes ...................................... 304
Room Labels ..................................... 193
Selected Objects ................................. 10
Stairs ................................................ 367
Terrain Perimeter .............................. 502
Text .................................................. 707
Truss Shape in Cross Section View .... 411
Walls ................................................ 147
Walls in 3D ....................................... 151
990
Edit Area ............................................

(All Floors) ........................................
Copies, position exactly .....................
Copy area .........................................
Copy area between floors ..................
Copy area between plans ..................
816
817
820
820
820
820
Copy plan
Copy, hold position between floors .....
Copy, reflected ..................................
Copy/Paste .......................................
Delete area .......................................
Delete contents of plan ......................
Delete floor .......................................
Hold position .....................................
821
821
820
819
819
819
821
Mirror area ................................ 795 , 820

Move ................................................. 817
Move, point to point ........................... 819
Moving speed .................................... 697
Point-to-Point Move ........................... 819
Polylines as selection box .................. 817
Reflect About Line ..................... 795 , 820
Reflective Copy ................................. 821
Rotate area ....................................... 818
Stack copies exactly .......................... 820
Visible ............................................... 816
Edit Camera
In 3D views ....................................... 627
In floor plan view ............................... 629
Components ...................... 437 , 468

in a 3D View ............................... 634
Layout Lines Dialog ................. 917
Menu ............................................. 27
Polyline Parts ............................ 786
Toolbar ......................................... 11
Toolbar Buttons .......................... 65
Type ............................................ 786
Fillet ................................................. 787
Move Corners .................................... 787
Resize .............................................. 787
Edit Walls in 3D................................. 151
Electrical ............................................ 592
Apply materials to .............................. 441
Buttons ............................................. 430
Connect ............................................ 432
Connect Additional ............................ 432
Connections ...................................... 432
Copy ................................................. 434
Delete objects ................................... 434
Dimension to ..................................... 699
Display objects .................................. 437
Draw your own connections ................ 432
General ............................................. 429
Layer to Material Mapping .................. 868
Library .............................................. 577
Light ................................................. 431
Locate, dimensions ............................ 435
Mode ................................................ 430
Move by dragging .............................. 435
Move objects ..................................... 435
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Electrical Defaults ....................... 88 , 441

Electrical Library ............................... 433
Electrical Service
Electrical Tools ................................. 430
Elevation Data ................................... 491
Edit ................................................... 502
Import DXF/DWG ............................... 527
Elevation Line
Elevation Lines and Splines ............ 502
Elevation Point
Elevation Points ........................ 491 , 502
Elevation Tab ..................................... 518
Elevations
Create ............................................... 637
Interior .............................................. 624
Update to layout ................................. 913
End Truss see Trusses
Endcap Length................................... 780
End-to-End Dimensions.................... 683
Energy Heel ........................................ 426
Engineered lumber ... 384 , 390 , 392 , 404 ,
406
Enhanced Metafiles........................... 838
Enter Dimensions ................................. 7
Entry ................................................... 192
Estimating Software.......................... 951
Exit Chief Architect ............................ 83
Expand Room Polyline ..................... 199
Expand/Collapse All.......................... 571
Explode
Block .......................................... 67 , 753
Export................................................. 843
2D DXF/DWG Files ............................ 852
3D DXF, Color or Material Indicator .... 857
3D DXF/DWG Model .......................... 856
an Entire Plan ..................................... 84
Drawing File ...................................... 853
DWG ................................................ 852
DXF, 2D layers .................................. 854
DXF, 3D model .................................. 856
Layers Sets ....................................... 127
Layout Files ...................................... 921
Materials ........................................... 950
Materials List ............................ 950 951
Metafile ............................................. 837
Picture files ....................................... 828
Render view ...................................... 658
to POV-Ray ....................................... 680
VRML ............................................... 840
VRML Files ....................................... 840
Wall Definitions ................................. 160
Windows Metafiles ............................ 837
WMF ................................................. 837
Exposed Beams ................................ 198
Extend .................................. 67 , 798 799
Fence ....................................... 765 , 800
Handle, curved wall ........................... 150
Objects ............................................. 799
Extend Slope Downward.................. 290
Extension Lines, Edit ....................... 688
Extension Tab ................................... 694
Extensions Tab ................................. 700
Exterior
Deck ................................................. 163
Dimensions ....................................... 685
Door, threshold ................................. 814
Room type ........................................ 192
Rooms .............................................. 192
Walls ................................. 131 , 133 , 167
Exterior Fixtures Library ................. 577
Exterior Furnishings Library........... 578
Exterior Rooms ................................. 192
External only ..................................... 698
991
Index
Move using dimensions ...................... 435

Naming items ..................................... 438
Options .............................................. 430
Outlet ................................................ 430
Outlets, automatic .............................. 433
Rotate ............................................... 435
Rotate objects .................................... 435
Select objects .................................... 434
Switch ............................................... 431
Symbol library .................................... 433
F
F6 key
Fill window ........................................ 616
Family Room ..................................... 192
Fascia ................................................. 392
Roof ................................................. 392
Top ........................................... 328 , 330
Faster Raytracing ............................. 678
Faster Rendering .............................. 659
Fence.......................................... 765 , 800
Fencing ...................................... 132 , 138
Fencing Defaults......................... 90 , 183
Field of View............... 642 , 645 , 656 , 840
File Menu ............................................. 23
Fill
Polyline ..................................... 743 , 745
Fill Style Tab ..................................... 743
Fill Window ........................................ 616
Fillers ................................................. 474
Fillet ................................................... 800
Button ................................................. 67
CAD edit type .................................... 787
Notes ................................................ 787
Fillet/Chamfer Dialog ....................... 801
Filter Data .......................................... 525
Final View ........................... 114 , 650 , 654
Finding Files from an
Opened Layout .............................. 920
Fire Box Tab ...................................... 552
Fireplace ...................................... 66 , 549
Chimneys .......................................... 554
Depth ............................................... 550
Dimensions, suppress ....................... 551
Direction facing ................................. 549
Foundations ...................................... 550
Freestanding ............................. 549 , 924
Hearth height .................................... 551
Interior wall ....................................... 549
Library .............................................. 552
Masonry .................................... 549 , 924
No Fire Box ....................................... 552
992
Prefabricated ..................................... 552

Resize .............................. 444 445 , 550
Symbol .............................................. 552
Types ................................................ 549
Fireplace Specification Dialog ........ 550

Fix Connections ................................ 153
Fix Roofs.................................... 288 , 306
Fix Wall Connections ......................... 66
Fixture/Furniture Resize .................... 92
Fixtures .............................................. 577
Built-in, create ................................... 587
Built-in, delete ................................... 587
Counter top ....................................... 868
Layer to Material Mapping .................. 868
Library ...................................... 549 , 587
Stand alone ....................................... 868
Wall .................................................. 868
Fixtures Library
Exterior ............................................. 577
Interior .............................................. 578
Flared Stairs ...................................... 359
Flat Region ........................................ 495
Flip layers see Walls
Floor ....................................................... 2
Combine platform with ceiling ............. 398
Diagram ............................................ 188
Export all ................... 155 156 , 818 , 853
Export current ........... 155 156 , 818 , 853
Framing ............................................ 378
Height ....................................... 201 202
Insert ................................................ 269
Floor Above Height........................... 202
Floor and Ceiling Heights ................ 187
Floor and Ceiling Materials ............. 186
Floor and Ceiling Trusses ............... 408
Floor Camera ..................................... 624
Floor Defaults.............................. 88 , 267
Floor Defaults Setup ........................ 207
Floor Dialog, New ............................. 277
Floor Height ....................................... 207
Floor Overview .......................... 624 , 630
Floor Plan
Wall height ........................................

Wall thickness ...................................
Wall type ...........................................
Width ................................................
275
275
275
172
Footprint, Plan .................................. 760
Foundation ............................................ 2
Foundation Defaults ................... 89 , 273
Foundation Tab ......................... 171 , 274
Foundation Walls...................... 131 , 133
Foundations ...................................... 274
Alignment ......................................... 279
and Room Specification ............. 193 , 282
Automatic ......................................... 274
Below Garage ................................... 282
Build blank plan ................................. 274
Build from 1st floor ............................ 274
Center footings (2 methods) ............... 172
Create .............................................. 274
Delete ............................................... 278
Display ............................................. 278
Edit Pier and Grade Beam ................. 281
Footing width and height .................... 172
Footings specification ........................ 275
Height ............................................... 188
How room name affects ..................... 282
Monolithic slab .................................. 276
Piers specification ............................. 278
Piers, add manually ........................... 280
Piers, automatic ................................ 276
Piers, edit ......................................... 280
Room supplies floor ........................... 205
Set up ............................................... 274
Slab at top of stem wall ..................... 275
Slab, monolithic ......................... 276 , 279
Slab, normal ...................................... 279
Slabs, create two ways ...................... 279
Stem wall .......................................... 275
Thickness ......................................... 172
Turn wall into .................................... 166
Types ............................................... 275
Use Mesh ......................................... 277
Wall .................................................. 171
Fractional Format ............................. 779
Frame and Trim Tab ......................... 223
Framing ...................................... 745 746
and the Materials List ........................ 403
993
Index
Drawing .............................................. 11
Floor Plan View ........................... 12 , 879
Floor Plan View Template ................ 926
Floor Plan Views and
CAD Details............................. 909 , 912
Floor Tools ......................................... 268
Floor/Ceiling Beam ........................... 379
Floor/Ceiling Truss ........................... 379
Floor/Ceiling Truss
Floors
Adding ............................................... 269
Calculate From All .............................. 939
Change Floor/Reference .................... 271
Copying ............................................. 270
Current floor .............................. 268 , 270
Deleting ............................................. 270
Exchange With Floor Above ................ 270
Exchange With Floor Below ................ 270
Floor Up/ Floor Down ......................... 271
FloorTabs .......................................... 383
Insert New Floor ................................ 269
Multiple ............................................. 268
Reference Floor ................................. 271
Reference floor .................................. 268
Swap Floor/Reference ........................ 272
Follow Terrain............ 513 , 522 , 544 , 594
Font Preferences ................................ 97
Fonts ................................................... 704
Choosing ........................................... 704
Different ............................................ 704
Dimensions .................................. 97 , 701
Materials List ............................... 97 , 946
Multiple ............................................. 704
Setup ................................................ 704
Text .................................................... 97
Toolbar ............................................... 97
Footings ............................................. 275
Alignment .......................................... 279
Centered on main layer ...................... 172
Centered on wall ................................ 172
Foundation ........................................ 275
Height ....................................... 172 , 188
Stem wall ........................................... 279
Stepped ............................................. 163
Angled dormer hole ........................... 392

Automatic ................................. 381 , 401
Bearing line ....................................... 396
Bottom plates, number ....................... 386
Butt over support ....................... 384 385
Ceiling .............................................. 378
Ceiling, automatic .............................. 384
Create ...................................... 745 746
Decks ............................................... 189
Depth ............................................... 384
Details .............................................. 400
Display ............................................. 401
Dormer ............................................. 392
Double sill ......................................... 388
Edit .................................... 402 , 745 746
Fascia .............................................. 392
Floor ................................................. 378
Floor, automatic ................................ 384
General ............................................ 401
Headers specification ........................ 389
Joist direction .................................... 397
Lap over support ....................... 384 385
Layer ................................................ 159
Lookouts ........................................... 392
Manual Framing vs. Automatic ........... 378
Manually drawn ................................. 401
Materials List, how affects.................. 403
Mixing Trusses with Stick ................... 413
Platform ............................................ 384
Platform thickness ............................. 384
Rafter information .............................. 392
Reference marker .............................. 394
Regenerating .................................... 402
Represented by single line ......... 401 , 780
Resize items ..................................... 401
Roof ................................................. 378
Rough opening .................................. 387
Sill thickness ..................................... 388
Stud spacing ..................................... 386
Stud thickness .......................... 386 , 391
Top plates, number ........................... 386
Trimmers .......................................... 387
Trusses ............................................ 393
Trusses and rafters mix ..................... 381
Type ................................................. 392
Wall detail ......................................... 400
Walls ........................................ 378 , 400
Walls and materials list ...................... 400
994
Width ................................................ 384

Framing Defaults ........................ 89 , 377
Framing Defaults / Build
Framing Dialog .............................. 382
Framing Overview ............................. 630
Framing Reference Marker ...... 380 , 394
Trusses ............................................. 410
Framing Specification Dialog .......... 403
Framing Tools ................................... 378
Framing Type .... 384 , 390 , 392 , 404 , 406
Frieze Molding ................................... 449
From Line End
Move point ........................................ 752
Full Gable Wall .......................... 170 , 289
Full Height Cabinets ......................... 458
Full Overview ............................ 624 , 630
Furnishings Library, Exterior .......... 578
Furnishings Library, Interior ........... 578
Furniture .............................................. 66
Stand alone ....................................... 578
Table item ......................................... 578
Wall item ........................................... 578
G
Gable
Dormer Over Windows and Doors ....... 318
Gable Roof ................................. 249 , 292

Gable/Roof Line ........................ 288 , 313
Garage ........................................ 192 , 282
Doors ................................................ 211
Foundation ........................................ 282
Panels in door ................................... 220
Room label ........................................ 193
General Cabinet Defaults ................. 487
General Preferences ......................... 100
Generate the Terrain ........................ 500
Generated Roof Styles,
Automatically ................................. 288
Geometric Shapes Library ............... 579
H
Half walls see Railings, solid
Hallways ............................................. 192
Hand Rail Tab .................................... 179
Handles
Cabinets ............................................ 461
Center, curved walls ........................... 149
Curvature, curved wall ........................ 149
Curved stairs ..................................... 344
Curved walls, locked center ................ 150
Extend, curved walls .......................... 150
For wall fireplace ........................ 549 , 924
for Curved Stairs ................................ 341
for Merged Stairs ............................... 341
for Straight Stairs ............................... 341
Move, curved walls ............................. 149
on Curved Walls ................................. 148
Resize, curved walls .......................... 151
Stairs ................................................ 344
Wall offset ......................................... 154
Wall offset, curved ............................. 150
Handrail Tab....................................... 374
Hardiness Zone Maps ....................... 499
Hardware............................................ 650
Hardware Library .............................. 579
Hardware Tab
for Cabinets ...................................... 482
for Doors ........................................... 227
Hatch
DXF .................................................. 181
Patterns .................................... 743 , 745
Polyline ..................................... 743 , 745
Walls ................................................ 138
Hatch Wall ................................. 132 , 138
Headers .............................................. 389
Solid ................................................. 389
Thickness ......................................... 389
Type ................................................. 389
Headers Tab ...................................... 389
Hearth
Depth ............................................... 551
Height ............................................... 551
Height
Basement ceiling ............................... 275
Ceiling .............................................. 202
Ceiling on floor below ........................ 203
Diagram ............................................ 188
Dimension numbers, printing .............. 697
Floor for room ................................... 202
Footing ............................................. 188
Foundation ........................................ 188
Railings ............................................ 177
Restore, walls ................................... 152
Help
Display ................................................. 5
Menu .................................................. 61
Online ................................................. 16
Tips .................................................... 16
Help Tips.............................................. 16
High Shed/Gable ............................... 292
Hill ...................................................... 495
Hip Roof ..................................... 247 , 292
Hip Truss ........................................... 417
see also Trusses
Hold Position Button........................ 821
Holes
In slab .............................................. 280
995
Index
Getting Help ........................................ 16

GFCI Outlets ...................................... 430
Girder Trusses ................................... 421
Glass House ....................................... 653
Glulam ................ 384 , 390 , 392 , 404 , 406
Graphics Directories......................... 103
Grid Snapping.................................... 785
CAD .................................................. 785
Grids
Materials list reports ........................... 111
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupt
see GFCI Outlets
Group Select ......................................... 8
Click method ......................................... 9
Same type item, edit ........................... 10
Gutters ................................................ 324
Remove ............................................. 321
In slab with footing ............................ 280

House Wizard ............................ 140 , 810
Edit rooms ........................................ 810
Hyperlink ........................................... 714
I
Icons
Arrange ............................................ 620
Ignore Subsection Boundaries ....... 355
I-joist ................... 384 , 390 , 392 , 404 , 406
Image Adustment Dialog ................. 676
Image Specification Dialog ............. 834
Images........................................ 593 , 657
3D, add ............................................. 834
Add new ........................................... 834
Copy ................................................. 833
Create .............................................. 834
Definition .................................. 580 , 657
Displaying ......................................... 832
In Layout .......................................... 833
Move ................................................ 833
Place ................................................ 832
Print ......................................... 658 , 902
Resize .............................................. 833
Select from library ..................... 504 , 835
Transparent color .............................. 836
View ................................................. 832
Images and Backdrops .................... 657
Images Library .................................. 579
Imperial .............................................. 696
Plans ................................................ 891
see Units
Import
2D DXF/DWG Files ........................... 844
3D Data ............................................ 860
DWG ................................................ 844
DXF/DWG Elevation Data .................. 527
Layer Sets ........................................ 127
Picture Files ...................................... 826
Terrain Data ...................................... 523
Wall Definitions ................................. 161
Wall layers ........................................ 161
996
Import Drawing Wizard..................... 844

Import Terrain Wizard ...................... 523
Inches Only see Dimensions
Ink Jet
Plotters ............................................. 885
Printers ............................................. 885
Input Arc ............................................ 736
Input Line ........................................... 728
Input Point ......................................... 749
Insert a Floor ..................................... 269
Insert a New Folder .......................... 570
Insert Bitmap ........................... 62 , 66 67
Insert Floor Dialog ............................ 269
Insert Image ......................................... 66
Insulation ........................................... 746
Interior
Fireplace, wall ................................... 549
Room type ......................................... 192
Interior Dimensions .......................... 684
Interior Fixtures Library................... 578
Interior Furnishings Library ............ 578
Interior Stairwell ............................... 163
Invisible Walls ........... 131 , 135 136 , 167
IRC Checklist ..................................... 814
Isometric View........................... 624 , 631
iwalllay.dat and mwalllay.dat .......... 159
J
Jack Trusses see Trusses
Join Roof Planes............................... 306
Joist .................................................... 379
Joist and Rafter Blocking ................ 380
Joist Blocking ................................... 380
Joist Direction ................................... 380
Joist Direction Line .................. 397 398
Joist Direction
Joist Orientation ............................... 382
K
Keeping Layout Views
Current ............................................ 912
Keyboard Camera
Movements...................................... 628
Keyboard Commands................... 8 , 572
Kidney Shaped Terrain
Feature ............................................ 496
Kingpost ..................................... 393 , 425
Kitchen Island.................................... 471
Kitchens ............................................. 192
Knee Wall ........................................... 290
L
Label Tab ............................................ 485
Labels
Cabinet .............................................. 463
Room ................................................ 193
Room, automatic ................................ 814
Truss ................................................. 412
Trusses ............................................. 412
Landing
Height ............................................... 346
Stair .................................................. 345
Landscape Designer ........................ 489

Lap
Framing .................................... 384 385
Laser
Printers ............................................. 885
Laundry Rooms................................. 192
Dialog...................................... 119 , 762
Layer Painter Tool ............................ 124
Layer Sets........................... 119 , 121 , 127
Export ............................................... 127
Import ............................................... 127
Modify all .......................................... 127
Layer Tab ........................................... 123
Layers ........................................ 119 , 855
3D DXF ............................................. 856
3D Views Display .............................. 125
Adding new layers ............................. 120
Advanced Layer Mapping ................... 847
Colors ............................................... 121
Current CAD Layer .................... 122 , 126
Dimension, individual ......................... 693
Export 2D ......................................... 854
Export 3D ......................................... 856
Export Layer Sets .............................. 854
Floor Plan View Display ..................... 125
for 3D DWG/DXF Model ..................... 856
Importing DXF/DWG file layers ........... 847
Layer Sets ................................ 121 , 127
Layout Views .................................... 915
Locking ............................................. 126
Mapping ............................................ 847
Materials Lists ................................... 125
Preferences ...................................... 104
Properties ......................................... 121
Reference Floor Display .................... 126
Rename ............................................ 120
Reset Names .................................... 120
Soffits ............................................... 546
Wall, exporting .................................. 160
Wall, importing .................................. 161
Layout
Add lines ........................................... 917
Border .............................................. 906
CAD and Text in ................................ 908
997
Index
Joists .................................................. 384

Automatically create ........................... 381
Bearing line ....................................... 396
Direction ............................................ 397
Draw new, manually ........................... 379
Framing reference .............................. 384
Framing Type, Engineered lumber .... 384 ,
390 , .............................. 392 , 404 , 406
General information ............................ 401
Type, Glulam ..... 384 , 390 , 392 , 404 , 406
Type, I-joist ........ 384 , 390 , 392 , 404 , 406
Type, Lumber .... 384 , 390 , 392 , 404 , 406
Type, LVL .......... 384 , 390 , 392 , 404 , 406
see also Framing
Joists and Rafters ............................. 381
CAD Detail ................................ 909 , 912

CAD, add .......................................... 908
CAD, modify ...................................... 908
Camera views ................................... 913
Change line length ............................ 916
Change pages ................................... 906
Copy files ............................................ 84
Create a New ...................................... 73
Cross section .................................... 913
Current screen .................................. 908
Display contents ................................ 915
Edit ................................................... 916
Edit lines ........................................... 916
Edit views ......................................... 915
Elevation .......................................... 913
Export ............................................... 921
Filleted border ................................... 907
Finding missing files .......................... 919
Floor plan view .......................... 909 , 912
Images ............................................. 833
Layout Box Layers ............................. 915
Line color .......................................... 918
Line weight ....................................... 910
Lines ................................................ 916
Lines, deleting ................................... 917
Missing Files ..................................... 920
Move view page ................................ 914
Move views ....................................... 914
Open View ........................................ 904
Overview .......................................... 913
Page down ........................................ 906
Page up ............................................ 906
Page zero ......................................... 906
Prepare for ........................................ 904
Print from .......................................... 894
Print to .............................................. 894
Relink File ......................................... 920
Resize view ...................................... 914
Rotate views ..................................... 914
Scale ................................................ 915
Select lines ....................................... 916
Select views ...................................... 914
Send views to ................................... 908
Suppress line merge .......................... 908
Template .......................................... 906
Testing ............................................. 906
Text .................................................. 908
Title block ......................................... 907
998
Using ................................................ 908

View, contents ................................... 915
View, delete ...................................... 914
View, resize ...................................... 914
Layout Borders ................................. 906

Filleted .............................................. 907
Layout Files
Create ............................................... 905
Export ............................................... 921
Open ................................................... 77
Print .................................................. 921
Save ................................................... 73
Layout Files Dialog........................... 920
Layout Views
Copy ................................................. 914
Display .............................................. 915
Relinking ........................................... 919
Select ............................................... 914
Left Button
Definition ............................................... 5
Length
Of arc ............................................... 737
Of chord ............................................ 737
Libraries Categories
My Libraries ...................................... 574
Libraries, Edit.................................... 570
Library
Add a new library ............................... 568
Add a new symbol ............................. 568
Add to the library ............................... 568
Adding objects ................................... 540
Appliances ........................................ 587
Browser ............................................ 564
Cabinets ........................................... 460
Cad Block ......................................... 757
Copy item .......................................... 590
Doors ................................................ 220
Fixtures ............................................. 587
Materials List related ......................... 593
Move item ......................................... 590
Place item ......................................... 586
Primitives .......................................... 579
Library Browser ................................ 564
Navigation Window ............................ 564
Library Browser Preferences ............ 98
Sources ............................................ 660

Types ............................................... 661
Types, Define .................................... 665
Light Specification Dialog ............... 669

Lights ................................................. 431
Adjust ............................................... 666
Attenuated ................................ 440 , 670
Auto Intensity ............................ 439 , 670
Casts Shadows ......................... 441 , 671
Color ........................................ 440 , 670
Connect to switch .............................. 432
Create globe ..................................... 431
Cut Off Angle ............................ 440 , 671
Dir Angle ................................... 440 , 671
Display sources ......................... 441 , 671
Drop Off Rate ............................ 440 , 671
Floor Number .................................... 670
Height ............................................... 670
Light Fixtures .................................... 662
Light Sources .................................... 660
Light Types ....................................... 661
Sources ............................................ 660
Tilt Angle .......................................... 670
Type ......................................... 439 , 670
Line
Endcaps ........................................... 780
Line Color Tab .................................. 918
Line Properties Panel ...................... 108
Line Specification Dialog ................ 731
Line Style Tab ................................... 732
Line Tab ............................................. 732
Line Type ........................................... 855
Line Weight ........................... 95 96 , 888
Line Weight Tab ................................ 917
Line with Arrow................................. 730
Lines........................................... 727 , 888
Change to arcs .................................... 68
Color, layout ..................................... 918
Drawing ............................................ 727
Joist direction .................................... 397
Move ................................................ 766
Select, layout .................................... 916
Separation, dimensions ..................... 697
Show weight on screen ........................ 96
Thick lines displayed on screen ............ 96
999
Index
Library Categories ............................ 573

Architectural Blocks ................... 556 , 574
Backdrops ......................................... 575
Cabinet Doors and Drawers ................ 575
Cabinet Modules ................................ 575
CAD Blocks ....................................... 576
Doors ........................................ 211 , 576
Doorways .................................. 211 , 576
Electrical ........................................... 577
Exterior Fixtures ................................ 577
Exterior Furnishings ........................... 578
Geometric Shapes ............................. 579
Hardware ........................................... 579
Images .............................................. 579
Interior Fixtures .................................. 578
Interior Furnishings ............................ 578
Materials ........................................... 580
Millwork ............................................. 580
Moldings and Profiles ......................... 581
Plants ................................................ 581
Sprinklers .......................................... 582
Terrain ...................................... 499 , 583
Windows ............................................ 583
Library Fireplaces ............................. 552
Library Object Button
Library Object
Library Objects
and the Materials List ......................... 593
Copy ................................................. 590
Delete ............................................... 589
Display .............................................. 588
Edit ................................................... 591
Move ................................................. 590
Place ................................................. 586
Resize ............................................... 590
Select ................................................ 589
Library of CAD Blocks, Create ........ 757
Library Search Dialog ....................... 583
Include folders ................................... 585
Keywords .......................................... 585
Library Types ..................................... 573
Light
Fixtures ............................................. 662
Render Data ...................................... 431
Weight ................................................ 96
LinesTo Arc button ............................ 68
Lites
Craftsman ......................................... 260
Diamond ................................... 225 , 260
Normal ...................................... 225 , 260
Prairie ....................................... 225 , 260
Lites Tab .................................... 224 , 259
Living Area ................. 192 , 194 195 , 208
Calculated ................................ 192 , 194
Deleting ............................................ 194
Label ................................................ 194
Restoring .......................................... 194
vs. Footprint ...................................... 194
vs. Square footage ............................ 194
Living Area vs. Footprint................. 194
Living Rooms .................................... 192
Load Same for Rooms...................... 201
Load the 3D File................................ 862
Load to Make Same Value ............... 816
Locate
Dimensions will find ........................... 683
External only ..................................... 698
Openings, automatically ..................... 697
Walls, both surfaces .......................... 698
Walls, centers ................................... 698
Walls, surfaces .................................. 698
Locate Objects Tab .......................... 698
Locate Roof Plane Intersections .... 311
Lock
CAD layer ......................................... 121
Center of curved walls ....................... 148
Center, curved wall type .................... 148
Roof planes ...................................... 321
Lock Center Arc ................................ 767
Lock Center Button .......................... 148
Lock Center Edit Button .................. 148
Lock Tread Width ............................. 355
Locked Landings .............................. 346
Locked Tread Width ......................... 349
Lookout .............................................. 392
Low Detail Mode ....................... 634 , 653
1000
Lowered Ceiling ................ 189 , 196 , 247

Lowered Region ................................ 495
M
Macros ................................................ 709
Main
Layer surfaces ................................... 698
Main Layer ................................. 159 , 182
Maintaining Tread Width .................. 354
Make Arc Tangent ............................. 768
Edit button ........................................ 154
Make Block ........................................ 753
Make Parallel/Perpendicular............ 796
Make Room Molding
Polyline Dialog............................... 200
Making a Reflective Copy
with Edit Area ................................ 821
Manage
Materials ........................................... 600
Manage Auto Archives ....................... 76
Managing Materials Lists ................. 950
Manual Dimensions .......................... 683
Manual framing ................................. 377
Manual Framing vs.
Automatic Framing ........................ 378
Manual reach
Dimensions ....................................... 697
Manual Roofs ............................ 286 , 295
Manufacturers ................................... 950
Map
to a Single Layer ............................... 847
to Multiple Layers .............................. 847
Marker Defaults ................................... 89
Marker Specification Dialog ............ 723
Marker Tab ......................................... 723
Markers .............................................. 722
CAD .................................................. 753
Create ............................................... 722
Deleting ............................................ 722
Edit ................................................... 722
Marquee ................................................. 9
Masonry .............................................. 554
Fireplace ................................... 549 , 924
see also Fireplace
Stairs ................................................ 365
Master Bathrooms ............................. 192
Master Bedrooms .............................. 192
Master List ................................... 66 , 941
Columns to display ............................. 112
Materials List ............................. 112 , 942
Name of file ....................................... 112
Master list
see also Materials List
Master plan see Profile Plan
Match the Center and Radius .......... 354
Material
Categories, Display ............................ 947
Material Defaults ......................... 89 , 614
Material Definition ............................. 605
Material Export Options Dialog ....... 950
Material Eyedropper.......................... 602
Material List Display
Options Dialog ............................... 947
Material Painter ................................. 602
Material Tab ....................................... 603
Materials ................. 3 , 587 , 656 , 874 , 877
and Raytracing ................................... 676
Applying with Material Tab .................. 603
Calculating, on soffits ......................... 543
Calculation ........................................ 543
Categories ......................................... 608
Color ................................................. 606
Define for Materials List ...................... 600
Editing ............................................... 604
Export ............................................... 950
in a Render View ................................ 656
Library ............................................... 580
Materials List ..................................... 600
OBJ files ............................................ 877
Polyline .............................................
Render properties .............................
Rules for calculating on soffits ...........
Rules for calculation ..........................
Textures ...........................................
941
612
543
543
611

Materials List .................................... 937
Add information ................................. 946
Calculate from all floors ............. 939 940
Calculate from Area ................... 940 941
Calculate from Room ......................... 940
Categories preferences ..................... 113
Categories, Suppress ........................ 947
Change information ........................... 946
Code ................................................ 946
Columns to display ............................ 110
Comment .......................................... 946
Create .............................................. 939
Editing .............................................. 946
Estimating software ........................... 951
Export ....................................... 950 951
Font ............................................ 97 , 946
Framing .................................... 392 , 403
Framing, how affects ......................... 403
Generate .......................................... 939
Grid display on reports ...................... 111
Library Objects .................................. 593
Library sizes ..................................... 593
Manage ............................................ 950
Master list ................................. 112 , 942
Master List preferences ..................... 112
Material, define ................................. 600
Price ................................................. 946
Report style ...................................... 111
Report Style Preferences ................... 111
Supplier ............................................ 946
Wall framing ...................................... 400
Materials List Display Options ....... 947
Materials List Preferences .............. 110
Materials on Soffits .......................... 543
Materials Polyline ............................. 941
Materials, Floor and Ceiling ............ 186
Materials, Managing ......................... 600
Materials, Wall .................................. 187
Maximize ................................................ 5
1001
Index

Move ................................................. 722
Rotate ............................................... 722
Select ................................................ 722
Type to create .................................... 723
Medians.............................................. 534
Menus..................................................... 6
3D ...................................................... 43
Build ................................................... 29
CAD ................................................... 46
Help ................................................... 61
Window ............................................... 59
Merging Stair Sections .................... 348
Mesh
Specify for foundation ........................ 277
Metafiles ............................................ 837
Metric
Dimensions ....................................... 696
Display ............................................. 779
Plans ................................................ 892
see also Units
Middle button
Definition ...................................... 5 , 616
Millwork
Library .............................................. 580
Minimum
Number Size ..................................... 697
Minimum Alcove ............................... 322
Mirror
Area see Edit Area, Reflect
Mitre Ends of Angle Walls ............... 386
Mixing Trusses with
Stick Framing................................. 413
Model Maker ...................................... 923
Printing ............................................. 923
Modify a Plan Database File.............. 82
Modify All Layer Sets ....................... 127
Molding .............................................. 185
3D Molding Line tool .......................... 448
3D molding polyline ........................... 448
Above cabinets ................................. 204
Baseboard ................................ 203 , 208
Chair rail ................................... 203 , 208
Changing profiles .............................. 451
Crown ....................................... 203 , 208
Custom ............................................. 569
Defining ............................................ 204
Door ................................................. 228
Drawing ............................................ 569
1002
Follow soffits ..................................... 204

Frieze ............................................... 449
Height ............................................... 204
Molding Line tool ............................... 448
Molding Polyline tool .......................... 447
Position ............................................. 204
Remove ............................................ 204
Room ................................................ 203
Set per room ............................. 203 , 208
Specifying custom ............................. 204
Width ........................................ 203 , 208
Molding Polyline
Molding Polylines ............................. 447
Displaying ......................................... 450
Molding Profile, Adding ................... 569
Molding Tab
for Floor Defaults ............................... 208
Library..................................... 449 , 581
Moldings Tab
for Cabinets ...................................... 484
for Doors ........................................... 228
for Molding Polylines .......................... 452
for Rooms ......................................... 203
for Soffits .......................................... 545
for Windows ...................................... 264
Monolithic Slab ................................. 276
Monolithic Slab Foundations,
Rebuilding ...................................... 280
Mouse ..................................................... 5
Move
and Resize Framing in Elevation and 3D
Views ............................................. 402
Cabinet Labels .................................. 464
Cabinets ........................................... 465
Cabinets, restrictions ......................... 466
CAD Object with Dimensions .............. 690
CAD Objects ............................. 789 , 791
CAD point ......................................... 751
CAD Point to Point ............................... 67
CAD Points ....................................... 751
Callouts ............................................ 719
Control key ........................................ 241
Move Handle ...................................... 144

Move Object ....................................... 559
Move Restrictions
for Cabinets ....................................... 466
for Doors ........................................... 214
for Stairs ........................................... 343
for Windows ....................................... 240
Move speed
Temporary change ............................. 697
Move to be Coplanar ......................... 307
Move to Framing Reference ............. 790
Move To Front.................................... 790
Move Walls ......................................... 144
With Dimensions ............................... 146

Mudsills ............................................. 276
Mulled Units ....................... 235 , 253 , 880
in Floor Plan View ............................. 880
Materials List .................................... 253
Windows ................................... 235 , 253
Multiple Copy .................................... 792
Multiple Floors
Reverse Plan .............................. 54 , 823
Multiple Objects................................ 589
Multiple Select ...................................... 8
CAD ..................................................... 9
Click method ......................................... 9
in Floor Plan View ............................. 143
Same type item, edit ............................ 10
Multiple Subsections ....................... 353
Multiple Windows ............................. 238
Muntin Bars
see Lites
Muntins
Custom ............................................. 243
in Special Windows ........................... 244
Width ................................................ 224
My Libraries ...................................... 574
N
Name
Of room for plancheck ....................... 813
Room ................................................ 202
Name/Code ........................................ 220

Nested Block ............................. 753 , 758
New Floor Dialog .............................. 277
New Layer Name Dialog ................... 120
New Plans Preferences .................... 103
Newels/Balusters Tab .............. 177 , 372
No Locate
Wall .................................................. 167
Non-Rotating Images ....................... 543
Nooks ................................................. 192
Normal style see Lites
1003
Index
Corners, polyline ................................ 787

Dimension Labels .............................. 687
Dimension Lines ................................ 687
Display .............................................. 616
Drag .................................................. 789
Edit Area ........................................... 817
Extension Lines ................................. 688
Fireplace ........................................... 550
Folders and Library Objects ................ 571
Forced ............................................... 241
Handle, curved wall ............................ 149
Images .............................................. 833
Layout View ....................................... 914
Library item ....................................... 590
Library Objects .................................. 590
Line ................................................... 766
Markers ............................................. 722
Moving speed .................................... 697
Point to Point ..................................... 819
Roof plane edge ................................ 304
Roof Planes ....................................... 790
Stairs ................................................ 343
Stairs, restrictions .............................. 343
Straight and curved walls ................... 145
Text ................................................... 707
Trusses ............................................. 410
Views to a Different Page ................... 914
Walls and Railings ............................. 144
Walls Using Dimensions ..................... 146
Walls with Cabinets Attached .............. 471
Walls, straight and curved .................. 145
Windows ............................................ 240
North Pointer.....................................
Number
Height, definition ...............................
Height, dimensions ............................
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog ...
730
Trimmers ........................................... 387

Windows, create ........................ 878 879
779
697
759
Openings Tab .................................... 387

Options Tab ....................................... 323
for 3D Settings .................................. 645
for Blocked Units ............................... 253
for Doors ........................................... 221
for Furniture ...................................... 595
for Materials List Display options ........ 948
for Soffits .......................................... 545
for Symbols ....................................... 881
for Windows ...................................... 252
Outlets ................................................ 430
Above cabinet ................................... 436
Automatic .......................................... 433
Dishwasher ....................................... 430
Exterior ............................................. 430
For appliance .................................... 436
GFCI ................................................. 430
GFI ................................................... 430
Interior .............................................. 430
Joining .............................................. 431
Manual .............................................. 430
Sink .................................................. 430
WP ................................................... 430
Outlets, Place .................................... 433
Ovals .................................................. 748
CAD .................................................. 748
Create ............................................... 748
Edit ................................................... 748
Overall Dimension ............................ 697
Overhang ........................................... 303
Overview ................................................ 1
Camera tools ..................................... 627
Create ............................................... 624
Full ................................................... 624
Plan .................................................. 624
O
OBJ Files ........................................... 877
Object Snapping ............................... 780
Object Specification Dialog ............ 602
Object-Based Design ........................... 2
Offices................................................ 192
Offset
Curved wall handles .......................... 150
Dimensions, first line ......................... 697
Handles ............................................ 153
Handles, walls ................................... 154
Wall handles, curved ......................... 150
One Stretch Plane............................. 872
One-Click Auto Dimension .............. 685
Open
2nd floor plan ...................................... 77
3D Home Architect files ....................... 72
Different file types ............................... 77
Directory ............................................. 77
Files from a different version ................ 77
Last four plans recently opened ........... 78
Plan .................................................... 77
Polyline, definition ............................. 727
Open Below ....................................... 192
Open Object ................................ 10 , 591
Open Symbol ........ 28 , 571 , 592 , 880 881
Opening a Plan or Layout File .......... 77
Opening Tab ...................................... 882
Opening Template Files ..................... 79
Openings ................................... 878 879
Dimension locate ............................... 697
Dimensions to ................................... 699
Doorways, create ...................... 878 879
Ignore casing for resize ....................... 92
Size .................................................. 387
1004
P
Pads
Edit ................................................... 281
Page
Down ................................................ 906
Move ........................................ 280 281

Move by dragging .............................. 281
Move, by dimensions ......................... 281
Resize .............................................. 281
Piers and Pads .................................. 280

Edit ................................................... 281
Pitch .................................... 290 , 328 , 330
Show as degrees ................................. 92
Pixels
Dimension height .............................. 697
Place
Framing Reference Markers ............... 395
Gable Over Window(s) ....................... 237
Images ............................................. 832
Library Objects .................................. 586
Outlets ............................... 136 , 192 , 433
Soffits ............................................... 542
Switches ........................................... 431
Under Roof - Rectangular .................. 248
Under Roof Slope .............................. 248
Place Library Object Button ............ 588
Plan
Drawing .............................................. 11
Rotate view ....................................... 822
Plan Check ........................................ 813
and room labels ................................ 192
Restart .............................................. 813
Plan Check Dialog ............................ 813
Plan Database File.............................. 81
Plan Defaults ......................... 89 , 91 , 141
Plan Defaults Dialog........................... 92
Plan Export ........................................ 658
Plan Files
Save ................................................... 73
Plan Find Wizard................................. 80
Plan Footprint ................................... 760
Plan Materials Dialog ....................... 601
Plan Templates ................................... 79
Plan Thumbnail, Save ........................ 74
Plan Trace.......................................... 827
Plan View ............................................. 12
Plan View Tab ................................... 882
1005
Index
Up ..................................................... 906
Page Setup Dialog ............................. 898
Pan
Display .............................................. 616
the Display ........................................ 616
Using arrow keys ............................... 616
Using Control key ............................... 616
Using scroll bars ................................ 616
Paper
Orientation ......................................... 898
Size ................................................... 904
Paper Orientation .............................. 898
Parallel Light...................................... 665
see Lights .......................................... 663
Parallel/Perpendicular ................ 67 , 790
Illustrated .......................................... 796
Parent Buttons.................................... 18
Partial break....................................... 799
Partition .............................................. 459
Path
To Master list ..................................... 112
Pattern Tab......................................... 610
Perspective Views ............................. 624
Zoom ................................................. 633
Perspectives and
Overviews ............................... 911 , 913
Picture File Box
Picture Files
Export ............................................... 828
Import ................................................ 826
Scale ................................................. 827
Picture, Save a Render View............ 658
Pier and Grade Beam Foundations,
Edit .................................................. 281
Piers .................................................... 276
Automatic .......................................... 278
Beam, relationship ............................. 281
Create automatically .......................... 278
Create manually ................................. 280
Delete ............................................... 281
Edit ................................................... 280
Manually add ..................................... 280
Plans
Copy files ............................................
Create a new plan ...............................
New ....................................................
Open ..................................................
Save ...................................................
Search ................................................
Transfer ..............................................
84
72
72
77
73
80
84
Plant Chooser Dialog ....................... 507
Plant Encyclopedia .......................... 507
Plant Image Specification
Dialog.............................................. 503
Plants
Library .............................................. 581
Plates ................................................. 386
Platform Holes .................................. 280
Platforms
Cape Cod, combine ........................... 398
Combine floor and ceiling .................. 398
Thickness, information ....................... 203
Plinth Blocks ..................................... 221
Plot plan
North pointer ..................................... 730
Plotters
Ink Jet Plotters .................................. 885
Test .................................................. 897
Types ............................................... 885
Plumb Cut Eaves .............................. 323
Point
see also CAD point
Point Light ......................................... 665
Point Markers .................................... 750
Point to Point
Dimensions ....................................... 683
Move, Area ....................................... 819
Point to Point Dimensions .............. 684
Pointer
Coordinates ............................ 6 , 95 , 765
Cross Hair ........................................ 101
Pointers and Arrows ........................ 718
Points ................................................. 749
Point-to-Point Move ......................... 790
1006
Point-to-Point Move
with Edit Area ................................ 819
Polyline .............................................. 727
3D molding polyline ........................... 448
Adjust ............................................... 787
Area .................................................. 741
Auto snap .......................................... 777
Definition ................................... 727 , 741
Edit Area ........................................... 817
Reshape ........................................... 787
Stretch .............................................. 787
Tool to create rectangular .................. 745
Polyline Intersection ........................ 803
Polyline Solid .................................... 547
Display .............................................. 547
Polyline Solid Specification
Dialog .............................................. 548
Polyline Specification Dialog .......... 741
Polyline Subtract .............................. 804
Polyline Tab ....................................... 741
Polyline Union ................................... 802
Polylines
Molding Polyline tool .......................... 447
Pony Wall Defaults ........................... 182
Pony Walls ......................... 131 , 134 , 151
Change wall types ............................. 135
Create ............................................... 134
Display .............................................. 142
Pony walls
see also Railings, solid
Porch
Room label ........................................ 193
Porches .............................................. 192
Post .................................................... 380
Post Specification Dialog ................ 406
Posts/Beams Tab .............................. 390
POV-Ray ............................................. 679
Prairie style
see Lites
Preferences ................................. 90 , 571
3D .................................................... 645
CAD .................................................. 776
CAD Snaps ....................................... 780
Prepare for Layout ............................ 904

Preview vs. Final Render View ........ 654
Primitives
Library ............................................... 579
Print
Center Sheet ..................................... 888
Check plots ........................................ 893
Color or Black and White .................... 901
Directly from a View ........................... 893
Double-buffered printing ..................... 901
Drivers .............................................. 885
from Layout ....................................... 894
From view .......................................... 893
Image ........ 625 626 , 650 651 , 658 , 902
In color .............................................. 632
Introduction ....................................... 897
Layout Files ....................................... 921
Line weight ........................................ 888
Model ................................................. 27
Options .............................................. 886
Problems ........................................... 955
Render Views .................................... 658
Scale to Fit ........................................ 893
Services ............................................ 905
Setup ................................................ 904
Text and Dimensions .......................... 891
the Model .......................................... 923
Tiled .................................................. 894
to a File ............................................. 895
To scale ............................................ 892
Print Model Dialog............................. 924
Print Preview ..................................... 887
Print to a Remote Plotter.................. 895
Printer Setup...................................... 904
Printers
Select printer ..................................... 900
Set up ............................................... 904
Test ................................................... 897
Types ................................................ 885
Profile Plans ....................................... 79
Project Browser .................................. 78

Projecting Library Fireplaces ......... 554
Property lines.................................... 728
North pointer ..................................... 730
Proportional Resize.......................... 787
Q
Quoin Specification Dialog ............. 446
Quoins................................................ 445
R
Radius ........................................ 142 , 736
Radius of Curved Stairs, Change ... 353
Radius To .......................................... 168
Rafter Blocking ................................. 380
Rafter depth ...................................... 329
Rafters ....................................... 379 , 392
and Trusses ...................................... 382
Automatically create .......................... 381
Common ........................................... 420
Depth ....................................... 331 , 382
Depth, individual roof plane ............... 331
Draw new, manually .......................... 379
General ............................................ 401
Height ............................................... 379
Mixing with trusses ............................ 413
Trusses mix ...................................... 381
see also Framing
Railing
Balusters .......................................... 177
Newels ............................................. 177
Railing Defaults .......................... 90 , 183
Railing Tab ........................................ 174
Railings ...................................... 132 , 136
Balusters .......................................... 174
Change wall into railing ..................... 166
Connect walls ................................... 153
Curved, jumpy when drawing ............. 141
Exterior Materials .............................. 176
Fix connections ................................. 153
1007
Index
Color .................................................. 96
Contextual menus ............................... 95
Global settings .................................... 94
Reset preferences .............................. 118
Show line weight ................................. 96
Half walls ..........................................

Height defined ...................................
Located by dimension lines ................
Moving ..............................................
No Rail .............................................
No Shoe ...........................................
Open rail type ...................................
Open with middle rail .........................
Openings ..........................................
Raise Shoe .......................................
Selecting in Floor Plan View ..............
Solid .................................................
Special .............................................
Type .................................................
174
177
167
144
175
176
175
175
218
176
143
174
364
174
Raise
Off plate ............................................ 322
Off plate, truss .................................. 426
Shoe ................................................. 176
Raised / Lowered Region

Raised Region ................................... 495
Raked walls ....................................... 151
Create .............................................. 165
Raytrace
Create .............................................. 673
Image Adustment Dialog .................... 676
Materials ........................................... 676
Parameters ....................................... 674
Properties ......................................... 674
Quality .............................................. 678
Raytrace Tab ..................................... 677
Raytrace Window .............................. 676
Reach
Automatic dimensions ........................ 697
Manual dimensions ............................ 697
Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings .......... 66
Rebuilding Monolithic Slab
Foundations ................................... 280
Recessed
Door ................................................. 221
Rectangular Hip Roof....................... 249
Rectangular Polyline ........................ 745
Reduce Gable .................................... 426
Reference Floor ........................ 126 , 270
1008
Color ................................................... 96
Reference Floor Color ........................ 96
Reference Grid .................................... 93
Reflect
Area see Edit Area
Reflect About Line ............................ 795
Reflect About Line with Edit Area .. 820
Reflect Tools ............................. 436 , 468
Refresh Display................................... 59
Refresh Library Browser.................. 568
Regenerate Framing ......................... 402
Relative
to Current Point, new line end ............ 729
to Current Point, new point ................. 749
to Current Point, polar, new line end ... 729
to Current point, polar, new point ........ 750
to Itself, move point ........................... 751
to Previous Point, move point ............. 752
Relocate Objects Using
Dimensions .................................... 690
Remove 3D ................................... 66 , 636
Remove Backdrop............................. 648
Remove Deck Framing ..................... 189
Remove Muntins ............................... 244
Render
Added Lights ..................................... 663
Ambient light ..................................... 660
Create a Render View ........................ 652
Daytime Ambient ............................... 661
Display light sources .................. 441 , 671
Export view ....................................... 658
Field of view ...................... 642 , 645 , 656
Final ................................................. 655
Floor Overview .......................... 652 , 673
Graphics card .................................... 650
Interior Ambient ................................. 661
Light Fixtures .................................... 662
Light Sources .................................... 660
Light sources ..................................... 660
Nighttime Ambient ............................. 661
Overviews ................................. 652 , 673
Preferences ....................................... 114
Preview ............................................. 655
Save view ......................................... 658
Render Camera
Edit ................................................... 627
Field of View .............................. 642 , 645
Render Data Tab ........................ 439 , 668
Render Full Overview ............... 652 , 673
Render Preferences .......................... 114
Render Settings ................................. 115
Render Tab ......................................... 612
Render Tips and Tricks .................... 659
Render Tools ..................................... 650
Render Views ..................................... 652
Ediiting Objects in .............................. 658
Repair Broken Walls ......................... 153
Replace from Library Button ........... 573
Replace from Library Dialog ............ 573
Replicate Object ........................ 435 , 465
Report style
Grid display settings ........................... 111
Materials List ..................................... 111
Rescale
Layout view ....................................... 915
Rescale Views.................................... 915
Reset Defaults .............................. 90 , 93
Reset Preferences ............................. 118
Reset to Defaults ................................ 93
Reshape Splines................................ 768
Reshape Text ..................................... 707
Resize
(Proportional) ..................................... 787
an Image ........................................... 833
Cabinet .............................................. 466
Cabinets ............................................ 466
Callouts ............................................. 719
Components ...................................... 244
Corner Boards ........................... 444 445
Corner cabinet ................................... 467
Doors ............................................... 217

Enable for symbols .............................. 92
Factor ............................................... 827
Fireplace ............................ 444 445 , 550
Framing items ................................... 401
Handle, curved walls ......................... 151
Handles ............................................ 150
House using Exterior Dimensions ....... 690
Ignore casing ...................................... 92
Image ............................................... 833
Layout view ....................................... 914
Library Objects .................................. 590
Picture .............................................. 828
Stairs ................................................ 342
Stem Walls ....................................... 279
Views ............................................... 914
Walls ................................................ 147
Windows ........................................... 241
Restore
Toolbars ............................................. 23
Wall heights in 3D ............................. 152
Restrictions
Move door ......................................... 214
Move stairs ....................................... 343
Retain
Attic wall ........................................... 167
Wall Framing ..................................... 168
Retaining Wall ................................... 132
Reverse
Wall layers ................................ 167 168
Reverse Direction ............................. 796
Reverse Plan ..................................... 823
Multiple Floors ............................ 54 , 823
Ridge .................................................. 392
Top, edit roofs ........................... 328 , 330
Right button
Definition .............................................. 5
Right-click ......................................... 461
Rim Joist............................................ 384
Road and Sidewalk Defaults ........... 529
Road Defaults ..................................... 89
Road Marking .................................... 532
Road Marking Specification
Dialog.............................................. 539
1009
Index
View Picture, Save ............................. 658

View, Edit in ...................................... 634
View, Materials .................................. 656
View, Preview vs. Final ...................... 654
View, Print ......................................... 658
Road Objects
Delete ............................................... 533
Different Types .................................. 530
Display ............................................. 533
Edit ................................................... 533
Select ............................................... 533
Road Polyline .................................... 530
Road Specification Dialog ............... 536
Road Stripe........................................ 531
Road Stripes and Markings ............. 535
Roads ................................................. 530
Roads and Road Polylines .............. 534
Roof Baseline Specification
Dialog.............................................. 325
Roof Baseline Tab ............................ 326
Roof Baselines.......................... 293 , 296
Edit ................................................... 293
Using ................................................ 294
Roof Beam ......................................... 379
Roof Defaults .................................... 286
Roof Framing .................................... 378
Roof Group ........................................ 203
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification
Dialog.............................................. 334
Roof Mode ......................................... 288
Roof Over a Curved Wall ................. 161
Roof Plane ......................................... 288
Low roof planes ................................. 321
Roof Plane Intersections,
Locate ............................................. 311
Roof Plane Specification
Dialog.............................................. 326
Roof Planes ............................... 288 , 295
Delete ............................................... 303
Display ............................................. 302
Edit ................................................... 304
Roof Styles, Automatically
Generated ....................................... 288
Roof Tab .................................... 170 , 391
Roof Tools ......................................... 287
Roof Truss ................................. 379 , 408
1010
Roof Truss Specification

Dialog .............................................. 424
Roofs .................................................. 926
2nd pitch ................................... 170 , 289
Angled baselines ............................... 328
Auto Rebuild Roofs ............................ 321
Auto Roof Return ............................... 171
Automatic .......................................... 287
Automatic vs. Manual ......................... 286
Baseline ............ 293 , 296 , 303 , 328 , 330
Birdsmouth ........................................ 329
Boxed Eave ....................................... 328
Build Roof Dialog ............................... 319
Concave walls ................................... 162
Curved .............................................. 328
Over curved wall ................................ 161
Dormers ............................................ 300
Extend slope downward ..... 170 , 289 290
Fascia ............................................... 392
Fascia top ................................. 328 , 330
Fix .................................................... 306
Framing ............................................ 378
Full gable wall ........................... 170 , 289
Gable ................................................ 292
Gable, automatic ............................... 292
Gable, define ..................................... 292
Gutters .............................. 323 324 , 329
High shed/gable ................ 170 , 289 , 292
Hip .................................................... 292
Hole for skylights ............................... 317
Ignore Top Floor ................................ 321
Knee walls ........................ 170 , 289 290
Lock .................................................. 304
Lock roof planes ................................ 321
Lookouts ........................................... 392
Manual .............................................. 295
Min. Alcove ....................................... 322
Over concave walls ............................ 162
Over this room ................................... 205
Overhang .................................. 303 , 321
Pitch ................. 170 , 289 290 , 328 , 330
Plumb cut eaves ................................ 323
Rafter depth, individual roof plane ...... 331
Rafter tails ........................................ 328
Raise off plate ................................... 322
Retain edits ............................... 321 , 329
Retain manually drawn planes ............ 321
Roofs and Curved Walls ................... 161

Room
Size of Label ....................................... 99
Room Defaults ................................... 186
Room Definition................................. 189
Room Interior Area............................ 194
Room Labels ...................................... 193
Area .................................................. 193
Change text ....................................... 193
Delete ............................................... 193
Dimensions ........................................ 193
Display .............................................. 193
Edit ................................................... 193
Foundation, effect on ......................... 205
Move ................................................. 193
Name options .................................... 202
Size .................................................... 99
Room Material Defaults .................... 186
Room Molding Polylines .................. 200
Room Polylines ................................. 199
Room Sizes ........................................ 194
Room Specification ........................... 191
Room Specification Dialog .............. 201
And foundations ................................. 282
Room Types ....................................... 192
Rooms.................................................... 2
Area calculations ............................... 194
Area, display ...................................... 194
Baseboard ................................. 203 , 208
Below stairs ....................................... 366
Ceiling height ..................................... 202
Chair rail molding ...................... 203 , 208

Crown molding .......................... 203 , 208
Define deck as .................................. 163
Define stairwell as ............................. 163
Diagram ............................................ 203
Edit information ................................. 201
Exterior type ..................................... 192
Floor height ....................................... 202
Foundation floor definition .................. 205
Foundation, effect on ......................... 282
Height, ceiling ................................... 202
Height, floor ...................................... 202
Interior type ...................................... 192
Labels .............................................. 191
Labels, edit ....................................... 193
Molding specification ................. 203 , 208
Name ................................. 191 , 201 202
Name for PlanCheck .......................... 813
Naming, automatic ............................ 814
Opening for specification ................... 191
Platform thickness ............................. 203
Roof over this .................................... 205
Select ............................................... 202
Selecting ........................................... 191
Size, display ..................................... 194
Structure ........................................... 201
Rotate
an Area .............................................
Architectural Blocks ...........................
Area, see Edit Area
Cabinet, individual ..................... 466 ,
Cabinets ...........................................
Cabinets, multiple ...................... 466 ,
CAD items ........................................
Electrical ...........................................
Electrical Objects ..............................
Jump ................................................
Markers ............................................
Plan View .........................................
Scaled Views ....................................
Stairs ................................................
Text ..................................................
View .................................................
818
559
559
466
559
777
435
435
777
722
822
914
344
707
822
Rotate/Resize About ........................ 776
Rough Opening ................................. 387
Doorways (ISD) ......................... 878 879
Windows (ISD) .......................... 878 879
1011
Index
Returns ............................................. 302

Ridge/top ................................... 328 , 330
Roof Plane ......................................... 288
Second pitch ...................................... 171
Show all ridges .................................. 323
Show pitch as degrees ................. 92 , 328
Skylights ............................................ 317
Square cut eaves ............................... 323
Story-and-a-half ................................. 290
Supply ............................................... 323
Trusses ............................................. 322
Upslope Mark .................................... 303
Vertical Rafter Depth .......................... 329
Rounding Corners ............................ 787
S
Same Wall Type ........................ 107 , 140
Sash and Frame Tab ........................ 254
Save
3D Cameras ...................................... 635
Bitmap ...................................... 626 , 651
Cross Section/Elevation Cameras ...... 639
Plan .............................................. 73 74
Plan and Layout Files .......................... 73
Plan Thumbnail ................................... 74
Render View Picture .......................... 658
Section/Elevation Cameras ................ 639
see also Autosave
Save and Save As ............................... 74
Saved Cameras ................................. 646
Scale
Layout view ....................................... 915
Print ................................................. 892
Scale Data.......................................... 526
Scale Picture Files ........................... 827
Scale to Fit ........................................ 893
Scale, Print to ................................... 892
Schedule Defaults ...................... 89 , 927
Schedule Example ............................ 935
Schedule Specification
Dialog.............................................. 928
Schedules to Text, Convert ............. 935
Schedules, Create ............................ 928
Schematics, Wiring .......................... 432
Scissor Truss .................................... 422
Scroll bars ......................................... 617
Pan .................................................. 616
Search for Plans ................................. 80
Search the Master List ..................... 943
Section see Cross section
Section/Elevation
Views, Create ................................... 637
Views, Detailing ................................ 638
1012
Select
Blocked Units .................................... 238
Cabinets ........................................... 461
CAD Objects ..................................... 765
CAD Objects Using a Fence ............... 765
Callouts ............................................ 718
Click method ......................................... 9
Components ...................................... 557
Components of Blocked Units ............. 239
Dimension Lines ................................ 686
Door, individual ................................. 212
Doors ................................................ 212
Doors, multiple .................................. 212
Edit same type item ............................. 10
Group, drag method ............................... 8
Group, marquee method ........................ 8
Layout Lines ...................................... 916
Layout Views ..................................... 914
Library Objects .................................. 589
Markers ............................................. 722
Materials with the Material Tab ........... 603
Multiple Cabinets ............................... 461
Multiple CAD items ................................ 9
Multiple items ........................................ 9
Multiple Text Objects ......................... 707
Objects ................................................. 8
Objects in 3D Views ........................... 634
Road Objects .................................... 533
Room ........................................ 191 , 202
Select/Make Fence tool ...................... 765
Stacked Cabinets .............................. 462
Stairs ................................................ 340
Terrain Data ...................................... 501
Text .................................................. 706
Wall .................................................. 151
Walls in cross section ........................ 151
Walls, Railing, and Fences ................. 143
Windows ........................................... 238
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
Backdrop ................................ 648

File .................................. 524 , 845
Layers ..................................... 846
Library Object Dialog ........... 572
Next Object ................................ 9
Objects .................................. 8 9
Sidewalk ............................................ 532

Sidewalk Defaults ....................... 89 , 529
Sidewalk Polyline ............................. 532
Sidewalk Specification
Dialog.............................................. 539
Sill ...................................................... 388
Double .............................................. 388
Thickness ......................................... 388
Single Section Stairs ....................... 353
Site ......................................................... 3
Size
Room, display ................................... 194
Sizing Symbols ................................. 871
Sizing Tab .......................................... 882
Skylights .................................... 288 , 317
Shaft surfaces ................................... 317
Slab ............................................ 192 , 279
At top of stem wall ............................. 275
Monolithic ......................................... 276
Thickness ......................................... 193
Toolbar button ................................... 280
Slab Holes ......................................... 280
Slab Specification Dialog ................ 283
Slabs ................................... 192 , 279 280
and the Materials List ........................ 280
Sliding Doors .................................... 210
Sloped Soffits ................................... 546
Snap Properties
Preferences ............................ 108 , 780
Soffit Defaults ................................... 541
Soffit Specification Dialog .............. 544
Soffits.................................. 198 , 458 , 541
Angled .............................................. 198
Beams .............................................. 198
Layer ................................................ 546
Material ............................................ 545
Minimum size .................................... 541
Place under ceiling ............................ 545
Place under Roof .............................. 545
Sloped soffit ...................................... 545
Sloped, place under roof .................... 545
Special applications ........................... 542
Softening the Flare Radius.............. 361
1013
Index
Select Same / Load Same ......... 469 , 815

for Rooms .......................................... 201
Select Walls ....................................... 143
Select/Make Fence .................... 765 , 800
Selected Line Tab.............................. 742
Selection Restrictions ...................... 462
Send to layout
Entire plan ......................................... 908
Line weight ........................................ 908
Scale ................................................. 908
Send Views to Layout ....................... 908
Separation
Between dimension lines .................... 697
Service Data Tab ............................... 438
Setup Tab ................................... 695 696
Shadows ............................................. 664
Shadows see Sun Angle
Shape
Walls ................................................. 151
Window ..................................... 261 , 878
see also Windows
Shape Tab .......................................... 261
Shelf .................................................... 459
Create ....................................... 459 , 462
Shelf/Partition Specification
Dialog .............................................. 485
Shoe
None for railing .................................. 176
Raise for railing .................................. 176
Short Extensions ....................... 696 , 701
Shortcut Keys ....................................... 8
Show
0" ...................................................... 696
Dash in dimensions ............................ 696
Dimensions, inches only ..................... 697
Dimensions, metric ............................. 696
Imperial dimensions ........................... 696
Inches only, dimensions ..................... 697
Metric dimensions .............................. 696
Pitch as degrees ................................. 92
Short extensions ........................ 696 , 701
Show all ridges .................................. 323
Shutters .............................................. 260
Solid Fill .................................... 743 , 745

Solid Railings .................................... 364
SpacePlanner Toolbar
Configuration ................................... 22
Special CAD Buttons.......................... 64
Special CAD Preferences ................ 109
Special Details .................................. 760
Special Shaped Cabinets................. 472
Special Use Arrow ............................ 705
Specification Dialogs
3D Molding Polyline ........................... 453
Architectural Block ............................ 561
Beam ................................................ 405
Cabinet ............................................. 475
Callout .............................................. 719
Camera ............................................. 641
Ceiling Plane ..................................... 330
Cross Section/Elevation Camera ........ 642
Custom Countertop ........................... 486
Dimension Line ................................. 692
Door ................................................. 219
Dormer ............................................. 331
Driveway ........................................... 538
Electrical Service .............................. 437
Elevation Line ................................... 518
Elevation Point .................................. 515
Framing ............................................ 403
Library Object ................................... 594
Library Object Button ......................... 588
Light ................................................. 669
Line .................................................. 731
Marker .............................................. 723
Molding Polyline ................................ 451
Object ............................................... 602
Plant Image ...................................... 503
Post .................................................. 406
Road ................................................ 536
Road Marking .................................... 539
Roof Baseline ................................... 325
Roof Hole/Skylight ............................. 334
Roof Plane ........................................ 326
Schedule .......................................... 928
Shelf/Partition ................................... 485
Sidewalk ........................................... 539
Slab .................................................. 283
Soffit ................................................. 544
1014
Sun Angle ......................................... 666

Text .................................................. 711
Wall .................................................. 166
Wall Hatch ........................................ 180
Wall Height ....................................... 152
Window ............................................. 249
Specify Custom Moldings ................ 204

Specify Pitch ..................................... 290
Speed
3D views ........................................... 646
Speed up 3D View Generation......... 633
Spell Check........................................ 811
Sphere ................................................ 579
Spherical Backdrops ........................ 657
Spiral Staircase................................. 578
Spline Handles .................................. 768
Spline Tab .......................................... 745
Splines ............................................... 744
Split
Walls ................................................ 139
Split Levels ........................................ 198
Split-entry
sample .............................................. 198
Spot Light .......................................... 665
Sprinkler Designer ............................ 498
Sprinkler Tools.................................. 498
Sprinklers Library ............................. 582
Square Cut Eaves ............................. 323
Stacked Windows ............................. 234
Stacked/Blocked Doors.................... 213
Stair Designer ................................... 337
Stair Direction ................................... 338
Stair Landing Specification
Dialog .............................................. 375
Stair Landings ................................... 345
Stair Sections, Merge ....................... 348
Stair Tools ......................................... 338
Staircase
Spiral ................................................ 578
Staircase Specification Dialog ........ 367
Stairs
Stairwell.............................................. 163
Create ....................................... 163 , 365
Opening ............................................ 365
Standard Windows ............................ 232
Start Direction ................................... 737
Start House Wizard ........................... 810
Starter Tread ................................ 66 , 362
Static Views....................................... 912

Status Bar ........................................ 6 , 95
Steel Stringer .................................... 364
Stem Wall........................................... 275
Slab at top ........................................ 275
Stem Walls and Footings, Align ..... 279
Stem Walls, Resize ........................... 279
Step Down Hip .................................. 417
Advantages and disadvantages .......... 421
Stepped
Footings ........................................... 163
Foundation ........................................ 163
Walls ........................................ 151 , 163
Stick Framing
Mixing with Trusses ........................... 413
Storage Rooms ................................. 192
Story-and-a-half ................................ 290
Platforms, combine ............................ 398
Straight Stairs ................................... 338
Straight Walls.................................... 144
Stretch Zones.................................... 873
Stretching a Line .............................. 766
Stringer (Stair)
Dimensions ....................................... 371
Structure Tab ............................ 205 , 282
Stud
Spacing ............................................ 386
Thickness ................................. 386 , 391
Studies ............................................... 192
Style Dialog, Number Style/Angle .. 759
Style Tab ............................................ 370
Sub girder hip
Advantages and disadvantages .......... 421
Subcategories ................................... 947
Subfloor ............................................. 384
Thickness ......................................... 385
Subgirder hip .................................... 418
Submenu
Definition .............................................. 6
Subsection
Stairs ................................................ 369
1015
Index
Adjust using handles .......................... 344

Align curved stairs.............................. 349
Align curves between floors ................ 352
Align ends of curved ........................... 350
Balusters ........................................... 372
Copy ................................................. 344
Curved .............................................. 349
Delete ............................................... 342
Delete section .................................... 342
Display .............................................. 340
Down ................................................. 339
Edit ................................................... 367
Exterior Colors ................................... 371
Flared ................................................ 359
Landing, delete .................................. 342
Large Stringer Base ........................... 371
Make Reach ...................................... 368
Merge ................................................ 348
Move ................................................. 343
Newels .............................................. 372
Open underneath ............................... 371
Opening ............................................ 365
Reach next floor ................................. 368
Resize ............................................... 342
Revert ............................................... 369
Rise angle ......................................... 369
Room below ....................................... 366
Rotate ............................................... 344
Section width ..................................... 369
Sections, merge ................................. 348
Select ................................................ 340
Stairwell, create ................................. 365
Subsection ......................................... 369
Tread width ........................................ 369
Treads, define .................................... 370
Treads, retain number ........................ 370
View in 3D ......................................... 340
Walk line ................................... 354 , 371
Winders ............................................. 356
Sun Angle ........................... 663 664 , 731

Arrow ................................................ 664
Create .............................................. 664
Date ................................................. 667
Delete Shadows ................................ 664
Render Data ..................................... 668
Shadows ................................... 441 , 671
Sun Angle Specification
Dialog.............................................. 666
Sun Shadows .................................... 501
Sunlight Toggle ................................ 650
Sunrooms .......................................... 577
Supply
Gutters ............................................. 323
for Roofs ........................................... 323
Suppress Objects in 3D Views........ 633
Surface Normals ............................... 860
Surface Smoothing Angle ............... 864
Swap Views ....................................... 620
Swap Work-Reference ...................... 272
Switch
Create .............................................. 431
Current Floor/Reference Floor ............ 272
Double .............................................. 431
In circuit ............................................ 431
Place ................................................ 431
Three way ......................................... 432
Symbol
Automatic Edge Lines ........................ 863
Boundary box .................................... 871
Create .............................................. 859
Dimensions ....................................... 871
Edge lines ......................................... 863
Edit ........................................... 436 , 468
Enable resize ...................................... 92
Faces ....................................... 860 , 864
Insertion point ........................... 860 , 864
Library, electrical ............................... 433
Modify .............................................. 859
Options ............................................. 868
Origin ....................................... 860 , 864
Reset origin ...................................... 864
Resize .............................................. 872
Sides ................................................ 860
Sizing ............................................... 871
1016
Stretch Planes ................................... 872

Stretch Zones .................................... 873
Surface normals ................................ 860
Surface Smoothing Angle ................... 864
Symbol Options ................................ 868

Symbol Specification
Dialog .............................................. 880
Symbols
Sizing ............................................... 871
vs. Native Objects .............................. 591
Symmetrically Flared Stairs ............ 360
System Default Walls ....................... 156
T
Tab Key .................................................. 9
Tab Spacing ....................................... 709
Tabs
Changing .......................................... 713
Columns ............................................ 713
Easy spacing ..................................... 709
Text .................................................. 713
Take Off see Materials List
Tangent
Curved walls ..................................... 154
Make arc, edit button ......................... 154
Make Tangent button ........................... 68
Technical Support .................... 953 , 959
Template Plan.......................... 72 73 , 79
Creating .............................................. 80
Temporary File Directories .............. 102
Terms...................................................... 4
Terrain
and 3D Draw Time ............................. 500
Clear ................................................. 501
Copy ................................................. 501
Display in 3D View ............................. 500
Display in Floor Plan View .................. 499
Grow All Plants Dialog ....................... 498
Library .............................................. 583
Menu .................................................. 37
Retaining Wall ................................... 495
Sprinkler Tools .................................. 498
Convert CAD Lines to ......................... 528

Delete ............................................... 501
Import ................................................ 523
Select ................................................ 501
Terrain Elevation Tools .................... 491

Terrain Feature Specification
Dialog .............................................. 519
Terrain Feature Tools ....................... 496
Clip ................................................... 519
Height ............................................... 519
Terrain Features, Edit ....................... 503
Terrain Library ........................... 499 , 593
Terrain Modeler
3D Views ........................................... 500
Add Elevation Data .................... 491 , 502
Build Terrain .............................. 490 , 500
Building Pad Elevation ....................... 512
Clear Terrain ..................................... 501
Contour Line Smoothing ..................... 514
Contours ............................................ 514
Display Terrain .................................. 499
Elevation Lines/Splines ...................... 502
Elevation Points ................................. 491
Floor Plan View .................................. 499
Generate Terrain ................................ 500
Primary Contours ............................... 514
Properties .......................................... 491
Sun Shadows ..................................... 501
Terrain Perimeter ............................... 490
Terrain Surface Quality ...................... 512
Terrain Surface Smoothing ................. 512
Triangle Size ..................................... 512
Zooming ............................................ 499
Terrain Modifier Tools ...................... 495
Terrain Perimeter .............................. 490
Edit ................................................... 502
Terrain Properties
Clip ................................................... 512
Terrain Specification Dialog ............ 511
Terrain Toolbar Configuration ... 22 , 490
Text..................................................... 704
Arrows .............................................. 705
Auto Height, Width ............................ 714
CAD ................................................. 704
Column spacing ................................ 709
Convert Schedules to ........................ 935
Copy ................................................. 709
Create .............................................. 704
Cut ................................................... 709
Display ............................................. 706
Edit ................................................... 707
Hyperlinks ......................................... 714
in Layout ........................................... 908
Layer ................................................ 706
Line With Arrow ................................. 705
Macros ............................................. 709
Move ................................................ 707
Paste ................................................ 709
Reshape ........................................... 707
Restrictions ....................................... 704
Select ............................................... 706
Spacing for columns .......................... 709
Spell Check ...................................... 811
Tabs ................................................. 713
Text and Page Setup
Preferences ...................................... 99
Text Defaults ............................... 89 , 714
Text Files ........................................... 523
Text Specification Dialog ................ 711
Text Tab ............................................. 711
Texture Filters................................... 117
Texture Painter ......................... 625 , 651
Texture Tab ....................................... 611
Textures
Add new ........................................... 834
Apply to items ................................... 611
Apply to materials .............................. 611
Create .............................................. 834
Definition .......................................... 656
Filters ............................................... 117
View ................................................. 611
Textures Library ............................... 593
Thick lines ........................................... 96
Thickness
Bottom plate, wall .............................. 386
1017
Index
Terrain Breaks ................................... 494
Terrain Data
Headers ............................................ 389

Stud ......................................... 386 , 391
Top plate, wall ................................... 386
Third Party Libraries ........................ 564

Threshold
For exterior door ............................... 814
Threshold Lines ................................ 193
Thumbnail, Save ................................. 74
Thumbnails
Enable .............................................. 101
Size .................................................. 101
Tile Surrounds .................................. 542
Tiling Views ....................................... 619
Time Log Dialog................................ 808
Time Tracker ..................................... 808
Time Tracker Preferences ............... 109
Title Block ................................. 906 907
Create .............................................. 907
Toe Kick Height/Depth ..................... 476
Tool, Gable/Roof Line ...................... 313
Toolbar Configurations...................... 21
Toolbar Tab ......................................... 19
Toolbars........................................... 5 , 17
Add Tools ........................................... 18
All views ............................................. 19
Child Buttons ...................................... 18
Customize ........................................... 18
Delete Tools ....................................... 19
Edit ..................................................... 65
Font .................................................... 97
Parent Buttons .................................... 18
Restore ............................................... 23
Vector and render ............................... 62
Tools
3D .................................................... 625
Box ................................................... 745
Cabinet ............................................. 458
CAD Drawing .................................... 726
Chief Architects ................................... 23
Curved Wall ...................................... 133
Dimension ......................................... 682
Door ................................................. 210
Edit ................................................... 436
Electrical ........................................... 430
1018
Floor ................................................. 268

Framing ............................................ 378
Menu .................................................. 53
Render .............................................. 650
Roof .................................................. 287
Slab .................................................. 279
Stair .................................................. 338
Wall .................................................. 131
Zoom ................................................ 615
Tools Tab ............................................. 18

Top Chord .......................................... 393
Top Plates
Number ............................................. 386
Thickness .......................................... 386
Transfer Plans ..................................... 84
Transform/Replicate
Object Dialog ................................. 794
Transom Window see Windows, stacked
Transparent Color............................. 836
Tread Width, Maintain ...................... 354
Treads
Lock width ......................................... 369
Maintain Width .................................. 370
Overhang .......................................... 371
Perpendicular to Flare........................ 362
Retain number in section ................... 370
Thickness .......................................... 371
Treatments Tab ................................. 263
Trim
Fence ............................................... 800
Trim and Extend ................................ 799
Trim Objects ........................ 67 , 798 799
Trimmer .............................................. 387
Truss Base ......................................... 413
Truss Base Specification
Dialog .............................................. 422
Truss Details ..................................... 412
Truss Labels ...................................... 412
Truss Spacing ................................... 394
Trusses ...................................... 322 , 393
Attic trusses ...................................... 409
Bottom chord ..................... 393 , 425 , 428
Ceiling trusses ................................... 408
Trusses Tab ....................................... 393

Two Stretch Planes ........................... 873
Type Tab ............................................. 881
U
Undo
Files ................................................... 77
Preferences ...................................... 101
Undo zoom ....................................... 616
Unit Conversion Preferences ..........

Units
Changing ..........................................
Dimensions, show imperial ................
Dimensions, show metric ...................
Imperial ............................................
Imperial dimensions ...........................
Metric ...............................................
Unlocked Landings ..........................
Unrestricted Movement....................
Untitled Plan
105
696
696
696
696
696
696
346
343
see New Plan
Update Cross
Sections/Elevations ...................... 913
Update Templates ............................... 80
Use Existing Roof ............................. 248
Use Framing Reference ........... 384 , 391
Use Mesh ........................................... 277
User Specified Walls ........................ 156
Utility Rooms .................................... 192
V
Valley ................................................. 495
Vector Cameras ................................ 624
Vector Floor Camera ........................ 626
Vertical Rafter Depth........................ 424
View Angle Dialog ............................ 631
View Direction Tools .................. 63 , 631
Viewing Images ................................. 832
Views
Cascade ........................................... 618
Virtual Graph Paper............................ 91
Visual CAD Snaps............................... 91
1019
Index
Copy ......................................... 408 , 410

Create ............................................... 408
Delete ............................................... 410
Detail ................................................ 412
Double truss ...................................... 419
Drop Hip truss .................... 421 , 425 , 428
End truss ................................... 425 , 428
Energy heel ....................................... 426
Floor and Ceiling ................................ 408
Floor trusses ...................................... 408
Girder ................................................ 421
Hip ............................................ 417 421
Hip jack ............................................. 418
Hip systems, comparisons .................. 421
Hip, step down ................................... 417
Hip, subgirder .................................... 418
Jack .................................................. 418
Kingpost, require ................................ 393
Label ................................................. 412
Labels, move as group ....................... 412
Laying out .......................................... 408
Locking .............................................. 427
Mix with rafters, preparation ............... 381
Mixing with standard framing .............. 413
Move ................................................. 410
Move labels as group ......................... 412
Raise off plate ................................... 426
Reduce gable .................................... 426
Require kingpost ........................ 425 , 428
Roof .................................................. 408
Scissor .............................................. 422
Scissors ............................................ 422
Step down hip ............................ 417 , 421
Sub girder .......................................... 421
Subgirder hip ..................................... 418
Top chord .......................... 393 , 425 , 428
Truss Base ........................................ 413
Update .............................................. 410
Webbing ............ 393 , 409 , 425 , 427 428
Webbing specification ........................ 427
Volume
Materials ........................................... 608
VRML ..................................................
Export ...............................................
Images .............................................
Textures ...........................................
VRML use of Texture and
Image Files .....................................
841
840
841
841
841
W
Walk Line ........................................... 354
Displaying in Floor Plan View ............. 371
Walkthrough Recording Tools ........ 838
Walkthroughs ............................ 636 , 838
Play .................................................. 838
Record .............................................. 838
Show ................................................ 838
Wall
Framing ............................................ 378
Wall Assemblies ............................... 156
Wall Bridging .................................... 746
Wall Cabinets .................................... 458
Wall Corner Specification
Dialog.............................................. 444
Wall Defaults ............................... 90 , 130
Wall Defaults Dialog ......................... 181
Wall Definitions
Exporting .......................................... 160
Importing .......................................... 161
Wall Elevation ................................... 624
Wall Elevation Tool .......................... 625
Wall Framing Details ................ 386 , 400
Wall Framing Members,
Drawing .......................................... 401
Wall Hatch Specification
Dialog.............................................. 180
Wall Height Specification
Dialog.............................................. 152
Wall Heights ...................................... 147
Wall Layer .......................................... 181
1020
Maximum .......................................... 181

Wall Materials .................................... 187
Wall Offset
Handles ............................................ 153
Wall Specification Dialog......... 166 , 289
for Pony Walls ................................... 173
Wall Tab ............................................. 385
Wall Tools .......................................... 131
Wall Tools, Curved ........................... 133
Wall Type Definitions Dialog ........... 157
Wall Types Tab .................................. 172
Wall/Railing/Fencing Defaults ......... 181
Walls ............................... 2 , 129 , 167 168
Accurate move .................................. 146
Adjust Wall Angle .............................. 140
Adjusting in 3D .................................. 151
Aligning ............................................. 153
Aligning between floors ...................... 167
Aligning end-to-end ........................... 154
Allowed angles .................................. 140
Angled, compound in 3D .................... 165
Attic wall ........................................... 167
Back clip to edit ................................. 151
Bottom plate ...................................... 386
Bottom plates, number ....................... 386
Breaking in 3D ................................... 165
Center handle, curved ........................ 149
Centering footings (2 methods) .......... 172
Changing into railings ........................ 166
Co-linear ........................................... 154
Combining walls ................................ 153
Compound angles .............................. 165
Connect curved to straight ................. 152
Connect Walls ................................... 153
Connect, edit button .......................... 152
Connecting ........................................ 152
Creating foundation wall ..................... 171
Curved .............................................. 141
Curved, align between floors .............. 154
Curved, center point .......................... 141
Curved, concave ................................ 162
Curved, how to draw .......................... 141
Curved, jumpy when drawing .............. 141
Curved, lock center button ................. 148
Curved, locked center type ................. 148
Room Def (invisible) ..........................

Same Wall Type ................................
Selecting in cross section .......... 143 ,
Selecting in Floor Plan View ..............
Setting up for 3D editing ....................
Show Lower Ponywall ........................
Solid railings .....................................
Specifying Foundation .......................
Splitting ............................................
Step foundation markers ....................
Stepped ............................................
Straight/curved wall combinations ......
Stud spacing .....................................
Stud thickness ........................... 386 ,
Top plate ..........................................
Wall Coverings .......................... 178 ,
167
140
151
143
151
182
174
171
139
182
151
145
386
391
386
204
Walls In Section/Elevation .............. 143
Web Support ..................................... 957
Webbing ..................................... 425 , 428
Horizontal span ................................. 427
Wedge ................................................ 579
Winders
Create .............................................. 356
Winders, Creating ............................. 356
Window Defaults ................. 90 , 231 , 265
Window Levels .................................. 237
Window Menu ...................................... 59
Window Schedule Example ............. 935
Window Shutters .............................. 260
Window Specification Dialog .......... 249
Window Types ................................... 232
CAD Detail ........................................ 759
Windows ................................................ 8
Arch top (ISD) ................................... 879
Bay ................................................... 232
Bay Trimmers .................................... 388
Bay, gable roof .................................. 249
Bay, roof over ................................... 247
Bench seat ........................................ 247
Blocked ............................................ 219
Bow .................................................. 233
Bow, gable roof ................................. 249
Bow, roof over ................................... 247
Box, gable roof .................................. 249
1021
Index
Curved, maintain center location ......... 151

Curved, meeting straight .................... 152
Curved, normal type ........................... 148
Curved, resize handle ........................ 151
Curved, which type to use .................. 145
Deleting hatch .................................... 138
Dimensioning ..................................... 159
Displaying length ............................... 182
Drawing ............................................. 139
Editing ............................................... 147
Editing in 3D ...................................... 151
Editing wall attributes ......................... 143
Exterior ............................................. 167
Exterior and Interior ........................... 133
Fireplace in ................................ 549 , 924
Fix Connections ................................. 153
Fix connections .................................. 153
Flip layers .................................. 167 168
Footing width and height .................... 172
Foundation ........................................ 133
Foundation thickness ......................... 172
Foundation wall .................................. 166
Framing detail .................................... 400
Handle, extend ................................... 150
Handles ............................................. 154
Hatching ............................................ 138
Height change ................................... 147
High Shed/Gable ................................ 170
Importing wall layer definitions ............ 161
Interior, fireplace in ............................ 549
Invisible ..................................... 135 , 167
Invisible (Room Def) ........................... 167
Knee Wall .......................................... 170
Layers, exporting ............................... 160
Layers, importing ............................... 161
Moving .............................. 144 , 152 , 154
Moving by dimensions ........................ 146
No Locate .......................................... 167
No locate ........................................... 167
No Room Def ..................................... 167
Offset handles ................................... 154
Pony Wall .................................. 134 , 151
Raked ............................................... 151
Resizing ............................................ 147
Restoring top and bottom heights ........ 152
Retain attic wall ................................. 167
Retain framing ................................... 168
Retaining Wall ........................... 132 , 495
Box, roof over ................................... 247

Cascade ........................................... 618
Casement ......................................... 250
Center along a wall ............................ 242
Center to sink .................................... 242
Centering .......................................... 242
Copy, multiple ................................... 239
Copy, single ...................................... 239
Copying ............................................ 239
Corner, special .................................. 234
Curved, in curved walls ...................... 242
Custom Muntins ................................ 243
Defining Openings (ISD) ............ 878 879
Deleting ............................................ 239
Displaying ......................................... 238
Divided lites ...................................... 259
Double sill ......................................... 388
Edit from ........................................... 634
Gable over ........................................ 219
Headers ............................................ 389
In curved walls .................................. 242
Layers see Window Levels
Levels ............................................... 234
Library .............................................. 233
Lites see Lites
Match roof ........................................ 262
Moving .............................................. 240
Muntin bars ....................................... 259
Muntins ............................................. 243
Recessed .......................................... 252
Recessed to sheathing layer .............. 253
Replicate .......................................... 239
Resizing ........................................... 241
Rough opening .................................. 387
Schedules ......................................... 928
Select, individual ............................... 238
Select, multiple ................................. 238
Selecting .......................................... 238
Sill thickness ..................................... 388
Sliding .............................................. 250
1022
Stacked ............................................. 234

Trimmers ........................................... 387
Windows and Doors, Gable

Dormer Over ................................... 318
Windows in Curved Walls ................ 242
Windows Library ............... 233 , 583 , 593
Windows MetaFile see WMF
Windows Metafiles ............................ 837
Wiring Schematics, Creating........... 432
WLK File
Convert to AVI File ............................ 839
WMF
Export ............................................... 837
Working plan ..................................... 270
Working With the Materials
List .................................................. 939
WP Outlet ........................................... 430
Z
Zoom................................................... 615
Closer ............................................... 615
Extents ............................................. 616
F6 key to fill window .......................... 616
Fill window/Fill Screen ....................... 616
General overview ............................... 615
Mouse wheel ..................................... 616
Perspective views .............................. 633
Undo ................................................. 616
Wheel Mouse ........................................ 5
Zoom Tools ........................................ 615
Zoom Window .................................... 621
Zooming in Perspective Views ........ 633
Zooming With the Mouse Wheel ..... 616

Reference Manual PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Reference Manual PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Chief Architect 10.

Professional Design & Drafting Software

Copyright 2005 by Advanced Relational Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.

Chapter 2: Menus and Toolbar Buttons

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chief Architects Tools ..................................................................... 23

Chapter 3: File Management

Chapter 4: Defaults & Preferences

Preferences Dialog .............................................................................94

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Layer Painter ...................................................................................124

Chapter 6: Walls, Railings, & Fencing

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Select Same and Load Same for Rooms ........................................ 201

Centering Windows .........................................................................242

Chapter 10: Floors

Chapter 11: Foundations

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Rebuilding Monolithic Slab Foundations...................................... 280

Chapter 12: Roofs

Automatic Rebuild of Floors & Ceilings .......................................319

Chapter 13: Stairs

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Other Special Railings & Stairs ..................................................... 364

Chapter 14: Framing

Chapter 15: Trusses

Chapter 16: Electrical

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Adjusting the Height ....................................................................... 436

Chapter 17: Trim & Moldings

Chapter 18: Cabinets

Chapter 19: Terrain

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Editing Terrain Features ................................................................ 503

Chapter 20: Roads & Sidewalks

Chapter 21: Other Objects

Chapter 22: Architectural Blocks

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 23: Libraries

Moldings and Profiles......................................................................581

Chapter 24: Materials

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 25: Zoom & View Tools

Chapter 26: Vector Views

Chapter 27: Render Views

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Defining Light Types....................................................................... 665

Chapter 28: Raytracing

Chapter 29: Dimensions

Chapter 30: Text

Chapter 31: Callouts & Markers

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 32: CAD Objects

Chapter 33: CAD Editing Tools

Editing Arcs .....................................................................................766

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 34: Advanced Design & Editing

Chapter 35: Pictures, Images, & Movies

Chapter 36: DXF/DWG

Chapter 37: Create Symbol Wizard

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 38: Printing & Plotting